enr

..
osavrES

RCA Ka

r e:
.
5n
Sd
'i

e M5
3ase'Se.'d .
1

ecev

Sc*.,,t,see 5.4 sen

Coripan
rq p g Z ia a6 5 ce
.i CáE35gs`óYFe

www.americanradiohistory.com
 RCA Victor

SERVICE NOTES
For

1923 - 1928

RCA Radiolas
RCA Loudspeakers
Victor Radio Receivers
Victor Radio - Electrolas
Miscellaneous Service Information

Service Division

RCA Victor Company, Inc.

Camden, N. J., U. S. A.
 INTRODUCTION
The Service Notes and Data Sheets contained herein are

for the radio receivers and phonograph combination instruments

sold by the Radio Corporation of America and the Victor
Talking Machine Company during the years from 1923 to
1928. These booklets have been compiled for RCA Victor
Distributors and Dealers for use by their personnel in

conjunction with the servicing of the instruments listed.

Proper operation of any radio instrument is dependent

upon correct service methods and replacement of defective
parts. We earnestly recommend that you follow the instructions
given, use the equipment recommended and replace defective
parts with Genuine RCA Victor Factory Tested Replacement
Parts. Your Distributors will be glad to obtain for you any
part or service equipment described in this book and give
you any possible assistance in the performance of your work.
 CONTENTS
The Booklets and Data Sheets Listed are Contained
in this Volume in the Order Indicated

INSTRUCTIONS AND CIRCUIT RCA Radiola 25 - - -

DIAGRAMS RCA Radiola 25 and 28 A. C. -
RCA Radiola AR (Radio Frequency Amplifier) - RCA Radiola 26, 24 Super -Heterodyne and
RCA Radiola RT (Antenna Coupler) - - - Super VIII - - -
RCA Radiola RC Schematic Diagram and Battery RCA Radiola 28
Connections - - - - - RCA Radiola 30
RCA Aeriola, Sr., Schematic Diagram - - RCA Radiola 30-A -
RCA Radiola RS (Regenerative Receiver and RCA Radiola 30-A D. C., 32 D. C. and 104 D. C.
Amplifier) - - - - - - - RCA Radiola 32 -
RCA Radiola AC (2 -Stage Audio Amplifier) - RCA Radiola 41 -
RCA Radiola, Sr., and Type AC Amplifier RCA Radiola 41 D. C. -
Schematic Diagram and Battery Connections RCA Loudspeaker 100 -
RCA Radiola RS and Balanced Amplifier Sche- RCA Loudspeaker 100-A -
matic Diagram and Battery Connections RCA Loudspeaker 103
Model AR -1300 Radio Receiver - - RCA Loudspeaker 104
Model AA -1400 Detector Amplifier - RCA Loudspeaker 105
Model AA -1520 Radio Frequency Amplifier - RCA Loudspeaker 106 - -
RCA Radiola II - - RCA Power Amplifier AP -935 - -
RCA Radiola III - RCA "B" Battery Eliminator AP -937 -
RCA Radiola III -A - Use of "B" Eliminator with Super VIII
RCA Radiola Balanced Amplifier - - - - RCA "B" Eliminator AP -1080 - -
Radiolas III, III -A and Balanced Amplifier RCA Short -Wave Receiver AR -1145 -
Using Radiotrons UX-199 and UX-120 - -
RCA Radiola IV VICTOR RADIO RECEIVER AND
RCA Radiola V - - -
RCA Radiola VI - -
ELECTROLA SERVICE NOTES
RCA Radiola VII - .11 Victor Model 7-1 (Alhambra I) - - - -
RCA Radiola VII -B - - Victor Model 7-2 (Alhambra II) and 9-1 (Florenza)
RCA Radiola Super -VIII - Victor Model 7-3 and 7-30 -
Use of UR -556 Adaptor - Victor Model 7-10 - - -
RCA Radiola IX - -
Victor Model 7-11 and 7-26 -
RCA Radiola X - - -
Victor Model VE -8-60 - -
RCA Radiola Regenoflex - Victor Model 9-2 (Borgia II) -
RCA Radiola Grand - - Victor Model 9-3 (Borgia I) -

BATTERY CONNECTIONS Victor Model 9-15 - - -

Victor Model 9-16 -
RCA Radiola Super -Heterodyne (Semi -Portable) Victor Model 9-18 -
Battery Connections - - - Victor Model 9-25 - - -
RCA Radiola 20 Battery Connections Victor Model 9-40 (Borgia) -
RCA Radiola 24 Battery Connections Victor Models 9-54 and 9-56 -
RCA Radiola 25 Battery Connections Victor Model 9-55 - - -
RCA Radiola 26 Battery Connections Victor Model 10-51 -
RCA Radiola 28 Battery Connections Victor Model 10-69 -
RCA RADIOLA AND LOUDSPEAKER Victor Model 10-70 - - -
Victor Model 12-1 (Cromwell)
SERVICE NOTES Victor Model 12-2 (Tuscany) -
RCA Radiola 16 - Victor Model 12-15 - - -
RCA Radiola 17 - 11.
Victor Model 12-25 - - -
RCA Radiola 18 - - - - Victor Model 15-1 (Hyperion) -
RCA Radiola 18 D. C. and 51 D. C. Victor Model 10-35 - -
RCA Radiola 20 - Victor Model E-35 - -
SUCCESS IN RADIO SERVICE WORK
The most valuable asset of any business is GOOD WILL. And
Good Will is nothing more or less than public confidence in you
and your business; confidence to the point that your customers
are willing and glad to recommend you and your services to ac-
quaintances and friends.
That kind of Good Will does more to build business than all
other forces combined. Three factors are involved in building Good
Will for a radio service business, in gaining the confidence of your
customers to the point that they will do a selling job for you. These
three essentials of success are:

Technical Ability
Business Methods
Parts and Test Instruments

Technical Ability. Your technical ability is reflected in the

test instruments you employ, by the appearance of your shop and
work bench, and by the "kit" that you carry into customers' homes.
Like the successful members of any of the professions, the radio service
engineer must continually study to keep up with the times.

Business Methods. Insofar as your customers are concerned

there are just two indices to your business methods: The way you
handle yourself on the job and the quality of the Parts and the Test
Instruments you use.
Contrast the picture of the two Service Men shown on this page.
Each is about to make a call. Each is a good service man, so far as
ability goes. But there the likeness ends. One has business written
all over him. One has built his success on the foundation of fair prices
for good work and highest quality parts. The other wonders why his
business is slow even though he offers "cut prices" as a result of the
Which one would you do business with? bargain replacement parts he uses.
Parts and Test Instruments. The most
tangible of the three factors essential to success in
service work are the Parts and Test Instruments used.
By these you are judged immediately and perma-
nently, as the job holds up or fails to stand up.
Parts and Test Instruments may be made in either
one of two ways. They may be built up to a standard
or down to a price. No single Part or Test Instrument
can be built both ways. It must be done either one
way or the other.

And in the long run Parts and Test Instruments

built down to a price cost you more than those built
up to a standard-cost you more in disgruntled custom-
ers, prestige and loss of GOOD WILL.

Quality pays. Hundreds of leading radio service

engineers attribute their success to their adherence to
the following pledge: The RCA Oscillator TMV-97 B, ideal for all service work

In our service work

we pledge
1. To use the highest quality materials.

2. To be thorough in all our work.

3. To handle your property with care.

4. To make reasonable promises and keep them.

An output indicator that does not

burn out, RCA Type TMV-121-A 5. To charge a fair price for our services.

BE ON THE SAFE SIDE USE GENUINE FACTORY-

TESTED RCA PARTS AND TEST INSTRUMENTS
 CHART OF FREQUENCY OR IMPEDANCE
vS.
INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITY
The Chart shown below provides a quick method of determining
several unknown factors when one or more are known. The Chart covers
a very wide range, namely, from 10 micro -henries to 100 henries induct-
ance, 10 cycles to 50,000 kilocycles, 1 ohm to 10 megohms and 1 micro-
microfarad to 10 microfarads. If, for example, one wishes to know the
capacitance to use with a 10 henry inductor to have it resonate at 50
cycles, it can be readily seen that it would be a 1 mfd. capacitor. This is
determined by finding the intersection of the vertical line representing

'
10 henries and the oblique line representing 50 cycles. The intersection
occurs at the horizontal line representing 1 mfd. The other oblique line

144
Nn/._-.
at this intersection represents the impedance at this frequency. This is
approximately 3000 ohms.
-..,...A .1/1-A
,M6.1/15,551,5155011..UV,:i-.éñ:a:.Cï.i: '_..i3éii
i..a. .. ..
.mm.{
-......ro.
,1\a'I.7at.::.Gi:1í1.IC.1/:.....Ii1IIC'I.C..\.i:../:...
. eo.e.
.:.1.:. ::4^C\.E. Vi m.'.ÍEii..11:...41.i1`\\/.VÁ r:'7.
óQi:ñi:ïº:.ï:ï i..e-.i=.i.13.ii
..I.E.:..\ß.A.1I1./70,»..\..'I%..:.I/1(.i..IfI.\.I
..¡%.
- Ì..1!C1!..:..
.
/
i'i.':...:ï.::ï ii:.ái
--':'i:i lean:
`.' ..
i:'iiwiii
-'IJi\If'.CI,
y..7Ei.\.^'1_._-LNl:7\`\Ci
-
:.'./\.i.1fIt..Nt/.`1
d.\!1r\I!O:'.4!.IIU`\.1\ .I .1!1/\I!.:.:.//
ïi, :A.41UV
'
wi ï i
.:1.\IR/
er. .
¡

' Ì'I ::I1.ICII..\!1/i!

-

!/`1.1!I17i.`:'.:'II\.11%.11

.e
VlVi\liliiLTi1M3_'21117Ít01i11921`1L1M11i1e_iSeNIC1%Ii17IMiT/171C6MIM:'.11..iC1%!/.ìICI673101/71M/i1

:":.a /i.LüI..1....
:::::::=:í:
i1 11w
= 'm::z5:éä:è::c1-
:.,......<..-i.m..r:....;
.: .
z

_W
`Ii7'/
:.l1e;0:10!i;e1,ICen2 WIVE CIM1:1;ID::102NS1NM320E1,:1:1i Ow2101liM3002E31/1
\7 11,IQi 1 1 ' 1'1
iia.i.'I/i:/I_1:I...n...
:;':ó
::sIm-::71
.:.::i.....:..,.;L..:.1,..1,..;E..:...7:....-1.1:...:...
{l'I'Ll
=:a:E::'s -= -
.If, D G.1/i_1.1
,ï.:
n_I.i/11:.::1Inl
_E: s"'sé;:: - :_:
..:.
_-
1 1i/I!1
--e =z::C:z f./
.....::..:.º.º..-...e...io..c.:...:m:.n..:::-..-....r::.:i.:./:...a.º-::::
mE:.?:

V...Ii'....2.i42G71.MI1.6i.\:122/" .i1Ci1J1,
5:= =-M....'I..'., .:«:«:.'I-...:.......m./....1'I.....:.:.:.L......... ,
..i.:.'I-......'I\'...N.....L....C.:.:_.i..-......,...a
IneU.L..11.7.11 .3%./...P.[...P..:'.:'I ...1.`7.11V./`...R7..!..:K.:..::1\`L.IC.......!1...!..::2.::...IIOL.IC
: G

i1i1:
1f11!d13Ii.4\`1111 ie..IC1m11iOIi1:./i1:Se\\II!%Ri
i/A'e3II!d\G\%1`1i1i11!il:+:e
.. . . Ga:i!Ì:!/I!ul!i.C ,

1`II .

.
'i211i31\i/LA/n121ï1iIi\11i:1\M212Wei1i1i21i1D:'/ .
.,111,,., \:1.iIi.Iilli:'Ì:1.i1.1/i.i!IIi:I\.i9i1..1./
11, `
::::civ.i:;
1
i>'é`.:;:i:s-::::'è"s :: e / 1 ..y . t1i31M%11:511i1/:1i1L':gill\`E111
!r u
ro:aL/fW-.ii:v7C9./:1ii:.ii'i.-Áü-ii.
_=- :-;-èé'- = _.-:ïl:e :-.,.
.I.EC.nLcG..iU,iìC.:é.V
i.::.?i>
...rvc11]1:«:o:.oVIa\'w.nR'A9cri.o
.-1E1`i\ai.::171....11V.:.Ì1.`.11`..1.1:.,irl.dLi:..1:.-L1i1!ii\r,iV..r/..i1..1.1/3.-/1C
i.iïóñ:%ei:: <iiów.:::i:7;:4a.:o'i .:iï;::i::i:'i:w::
'7 i.r.. Y.-ÁiC JLc.
VI`.11:.171:'K'.442311701:./\ /.\!7[e\Lp:'P./:.\!:1\`7UÌ 7...
ItE.nL.i. R". .L4íi:iiº. ,410./1.3//tì!1131
WII..1!1/1S.R(ìi.311`\./C 7r.1u4Ci.
==i%,i:':

ó.i::
i..i.i.I,i:%1.Ì.Ild.i.1.i.'Í\:'.l!nl
/
a:: i/I'1 `1 117 /4 1
:;é_
1 / P t6
K31191\`IACiO.i1.g :d'tt11!E\IEi1011O%\`17Mhi1ge irielli:.iNe\\E110403/iG04Ui1MEIINVC11\ILi10:02101/1:Uí1
p
Ì3C/1i i1/21i1':il\11$l1E111ÌMG1i1/ï1Meors21i11`1%1eVA/11i1/21/1D:SIt\Ìa1`l/llr/:\d1ii1:1:1
1' !1
`i .ln.'1111ú1!ú.dl!.I:1lÌIl!
1u 1/ MIN!
à:è:::::<<:::5:;':é:':ë'' ::?:::a _:.:':;:::::1::;_-e-::::°:E
..t..7iuíïdC-iii..1v::o2.7//7:/CI.r7ii7cr1o:?.Iln/L-uC
V.../r:.äC!-A.11V..'.1Ei1!C\r,.Vi.42t./Gì.9V...Lw:I!1\r,._9.«7.7EY/.
..I..m...i E. . 1.m..
-5.1B1.../11111,__--_
7.7.r:uu:fo:ïLi:í1.nC
`º..c1%oó .E :ó :.1 i 11 . :/1./ÌC1\Kd113bWar:.37C.

i.
u
.....1.11.511,ei. r.1ï ,$:ii 11E..E. .4.Y`..VY.137.1L11. W45/0

i
«K

7i//
E /:.7.O.p43311A1WI/Z.1!1I..:0d:1UGIIC.1!/[L\!:.:.4.1\11.7.11I/.\1/I11\

rl'\3II!/\NeI llnni\l7hUIM1 N.Cine:.iC!'dh\EilV.'021/21ihi/:e:o'_

:47. \01ICI30!21Z0%l2Iì..Ui1 _0i:onIMIIC!ilCII2
%7á1,1i1..1

D:e\1ig1I\E/IMa/1iiiD2li1':
., 'iiiiói:::iiiïïúì.=íéöi ' 1': ' r:::::
_.11.ul I,I,LJ:le.r: 1 C-
,
21a10E%IIÌN/gDi1P:1iÌ/Ì; ZaNal`E111Ì3Á1i11:1i1L'ea15/1\`E/il
11111'I'l?¡1
67`il'/
11.1e..n.:i..i.1_1.1. u/1.
171'/ U7 `G 1
Z. ':51111..Z.
,

VIí...1.'a
:.'ii:iáºw...
.:iiiiái7:.i'.i:Gi%áïó'ii:vi'.ï%w.i
i! il:
._v7u..r.../..:.R..:7-.iìC.EC.:.Cu: í%ïiiiïii::7CL..ii:L.:':..r10f.ii:i:iii9:.q
1
.-1r11:11P:yÁr77!a.Ácai.-:...1!C1ED_w.42r:'7E:.111U-Vn.:1.!:.1:.r:.7G.1.u1..-:IaCC1.1,d

`gralsIraiffloraionirMenil : .::w.ïïº:..5:ii::i:is
D ..-;ièG3

Ì
i
' I1C.\ :`711C ,4\./ ï\t11`LUCÌ/.C.N7[É71! 332 .3i%6\11`7U1

::
i111!111.30
ICIÌ/`GID41n `G1. IIÌ l':aC1ll/EGIÌ
n',41Gll1E/ieÌ 0`IIIunÌm\/3111/
-:
.. "lnitiIli!IIi:41:5í1ui/:i02/ie:OIi!1IirahÌ!il:a'1'.i!i!`Iìliíp ..1,i.... i......
-_ /'11'1i .11
eGNd11:'E1 il 1
,

:
s:::':::;:==:a1::::::::=:::::;;
:.:.5: Ii.'I-<.1c,1...I.. _ _ -
i .:.11.:.:.K../i..:C.....0
-. e1..e.:....:.?:...II1:.-r.a1'.:.11: ......1.-..11..l'7.C9`...C....:..:---
upu../n ,i.a1 . n1.
:
.::::::::;::.:.:'¡::3:3:::.1:::::::::SS:C,::;'5:

. c1.e..,..'7:.. . .' :n
,/.... -.-:::éEò
,.:..:.:'...,...:1.:..._..i.:

. :1an7u1.i
s::...;: _ ... ": ;e r.

.Wi1.6;AC1201E211Z10421210Ilil:2i
in1on 1....,..:.137...IE..4
.. /:.:E.1/.... ... ./..''s .... . .5...1 ........
u!1,!u. ..
.::.130..,E11:I. a. L..11u7w
..
.1
.vI ^:1n ..'r_L..nc7w ..!Inn!a_n/. 1317,1
, o'eN\Ied\\íilieel/9GMin1:eSe743111/\0i11%0/1i1ì!Cí1:ee.\nCe/1117
p ¡ 9!!ii:l/iißillli:;1iñld:.Iillll:l:al!i5:!Er'!
I.:'ie711a11IC1Ì3/11:112P1L'Z O\1`,ll\`!/NÌ14/1Ii11:1iiÌ
I I'!'I '.e\`1al`!%ilÌM/11111aO
\v1 I U r4e.''\Ì1a1Eln v1
ï : w .i:i:%iiÏï i. .J -i:1 a uï
/ v }..,.r.:
!II1:.15VEC:q
, l'7-4.' r.111../ 13/"171 U..\/4.1..5.t11/4-'.5.13,/ 14-C111..1.. r.111./13,.
E.i
V.:.1.`111.AU:.1'.71../1V.:..i.!CNL....0.1.1.11:..V1i1`C1\b.D r.%E1A.11V.,:..1:i1!C1;1.
+wE 5..111
u %1I 1.1z.4r11 ii:
,
.
'
-. ,
...E.1.1/I.6 I/. ...I
.

.:' ..
.13
. .

-E'ï
i1 11 5.-..'I
Ii 1.114U11...E.11.41.. 1
. 14 nu.ni
.
E/.U- 1i1 . .4 d.11Ii11
111.E1.141..`1:.I.I 711 1..E..141.. .-

ICGi.?
/, . '

/.11
, MgealiUii11:e.'.11UC1%WEIfflge%`1iÙS1FilMMII3ü!inin1lMYdE11ìi11i1ZZ _.*1ì\ICeliNgïlÍ`1i11!.I".il

55,04,
+..4 1410..4
1
ÌM612:1/i1:1'i1.a11.'IIEIieÌá/GiD511i1:1'ir.\i21!1CIÌ311d1i1i1'i:l1i;ItE11Ì31`/1ii1/il"
:1iki0li!IIi;%15;.4!21111
J I I .,,
4.4.41-4
. , . ..>..,
p11/r4
, ,
' ' 10.1004.4 l , . >' /4 . N
..4
. ,
/NO(ICTANCC -
lediEil:i!li1:110:1ÌI2liil0Eilli!IIi: iS:iN!iiliii!IIi4 ,
 RCA Full Range Test Oscillator
Type TMV-97-B

Front View Rear View of Chassis

The RCA Full Range Type TMV-97-B Test Oscillator is a modulated R. F. oscillator which supersedes
the Type TMV-97-A. New features are a wider frequency range, an improved calibrated tuning dial (reading
in frequency) and a direct -reading range switch. All older features such as small compact size, light weight,
self-contained batteries, etc., of the Type TMV-97-A are retained.
The frequency range extends continuously from 90 K. C. to 25,000 K. C. (3300-12 meters) and is
divided into eight bands. This covers all intermediate, broadcast, police and short-wave frequency line-up
points of all makes of receivers. An eight -position range switch provides for the selection of any desired band.
An attenuator (output control) gives a means of adjusting the output to any level. This is very important in
modern receivers, due to the increasing practice of combining the automatic volume control with other tubes.
Of special interest to amateurs and experimenters is the simplicity with which the modulation may be
eliminated. This may be done by the use of a special adapter in the modulator socket. The oscillator then may
be used as a heterodyne oscillator for short-wave superheterodyne receivers or for heterodyning the I. F.
frequency of all -wave receivers to permit reception of pure CW signals.

SPECIFICATIONS
Gecvrt -A tuned-grid, plate -modulated circuit is used, FREQUENCY RANGE -90 K. C.-25,000 K. C. by eight bands.
which gives good stability over a wide range of voltage and The Range Switch is located on the front panel and marked
climatic conditions. The output is modulated 50% at 400 directly in frequency.
cycles. OUTPUT-Two binding posts on the front panel, together
with an attenuator, give an easy means of connecting and
RADIOTRONs-Two Radiotrons RCA -30 are used, one as adjusting the output.
an R. F. oscillator and one as an A. F. modulator.
DIAL-Variable vernier dial adjustable from 6:1 to 20:1
BATTERIES REQUIRED-One 2234 volt "B" battery and one speed reduction. The dial glass has been made thicker so that
434 volt "C" battery are used. The "C" batteryprovides the indicator line is very close to the dial, thus avoiding a
filament power for the Radiotrons, the filaments of whichare possible parallax.
connected in series. CALIBRATION-The dial is cali-
SIZE-Height 8% inches (in- brated directly in frequency to an
cluding raised handle), case alone accuracy of ±3%. Complete in-
634 inches, width 9% inches, depth
4% inches.
WEIGHT -5 lbs., including
Net Price $2950 dividual calibration may be ob-
tained at an additional cost of
$5.00.
batteries. (WITH RADIOTRONS-LESS BATTERIES)
CASE-The entire oscillator is
SWITCH-A toggle -type operat- Order Stock No. 9050 enclosed in a black wrinkle -finished
ing switch for turning the oscillator aluminum case provided with a
"on" and "off" is mounted on the leather handle.
front panel.
 RCA Tools and Accessories
The following tools and accessories are useful for servicing Radio Receivers, Combinations and Short -Wave
Instruments of all types and manufacture.

Alignment Tool Tuning Wand

Stock No. 4160 Net Price $0.60 Stock No. 6679 Net Price $1.10
The Stock No. 4160 Alignment Tool is a bakelite shaft The Stock No. 6679 Tuning Wand is a special alignment
combination screwdriver and socket wrench. The matai screw- tool which makes possible the checking of alignment in all -
driver bit is so shaped that the increase in capacity caused by wave receivers without disturbing the adjustment of the
its touching a trimmer screw is offset by the reduction in trimmer capacitors. The tool consists of a bakelite rod having
inductance caused by its shape. This is very important when a brass cylinder at one end and a special finely divided iron
making adjustments on all -wave receivers where the screw- core at the other end. Inserting the brass cylinder into a coil
driver must be inserted through the end of the coil. The socket lowers its inductance, while inserting the iron increases the
end fits the main tuning capacitor trimmer adjustment screws inductance. From this it is evident that before adjusting
used on numerous RCA Victor Receivers. The bakelíce shaft trimmers, the adjustment may be checked by inserting each end
is 7" diameter, which gives entrance to 3" holes, used on of the wand into the coil. Proper adjustment is evidenced by
older model Radiola receivers. a reduction in output with either end of the wand inserted into
the coil.
Alignment Wrench Knurled Nut Wrench

Stock No. 7065 Net Price $0.50

Stock No. 10982 Net Price $1.40
The Stock No. 7065 Alignment Wrench is a combination
screwdriver and alligator jaw end wrench. The metal screw- The Stock No. 10982 Knurled Nut Wrench is a special
driver bit is shaped so that it will have a minimum effect on wrench designed for tightening or removing the knurled nuts
the alignment of thé set when it touches a trimmer screw. such as are used with toggle type switches. These nuts are
The end wrench is suitable for adjusting trimmer screws that ordinarily impossible to remove or tighten without marring.
are accessible only from the side. The shaft is of bakelite, The wrench will hold a nut from " to j4j" diameter. The
742" diameter and the overall length is 54".
overall length is 834".

Riveting Punch Off -Set Screwdrivers

Stock No. 10987 Net Price $0.50 Stock No. 3064 Stock No. 2930
The Stock No. 10987 Riveting Punch is a special metal Net Price $0.50 Net Price $0.50
punch for use with a riveting anvil. The punch may be used
with the rivets usually used on radio receivers and permits the The Stock Nos. 3064 and 2930 Off-Set Screwdrivers are
service man to make a factory type repair, instead of using useful for making adjustments to remote control units and
machine screws to replace rivets. The punch is Vie" in diameter other small screws that are inaccessible with an ordinary
and 53/2'" long. screwdriver. The No. 3064 screwdriver is 2"
long while
No. 2930 has an overall length of 4V".
Riveting Anvil
Socket Wrench

Stock No. 10988 Net Price $0.70

Stock No. 10983 Net Price $1.80
The Stock No. 10988 Off-Set Riveting Anvil is a special
anvil that permits riveting in places ordinarily inaccessible. It The Stock No. 10983 Socket Wrench is a special flexible
is to be used in conjunction with a riveting punch such as end socket wrench designed for adjusting the alignment
Stock No. 10987. The Anvil is efs" in diameter and »V screws of the 1929 and 1930 Victor Receivers, Models R-32,
long. R-35, etc. The overall length is 8e".

www.americanradiohistory.com
 Radiola A R
Radio Frequency Amplifier

INTRODUCTION
Preface-The RADIOLA AR is a three -step Additional Equipment-The following additional
equipment is necessary for the satisfactory operation
radio frequency amplifier designed to be used with
the Radiola RA tuner and DA detector -amplifier.
It will so increase the sensitivity of the above com-
of the RADIOLA AR: -
3 Radiotron model UV 201 vacuum tubes
bination that reception may be accomplished over 1 6-volt storage battery

long distances with a loop antenna. If very great 3 or 4, 22% -volt "B" batteries
range is desired, an aerial may be used when many Suitable tuner and detector. preferably Radiol. s
stations not previously heard will be received. RT and DA
APPLICATIONS
General-The RADIOLA AR radio frequency
amplifier is one of a series of similar units: Radiola
RA, Regenerative Tuner; Radiola RT, Antenna
Coupler; and Radiola DA, Detector Amplifier.
It is designed to be used with the other units in the
various combinations described in this booklet.
With Radiolas RT, DA and Loop-Fig. 1 shows
the arrangement of Radiolas RT, AR and DA with
a loop. This arrangement will be found excellent
where too great a range is not desired. The di-
rectional properties of the loop will greatly assist in
eliminating interference from nearby stations while
the radio frequency amplification will make pos-
sible the reception of signals from relatively distant
stations.
When using a loop, a condenser is the only thing
required to tune the antenna circuit. Therefore,
only the condenser of Radiola RT is used. Con-
RADIOLA AR nections should be made as shown in Fig. 1.
With Radiolas RA, DA and Loop-In case Ra-
diola RA is available, it may he used in place of
Radio Frequency Amplification-The advantage Radiola RT. The connections will be as shown in
of radio frequency amplification lies in the fact that Fig. 1, except that the "Tickler" (lowest two) bind-
a signal that is too weak to operate a detector ing posts on Radiola RA will be idle.
satisfactorily may be amplified while still at radio With Radiola RC and Loop-When Radiolas RA
frequency until it is strong enough. This enables and DA are available in the form of Radiola RC,
the reception of many stations that are so far away the connections will be similar to those shown in
that their signals are too weak to actuate a detector Fig. 3, except that the loop will be connected to
directly. Radiola RA as shown in Fig. 1. RADIOLA AR
EQUIPMENT may be placed on either side of Radiola RC and the
Standard Equipment-The RADIOLA AR, style connections arranged accordingly.
319518, consists of a complete three -step radio With Radiolas RT, RA and DA-Fig. 2 shows the
frequency amplifier ready to operate, except for best combination. It comprises a coupled circuit
tubes and batteries. with Radiolas RT and RA with radio frequency
amplification by RADIOLA AR followed by detec- OPERATION
tion and audio amplification in Radiola DA. This There are no tuned circuits in the RADIOLA AR
combination provides the selectivity of a coupled and therefore it is not necessary to readjust it except
circuit which is necessary for satisfactory operation slightly when changing wave length. There are
with radio frequency amplification. only two knobs near the lower part of the panel.
It is necessary for best results to provide more The one on the right, marked "Fil. Rheo". controls
coupling between the tuning circuits than is provided the filament current to all the tubes which are
by their variometers. To do this, use is made of permanently connected in parallel. In the "off"
the tickler winding on the Radiola RA. The antenna position, the knob is turned as far to the left as
circuit will then consist of Radiola RT and part of possible. This opens the filament circuit and the
the tickler winding of Radiola RA as shown in the rheostat should always be left in this positiori when
figure. Usually good results will be obtained with the set is not in operation. The knob on the left
the tickler at two or three divisions from "Min." marked "Potentiometer" controls the grid bias of
With Radiolas RT and RC-If Radiola RC is the first tube.
available instead of Radiolas RA and DA, the sets In operation, the tuner and detector amplifier
should be arranged as shown in Fig. 3. This is are operated as usual. The filaments of the tubes
exactly the same combination of parts as in the in the AR should be lighted to the proper brillancy.
preceding paragraph. It will be necessary to exer- If the connections have been correctly made and all
cise care in making the radio frequency connections the apparatus is in proper condition, signals may be
between Radiolas AR and RC, so that there will heard. The potentiometer controls the amplifica-
not be so much feed back that the amplifier will tion and should be adjusted to give the maximum
oscillate. If trouble of this kind is experienced, it response without permitting oscillation to take place.
is possible to stabilize the circuit by bending the After this adjustment is made, it need be changed
wires into different planes or the connections and only slightly.
stability may be improved by interchanging Radi -
olas RA and AR by making the necessary extra MAINTENANCE
holes in the cabinets. The arrangement will then With ordinary care, the RADIOLA AR should
become the same as in Fig. 2. last indefinitely. However, tubes and batteries
Miscellaneous-It is possible to use RADIOLA will have to be replaced from time to time. The
AR with other apparatus than that described filaments of vacuum tubes gradually evaporate until
above. Such uses will suggest themselves to both there is no filament left when the tubes become use-
the experimenter and experienced operator. less. Filaments also break occasionally. Useless
tubes should be replaced by new ones of the same
INSTALLATION kind.
The RADIOLA AR is au additional piece of ap- Storage batteries may be recharged when they
paratus intended for use in one of the combina- have become exhausted. Dry cells are of no value
tions previously described. Instructions for the when exhausted. Since "B" batteries are usually
proper installation and operation of the other units made up of small dry cells they must be replaced
are furnished with them. by new ones.
The binding posts at the back of the cabinet are TROUBLES
plainly marked so that no difficulty should be ex-
perienced in making connections. It is advisable In case of trouble, see that the batteries are in
to connect the filament batteries first and make sure good condition, that the tube filaments light to the
that the tubes light properly. Care must be used proper brilliancy and that all connections are tight.
to have the tight battery voltage for the tubes to be If this does not remedy the trouble, renew both
used. Radiotrons UV 201 require approximately batteries and tubes. If the trouble still persists,
5 volts which may be supplied by a 6 -volt storage call in a Service Man or a good Radio Electrician.
battery. Three or four 22 2 -volt "B" batteries
connected in series are also required. Both the ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
filament and "B" batteries may be used for the Fig. 4 is a diagram of connections of the RADI -
detector and audio frequency amplifier as well as OLA AR. The apparatus consists of three vacuum
for the radio frequency amplifier. tubes, "A" "B" and "C" coupled by the trans-
 formers "O" "P" and "Q." "D" is the potentio-
will take place on the right part
meter and "R" is the rheostat. "E" is a radio of the characteristic
curve. "R" is a rheostat in
frequency bypass condenser. the filament circuit
which controls the filament current
The signal voltage from the tuner is applied be- tubes. Condenser "E" makes to all of the
tween the grid and filament of the first tube "A". radio frequency currents to flow
it unnecessary for
through the poten-
This causes changes in the plate current of tube tiometer. Condenser "S" provides
"A" which flows through the primary "1-2" of by-pass around the "B" 1 attery. a radio frequency
transformer "O" This current induces voltage It will be seen that the output of the
in the secondary "3-4" which is applied between AR will be a radio frequency current RADIOLA
the grid and filament of the second tube "B". "Q" frequency and wave form as that of the same
is the final output transformer to the detector. flowing in the antenna but of the current
"D" is a potentiometer which controls the steady of greater amplitude.
This must then be supplied to a
voltage on the grid of tube "A" so that operation detector in order to
be made audible.

TYPE DA TYPE A R TYPE R T

GPI T ANT
+O+P
FIL GND Gn
TIC

RAT1

BAT

-A BAT
+D 7 :BAT
e1BAT
+45 OR 68
VOLTS TO
AMPLIFIERS

TO FILAMENT
6 VOLT + POS.
STORAGE BATTERY
+22 VOLTS
TO DETECTOR
3 22 VOLT B- BATTERIES

Fig. 1-Radiolas RT-AR-DA

TYPE DA TYPE A R TYPE RA TYPE RT

INSULATING
BUSHING

PROTECTIVE DEVICE
ANTENNA
DOWN LEAD

TO
FILAMENT

+45 OR 68 VOLTS
TO AMPLIFIERS
GROUND ON
8 VOLT + POS. WATER PIPE
3 224 VOL/ STORAGE BATTERY
6 -BATTERIES

Fig. 2-Radiolas RT-RA-AR-DA

 TYPE A fi TYPE R C TYPE RT

INSULATING
BUSHING

PROTECTIVE DEVICE ANTENNA

DOWN LEAD

TO J
FILAMENT
+221- TO DETECTOR

+ POS.
GROUND ON
WATER PIPE

3 22r2VOLT
8 -BATTERIES
Fig. 3-Radiolas RT-RC-AR

O ® ® ® ® O
GRID
IL J. 1,1 GRID

FIL Q II- Q Flt_ ONO

Q +A -8 BAT

Q -A BAT

0 + B BAT

Fig. 4-Diagram of Connections of Radiola AR

 R
T
Radiola
Antenna Coupler
PREFACE DESCRIPTION
The RADIOLA RT is an adjustable series The RADIOLA RT antenna coupler consists
circuit consisting of a variometer and a variable of a tuning unit similar to that of the Radiola RA
condenser similar to those used in the Radiola RA, regenerative tuner. It is mounted in a polished
regenerative tuner. It is built for use with the Radi- mahogany cabinet of the same size and general
ola RA to make a coupled circuit but may also be appearance as the other units of this series and is
used with the Radiola AR radio frequency amplifier intended for use with them. Three binding posts
in ways that will be described later in this booklet. are located at the rear of the cabinet and make it
The advantage of a coupled circuit is the greater possible to use either the condenser or the vario -
selectivity attained over that of a single circuit. meter separately or both in either parallel or series
This will be appreciated most by those desiring to connection.
receive signals from a distant station when another A condenser, style 363386, is furnished with
nearby station is operating on nearly the same the RADIOLA RT. This condenser is made to
wave length. The coupled circuit will make it fit on the back of the Radiola RA tuner between
possible to selectively receive the distant station. the antenna and ground posts to complete the tun-
ing circuit. It is of such a value that the wave-
EQUIPMENT length range of the Radiola RA will be correct.
Standard Equipment-The standard equipment
furnished under the name of RADIOLA RT antenna
coupler consists of :
COMBINATIONS
1. Antenna coupler, Type RT Radiolas RT and RC-This is the best com-
1. Condenser, style 363386 bination for general use. It provides a coupled
Additional Equipment-The following addition- circuit to give selectivity and a regenerative circuit
to give sensitivity. A front view of this combina-
-
al equipment will be necessary to make a coupled
circuit receiver:
1. Radiola RC receiving set or its equiva-
tion is shown in Fig. 1, with the RADIOLA RT
at the left. Fig. 2 shows a rear view to indicate
the method of making connections. Fig. 3 shows a
lent consisting of a Radiola RA tuner diagram of the internal connections of the two sets.
with a Radiola DA detector amplifier. Of course, the two separate units, Radiolas RA and
1. Complete set of antenna material, type DA, which are assembled in the same box to make
AD style 319486 or its equivalent. the Radiola RC, may be used individually. The
Batteries, tubes and telephone receivers same applies to all other combinations including
as required for use with Radiola RC the Radiola RC.
receiver.

Fig. 1 -Radiolas RT and RC

 Radiolas RT-RA-AR-DA-If greater range is winding of Radiola RA as shown in the figure.
desired than can be obtained with the combination Usually good results will be obtained with the ticker
previously described, it is necessary to use radio fre- at two or three divisions from "Min"
quency amplification because a signal too weak to Radiolas RT -AR -DA with a Loop-If the directive
operate a detector can be amplified at radio frequency qualities of a loop at the sacrifice of range are de-
and thus brought up to sufficient amplitude. For this sired, they may be obtained by using only the
purpose, the Radiola AR, a three -step, transformer
-coupled radio frequency amplifier has been
built. Fig. 4 is a rear view showing the proper
CONDENSER STYLE
sequence of units and the connections between 363386
them. Fig. 5 shows the same combination using
a Radiola RC in place of the Radiolas RA and DA. GRID.
FIL.GND TO TYPE DA
This makes a rather poor arrangement of leads and TICKLER AMPLIFIER
the proximity of input and output to the Radiola PLATE
AR may result in so much regeneration that the
amplifier will oscillate. Therefore, we suggest that
the Radiola RA be removed from its cabinet and be
replaced by the Radiola AR while the Radiola RA
is placed in the cabinet formerly occupied by the
Radiola AR. These units are easily removed from
the cabinets by taking out the four nickel plated
screws at the corners of the panels. The micarta
strips on the back of the cabinets will have to be Fig. 3-Diagram of Connections for Radiolas RT andRA
interchanged also and additional holes will have to
be made in the back of the cabinets. The sequence
of units then becomes the same as that shown in Fig. 4. condenser of the RADIOLA RT to tune the loop
It is necessary for best results to provide more circuit. It is practically necessary to use radio
coupling between the tuning circuits than is pro- frequency amplification with a loop. In connection
vided by their variometers. To do this, use is made with the portable loop model HG 1380 a wave-
of the tickler winding on the Radiola RA which length range sufficient to take in the broadcasting
would otherwise be idle. The antenna circuit will stations will be obtained. Fig. 6 shows the con-
then consist of RADIOLA RT and part of the tickler nections.

TYPE R C TYPE R T

INSULATING
BUSHING

PROTECTIVE DEVICE ANTENNA

DOWN LEAD

GROUND ON
WATER PIPE
+ POS RED 2 22! VOLT
OR GREEN 8 -BATTERIES

Fig. 2-Radiolas RT and RC

 tic breathing noise. Rotate the dial of the Radiola
Radiolas RT and DA-It is also possible to use the RA very slowly while at the same time turning
the
RADIOLA RT as a single circuit, non -regenerative dial of the RADIOLA RT through 10 or 15 divisions
tuner with the Radiola DA detector amplifier or a on either side of the number on the dial corresponding
crystal. Such a combination will have a very to the number on the Radiola RA dial, listening
all
limited range. the while for signals. When signals are heard,
Miscellaneous Uses-The experimenter will find adjust both tuning circuits carefully to the point
the RADIOLA RT a very convenient unit with where the signal is loudest. The final adjustment
which to try various circuits. Its variometer can of the Radiola RA is best made by the
vernier.
be used to tune the plate circuit if that type of After a little practice the approximate settings for
regeneration is desired. It may aise be used as a a given station will be remembered so that rough
wave trap to eliminate interference from nearby adjustments may be made immediately.
It is
stations. Other uses will suggest themselves. usually possible to tell when the tuning circuits
wave
INSTALLATION are adjusted to approximately the same
length by means of atmospheric noises.
The RADIOLA RT is an additional piece of The selectivity of this set can be increased at
a
apparatus for use in one of the combinations pre- sacrifice of sensitivity by moving the RADIOLA RT
viously described. The other units should be in-
stalled in accordance with the directions which further away from the Radiola RA. This 'may be
accompany them. necessary if a powerful station is in operation nearby.
The RADIOLA RT in a coupled circuit is placed It is possible to operate the apparatus with the two
at the left side of a. Radiola RA and close up against tuning circuits several feet apart. Adjustments
it. The antenna is connected to the binding post made before moving the RADIOLA RT will usually
in the middle near the top, and ground is connected need to be slightly altered after the separation
to the lower of the two posts at the side. The made.
condenser must be connected between the antenna When the RADIOLA RT is used with the Radiola
and ground posts of the Radiola RA. The set is AR radio frequency amplifier, it is operated just
then ready to operate. like any single circuit receiver, there being blot one
knob and dial to make all the adjustment necessary.
OPERATION When a loop antenna is used, besides tuning the
The Radiola RA tuner and DA detector ampli- circuit to the proper wave length, the loop must be
fier should be adjusted as usual. In order to receive
turned so that it points in the general direction of
signals, it is necessary that both tuning circuits be
the transmitting station, but more important, so
tuned to the same wave length and to the wave- that it will be nearly at right angles to an inter-
fering station thus reducing the strength of the in-
length of the desired transmitting station. This
terfering signals to a minimum and making the most
may be done as follows: Adjust the tickler on the
of the directive effect of the loop.
Radiola RA until it is just below the point of oscil-
lation and keep it there by noting the characteris-
TYPE D A TYPE A R TYPE RA TYPE R T

G'I
FI
D

GND
ID
FIL AND
, ANT
o
MID

ND
ANT INSULATING
BUSHING

EN PROTECTIVE DEVICE ANTENNA

CONDENSER
PLAT PLATE 383388 DOWN LEAD

I
BAT

B BAT
MP BAT

TO
FILAMENT
+45 OR 68 VOLTS
TO AMFLIFIERS GROUND ON
+ POS. WATER PIPE
6VOLT
+22 TO DETECTOR
3 22.! VOLT STORAGE BATTERY
6-BATTERIES

Fig. 4 Radiolas RT, RA, AR and DA

 TYPE A R TYPE R C TYPE RT

GRID

CIL ONO
l S ANT
NO
o
ANT
0

INSULATING
coÁCONDENSER BUSHING
STYLE
PLATE 363306
PROTECTIVE DEVICE ANTENNA
DOWN LEAD

= NEG

+22 TO DERCTOR GROUND ON

2 6 VOLT WATER PIPE
+ POS.
STORAGE BA
3 22, VOLT
B -BATTERIES 1
Fig 5-Radiolas RT, RC and AR

TYPE DA TYPE A R TYPE R T

nnL
,
GND
6 Pio NtD

El 6N0
ANT

DIATE

BAT

- TO -NEG.
FILAMENT
+45 OR 68 VOLTS
TO AMPLIFIERS

t22YOUS
TO DETECTOR 3 22lVOLT 6 VOLT
STORAGE BATTERY + POS.
B -BATTERIES

Fig. 6-Radiolas RT, AR and DA with Loop

r

d,,()l1Il +
1111

w11TiTrN

V
r x
+
=
Rf
J
e

.'!:..2_.

e
b
-T1TTTr N
L
L +

.....

m
ao
1
Q
b
J
w
.
m
t

cQ
 60D

-J
W
_v) f
zO
z
o
w
z
o
o a. m o
+
 Radiola R S
Regenerative Receiver and Amplifier

INTRODUCTION Much confusion has arisen among non -technical

people between wavelength and distance from which
A radio receiver is an instrument, which, in con- signals may be heard. Actually there is little
nection with an antenna in the form of an elevated connection between them. The distance from which
wire or a suitable loop, is used to convert the high signals can be heard depends upon the power of the
frequency electro magnetic waves into electric transmitting station and the efficiency of both the
currents which in turn operate a telephone receiver transmitting and receiving apparatus.
and produce audible sounds. The ordinary wire line telephone works with electric
Radio communication is effected by means of currents of the same frequency as the sound waves.
electromagnetic waves which are radiated from the Radio communication works with electric currents
transmitting station and travel in all directions of a constant high frequency whose amplitude
at the velocity of light. This velocity is 186,000 changes at a low frequency corresponding to that
miles or 300,000 kilometers per second which will of the sound waves. Therefore, the radio receiver
carry a radio signal seven times around the earth must change the high frequency currents of variable
in a second. These waves cannot be heard because amplitude into low frequency currents which will
they have no mechanical effect on the ear drum and then operate a telephone receiver tomproduce audible
sounds.

Fig. 2 -Radiola RS Conn.cted

THE RADIOLA RS
The Radiola RS is a complete radio receiver
Fig. 1-Radiola RS consisting of a continuously variable inductance
with tickler regeneration, a capacity variable in
even if they did, the frequency would be so two steps, a vacuum tube detector and one stage
high of audio frequency amplification. It has been
that the ear could not respond to it. Sound waves
have frequencies varying from about 16 cycles designed to give strong, clear reproduction of voice
per and music without distortion, and to be sensitive,
second, which is the note produced by the
largest compact and easily operated. One of the principle
organ pipe, up to about 20,000 cycles per second,
which is the highest frequency to which the human features of this receiver is the use of a low current
ear vacuum tube, the filament of which can be operated
will respond The velocity of sound waves in air is
about 1100 feet per second so that sound waves satisfactorily by an ordinary dry cell thus eliminating
have a length varying from an inch or so up the need of a storage battery and the consequent
to 60 necessity of charging periodically. Sensitivity and
or 70 feet. Radio waves are usually much
longer, ease of operation combine to make the Radiola RS
the usual broadcasting wavelength being 360 meters
or 1180 feet. Therefore the frequency of an ideal receiver for the unskilled operator and as
these one becomes proficient at its manipulation, he or
waves will be about 833.000 cycles per second.
she will be able to produce remarkable results.
 EQUIPMENT give good selectivity, i. e., it will be impossible to
tune out nearby strong signals and select a weak
Standard Equipment of Radiola RS:- signal from a distant point.
The standard equipment of the Radiola RS The best antenna for all around receiving consists
consists of the following three items. of a single wire size 14 B & S gauge installed 20 to
1-Single circuit regenerative receiver with one 30 feet from the ground and extending horizontally
stage of audio amplification mounted in a
mahogany cabinet
2-Radiotron dry cell vacuum tubes, type WD -i 1
1-Telephone headset

Additional Equipment Necessary:

It is necessary to have the following additional
equipment for the installation and operation of the
Radiola RS.
2-No. 6 Dry cells
2-22% volt radio "B" batteries
1-Complete set of antenna material
Other sources of filament current than the dry
cell mentioned above may be used if desired. .Sources
suggested are a single two volt lead storage cell or
three Edison primary cells connected in series.
Fig. 3-Antenna Package Complete
When either of these sources are used, the posts
marked "+Al" and "+A:" should be connected
together. 100 to 130 feet from the receiver. This antenna
For convenience to purchasers and to meet the should be equipped with an approved protective
requirements of the Fire Underwriters it is recom- device and installed in strict accordance with the
mended that the Radio Corporation of America rules of the National Fire Protection Association.
antenna package, as specified above, be obtained When too much interference is experienced with
since it contains approved equipment and directions the outdoor antenna of the dimensions given, it will
for the installation of a proper out -door antenna. be found advantageous to install a smaller antenna.
This may be either indoors or outdoors, the outdoor
INSTALLATION installation in general giving slightly better results,
but the indoor one is not subject to the rules of the
Location : underwriters and does not require a protective
The Radiola RS should be located as near as device. The small antenna should consist of not
practicable to the incoming wire from the antenna.
Certain limitations in the room and in the location
of an antenna make it difficult to locate the instru- To Support To Support
ment directly under the- near end of the antenna.
However, in all cases, arrangements should be made
to meet the requirement as closely as possible.
To Antenna Poet of
Rodin Receiver

Antenna :
Very many of the operating troubles in radio Ground
receivers are traced to poor antenna installation. Fig. 4 --Diagrammatic Antenna
There are several things which govern the size,
location and type of antenna installation. If the
antenna is not properly insulated the signals will more than 25 feet of wire. Indoors, it may he
be weakened by leakage. If the antenna runs concealed in a picture molding or any other con-
parallel, and close to electric light wires or grounded venient place hut slightly better results will be
metal structures, its efficiency will be greatly im- obtained if it is supported away from the wall.
Such an antenna will produce almost as much
paired. If all joints in the working part of the
antenna circuit are not soldered or provided with strength of signal as a larger one but will tune much
approved splicing devices, they will corrode and more sharply and thus reduce interference.
reduce the signal strength because of the introduction When the above rules are followed and the techni-
of high resistance. If the antenna is too low or cal points mentioned above have been properly con-
short the strength of signals will be reduced. If sidered, the antenna will give good signal strength
the antenna is too high or long, the receiver will not and there will be no fire hazard.
 Figure 3 shows the complete antenna nn, :age be used for wavelengths from about 340 to 550
equipment, type AD, and Figure 4 shows diagram- meters.
matically how an antenna should be installed. The Ground Wire-The ground wire should be
The center span of wire between insulators is the connected to the post marked "Ground + Al".
working span and is connected to the instrument This ground wire should run as directly as possible
by the "down lead" or lead-in wire. The protective to a good permanent ground.
device provides a discharge path from antenna to
ground and thus protects the antenna during electri- Connection of Filament or "A" Battery-The
cal storms. tubes used in the Radiola RS require a voltage of
approximately 1.1 on the filaments so that an ordi-
The following quotations from the Underwriter's
rules will be of value.
nary dry cell can be used. Since there are two
tubes, two cells should be used. The negative or
"The outside antenna must not be placed over outside terminals of both cells should be connected
or under power or electric light- Ares of any circuit together and to the post marked "-A-B Battery".
of more than 600 volts or railway trolley or feeder One wire should run from each of the positive or
wires, nor shall it. be so located that a failure of center terminals to a binding post marked "+ A,"
either the antenna or the above mentioned electric and "+ A2" respectively. The connections are so
light or power wires can result in contact between arranged that the rheostat will control the current
the antenna and power wires. Antennae shall be to both tubes and yet each cell will heat the filament
constructed and installed in a strong and durable of only one tube. It is possible to operate both
manner" tubes in parallel from the same cell by connecting
"Each lead-in wire shall be provided with an posts "-1- Al" and "+ A2" together and connecting
approved protective device properly connected a wire from either to the positive terminal of the
and located (inside or outside the building) as near cell.
as practicable to the point where the wire enters Connection of "B" Battery-Two of the usual
building". "The protector shall not be in the 22% volt "B" batteries should be connected in
immediate vicinity of easily ignitible stuff or where series by connecting the positive terminal of one
exposed to inflammable gases, or dust, or flying to the negative terminal of the other. The remain-
combustible material." ing positive terminal should then be connected to
"The protective ground wire may be bare or the binding post marked "+B" and the negative
insulated and shall be of copper or approved copper terminal should be connected to the post marked
clad steel. If of copper the ground wire shall not "-A-B".
be smaller than No. 14 and if of copper clad steel Connection of Telephone Headset-The twc
it shall not be smaller than No. 17. The ground terminals at the end of the telephone headset cord
wire shall be run in as straight a line as possible to should be connected to the two binding posts marked
a good permanent ground. Preference shall be "Phones".
given to water piping. Gas piping shall not be Insertion of Vacuum Tubes-After all connections
used for grounding protective devices. Other per- have been made and checked, turn the rheostat
missible grounds are grounded metallic work in the knob as far to the left as possible. Insert the tubes
building and artificial grounds such as driven pipes, in their sockets through the holes in the panel. It
plates, cones, etc". "The ground wire shall be will be found that the tubes will fit the contacts in
protected against mechanical injury. An approved but one way. The sockets are so arranged that the
ground clamp shall be used wherever the ground large pin is toward the front of the box. Special
wire is connected to pipes or piping". care should be taken to see that the "A" and "B"
"The receiving equipment ground wire may be batteries have not been interchanged as the high
bare or insulated and shall be of copper or copper voltage of the "B" battery would instantly burn
clad steel as in the case of the protective ground out the filaments of the tubes and render them
wire". "The receiving equipment ground wire worthless.
may be run inside or outside the building. When
receiving equipment ground wire is run in full OPERATION
compliance with the rules for protective ground General:
wire, it may be used as the ground conductor for The Radiola RS is made as simple to operate
the protective device." as is consistent with a high degree of sensitivity
and selectivity. After a little practice, it will be
CONNECTING RADIOLA RS found very easy to pick up signals from different
stations and with care in making the adjustments,
General: signals from stations many miles away may be
The Radiola RS should be connected as shown in heard. Connections are made in the set so that
Figure 2. Detailed directions follow: one step of audio frequency amplification is in use
The Antenna Lead-in-The lead-in should be at all times.
connected to one of the antenna binding posts at
the right of the panel. The post marked "Short Control and Tuning:
Wave" should be used for wavelengths from about Figure 5 is a close-up view of the panel of the
180 to 375 meters. The "Long Wave" post should Radiola RS showing the controls used to make all
adjustments during operation. The purpose and Hunting Signals:
effect of each are as follows Start with ail controls turned as far as possible
to the left. Now turn the filament rheostat slowly
to the right until the filaments of both tubes appear
cherry red. Turn the tickler to "3." Put on the
headset and turn the tuning lever s ow y back and
forth over the scale. If no signal is found, increase
the regeneration by turning the tickler about one
half a division to the right and then turn the tuning
lever back and forth as before. Repeat until signals
are heard If still no signals are received, it is an
indication that either something is wrong with the
installation or that no station within range is trans-
mitting within the wavelength band covered by
the receiver. Try again after connecting the antenna
lead to the other antenna post.

Final Adjustment of Rheostat:

In order to increase the life of the vacuum tube
the filament current should be adjusted to as low
a point as possible without affecting the effciency
Fig. 5-Close-up of Panel of the set. On a relatively strong signal, adjust
the rheostat to the point where any further decrease
The Filament Rheostat, near the back of the panel in filament current wi 1 cause the signal strength to
between the two holes for the tubes is used to control decrease
the filament current in both tubes. When it is
turned as far as possible to the left or "off" position. Regeneration :
the filament circuit is open and no current can flow. Regeneration is the name applied to the process
THE RHEOSTAT SHOULD ALWAYS BE LEFT of feeding some of the energy in the output circuit
IN THIS POSITION WHEN THE SET IS NOT of the vacuum tube back into the input circuit. It
IN OPERATION. The correct operating position is the ability to do this that makes the vacuum tube
is best found by watching the filaments of the tubes so much superior to the crystal as a detector for
as the rheostat is turned slowly to the right. At radio communication.
the correct position, the filaments will glow at a dull A vacuum tube has three electrical circuits con-
cherry red color. It is inadvisable to burn a filament nected with it, all of which are necessary for its
at a higher temperature than necessary as this will operation. The first is the filament heating circuit
shorten its life These 'ow current filaments have composed of a battery to supply the current, a
an exceptionally long life if not abused. variable resistance commonly called a rheostat
The Tuning Lever is the nickel plated ever operat- to control the current, the filament of the vacuum
ing over the larger dial at the right of the panel. tube and the connecting wires. It is the function
This 'ever varies the inductance in the tuning circuit of this circuit to heat the filament, just as in an
and thus changes the wavelength to which the set ordinary incandescent lamp, to the proper tempera-
will respond When the index points to "0", the ture when electrons are given off by the filament.
set is tuned to the shortest wavelength. These electrons are very small particles of electricity
The Tickler Knob controls the regenerative action and have a negative charge. They are free to
of the set. In this instrument, it is so designed travel around inside the tube. The second circuit
that its adjustment will vary but little at the various is the output circuit and is composed of the "B"
wavelengths When the index points to "0", battery, the telephone headset, the filament of the
regeneration is practically nothing but increases vacuum tube, the tickler coil, the plate of the vacuum
to a point more than sufficient to produce oscilla- tube and some of the electrons given off by the
tion when the pointer reaches ' 10" The best filament. The nega ive end of the battery is con-
operating point is just below the point at which nected to one end of the filament while the positive
oscillation begins end is connected to the telephone headset and
The Antenna Binding Posts provide for two through it to the plate of the vacuum tube. This
wavelength ranges by introducing different amounts makes the plate positive with respect to the filament
of capacity into the tuning circuit. When the and it therefore attracts the electrons which are
antenna is connected to the "Short Wave" post, given off by the filament so that instead of wandering
the Radiola RS will respond to wavelengths of from around inside the tube, some of the electrons will
about 180 meters to 375 meters. When the antenna reach the plate. These electrons then constitute
is connected to the 'Long Wave" post, the range a flow of negative electricity which is an electric
becomes about 320 meters to 550 meters. The current. The strength of this current will be direct-
ranges given are for an antenna as previously de- ly proportional to the number of electrons reaching
scribed and will vary somewhat as the antenna the plate. This will vary with the attractive force
dimensions are changed. which depends upon the potential difference between
the plate and filament or more simply upon the MAINTENANCE
voltage of the "B" battery, and upon the supply General:
of electrons which depends on the filament tempera-
ture and is usually kept constant. The third circuit With reasonable care, nothing in the Radiola RS
is the input circuit and consists of the filament, or the additional equipment should wear out or
part of the tuning circuit, the grid condenser and require replacement except the vacuum tubes and
leak, the grid and the space between the grid batteries. The following covers the renewal of
and the filament inside the tube. When signals these parts.
are being received, alternating currents flow in the
tuning circuit causing differences of potential be-
tween the grid and fi'arreit. The grid is placed Renewal of Vacuum Tubes:
helm een t1 -.e filament and the plate and is usually a Radiotron WD -11 vacuum tubes have an ex-
helix of fine wire. When the grid is positive with ceptionally long life when they are not abused by
respect to the filament it helps the plate to attract rough handling or by overheating the filaments.
electrons and thus increases the plate current. After the filament is broken or burned out the
When it is negative it decreases the plate current. tube is of no more use as it is impracticable to repair
Thus there is superposed on the steady plate current, it. It should be replaced by a new tube of the same
a small alternating current which nas such a high type.
frequency that neither the telephone receiver nor
the human ear can respond to it. The frequency is
so high that the current prefers to pass through Renewal of "A" Battery:
the by-pass condenser instead ' of the telephone After a considerable period of use, the dry cells
receiver. At the same time, by means of the grid used to heat the filaments will become so weakened
condenser and leak, other potentials of lower fre- that it will be impossible to operate the filaments
quen:y and corresponding to the changes in amplitude at a sufficiently high temperature even though the
of the signals are being impressed on the grid and rheostats are turned all the way to the right. When
these produce changes in the steady plate current this condition occurs, the cells should be replaced
which flows through the telephone receivers and by new ones. A fresh cell should last about fifty
cause changes in the pull on the diaphragms thus days when used two hours per day, supplying one
producing audible sound. The high frequency tube.
currents however are of the same shape as the
currents in the tuning circuit and keep step with
them. Therefore a coil of wire called the "tickler" Renewal of "B" Battery:
is connected between the plate of the vacuum tube After some eight to twelve months of use, the
and the telephone headset and this coil is so located "B" batteries will become exhausted and will no
that the currents flowing in it can induce currents longer be able to supply the proper plate current.
in the tuning circuit which add to those produced They should be replaced by new batteries of the
by the electro -magnetic waves intercepted by the same voltage. The large size "B" battery will give
antenna. Therefore, greater potentials are applied longer service than the small size.
to the grid and greater changes of plate current are
produced. which in turn produce a louder sound in
the telephone receiver. Replacing Grid Leak Condenser:
It is possible to carry the above process too far, The combined grid leak and condenser should
that is, enough potential may be applied to the grid not require replacement. However, if moisture
from the tickler so that no incoming signal is neces- enters the unit, it will affect its operation. In this
sary. The set then acts as a converter of direct case it must be replaced by a new unit. It is mounted
current supplied by the "B" battery into alternating in fuse clips under one tube socket.
current and is said to be "oscillating". The radio
frequency currents produced by the set will combine
with those picked up by the antenna and will produce OPERATING TROUBLE
whistling noises called beat notes in the receiver.
The music or speech may still be heard but will be It is impossible to cover in detail all the possible
mushy and muffled. But it should be remembered operating troubles that may occur. The above
that whenever the receiving set is oscillating, that instructions cover the usual renewals which may
it is acting like a miniature transmitter and is be made by the non -technical operator Troubles
radiating electro magnetic waves. Any other receiv- due to broken wires, loose connections, etc., are
ing set that maybe within range and which is tuned difficult to locate. If they occur, an experienced
to the same frequency will pick up these waves. radio service man should be called in to locate and
Therefore, if your set is adjusted to produce a beat remedy the trouble. The following description
note with a particular broadcasting station, your and diagram of connections is included to facilitate
neighbor, who is listening to the same broadcasting trouble hunting.
station, will also hear the beat note and will be
powerless to do anything about it even though it ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
may ruin his enjoyment of the concert or speech. Figure 6 gives the diagram of connections of the
Therefore, never let your set oscillate when listening Radiola RS while Figure 7 is a view of the interior
to a radio concert.
 '
showing the apparatus mounted on the under side
of the panel.
The tuning circuit is of the well known single
circuit type consisting of a variable inductance

^
(A) in series with a fixed condenser (B), the latter,
having two values of capacity which are available
through two antenna binding posts. The grid
potential is taken off the whole inductance, the ,A11)\
E ;
grid condenser and leak method of detection being
used. The grid condenser and leak (C) are combined
in one unit which is mounted in fuse clips.
1' l$ ... .

Two vacuum tubes are provided, one (F) being

used as the detector while the other (U) is used as an
audio frequency amplifier. The rheostat (V) is
connected in the negative lead which is common to
both tubes and it therefore controls the filament
current to both tubes at the same time. Separate
binding posts "+ Al" and "+ A2" provide for the
use of individual dry cells.
Regeneration is provided by an inductively
coupled tickler consisting of a stationary winding
(E) and a rotary winding (D) connected in series.
Coupling is provided through the feeder windings
(G) which are part of the tuning circuit. A by-pass
condenser (H) permits the high frequency currents
V
to pass the audio frequency transformer (J). The
plate currents from the detector tube pass through Fig. 7-Working Parts of Radiola RS
the primary of the transformer and produce po-
tentials in the secondary which are then applied to
the grid of the amplifier tube (U) producing greater
changes in the plate current than in that of the
detector. This plate current from the amplifier
passes through the telephone headset and produces
the audible sounds.

Ground
-tAi O I -O Lonq Wove

}
To Shield ® Antenna
*A2 O -O Snort Wove

0
- Ai
- A2
-B L©
-FB O To
7.7
Shield

0-
Penes
O
_L -44f
To Shield
0
Fig. 6-Diagram of Connections Ràdiola RS
 Radiola A C
2 -Stage Audio Amplifier
several times that of the detector and yet the wave
INTRODUCTION form of the currents will be similar. A transformer
It frequently happens that the audio frequency and tube together constitute one stage of amplifi-
signal strength from a crystal or vacuum tube de- cation. The amount of amplification obtainable in
tector is so small that the sound produced in the one stage depends upon the ratio of the transformer
telephone headset is not sufficient to properly affect and the characteristics of the tube. If one stage is
the human ear. Also, when this is not the case, it is not sufficient, two or more stages may be used in
cascade.
RADIOLA AC
The RADIOLA A C is a two stage, audio fre-
quency, transformer coupled amplifier. It con-
sists of two transformers designed for the amplifica-
tion of music and speech, two vacuum tube sockets,
two rheostats, a bias battery and three jacks, all
mounted below a molded bakelite panel and en-
closed in a neat mahogany box. In general appear-
ance it closely resembles the Radiola Sr. and is in-
tended for use with it.

EQUIPMENT
STANDARD-The standard equipment furnished
under the style No. 365112 consists of the following
items:
1-Two stage audio amplifier as described
1-Telephone plug, style 307425
2-Radiotron dry cell vacuum tubes Type WD -11
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT NECESSARY
The following i ems will be needed in addition to the
above. They are not furnished since batteries
Fig. 1-Radiola AC Audio Amplifier deteriorate when not in use and the other items will
probably be at hand.
very often desirable to operate a loud speaker so that 1-Radio receiving set, including detector, pre-
a telephone headset need not be worn and so that ferably Radiola Sr.
more than one person may listen. In either case, 2-Standard No. 6 dry cells
it is desirable to amplify the audio frequency output 2 or 3-22% volt "B" batteries
of the detector. The type WD -11 three electrode 1-Telephone headset or loudspeaking receiver
vacuum tube is admirably suited to this purpose. It is possible and frequently desirable to use other
The signal currents from the detector are made to sources of filament heating current than the dry cells
pass throug the primary of a transformer and thereby specified above. A single lead storage cell giving
induce potentials in the secondary, these potentials about 2.2 volts will give excellent results but will
being applied to the grid of the amplifier tube where require charging at intervals. If it is inconvenient
they cause changes in its output current. If the to charge a storage cell, Edison Lalande primary
transformer is properly designed and suitable batter- cells may be used. Two cells in series will be re-
ies are provided, the output of the amplifier will be quired.
 made to the detector only and neither of the tubes in
USES the Amplifier will light. When the plug is inserted
WITH RADIOLA SR: in the jack marked "1st stage", the filament circuit
Location-Place the amplifier to the left of the of the first amplifier tube is closed through the
Senior. Corresponding binding posts on both sets rheostat which should then be adjusted to give the
will then be in line. Connect the binding posts proper filament temperature. Connection is also
marKed "Phones" on the Senior to the posts marked made between the telephone receivers and the output
"Input" on the Amplifier. Connect the "-A-B circuit of the first amplifier tube so. that one stage of
Battery" posts together. audio amplification will be in use. A similar con-
"A" Battery-Connect the negative (outside) dition exists when the plug is inserted in the jack
binding posts of three dry cells together and to one of marked "2nd stage" except that both tubes will
the "-A-B Battery" posts. Connect the positive light and the telephone receivers will be connected
binding posts of the remaining two cells together to the output of the second stage.
and to the "+A Battery" post on the Amplifier. Filament Current Adjustment-The filament cur-
"B" Battery-Connect two or three 22% volt rent of each tube must be adjusted separately by its
"B" batteries in series. Connect the remaining own rheostat. After this adjustment has been made,
free negative lead to one of the "-A-B Battery" the rheostats may be left in position and the filament
posts. Take a tap from between the first and second current will be controlled automatically by inserting
"B" batteries and connect it to the "+B Battery" the plug in the proper jack. The tubes used wi
post on the Senior thus supplying the detector tube this Amplifier have an oxide coated filament, the
with a plate potential of 22% volts. Connect the operating temperature of which is just. high enough
remaining positive lead from the "B" battery to the to produce a dull red heat. It is advisable to operate
"+B Battery" poston the Amplifier, thus supplying
tube filaments at as low a temperature as possible
the amplifier with either 45 or 67% volts plate po- but the temperature should be high enough to pro-
tential. duce satisfactory operation. The filaments may be
Telephone Headset or Loudspeaker-Connect seen by looking through the ton of the tube.
the terminals of the cord supplied with the telephone
headset or with the loud speaking receiver to the MAINTENANCE
telephone plug provided with the Amplifier. Insert General-If the RADIOLA AC is handled proper-
the plug into the jack corresponding with the degree ly during shipment and if care is used in operation,
of amplification desired. nothing should require replacement except the tubes
and batteries.
WITH ANY OTHER RECEIVER: RENEWAL OF TUBES:
Make battery connections as previously described If the directions for operating the Amplifier are
except that the directions for connection to the carefully observed the vacuum tubes will have an
other set will no longer apply. The same "B" exceptionally long life. When the filament of a
batteries may be used for the detector as for the tube does burn out or break, the tube must be re-
amplifier. The posts on the amplifier marked placed by a new one. Use the style number on the
"Input" should be connected to the place where the base when ordering spare tubes or replacements.
telephone headset is usually connected to the de-
Renewal of "A" Battery-After about two months
tector. The output of the amplifier is obtained of use, the dry cells used to heat the filaments will
through the jacks. become exhausted and will be unable to supply
OPERATION sufficient current to heat the filaments to the proper
GENERAL : temperature. When this condition occurs, the dry
cells must be replaced by new ones. A fresh cell
The jacks used with the Amplifier are of the type supplying one tube should give about 50 hours of
known as filament control jacks. Besides making service when used 2 hours per day.
the proper connections to the telephone plug in If a storage battery is used, it may be recharged
the usual way, an extra pair of contacts is provided from a suitable source of direct current. If alter-
which controls the filament current. The circuits nating current only is available, a rectifier such as
are so arranged that when the plug is inserted in the the "Rectigon" may be used.
jack marked "Detector", telephone connections are
 If Edison primary cells are used, new elements and
chemicals may be obtained from the makers or from connections. Corresponding parts in both figures
electrical supply houses. are designated by the same letters.
Renewal of "B" Battery-After "B" Batteries Audio frequency energy from the plate circuit
have been in service for 8 to 12 months they become of the detector comes to the binding posts
marked
exhauste 1. When this happens, the signals become "Input" From there itt goes directly to the tele-
weak and erratic. This condition can be remedied phone headset through the jack (R) when
is inserted there. Otherwise it goes
the plug
by replacing the exhausted battery by a new one. to the primary
Renewal of "C" Battery-The "C" or bias battery of the amplifying transformer (M) which
is the small unit cell mountëd in a hclder between the with the vacuum tube (K) makes the first together
stage of
tube sockets This cell is not required to furnish amplification. The rheostat (0) controls
the fila-
any current so should last 8 to 12 months. When ment current of tube (K) and connection
of the
exhausted it must be replaced by a new one. The telephone headset is made through jack (S).
When
usual symptoms of an exhausted "C" battery are the plug is not in jack (S), the output of tube (K)
noisy operation and distorted signals. The best is fed directly into the primary of transformer (N)
plan is to replace the "C" battery whenever the which together with tube (L) makes up the second
"B" battery is renewed. To do this, the set must be stage of amplification. (P) is the rheostat control.
removed from the cabinet by taking out the four ling the filament current of tube (L) while (T) is the
nickel plated screws, two at the back and two at jack through which connection is made between the
at the front edges of the panel. The entire appar- telephone headset and the output of the second
atus may then be removed from the cabinet by stage. (Q) is a small flashlight cell which acts as
simply lifting out the panel. To remove the "C" a grid bias for both tubes.
battery from the holder, loosen the two hexagonal
nuts that hold the nickel plated bar. Remove the
b ar and the cell will slip out. Put in a new one taking
care that the end with the little brass cap is toward
the panel and replace the bar and see that the nuts
are securely tightened. Ever ready Unit Cell No.
935 or other make of cell of the same size may be
used.
Operating Troubles-If any operating troubles
occur which the above renewals will not remedy, a
careful inspection should be made to see that all
connections are good. If trouble still persists, the
services of a competent radio electrician should be
obtained. To assist in locating trouble, the follow-
ing description and diagram of connections is in-
cluded.

ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
Fig. 2 is an interior view of the Radiola AC show- o S P
Fig. 2-Radiola AC Audio Amplifier, showing arrangement
ing the arrangement of parts. Fig. 3 is a diagram of of parte
+ 2:221 +-
0 0 o eL
Q tz,

o
r® Ton
.:1-

,Qºa.`m
,óóoo r'')
o"1_4

1 ----ir n0
Fig. 8-Diagram of Connections of Radiola AC Audio Amplifier
10
 et

%,
2 k7

\
2 e

\
!

. ) ...a

,00Q0/

p
 )

0> ¡nd¡np ®
=ó
>
3 Ñ
I
1
N ó0oa°
Ca
+

o
rQ Q QQm CD

°Qf444
+ + I I 1 +

IU

Le ¡Haul
J

k
 Radio Receiver
MODEL AR -1300

THE RECEIVER is complete in itself with the exception of the tele-

phones and antenna. It will receive telephone and telegraph radio
signals at a limited distance over the wavelength range of 180 to 700
meters when connected to a suitable antenna.
Telephones with plug and necessary antenna material can be obtained
from dealers in radio supplies. ASK FOR G -E ANTENNA EQUIPMENT.
This receiver may be used with any vacuum tube detector, or detector
amplifier set. It is especially arranged to operate with its companion set, the
Model AA-I400 Detector -Amplifier.

ANTENNA SYSTEM
WIRE. Copper, copper weld, bronze or aluminum, 12 or 14 gauge,
bare or insulated, solid or stranded.
INSULATORS. Two insulators are required, one at each end of the
antenna. Tube insulators must be used in passing wires through walls.
PROTECTIVE DEVICE. An antenna protective device Model UQ-1310
or equivalent should be used.
ERECTION. String the antenna wire and make the connections as
shown in the sketch. If possible, the lead-in wire should be a continuation
of the antenna wire. The antenna wire should have a span of from 75 to
150 feet between the insulators; should be at least 15 feet away from any
electric light, power or telephone wire, and should be at least 25 feet above
the ground (reception improves with an increase in height of antenna).
Neither the antenna nor the lead-in wire should touch any object other
than the insulators. The ground wire should be connected to the house water
pipes or to a pipe driven deeply into moist ground. The ground wire and
pipe should be carefully scraped and cleaned at the point of connection.
In receiving from near -by stations, the antenna may sometimes be put
inside the house. A bed spring or metal curtain rod has been known to
serve as the antenna.
August, 1922 IC -86933
Second Edition
 Porcelain Tube
Strain Insulator
¡
Tie Wire No.l4 A
Copper Wir f j

Screw E e CO 9

Lead -in -Wire

d ¡!

Porcelain Tube
No. I4 Copper Weld Wire
Wavelength
Crystal Detector
-Protector Intensity

Telephone, Plug
Rubber Covered
Ground Wire ---.

Antenna
Ground Clamp

Water Pipe
 Strain Insulator
Antenna Wire No.I4 Copper Weld Sic
13
No.I4 Copper Veld

r
INSTALLATION
Remove the cover of the Receiver by raising the catch and at the same time
pushing back. The coil should be untied and the crank on the coil turned upward
towards the wire. The notch in the driving disc on the inside of the front panel
should also be turned upward. The coil should then be seated on its base, care
being taken to register the notch in the coil form with the pin on the base.
Inside of the large coil is a small regenerative coil operated by the large
right-hand knob marked "Intensity." This regenerative coil is not used unless
the Receiver Model AR-i3oo is used in conjunction with Detector -Amplifier,
Model AA -r400 or a similar device.
Connect from the ground and antenna terminals of the protective device to
the respectively marked terminals on the lower left-hand end of the Receiver.
They may be left permanently connected to the Receiver.
The terminals on the rear and on the right-hand end are required only when
the Receiver is used in conjunction with vacuum tube unit.
Plug the head telephones into the telephone jack on the front of the
Receiver at the lower right-hand corner.
The set is now ready to operate.
 OPERATION
Adjust the telephones snugly to your ears. Place the two detector min-
erals in contact with each other, using lower thumb screw to adjust the pressure
and the upper knob to move the arm. Do not touch the metal parts.
The large left-hand knob whose dial is marked "WAVELENGTH"
adjusts the set to the wavelength of the various transmitting stations. Move
the knob slowly over the scale until signals are heard. Then find the exact
point where these signals are loudest. The wavelength adjustment is then
complete. The detector may now be re -adjusted, to see if a more sensitive
point can be found.
Wavelengths from i8o to 40o meters will be picked up between o and io
on the dial and wavelengths from 38o to loo meters will be picked up
between i i and 20 on the dial. Broadcasting stations use 36o meter wave-
lengths and will be picked up at about 4. These figures will vary somewhat
with the size of the antenna.

ANT.

Variable Tl TZ
Condenser
G
o
To Grid Of
Intensity Coil Detector
Tube

Crystal
Detector
Automatic _.
Switch
Operated
Telephone
Condenser T Telephone Jack

By
Condenser F
o
To Filament
GND Of Detector
I Tube

Connection Diagram

PRECAUTIONS
When the receiver is not in use, separate the crystals. Unsatisfactory opera-
tion may be caused by improper or loose connections in the antenna orgroundwires.
Deposits on the crystal may be removed by lightly scraping the surface of .the
movable crystal with a penknife. Do not operate during thunder storms.
MANUFACTURED BY
General Electric Company, U. S. A.
for

RadioeCorporation
of..l nerica
[

WCDLNVRih BUILDING NEW YORK CUT -.

 Detector. Amplifier
MODEL AA -1400
THE DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER is intended for use in connection with a
radio receiver. It is designed particularly for operation with its com-
panion unit, the Model AR-i3oo Radio Receiver.
In addition to the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER the following equipment
will be needed. (Use standard equipment.)
Head phones and plug (or Loud Speaker)
Antenna
Radio Receiver
Batteries
One 6 -volt, 4o- to So ampere -hour storage battery to supply current for the tube
filaments.
Two standard "B" or plate batteries for supplying voltage to the tube plates. One
of these should have an 18 -volt tap if a UV -too tube is used for the detector.
Vacuum Tubes
Three vacuum tubes are necessary. One is used as the detector (UV-2oo). Two
are used as audio frequency amplifiers (Radiotron UV -2o1.)
For best results use tubes as directed. However, UV -2o1 may be used in the left-
hand socket as a detector. This does not give as loud signals, but is easier
to adjust.
This equipment can be obtained from dealers in radio supplies. ASK
FOR G -E ANTENNA EQUIPMENT AND RADIO RECEIVER SET.
INSTALLATION
Connect antenna and radio receiver in accordance with instructions
furnished with the radio receiver set.
Remove the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER from its carton and place it at the
right of the radio receiver. There are holes in the base for holding down screws.
Locate the storage battery wherever convenient. If at all distant, heavy
leads must be used. Locate the plate batteries as near the instrument as
possible, regardless of the size of wire used.
Remove the cover of the DETECTOR-AMPLIFIER by pushing up
on the button and back on the cover at the same time.
Make connections as shown in the installation diagram. For wiring
between units AA -i400 and AR-i3oo, use stiff wire (like antenna wire) about
inches long. If a Radiotron UV-200 is used as the detector, the lead
from the i8 -volt tap of the battery should be brought up to the "-1-i8 V"
terminal. If Radiotron UV-2o1 is used as the detector, connect the negative
and the positive terminals of the plate batteries as indicated on the diagram
and connect the "+18 V" terminal on the back of the DETECTOR -AMPLI-
FIER to the terminal marked "+4o V." The i8-volt tap on the battery is
left unconnected.
In addition to wiring in diagram, connect terminals "F" and "G" of
AR-i3oo to corresponding terminals of AA -i400 with i% -inch wire
mentioned above.
August, 1922 IC86934-A
Supersedes 86934
 Porcelain Tube !l
Strain Insulator 1
Tie Wire No.14 !"
Copper Wir ( _I
d
Screw E e Q

I
J`V
N^ Antenna Wire N

Lead -in -Wire No.l4

/
_., .

AA -1400 AR -1300

Antenna / Rubber Covered

Ground +Ground Wire

INPUT
T2 Ground Clamp
Minus(-)
Black Plus(+)
/ Red
Minus (-) Water Pipe
Black
Plus (+)
Red

Storage Battery
22k V. Plate
Batteries

When using Radiotron UV-too as a detector maximum efficiency is

secured by a careful adjustment of the plate voltage on the tube. This is
accomplished by connecting the outside terminals of a Model PR -S36 poten-
tiometer (purchased separately) across the 6 -volt storage battery and the
middle terminal to the negative (-)
of the 4o -V. plate battery, omitting
the connection from the (-)
4o terminal of the detector -amplifier to the
plate battery. Pay no attention to the unused terminals on the ends of
the DETECTOR-AMPLIFIER. These are for use in connecting additional
stages of radio or audio frequency amplification which are built in standard
sectional cases by the General Electric Company.
 Siren Insulator
Nÿ. I4 Copper Weld

Copper Weld

If the receiver unit used does not have a regenerative coil, the terminals marked "Ti "
and 'T2" on the back of the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER should be connected together.
The terminals marked "Output" on the right-hand end of the DETECTOR -AMPLI-
FIER may be used for connecting a loud speaker which will be automatically discon-
nected when the head telephone plug is inserted in any jack.
In making the connections, use a long screw driver. Put the wire into the hole in the
terminal before loosening the screw, then back the screw out until the wire can be pushed
all the way in, then tighten the screw down.

OPERATION
i. Separate the crystal detector minerals on the receiver. If they touch, poor vacuum
tube detection will result.
NoTE.-The crystal detector may be used whenever wanted, by inserting the tele-
phone plug in the jack or receptacle on the receiver and turning the knobs In the
DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER to the "OFF" position.
2. Insert the three tubes in sockets by matching pin inside of tube base with slot
in socket, pressing down and turning into place. The left-hand socket is for the detector,
the other two for the amplifying tubes.
3. Turn all of the knobs on the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER almost all of the way
around counter -clockwise or in the direction of the arrow. This brings the tube filaments
to their proper brilliancy, which is a little less bright than the ordinary incandescent lamp.
4. Adjust the telephones snugly to the ears.
S. Insert the telephone plug in the left-hand jack. A click should be heard in the head
telephones when the plug is inserted or removed. ,Second Ampnr,.r uv-20i

D. Set the `a INTENSITY" knob on the F`a`Amp1IAr.0Detecto .úv zooanuv-zoi

receiver at zero.
7. Slowly rotate the "WAVELENGTH"
knob on the receiver. If no signals are heard or if
they are very weak, slowly rotate the "INTEN-
SITY knob clockwise, still searching for signals G ;d Leek rr,
with the "WAVELENGTH" knob.
8. When signals are heard, rotate the "IN_
GrldLe
r
'1' " d'k
Pa sz3

TENSITY knob, thus increasing the strength of

the signals. If an external potentiometer is used,
ï Je-tf ° ti.'
. . '>-
JP
adjust it to secure maximum signal strength. At
some point the tube will start to oscillate. This condition is denoted by dis-
appearance of the signal and the appearance of a loud mushy sound in the
receivers. Turn the "INTENSITY" knob back slightly, until the signals
are again loud, and the oscillation of the tube has ceased.
9. Move the telephone plug to the middle jack. The signals will now be
very much louder and slight readjustment of " INTENSITY" and rheostats
may be necessary. The second stage may then be added in the same manner.
io. If a loud speaker is used, remove the head telephone plug and
readjust in accordance with the signals from the loud speaker.
r z. In some cases it may be possible to use both amplifying stages
on the head telephones, but ordinarily the signals from the second stage
will be too loud to be comfortable. In case the last or both stages of amplifi-
cation are not used, rotate the respective filament control knobs to the "off"
position.
12 If the signals being received on the loud speaker are not very
loud they may perhaps be intensified by removing the % megohm grid leaks
from the clips behind the two amplifier tubes. The purpose of these grid leaks
is to improve the quality of the signal.
13. The batteries are disconnected by turning all the filament knobs
clockwise to the "off" position.

CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION

1. Poor connections in antenna or ground wires or defective insulation of antenna.
2. Filament rheostats not properly adjusted.
3. Filament or plate batteries run down. (Indicated by weak signals and noise.)
4. Polarity of batteries reversed. (Wrongly connected.)
5. Intensity control on receiver not properly adjusted.
6. Poor or broken contacts in battery connections or telephone cord.
7. Defective vacuum tubes.
8. Coil system of receiver not properly seated in contacts.
UV20D Tube or Detector Stagqet Mage 2
UV201 Tube T¢l¢aphkwne hlcphkon¢ Telephone
2Meg Grid J1121. Jack
23Leak
I Iif i-41
T2 Ti

Ì
Transforrner
UV712
Tube
UV201 Tronsformer
UV712
di...
Tube
UV201

Grid
Condenser ` h I

Telephone
D4
Dp
Input Output
Condenser
Meg.
t>
k Meg.
Grid Leak Grid Leak
PR516 PR516
F
6-0
Rheostat )Rheostat /Rheostat
PR535 PR535 PR535

6V.
r
-
-O
- +18V.
O o
+40V.

MANUFACTURED BY

.I
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, U. S. A.
for

R,uii ECorporation
of..mtrica
WODLwu87H BUILDING NeW YORK CITY
 Radio Frequency Amplifier
MODEL AA -152o
(WAVELENGTH 200-5000 METERS)
GENERAL
THE MODEL AA -152o three -stage RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER is especially designed for operation
with its companion unit, MODEL AA -1400 DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER for loop reception.
While the AA-1520 unit is primarily for use in connection with an indoor loop, a variable tuning condenser and MODEL
AA -1400 DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER (Fig. 2), it may also be used on an outdoor type of antenna by employing one of
the two conventional tuning arrangements:
(t) A single circuit tuner, MODEL AR-13oo (Fig. 4).
NOTE: When this scheme is used, the outdoor antenna should not exceed 40 ft. in length, including the
lead-in wire. An indoor antenna may also be used.
(2) A two-circuit tuner (Fig. 3).
NOTE: With this arrangement, the antenna may consist of a single wire 75 to 15o ft. in length.

USE WITH A LOOP ANTENNA

The following apparatus should be secured and wired up in accordance with Fig. 2:
1-Loop antenna, MODEL AG-138o or equivalent.
2-Variable Tuning Condenser, MODEL UC -182o or equivalent.
3-MODEL AA -152o Three -stage RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER with three UV -toe Radiotrons.
4-MODEL AA -1400 DETECTOR-AMPLIFIER with one UV -too Radiotron and two UV-tot Radiotrons.
5-Head Telephone Receivers with Plug (MODEL UD.824 or UD-825).
6-One 6 -volt, 8o to 120 ampere -hour storage. battery.
7-Two 22.5 -volt plate batteries (one with e8 -volt tap).
When the loop is used, it may consist of the Radio Corporation's MODEL AG -í38o loop or equivalent, for receiving
signals of broadcast wavelengths. The loop should be mounted so that it can he rotated on a vertical axis. Connect the
R.C.A. variable tuning condenser UC-i82o in parallel with the loop and extend the terminals to the "INPUT" binding
posts of the RADIO AMPLIFIER_ See Fig. 2.
USE WITH AN ANTENNA
(A) If a single circuit tuner, MODEL AR-13oo, is used, the apparatus should be wired in accordance with Fig. 4.
The following apparatus will be required:
1-Antenna (MODEL AG -788).
NOTE: See proper length of antenna mentioned under "General."
2-MODEL AR-l3oo tuner.
3-MODEL AA-1520 RADIO AMPLIFIER with three UV-tot Radiotrons.
4-MODEL. AA -taco DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER with one UV -too Radiotron and two UV-tot Radiotrons
5-Head Telephone Receivers with Plug (MODEL UD-824 or UD-825).
6-One 6-volt, 8o to 120 ampere -hour storage battery.
7-Two 22.5 -volt plate batteries (one with 18 -volt tap).
(B) If a two-circuit tuner is used, the apparatus should be wired in accordance with Fig. 3. The following
apparatus will be required:
1-Antenna (MODEL AG-788).
NOTE: See proper length of antenna mentioned under "General."
2-A two-circuit tuning arrangement.
3- DEL AA -152o RADIO AMPLIFIER with three UV-tot Radiotrons.
".

4-AA-tgoo DETECTOR-AMPLIFIER with one UV -too Radiotron and two UV-tot Radiotrons.
5-Head Telephone Receivers with Plug (MODEL UD -824 or UD -825).
6-One 6-volt, 8o to 120 ampere -hour storage battery.
7-Two 22.5 -volt plate batteries (one with 18 -volt tap).
INSTALLATION
Turn all filament control knobs clockwise to the "OFF" position, before starting to wire up the equipment.
When used in conjunction with DETECTOR-AMPIIFIER, MODEL AA -1400, put the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER
at the right and connect the five terminals at the right end of the AA-t 520 unit to the corresponding five terminals at the
left end of AA-1400 unit, by means of five stiff pieces of wire, such as antenna wire, each about t 3 inches long. In making
these connections, insert the wire into the terminal opening, turn the holding screw until the wire will pass under it, and
then tighten the screw down onto the wire. The filament and plate batteries are connected to the AA-1400 DETECTOR-
AMPLIFIER in accordance with instructions accompanying that unit. When thus used with the DETECTOR-AMPLI-
FIER, no other battery connections are necessary.
The figures show several inches of space between the AR -1300, AA-152o and AA -1400 units in order to indicate
clearly the connections between adjacent ends. By using connecting wires of a length of about I''1 inches, the units may
be placed quite closely together; but in locating the AR-13oo and AA -152o units end to end neither the cases nor
any projecting sere ,t heads should touch each other.
IC -86943A
February, 14423 supersedes IC8694g
 Porcelain Tube
Strain Insulator
c
(
Tie Wire Ne.l4
Copper Wir r pd
jj

Screw E e 4
J
LM/

Lead -in -Wire

AA-1400 AA-1520

uNIIIIMF
s
3Y
ni
45111
1NIP
m
dW
,:ui

u oi
il
IlikAIL,,-
._.
` Ili. M

sIm'u1lMilY11MIMuuuuunlnnhlYncinüiul iuuWnnmuummt

IIII
Plu
Red
11'
Minu S(-
&tick
5.PST Switch
to be opened
when through
using Apparatus

y III
illllllllllll1i'
II

22
r ' V. Minus (-)Black
Storage :attery
Battteriesense
Ground Clamp
Water Pipe

Fig. 2

Be sure to connect together the two terminals T-1 and T-2 on the hack of the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER unit,
MODEL AA-400, and do not connect in a tickler coil at this point, as it will be found that the regenerative coil will not
increase the signal audibility very much over what is obtained with Radio Frequency Amplification. The proper operation
of a regenerative circuit in conjunction with a RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER requires an extremely critical
adjustment, or the advantages of one will offset the other and poor results will be secured.
If the AA-152o unit is used in conjunction with a Detector or Detector -Amplifier of a type different than the
AA-1400 unit, connect the OUTPUT terminals at the right end to INPUT terminals "F" and "G" of the Detector or
the Detector-Amplifie.; and connect the battery terminals, also at the right end, to the respective terminals of the
batteries. The set is now ready to operate.
It is well to keep the 6 -volt "A" battery (8o to 120 ampere -hours) well charged at all times, keeping the specific
gravity between 1,25o and 1,275.
The directional properties of the loop may possibly be improved by omitting the ground connection in Fig. 2.
OPERATION
Insert the three UV -lot vacuum tubes in the sockets of the RADIO AMPLIFIER by matching pin on the side of the
tube base with slot in socket, pressing down and turning into place. Three stages are always to be used, never one or two.
Insert the UV-too detector tube in the left-hand socket of the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER unit, and the two
UV-2o1 tubes in the other sockets.
 Strain Insulator
Antenna Wire No.14 Copper Weld
I
No.14 Copper Weld

- I

Fig. t

Turn all the FILAMENT control knobs almost all the way around counter -clockwise, or in the direction of the
arrow. It is not always necessary to use the two stages of audio or tone amplification, and these may be left unlighted
when not used. The filaments of Radiotrons UV -200 and UV-2o1 should be somewhat less bright than the ordinary
incandescent lamp.
Adjust the telephones snugly to the ears and insert the plug in the left-hand jack of the DETECTOR -AMPLIFIER.
A click should be heard in the head telephones when the plug is inserted or removed.

SVolt5torapp
Aaltran SOtb I20
,tel Plat it-Battery
vote: Use l8VoIt Tap as Ampernrs
Shown forUµZ00Detector
tut uae Foil PlateVoltaee Duc.
on Detector Tube when
UV -201 Rediotron is used M Openedcl
wen
li
Sat bmtlnUse
o
V t- .ay. ,nv
as a Detector
Ground te tese
Stab.Il,erPRS1a
VrapTt
Ctew.p wr -
t Pa>f
RadelroroUVZ 1, Conmfer> sg
RadiofronUVlal

Redielran 01

lí uvmoewar^1, RandVletOren

Rheostat arie .x
Antenna Serles PR52!-
Condenser
Appro..00OT M F.
Tilt.pllpe
Appro.OapTRI JaCh -
Tran

Rheostat
a -o

.V -May be a around teas.*

Standard Vara_
Coupler or Spider
We b Coil U Gala Tele phone
PIps

Fig. 3

Turn the "STABILIZER" knob half way around from "o", counter -clockwise.
Note position of the wavelength switch knob in the lower left-hand corner of the RADIO AMPLIFIER panel. For
wavelengths below Soo meters the knob should be pulled out, while for wavelengths above Soo meters the knob should
be pushed in.
The set is now ready for tuning. If the AA-s Szo AMPLIFIER is used with an outdoor antenna in accordance with
Fig. 3 or 4, the desired signals should be tuned in by the usual means. If the set is used in connection with an
indoor loop (Fig. 2), the desired station can be tuned in by means of the variable condenser connected directly across
the terminals of the loop.
If a loop is used it should be set for maximum signal strength by rotating it slowly about its vertical axis. Signals
will be strongest when the plane of the loop is pointing in the direction from which the signals are coming.
Readjust the "STABILIZER" knob to the position of best signal intensity. The signal strength will be increased
with clockwise rotation of the knob. Should it be advanced too far, a click will be heard in the telephones and then all
signals will have a "mushy" sound. AT THIS POINT THE RECEIVER BECOMES A TRANSMITTER AND
SERIOUSLY INTERFERES WITH NEIGHBORING RADIO RECEIVERS. THIS CONDITION OF OSCIL-
LATION MUST BE AVOIDED, BUT IF IT DOES OCCUR, IMMEDIATELY TURN THE "STABILIZER"
KNOB BACKWARD UNTIL THE SIGNAL CLEARS UP.
Slight readjustments of the filament rheostats may improve the signal strength, but it is not necessary to make
especially fine adjustments on the RADIO AMPLIFIER.
The tube filaments are disconnected by turning the filament control knobs to the "OFF" position, but when the
set is not used for any length of time one side of the storage battery should be disconnected by opening the single -pole
single-throw switch. This removes the potentiometer current which, although small, would be a constant drain on the
battery.
 Porcelain Tube
No.l4 Copper Weld Wire CAUSES OF FAULTY
Protect or OPERATION
AA -1400 AA -1520 AR -1300
. Poor connections in antenna or
ground wires or in loop wires
or defective insulation of either.
Antenna s. Filament rheostats not properly
adjusted.
3. Batteries exhausted (indicated by
low filament brilliancy or weak
III II111111111111111R111111111111111111111r';r'llllllllllllllllll signals and noisy operation).
IIy11111
N`ICÏI

+401
(Rubber
+18 N11 Covered
Oround Wire
4. Battery connections improperly
made, poor, or broken.
5. Stabilizer improperly adjusted.
Ground
qllll ì ì. Clamp 6. Poor or broken connections in
telephone cord or plug.
+18v.
PlusI+)Red 7. Inoperative vacuum tubes.
221V. Plate Storage Battery
teries 8. Transformer wavelength switch
Minus(-) Blac k
in wrong position.
SP.S.T. Switch to be opened Water Pipe
when through using Apparatus

Fig. 4

Stabilizer PR536
By Pass Condensers
Radiotron ÚV201
Radiotron UV 201 Radiotron UV201

°-7Y,f47-
F¡ F,

Rha batet Rheo stat

PR 535 PR 535

13
1001
Transformer Transformers
UV 1714 ÚV1714
3037?). 3¡0^2

40Vo +401/
+BVo o+6V
-6Vo 1 o 8V
o o
Input Output
0 Ground to Base of
Fig. 5

MANUFACTURED BY

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY, U. S. A.

for

Raii ICorporation
of.america i
wool.woani sunwnc - wew Yoax crnr
 RADIOLA II
MODEL AR -800
ADIOLA II, when used with an average antenna, constitutes a complete equipment for the reception of radio tele-
phone and telegraph signals of any wavelength between Zoo and boo meters. It includes a regenerative tuning system
employing a vacuum tube detector and one stage of audio-frequency amplification. The set is made conveniently
portable by the use of Radiotrons, Model UV -199, operated entirely by standard dry batteries. Space is provided in the
rear compartment for the batteries, for portable use, and in the front cover for the telephones. The carrying handle can
easily be removed when not in use.
Radiola II gives excellent results with head telephones. It can also be used with an amplifier to increase signal intensity,
for operating a loud speaker. At short distances from broadcasting stations, an additional amplifier will not always be
required for this purpose.
The following parts are packed with the set:
Two Model UV -'99 Radiotrons
One Pair of Head Telephones with UD -824 Plug.
For portable use the batteries required for installation in the rear compartment are:
Filament "A" battery-two 4 j volt, 3 cell flashlight batteries, h in. in diameter by 7 in. long approximately,
such as Eveready Tungsten No. 705, Burgess No. 232, Kwik-lite No. 1301, or equivalent.
Plate "B" battery- two 22% volt batteries, 2 in. by 235 in. by 3 % in., such as Burgess No. 4156, Eveready
No. 763, or equivalent.
For a permanent installation, larger capacity batteries may be used as follows:
Filament "A" battery-three a 35 volt dry cells, such as Columbia Ignitor No. 6, Manhattan Red Seal,
Burgess "Super-Six," or equivalent.
Plate "B" battery-two or four 22 Yi volt dry batteries, such as Eveready No. 768 or No. 766, Burgess
No. 5'56, No. 5156 BP, or No. 2156, or equivalent.
Grid Bias "C" battery-one 4% volt 3-cell flashlight battery, such as Eveready No. 751 or No. 703,
Burgess No. 432 or No. 532, or equivalent. (See below under "INSTALLATION.")
For antenna material, use the Model AG -788 Antenna Equipment.
ANTENNA SYSTEM
The accompanying drawing shows the correct arrangement of the antenna. A span of from 75 to too feet is desirable
and should be 2c feet or more above the ground. Reception improves with increased height. If the suggested length and
height cannot be secured, approach them as nearly as possible. The antenna should be at right angles to electric light,
power, and telephone wires and, if practicable, at least 15 feet distant from them. It must not be touched by any object
except insulators. The same precautions apply to the lead-in wire, which should be a continuation of the antenna wire
without any joints and run as directly as possible to the receiver. In receiving nearby stations, an indoor antenna even as
short as 20 to 3o feet will usually give satisfactory results and will have considerable selectivity. The indoor antenna may
consist of a wire run the length of the attic or just below the ceiling of an ordinary size living room.
Ground connection is a necessary part of every antenna. The ground wire (rubber covered No. 14 gauge) should be
connected as directly as possible to the house water pipes by means of a ground clamp. If water pipes are not available, use
a pipe driven deeply into moist ground and as near to the set as practicable. The ground wire and the pipe should be well
scraped and cleaned at the point of connection. For a protector, use Model UQ-'310 Lightning Arrester, or some other
approved device. Install it where the lead-in wire enters the house and connect as shown in the diagram. The installa-
tion shown and described in this diagram is in accordance with National Electric Code standards.
INSTALLATION
Locate the Receiver at a point conveniently near the lead-in and protector. Remove the front cover by pressing the
small black button in the upper right-hand corner and then swinging the cover out and lifting it from the hinges.
Before removing the head telephones from the front cover, observe carefully the manner in which they are secured in
place by the clips. They must be held thus when they are replaced and the cover is closed. Note also that all knobs must
be turned to "0" before the telephones are replaced. The cord is rolled up in a small bundle, a rubber band is placed
around the wires, and the cord is then held underneath the clip in the lower left corner of the cover. The telephone plug is
held by a clip in the lower right corner. The plug must be pushed into the extreme corner before closing the set.
Run a wire from the antenna terminal of the protector to the lower antenna post (marked "LONG") in the center left
side of the receiver panel. This is for wavelengths of from 375 to 600 meters. For wavelengths of from 200 CO 375 meters,
use the upper post (marked "SHORT"). Connect the "GROUND" post on the receiver panel with the ground terminal
of the protective device. The foregoing connections are as shown in the diagram.
 Porcelain Tube
Strain Insulator
Tie Wire No.l4 r A
Copper Wir- f'
Screw E e d 4

J- ' - =`_

The terminal posts marked "PLATE," "FILAMENT," and "GROUND" located on the right side of the panel arc
provided to permit convenient connections to an additional amplifier, when used. If a loud speaker is used without an
additional amplifier, connect the two wires from it to the "PLATE" and "FILAMENT" terminal posts. Make no
connections to these posts if neither amplifier nor loud speaker is used.
The location and connection of the batteries in the rear compartment for portable use are shown in Fig. 4. Initial or
renewal installations should be made as follows:

Remove the spring clamp in the

center of the battery compartment,
but do not disconnect any of the col-
ored flexible leads that connect the
Porcelain Tube
`No.14Copper Weld Wire compartment to the set. Put the two
Protector Rad iolaII flashlight batteries in the central space

A0 j Antenna Shor
Antenna Long
and tighten the thumb screws at the
bottom. Place the two midget "B"
batteries on the two shelves at the
right. Connect them in series, using
the double-ended spring clip. Con-
nect the negative (black) lead to the
black spring clip, and the positive
(red) lead to the red spring clip
marked "+4$V."
The installation and connection
of larger capacity external batteries
are made as shown in Fig. 3.
If those for portable use are in-
Rubber Covered stalled in the rear compartment, they
Ground Wire should be entirely removed or discon-
ll; Water Pipe nected. To disconnect them, the (+)
\Ground Clamp red lead is disconnected from the red
clip marked"+45V" and thrust back
into the compartment; the thumb
screws clamping the flashlight bat -
Fig 2 teries are loosened, and a small piece
of dry paper is folded and placed on top
of the batteries to prevent the center battery post from touching the metal contact strip. The three flexible leads (olive,
black and red) are then disconnected from the terminal board of the set, folded back in to the rear compartment and
clamped under the spring clamp provided for this purpose. Loosen the terminal nuts on the vertical terminal board
and let the two jumper connections drop down to the positions shown in the figure.
The three external dry cells are connected in series, and the negative (outside) terminal is connected by
means of an insulated wire passed through the bushing in the bottom of the set, to the post marked "A -4;4V" on
the horizontal terminal board inside the set.
 Strain Insulator
itenne Wire No.I4 Copper Weld

10.14 Copper Weld

Put folded piece

of dry paper here

B+45V
A -4f V
A+4i V
- 45 V
B
- Disconnect
Plus (+)Red
lead hers

Disconnect flexible
leads and fold
`under clamp

(+) BIAS-
(-) BIAS--
Solder
Connections

`C Battery "A" Battery

"B- Battery
Fig. 3
The four 22% volt "B" batteries are connected in series. The negative (black) lead is connected to the
positive (center) terminal of the "A" battery and this point connected to the post marked "A+4i5 V B-45 V"
on the terminal board. The positive (red) lead is connected to the "B+9oV" post on the vertical terminal board;
and the negative (black) lead of the third "B" battery is connected to the "B + 4$ V" post on the horizontal
terminal board.
The negative (long contact strip) of the grid bias battery is connected to the " -BIAS" terminal on the ver_
tical terninal board, and the positive (short contact strip) to the "+BIAS" terminal. Both connections should
be soldered to the grid bias battery.
Four 22% volt batteries providing a plate supply of go volts and a grid bias battery as specified, are recom-
mended if a loud speaker is used. For head telephone reception only, two 22% volt batteries providing a plate
supply of 4g volts will be sufficient. In this case, the grid bias battery should be omitted, and both jumpers should
be connected in accordance with Fig. 4.
The grid resistance, a 7 to g megohm unit, is held in position by spring clips under the tube socket.
 Remember that vacuum tubes must be handled carefully.
Before inserting the tubes in the sockets, be sure that the filament knob is in the "OFF" position. Place the brass base
of the tube in the socket and turn until the base pin drops into the slot; then press down gently on the tube and turn it to
the right into position.
Radiola II is now ready to operate.
OPERATION
Set the "INTENSITY" knob at "0." Light the tube filaments to a brilliancy explained in the instructions accom-
panying the tube, by turning the "FILAMENT" knob from "0" toward "10." With new batteries, from 1 to 4 is an
average setting, but this will increase as the batteries are used.

TwoFlashlight Batteries
Intensity
Coil
4 Voltsl Dia... 7'
Radiotrons UV -l99 Black Minus(-)Black
Plate
-O
Filarrer
Short Plus(+)
0-1 Ground
Red

Antenna
Camp
T 7 to 9Meg ohm Minus(-)
Grid Leak Transforme Black
Long UV -71Z
Plus(+)
Filamenti Red
Wavelength Rheostat By Pas]
Coil Condenser Red

bAS Detactckor Stage 'Jack

O
o
JJa

4
ilV IlV J]V e I
Dark Olive
Two"Midget
z
Qat ri¢s
Groùnd
Terminal Boards DarkOlivel Black-/ Red'
221 -Volts 3g%22i
Fig. 4
Adjust the telephones snugly to the ears and insert the plug attached to the telephone cord in the jack marked
"DETECTOR " A click should be heard on insertion or removal of the plug.
Turn the "WAVELENGTH" knob slowly until a signal is heard, and set it at the point where the signal is loudest.
If no signals are heard or if they are very weak, slowly turn the "INTENSITY" knob clockwise, still searching for signals
with the "WAVELENGTH" knob.
When signals are heard, turn the "INTENSITY" knob still farther, thus increasing the signal strength. Should
it be advanced too far, a click will be heard in the telephones and then all signals will have a "mushy" sound. AT THIS
POINT THE. RECEIVER BECOMES A TRANSMITTER AND SERIOUSLY INTERFERES WITH NEIGH-
BORING RADIO RECEIVERS. THIS CONDITION OF OSCILLATION MUST BE AVOIDED, BUT IF IT
DOES OCCUR, IMMEDIATELY TURN THE "INTENSITY" CONTROL BACKWARD SLIGHTLY UNTIL
THE SIGNAL CLEARS UP.
To increase the signal strength still further, insert the telephone plug in "STAGE 1." This may require a slight read-
justment of the "INTENSITY" knob.
The "VERNIER" knob provides a fine adjustment of the wavelength.
When the telephone plug is withdrawn, the amplifier or loud speaker, if either is connected, will be in circuit.
When the receiver is not in use, be sure to cut off the tube current by turning the "FILAMENT" knob to the
"OFF" position.
POSSIBLE CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION
t. Poor or broken connections in antenna or ground wires, or defective insulation of antenna.
2. "FILAMENT" control improperly adjusted.
3. Improper adjustment of "INTENSITY," "WAVELENGTH," and "VERNIER" controls.
4. Batteries exhausted (indicated by low filament brilliancy or weak signals and noisy operation).
5. Battery connections improperly made, or broken.
6. Poor or broken connections in telephone cord or plug.
7. Grid leak omitted.
8. Inoperative vacuum tubes.
 Radiola III
INTRODUCTION or any other good make of radio plate battery. The ones
listed are of the large size which are most economical but the inter-
The RADIOLA III is a high grade regenerative radio receiv- mediate size may also be used.
ing set especially designed for broadcasting reception. It uses "C" Battery for producing a negative grid potential, consisting
two WD-11 Radiotrons which are arranged to operate as a detector of one 1 3 volt dry cell. This may conveniently be the same as
and audio amplifier. Four antenna binding posts are provided so one of the cells of the "A" Battery, and this is recommended.
that a choice of two types of tuning circuit may be had. One is
a sensitive single tuning circuit that has made an excellent reputa- INSTALLATION
tion in the Radiola Senior, while the other is a more selective
circuit for use when interference is present. The apparatus is Location-The RADIOLA III should be placed as near as
mounted below an attractive horizontal panel of durable molded possible to the incoming wire from the antenna. A good ground,
material and is enclosed in a solid mahogany case. A flexible such as a water pipe, should be not far away. The set may be
cable is provided, by which all battery connections are made, placed on a small table so that the batteries may rest on the floor
thus, the set may be placed on a table while the batteries are placed or elsewhere out of the way.
on the floor or elsewhere out of the way.
Antenna
EQUIPMENT Outdoor Type-In general, best results will be obtained with
an outdoor antenna from 50 to 150 feet long and 20 or more feet
Material Furnished above the ground. If these dimensions cannot be secured, ap-
Under the name of RADIOLA III, there is included the follow- proach them as nearly as possible. The antenna should be located
ing material: in a space above the tops of surrounding buildings and in a space as
RADIOLA III Receiving Set as described, free as possible from other objects. It should not be touched by any
Two RADIOTRONS, Type WD -11, other object than the antenna insulators. The same precautions
One Telephone Headset. apply to the lead-in, which should preferably be a continuation of the
antenna wire to eliminate joints, and should run as directly as pos-
Additional Material Needed sible to the receiver. The antenna should be at right angles to
any electric light and other wires and if practicable, at least 15 feet
To complete a new installation, the following material will distant from them and from other antennae. It should be erected
also be needed: in a strong and durable manner in accordance with the require-
Complete Antenna and Ground Outfit, A, B and C Batteries ments of the National Electric Code.
as follows: Indoor Type-For local reception, and in some cases for dis-
"A" Battery for filament heating, consisting of from four to tant reception, satisfactory results may be secured by using
six 13 volt dry cells connected in parallel, such as one 20 to 40 feet of ordinary cotton covered magnet or bell wire (about
of the following: 18 to 22 B & S gauge) strung around a picture moulding or else-
4 to 6 Eveready Radio "A" Batteries s 7111. where as high up as possible. This type of antenna is particularly
4 to 6 Burgess "A" Batteries 5 6. suitable for use in apartment houses or similar buildings but will
4 to 6 Ray -O -Vac "A" Dry Batteries *1211. not give satisfactory results in steel frame buildings or in ones
4 to 6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells fY 2445. having metal lath under the plaster.
4 to 6 Columbia Ignitor 5 6 Dry Cells.
or any other make of good dry cell having approximate Ground
dimensions of 2 inches diameter by 6 inches high. A good ground is as necessary as a good antenna. The best
A two volt (one cell, lead type) storage battery may be used. ground is a good electrical connection to a water pipe. If this is
"B" Battery for supplying power to the plate circuits, con- not convenient, a connection to the steam or hot water heating
sisting of two 22 volt plate batteries connected in series system will usually serve almost as well. Connections to gas pipes
or of one 45 volt plate battery, such as one of the following: should be avoided. If nothing of this nature is available, a pipe
2 Eveready 5 766 Plate Batteries. or metal rod may be driven into the ground to a depth of several
2 Burgess 5 2156 Plate Batteries feet, preferably where the soil is moist. The ground connection
2 Ray -O -Vac 5 2151 Plate Batteries. should be made with a ground clamp to which the wire is soldered
2 Ace 5 115 Plate Batteries. or securely held by gripping under a screw or nut. In any case the
or pipe must be scraped or filed until clean and bright before attach-
1 Eveready 5 767 Plate Battery. ing the ground clamp. Usually, connecting to more than one
1 Burgess 5 2306 Plate Battery. ground, for instance, to both water and steam pipes, will improve
1 Ray -O -Vac 1K 2301 Plate Battery. reception.
Connections negative side of the second "B" battery. Now find the cable con-
Three separate batteries are needed to operate Radiola III. ductor which has a maroon braid and a tag marked "+20 B".
The "A" battery heats the filament of the Radiotrons, the "B" Connect this to the positive terminal of the first "B" battery.
battery supplies the power to the plate circuits and the "C" battery Also find the conductor with the red braid and a tag marked
controls the grid potential of the amplifier Radiotron so that ampli- "+40 B". Connect this to the positive terminal of the second
fication will be undistorted and the "B" battery will last longer. "B" battery.
The connection of these batteries may best be understood by The "C" battery is shown at the extreme left and consists
reference to the diagram in Fig. 2. Near the center are shown two of a single dry cell similar to one of the units of the "A" battery.
* 6 dry cells marked "A Battery". These are to be connected in Using a short piece of wire, connect one of the outside terminals of
parallel, that is, the outside terminals are to be connected together the "A" battery to the center terminal of the "C" battery. Then
by one piece of wire and the center terminals by another piece of find the cable conductor which has a black field with a green tracer
wire. Under no condition must these two wires touch each other and connect it to the outside terminal of the "C" battery.
or the cells will be ruined in a few minutes. The Radiola III is The ground wire should be connected to the negative terminal
provided with a five conductor cable, the lower end of which is of the first "B" battery or to either positive (center) terminal of
shown at the top of figure 2. Each of the conductors has a braid the "A" battery, whichever is most convenient. This wire should
of distinctive color which designates the purpose of that particular run as directly as possible to the ground clamp.
conductor. The one with the green field and yellow tracer which The antenna lead from the lightning arrester or switch should
carries a small tag marked "-A+C" is to be connected to the be a piece of flexible wire long enough to reach any one of the
negative side (outside terminals) of the "A" battery. It may be antenna posts at the right side of the set.
connected to either terminal or to the wire which connects them. , Great care should be taken to keep all connections tight, as
The conductor having a yellow field with red and blue tracers is to failure to do so may result in objectionable noises or render the set
be connected to the positive side (center terminals) of the "A" inoperative.
battery. It may be connected to either terminal or to the wire
which connects them. Be sure to make all connections tightly OPERATION
and securely. Controls
Before proceeding further unpack the two WD -11 Radiotrons Battery Setting-The control so marked serves to turn on and
from their cartons. Turn the knob marked "Battery Setting" regulate the current to the filaments of the Radiotrons. When the
near the left rear corner of the panel as far to the left as possible set is not in use the pointer of this control should always be turned
until the pointer rests on "OFF". Then insert the WD -11 as far to the left as possible, so that it points to "OFF". When it is
Radiotrons in their sockets which are located just below the oval desired to operate the set, turn the "Battery Switch" knob to the
hole in the panel. The pins on the bases of the Radiotrons fit into
right until the filaments glow at a dull red color.
sliding contacts which are located in holes in the sorl-et panel.
The sockets are so arranged that the large pin will be toward the Station Selector-The control so marked serves to adjust the
front of the set. The socket panel is flexibly supported on rubber tuning circuit so that the set will respond to the desired wave-
but is equipped with stops which prevent motion too far vertically length.
in either direction. Be sure to push the Radiotrons down into the Amplification-The control so marked adjusts the regeneration
sockets as far as they will go, that is, until the molded base of the and thus regulates the sensitivity and selectivity of the set.
Radiotron rests upon the socket panel. Then turn the "Battery Antenna Binding Posts-There are two types of circuit avail-
Setting"' knob to the right until the pointer comes between the able. One is a straight single tuning circuit noted for its sensi-
two "Ts" of the word battery. Look directly down into the Radio- tivity and ease of operation. The other is a type of coupled circuit
trons to see that the filaments of both are glowing at a dull red affording more selectivity. Either may be had at will by con-
heat. If either one fails to glow see that it is firmly in its socket necting the antenna to the proper binding post and putting the
and if the trouble still exists, interchange the Radiotrons. Both link in the proper position. Fig. 3 shows the suggested combina-
must glow or the set will not operate. If one cannot be made to tions which have the following properties.
glow it indicates that the filament has been broken and it must No. 1-Antenna on 4, link open. This is a single circuit con-
nection which on an average antenna will cover the approximate
be replaced by a new one. Having determined that both filaments wavelength range of 200 to 360 meters corresponding to a frequency
glow turn the "Battery Setting" knob back to "OFF".
range of 1500 to 830 kilocycles.
Then proceed with the "B" battery shown to the right in No. 2-Antenna on 3, link open. This is a single circuit con-
Fig. 2. This consists of two 223 volt blocks which are desig- nection which on an average antenna will cover the approximate
nated "B Battery". Using a short piece of wire connect one end wavelength range of 250 to 480 meters corresponding to a frequency
to a center terminal (positive) of the "A" battery and connect the range of 1200 to 625 kilocycles.
other end to the negative terminal of one of the "B" batteries. No. 3-Antenna on 2 and 3, link open. This is a single circuit
Using another short piece of wire connect one end to the positive connection which on an average antenna will cover the approximate
terminal of the same "B" battery and connect the other end to the
wavelength range of 315 to 560 meters corresponding to a frequency of the detector Radiotron. In race it becomes impossible to
range of 950 to 535 kilocycles. make the set oscillate it is an indication that the antenna or ground
No. 4-Antenna on 2 and 3, link on 4. This is a closed single should be improved, that the detector Radiotron should be re-
circuit which on a very small antenna, such as an indoor one, will placed, or that the first "B" battery is becoming discharged. To
cover the approximate wavelength range of 290 to 575 meters determine whether or not the set is oscillating place a finger upon
corresponding to a frequency range of 1070 to 520 kilocycles. any one of the antenna binding posts thereby stopping oscillation
No. 5-Antenna on 1, link on 4. This is a selective single and causing a distinct click in the headset which will be repeated
circuit connection which on an average antenna will cover the when oscillation starts upon removal of the finger.
approximate wavelength range of 195 to 375 meters corresponding In case it is impossible to make the set oscillate on all
to a frequency range of 1540 to 800 kilocycles. antenna combinations, disconnect the maroon cable lead (+20B)
No. 6-Antenna on 1, link on 3. This is a selective single from the positive terminal of the first block of the "B" battery
circuit connection which on an average antenna will cover the and connect it to the positive terminal of the second block,
approximate wavelength range of 310 to 640 meters corresponding (+40 volts).
to a frequency range of 970 to 470 kilocycles. When a set is oscillating strong whistling noises are produced
not only in your own set but in your neighbor's, which vary in
Finding Signals pitch as the "Station Selector" is turned. Also, much of the static
and other interference is stopped but a characteristic breathing
Select a suitable antenna connection according to one of the sound is produced. It becomes much more difficult to tune to a
combinations shown in Fig. 3. Generally the first trial may be station and it is impossible to get good, clear reception.
made using the single circuit connection with the intermediate If the receiver is allowed to oscillate it will disturb other
wavelength range, the second connection from the left. Push the nearby receivers. Therefore care should be exercised to avoid
telephone cord tip terminals into the holes at the left of the panel the oscillating condition, and whenever the receiver does oscillate
above and below the word "Phones". The contact toward the accidently, to stop immediately by turning the amplification control
rear of the panel is positive. Turn the "Battery Setting" to the back to the proper point.
right until both filaments glow at a dull cherry red. This should
happen by the time the pointer reaches the last letter of the word SOME CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION
"Battery", when the cells used in the "A" battery are fresh. Set Filaments fail to glow-"A" battery may be exhausted:
the "Amplification" at "3" and move the "Station Selector" slowly One of the leads may be disconnected: One Radiotron or more
back and forth over the scale. If signals are heard, carefully may not be making contact in the socket: The filament may be
adjust the "Station Selector" until the signals become loudest and broken Connections may be loose.
:

then turn "Amplification" to the right when the signals should No sound is heard-The filaments may not be lighted: The
become still louder. Do not turn amplification to the point where "B" battery may be disconnected or the leads reversed: The "B"
the signals become distorted or where whistles and howls are pro- battery may be exhausted: The leads to the head set may not be
duced. If no signals are heard the first time, turn "Amplification" connected: The "C" battery may be disconnected. If slight
one-half division to the right and try again. Turn "Station noises are heard and no signals, no station within range is operating.
Selector" slowly and listen carefully as signals are frequently very Howling noise-The antenna may be disconnected or the
weak when first received. Continue this process until results are link may be open when it should be closed: "Amplification" may
obtained. If the first antenna combination fails to give results be turned too far to the right: The "C" battery may be exhausted.
try another. Music or speech distorted-The bias battery connections
When "Amplification" is turned too far to the right the may be reversed: The "B" battery may be exhausted.
set will oscillate. This condition will be apparent by a breathing
noise and usually by whistling noises, the pitch of which varies as MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENTS
the "Station Selector" is turned slightly. The proper operating
point is with "Amplification" just below the point at which the set Radiotrons-Occasionally a Radiotron will become inoperative
will oscillate. After a little practice it will be possible to tell when on account of a broken filament or a cracked or broken bulb. When
this condition occurs as it is the most sensitive condition and static this happens it should be replaced by a new one. After many
noises will be loudest. Then the properr procedure when finding hours of service a Radiotron will occasionally lose its sensitivity.
signals is to turn "Amplification" up to this point and then adjust It will pay to obtain a new one when this happens.
the "Station Selector" until signals are heard. Careful adjustment "A" Battery-When the dry cells used for this purpose be-
of both "Station Selector" and "Amplification" will be needed to come discharged to the point where they will no longer heat the
obtain maximum strength of signals. filaments to the proper temperature they should be replaced by
The maximum sensitivity is obtained when a regenerative new ones. The same directions should be followed as for a new
set is adjusted so that it is just ready to oscillate. The ease with installation. Always remove Radiotrons from their sockets when
which a set oscillates depends upon the antenna and the condition replacing batteries.
 "B" Battery-It is rather difficult to know when these batteries
4 5
are exhausted, as there is no external indication except weakened
signals. The best way is to obtain a reliable voltmeter which will
indicate up to 100 volts at least and take weekly readings of your
batteries. Discard each block when the voltage per block falls to
17 volts.
"C" Battery-This battery should be replaced whenever its
voltage falls below 1.2 volts. The battery of the kind recommend- @2
ed should last for at least a year but a good plan is to use it for one
of the new "A" battery cells and replace it by a new one whenever @3
the "A" battery is replaced.
General-When asking for information about or for repair
parts for or when reporting troubles with this set please mention
e+01
the serial number which may be found on the bottom of the box. Short Wave Long W...
Long Wave
A complete diagram of connections is given in Fig. 4. for very Seleethe Selective
Small Antenna Circuit Circuit

For any Antenna

Fig. 3-Showing Antenna Connection. to Different Binding Peet.

C!
-0 s; o á-O?+
0.
+A -B GND.
+405
YELLOW WITH +205
RED AND BLUE MAROON RED
TRACERS

kz __4; -I
tt

BATTERY (BATTERVI

GROUND
Fig. 2-Battery Connection.

o
3

OI
@2 L?
.
m C
9,
111-- -0
á
0p
2 F-' Q
+
@4
Short Wave Medium Wave Long Ware
Single Circuit Single Circuit Single Circuit

For any Antenna

 Radiola fflA
INTRODUCTION
The Radiola III -A is a high grade regenerative radio receiving Two 45 Volt Plate Batteries may be used instead of four 223§ Volt blocks
set especially designed for broadcast reception. It uses four if desired, such as:
WD -11 Radiotrons which are arranged to operate as a detector 2 Eveready 8767 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) or,
and two stage audio frequency amplifier. The second stage uses 2 Burgess #2306 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) or,
two Radiotrons in a balanced circuit particularly arranged to 2 Ray -O -Vac 82301 Plate Batteries (45 Volts)
operate a loud speaker. By making the proper antenna connection OR EQUIVALENT
a choice of two types of tuning circuit is afforded. One is a sensi- NOTE-The plate or "B"'batteries listed are of the large sizes which are
tive single tuning circuit that has made an excellent reputation in most economical. Other intermediate sizes may be used equally well.
the Radiola Sr., while the other is a more selective circuit for use
when interference is present. The apparatus is mounted below an "C" One 434 Volt Negative Grid Bias or "C" Battery, such as:
attractive horizontal panel of durable moulded material and is 1 Eveready s 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery or,
enclosed in a solid mahogany case. A flexible cable is provided by 1 Ray -O -Lites 231-R Negative Grid Bias Battery or,
1 Burgess 8 2370 Negative Grid Bias Battery
which all battery connections are made, so that the set may be
placed on a table while the batteries are placed on the floor or OR EQUIVALENT
elsewhere out of the way.
INSTALLATION
EQUIPMENT Location:
Furnished:
The Radiola III -A should be placed as near as possible to the
Under the name of Radiola III -A, there is included the follow- incoming lead from the antenna. A good ground such as a water
ing apparatus: pipe should be not far away.
Radiola III -A Receiving Set as described When a loud speaker is used, most pleasing results will be
Four Radiotrons, Type WD -11 obtained when it is used in a fairly large room which does not have
One Telephone Headset bare walls, as draperies, hangings, irregular surfaces, etc., will
prevent undesirable reflections of the sound waves.
Additional Material Needed:
Antenna :
To complete a new installation, the following items will also
be needed. Outdoor Type-In general, best results will be obtained with
A, B and C Batteries. an outdoor antenna from 50 to 150 feet long and from 20 to 40 feet
Loud Speaker, Radio Corporation, UZ -1325. above the ground. If the suggested dimensions cannot be secured,
Complete Antenna and Ground Outfit. approach them as nearly as possible. The antenna should be
located in a space above the tops of surrounding buildings and
BATTERIES REQUIRED trees or in a space as free from other objects as possible. It should
not be touched by any object other than the antenna insulators.
(A) Refers to Filament Lighting or "A" Battery The same precautions apply to the lead-in wire which should pre-
(B) Refers to Plate or "B" Battery ferably be a continuation of the antenna wire to eliminate joints,
(C) Refers to Negative Grid Bias or "C" Battery and should run as directly as possible to the receiver. The antenna
"A" Four or Six 135 Volt Dry Cells connected in PARALLEL, such as: should be at right angles to any electric light and other wires which
4 to 6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries or, may cause disagreeable noises, and if practicable at least 15 feet
4 to 6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells or,
4 to 6 Burgess s 6 Dry Cells or, distant from them and from other antennae. It should be erected
4 to 6 Ray -O -Vac *1211 Dry Cells in a strong and durable manner in accordance with the require-
Nors-A two volt Storage Battery may be used if desired ments of the National Electric Code.
OR EQUIVALENT If an antenna is already available, it may be used provided
"B" Four 2231 Volt Plate Batteries connected in SERIES, such as: that it is erected in accordance with the above instructions.
4 Eveready *766 Plate Batteries or, Indoor Type-For local reception, and in some locations for
4 Burgess 8 2156 Plate Batteries or,
4 Ray -O -Vac *2151 Plate Batteries distant reception, satisfactory results may be secured by using 20
to 40 feet of ordinary double cotton covered magnet or bell wire
OR EQUIVALENT (about Ai 18 to 22 B & S gauge) strung around the picture moulding
or elsewhere as high up as possible. This type of antenna is visible.. It will probably be necessary to darken the room or at
particularly suitable for use in an apartment house or similar build- least shield the Radiotrons from direct illumination to see the glow
ing- of the filaments. If any filament does not glow see that the Radio-
tron is firmly in its socket, and if the trouble persists, try it in one
Ground: of the other sockets in place of a Radiotron which does glow. If it
A good ground is as necessary as a good antenna. The best still fails to glow, the filament is broken and it is of no more use.
ground is a good electrical connection to a water pipe. If this is not Having determined that all filaments are glowing, turn the "Bat-
convenient, a connection to the steam or hot water heating system tery Settings" back to "OFF" to conserve the filament battery.
will usually serve almost as well. Connections to gas pipes should Then proceed with the "B" battery which is shown to the right
be avoided. If nothing of this nature is available, a pipe or metal of the figure as consisting of four of the usual 223 volt blocks.
rod may be driven into the ground to a depth of several feet, pre- These are connected in series, that is, the positive of block number
ferably where the soil is moist. The ground connection should be 1 to the negative of block number 2. To do this, provide four
made with a ground clamp, the wire being soldered or held securely pieces of wire about 8 inches long. Arrange the blocks about as
by the clamping screw. In any case, the pipe must be scraped or shown. Call the one to the left number 1. One terminal (nega-
filed until clean before making the ground connection. Usually, tive) of this block will be marked "-" or " NEG". Connect this
connecting to more than one ground, for instance to both water and to a positive terminal on the "A" battery. The other terminal
steam pipes, will improve reception. (positive) of this block (number 1) will be marked "-I-", "+22),"
or "Pos". Connect it to the negative terminal of block number 2.
Batteries: Also connect the positive of block number 2 to the negative of
block number 3, and the positive of block number 3 to the negative
Three separate batteries are needed to operate Radiola III -A. of block number 4. One of the cable leads has a maroon braid and
The "A" battery heats the filaments of the Radiotrons, the "B" a tag marked "+ 20 B". Connect it to the positive terminal of
battery supplies the power to the plates for amplification and to block number 1. Another cable lead has a red braid and a tag
operate the loud speaker, and the "C" battery controls the grid marked "+ 80 B" Connect it to the positive terminal of block
potential of the Radiotrons so that amplification will be undistorted number 4.
and the drain of current from the "B" battery will be decreased. The "C" battery consists of a 4% volt battery especially
The connection of these batteries may best be understood by designed for this purpose. One terminal is marked "+" or "Poo".
reference to the diagram in Fig. 2. Remove the four WD-11
Radiotrons from their sockets while making the battery connections. Connect this by a short piece of wire to a negative terminal on the
In the center are shown five iK 6 dry cells. These are connected "A" battery. Connect the remaining cable lead with black braid
in parallel, that is, all the outside terminals are connected together and green tracer and with the tag marked "-C" to the terminal
by one piece of wire and then all the center terminals are con- marked "-4h".
nected together by another piece of wire. Under no conditions The wire to the ground connection should be connected to a
must these two wires touch each other or the cells will be ruined positive terminal on the "A" battery. It may not be convenient
in a few minutes. The Radiola III -A is provided with a five con- to connect so many wires to the same battery terminal but it is
ductor cable, one end of which is shown at the top of the figure. permissible to distribute them over several of the center terminals
Each of the conductors has a braid of distinctive color. The one so long as they all remain connected together.
with the green braid with yellow tracer and the tag marked "-A+C" Great care should be taken to keep the battery connections
is to be connected to the negative side of the "A" battery formed by tight, as failure to do so may result in objectionable noises, or
the four dry cells. It may be connected to any one of the outside complete inoperation of the set.
terminals or to the wire which connects them together. The wire
with the yellow braid with red and blue tracers and the tag marked OPERATION
+A-B Gnd" is to be connected to the positive side of the "A" Controls :
Battery Setting-The two knobs so marked serve to turn on
battery. It may be connected to any one of the center terminals or and control the current flowing through the filaments of the Radio-
to the wire which connects them together. Be sure to make all trons. When the set is not in use. both pointers should be turned
connections tightly and securely. Before proceeding further with as far as possible to the left so that they rest on "OFF". The knob
the batteries, unpack the four WD -11 Radiotrons from their car- in the center of the panel controls the filament current to the two
tons. Turn both knobs marked "Battery Setting" as far to the Radiotrons to the right while the knob at the left front corner con-
left as possible or until the pointer rests on "OFF". Then insert trols the two Radiotrons immediately behind it.
the WD -11 Radiotrons in their sockets which are located below the Station Selector-The control so marked serves to adjust the
openings in the panel. The Radiotrons can be inserted in but one tuning circuit so that it will respond to the desired wavelength.
way and that is with the large pin toward the front of the set. The long handle makes accurate tuning easy.
Push them down firmly. Then turn both "Battery Setting" Amplification-The control so marked adjusts the regenera-
knobs about a quarter turn to the right. By looking directly down tion and thus regulates the sensitivity and selectivity of the set.
into each Radiotron, the dull red glow of the filament should be
 Regeneration is obtained by the tickler method and the construc- tion" at about "3". Turn the "Station Selector" slowly back and
tion is such that changing the adjustment of the regeneration forth over the scale. If signals are heard, carefully adjust the
causes no appreciable change in the tuning. "Station Selector" until the signals become loudest and then turn
Antenna Binding Posts-There are two types of circuit "Amplification" to the right when the signals should become still
available. One is a straight single circuit noted for its sensitivity louder. Do not turn "Amplification" to the point where the
and ease of operation. The other is a type of coupled circuit signals become distorted or where whistles and howls are produced.
affording more selectivity. Either may be had at will by con- If no signals are heard the first time, turn "Amplification" one half
necting the antenna to the proper binding post and putting the
division to the right and try again. Continue this procedure until
link in the proper position. Fig. 3 shows the suggested combina-
tions which have the following properties. results are obtained. If the first antenna combination fails, try
No. 1. Antenna on 4, link open. This is a single circuit con- another.
nection which on an average antenna will cover the approximate When "Amplification" is turned too far to the right, the set
wavelength range of 200 to 360 meters corresponding to a fre- will oscillate. This condition will be apparent by a breathing
quency range of 1500 to 830 kilocycles. noise and usually by whistling noises, the pitch of which varies as
No. 2. Antenna on 3, link open. This is a single circuit con- the "Station Selector" is turned slightly. The proper operating
nection which on an average antenna will cover the approximate point is just before the set starts to oscillate. After a little practice,
wavelength range of 250 to 480 meters corresponding to a frequency it will be possible to tell when this condition prevails. Then the
range of 1200 to 625 kilocycles. proper procedure in finding signals is to turn "Amplification" up
No. 3. Antenna on 2 and 3, link open. This is a single to the proper point and then turn "Station Selector" until signals
circuit connection which on an average antenna will cover the are heard. Careful adjustments of both "Station Selector"
approximate wavelength range of 315 to 560 meters corresponding and "Amplification" will be needed to obtain maximum strength
to a frequency range of 950 to 535 kilocycles. of signals.
No. 4. Antenna on 2 and 3, link on 4. This is a closed single
circuit which on a very small antenna, such as an indoor one, will The maximum sensitivity is obtained when a regenerative
cover the approximate wavelength range of 290 to 575 meters receiving set is adjusted so that it is just ready to oscillate. With
corresponding to a frequency range of 1070 to 520 kilocycles. some antennae, it may be difficult to reach this condition, which is
indication that the antenna has very high resistance and should
No. 5. Antenna on 1, link on 4. This is a selective single be improved. Oscillation should occur before "Amplification"
circuit connection which on an average antenna will cover the reaches "10". When a set is oscillating, strong whistling noises
approximate wavelength range of 195 to 375 meters corresponding are produced, whose pitch varies as the "Station Selector" is turned.
to a frequency range of 1540 to 800 kilocycles. Also, much of the static and other interference is stopped but a
No. 6. Antenna on 1, link on 3. This is a selective single characteristic breathing sound is produced. It becomes much
circuit connection which on an average antenna will cover the more difficult to tune in a station and it is impossible to get good,
approximate wavelength range of 310 to 640 meters corresponding clear reception so that oscillation is to be avoided.
to a frequency range of 970 to 470 kilocycles.
ALSO IF THE RECEIVER IS ALLOWED TO OSCILLATE
Finding Signals: IT WILL DISTURB OTHER NEARBY RECEIVERS AND
Select a suitable antenna connection according to one of the
THEREFORE CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED TO AVOID
combinations shown in Fig. 3. Generally, the first trial may be
THE OSCILLATING CONDITION, AND WHENEVER THE
made using the single circuit connection with the intermediate
RECEIVER DOES OSCILLATE ACCIDENTLY, THIS
SHOULD BE STOPPED IMMEDIATELY BY TURNING
wavelength range, the second combination from the left. If a THE AMPLIFICATION CONTROL BACK TO THE PROPER
loud speaker is to be used, push its cord terminals into the pin
POINT.
jacks on either side of the word "Output" at the left of the panel.
In case it is impossible to make the set oscillate on all antenna
Then turn both "Battery Setting" knobs to the right until the
combinations, disconnect the maroon cable lead (+20B) from the
filaments of all four Radiotrons glow at a dull red color. If a
positive terminal of the first block of the "B" battery and connect
headset is to be used, push its cord terminals into the pin jacks it to the positive terminal of the second block (+40 volts).
just above the words "1st stage" near the front of the panel, and
then turn only the "Battery Setting" near the middle of the panel
until the filaments of the two Radiotrons at the right, glow at a SOME CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION
dull red color. The pin jack at the left is positive. The cord tip Filaments fail to glow-"A" battery may be exhausted: One
on the lead with the colored tracer thread should be inserted in this of the leads may be disconnected: One Radiotron or more may
jack. The other "Battery Setting" should be left in the "OFF" not be making contact in the socket The filament may be
:

position, unless the loud speaker is used. Then set the "Amplifica- broken: Connections may be loose: The remedy is obvious in
each case.
 This procedure may be carried out readily by reference to Fig. 2.
No sound is heard-The filaments may not be lighted: The This battery, if of the kinds given in the list recommended, should
"B" battery may be disconnected or the leads reversed: The "B" last at least six months.
battery may be exhausted: The leads to the loud speaker or head When asking for information about, or for repair parts for,
set may not be connected: The "C" battery may be disconnected or when reporting troubles with these sets, please mention the serial
If slight noises are heard but no signals, no station within range is number which may be found on the bottom of the box.
operating. A complete diagram of connections is given in Fig. 4.
Howling noise-The antenna may be disconnected or the link
may be open when it should be closed "Amplification" may be
:

turned too far to the right: The Bias battery may be nearly ex-
hausted.
Music or Speech Distorted-The bias battery connections
may be reversed: The "B" battery may be exhausted.

MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENTS

Radiotrons:
Occasionally a Radiotron will become inoperative on account
of a broken filament or a cracked or broken bulb. When this
happens, it should be replaced by a new one of the same type.
Occasionally after many hours of service (about 1000) a Radiotron
will lose its sensitivity. It will usually pay to obtain a new one
when this happens.
In emergency cases, the set may be operated with only one
Radiotron in the group at the left. This Radiotron may be used
equally well in either socket. The quality of reproduction is much
better when four tubes are used, however.

Filament or "A" Battery:

When the dry cells used for this purpose become discharged
to the point where they will no longer heat the filaments to the
proper temperature, they should be replaced by new ones.
The batteries may be replaced by disconnecting all wires from
battery binding posts. Then the cells may be removed and new
ones connected in their places. Attached to each lead is a marked
metal tag designating to which point the lead is to be connected.
Reference to Fig. 2, will preclude the possibility of an error in con-
nection, and will warrant careful attention. The carbon or center
post of a standard dry cell is positive.
DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES FROM SOCKETS
BEFORE REPLACING ANY BATTERIES. NEVER BURN
TUBES MORE BRIGHTLY THAN REQUIRED FOR A
REASONABLE SIGNAL.

"B" Battery:
It is rather difficult to know when these batteries are exhausted,
as there is no external indication except weakened signals. The
best way is to obtain a reliable voltmeter which will indicate up to
100 volts at least and take weekly readings of your batteries.
Discard each block when the voltage per block falls to 17 volts.

Bias or "C" Battery:

This battery should be replaced whenever its voltage falls be-
low 4 volts to insure the proper functioning of the Radiola III -A.
 4 5 o
1 2 3

OZ
03

Long Wave Short Wave Long Wave

Short Wave Medium Wave Long Wave for very Selective Selective
Single Circuit Single Circuit Single Circuit Small Antenna Circuit Circuit
For any Antenna For any Antenne

Fig. 3-Showing Antenna Connections to

Different Binding Posts

T Black with Green with Red

Yellow with Maroon
Green Tracer Yellow Tracer
,Red and Blue
Tracers A
A
b
-C -A -{-C + SOB
+A -B Gnd. + 20B
Fig. 1-Diagram of Connections
 Radiola
Balanced Amplifier
BATTERIES REQUIRED
INTRODUCTION (A) Refers to Filament Lighting or "A" Battery
(B) Refers to Plate or "B" Battery
Radiola Balanced Amplifier is a two-tube bal- (C) Refers to Negative Gril Bias or "C" Battery
anced audio frequency power amplifier, especially (A) Four or six 135 Volt Dry Cells connected in PARALLEL, such as:
4 or 6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries (234" x 634") or,
designed for use with the Radiola III, thus pro- 4 or 6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells (234" x 635") or,
4 or 6 Burgess No. 6 Dry Cells (234" x 6" ) or,
viding loud speaker operation under all conditions 4 or 6 Burgess Super Six Dry Cells (234" x 6" ) or,
of reception. It gives an advantage over the ordi- 4 or 6 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
4 or 6 Ace No. 6 Dry Cells (2
(2" x 634") or,
x 6 ') or,
4 or 6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells (2 " x 6 ")
nary cascade amplifier, as the balanced system NOTE-A two volt Storage Battery may be used if desired.
minimizes distortion of the voice or music. The OR EQUIVALENT
apparatus is mounted on a horizontal panel and (B) When the Radiola III is used alone, a "B"
enclosed in a wood cabinet from which a flexible battery voltage of 45 is recommended with a "C"
wire cable is provided for connection to the batteries. battery voltage of 1.5. When the Radiola III and
the Radiola Balanced Amplifier are used together,
a "B" battery voltage of 90 is recommended for
EQUIPMENT both. The proper "C" battery voltage is then
The equipment includes the following: .4.5. A total of four 22% volt blocks of "B" battery
will be needed.
1. Radiola Balanced Amplifier (less batteries). (B) Four 223,5 Volt Plate Batteries connected in SERIES, such as:
2. WD -11 Radiotrons. 4 Eveready No. 766 Plate Batteries (634" x 4" x 4") or,
4 Burgess No. 2156 Plate Batteries (634" x 4" x 3") or,
4 Ray-O -Vac No. 2151 Plate Batteries (6a " x 4" a 3") or,
4 Kwik-Lite No. 225 Plate Batteries (63j" x 4" x 3") or,
BATTERIES 4 Ace No. 115
4 Yale No. 1512-V
Plate Batteries
Plate Batteries
(654" x 4" x 3") or,
(634" x 4" x 3") or,
4 Bright Star No. 15-90 Plate Batteries (634" x 4" x 3") or,
When the Radiola Balanced Amplifier is used 4 Novo No. 268 Plate Batteries (634" x 4" x 3")
with the Radiola III Receiver, a common "A" OR EQUIVALENT
Two 45 Volt Plate Batteries may be used instead of four 2234 Volt blocks
battery for both units is recommended and the if desired, such as:
2 Eveready No. 767 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (6" x 634" x 3"
connections are shown in Figure 1. 2 Burgess No. 2306
) or.
Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (77 s" x 634" a 3" ) or,
2 Ray -O -Vac No. 2301 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (834" x 6r/s" x 33t") or,
As the combined units employ four WD -11 2 Novo No. 276 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (8' x 634" x 3" ) or,
2 Kwik-Lite No. 245 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (83r" x 634" x 3" ) or,
Radiotrons, five ordinary 11A volt dry cells, all 2 Bright Star No.30-90 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (13}' x 4" x 3" ) or,
2 Yale No. 3045-V Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (8" x 634" x 3" ) or,
connected in PARALLEL, arse recommended. 2 Ace No. 130 Plate Batteries (45 Volts) (133a' x 4" x 3" )

To Rodiolo Bolonced Amplifier To odiola Ili

Groan
+4013

Ground

Fig. 1-Showing Connections for Batteries

 OR EQUIVALENT Find the two yellow cable leads which are tagged
Nora-The plate or "B" batteries listed are of the large sizes which are
most economical. Other intermediate sizes may be used equally well. "-C" and connect them to the "-4-%" terminal
(C) One 4yß Volt Negative Grid Bias or "C" Battery, such as:
1 Eveready No. 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4" x 3" x 13/8") or of the "C" battery.
1 Ray -O -Lite No. 231-R Negative Grid Bias Battery(4" x 3" x 1178") or,
1 Burgess No. 2370 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4" x 3" x or, Connect the four "B" batteries in stries as shown
1 Yale No. 312 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4" x 3" x 1 " or,
1 Bright Star No. B-34-17 Neg. Grid Bias Battery (4" x 3" x 1 B") or, in the figure. Using short pieces of wire, connect
1 Novo No. 288 Negative Grid Bias Battery

OR EQUIVALENT
(4" x 3" x 13
the negative (-) terminal of one block to a center
(positive) terminal of one of the "A" battery cells.
INSTALLATION Then connect the positive terminal of the same
Location: block to the negative terminal of the second block
and similarly, the positive of the second to the
The input jacks on the Radiola Balanced Ampli-
negative of the third and the positive of the third
fier will be in line with the output jacks of the
to the negative of the fourth.
Radiola III when the Amplifier is placed at the left.
Connections may be made by the jumpers furnished Find the brown lead from the Radiola III cable
with the amplifier. which is tagged "+ 20 B" and connect it to the
positive terminal of the first "B" battery.
Find the two green cable leads, the one from the
Connections to Batteries: Radiola III being tagged "+40B" while the one
All battery connections are made through the from the amplifier is tagged "+80 B" and connect
flexible cables. Proceed as follows: them to the positive terminal of the fourth "B"
Connect the five 1% volt dry cells in parallel, battery.
that is, connect all the center binding posts (posi- Connect one of the center (positive) terminals of
tive) together with one piece of wire and then an "A" battery cell to the ground clamp.
connect all the outside binding posts (negative)
Connection of Loud Speaker-Push the tips on
together with another piece of wire. Under no the end of the loud speaker cord into the jacks at
circumstances allow these two wires to touch each
the left side of the Amplifier panel.
other.
Find the two black cable leads which are tagged OPERATION
"-A+C" and connect them to one of the outside Turn the knob marked "Battery Setting" to
(negative) battery binding posts. the right until both filaments glow with a dull red
Find the two red cable leads which are tagged color. No other adjustments of the Amplifier can
"+A-B Gnd" and connect them to one of the be made or need to be made. The Radiola III
center (positive) battery binding posts. Receiver is to be operated according to the instruc-
Turn the knobs marked "Battery Setting" to tions supplied with it.
the left until the pointer rests on "Off". Remove When the set is put out of use, turn the knob
the WD -11 Radiotrons from their packages and marked "Battery Setting" as far to the left as
place them in the sockets taking care to push possible.
them in firmly until the bases rest against the
socket panels. The large pin is toward the front Difficulties-If the set fails to operate, there is
of the set. Turn the "Battery Settings" until the always a definite reason. Carefully check all con-
nections to see that they correspond with the direc-
pointers extend to the left. Look directly into
tions given (See Figure 1) noting particularly the
each Radiotron to see that the filament glows
polarity of all the batteries. See that the filaments
dimly.
of both Radiotrons glow at a dull red heat. If
Then connect one end of a short piece of wire to there is no sound whatsoever and the Radiola III
the positive (71-) terminal of the "C" battery and Receiver is known to be operating well, the "B"
the other end to an outside (negative) terminal battery connections to the Amplifier are probably
of one of the "A" battery cells. reversed.
 MAINTENANCE
Plate or "B" Battery-If large size "B""batteries
Radiotrons-The WD -11 Radiotrons may be-
are used, they should last for several months and
come inoperative through a broken filament or
otherwise, in which case they should be replaced
frequently longer. When signals become weak with
by new ones of the same type.
the filaments at proper temperature, the "B"
batteries should be replaced by new ones.
Filament or "A" Battery-When the dry cells Bias or "C" Battery-If the bias battery is
used for this purpose become discharged to the replaced by a new one every time the "B" battery
point where they will no longer heat the filaments is replaced, it should give no trouble.
to the proper brilliancy, they should be replaced
by new ones.

Yellow Red Blaclr

-C +A -B -A#C #8
Fig. 2 --Diagram of Connections
RADIOLAS III, III -A AND BALANCED AMPLIFIER
USING RADIOTRONS UX-199 AND UX-120

Radiolas III, III -A and Balanced Amplifier were originally designed and
ASequipped with Radiotrons W D-1 a few slight changes in connections and
1

operation become necessary when Radiotrons UX-120 are used, as follows:

RADIOLA III -A
In the case of the Radiola III -A two approved methods of use are suggested: the first
being particularly recommended to the layman because of its simplicity; the second being recom-
mended to the dealer who has a service man at his disposal, or to the owner who has the equip-
ment for making the necessary changes.
Method I: ( See Figure 1)
A six ohm Rheostat is connected in the battery circuit as shown in Figure 1. The
following equipment will be required:
1 Radiola III -A (Stripped)
1 Radiola Loud Speaker UZ -1325 or Model 100

1 Radiotron UX-199 for detector socket

3 Radiotrons UX-120 for other sockets
4 Na-Ald Adapters Model No. 421-X or Marco Adapters No. 206
1 Six ohm Rheostat (table mounting type)
1 Five foot length lamp cord.
"A" Battery consisting of six standard dry cells, 1/volts each, such as:
6 Burgess No. 6 Dry cells or
6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 or
6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells or
6 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
OR EQUIVALENT
"B" Battery consisting of three 45 volt extra large Heavy Duty plate batteries, such
as:
3 Burgess No. 10308 plate batteries or
3 Eveready No. 770 or No. 486 plate batteries or
3 Ray -O -Vac No. 9303 plate batteries
OR EQUIVALENT
"C" Battery consisting of one 22/ volt plate battery (with taps for variable volt-
age) such as:
1 Burgess No. 2156 ox
1 Evereadv No. 766 or
1Ray -O -Vac No. 2151
OR EQUIVALENT
Before connections are made, the external Rheostat should be turned to its "OFF" posi-
tion (so that movable arm does not touch resistance winding). All connections should then be
checked against Figure 1.
It is important that adapters be fastened to the Radiotrons before they are inserted in the
sockets of the Radiola. The UX-199 Radiotron is inserted in the detector socket, which is the
one nearest the antenna binding posts.
Both "BATTERY SETTING" controls should be set and permanently left FULL ON,
-that is, turned as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
The filament current to the Radiotrons is turned ON and OFF and is entirely regulated
by means of the external six ohm Rheostat, which for convenience may be mounted on the side
or end of the case of the Radiola.
To insure long life to both Radiotrons and batteries, the external Rheostat should not be
advanced any further than necessary to obtain normal results. However, as the voltage of the
Page Four
 BATTERY CABLE -- 3 UX-120
RADIOTRONS
/I
1\
1 UX-199

N _FLEXIBLE
I (RADIOTRON

LAMP CORD d II I : ' *. Ilir

-
6 OHM
RHEOSTAT
RADIOLA III -A

222 VOLTS - 4i VOLTS 45 VOLTS-

90 VOLTS - 135 VOLTS

MUNK
p, T
`fie ElEMENá
,

'II I,,'u'

22i VOLT 6 IÉ VOLT DRY CELLS IN SERIES - 3 EXTRA LARGE

PLATE OR
USED AS
B" BATTERY
"C" BATTERY
PARALLEL 10 GIVE 4 VOLTS

FIGURE i
HEAVY DUTY °B' BATTERIES

GROUND
1
RADIOLA III -A
I UX-199 RADIOTRON
3 UX- 170 RADIOTRONS

"A" battery decreases thru use, it will be necessary to advance the setting of the external Rheo-
stat to maintain normal filament terminal voltage. "A" battery renewal is not required until it
becomes necessary to advance the external Rheostat to its maximum current position to obtain
normal results.
Important: Do not attempt to operate the set with only two of the Radiotrons lighted,
for by so doing, excessive filament voltage will be applied.
Method II: (See Figure 2)
No additional Rheostat is required. Only the controls on the panel are used. Two
changes in the wiring by which the rheostats of the Radiola are connected in series, will be re-
quired as shown in Figure 2.
Equipment required for operation is the same as in Method I above except the external
Rheostat and lamp cord are not required. The following tools are necessary to make the change:
1 Screw Driver
1 Small pair pliers

1 Soldering iron.

If it becomes necessary to use additional solder, rosin core string solder is recommended. In
order to avoid trouble resulting from corrosion, soldering paste or acid should not be used.
Page Five
 -A BATTERY LEAD
,d {GREEN WITH YELLOW
TRACER OR PLAIN BLACK

FIGURE 2

RADIOLA
111-A
CHANGE WIRES AS FOLLOWS: -
d -e -f TO d -e -g
h- i -g TO h- i -j
j -k AND f-1 REMAIN THE SAME

To change wiring of Radiola III -A refer to Figure 2 and proceed as follows:

(1) Remove screws at sides of wooden case. Push several inches of battery cable into case
and lift panel.
(2) Untie strain cord which holds cable to frame of transformer.
(3) Unsolder black flexible lead "h -i -g" at "g" (fig. 2) and resolder it to "j".
(4) Without disturbing bus -bar "I -f", unsolder flexible battery cable lead "d -e -f" and
resolder to "g" (from which a connection was just removed) thus forming the connec-
tion "d -e -g".
(5) Fasten strain cord to frame of transformer so that the individual cable leads are re-
lieved of possible tension.
After either or both "BATTERY SETTING" controls have been set at "OFF", the
UX-199 Radiotron with adapter attached should be placed in the socket nearest the Antenna Bind -
Page Six
ing Posts. The UX-120 Radiotrons with adapters should be inserted in the other sockets. Bat-
teries should be connected in the same manner as shown in Figure 1 except that the external
rheostat and lamp cord are omitted, and a connecting wire must be added to join the "+C" and
"-A" battery terminals.
In operation, both "BATTERY SETTING" controls must be slightly advanced from
the "OFF" position to light the filaments of the Radiotrons. Regulation may then be obtained
by means of either "BATTERY SETTING" control. "A" Battery renewal is not required
until it becomes necessary to advance both "BATTERY SETTING" controls (in a clockwise
direction) to their maximum current positions to obtain normal results.
Keeping the "BATTERY SETTING" controls as low as possible consistent with normal
operation, insures long life to both Radiotrons and batteries.

RADIOLA III AND BALANCED -AMPLIFIER

Best operation of the Radiola III and Balanced -Amplifier will be realized when Radiola
III equipped with 2 UX-199 Radiotrons and Radiola Balanced -Amplifier with 2 UX-120
is
Radiotrons.

BATTERY CABLES 2- UX-IZO

7 RADIOTRON
2- UX-199
(RADIOTRON

FLEXIBLE
LAMP CORD
V
á 00

6 OHM; %/
RHEOSTAT
RADIOLA RADIOLA-III
BALANCED -AMPLIFIER

22z
135 VOLTS
VOLTS
90 VOLTS-~
42 VOLTS
45 VOLTS
4Z
+
lemma
le
VOLTS +ttis
III
m
/iP
gip') II

TAPPED 222 VOLT 6-IgVOLT DRY CELLS IN SERIES - 3 EXTRA- LARGE

PLATE OR 'IN BATTERY PARALLEL TO GIVE 4i VOLTS HEAVY DUTY "B" BATTERIES
USED AS'C"' BATTERY

FIGURE 3 GROUND

RADIOLA-IIIAND RADIOLA BALANCED -AMPLIFIER

2 UX-I99 RADIOTRONS FOR RADIOLA-III
2 UX-120 RADIOTRONS FOR RADIOLA BALANCED -AMPLIFIER

Page Seven
 A six ohm external rheostat is connected in the battery circuit according to the diagram
in Figure 3. The following apparatus will be required:
1 Radiola III (stripped)
1 Radiola Balanced -Amplifier (stripped)
1 Radiola Loud Speaker U7-1325 or Model 100

2 Radiotrons UX-199 for Radiola III

2 Radiotrons UX-120 for Radiola Balanced -Amplifier
4 Na-Ald Adapters Model 421-X or Marco Adapters No. 206
1 Six ohm Rheostat (table mounting type)
1 Five foot length lamp cord.
'A" Battery consisting of six standard dry cells, 1/ volts each, such as:
6 Burgess No. 6 Dry Cells or
6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 or
6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells or
6 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
OR EQUIVALENT
"B" Battery consisting of three 45 volt extra large Heavy Duty plate batteries,
such as:
3 Burgess No. 10308 plate batteries or
3 Eveready No. 770 or No. 486 plate batteries or
3 Ray -O -Vac No. 9303 plate batteries
OR EQUIVALENT
"C" Battery consisting of one 22/ volt plate battery with taps for variable volt-
age (tapped battery necessary in this case) such as:
1 Burgess No. 2156 or
1 Eveready No. 766 or
1 Ray -O -Vac No. 2151
OR EQUIVALENT
Before connections are made, the external rheostat should be turned to its "OFF" posi-
tion (so that movable arm does not touch resistance winding). All connections should then be
checked against Figure 3.
It is important that adapters be fastened to the Radiotrons before they are inserted in
the sockets of the Radiola. The 2 UX-199 Radiotrons with adapters are then inserted in the
Radiola III and the 2 UX-120 Radiotrons with adapters in the Balanced -Amplifier unit.
Both "BATTERY SETTING" controls should be set and pernianently left FULL ON,
that is, turned as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
The filament current to the Radiotrons is turned ON and OFF and is entirely regulated
by means of the external six ohm Rheostat, which for convenience may be mounted on the side or
end of the case of either receiver or amplifier unit.
To insure long life to both Radiotrons and batteries the rheostat should not be advanced any
further than necessary to obtain normal results. As the voltage of the "A" battery decreases
thru use, however, it will be necessary to advance the setting of the external rheostat to maintain
normal filament terminal voltage. "A" battery renewal is not required until it becomes neces-
sary to advance the external rheostat to its maximum current position to obtain normal operation.
Important: Do not attempt to operate the set with only two of the Radiotrons lighted,
for by so doing, excessive filament voltage will be applied.
Page Eight
 RADIOLA III
Improved operation of the Radiola 111 may be realized when it is equipped with the new
type Radiotrons. Two methods are here suggested: the first is particularly recommended for
reception of signals from distant broadcast stations where higher voltage amplification is de-
sired; and the second, which makes available greater loud speaker output without distortion,
is particularly recommended for loud speaker operation from local stations where the input en-
ergy to the receiver is high.

Method I: (See Figure 4)

Two UX-199 Radiotrons are used with a 20 ohm external Rheostat to control the
filament current. The following equipment is required.
Radiola III (Stripped)
1

Radiola Loud Speaker UZ -1325 or Model 100

1

2 Radiotrons UX-199
2 Na-Ald Adapters Model 421-X or Marco Adapters No. 206

BATTERY CABLE
Z UX-199
RADIOTRONS
V
\,FLEXIBLE
LAMP CORD
/°'!i
A

'4:
y
20 OHM
RHEOSTAT
RADIOIA-111

90 VOLTS
41 VOLTS -4. - 42 VOLTS R- 45 VOLTS

meant palm.
,
VOLT 3- VOLT DRY CELLS IN SERIES 2 EXTRA LARGE

1
1'2

"C" BATTERY TO GIVE 4ZVOLTS HEAVY- DUTY "B" BATTERIES

FIGURE 4 GROUND

RADIOLA - III
2 UX -199 RADIOTRONS

Page Nine
 1 Twenty ohm Rheostat (table mounting type)
1 Five foot length of lamp cord.
"A" Battery consisting of three standard dry cells 1/ volts each, such as:
3 Burgess No. 6 Dry cells or
3 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 or
3 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells or
3 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
OR EQUIVALENT
"B" Battery consisting of two 45 volt large or extra large plate batteries, such as:
Large Extra Large
2 Burgess No. 2308 or 10308 or
2 Eveready No. 772 or 486 or 770 or
2 Ray -O -Vac No. 2303 or 9303
OR EQUIVALENT
"C" Battery of 4% volts, such as:
1 Burgess No. 2370 or
1 Eveready No. 771 or
1 Ray -O -Vac No. 231-R
OR EQUIVALENT
Method II: (See Figure 5)
One UX-199 Radiotron is used in the detector socket (nearest the antenna binding
posts), and one UX-120 Radiotron is used in the amplifier or left hand socket. As in Method
I, a 20 ohm external Rheostat is used to control the filament current.
The following equipment is required.
1 Radiola III (stripped)
1 Radiola Loud Speaker UZ -1325 or Model 100
1 Radiotron UX-199 for the detector socket
1 Radiotron UX-120 for the amplifier socket
2 Na-Ald Adapters Model 421-X or Marco Adapters No. 206
1 Twenty ohm Rheostat (table mounting type)
1 Five foot length of lamp cord.
"A" Battery consisting of three standard dry cells 1/ volts each, such as:
3 Burgess No. 6 Dry Cells or
3 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 or
3 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells or
3 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
OR EQUIVALENT
"B" Battery consisting of three 45 volt large or extra large plate batteries, such as:
Large Extra Large
3 Burgess No. 2308 or 10308 or
3 Eveready No. 772 or 486 or 770 or
3 Ray -O -Vac No. 2303 or 9303
OR EQUIVALENT
"C" Battery consisting of one 22/ volt plate battery (with taps for variable
voltage), such as:
1 Burgess No. 2156 or
Page Ten
 1 Eveready No. 766 or
1 Ray -O -Vac No. 2151
OR EQUIVALENT
Figure 5 shows diagram of connections.

BATTERY CABLE -- 1 UX-I20

'4.7)( RADIOTRON

:.
i 1 UX-155
(RADIOTRON

\_FLEXIBLE
LAMP CORD

20 OHM '
RHEOSTAT
RADIOIA-III

135 VOLTS
90 VOLTS->
-.--2221- VOLTS -- 4Z VOLTS - 45 VOLTS -.
-1-

3 EXTRA LARGE
22; VOLT
6 I}VOLT DRY CELLS INS KIES-
"B' BATTERY
HEAVY DUTY "B' BATTERIES
PLATE OR
PARALLEL TO GIVE 4} VOLTS.
USED AS G` BATTERY

FIGURE 5 GROUND

RADIOLA- III
I UX-I99 RADIOTRON
I UX-I20 RADIOTRON

Before connections are made the external Rheostat should be turned to its "OFF" position
(so that movable arm does not touch resistance winding). All connections should then be checked
against Figure 5.
It is important that adapters be fastened to the Radiotrons before they are inserted in
the sockets of the Radiola. The UX-199 Radiotron is inserted in the detector socket which is the
one nearest the antenna binding posts.
The "BATTERY SETTING" control should be set and permanently left FULL ON,
that is, turned as far as possible in a clockwise direction.
The filament current to the Radiotrons is turned ON and OFF and is entirely regulated
by means of the external twenty ohm Rheostat, which for convenience may be mounted on the
side or end of the case of the receiver.
Important: Keep the external Rheostat setting as low as possible consistent with normal
operation to insure long life to Radiotrons and batteries.
Page Eleven
 Radiola 8
INTRODUCTION BATTERIES REQUIRED
RADIOLA IV is a complete dry cell operated vacuum tube A. Three dry cells 1% volts each, for lighting the filaments,
regenerative receiver and amplifier, including a self- 2% in. diameter or square by 6% in. high, such as
contained loud speaker. The only accessories not pro- Columbia No. 6, Mesco "Red Seal," Burgess "Super Six,"
vided are the antenna equipment and ground connection. Full or equivalent. Either the square or round style may be
instructions are given in another section for the erection of used.
antenna and for the ground connection. B. Four "B"or plate batteries, each 22% volts, eir in.
x 23% in. x 4% in., such as Burgess No. 5156 BP,
UNPACKING Eveready No. 768, or equivalent.
C. One "C" or grid bias battery, 4% volts, % in. x 1%
UNPACKING Radiola IV is so important a step that it in. x'2% in., such as Burgess No. 432, Eveready No.
will be found well worth while to follow these directions 751, or equivalent.
carefully. Radiola IV is wrapped in waxed paper as a protection
against moisture, and is suspended in a special shock absorbing
cradle. The rounded openings at either side of the case allow
place for the hands to grasp the entire cradle and lift it free INSTALLING BATTERIES
from the case. Next cut away the suspension strings of the
cradle, care being taken that Radiola IV is subjected to no BATTERY installation may begin with the small 4%-volt
severe jars as it is removed. grid bias battery. similar to that used in flat pocket flash-
Remove waxed paper; turn cabinet bottom side up, placing lights. This should be inserted in the special compartment
it on a smooth soft surface 'to avoid scratching or marring the provided in the rear of the right hand or "B" battery rack, in
finish. When turning or handling cabinet, care should be used such position that its protruding brass strips will make connection
to prevent cover from opening, thereby damaging the finish, with the spring contacts projecting to the rear from the under
stay joint or hinges. side of the long battery terminal board which holds the "B"
A package containing four (4) wooden feet and eight (8) batteries in place. The negative (long post) of the grid bias
screws will be found in bottom of packing case, held in place battery should be placed toward the right. The battery clamp
by burlap strip nailed to cleat. should not be fastened down, however, until the four oblong,
22% -volt " B " batteries have been placed in their compartments.
These wooden feet are marked 1, 2, 3, 4, corresponding to The four "B" batteries are placed side by side in their com-
same marks on bottom of cabinet. Feet should be screwed to partment as shown in Fig. 1. Counting from the left, the first
cabinet and cabinet turned over and placed on its feet. Care and third batteries are located with their (-) binding posts
should again be used in turning to keep cover closed. toward the rear, and the second and fourth batteries with their
The top of the case should now be lifted, whereupon the (+) red leads toward the rear.
automatic catch will hold it in position. This exposes the vacuum
tube cradle and the battery racks. No attempt should be made to Next, the three 1%-volt dry cells should be placed in the
remove the box to the right before the battery terminal board
which holds it has been removed: loosening the thumbscrews rack at the left and made secure by tightening the thumbscrews.
at either end will accomplish this. The box contains a pair of These are connected in series by means of the two short con-
sensitive telephone receivers, a plug to accommodate the tele- nectors which come packed in the box with the head telephones
phone cord tips, flexible silk covered connection cords with (see Fig. 1). Starting from left to right on the three cells or
plugs for connecting to the antenna and ground posts of the in their rack, fasten one end of a connector to the minus
antenna protector, two short connectors for use in connecting edge post of cell No. 1 at the extreme left, to the plus or center
post of cell No. 2. The second connector should be used to
the three dry cells ("A" battery) and one UV -199 Radiotron. the several
connect cells No. 2 and 3 in the same manner. Then unit
In the left rear of the cabinet interior there is a three com- wires which attach to the terminal board of the radio should
partment casting for holding the dry cells ("A" battery) in place. he connected to the different batteries as follows:
For shipment, these compartments are used to hold three of the 1. The gray wire tagged "A+4 % V." connects
with the cen-
four vacuum tubes supplied with the set. The thumbscrews ter (Positive) post of the "A" dry cell at the extreme left.
of the large clamp should be loosened to remove the tubes in left
their wadding. 2. The green wire tagged "+Bias" connects with the
The necessary batteries specified below are packaged hand terminal post, marked "+Bias" on the battery
separately and will be supplied by the retail dealer. terminal board.
 8. The red flexible lead (+) in the left rear corner of the
right hand "B" battery is also connected to this ter-
minal marked "+90 V."
9. The three remaining red flexible "B" battery leads
(positive) are connected to the negative binding post
terminals of the adjacent battery to the right.
10. The two brown silk covered flexible wires with plugs
connect with the Antenna and Ground posts of the an
tenna protector and plug into their respective jacks at
the rear of Radiola 1V. The plug with the red insert
should be used as the Antenna Plug.

OPERATION
Vacuum Tube Precautions. Due to the unusually small
filament, the vacuum tubes should be very carefully handled.
Before inserting the tubes, be sure that the filament rheo-
stat on the panel is "OFF."
Do not forget to turn the filament pointer to "OFF"
when the set is not in use, for if tubes are left lighted, their
life and the life of the battery will be prematurely shortened.
Each time the tubes are used, it is well to look inside to see
that all three are lighted and not at excessive temperature.
Insert one tube in each of the three sockets, and put the
Fig. I Interior View Showing Battery Connections extra tube, in its wrapping, down in the bottom of the cabinet.
In putting the tubes into the sockets, turn the tube until the
pin drops into the slot, then turn slightly to the right.
Before closing the cover, be sure that the small " volume
A -1% -volt dry cells ("A" battery-square or round style control" switch on the top of the radio unit is turned toward
may be used). the rear of the set.
B -22j2 -volt dry batteries ("B" battery). Now turn on the filaments as explained in next paragraph,
C -4% -volt dry battery ("C" battery-long blade toward set the "INTENSITY" pointer at zero and the set may be tuned.
right). Filament. The "FILAMENT" knob controls the brilliancy
D-Jumpers. of the filaments. When the batteries are new, the proper setting
E-Clamping screws for battery board. of the filament pointer should be somewhere between 1 and 4.
F-Minus (-) binding post terminals As the batteries grow older, it will be necessary to turn the
G-Plus (+) red leads. pointer further to secure normal operation.
H-UV-199 Radiotrons. When a station is heard, slowly decrease the filament bril-
J-6 to 9 Megohm grid leak.
liancy until the signal strength begins to diminish, then increase
K-Highest Value Transformer Resistance. the brilliancy just sufficient to restore full signal. strength.
L-Medium Value Transformer Resistance. Burning the filaments brighter than necessary decreases the
M-Lowest Value Transformer Resistance. life of the vacuum tubes. '
N-Volume Control. Tuning. Tuning involves the manipulation of the
3. The golden brown wire tagged "-Bias" connects with the wavelength control so that the apparatus may be adjusted
next terminal post to the right marked "-Bias" on the for a maximum signal from the broadcasting station. First,
battery terminal board. the head telephones should be connected to the plug and inserted
4. The small green wire jumper marked "A-4% V."attached in the jack marked "STAGE 1." After adjustments have been
to the terminal marked "+Bias" connects with the edg made, 'the plug may be removed, which will automatically
(-) post of the third "A" dry cell. throw, on the loud speaker. The " WAVELENGTH" knob should
be rotated very slowly back and forth over its scale until a
5. The black wire tagged "-90 V." connects with the nega- voice or music is heard in the head telephones. When the
tive (-) binding post terminal in the left rear corner of wavelength control has been adjusted kt the point where the
the left hand "B" battery. sound is loudest, the next step is to increase its intensity.
6. The yellow wire tagged "B+45 V."connects with the bind- The final careful adjustment of the "WAVELENGTH' control
ing post terminal in the left rear corner of the third should be made by turning the "VERNIER" knob in the bottom
"B" battery from the left. center of the panel.
7. The red wire tagged "+90 V." connects with the right Intensity. For the proper regulation of the "INTENSITY"
hand terminal post marked "+90 V." on the battery control, one should grasp the wave changing control with the
terminal board. left hand, and the "INTENSITY" knob with the right. Now, with
the right hand, advance the "INTENSITY" pointer to the position
where best increase of signal strength is obtained.
Should it be advanced too far, a click will be heard in the
telephones and then all signals will have a "mushy" sound.
At this point the receiver becomes a transmitter and seriously inter-
feres with neighboring radio receivers. This condition of oscilla-
tion must be avoided, but if it does occur, immediately turn the
intensity control backward until the signal clears up.
When the "INTENSITY" knob has been adjusted to the position
at which it works loudest and clearest, both the "WAVELENGTH"
and "INTENSITY" pointers may be turned slightly back and forth,
until the utmost degree of regeneration is obtained. The point just
before oscillations start is the most sensitive and most selectixe
condition of the receiver. There is also a condition in which
the tubes are on the verge of oscillating. The signals are heard, WC OC VC TC IC
but the quality is very poor. This condition can be avoided by Fig. S. Front View of Control Panel
turning the "INTENSITY" control slightly in the direction of zero.
FC-Filament Control.
WC-Wavelength Control.
IC-Intensity Control.
RtDIOLA IV VC-Vernier Control.
OC-First Stage Telephone Jack.
OLWC'ELA/N TUBE
TC-Second Stage Telephone Jack.
AU /9 COPPER
*WELD WIRE

GENERAL INFORMATION
467(01M
200-
900 M
Care and Maintenance. The antenna and ground
should be inspected occasionally to see that connections have
not become corroded, and that insulators are not dirty or broken.
Poor connections or bad insulators will increase the energy
losses in the system and will give poor and irregular reception.
6R00NO
It will also be well, after the set has been in service a year, to
6ROUI/D
RAM0. 487(804180-600 put a drop (not more) of oil on the intensity and wavelength
shaft bearings inside the set. Clean the exterior surface of the
cabinet as you would any fine piece of furniture.
Replacements. The batteries and the tubes are the only
Ing. 2. Installation of Radiola IV parts that will need to be replaced, unless some other part is
If the signals are coming from a nearby station, they may be accidentally broken.
so powerful that the amplifying tubes increase them to an
To replace the batteries, first carefully disconnect all wires
from the batteries themselves, and remove the old batteries
intensity greater than necessary. This will also give poor from the racks. It is not necessary to disconnect the leads from
quality of reproduction. The little switch inside the set and terminal boards.
adjacent to the tubes gives three steps of decreasing intensity
with increasing clarity, as the switch is turned toward the front POSSIBLE DIFFICULTIES
of the set. Be sure to turn it back when you wish to listen
for distant signals. Further reduction in signal strength may be Faulty Operation, Its Causes and Remedies. Any-
obtained by using a small antenna, by turning the "INTENSITY" thing which tends to increase resistance, or decrease insulation,
knob counter-clockwise, or by slightly detuning the signal will give poor operation. As the batteries grow old, they decrease
with the "WAVELENGTH" knob. This simultaneous adjustment of in voltage, and increase in resistance. As the tubes grow very
"WAVELENGTH" and "INTENSITY" knobs is simple enough for any old, the filaments become less and less effective. Each fault
one to perform, yet there is a proficiency which comes of practice however, suggests its own remedy.
that will enable one to n_k.ke the more careful adjustments
necessary to the tuning and amplification of more distant 1. Poor connections in antenna or ground wires or defective
stations. To obtain extreme ranges from Radiola IV, the insulation of antenna.
head telephones should be plugged in the jack of "STAGE ß" on 4. "FILAMENT" control not properly adjusted.
the control panel. The loud speaker is automatically dis- 3. Batteries exhausted (indicated by low filament bril-
connected when this is done. When the head telephones are liancy, weak signals and distortion).
not in use, they may be placed inside the cabinet, over the horn. 4. Battery connections improperly made, poor or broken.
 5. "INTENSITY" control not in correct adjustment. Fig. 4 shows how to string the antenna wire and make
6. Poor or broken connections in telephone cord or plug. the connections. A span of about 80 feet is desirable and
7. Inoperative vacuum tubes. should be 25 feet or more above the ground. In general, recep-
tion improves with increased height. If the suggested length
8. Glass tube resistances fallen out of their mountings. and height cannot be secured approach them as nearly as pos-
If you are not sufficiently familiar with the technical points sible. The antenna should be at right angles to electric light,
enumerated above call in the nearest Radiola dealer to assist power, and telephone wires and, if practicable, at least 15 feet
you. distant from them. It must not be touched by any object
In general the troubles common to radio sets and in fact
except the insulators. The same precautions apply to the lead-in
wire, which should be a continuation of the antenna wire with-
all electrical apparatus are reduced to a minimum in the out any joints and run as directly as possible to the receiver.
Radiola IV
The ground wire (14 B.&S. gauge) should be connected
ERECTION OF ANTENNA as directly as possible by means of a ground clamp to the house
water pipe, or to a pipe driven deeply into moist ground. The
Outdoor Antenna. The receiving antenna is the ex- ground wire and the pipe should be well scraped and cleaned
posed conductor by means of which a small portion of the energy at the point of connection. For the protector use Model UQ-1810
sent out by the distant transmitter is collected. So far as which has been approved and listed by the Underwriters' Labora-
possible, it should be placed above the tops of surrounding tories. Install it where the lead-in wire comes into the house.
buildings and trees and must be thoroughly insulated so that The antenna system as described and as shown in the diagram
no portion of the very small amount of energy picked up may is in accordance with National Electric Code Standards.
be lost. The instrument should be located conveniently near to the
d}Jil.`.xqM
protector. Attach the plug cords to the antenna and ground
6 NiqM1
«.(}vorycen.(z'neaw
Ru.(.
:c xl' xt terminals of the protector, and plug them into the jacks in
-, .

r
m . Son`nelwg.Lt.
e OC, .00M 350-600 rd Ground the rear of the set. There are two antenna jacks, one for wave-
R R 7
Green
01100.^ lengths between 200 and 400 meters, and one for wavelengths
G. i9.tV:mind Bawd.
PhrelRed Lead.
between 350 and 600 meters. Since most of the broadcasting
Ground bPanel 25
stations send on wavelengths between 360 and 400 meters,
-15r- áwO1;ty Minus( )B;Nuq bit.
they may be received with the antenna plugged into either of
-glade the jacks. If the low wave jack is used, they will tune between
-Sohlen emwe
7 and 10, while if the high wave jack is used they will tune
6049
between 0 and 3 on the wavelength dial.
and. ...we
Yellow

evá Yvl9 Red- Indoor Antenna. In receiving nearby stations, an

d,< indoor antenna even as short as 20 to 30 feet will usually give
6ef
\ r-
satisfactory results and will have considerable selectivity.
egm This is because of the extreme sensitiveness of the instrument.
w1wBM1.e.t.t
The indoor antenna may consist of a wire run the length of the
attic or just below the ceiling of an ordinary size living room.
Fig. 5. Schematic Wiring Diagram of Radiola IV The same ground connection is used as previously described.
 RADIOLA V
MODEL AR-885
RADIOLA V, when used with an average antenna, will receive radio telephone
and telegraph signals of any wavelength between 180 and 700 meters. By the use of
the easily installed longwave coil system (Model UL -1340), the set can be changed to
receive wavelengths of from 650 to 1150 and 1450 to 2800 meters. A regenerative
tuning system, vacuum tube detector, and two stages of audio frequency amplification
are provided. For head telephone reception from nearby broadcasting stations, a sen-
sitive mineral detector is supplied.
For a complete equipment, the following items are required:
RADIOLA V.
One UV-200 Radiotron (Detector).
Two UV -201 Radiotrons (Amplifiers).
Batteries:
One 6 -volt 40- to 80 -ampere -hour storage battery.
Two 22% -volt "B" batteries (one with 18 -volt tap).
Antenna Equipment (ask for G -E Model AG -788).
One Pair of Head Telephones with Plug (Model UD -824).
A loud speaker may also be used if desired.
ANTENNA SYSTEM
The accompanying drawing shows the correct arrangement of the antenna. A
span of from 75 to 100 feet is desirable and should be 25 feet or more above the ground.
Reception improves with increased height. If the suggested length and height cannot
be secured, approach them as nearly as possible. The antenna should be at right angles
to electric light, power, and telephone wires, and, if practicable, at least 15 feet distant
from them. It must not be touched by any object except insulators. The same
precautions apply to the lead-in wire, which should be a continuation of the antenna
wire without any joints and run as directly as possible to the receiver. In receiving
nearby stations, an indoor antenna even as short as 20 to 30 feet will usually give
satisfactory results and will have considerable selectivity. The indoor antenna may
consist of a wire run the length of the attic or just below the ceiling of an ordinary
size living room.
Ground connection is a necessary part of every antenna. The ground wire (rubber
covered No. 14 gauge) should be connected as directly as possible to the house water
pipes by means of a ground clamp. If water pipes are not available, use a pipe driven
deeply into moist ground and as near to the set as practicable. The ground wire and
the pipe should be well scraped and cleaned at the point of connection. For a pro-
tector use Model UQ-1310 or some other approved device. Install it where the lead-in
wire enters the house and connect as shown in the diagram. The installation described
and shown in this diagram is in accordance with National Electric Code standards.
INSTALLATION
Locate RADIOLA V near the lead-in and protector. Lift the mahogany top and
remove the covers of the units by pushing upwards on the catch and lifting the covers
backward and up.
When making connections to the receiver, use a long screw driver. Insert the wire
in the hole in the terminal before loosening the screw inside the case. Then loosen the
screw until the wire can be pushed all the way in, after which tighten the screw.
Run a wire from the antenna terminal of the protector to the antenna terminal
on the left end of the receiver. Connect the ground terminal of the protective device
to the ground terminal on the left end.
Locate the storage battery in any convenient place. If this is at any considerable
distance from tl e set, use heavy leads. Locate the plate "B" batteries as near the
 Porcelain Tubr
Strain Insulator
Tie Wire No.l4 A
Copper Wire ' 1

Screw E e C'd
,J\442-

An

Lead -in -Wire N

receiver as possible. When

using Radiotron UV -200
Porcelain Tube as a detector, make the
No.14CopperWeld Wire battery and other connec-
Radio a V Protector. tions as indicated on the
diagram. When Radiotron
UV -201 is used as a detec-
tor, omit the lead from the
18 -volt terminal of the bat-
Anten
tery and connect together
the "+18 V." and "+40
V." terminals on the rear

,
of the receiver.
When using Radiotron
+40V. Plus* Redc UV -200 as a detector,
+18V.
k;`ge

Rubber Caen
better results are some-
+ 6V.
Ground Wire times obtained by very
Plus(+) Red
r ,,
Illlllllnll`IIIIIIII
Ilil_I0
I
111 '
Ito mg I
: Ground Clamp

Water Pipe!
accurate adjustment of the
plate voltage. This can
easily be accomplished by
connecting the outside ter-
22zV. Plate Batteries Storage Battery
\Minus(-) Black minals of the Model
Potentiometer PR -536
separately) (purchased
across the 6 -volt storage battery and the middle terminal to the negative (-) of the
40 -volt plate battery, omitting the connections from the "-40 V." terminal of the
receiver to the plate battery.
The terminals on the right end of the receiver are for use in connecting a loud
speaker, which will be automatically disconnected when a telephone plug is inserted
in any jack.
Before inserting the tubes, be sure that the filament knobs are set at "OFF."
Place the tubes in the sockets as indicated in the cut and turn into place. The grid
leaks should be in position in the clips as shown.
After the covers and top have been replaced, the illumination of the tubes can be
observed through small holes in the front.
Radiola V is now ready for operation.
OPERATION
Adjust the telephones snugly to the ears and see that the telephone plug is properly
connected to the cord from the phones.
 Strain Insulator
Antenna Wire No.14 Copper Weld
r
W

N o.14 Copper Weld

USE OF CRYSTAL DETECTOR

Leave the filament knobs in the "OFF" position and bring the two detector
minerals into contact, using the lower thumbscrew to adjust the pressure, and the
upper knob to move the arm. Do not touch the metal parts. If there is any dirt or
dust on the minerals, clean them by scraping lightly with a penknife. Insert the
telephone plug in the left-hand jack.
Move the "WAVELENGTH" knob slowly over the scale until signals are
heard and let it remain at the point where they are loudest. The final adjustment for
wavelength is made with the Vernier knob in the lower left corner. The detector may
be readjusted in search of a more sensitive point. This completes the wavelength
adjustment. Signals from 180 to 400 meters will be found between 0 and 100 on the
dial, and from 380 to 700 meters between 100 and 200.
Always separate the minerals when they are not being used for crystal detector
reception.
USE OF VACUUM TUBES
Turn the filament knobs counter -clockwise to bring the tube filaments to prover
brilliancy. This is a little less bright than the ordinary incandescent lamp with UV -200
and UV -201
R adiotrons. Second Amplifier UV-201
Plug the First Amplifier UV -201
telephones Defector UV -200 or UV 201
into the
second jack
from the
left. A click
should be
heard in the
telephone
when the Grid Leak Grid Leak
plug is in- Model
serted or PR-516 Model
withdrawn. PR -523
Set the
"INTENS-
ITY" knob
at "0." Turn
the"WAVE-
LENGTH"
knob slowly
until a signal is heard, and leave it at the point where the signal is loudest. If no
signals are heard, or if they are very weak, slowly turn the "INTENSITY" knob
clockwise, still searching for signals with the "WAVELENGTH" knob.
When signals are heard, turn the "INTENSITY" knob still farther to increase
the signal strength. Should it be advanced too far, a click will be heard in the tele-
phones and then all signals will have a "mushy" sound. At this point the receiver
becomes a transmitter and seriously interferes with neighboring radio receivers. This
condition of oscillation must be avoided, but if it does occur, immediately turn the
"INTENSITY" control backward until the signal clears up.
Move the telephone plug to the next jack at the right. The signals will now be
much louder, and slight readjustment of the "INTENSITY" and "FILAMENT"
controls may be necessary, particularly the detector tube filament, to get maximum
sensitivity. The second stage of amplification can then be added by moving the tele-
phone plug to the last jack.
If a loud speaker is to be used, pull out the telephone plug and readjust the set
in accordance with signals from the loud speaker.
In some cases it may be possible to use both amplifying stages on the head tele-
phones, but ordinarily the signals from the second stage will be too loud for comfort.
The filament controls for tubes that are not in use should be turned to the "OFF"
position.
If the loud speaker signals are not as loud as desired, they can be intensified slightly
by removing the % megohm grid leaks from the clips in the rear of the two amplifier
tubes. The purpose of these grid leaks is to improve the quality of the signal.
When the receiver is not in use, disconnect the batteries by turning all the filament
knobs to the "OFF" position.
POSSIBLE CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION
(1) Poor or broken connections in antenna or ground wires, or defective insula-
tion of antenna.
(2) "FILAMENT," "INTENSITY," or "WAVELENGTH" knobs improperly
adjusted.
(3) Batteries exhausted (indicated by low filament brilliancy, or weak signals
and noisy operation).
(4) Battery connection improperly made, or broken.
(5) Poor or broken connections in telephone cord or plug.

do
(6) Grid leak omitted.
(7) Coil system not properly seated in contacts.
(8) Inoperative vacuum tubes.
Ground to Base
440V
TI 12 no bI

}M gPr¡tt,6r2eV`}M¢4. RSIOak
O11V201 Rediotnxl F
waveLength G
Co11 UV201
Rddiot ron
UV 200arrUV 20 Radiotron
Automatic
Switch
Operated
_y Grid
Condenser ansforme Transformer
B UV 712 UV T12
Condenser Intensity lephone
danser 2 Meg.
Coil Grid Leak Detector Stade1
Telephone Telephone
PR 525 Jack Jack
Sta Q¢ 2
0.0 Telephone Telephone
Crystal Rheostat Jack
Jack
Detector
op Ft ídï ^OF
output
ANT.O---Ar In
048" Rheostat Rheostat -0
Variable
Condenser 0- 0
0V.
G+ 0+
0+40V.
 How to Add "C" Battery to Radiola V
r AA 1000 4100/f/60 TO I/SE J UY -/99 RAI/07R0MS Nor,
4/6647/YE 600 fil Rhea
WITH C- 1177fRY Remove wvss a-6.ne
140/0 ra1f0A/7/ON Of AMfR/rA
ADD nias s- y- 1
vues ',none'',

Res
Slags
e--400
the N
-y l'sd 'i
; S&P
wv o
Peti

órieCana-
--
ke-=eis,
"=-1,,1
6ri d /eaR ¡11_Ns-O
,-_!y--
Fil Reea
Fil Rhea

6 f
p____ Aer wae q 4harres

UV
A/16K
7/2
hvnsl--..T:
t2, ...441-1--
;
r
Pi/ 7/2__
Amp/ /sits/.
Remore
/his wire
?DA

Au ,hiswe

/4idging ran0. i
5--a

Awn View ---- i 7- -----

b use J 0Y 77/-A áöia/rans, remare oy re/h and tannet/ a
.1'

4Si 6 /nn zee, DOferyV /b /ermum/s 247bndretoinC'DollerV

HO - as s/awn. Re /are 4RS39 n;kos/dl
know DN375 me: andrm/va
rea pRS35rneos/ef.
ire me/vrpz-linad-lpnpll.
AP 539 er 4/535 rheas/al ` 90K
as reQuirsd Ses no/e'---------------------- S Y. Y be L
A . IAN575/0-150/medmprres. GYe is opti0no/
fíoir So/der
i.
r+
%AV 7si - - -3 -/ ;WI dry rads canneded m series.
`-74fr0SS 031 or ego/meet

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

 RADIOLA VI
MODEL AR -895
RADIOLA VI provides three stages of RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFICA-
TION, a VACUUM TUBE DETECTOR, and two stages of AUDIO FREQUENCY
AMPLIFICATION over a wavelength range of from 200 to 5000 meters. It is designed
for use on a loop antenna with a parallel variable air condenser for tuning purposes.
This method of radio receiving combines the advantages of directivity with a
minimum of interference from static, and local electrical disturbances. The use of a
loop eliminates the necessity of erecting an outdoor antenna. Either a loud speaker
or head telephones can be used, depending on the distance from the broadcasting
station.
The following material is required for a complete equipment:
Radiola VI
One UV -200 or UV -201-A Radiotron (Detector)
Five UV -201 or UV -201-A Radiotrons (Amplifiers)
Loop antenna (Model AG -1380 is recommended)
Variable Air Condenser of approximately 0.0007 to 0.001 microfarad max-
imum capacity (Model UC -1820 is recommended)
Batteries:
One 6 -volt 80- to 120 -ampere -hour storage battery
Two 221/2 -volt "B" batteries (one with 18 -volt tap)
One Pair of Head Telephones with Plug (Model UD -824)
A loud speaker may be added if desired.

INSTALLATION
A loop for receiving broadcast wavelengths should consist of ten turns of wire
such as single lamp cord or bare or stranded copper at least No. 18 B. 84 S. gauge
spaced about % in. apart and wound upon a wooden frame three feet square. Pro-
vision should be made so that the number of turns in use may be varied from
five to ten. Mount the loop so that it can be rotated about a vertical axis. With
this loop use a small variable air condenser, about 0.0007 to 0.001 microfarad maximum
capacity, to constitute the tuning system.
Set RADIOLA VI upon a table in a desirable place and put the loop and condenser
immediately at the left. Lift off the mahogany top and remove the covers of the units
by pushing upward on the catch and lifting the covers backward and up. Locate the
storage battery in any convenient place. If this is at any considerable distance from
the set, use heavy leads. Place the "B" batteries as near the receiver as possible.
When making connections to the receiver, use a long screwdriver. Insert the
wire in the hole in the terminal before loosening the screw inside the case. Then
loosen the screw until the wire can be pushed all the way in, after which tighten
the screw. Connect the tuning condenser and loop in parallel and extend the connec-
tions to the two "INPUT" terminals on the left end of the unit.
 When using Radiotron UV -200 as the detector, connect the batteries as shown in
the diagram. When Radiotron UV-201-A is used as the detector (which will give less
critical but not quite so good results as the UV -200), omit the lead from the 18=volt
tap of the battery to the terminal marked "+18 V.," and connect the two terminals
" +18 V." and "+40 V." on the rear of the set by a short wire.
When using Radiotron UV-200 as a detector, better results are sometimes ob-
tained by very accurate adjustment of the plate voltage. This can easily be accom-
plished by connecting the outside terminals of the Model PR -536 Potentiometer
(purchased separately) across the 6 -volt storage battery and the middle terminal
to the negative (-) of the
40 -volt plate battery,
omitting the connections
from the " -40 V." ter-
minal of the receiver to the
Radiola VI plate battery.
Loop If a loud speaker is
used, it may be perma-
nently connected to the
"OUTPUT" terminals at
Variable Air
Condenser
the right end of Radiola
VI. When thus connected,
the loud speaker will auto-
matically be disconnected
when a telephone plug is
40V.
() Red inserted in any one of the
18V. U5
Minus (-) Black jacks, and will automati-
6V.
18
cally be reconnected when
the plug is removed.
Plus (+) Red
', Ì1I IIIIUI
1Ì1I1
Storage Battery Turn all six "FILA-
iiuuim1%.Allio NII III III II MENT" rheostat knobs
Batten"
Water
GrouncClamp
Pipe
Rubber Covered Ground Wire

Place a UV -200
clockwise to "OFF"' before
putting the tubes in their
sockets.
Radiotron in the left-hand
socket of the Detector -Amplifier unit, and UV -201 or UV -201-A Radiotrons in all
the other sockets. The tubes are put in place by lining up the pin in the base with
the slot in the socket, pressing downward on the tube, and then turning it to the
right into position. The grid leaks should be in the clips as shown and need not be
disturbed.
After the covers and top have been replaced, the illumination of the tubes can
be observed through small holes in the front.
RADIOLA VI is now ready to operate.
OPERATION
Adjust the telephones snugly to the ears and plug into the left telephone jack,
marked "DETECTOR." A click should be heard on inserting or removing the plug.
Turn the "FILAMENT" knobs counter -clockwise to bring the tube filaments to
proper brilliancy. This is a little less bright than the ordinary incandescent lamp with
 UV -200 and UV -201 Radiotrons, and is usually obtained with a setting of from 50 to
100 on the "FILAMENT" knobs. For proper illumination of the UV-201-ARadiotrons,
see the instructions accompanying tubes. The setting of the dial in this case will
usually be between 10 and 50. Whenever one or both of the audio frequency
amplifier stages are not in use, turn the respective knobs to "OFF." This does not
apply to the radio frequency amplifier, as all three of its tubes must be lighted when the
set is in operation.
Turn the "STABILIZER" knob to about 50. Set the wavelength switch knob
in the lower left corner to the proper position, pulling it out to receive wavelengths
between 200 and 500 meters, and pushing it in for wavelengths between 500 and
5000 meters. Tune to the desired signal by turning the variable condenser knob over
the scale until a signal is heard. Set the knob at the point where the signal is loudest.
Rotate the loop about a vertical axis, setting it also in the position of the loudest
signal. Experience in operation will indicate the correct number of turns of the loop
which will give the most satisfactory results.
Adjust the "STABILIZER" knob to the position of best signal strength. The
intensity will increase as the knob is turned clockwise, but at some position the signal
quality will be destroyed. At this point the receiver becomes a transmitter and seriously
interferes with neighboring radio receivers. This condition of oscillation must be
avoided, but if it does occur, immediately turn the "STABILIZER" control backward
until the signal clears up.
After "tuning in" by the above method, the telephone plug may be inserted in
either the first or second amplifier stage with an accompanying increase of signal.
Slight and careful readjustments of the rheostats may further improve the signal
strength, but extremely fine adjustments will not be needed on the radio amplifier.
Further slight adjustments may be necessary when the telephone plug is removed
and the loud speaker is placed in circuit. If the loud speaker signals are not as loud
as desired, they can be intensified slightly by removing the PR -516 one-half megohm
grid leaks from the clips at the rear of the two audio amplifier tubes. The purpose
of these grid leaks is to improve the quality of the signal.
When the receiver is not in use, disconnect the batteries by turning all filament
knobs to the "OFF" position. Turning the "FILAMENT" rheostats to "OFF" also cuts
off the "STABILIZER" current.

Second Amplifier UV -201 or UV-201 A

First Amplifier UV-201 or UV-201-A Radiotron UV 201 orUV-201-A
Detector UV-200orUV--201 A

Grid Leak
Model
PR -5I6

Grid Leak Model PR -523

 POSSIBLE CAUSES OF FAULTY OPERATION
(1) Poor or broken connections in loop wires or defective insulation of same.
2) Filament rheostats not properly adjusted.
(3) Batteries exhausted (as indicated by low filament brilliancy or weak signals
and noisy operation).
(4) Battery connections improperly made, poor, or broken.
(5) Stabilizer improperly adjusted.
(6) Poor or broken connections in telephone cord or plug.
(7) Inoperative vacuum tubes.
(8) Transformer wavelength switch in wrong position.
(9) Grid leak omitted.
(10) Loop and condenser not properly adjusted.

Stabillz¢rPR536
Radlotron//UV201orUV201 Conrd
B Pass
ensers
RadlotronUV2010rUV201-A
G

Radm I
T:-7t

Gtron
.
By Past
Condlen5a
TMegGleak -
PRC1v201orWi01
.-.F G, eCiotrgn
-
Ground to Base

-..0
}MegGrldLeak
PR516

J
O
1BgV
p
+40
P

UV 201 or
UV 201-A
Red.otron
UVt00orUVZOb

Grld Transformer
Condenser forma
TraUnsVT12
UVTIZ
steQ Detºctor Sta óe
Rheostat Rheostat 3rd Leak Telephone ele ose
1

PR 523 - Jd<k
Jack
1 2 5 51a 2
Teles0eone
2 1
Rheostat Jack
Transfer
UV 1/14 +-oF
Input
OF
i
OF
Outout Oput
O Rheostat Rheostat
output
O
-0
6V.
O_'
6v
O_
6V
O
6V
o+ OA
a0 e
Ground to Bate dlOV a 40v.
44042 0+40V.

NOTICE
This device is not licensed except for amateur, experimental and entertainment
radio use as defined and to the extent indicated in the current issue of the catalogue
of the Radio Corporation of America. No express or implied license is granted under
any patent owned by the Radio Corporation of America, or under which it is licensed,
to use or sell this device as an element or part of any combination of organization
except as expressly set forth in said catalogue.
 àæ
s . 1

f,giLT1
111_. ___.1.'0,1
v

e
k
. 8
ei

*
it
<_`
b

'
.

á É
. fi -1E sé

,,
- r- ;
r.g. .[TA $t
g. 1

' , 4,'

I
4 .!
j
x
- - - - ` e,
Oh- Se.,

,o
i t-
-
eg

k``

3: i
i N ni.
é iI
 REG. U.S.Rodiolci
PAT. OFF.

Fig. I

Fig..2

INTRODUCTION
Radiola VII is a new type of radio receiver, designed for use After the receiver is removed from the carton, the lid should
with Radiotron UV 199, which operates entirely from dry cells. be lifted and the accessories which are packed within the receiver
Electrically, it consists of a highly selective 2 -circuit tuner and a removed. -The accessories are contained in two packages; one con-
5-tube detector-amplifier, self-contained and ready to connect to taining 6 UV 199 Radiotrons, 5 being required for the 'set, and 1
antenna and ground (or to a loop antenna), and a loud speaker. being a spare; and the other containing 1 pair of head telephones,
The design is such that all batteries are contained within the a telephone plug and a Faradon socket antenna.
cabinet. The wave length range covers the entire broadcasting
band of 220 to 550 meters. BATTERIES REQUIRED
Radiola VII may be used with a loop, an indoor antenna or
an outdoor antenna. For indoor antenna use, a wire 15 to 20 feet
long stretched about the room will give very good results, while
A.
filaments, such as:-
Six ordinary dry cells, 11/2 volts each, for lighting

6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries (21/2" x 61/2")

the

or,
for an outdoor antenna a single wire 20 to 180 feet long and 20 6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells (23/2" x 61/2") or,
to 50 feet in height is the usual practice. 6 Burgess No. 6 Dry Cells (21/2" x 6" ) or,
There is included with the set a Faradon socket antenna, which 6 Burgess "Super -Six" Dry Cells (21/2" x 6" ) or,
may be substituted in place of an indoor or outdoor antenna. In 6 Ray -O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells (21/2" x 61/2") or,
using the socket antenna, it is only necessary to screw it into a 6 Ace No. 6 Dry Cells (23/2" x 63/2") or,
lighting socket in the same manner as an ordinary lamp. 6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells (21/2" x 61/2")
OR EQUIVALENT
UNPACKING
B. Two 45 -Volt Plate Batteries. NOTE: Two 45 -Volt Units
Radiola VII is wrapped in wax paper as a protection against are recommended instead of Four 221/2 -Volt Units, such as:
dust and moisture, and placed in a corrugated paper carton, which
2 Eveready No. 767 Plate Batteries (8" x 6g/8" x 3") or,
in turn is surrounded by excelsior and contained in the wooden
2 Burgess No. 2306 Plate Batteries (77/8" x 65/g" x 3")
shipping case.
OR EQUIVALENT
 C. Two 3 -Volt Negative Grid Bias Batteries, such as: Rear Two 45 -Volt
2 Eveready No. 750 Flashlight Batteries (277"x1ls"A}") or, Plate Batteries
2 Burgess No. 422 Flashlight Batteries (21/4"xl1/4"x}e) or, Dimensions
2 Ray -O -Lite No. 421 Flashlight Batteries (21/4x11/.t' x}r") 8"x65/8"x3"
OR EQUIVALENT

INSTALLATION OF BATTERIES Left Right

The A Batteries (No. 10, Figure 2) are held in place by the
bakelite clamping plate secured by two wing nuts (No. 14 and 15,
Figure 2). They should be connected in two parallel groups each
of three cells in series, as shown in Figure 3.
The method of connecting the B battery is shown clearly in
Figure 4. After the batteries are properly connected, two units
should be placed in the cabinet, fastening down with the clamp ermine' board on blase of set
and wing nut provided (No. 16 and 17, Figure 2) . The units
should be placed in the cabinet one at a time. The leads are suffi-
ciently long to permit making connections outside the cabinet for
convenience.
Great care should be taken to keep the battery connections
tight, as failure to do so may result in objectionable noises, or
complete inóperation of the set.
To insert the C battery, first bend the long battery prong out
straight (to lay parallel to axis of cells). With prongs toward
top of cabinet, slip downward into spring (No. 11, Figure 2), then
over towards center of box until the prongs are firmly pinched by
the small jaws provided for contact. The same instructions apply
to the second C battery. The small jaws are placed at different
heights in order to properly take the long and short prongs provided
on the flashlight batteries.
Be sure that all tubes are removed from their sockets when
installing batteries.

ADDITIONAL ADJUSTMENTS
If Radiola VII is to be used with an outdoor antenna or with
the Faradon socket antenna, the small switch inside the cabinet and
back of the C battery support (No. 18, Figure 2) should be down
in the open position. If a short indoor antenna is to be used, such
as a 20' wire about the room, this switch should be up in the closed will usually serve the purpose. In making the ground connection,
position. For long distance work an outdoor antenna is preferable. the pipe should be scraped clean and the ground wire firmly con-
In the instance of either an outdoor or indoor antenna being nected.
used, a ground connection must be made. This is made preferably When Radiola VII is used with a loop, no antenna or ground
to a water pipe, but if this is inconvenient, a radiator or steam pipe connections are necessary. As shown in Figure 5, the loop con-
nections are the second and third binding posts from the top.
Rear The two binding posts at the bottom of the receiver in the back
6 Ordinary are for the externally connected loud speaker. Head telephone
Dry Cells reception is also possible by connecting the tips of the telephone
Each 11/2 Volts cord to the plug and plugging in the jack at the lower right corner
of the panel. This automatically disconnects the loud speaker. DO
NOT attempt to use the loud speaker plugged into the telephone
Leff Rig}i jack, as the volume will be insufficient to operate it. The jack is
intended only for head telephones. In connecting the loud speaker,
it is well to try reversing the leads, as with some loud speakers
Terminal board on this enhances the volume and quality.
+ 4.5 -4.5 base of set The new R. C. A. Loud Speaker, Model UZ-1320 is recommend-
ed as being adapted for use with the Radiola VII.
 OPERATION The best stabilizer position will be found at a point just below
WITH OUTDOOR OR INDOOR ANTENNA OR WITH FARADON what is termed the `oscillation point." When the oscillation point
is exceeded and secondary control (No. 6, Fig. 1) is moved
SOCKET ANTENNA: thru
the broadcasting range, whistling sounds known as "carrier beats"
1. Be sure that set is properly connected, as per diagrams. will be heard. While receiving a "carrier beat" the procedure is
2. Be sure that white button No. 1, Figure 1) of push switch
I
to lower the stabilizer a trifle, at the same time manipulating the
is out. secondary vernier (No. 8, Fig. 1) until the carrier beat note dis-
3. Insert tubes in their bayonet sockets by pressing down appears indicating that oscillation has ceased and the station is heard
slightly and turning to the right. without distortion. To strengthen the signal, bring the antenna cir-
4. Adjust Vernier condenser controls No. 7 and 8) so that
I
cuit into tune by varying antenna controls 4 and 7 (Fig. 1). When
white lines will be vertical. tuned to maximum intensity by this means gradually increase stabi-
5. Be sure filament control (No. 5, Figure 1) is turned as lizer until still further volume is attained. Bear in mind that the
far as it will go to the left, or opposite to clockwise direction. stabilizer is an adjustment of sensitivity and not of tuning. Care
6. Press white switch button. This should light the tubes should be taken that set is not left in oscillating condition.
dimly. CAUTION: The tubes used in this set burn dimly as com- Increasing the filament current may also help the signal vol-
pared to the older types of tubes. ume, but this control should be kept low as possible to obtain good
7. Advance filament control pointer (No. 5) 'as far as the results, or else the life of the batteries and tubes will be prema-
word "Increase" on the dial. turely shortened by the excessive current.
8. Place pointer of control (No. 2, Figure 1) in the position
on the "Antenna," or upper part of the dial, including the wave WITH LOOP ANTENNA:
length (as marked on the dial) it is desired to receive. 1. Place control (No. 2, Figure 1) in the position on the
9. Place stabilizer pointer at the maximum position and de- "loop" side including the wave length it is desired to receive.
crease when "carrier beat" of station desired is heard, as explained
below. It should be borne in mind that when two stations of dif- 2. Other precautions and instructions for tuning remain the
ferent wave lengths are operating simultaneously, it is usually pos- same as when used with outdoor or indoor antenna, except that
sible to separate one from the other. This separation can usually the antenna tuning controls (No. 4 and No. 7, Figure 1) are auto-
be made when stations differ in wave lengths by 10 meters or more, matically cut out of use, or removed from the circuit.
and sometimes when the stations differ by only a few meters, de- The Loop should be rotated about its vertical axis until re-
pending upon the skill of the operator. No receiver can separate ception reaches a maximum volume. Interference from an unde-
stations working on exactly the same wave length. although a power- sired transmitter may also be eliminated by making use of the
directional properties of the loop, turning it until the undesired
ful local station may be easily Heard through a weaker and more signal is weakened as much as possible.
distant station. It is advisable when using a loop to remove the antenna and
10. With this receiver, when control (No. 2, Figure 1) is on ground leads from the rear binding posts to improve the directional
the "antenna" side, seven settings of the "secondary tuning" control qualities of the loop.
for seven different wave lengths are given in the table below:
Wave Length CAUTION:
Dial Setting Wave Length Switch Position
250 When Radiola VII is not in use the black button of the filament
220-280 switch should be pushed in to turn off the filaments of the tube.
280.370 300 It is detrimental to both tubes and batteries if they are permitted
350 to burn unnecessarily. Handle the tubes carefully and DO NOT
INSERT THEM IN THE SOCKET WHILE THE FILAMENT
370-460 400 SWITCH IS ON.
44 lt 450
NOTE: Some tubes are better radio frequency amplifiers than
460-550 500 others and if several tubes are tried in the second and third sockets
550 from the left it is possible to select the tube combination giving the
best results.
To "pick up" a station, the "second tuning" control should
first be set to the approximate wave length of the station it is desired REPLACEMENTS
to hear, using the above table for this first setting. Then the "an- Batteries and tubes are the only parts which require replacing.
tenna tuning" control (No. 4, Figure 1) should be moved slowly
over the scale until signals are heard. "A" BATTERIES:
11. When a station is picked up, it should first be carefully With average use these batteries should last about three months.
adjusted on the Secondary Tuning control, and then on the Antenna They require replacement when the filament control (No. 5, Fig. 1)
Tuning control. Finer adjustment can be made with the two small must be kept at maximum for best reception, and when the tubes
Vernier knobs No. 7 and No. 8. Signals may be made louder by light but dimly with the pointer in that position. The old cells can
moving the Stabilizer control toward "increase" until the best ad- be removed by disconnecting all wires from battery binding posts
justment is obtained.
and removing the wing nuts (No. 14, Fig. 2). Then the cells may tenna the wire should be kept at least ten feet away from trees and
be taken out and new ones connected in their place. Attached to large objects such as roofs or other structures, and must be well in.
each lead is a marked metal tag designating to which point the lead sulated on each end and at the lead in. As a precaution never have
is to be connected. Reference to figures 3 and 4 will preclude the the antenna wire strung over or under electric light wires as its
possibility of an error in connection and will warrant careful atten- falling might endanger the set and its operator.
tion. The carbon or center part of a standard dry cell is positive.
DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES FROM SOCKETS BEFORE
REPLACING ANY BATTERIES. NEVER BURN TUBES MORE
BRIGHTLY THAN REQUIRED FOR A REASONABLE SIGNAL.

"B" BATTERIES:
The "B" Batteries should outlast two sets of "A" Batteries. It
is rather difficult to know when these batteries are exhausted as
there is no external indication except weakened signals. The best
way is to obtain a voltmeter which will indicate up to 100 volts at
least. The meter should show at least 80 volts when across both
batteries (new) and batteries are exhausted when total voltage gets
below 70 volts.
To replace, remove clamp strip (No. 16, Fig. 2) taking off
wing nut (No. 17, Fig. 2) and swinging clamp upward and toward
the front of panel. The battery leads are long enough to permit the
units to be lifted out onto the cabinet frame, for their disconnection.
DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES FROM SOCKETS BEFORE
REPLACING ANY BATTERIES. Connect the new units exactly as
shown in Fig. 4.

"C" BATTERIES:
These cells should be removed every three months to insure
proper functioning of Radiola VII. This procedure may be carried
out quite readily by reference to the section of this booklet which
treats with the installation of the "C" Batteries.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

The cabinet of this receiver is highly finished and it should be
treated the same as any piece of fine wood furniture. To keep its
original lustre give the cabinet an occasional application of good
furniture polish.
Care should be taken in the installation of the antenna and
ground to insure good and solid connections. The best method is
to clean well with a file and then solder securely. In outside an- WIRING DIAGRAM
 Radiola
INTRODUCTION
VII -B
Radiola VII -B is a complete receiving unit comprising a set (B) Two 45 -Volt Plate Batteries. NOTE: Though four 22% -volt
with its batteries and loud speaker mounted within an attractive units may be used two 45 -volt units are preferred instead.
cabinet. Such as:
Electrically, Radiola VII -B consists of a highly selective two 2 Eveready No. 767 Plate Batteries, EACH 45 -Volts (8x65%3)
circuit tuner, with detector and radio -audio amplifier, using five or,
UV -199 Radiotrons. These tubes are dry-cell operated and all neces- 2 Burgess No. 2306 Plate Batteries, EACH 45 -Volts (77/8x
sary "A," "B" and "C" batteries are contained within the cabinet, 6%x3) or,
and connected to the receiver by a multi -conductor cable. The 2 Yale No. 3045 V Plate Batteries, EACH 45-Volts (8x65/8x3)
amplifier supplies energy to a loud -speaker unit attached to the OR EQUIVALENT
' built in tone chamber. A jack is provided at the rear for use
with phones which is occasionally desired for long distance recep- (C) One 41/2 Volt Negative Grid Bias or "C" Battery. Such as:
1 Eveready No. 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x13/8) or,
tion. Local signals produce an extraordinary volume for dancing 1 Ray -O -Lite No. 231 R Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1-)
purposes.
The wave -length range of the Radiola VIIB covers the broad- or,
1 Burgess No. 2370 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%) or,
casting band of 220 to 550 meters and through the use of specially
1 Yale No. 312 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%) or,
.

designed radio frequency transformers practically equal sensitivity

1 Bright Star "B" 34-17 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%)
is secured over the entire wave-length band. Good results may be
obtained with an indoor antenna, using the 18 foot silk-covered, or,
1 Novo No. 288 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x13/8)
single conductor wire supplied, which should be carried around
OR EQUIVALENT
the room on the picture moulding; or, where greater range is de-
sired, an outdoor antenna of a single wire 20 ft. to 100 feet long,
and 30 ft. to 50 ft. high may be employed. For local work, the INSTALLATION
indoor antenna is sufficient, but for long distance reception the out- If the set is desired only for local work, the indoor antenna wire
door antenna is preferable. supplied with the set should be carried around the room on the
UNPACKING picture moulding, or otherwise fastened. If an outdoor antenna is
desired, a single wire 20 ft. to 100 ft. long, and 30 ft. to 50 ft. high.
Radiola VII -B is wrapped in wax paper as a protection against should be erected, properly insulated at both ends, and with a lead
dust and moisture, and placed in a corrugated paper carton, which brought to the point where the Radiola VII -B is to be operated. In
in turn is surrounded by excelsior in the wooden shipping case. the case of an outside antenna, the wire should be kept at least 10
After the receiver is removed from the carton the lid should be ft. away from trees and large objects, such as roofs and other struc-
lifted and the four machine screws removed from the top panel tures. As a precaution, never have the antenna wire strung over
upon which the receiver is mounted. This panel can then be hinged or under electric light wires, for if by falling such wires should
back and held up by the side stops. The 6 UV -199 Radiotrons come in contact, the set and the operator might be endangered.
will be found packed around the horn. The cable with its battery
connectors is also contained in this space already for connection Whether an indoor or outdoor antenna is used, a ground con-
nection must be made. This connection is preferably made to a
to the batteries.
water pipe, but if this is inconvenient, a radiator or steam pipe will
BATTERIES REQUIRED usually serve the purpose. Do not connect the ground wire to a
(A) Refers to Filament Lighting or "A" Battery. gas pipe. Care should be taken in the installation of antenna and
B
I " " Plate or "B" Battery. ground to insure good and solid connections. The best method is
(C " " Negative Grid or "C" Battery. to clean the piping well with a file and then solder securely. An
(A) Six 11/2 Volt Dry Cells, connected in two PARALLEL groups approved form of ground clamp, properly installed, is satisfactory.
of three cells each in SERIES, such as: If an antenna of less than 40 ft. is used, the flexible lead on
6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 (21/2x6) or, shunt condenser, Fig. 3, must be connected to the brown or antenna
6 Burgess Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 6 (21/2x6) or, terminal on the terminal board of the Radiola VII -B. Should a
6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells, No. 2445 or 2448 (21/2x61/2) longer antenna be used, this flexible lead should be connected to
or, the black, or ground terminal on the terminal board, which throws
6 Ray -O -Vac Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 1211 (21/2x61/2) or, the condenser out of circuit.
6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells (21/2x61/2) or,
6 Ace Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 61 (21/2x6) or,
CAUTION:
6 Yale Radio Power Pak No. 101-R (23/.1x61/2) Before making any battery installation, be sure that all the
OR EQUIVALENT Radiotrons are removed from their sockets. Be sure also that the
 ANTENNA SHUNT CONDENSER. CONNECT
TMS LEAD ERNER TO BLACK OR BROWN
TERMINAL ON TERMINAL BLOCK AS PER
INSTRUCTIONS.

Çer

UOK
nm
d5
WWER
TERN

FIG. 3 -CABLE CONNECTIONS OF RADIOLA VI-I -B

LOUD SPEAKER, JACK AND BATTERIES
 is
cable is connected first to the receiver terminal board before it On weak stations it is best to allow the set to oscillate, that is.
connected to any batteries; otherwise the batteries may be short- bring control well beyond the click point and swing control 3
circuited and their life materially reduced. through its range determined by selector position. When a whist-
The "A" batteries must be placed in the cabinet with their ling sound, known as the "carrier beat" is heard, it should he
the
terminals as shown in Fig. 3. Remove thumb screw and place brought to maximum by control 4, then control 5 should be reduced
four special connectors on batteries as shown. This connects the gradually until the oscillations cease, keeping whistling sound in
The
batteries in three series groups, of two cells each in parallel. tune at the same time by Vernier control 3. The carrier beat will
yellow leads are connected to the center of positive terminal of the then disappear and station will be heard without distortion.
"A" battery and the black leads to the outside or negative terminal. To strengthen the signal, work the stabilizer as near the oscil-
The method of connecting the "B" battery is clearly shown in lation point as possible and retune with Vernier controls 3 and 4.
Fig. 3. The leads are sufficiently long to permit making the
con- Bear in mind that the stabilizer is an adjustment of sensitivity and
nection outside the cabinet for convenience. The rear battery shown not of tuning. Care should be taken that set is not left in oscillat-
pushed
in Fig. 3 should be placed in the front of the cabinet first and be
ing condition. Better operation can sometimes be obtained by
towards the rear, then the front battery shown in Fig. 3 can changing the tubes around in the several sockets until the best
lowered in its place as shown in Fig. 3. combination is found.
The "C" battery fits in the space in front of the "A" battery. The filament control (Dial No. 1) should be advanced as the
The wire with green terminal should be connected to the 41/.z volt filament batteries are consumed. THIS CONTROL SHOULD, HOW-
to
negative, or minus, clip on the battery and the black terminal EVER, BE KEPT ALWAYS AS LOW AS POSSIBLE CONSIST-
the positive, or plus, clip. ENT WITH GOOD RECEPTION, ELSE THE LIFE OF THE
Great care should be taken to keep the battery connections TUBES, AND TO SOME EXTENT ALSO THE LIFE OF THE
or
tight, as failure to do so may result in objectionable noises BATTERIES, WILL BE SERIOUSLY SHORTENED.
complete inoperation of the set.
REPLACEMENTS
OPERATION
diagram, Fig. 3. Batteries and tubes are the only parts which require replace-
1. Be sure that set is properly connected, as per ment.
2. Be sure filament control ( Dial No. 1) is turned as
far as it
will go to the left or counter -clockwise direction. Start with "A" BATTERIES:
all pointers at the left or zero mark.
3. Insert tubes in their bayonet sockets by pressing down slightly With average use, these batteries should last several months.
and turning to the right. They require replacement when the filament control Dial No. 1.
4. Advance the filament control to graduations 5 or 6 on its dial. must be kept at maximum 1101 for good reception, and when the
tubes light but dimly with the pointer in that location.
5. Choose approximate wave -length desired by use of Selector The old cells can be removed by disconnecting all wires from
No. 2 with the aid of the chart below: battery binding posts. Then cells may be taken out and new ones
connected in their place. On each lead is color marking designat-
SERIAL No. ing the point to which the lead is to be connected. Reference to
2 3 figures will preclude the possibility of an error in connection, and
Wave Length Selector Secondary will warrant careful attention. The carbon or center part of a
standard dry cell is positive.
250
DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES FROM SOCKETS BE-
.300 FORE CHANGING ANY BATTERIES. NEVER BURN TUBES
MORE BRIGHTLY THAN REQUIRED FOR A SIGNAL OF REA-
350 SONABLE VOLUME.
400
"B" BATTERIES:
450
"B" Batteries may be tested by a high resistance type of volt-
500 meter which will indicate up to 100 volts at least. The meter should
show at least 90 volts when across both batteries (new) and bat-
550 teries are exhausted when total voltage falls below 70 volts.
6. Place secondary tuning control (Dial No. 3) on corresponding To replace, lift battery unit out and unclip leads. The bat-
graduation wave -length band, as shown on dial. tery leads are long enough to permit the units to be lifted out of
7. Swing antenna tuning control (Dial No. 4) through its range the cabinet, for their connection. DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE
several times. TUBES FROM SOCKETS BEFORE REPLACING ANY BAT-
3. If signals are not heard bring up volume control (No. 5) until TERIES. Connect the new units exactly as shown in Fig. 3.
a click is heard. This is termed "the oscillation point." Now
with this control held just below this point, Vernier controls "C" BATTERIES:
3 and 4 must be operated together to give best results, especially These cells should be renewed every six months to i" ore
on long distance signals, or signals from weak stations. proper functioning of Radiola VII -B.
 1

7-
R_OSA-

AN'ENNA
TUNING CDN 1 / Í
SECONDARY
TUNING NNO

7,7!!.
5TA&LIZER

z
o
D
ANTENNA

+ I

FILAMENT BATTERY
1

á
r-
-
J
BIA5 BATTERY
LOUD 5PEAKFR

+ FI I ht
PLATE
II
BATTERY
GROUND
FIG. 4 -SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAM RADIOLA VII -B
 Radiola Super -VIII
INTRODUCTION
RADIOLA SUPER -VIII is a radio broadcast receiving
instru- C-One 42-volt Negative Grid Bias or"C" Battery, such as:
ment, utilizing the Super -Heterodyne principle
which 1 Eveready No. 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery ...4 by S by 1% in.
provides unusual simplicity of operation, selectivity Ray -O -Lite No. 231-R Negative Grid Bias Battery ...4
or
sensitivity. The cabinet contains the operating and 1

Burgess No. 2370 Negative Grid Bias Battery

by 3 by 1/7g in. or
mechanism, a
1
...4 by 3 by 1/g in. or
loud speaker, and the battery equipment, 1 Yale No. 313 Negative Grid Bias Battery ...4 by 3 by 1%g in. or
as well as a loop 1 Bright Star No. B-34-17 Negative Grid Bias Battery. ..4 by 3 by 1% in. or
antenna, making the set completely self-contained. Novo No. 288 Negative Grid Bias Battery by 9 by 1% in.
for reception over the broadcast wavelength
It is designed 1

OR EQUIVALENT
4

band 220 to 550

meters (approximately 550 to 1350 kilocycles). INSTALLATION
Installing Batteries. Access to the battery rack is secured by
EQUIPMENT removing the two screws B (Fig. 1) (found at the center on the
Under the above name there is included left- and right-hand sides of the upper panel A, on the rear of
apparatus: the following
theecabinet)-which releases the panel. Place two fingers in the
1 Radiola Super -VIII, as described thumb holes C, raise the rear panel, pushing it farther into
6 Radiotrons, Model UV -199 the slot in the top of the cabinet, then pull on the panel releasing
BATTERIES REQUIRED the lower end, which permits the panel to drop down free from
In addition, there are required the following "A," the set.
"C" batteries which may be obtained "B" and In the middle and top compartments will be found six
from the dealer: UV -199 Radiotrons, two long red jumper connectors, and four
A-Six standard dry cells, 12 volts each, short yellow connectors. Remove these from the rack and proceed
below, for lighting the filaments. These such as those listed with the battery installation.
are connected in two
groups, each of three cells in series, both groups
being connected (A) Place the six dry cells in the lower compartment,
in parallel. three in the back row and three in the front row, taking care
Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries
.............24 64 in that the outer binding posts of all cells point in the same direc-
Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells
Burgess No. 6 Dry Cells
......................24 by
by 6). in.
or
or
tion. Connect the batteries in two parallel groups, each of three
... ...............23. cells in series, as shown in Fig. 1, using the four short yellow
Burgess Super Six Dry Cells.
Ray-O -Vac No. 1211 Dry Cells
.24
2 by 6 in.
by 6 in.
by 64 in.
or
or connectors E.
Ace ry Cells.. or Before connecting these batteries to the set, make certain
Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells. e by 64 in. or
..... . by 64 in. that the desk fall G (Fig. 2 and 3) in the front of the set is closed.*
OR EQUIVALENT* Connect the lead marked " +A" (yellow), coming through the
B-Four 221A -volt
plate batteries connected in series, such as: hole in the left-hand side of the rack, to the two center binding
4 Eveready No., 766 Plate Batteries
4 Burgess No. 2156 Plate Batteries..
..........6% by 4 by 3 in. or
posts (not yet connected), and connect the other lead marked
4 Burgess No: 2158 Plate Batteries
...... ... .6% by 4 by 3 in. or -A" (black with yellow tracer) to the two outside binding
....6% by 4 by S in. posts.
4 Ray -O -Vac No. 2151 Plate Batteries..
4 Kwik-Lite No. 225 Plate Batteries....
.... . .......6% by 4 by 3 in.
or
or
Ace No. 115 Plate Batteries
.
64
or *After the set is in operation, closing the desk fall G shuts off the operation of the set completely.
4 by When the user has kindled with the set, he need not turn any of the other controls, but merely
4 Yale No. 1512-V Plate Batteries 6948 4 by 3 in. or .dose the desk fall.
..634 by 4 by 3 in.
4
4
Bright Star No. 15-90 Plate Batteries
Novo No. 268 Plate Batteries.......
........... ..6yß by 4 by S in.
or
or (B) Locate two each of the "B" or
OR EQUIVALENT
..64 by 4 by 3 in. the middle and upper compartments; orplate batteries in both
if 45 -volt blocks arc
used, place one in each compartment.
*A 4 -volt storage batter,*, such as
if desired. Pbile, Type UD.44, may be used instead of the
six dry cells,
Connect the two batteries in the upper compartment in
series by using one of the long red jumper connectors
Two 45 -volt plate batteries may one end onto the "+222 V." terminal of one battery, D, fastening
be
volt blocks if desired, such as: used instead of four 221/- other end onto the " " terminal of the other battery. and
2 Eveready No. 767 Plate Batteries
(45 Volts).......... S
- the
(Should
the large size 45 -volt blocks be used, the two jumper connectors
2 Burgess No. 2306 Plate Batteries by 6% by 3 in. or
(45 Volts) A by 64 by 3 in. or will not be needed.) Do similarly with the two
2 Ray -O -Vac No. 2301 Plate batteries in the
Batteries (45
2 Novo No. 276 Plate flatteries (45 Volts) Volts) . by 8% by 3% in. or middle compartment.
2 Kwik-Lite No. 245 Plate Batteries (45 8 by 64 by 3 M. or Connect these batteries to the set, fastening the lead marked
Yale No. 3045-V Plate Batteries (45 Volts) .8% by 6s/4 by 3
2
Volts). by 6% by 3
M. or
"+B" (red in upper compartment, maroon in middle)
battery terminal marked "+222 V.", not yet connected onto
8 in. the
OR EQUIVALENT
(or onto
 2+B (red)
- D(red)
B(maroon)
+ (maroon)
I3(black with
red tracer)
ir E(yellow)
i"+A(yellow)

"-Alblack with
-'+C'(green)
yellow tracer)

=-C(black with
green tracer)

Fig. I. Rear View, Showing Battery Connections

A-Upper Rear Panel

B-Screws Holding Upper Rear Panel
C-Thumb-hole in Upper Rear Panel
D-Two "B" Battery Connectors (red)
E-Four "A" Battery Connectors (yellow)

Before inserting the Radiotrons, turn the "BATTERY SET-

the "+45 V." terminal of the 45 -volt battery, if one is used). TING" knob to "OFF." Remove the six Radiotrons from their
Connect the other lead marked "-B" (maroon in upper com-
partment, black with red tracer in middle) onto the "-"
ter- individual cartons. Insert one in each of the six tube sockets H,
by placing it in the socket, turning the tube until the pin in the
minal of the other battery. base drops into the slot, and then turning slightly to the right.
(C) Place the "C" or grid bias battery in the compart- Swing the panel back in place carefully, noting that there is
ment built on the left side of the battery rack, with the "+" no binding of the gears just before the panel goes in place. Should
binding post uppermost. Connect the lead marked "+C" (green) the gears bind at this point, slowly rotate the `Loop" knob
to the "+" terminal of the battery; and connect the other lead until the gears mesh and then let the panel drop back.
marked "-C" (black with green tracer) to the "-4% V." ter-
minal of the battery. OPERATION
Location of Set. With the batteries installed and con-
nected, replace the rear panel. Radiola Super -VIII may now Filaments. Turn the "VOLUME CONTROL" knob U (Fig. 3)
be located in any part of the home, convenient and desirable to clockwise to 100. Turn the "BATTERY BETTING" knob K clock-
its owner. It need not be located in any particular place or wise up to the arrow mark near 47 on the dial. WITH FRESH
turned in any particular direction with respect to the room or to BATTERIES, DO NOT TURN THE POINTER PAST
the received signal. THAT POINT. THIS IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT,
Placing Radiotrons in Sockets. Radiola Super-VIII utilizes as you will otherwise shorten the useful life of the Radiotrons
six Radiotrons, Model UV -199, which should be handled with and batteries, and little will be gained in ease of tuning, signal
due care. strength or otherwise. As the batteries grow older with use,
After pulling the desk fall G down to the horizontal (Fig. 2), this should be gradually advanced from week to week toward
the radio panel F should be pulled forward to the half open "100." Push in the amplifier switch S, which gives the full ampli-
position shown in the figure, allowing it to rest against the stay fication of the receiver.
joint J.
 Fig. S. Front View, Slowing Radiotrons in Place

F-Control Panel
G-Desk Fall
II-Six Radiotrons UV -199 in Sockets
J-Stay Joint
 Fig. 3. Front View of Control Panel

F-Control Panel
G-Desk Fall
K-"BATTERY SETTING" Knob
L-Retaining Ring for "STATION SELECTOR" Dial
M-Clamp Wire for "STATION SELECTOR" Dial
N-"STATION SELECTOR 1" Pointer
P-Knobs on Clamp Wire
Q-Thumb Nut for Pointer
R-"STATION SELECTOR I" Knob
S-Amplifier Switch
T-Control Panel Knob
U-"VOLUME CONTROL" Knob
V-"STATION SELECTOR II" Pointer
W-"STATION SELECTOR II" Knob
X-Telephone Jack
Y-"Loor" Knob
 Tuning. The tuning of Radiola Super -VIII involves only however, interfere with reception either from the local station
the manipulation of the two "STATION SELECTOR" knobs R or from a distant one. In the case of the local station, the user
and W-a simple operation if the principle described below be- should, under such circumstances, turn "STATION SELECTOR II"
comes thoroughly understood. to either of the two positions whicn correspond most nearly to
The two gold -tipped pointers have approximately the same the setting of "STATION SELECTOR I" for the local station. In
setting, i.e., if one is set at 10 or 30, etc., the other is at or near the case of the distant station, shift "STATION SELECTOR II" to
10 or 30, etc. the other "wavelength peak" either "upper" or "lower," as the
When searching for stations, the settings of which are not case may be, where interference (if present) will probably not
known, proceed as follows: Set "STATION SELECTOR I" gold - be encountered.
tipped pointer N at, say, 10 (referring to the metal dial scale under (Q) Turn the "LOOP" knob Y on the panel from zero
the paper scale). Move "STATION SELECTOR II" gold -tipped toward "360." For every transmitting station, there are two posi-
pointer V slowly over the scale near 10, say, from 5 to 15. If no tions at which the signal strength will rise to a maximum, and
signals are heard, there is no station working on that wave- two others at right angles where it is at a minimum. Set the
length. Then set "STATION SELECTOR 1" pointer at, say, 12, and "LOOP" knob where best results are secured, trying to locate
slowly move "STATION SELECTOR II" from about 7 to 17. If the position where the interference does not come in, but the
again no signals are heard, set "STATION SELECTOR I" gold - desired signals do.
tipped pointer at, say, 14, and move "STATION SELECTOR II" GENERAL INFORMATION
slowly from about 9 to 19. If still no signals, repeat this process Paper Dials. Four paper dials for each of the "STATION
increasing the setting of "STATION SELECTOR I" in small steps SELECTORS" will he found with the set, three each in the envelope
until the whole scale has been covered. It will be noted after for the Instruction Book, and one each in place on the panel.
the first few trials that when "STATION SELECTORS I and ii" To put another "STATION SELECTOR I" dial in place, grasp
are in resonance, a slight breathing sound is heard indicating pointer N with the left hand, turn and remove the knurled nut
that the set is working properly and in resonance. Q which holds it in place. Grasp the two knobs P on the end
After hearing a signal, carefully adjust both "STATION of the clamp wire M, pinchl the knobs together, and pull the
SELECTORS I and II" for the clearest reproduction. To decrease
clamp wire free from its retaining ring L. Remove the old dial,
the volume of signal, turn the "VOLUME CONTROL" knob U and place a "STATION SELECTOR I" dial on the panel, taking care
towards the "SOFT" position. to locate properly the central hole and the notch on the left-
If no stations are heard, the "LOOP" knob Y should be hand side. Replace clamp wire M, pointer N, and knurled nut
turned 90 degrees from where it was during the preceding adjust- Q in the order mentioned.
ments, and the tuning process just described should be repeated. Follow the same process for "STATION SELECTOR II" dial.
Control of Volume. As Radiolit Super -VIII is a very sensi-
tive receiver, it is often found advisable to reduce the loud Calibration of Set. The paper dials provide a means of
speaker volume. This may be accomplished by employing one recording the settings of the "SELECTORS" for the various sta-
or all of the methods described below. tions. Once recorded, the pointers may be reset at any later
(1) Turn the "VOLUME CONTROL" knob U away from time to these positions, and if the station is broadcasting, it will
be heard. After a station is tuned in as above, mark the positions
"'100" toward "SOFT."
of one of the tips of each of the "STATION SELECTORS" as well
(Q) Pull out the amplifier switch S.
(3) Turn the "LOOP" knob Y. as the call letters of the station. It is suggested that only
the "lower peak" of "STATION SELECTOR II" be recorded.
Interference. Signals from an interfering radio station may
be eliminated or at least minimized by either of the following Note that in a few places throughout the country, particu-
methods: larly in the metropolitan areas, there may be two or more stations
(1) Turn "STATION SELECTOR II" pointer V either to the
assigned to the same wavelength or frequency, but apportioned
right or left, by approximately % inch to 1 inch, to find another different hours of the day so that they will not be "on the air"
position of this control, where the desired station will be again at the same time. For example, Philadelphia, Pa., has two
heard. The setting of "STATION SELECTOR II" nearer the left end stations, WOO and WIP, working on the same wavelength, but
of the scale is technically called the "lower wavelength peak," dividing time. Other examples will be found in the "Partial
and the other the "upper wavelength peak." Two settings of this List of Class 'B' Broadcasting Stations" in the rear pages of this
nature will be found for all broadcast stations, and the separa- booklet. Under such conditions, the"STATION SELECTOR 'settings
tion between them becomes greater and greater for the higher should be the same for both stations.
end of the scale, i.e., nearer the right-hand end. It is recom- Each of the "STATION SELECTORS" is provided with four
mended that "STATION SELECTOR II" be consistently set on the pointers, in order that stations of neárly the same setting may
"lower peak" in the usual manipulation of the set. When inter- be recorded on the dials without crowding the markings. It is
ference is encountered, shift to the upper peak, and use which- suggested that the gold -tipped pointers be reserved for wave-
ever one at which minimum interference occurs. length or frequency markings, and that the station settings be
There are certain wavelengths (greater than 440 meters) recorded on the three remaining pointers in the following order:
where four tuning positions, instead of the usual two positions, long black pointer, right short pointer and left short pointer.
can be found on "STATION SELECTOR II," when the receiver is Mark as many stations as possible on the long black pointer.
located close to a powerful broadcasting station. This does not When a new station is tuned in, quite close to one already
recorded, then use the short pointers for the markings.
 LENGTH (METE Batteries and Radiotrons. The only parts ordinarily need
a ing replacement will be the batteries and Radiotrons.
``
e.
qs.)
8
oo
It is important to adjust the "BATTERY SETTING"and
IELECTOe " VOLUME CONTROL" knobs properly. With fresh batteries,
Jcb TA
*** ` turn the "BATTERY SETTING "knob up to the arrow on the dial, but
no farther. Turn the "VOLUME CONTROL" to 100. Then search

50
4
' As stations are tenon in. record
call tatters w
mark dial at one of
lM pointers In spaces provided.
`, vr1
¡y,
y
for stations as described on page 8. Having located a station,
turn the "VOLUME CONTROL" knob to the left. if it is desired to
decrease the volume of the signal.
O
Map RECORDNO. TROY___.. J9

wra TO The accuracy of the setting of the filament voltage may be

Io. of stations new w Co
checked by a good filament voltmeter (of the high resistance
1, Farthest station inks type). Turn the "VOLUME (ONTBOL" 10 IOO. Turn the"BATTERY
Radiowore.
Corporation óä' SETTING" to the arrow. Touch the positive (+) voltmeter
terminal to the case of the tube socket unit which holds the
tube sockets H, and touch the negative (-) terminal to the
movable blade of the "VOLUME CONTROL" on the rear of the
panel. If the voltmeter reads greater or less than 3 volts,
A adjust the "BATTERY SETTING" knob until a reading of 3 volts
i QEó
£
ái
is obtained.
With the filaments burning too brightly (" BATTERY SETTING"
aJE LENOTH (ME
CR
knob too close to 100), the active material in the filaments is
rapidly driven off, and the useful life of the Radiotrons and
pttON SELECTÓq¡Ì batteries is shortened. Should this occur, the Radiotron life
may be restored, provided they have not been too seriously
Pf ° S®TN abused.
This process of "reactivation," as it is called, may be
=50 As stations are tuned in, record
call betters end mark dol it one of accomplished by turning the "VOLUME CONTROL" knob to 100,
tie painters In spaces prov.ded. More
and the "BATTERY SETTING" knob to approximately 47 (or
MC
RECORD NO. / \ FROM___..19.. vdt
to 3 volts), and by removing either one of the two "B" battery
ID N"«
connectors D in the upper or middle battery compartments
No of stetions Nenni
rartheat station miles
which are shown in Fig. 1. Keep the Radiotrons lighted for
about thirty minutes, replace the connector and then try tuning.
Corppo lion Maintenance. Very little maintenance will he required on
d Radiola Super-VIII, outside of an occasional oiling of a few of
the parts. The oiling operation is important, and should be
done about once every six months. To oil the moving parts, turn
P3 i. egg both "STATION SELECTOR" pointers as far to the right as possible,
and open the panel of the set half way as in Fig. 2. Then place
one drop of good grade oil, such as typewriter oil, on each of the
Fig. 4. "STATION SELECTOR. Dials, Showing following parts of both "STATION SELECTORS
Approximate Markings of Principal (1) On the front and rear bearings of the shafts, where the
Broadcasting Stations shafts pass through the black moulded sub -panels.
(2) On the bushings in the panel which hold the "SELEC-
TOR" knobs.
(3) On the universal or ball joint just back of the "SELEC-
The only precaution to be observed when making these TOR" knob shaft.
markings is to see that the set is not located near any large (4) On the spring bearing of the slanting knob shaft (which
metal objects, such as a steam radiator, or that it is not near spring bearing presses against the black insulation
any aerials or electric wiring. Such positions may cause changes collar).
in the settings of "STATION SELECTOR 1." Polishing the Exterior. If finger marks result from handling
the cabinet, a little rubbing or polishing with furniture polish
In order to facilitate the tuning process, and to give an will restore the finish. The polish cl osen should be of a grade
approximate idea of where stations should come in, Fig. 4 shows which will leave the cabinet free from an oily appearance. Use
a reproduction of both dials, with the average markings of the a soft piece of cotton cloth or cheesecloth, free from lint. Satu-
principal broadcasting stations, marked in accordance with the rate the rag lightly with a small quantity of the polish and rub
method described.
 touching the moistened finger to the stationary condenser plates
it on the surface to be restored. Wipe thoroughly dry with of "STATION SELECTOR II," on the rear of the panel. A sharp
clean, dry cheesecloth, making sure that all crevices are dry click should be heard in the loud speaker. If none is heard, try
and clean. The surface should be rubbed until the finish is interchanging this tube with either the third, fourth, or fifth
restored to a dull gloss. Radiotrons. applying the click test each time. Use for the second
Storage Battery. If the user desires to use a 4 -volt storage Radiotron from the right (when facing the front of the set), the
battery, such as that recommended on page 3, it should dry be
one which gives the sharpest click in the loud speaker. If the
located in the lower battery compartment, in place of the six set is still not operative, push in the amplifier switch S. and
cells shown in Fig. 1. Connect one of the terminals on the remove the Radiotron on the extreme left-hand end, from its
"+A" lead to the "+" battery terminal (red) and wrap the
socket. Try substituting this tube for the first. third, fourth and
other terminal on this lead with some insulating tape. Connect
one of the terminals on the " -A" lead to the " " battery - fifth Radiotrons, operating the set each time, to ascertain if
reception has been improved. If no improvement is noted, an
terminal (black), and similarly wrap the other terminal on this examination of the batteries and their connections should be
lead with tape. When operating the set with storage battery, made. It is of advantage to keep a spare Radiotron UV -199
turn the "BATTERY SETTING" knob to 65, but no farther. It on hand, to meet emergencies.
will be possible to leave this knob set at this point when oper-
ating the receiver. The battery should be kept well charged, There are several indications by which the user may de-
but it is recommended that it be removed from the cabinet during termine that the filament or "A" batteries are becoming ex-
this process to prevent damage to the set. hausted. These are low filament brilliancy, weak signals, and
distortion, the signals becoming less and less recognizable.
POSSIBLE DIFFICULTIES When it is found necessary to turn the "BATTERY SETTING"
knob up to "100," and the operation of the set is still unsatis-
Should any trouble develop in the use of Radiola Super - factory (or when it is necessary to turn the "BATTERY SETTING"
VIII, it will in all probability be due to loss of life of the Radio- knob to 100 to get 3 volts on the filament, if a voltmeter is used),
trons or to the exhaustion of the batteries. As the batteries grow it is a definite indication that the filament batteries are ex-
old, they decrease in voltage, and increase in resistance. After hausted.
the Radiotrons have been used for a long time, their filaments When fresh batteries are installed for the first time, listen
tend to lose emission. If the difficulty appears to be elsewhere, to the loud speaker, while pushing the amplifier switch in and out.
it is recommended that the services of the dealer from whom Sharp "clicks" will be heard in the loud speaker. Do this
the set was purchased, be enlisted. sufficiently to learn just how loud the click should be. If the
If the set becomes inoperative, try interchanging the Radio-
trons. The second tube from the right (when facing the front 'B" batteries have become fairly well exhausted, these clicks will
of the set) is the important one and it is well to determine first become practically imperceptible-an indication that they need
whether this tube is working properly. This may be done by replacement. A better method of test is. of course, to use a volt-

l'j
Jt.h ÖprinteÇby;,wOe®k
6 - Cable
ack
Blana .tn
-'.Green SWeTrae
r --Brown .Green with Yeltow Traer)
- -Black Stack with Brown Tracer -- -Tallow with Red Tracer)
Loud Speaker
1
Four -B
-klaroon7
BrowN - -Maroon/
Red with Brown Tracer)
P - ed B batteries
S+PZ 5 ewd
rr7rminal Board
Jaaaaa
Rotatable Loop
Controlled by
tapp Knob Y
'r -,Th
_
-fl
A I _

BATTERY VOLUME STATION

SETNtNG CONÚROL SELECT OR I

- 1rill
I I

{
Yellow
Black with Blue
Black with:
Slack with Green Trac--...

Tellcw Tracer,
Tracer
A. -
`T
II

STATION II
1'tii
-
SELERTOR
Four A Battery I

Connectors E f
Ca
Batteries-- el
II

Six A I

ownTrar
'B Jack

e Fo.-c 'SrcZ-á°f Amplifier

Switch
Telaphone
Jack

Fig. 5. Connection Diagram of Radiola Super.VIII

meter of suitable range (100- or 150 -volt scale), for measuring the
"B" battery voltage. Connect the positive (+) voltmeter
terminal to the " +B " lead in the upper battery compartment
(Fig. 1) and the negative (-) terminal to the " -B" lead in the
middle battery compartment. When the voltage has dropped
to 68 volts total, or to 17 volts per battery, the batteries should be
replaced.
An indication of exhausted "C" batteries may be had by
listening to the loud speaker with no stations tuned in. If the
loud speaker gives forth a continuous noise, the battery needs
renewal. The noise may be either a high pitched whistle, a
high cackling sound or a low gurgling murmur. Frequently the
whistle is so high as to be above the range of audibility for some
persons, but, in any case, the noise becomes more audible as the
batteries age.
 Instructions for Using Model UR -556 Adapter
The Model UR -556 Adapter is designed for using Radiotron UX-120 in the last audio stage only of radio receiving
sets originally using Radiotrons Model UV -199, and more particularly in Radii)la Super -VIII or Radiola Super -Hetero-
dyne (Second Harmonic). The use of this Radiotron as the last audio amplifier will provide greater volume of signal
along with increased quality of reproduction. The Adapter takes care of the difference in size and arrangement of
the contact pins in the bases of the two Ratbotrons, and provides terminals for making ready connection to the additional
plate and grid bias batteries required for the new Radiotron.
APPLICATION TO RADIOLA SUPER-HETERODYNE SECOND HARMONIC
Additional Batteries Required. Radiotron UX-120 with its Adapter will require the following batteries, in addition
to those already installed:
B-Two 22 h -volt plate batteries connected in series. Approximate size, 4tg in. by 2 % in. by 2}} in. such as: 2 Burgess
No. 5156 BP plate batteries, or 2 Eveready No. 768 Plate Batteries, or 2 Ray -O-Vac No. 5151 -BP Plate batteries,
OR EQUIVALENT
Or, One 45 -volt battery may be used instead of two 22 u -volt batteries. Approximate size 2 X in. by 4X in. by S X
in., such as 1 Burgess No. 5308 plat_ battery, OR EQUIVALENT.
C-One 22h -volt "B" battery used as a grid bias or "C" battery, such as those listed u follows:
Horizontal Vertical
1 Burgess No. 5156 BP or No. 5158 plate battery or
1 Eveready No. 768 or No. 764 plate battery or
1 Ray-OVac No. 5151 BP or No. 1153 plate battery OR EQUIVALENT.
Installation of Equipment in Radiola Super -Heterodyne (Second Harmonic).
Remove the control panel C by turning the control panel latch T, pulling the panel forward, unhooking the stay
joint D, lifting the panel off its hinges and laying it face down in front of the set, all as shown in Fig. 2 of the Instruction
Book 86963. Remove the Six UV -199 Radäotrons from their sockets.
Place a block of wood (6 in. long by :l in. wide by X in. thick) in the rear left-hand corner of the compartment
behind the panel, laying it on the loop frame. Make the connections described in the next paragraph for the two "B"
batteries, and stand them on end, facing each other, on top of the block as shown in Fig. 1. (If one 45 -volt block is used
lay it on its side.) Make the connections required for the "C" battery, and place it on top of the two batteries just put
in place, also as shown in Fig. 1.
The connections referred to above are made as shown in Fig. 3. The two "B" batteries are connected in series by
fastening the "+ 22.5" (red) lead of the first battery to the negative
" -" "-" binding post of the second. The negative
binding post of the first battery is connected by a flexible lead (a 20 -inch length of No. 18 rubber covered lamp cord,
or equivalent) to the Adapter terminal marked "-45B." The "+22.5" (red) lead of the second battery is connected
by a second flexible lead to the "+45B" Adapter terminal. The junction between the battery and flexible lead may be
made by using a machine screw (say No. 8-32 by X in. long) with nut and lock washer, or by soldering, if convenient.
In any case, make the joint securely and cover it with friction tape. (In case a 45 -volt "B" battery is used in place of the
above, connect the negative "-"and "+45" binding posts to the "-45B" and "+45B" Adapter terminals respec-
tively.) On the "C" battery, connect the "-"binding post and the "+22.5" (red) lead to the '-22C" and "+22C"
Adapter terminals, respectively. Use the screw or soldered joint on the battery lead, as described above, and insulate
it with friction tape.
While making the above connection, take care to avoid permitting any wires on battery terminals (or the terminals
themselves) to come into contact with other wires, battery terminals or metal parts of the set. Make and keep all
connections secure. Check the connections with the diagram when they have been completed and before inserting the
Radiotrons. It is very important that the batteries be connected to the Adapter in the proper way.
Insert the Adapter UR -556 in the left-hand socket (see Fig. 1) letting the bayonet pin drop into the slot, pressing
the Adapter down and giving it a twist to the right. Push the Radiotron UX-120 into the Adapter. It will be noticed
that Radiotron UX-120 has two small and two large diameter pins in the base. The Radiotron should point toward the
panel, with the large 'pins in the lower holes. Replace five of the UV -199 Radiotrons in the remaining sockets (1 to 5
counting from the right). Replace and latch the panel.
Operation. The operation of Radiola Super-Heterodyne will not be changed by the substitution of the new Radiotron,
except for the position of the "BATTERY SETTING" knob. This will have to be advanced slightly to the right (about
4 dial graduations) beyond the setting when the six UV -199 Radiotrons were being used. Set it at 55 instead of at 47 or
the arrow mark, when batteries are fresh. The moat desirable method of setting this control is to measure the filament
voltage, as described on pages 11 and 12 of Instructions 86963, setting the voltage at 3.0 volts.
Push in the amplifier switch (S in Instructions 86963), when using the second audio. stage. In case the signal is too
loud, and it is desired to operate on the first audio stage, interchange the Adapter (with Radiotron UX-120 in place) with
the Radiotron UV -199 in socket 2, counting from the left. Then pull out the amplifier switch.
dock of Location of Additional
Wood Wand 'V Batteries ar,dn of Batteries Already in
'Brand -C' Batteries Radicle 3"per-MC1

Location of UR-556 Adapter and UX-I20 Padiztron

*i[ 1 2
 APPLICATION TO RADIOLA SUPER -VIII
Additional Batteries Required. The batteries required are as follows:
B -Two 22% -volt plate batteries, connected in series. Approximate size 234 in. by 3 in. by 6 in., such as
2 Eveready No. 764 or 2 Ray -O -Vac No. 1153, OR EQUIVALENT
C -One 22% -volt plate battery, used as a grid bias or "C" battery. Size as above, such as:
1 Eveready No. 764 or 1 Ray"O-Vac No. 1153, OR EQUIVALENT
4 of the
Installation of Equipment in Radiola Super -VIII. Remove the upper rear panel as describedfallonof page the set, using
Instruction Book 86962 for that set. Remove the control panel and place it face down on the the desk
the same method as described in the foregoing for Radiola Super -Heterodyne. Remove six Radiotrons from their
sockets. however, no
Connect the batteries as shown in Fig. 3, and as described for Radiola Super -Heterodyne. In this case,
leads. Place the
screw joints are needed, as all the batteries listed have binding posts and terminals, but no flexible
batteries on the loop bearing plate as shown in Fig. 2.
Insert the Adapter and Radiotrons, replace the control and back panels and operate the receiver as under the
instructions for Radiola Super -Heterodyne.
APPLICATION TO OTHER RECEIVERS
Additional Batteries Required. When substituting a UR -556 Adapter and UX-120 Radiotron for a UV -199 to Radio-
tron in the last stage of other receiving sets, it will be necessary to provide additional "B" and "C" batteries give
135 volts for the plate and 22% volts for the grid of this Radiotron only, instead of the 90 volts plate and
4% volts grid
usually employed with the UV -199 Radiotron. replaced. If
The user should determine what plate voltage was being used on the plate of the Radiotron being volts will be
90 volts were being used by connecting four 22% -volt or two 45 -volt blocks in series, the additional 45
obtained by connecting two 22%2 -volt or one 45 -volt block to the "B" terminalsmay of the Adapter, similar to the manner
described above. The actual size and arrangement of contacts on the batteries be as required by the particular set,
but no batteries smaller than those listed for Radiola Super -Heterodyne above should be used.
The "C" battery should be a 22% -volt block, of size at least as large as those listed above, and should be connected
in a way similar to that already described.
If the Radiotron UV -199 was being used with plate and grid voltages other than those mentioned, the user should
provide sufficient additional "B" battery voltage so that this voltage plus that already used equals 135 volts. Then
provide an extra 22% -volt block for "C" battery.
Rheostat. The UX-120 Radiotron will require the same "A" battery voltage as the UV -199 being replaced,-
three dry cells connected in series, giving a total voltage of 4% volts. Sufficient of these groups should be connected in
parallel to provide the needed current.
The value of the rheostat used to control UX-120 Radiotron depends upon the set used and its connections. Radio-
tron UX-120 may be used with a UV -199 rheostat (usually 33 ohms), although a rheostat of only 15 ohms resistance is
all that is required. For other condi-
tions follow the table below:
Number of Radiotrons Value of Rheostat 22's VOLT "B" BATTERY
Controlled by Rheostat (Ohms)
USED AS "C" BATTERY
1 UX-120 alone 15 ohms
and 1 UV -199 10 ohms RADIOTRON UX-120
1 UX-120 targe pins on lower side
1 UX-120 and 2 UV -199 7 % ohms
1 UX-120 and 3 UV -199 6 ohms*
1 UX-120 and 4 UV -199 5 ohms' ADAPTER UR -556
1 UX-120 and 5 UV -199 4 ohms*
*NOTE. --These combinations gen-
erally use same rheostat as in the radio
receiver, and the proper filament termi-
nal voltage for all the Radiotrons may
be secured by advancing the rheostat
pointer slightly beyond the position
usually required when UV -199 Radio- Make connection
trons were being used throughout. with brass
The rheostat should be set to pre- screw - then
vent overvoltage on the Radiotrons. To insulate wit,
do this, measure the filament voltage friction tape.
with a high-grade, high -resistance volt-
meter, and adjust the filament terminal
voltage of all the Radiotrons to 3.0 Fig. 3
volts. Aside from the readjustment of
the filament voltage, there will be no
difference in the operation of the set.
NOTICE
The apparatus and devices which, or the use of which, are covered by patents, are sold only under certain specified
licenses set forth in a notice attached permanently to the said apparatus and devices, or if this is impracticable on account
of size, then on tags or wrappers attached to the said apparatus and devices or on the cartons containing
the same. This
license notice is as follows: having claims:
"In connection with devices it sells, Radio Corporation of America has rights under patents as, for example,
(a) on the devices themselves and (b) on combinations of the devices with other devices or elements,
in various circuits and hook-ups. (1) talking machine uses,
"The sale of this device carries a license under the patent claims of (a), but only for and only where no business
(2) radio amateur uses, (3) radio experimental uses and (4) radio broadcast reception;
features are involved.
"The sale does not carry a license under patent claims of (b) except only (1) for legitimate renewals and repairs
in apparatus and systems already licensed for use under such patent claims on combinations, (2) for assembling by
amateurs and experimenters, and not by others, with other licensed parts orwhere devices, or with parts or devices made
by themselves, but only for their own amateur and experimental radio uses machines no business features are involved,
and not for sale to or for use by others, and (3) for use with licensed talking and licensed radio broadcast
receiving devices; and only where no business features are involved."
 Radiola IX
INTRODUCTION
Radiola IX is an improved type of radio receiver, designed and
adapted for use in combination with, and as an adjunct to, the
phonograph, and is so constructed that it may be placed in the
lid of the phonograph, in the record cabinet, or in the upper left
séction of console models, dependent upon the particular make and
model of phonograph involved.
Electrically, Radiola IX consists of a highly selective two cir-
cuit tuner, with detector and radio -audio amplifier, using five ÚV-
199 Radiotrons. These tubes are dry -cell operated and all necessary
"A," "B" and "C" batteries are contained in a separate battery
box furnished with the receiver, and connected to the receiver by a
multi -conductor cable. The amplifier supplies energy to a loud-
speaker unit which has a special attachment for connection to the
tone arm of the phonograph, thus preserving good quality of re-
productiop through the original tone arm and horn of the phono-
graph. Local signals produce an extraordinary volume for dancing
purposes.
The wave-length range of the Radiola IX covers the entire broad-
casting band of 220 to 550 meters and through the use of specially
designed radio frequency transformers practically equal sensitivity
is secured over the entire broadcast wave-length band. Good results
may be obtained with an indoor antenna, using the 18 foot silk -
covered, single conductor wire supplied which should be carried
around the room on the picture moulding; or, where greater range
is desired, an outdoor antenna of a single wire 20 ft. to 100 ft. long,
and 30 ft. to 50 ft. high may be employed. For local work, the
indoor antenna is sufficient, but for long distance reception the out-
door antenna is preferable.

UNPACKING
Radiola IX is shipped complete in one large carton. Inside
this carton will be found a smaller carton, which contains the re-
ceiver itself, wrapped in waxed paper, together with the side strips
and corner pieces, where it is ordered for installation in phono-
graph lids, or the hinges and latch which are supplied for other
types of installations.
Iic. 1-I1APH11.A IN Is.r n IN Sr st,NKI, PHONOGRAPH
 There is also contained in the large carton the battery box, (C) One 41/2 Volt Negative Grid Bias or "C" Battery. Such as:
containing the following: 1 Eveready No. 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%) or.
1 Ray -O -Lite No. 231 R Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1fil)
6 UV-199 Radiotrons (5 being required for the set and 1 being a or,
spare). 1 Burgess No. 2370 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%) or,
1 Cable with all necessary leads and connections for batteries, 1 Yale No. 312 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%) or,
loud speaker, antenna and ground. 1 Bright Star "B" 34.17 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x1%)
2 Battery Connectors for "A" Batteries. or,
1 Loud Speaker. 1 Novo No. 288 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4x3x13/8)
1 Loud Speaker Support. OR EQUIVALENT
1 Loud Speaker Adapter, to fasten loud speaker to tone arm.
2 Cable Escutcheons and Screws.
4 Special Brackets for Mounting Radiola IX to Phonograph Lid.
4 Nuts for same. INSTALLATION
4 Special Screws for Border Frames.
THE INSTALLATION OF THE RADIOLA IX IN A PHONO-
8 Copper Tacks for Fastening Border Frame to Panel.
1 Instruction Book. GRAPH SHOULD BE LEFT TO A PHONOGRAPH DEALER OR
In the Radiola IX's which are furnished for installation in the CABINET MAKER.
lids of Columbia Phonograph Model G-2, there is also contained If the set is desired only for local work, the indoor antenna
the following part: wire supplied with the set should be carried around the room on
1 Longer Supporting Bracket for Phonograph Lid. the picture moulding, or otherwise fastened. If an outdoor an-
In Radiola IX's which are designed for the lids of Victrolas, tenna is desired, a single wire 20 ft. to 100 ft. long, and 30 ft. to
VV -100, all of the above material is furnished except the longer 50 ft. high, should be erected, properly insulated at both ends, and
supporting bracket for phonograph lid, this being unnecessary in with a lead brought to the point where the Radiola IX is to be
the case of the Victrola, in which the original supporting bracket is operated. In the case of an outside antenna, the wire should be kept
of sufficient length. at least 10 ft. away from trees and large objects, such as roofs and
Where the set is to be installed in the lids of certain phono- other structures. As a precaution, never have the antenna wire
graphs, a template for drilling the phonograph covers will be found strung over or under electric light wires, for if by falling such wires
in the large carton. Should come in contact, the set and the operator might be endangered.
Whether an indoor or outdoor antenna is used, a ground con-
iection must be made. This connection is preferably made to a
BATTERIES REQUIRED water pipe, but if this is inconvenient, a radiator or steam pipe
(A) Refers to Filament Lighting or "A" Battery. will usually serve the purpose. Do not connect the ground wire
(B) " " Plate or "B" Battery. to a gas pipe. Care should be taken in the installation of antenna
(C) " " Negative Grid or "C" Battery. and ground to insure good and solid connections. The best method
is to clean the piping well with a file and then solder securely. An
(A) Six j2Volt Dry Cells, connected in two PARALLEL groups
of three cells each in SERIES, such as: approved form of ground clamp, properly installed, is satisfactory.
6 Eveready Dry Cell Radio "A" Batteries No. 7111 (21/2x6)or, If an indoor antenna of less than 40 ft. is used, the flexible
6 Burgess Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 6 (21/2x6) or, lead on shunt condenser, Fig. 4, must be connected to the brown
6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells, No. 2445 or 2448 (21/2x61/2) or antenna terminal on the terminal board of the Radiola IX.
or, Should a longer or outside antenna be used, this flexible lead should
6 Ray -O-Vac Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 1211 (21/2x61/2) or, be connected to the black, or ground terminal on the terminal board,
6 Columbia Ignitor No. 6 Dry Cells (21/2x61/2) or, which throws the condenser out of circuit.
6 Ace Radio "A" Dry Cells No. 61 (21/2x6) or,
6 Yale Radio Power -Pak No. 101-R (23/4x61/2) CAUTION:
OR EQUIVALENT Before making any battery installation, be sure that all the
Radiotrons are removed from their sockets. Be sure also that the
(B) Two 45 -Volt Plate Batteries. NOTE: Though four 221/2 -volt cable is connected first to the receiver terminal board before it is
units may be used two 45 -volt units are preferred instead. connected to any batteries; otherwise, the batteries may be short-
Such as: circuited and their life materially reduced.
2 Eveready No. 767 Plate Batteries, EACH 45-Volts (8x6%x3) The "A" batteries must be placed in the box with their termi-
or, nals as shown in Fig. 4. Remove thumb screws and place special
2 Burgess No. 2306Plate Batteries, EACH 45 -Volts (77/8x65/8 - onnector on batteries as shown. This connects the batteries in
x3) or, bree series groups, of two cells each in parallel. The yellow leads
2 Yale No. 3045 V Plate Batteries, EACH 45-Volts (8x65/8x3)
ire connected to the center or positive terminal of the "A" battery
and the black leads to the outside or negative terminal.
OR EQUIVALENT
 ti

CIZO AJS
 The method of connecting the "B" battery is clearly shown in SERIAL No.
the diagram in the battery box, Fig. 4. The leads are sufficiently 2 3
long to permit making the connection outside the box for conven- Wave Length Selector Secondary
ience. Then the batteries should be placed in the box as shown,
taking care that no terminals touch the box. 250
The "C" battery fits in the smaller space to the left of the "A"
battery. The wire with green terminal should be connected to the 300
41/2 volt negative, or minus, clip on the battery and the black ter- 350
minal to the positive, or plus, clip.
Great care should be taken to keep the battery connections 400
tight, as failure to do so may result in objectionable noises or com- 450
plete inoperation of the set.
500
OPERATION
1. Be sure that set is properly connected, as per diagram, Fig. 4. 550
2. Be sure filament control (Dial No. 1) is turned as far as it will
go to the left or counter -clockwise direction. Start with all
pointers at the left or zero marks. 6. Place secondary tuning control (Dial No. 3) on corresponding
Insert tubes in their bayonet sockets by pressing down slightly graduation wave -length band, as shown on dial.
3.
7. Swing antenna tuning control (Dial No. 4) through its range
and turning to the right. several times.
4. Advance the filament control to graduations 5 or 6 on its dial.
8. If signals are not heard bring up volume control (No. 5), until
5. Choose approximate wave -length desired by use of Selector No.
a click is heard. This is termed "the oscillation point." Now
2 with the aid of the chart below:
with this control held just below this point, Vernier controls 3
and 4 must be operated together to give best results, especially on
long distance, signals, or signals from weak stations.
On weak stations it is best to allow the set to oscillate, that is,
bring control well beyond the click point and swing control 3 through
its range determined by selector position. When a whistling sound,
known as the "carrier beat" is heard, it should be brought to maxi-
mum by control 4, then control 5 should be reduced gradually until
the oscillations cease, keeping whistling sound in tune at the same
time by Vernier control 3. The carrier beat will then disappear and
station will be heard without distortion.
To strengthen the signal, work the stabilizer as near the oscil-
lation point as possible and retune with Vernier controls 3 and 4.
Bear in mind that the stabilizer is an adjustment of sensitivity and
not of tuning. Care should be taken that set is not left in oscil-
lating condition.
The filament control (Dial No. 1) should be advanced as the
filament batteries are consumed. This control should, however, be
kept always as low as possible consistent with good reception, else the
life of the tubes, and to some extent also the life of the batteries, will
be seriously shortened.

REPLACEMENTS
Batteries and tubes are the only parts which require replace
ment.
"A" BATTERIES:
With average use, these batteries should last several months.
They require replacement when the filament control Dial No. 1 must
be kept at maximum (10) for good reception, and when the tubes
light but dimly with the pointer in that location.
The old cells can be removed by disconnecting all wires from
battery binding posts. Then cells may be taken out and new ones
FIG. 5-PHOTOGRAPH OF BATTERIES CONNECTED AND IN Box connected in their place. On each lead is color marking designa-
ting the point to which the lead is to be connected. Reference to
figures will preclude the possibility of an error in connection, and batteries are exhausted when total voltage falls below 70 volts.
will warrant careful attention. The carbon or center part of a To replace, lift battery unit out and unclip leads. The bat-
standard dry cell is positive. tery leads are long enough to permit the units to be lifted out of the
DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES FROM SOCKETS BE- box, for their connection. DON'T FORGET TO REMOVE TUBES
FORE CHANGING ANY BATTERIES. NEVER BURN TUBES FROM SOCKETS BEFORE REPLACING ANY BATTERIES. Con-
MORE BRIGHTLY THAN REQUIRED FOR A SIGNAL OF REA- nect the new units exactly as shown in Battery Box cover.
SONABLE VOLUME.
"C" BATTERIES:
These cells should be renewed every six months to insure proper
"B" BATTERIES: functioning of Radiola IX.
"B" batteries may be tested by a high resistance type of volt-
meter which will indicate up to 100 volts at least. The meter
should show at least 90 volts when across both batteries (new) and

(719OQOQQr

egn

-CAlWANN.

"
.,., .. ....
FM. 6 - SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAM OF RADIOLA IX
 Radiola X
INTRODUCTION
The Radiola X Receiver using four WD -11 Radiotrons is a 17. The appearance of Radiola X is such that it is an article
complete radio receiving set with self-contained loud speaker and of furniture welcome in any living room, and its capa-
provision for internal batteries, mounted in an attractive mahog- bilities as a musical instrument make it a never ending
any cabinet. It contains everything necessary for operation, source of entertainment.
except the antenna and ground connections and the necessary
batteries. It has been designed especially for broadcast reception
and will tune to all wave frequencies between 1400 and 540 kilo- EQUIPMENT
cycles (220 to 550 meters).
The circuit employed is the newly developed REGENOFLEX Radiola X is supplied complete ready for operation with the
circuit, designed to eliminate radiation, that is, interference with a exception of the antenna, ground connection and batteries. Four
neighboring radio set, and also to give selectivity (or the ability to WD -11 Radiotrons are supplied which, with reasonable care,
select the station desired) to a degree unapproached by the usual should last for approximately a year when used several hours per
antenna type of receiver. day.
The Radiola X Receiver embodies the following features: In addition there are required a suitable antenna and ground,
1. Ease of operation. and "A", "B" and "C" batteries as follows:
2. High selectivity. "A" Battery (for filament heating)
3. Freedom from radiation. Six 11/2 volt dry cells, connected in PARALLEL, of ally of
4. Radio frequency amplification. the following:
5. Regeneration. Burgess Radio '.'A" Dry Cell ,S 6.
6. Audio frequency amplification with improved trans- Eveready Radio "A" Dry, Cell 7111.
i1F

formers, using a special alloy for the cores. Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cell i# 2445.
7. Use of negative grid bias or "C" battery. Ray -O -Vac Radio "A" Dry Cell 1211. >!<

8. A loud speaker (electro-accoustic unit) giving vastly or any other make of good dry cell having a diameter
improved tonal quality of reproduction, and covering of 21/2 inches and a height not exceeding 61/2 inches and having
a wide range in frequency. screw and thumb nut terminals.
9. A lock to prevent unauthorized use of receiver, or re-
moval of Radiotrons. "B" Battery (for plate supply)
10. An unusually pleasing cabinet. Four 221/2 volt Plate Batteries, connected in series of any of
the following:
11. Dry cell operated, no storage battery required.
Burgess # 5156 B P Plate Battery.
12. Batteries and loud speaker self-contained. Eveready # 768 Plate Battery.
13. High sensitiveness, permitting loud speaker reception Ray -O -Vac # 5151 B P Plate Battery.
from distant stations. or any other make of good radio "B" battery whose base
dimensions do not exceed 4% by 2% inches. Leads are arranged
14. The loudspeaker is built into the cabinet with its open- for intermediate size batteries with lead and binding post as listed
ing at the front above the panel. above. Other intermediate size batteries may be used or some of
15. The panel contains all necessary controls. It can be the new vertical types such as Eveready # 764 and Burgess
tipped forward to give access to the interior for insertion # 5158.
or replacement of Radiotrons.
"C" Battery (for grid bias)
16. All necessary batteries are located in the space provided
One 41/2 volt Grid Battery of any of the following:
at the back of the cabinet. The entire back of the Eveready # 771 Grid Battery.
cabinet is removable permitting free access to the in- Ray -O -Vac # 231-R Grid Battery.
terior. On the inside of the back is a card showing the Burgess # 2370 Grid Battery.
proper location of the batteries. The antenna and
ground connections are made by binding posts at the or any other make of good three cell battery, whose
dimensions do not exceed 4 by 1% inches.
back of the cabinet near the bottom.
 INSTALLATION
Location-The Radiola X should be placed as near as pos- heating system will serve unless there is a bad joint in the piping.
sible to the incoming lead from the antenna. A good ground Connections to gas pipes should not be used. If nothing of this
such as a water pipe should be not far away. nature is available, a pipe or metal rod may be driven into the
If possible, place the Radiola n in a fairly large room and one ground to a depth of several feet, preferably where the soil is
which does not have bare walls, as draperies, hangings, etc., will moist. The ground connection should be made with a ground
prevent accoustic reflections and help to make the entertainment clamp, the wire being soldered or held by clamping under a screw
more pleasing. or nut. Be sure to scrape and clean the pipe thoroughly before
attaching the ground clamp. Usually, connecting to more than
ANTENNA one ground, for instance to both water and steam pipes, will
improve reception.
Outdoor Type-In general, best results will be obtained with
an outdoor antenna, from 100 feet to 200 feet long, including the CONNECTIONS
lead-in wire, and 20 or more feet above the ground. If the sug-
gested length and height cannot be secured, approach them as There are two binding posts at the bottom part of the cabinet
nearly as possible. So far as possible, the antenna should be near the middle of the back. One of these has a small plate with
located in a space above the tops of surrounding buildings and the letters "ANT." Connect the lead from the antenna to this
trees. It should not be touched by any object except the antenna binding post. The other has a small plate with the letters "GND."
insulators. The same precautions apply to the lead-in wire which Connect a wire from the ground clamp to this binding post.
should be a continuation of the antenna wire without any joints, Make both leads as short as possible.
and should run as directly as possible to the receiver. The an- All batteries fit into compartments at the back of the cabinet.
tenna should be at right angles to electric light, traction, power Turn the cabinet so that easy access and good lighting may be
and other wire lines which may cause objectionable noises. If had. Remove the back panel entirely by pulling outward at the
practicable, the antenna should be at least 15 feet distant from top. The card on the inside of the back panel shows the proper
such wire lines and other antennae. arrangement of the batteries and the connections to them.
When an outdoor antenna is used a protective device of a The "A" battery of six cells is arranged in two tiers of three
type approved and in accordance with the National Electric Code, cells each, connected in parallel, in the space between the horn
should be installed to remove all danger from lightning or power and the left side of the cabinet viewed from the back. Only the
wires. round type of cell may be used and these must have terminals
Outdoor aerials having a length up to 200 feet should be used of the screw and thumb nut type. Remove all the thumb nuts.
since louder signals and greater distances can thus be secured. Place three cells in the lower tray with the binding posts on the
Proper volume control and selectivity will be obtained by adjust- edge toward the center of the group. Find the black wire with
ment of the "Volume Control" knob, regardless of the size of the the brass disc attached to it. This disc has three holes which will
antenna, provided the length does not exceed 200 feet approxi- slip over the three edge binding posts at the center of the group.
mately. Find the loop of yellow wire near the top of the cells with three
If an antenna is available, it may be used provided that it is lugs soldered to it and slip the lugs onto the center terminals of
not more than 200 feet long. If a new antenna is to be erected, all the cells nearest to each. After the first lug has been placed on a
necessary material and full directions will be found in the Antenna cell terminal, do not allow the others to touch any metal parts.
Package of the Radio Corporation of America, Type AG -788. Now replace the thumb nuts on the three cells and screw them
down as tightly as possible. The same process is then to be applied
Indoor Type-For local reception, satisfactory results may be to the other three cells in the upper tier. The result will be six
secured by using only 20 to 30 feet of ordinary double cotton cells in parallel.
covered bell wire (11E 18 B & S) strung around the picture mould- The "B" battery is placed upon the bottom of the cabinet.
ing. It may also be run the length of an attic. Such an antenna Metal curbs are provided to keep the blocks in place. The battery
will not be satisfactory in a building with metal lath under the should consist of four blocks of radio "B" battery, each giving
plaster. normally 22% volts. These blocks are to be connected in series
Loop Type-A loop aerial can be used for nearby local recep- according to the diagram. The battery space is designed primar-
tion. ily for the intermediate size plate batteries equipped with a lead
at the positive end and a binding post at the negative end. These
GROUND blocks are particularly easy to connect. Arrange them as shown
in the diagram Fig. (2.) Connect the black lead from the set
A good ground is as necessary as a good antenna. Perhaps marked "-B" to the binding post of block number (1). Connect
the best ground is a good electrical connection to a water pipe. the battery lead from block number (1) to the binding post of
If this is not convenient, a connection to the steam or hot water block number (2) and to this same binding post connect the
 To place the Radiotrons in the set, it is necessary to tip for-
orange lead from the set marked " + 20 B." Then connect the ward the operating panel. In the upper right corner of the panel
lead from block number (2) to the binding post of block number is a combination lock and switch. This in the locked position
(3) and the lead from block number (3) to the binding post on opens the filament battery circuit and prevents the panel from
block number (4). The lead from block number (4) goes to the being tipped forward. Insert the key and turn it to the right.
post on the side of the cabinet to which is attached a red lead from In the upper left corner there is also a small catch. Turn this
the set marked "+ 80 B." In case another type of battery is also to the right, and then pull. The panel will tip forward leav-
used, proceed as follows after placing blocks in the curbs. First find ing a clear space of about three inches at the top. Remove four
the black lead from the set which is marked "-B" on a small metal Radiotrons from their cartons and insert them in the sockets
tag. Connect this lead to the negative terminal, which may be provided in the tube mounting board directly in back of the panel
marked either "-" or "NEG", of one of the blocks which we Push the Radiotrons straight down until the bases touch the
.

shall now call number (1). Then find the orange lead from the socket panel. The sockets are arranged so that the large pin
set, this being marked "+ 20 B" and connect it to the positive in the base of the radiotron will be toward the panel. Be sure
terminal, which may be marked either "+", "+ 22h" or "POS", that the control marked "Battery Setting" has been turned as
of block number (1). At the same time connect a short piece far to the left as possible before the Radiotrons are inserted. Then
of wire to the same POSITIVE terminal of block number (1) while the panel is still in the forward position, turn the "Battery
and connect its other end to the NEGATIVE terminal of block Setting" to the right until the pointer reaches the mark diagonally
number (2). In the same way connect the POSITIVE terminal upward to the right. Look down into each of the Radiotrons
of block number (2) to the NEGATIVE of number (3) and the and make sure that all the filaments glow with a dull red color.
POSITIVE of number (3) to the NEGATIVE of number (4). Then tip the panel back into normal position and turn up the catch
This leaves the positive of number (4) with no connection to it. at the left.
Now connect a wire from this positive terminal to the binding A jack is provided at the extreme right of the panel a little
post on the side of the cabinet to which is attached a red lead above the center. This jack is in parallel with the loud speaker
and a tag marked "+ 80 B." and is so connected that when a plug is inserted, the loud speaker
The "C" battery is located in a small compartment just back in the cabinet is disconnected. It is intended for connection to a
of the horn. It should have three cells, giving voltages of 3 and separate loud speaker or, undervery exceptional circumstances, to
43.' The usual types have three terminals. Connect the lead a telephone headset.
having the tag marked " +C" to the terminal on the "C" battery
marked +" or "POS". Connect the other lead having the tag
marked "-C" to the terminal marked "-3" or "-4%" as OPERATION
desired.
NOTE -3 volt connection will give greater volume. 4% Control
volt connection will better conserve the "B" batteries. Volume Control-The control so marked serves to regulate
When all of the battery connections have been made, replace the transfer of energy between the two tuning circuits. Thus it
the back of the cabinet. Make sure that it is solidly in place. regulates the strength of the signal. It also governs the selectivity
Note that the antenna and ground connections are tight or if they of the set, that is, the further the "Volume Control" is turned to-
have been removed to facilitate the battery connection replace ward the left, the more easily can various stations be separated.
them according to directions.

Oround " Antenna

Fig. 2-Diagram of Battery Connectiona
 Battery Setting-The control so marked serves to turn on It will be found that there is a definite relation between the
and regulate the current to the filaments of the Radiotrons. When two "Station Selectors", for example, when "Station Selector II"
the set is not in use, either the lock directly above this control is set on "3", "Station Selector I" should be nearly "3" when
should be in the locked position with the key vertical or else the both are tuned to the same wavelength. It may happen that
pointer of the "Battery Setting" should be turned as far to the this agreement will not be very close in which case "Station
left as possible. When it is desired to operate the set, unlock Selector I" will reach one end or the other of the scale before
it and then turn the "Battery Setting" pointer until it rests on "Station Selector II", thus making it impossible to tune both
the mark diagonally upward to the right. With new dry cells selectors accurately over the whole wavelength range. To im-
in the "A" battery, this adjustment will give the proper current prove this condition, tip the panel forward. At the extreme left
through the filaments. As the cells become old, it will be neces- is a coil wound on a micarta tube. At the top of the coil are four
sary to turn the "Battery Setting" still further to the right. The terminals, to one of which is attached a lead from the antenna.
filaments should always glow at a dull red color, and should Remove this lead and attach it to one of the other terminals.
never be burned brighter than necessary to obtain signals. They With any ordinary antenna a terminal can be found where the
may be examined at any time by tipping the panel forward. agreement between the "Station Selectors" will be close. Ordi-
narily the lead should be left on this terminal as it facilitates
Station Selector I-The control so marked serves to adjust tuning. More sound volume may be obtained when listening
the antenna tuning circuit so that it will respond to the desired to stations which operate at frequencies less than approximately
wavelength. 860 kilocycles (greater than approximately 350 meters) by moving
Amplification-The control so marked adjusts the regenera- this lead to the terminal nearest the panel. This will cause
tion, and thereby regulates the sensitivity and the selectivity of "Station Selector I" to reach the lower end of its scale before
the set. "Station Selector II" and will destroy the agreement between
Station Selector II-The control so marked adjusts the them and make it impossible to tune to stations operating at
high frequencies (low wave lengths.)
secondary tuning circuit so that it will respond to the desired
wave length. It is often convenient to have a record of the adjustments
when tuned to various stations. The setting of "Station Selector
FINDING SIGNALS I" and "Station Selector II" should be recorded for each station
heard. Then when it is desired to hear that particular station,
Turn the "Volume Control" pointer to the right as far as it set the "Station Selectors" at the right points, adjust the "Ampli-
will go. fication" and the station should be heard if it is operating.
Turn the "Battery Setting" until the pointer rests on the When receiving from nearby stations, it may happen that the
mark, previously described, which shows proper position when volume will be greater than is desired. Do not attempt to de-
batteries are new. crease the volume by turning pack the "Battery Setting" as that
Turn "Amplification" until a breathing sound is heard. This will spoil the quality. Turn back the "Volume Control" until
should occur when the pointer reaches "2.5" or a little before. the signal strength has been reduced as much as is desired. Selec-
If it does not disconnect the lead marked "+20 B" from the tivity or the ability to pick a desired station out of interference,
positive terminal of the first block of the "B" battery and connect depends upon the setting of "Volume Control." The receiver is
it to the positive terminal of the second block. much more selective when this control is turned to the left so
Turn both "Station Selector I" and "Station Selector II'' that it is often desirable to operate with this control almost to the
from one end of the scale to the other keeping them at approxi- left limit. This weakens the signals somewhat, but they
mately the same reading all the time. GO SLOWLY and listen brought up to desired loudness by further adjustment can be
of the
carefully. A squeal or whistle will be heard when the set is tuned "Amplification Control."
to a station that is operating. When the whistle is heard, turn The loud speaker is adjustable and is properly set before it
"Station Selector II" until the whistle assumes a very low pitch. leaves the factory. In case the adjustment has been disturbed
Then turn "Station Selector I" until the whistle becomes loudest. and it does not operate satisfactorily, proceed as follows: Adjust
Finally turn "Amplification" to the left just enough to stop the the set to give a fairly loud signal from a nearby station. Remove
whistle when the speech or music should be heard clearly. A the panel at the back of the set and the loud speaking element
will be found in the upper right (from the back) corner.
slight readjustment of "Station Selector II" may be necessary for in and find the knurled edge. Turn it to the right, i.e., so
Reach
best results. Of course it may happen that a station is found be- the top moves away from you, until a rattling sound is produced. that
tween numbers of its program. Therefore, if nothing is heard at Then turn it back until the rattling sound ceases. This is the
the conclusion of the above process, wait a minute or so. Do not most sensitive adjustment and the loud speaker should ordinarily
wait too long before adjusting "Station Selector II". A whistle be left this way. When the signals are especially loud, it may
may also be produced by an improperly operated receiving set be necessary to turn the knurled part back still further to prevent
nearby but such a whistle seldom remains constant. rattling. On the other hand, when the signals are extremely
A little experience in making the adjustments will be neces- weak and it is desired to make the utmost of them, the knurled
sary before stations can be found easily and quickly but once this part may be turned still further to the right. In any case, the
experience is had, the operation of picking up signals and tuning adjustment must be such that a rattling sound is not produced.
the receiver is very simple.
It is not recommended that the loud speaking element be ad-
Loud Speaker-The loud speaker is the latest development
justed frequently as this involves needless trouble. It should be
adjusted as described at first and so long as it does not rattle, in electro-accoustics and has a very wide frequency range. The
should be left alone. quality of reproduction is unusually faithful and pleasing.
Circuit-The circuit employed is the newly developed
MAINTENANCE "REGENOFLEX" circuit which eliminates radiation and gives
excellent sensitivity and selectivity. The REGENOFLEX circuit
Badiotrons-When not mistreated, the Radiotrons will last combines radio frequency amplification, regeneration, audio
for many months. Occasionally one will become inoperative on amplification and freedom from radiation.
account of a broken filament or otherwise. It should be replaced Of course, all Radiotrons are properly biased by the use of
by a new one of the same type. suitable grid or "C" battery, which is an essential to good quality
Filament or "A" Battery-When the dry cells used for reproduction and which greatly increases the life of Radiotrons
this purpose become discharged to the point where they will no and plate batteries.
longer heat the filaments to the proper brilliancy, they should be
replaced by new ones. The stage of radio frequency amplification is balanced so that
Plate or "B" Battery-The "B" Battery should last for it cannot oscillate and therefore this set cannot radiate and cause
several months. When signals become weak with the filaments interference to other nearby receivers. Radio frequency amplifi-
cation and regeneration make this set especially sensitive while
burning properly or operation becomes noisy, the "B" batteries the two tuned circuits plus regeneration make it selective.
should be replaced by new ones. If a voltmeter (preferably of
the high resistance type) is available, the batteries may be tested.
They should be discarded when the voltage has dropped to 17.
Bias or "C" Battery-It is difficult to tell when this battery
is exhausted except by measurement of its voltage with a volt-
meter. The safe plan is to renew it whenever the "B" battery is
replaced.

SPECIFICATIONS
Cabinet-The cabinet is a fine example of the cabinet making
art. It is made of mahogany, finished in dark brown and given a
high polish.
Panel-The panel is moulded from a phenolic condensation
product.
Variable Condensers-The variable condensers are especially
smooth running. They are driven by a friction disc giving a
slower motion to permit accurate tuning.
Fixed Condensers-The fixed condensers are of two types
both especially designed for their uses.
Antenna Circuit Coils-The antenna circuit coils are wound
on micarta tubing and are carefully impregnated and baked.
They will retain their high efficiency indefinitely.
Secondary Circuit Coils-The secondary circuit coils are of
an improved design and are so arranged as to require only a very
small space.
Radiotron Sockets-The Radiotron sockets are of the well
known sliding contact type and insure a positive connection to
the Radiotrons. The Radiotron board is flexibly mounted on mez
rubber to eliminate mechanical noises.
Transformers-The audio transformers use a special alloy Fig. 3-Vlow Showing Top of Antenna Coil
material for the cores. This produces much better amplification
at low frequencies than has been had in any previously used trans-
formers.
Jack-The jack is of special design to keep all metallic parts
from the front of the panel.
Radiotrons-The Radiotrons are type WD -11. They have
been redesigned with small bulbs and moulded bases to occupy
less space.
 Radiola Reqenoflex
INTRODUCTION
The Radiola Regenoflex Receiver, using four WD -11 Radio- An unusually pleasing cabinet.
13.
trons, is a complete radio receiving set with self-contained bat- Dry cell operation, no storage battery required.
14.
teries mounted in an attractive mahogany cabinet and contains Improved quality of speech and musical reproduction
15.
everything necessary for operation, except the loud speaker, (when a good loud speaker is used).
antenna and ground connections and the necessary batteries. It 16. The panel may be tipped forward to give access to I

is designed especially for broadcast reception and will tune to all the Radiotrons or to adjust the antenna tap.
frequencies between 1400 and 540 kilocycles (220 to 550 meters). The appearance of the Radiola Regenoflex is such that it
The circuit employed is the newly developed Regenoflex will be an article of furniture welcome in any living room and
circuit, designed to eliminate radiation, that is, interference its capabilities as a musical instrument will prove it to be a
with a neighboring radio set, and also to give selectivity (the never ending source of entertainment.
ability to select the station desired) unapproached by the usual
antenna type of receiver.
The Radiola Regenoflex receiver embodies the following EQUIPMENT
features: The Radiola Regenoflex is supplied complete ready for
1 .Super selectivity. operation with the exception of the loud speaker, antenna and
2. Freedom from radiation. batteries. Four WD-11 Radiotrons are required which, with
.i. Greater sensitivity so that distant stations may be reasonable care should last for approximately one year's use.
heard. In addition there are required a suitable antenna, ground
4. Radio frequency amplification. connection and "A", "B" and "C" batteries as follows:
5. Sufficient amplification so that a loud speaker may
(A) refers to Filament lighting or "A'.' battery.
be operated on signals from distant stations. (B) refers to Plate or "B" battery.
'

6. "Dual amplification" whereby one tnbe is made to (C) refers to Negative grid bias or "C" battery.
amplify at both Radio and Audio frequencies.
7. Audio frequency amplification using the balanced or (A) Six 1% Volt Dry Cells, connected in Parallel, such as:
push-pull method with improved transformers, using 6 Burgess Radio "A" dry cells *6 (2% x 6) or,
6 Eveready dry cell radio "A" batteries * 7111 (without
a special alloy for the cores.
8. Regeneration. Fahnstock clips), (23. x 6) or,
9. Use of negative grid bias or "C" battery. 6 Manhattan Red Seal Dry Cells *2445 (2% x 6%) or,
10. A lock to prevent unauthorized use of receiver. 6 Ray -O -Vac Radio "A" Dry Cells 1K1211 (2% x 63) or,
11. All batteries self-contained. 6 Columbia Ignitor *6 Dry Cells (2% x 6%) or,
12. The panel contains all necessary controls. 6 Ace Radio "A" Dry Cells *61 (2jß x 6) or,

C'ATUi LOCK ANO BATTERY

FILAMENT SETTING
SWITCH

OUTPUT
JACK

A SATTERY
BATTERY COMPARTMENT
COMPARTMENT

CONTROL KNOB
STATION SELECTOR I CONTROL KNOB
STATION SELECTOR II

CONTROL KNOB
AMPLIFICATION
Fig. I Rndini:, R.g,..,ofl, x
 6 Du -al Radio "A" Dry Cells (General Duty) 4 6 (2% x 6). Indoor Type-For local reception, satisfactory results may
or equivalent. be secured by using only 20 to 30 feet of ordinary double cotton
(B) Four 22% Volt Plate Batteries, connected in series, such as: covered bell wire (ilt 18 B & S) strung around the picture mould-
4 Burgess Ai 5156 Plate Batteries (41/ x 2 x 2%) or, ing. It may also he run the length of the attic.
4 Eveready M 768 Plate Batteries (411g x 212e- x 2%) or, Loop Type-A loop aerial connected across the antenna
4 French Ray -O-Vac *5151 Plate Batteries (4% x 2, e x and ground binding posts can be used for nearby local reception.
2%), or equivalent. Ground-A good ground is as necessary as a good antenna.
(C) One 41A Volt Negative Grid Bias Battery, such as:
Perhaps the best ground is a good electrical connection to a water
1 Eveready * 771 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x 13 g)
pipe. If this is not convenient, a connection to the steam or
or, hot water heating system will usually serve almost as well.
Ray-O -Vac 4 231-R Negative Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x
Connections to gas pipes are not always successful and should
be avoided. If nothing of this nature is available, a pipe or
1

or,
117-6)
metal rod may be driven into the ground to a depth of several
I Burgess 4 2370_Negative Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x 3.R1
1
feet, perferably where the soil is moist.
or, The ground connection should be made with a ground clamp,
1 Yale Si 312 Negative Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x 13 8) or, the wire being soldered or held by clamping under a screw or
I Bright Star B-34-17 Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x 13 í) or. nut. Be sure to scrape and clean the pipe thoroughly before
1 Novo 4 288 Grid Bias Battery (4 x 3 x 13 K), attaching the ground clamp. Usually, connecting to niore than
or equivalent. one ground, for instance to both water and steam pipes, will
improve reception.
INSTALLATION
CONNECTIONS
Location- The Radiola Regenoflex should be placed as
near as possible to the incoming lead from the aerial wire. A There are two binding posts at the bottom part of the cabinet
good ground such as a water pipe should be not far away. near the middle of the back. One of these has a small plate with
If possible. place the Radiola Regenoflex in a fairly large the letters "ANT". Connect the lead from the antenna side
room-one which does not have bare walls, as draperies, hang- of the lightning arrestor to the binding post. The other has a
ings, etc., will prevent accoustic reflections and help to make small plate with the letters "GND". Connect a wire from the
the entertainment more pleasing. ground clamp to this binding post. Make both leads as short
as possible.
All batteries fit into compartments at either end of the
ANTENNA cabinet. The compartment at the left is designed to hold the
Outdoor Type In general, best results will be obtained "B" and "C" batteries while the one at the right is intended to
with an outdoor antenna, from 75 to 150 feet long, including hold six dry cells. The little panels on the front of the cabinet
the lead-in wire and from 20 to 35 feet above the ground. If may be easily removed by lifting upward and then pulling out-
the suggested length and height cannot be secured, approach ward.
them as nearly as possible. So far as possible. it should be located The "A" battery of six dry cells will fit into the compartment
in a space above the tops of surrounding buildings and trees. at the right as shown in figure 3. The cells should be placed in
It should not he touched by. any object except the antenna such a position that the outside or negative terminals form a
insulators. The same precautions apply to the lead-in wire vertical line. Remove all the thumb nuts. Find the black wire
which preferably should be a continuation of the antenna wire carrying the metal tag marked "-A" and with six lugs soldered
without any joints, and should run as directly as possible to the to it. Place' one lug over each of the outside binding posts.
receiver. The antenna should he at right angles to all electric replace the thumb nuts on these posts and screw them down
light, traction, power, telephone and telegraph wires and, if tightly. Then find the long yellow wire carrying the metal tag
practicable, at least 15 feet distant from them. marked "}-A" and with the six lugs soldered to it. Place one
Where an outdoor antenna is used, it should be protected lug over each of the center binding posts beginning at the lower
from lightning by a suitable approved type of lightning arrester right cell and running up and over and down the left column
and the installation made in accordance with the National Elec- as shown in figure 5. Replace the remaining thumb nuts and
tric Code Standards. screw them down tightly. Replace the panel.
The "B" battery of four blocks is to be placed in the left
Outdoor aerials having a length up to 150 or 175 feet may compartment near the back. The blocks are to be laid on their
be used since louder signals and greater distances can thus be sides in two rows as shown in figure 4. It will he necessary to
covered. Proper volume control and selectivity will be ob- make connections before the batteries are placed in the compart-
tained by adjustment of the "Volume Control" knob, regard- ment. All four blocks are to be connected in series, that is, the
less of the size of the antenna, provided the length does not positive of one to the negative of the next. Assuming that the
exceed 175 feet (approximately). intermediate size "B" batteries with lead and binding post are
Any normal antenna already installed may be used. If to be used, proceed as follows: Arrange four blocks as shown
a new antenna is to be erected all necessary material and full in figure 4. The one at the upper right we shall designate as
directions will be found in the Radio Corporation of America *1. Among the leads coming from the center compartment
Type AG -788 antenna package.
will be found one with a brown braid and carrying a metal tag Battery Setting-The control so marked serves to turn on
marked "-B". Connect this to the negative or "-" terminal and regulates the current to the filaments of the Radiotrons.
of block *1. Then connect the positive or "+" lead from When the set is not in use, either the lock directly above this
block Xi 1 to the negative terminal of block 4 2. To this same control should be in the locked position with the key vertical,
binding post connect the orange lead carrying a metal tag marked or else the pointer of the "Battery Setting" should be turned as
"+20 B". Then connect the positive lead from block iX 2 to far to the left as possible. When it is desired to operate the set,
the negative terminal of block *3 and the positive lead of block unlock it and then turn the "Battery Setting" pointer until it
M 3 to the negative terminal of block iK 4. Finally connect the rests on the mark diagonally upward to the right. With new dry
red cable lead to the positive lead of block * 4. Now place the cells in the "A" battery, this adjustment will give the proper
blocks in the compartment. *3 goes at the bottom at the current through the filaments. As the cells become old, it will
back with Xi 4 on top of it, the blocks lying on their sides. The be necessary to turn the "Battery Setting" still further to the
other two blocks go in front with *2 on the bottom and 1 1K right. The filaments should always glow at a dull red color, and
on top. If the batteries used are not of the type described, use should never be burned brighter than necessary to obtain signals.
short pieces of insulated wire to make the connections between They may be examined at any time by tipping the panel forward.
blocks. When the wire is clamped under terminals, see that Station Selector I-The control so marked serves to adjust
the copper conductor is clean and bright. All connections must the antenna tuning circuit so that it will respond to the desired
be clean and tight or there will be noises. wave length.
The "C" battery is to be placsd directly in front of the "B" Amplification-The control so marked adjusts the regener-
batteries in the compartment at the left. Find the black cable ation. and thereby regulates the sensitivity and the selectivity
lead with the tag marked "--C" and connect it to the battery of the set.
terminal marked "-F". Then connect the green cable lead with Station Selector II-The control so marked adjusts the
-
tag marked " C" to the terminal marked " -4-1A". secondary tuning circuit so that it will respond to the desired
wave length.
To place the Radiotrons in the set, tip the operating panel
forward. In the upper right corner of the panel is a combination
lock and switch. This in the locked position opens the filament Finding Signals
battery circuit and prevents the panel from being tipped forward. Turn the "Volume Control" until the pointer extends hori-
Insert the key and turn it to the right. In the upper left corner zontally to the right.
there is also a small catch with a gold knob. Turn this also to Turn "Battery Setting" until the pointer rests on the mark
the right, and then pull. The panel will tip forward leaving a previously described, which shows proper position when batteries
clear space of about three inches at the top. Remove four new are new.
WD -11 Radiotrons from their cartons and insert them in the Turn "Amplification" until a breathing sound is heard. This
sockets provided in the tube mounting board directly in back should occur when the pointer reaches "2.5" or a little before.
of the panel. The sockets are arranged so that the large pin in Turn both "Station Selector I" and "Station Selector II"
the base of the Radiotron will be toward the panel. Be sure that from one end of the scale to the other keeping them at approxi-
the control marked "Battery Setting" has been turned as far mately the same reading all the time. GO SLOWLY and listen
to the left as possible before the Radiotrons are inserted. Then carefully. A squeal or whistle will be heard when the set is tuned
while the panel is still in the forward position turn the "Battery to a station that is operating. When the whistle is heard, turn
Setting" to the right until the pointer reaches the mark diagonally "Station Selector II" until the whistle assumes a very low pitch.
upward to the right. Look down into each of the Radiotrons Then turn "Station Selector I" until the whistle becomes loudest.
and make sure that the filaments of all four glow at a dull red Finally turn "Amplification" to the left just enough to stop the
color. Then tip the panel back into normal position and turn whistle when the speech or music should be heard clearly. A
up the catch at the left. slight readjustment of "Station Selector II" may be necessary for
A jack is provided at the extreme right of the panel a little best results. Of course, it may happen that a station is found be-
above the center. The loud speaker must be equipped with a tween numbers of its program. Therefore, if nothing is heard
telephone plug which is to be inserted in the jack when the loud at the conclusion of the above process, wait a minute or so. Do
speaker is to be used. In a few instances, it may be desirable not wait too long before adjusting "Station Selector II". A
to use a telephone headset plugged into the same place, hut whistle may also be produced by an improperly operated receiving
ordinarily, the signals will be uncomfortably loud. set nearby but such a whistle seldom remains constant.
A little ex*eerience in making the adjustments will be neces-
OPERATION sary before stations can he found easily and quickly. This
Controls receiver is capable of receiving over great distances, and such
operation will be secured if the controls are properly manipulated.
Volume Control-The control so marked serves to regulate Care in adjustment of "Station Selector II" and "Amplification"
the transfer of energy between the two tuning circuits. Thus it is particularly important.
regulates the strength of the signal. It also governs the selectivity It will be found that there is a definite relation between the
of the set, that is, the farther the "Volume Control" is turned two station selectors, for example, when "Station Selector II"
toward the left, the more easily can various stations be separated. is set on "3.0", "Station Selector I" should be nearly "3.0" when
both are tuned to the same wavelength. It may happen that SPECIFICATIONS
this agreement will not be very good in which case 'Station Cabinet-The cabinet
Selector I" will reach one end or the other of the scale before is finely made
It is finished in dark brown mahogany and of solid mahogany.
"Station Selector II" thus making it impossible to tune both given a high _polish.
selectors accurately over the whole wavelength range. To Panel-The panel is moulded from a phenolic condensation
remedy this trouble, tip the panel forward. At the extreme left product. The divisions and lettering are filled with a gold -
is a coil wound on a micarta tube. At the top of the tube are colored material.
four socket contacts, in one of which is inserted a lead from the Variable Condensers-The variable condensers are especi-
antenna. Remove this and attach it to one of the other binding ally smooth running. They are driven by a friction disc giving a
posts. One can be found where the agreement between the two slower motion to permit accurate tuning.
station selectors will be quite close. In short, this adjustment is Fixed Condensers-The fixed condensers are of two types
a means for adjusting the receiver to fit any antenna closely. both specially designed for their uses.
It is often convenient to have a record of the adjustments Antenna Circuit Coils-The antenna circuit coils are wound
for various stations. The setting of "Station Selector I" and on micarta tubing and are carefully impregnated and baked.
"Station Selector II" should be recorded for each station heard. They will retain their high efficiency indefinitely.
Then when it is desired to hear that particular station, set the Secondary Circuit Coils-The secondary circuit coils are of
"Station Selectors" at the right points, adjust the "Amplifica- an improved design which is so arranged as to require only very
tion" and the station should be heard if it is operating. small space.
When receiving from nearby stations, it may happen that Radiotron Sockets-The Radiotron sockets are of the well-
the volume will be greater than is desired. Do not attempt to known sliding contact type that insure a positive connection to
decrease the volume by turning back the " Battery Setting" as the Radiotrons. The Radiotron board is flexibly mounted on
that will spoil the quality. Turn back the "Volume Control" rubber to eliminate mechanical noises.
until the signal strength has been reduced as much as is desired. Transformers-The audio transformers use a special alloy
Selectivity or the ability to pick a desired station out of inter- material for the cores. This produces much better amplification
ference, depends to a degree upon the setting of "Volume Con- at low frequencies than has been had in any previously used
trol". The receiver is much more selective when this control is transformers.
turned to the left. It is often desirable to operate with this con- Jack-The jack is of special design to keep all metallic parts
trol almost to the left limit. Careful adjustment will give almost from the front of the panel.
as loud signals as when the "Volume Control" is at the extreme Radiotrons-The radiotrons are type WD -11. They have
right. been redesigned with small bulbs and moulded bases to occupy
MAINTENANCE less space, but their operating characteristics are identical with
former types.
Radiotrons-When not mistreated, the Radiotrons will last
for many months. Occasionally one will become inoperative on Circuit-The circuit employed is the newly developed
account of a broken filament or otherwise. It should he replaced "REGENOFLEX" circuit which eliminates radiation and gives
'by a new one of the same type. excellent selectivity.
The REGENOFLEX circuit combines radio frequency
If it becomes necessary to operate with only three Radio- amplification, regeneration, dual amplification and freedom from
trons, it may be done by leaving the socket at the extreme right radiation. Also the last stage of audio amplification is of the
empty. balanced, or push-pull type, which improves the quality of repro-
Filament or "A" Battery-When the dry cells used for this duction and permits the use of greater loudness of signals.
purpose become discharged to the point where they will no longer A total of four Radiotrons are used therefore, which are
heat the filaments to the proper brilliancy, they should he re- equivalent in performance to the usual five tube set.
placed by new ones.
Plate or "B" Battery-The "B" battery should last for All Radiotrons are properly biased by the use of suitable
several months. When signals become weak with the filaments grid or "C" Battery, which is an essential to good quality repro-
burning properly or operation becomes noisy, the "B" batteries duction and which greatly increases the life of Radiotrons and
should be replaced by new ones. If a voltmeter (preferably of plate batteries.
the high resistance type) is available, the batteries may he tested. The stage of radio frequency amplification is balanced so
They should be discarded when the voltage has dropped to 17. that it can not oscillate and therefore this set can not radiate
Bias or "C" Battery-It is difficult to tell when this battery and cause interference to other nearby receivers. Radio fre-
is exhausted except by measurement of its voltage with a volt- quency amplification and regeneration make this set especially
meter. The safe plan is to renew it whenever the "B" battery sensitive while the two tuned circuits plus regeneration make it
is replaced. selective.
 Insulator Span Wire

To Lightning
Screw Eye Arrester

To Antenna
Porcelain Tube
+A Yellow
To Antenna Post
Fig. 3-Showing Method of Connecting A Batteries
Lightning
Arrester

To Ground
o
To Ground on
To Set and Water Pipe
Lightning Arrester

Fig. Showing Connections to Antenna. Ground and Lightning Arrester

2
-B Brown
+20B Orange
+80B Red
Fig. 4 -Showing Method of Connecting B Batterie.

"B" BATTERY ANTENNA COIL "A" BATTERY

I UNITS TERMINALS 6 CELLS

RADIOTRON
1 SOCKETS
C" BATTERY

Fig. 5 Internal View of Radiola Regenoflra

 Tibe -1

a 4

O t1 c
of 22'4.
O_Q
4
r-j^0tA
f
O c

TYPt -3

i 4
--+Q_

r -0 C

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS FOR R -X AND REGENOFLEX

191
 Radiola Grand

Diagrammatic Connection of Dry Celle

0w -w. -;
-7000
1-3000w.-1~¡ i

.J 1000w.!-
700wí--

_3 0008
425r--- 3 ',2
Output Short Wove

Long Wove

Vern

90v.
I.M.
Tickler
Tun
45v.

. . . +Ai.
-A
+A4 +A3 +A2
Grd
Common A Negative.
 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

RADIOLA SUPER -HETERODYNE

Fig 5. Connection of Exterior Loop, Indoor Antenna, etc.

"-C.
(84ek with Green)
Tratar

-40M-71+£4.--.(Green)
Loop Antenna- or Grid Bias
Battery

lack with
Yellow Tracer Cable
(VolBlack with
lowTrac

laek w'th Blue \

andGreanTraur
+ B'
n nn /Gr \T (Maroon)
23 acers;
\ (Ynl low)
(Yell

B Buttery fr B Buttery

OC)Ub0b
(reu,,.
Station
Selector
R._
I I
Station
Selector II

)
*B. Batter y //tee ,o6
-6 Butta y

A Mllro..i
Battery
Batter
-- - Bl...tníro.l
ir..ar
I,
(Black with\ Batten9
Ampllfiar {ii ru..., Trar or
SwitrJi l! Switch
S E

Fig. 6. ('onuctliot 1)ial;ranl of Iiadiola Super -Heterodyne

 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

RADIOLA 20

Use Short Connectors

For Joining "A" Cells

+A

-A,-B, +C

-41e C
(yellowl

(green with yellow

and red tracer)
(black and green)
r Use
O 0
+16i +18
0
+19i +

Large 22% V.
"B" Battery
0
+221

Long
Connectors
For
Cable To Set
Joining 45 Volt
"B" Battery
Batteries
- C (black with
green tracer)

+45 B (maroon)

+135 B (red)

Intermediate
+90 B (maroon and red) 45 Volt 45 Volt
"B" Battery "B"" Battery

RADIOLA 20.- BATTERY CONNEGTION6.

 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Radiola 24

/
Socket E
for-External

!
L 64
Batterle] Black with )1

&owriTracar)
Rotatable
Leap
J ( Blark with LSP(Brown
Yal low Tracer

7'
80 nett
% .-(Black with Blue Tracer)
(Black with
ad Tracer

/ Cable ontlaneerl

7
/ rP (R );

®
-.eoV(Rac roue-
,®
Z2}V(MeroON-
i S
-6(11boa.;.witri
-- tl
with Sl tow
A(Yellow )--+ Tracer
Cor grid
tires A Batteries ock wfh
tack
rem
C
] Biaeiatter
BTracer Cable
Black with
ltillow Tracer
Two A Battery (Brawn)
Connectors F
(Red with Brown Tr
(Maroon)
(*lbw with Red 1Facer)
(Green with Yellow Theca)
Black with erase end Blue Tracer)

Six Radio* rori

Sockets 0
BATTERY VOLUME STATION
SETTING CONTROL SELECTOR II
T Y w

çç
STATION
SELECTOR I
h. ---Panel

t
R
r

Amplifier Filament lephone

Switch
S
Switch
t Jack
X
 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Radiola 25

r lt'^
Gomect Short Leads(
to Center Posts (+)
1..-1Connect Long Leads( -A)
to Outside Ponts(-)
- Black) Cable, (Black)
(Yellow S

- with Red,
1

-(Black) ---Six A Batteries RA g5 T

Sae Pep 14
V Bt2-9 -, (-(Blackwith Green Tracr) B4;g:'2.9
5ae//Pag4 14 Sea 4ge14
Olsii) 'Black and Green) +

4S
e
,Green)
(Black withYellow Tracer)
Red and Maroc, AA
(Red oe,
+45 (Blaók)
rJYY
-(Yellow with Red Tracer)
Rotatable +224 Red)
Loop
22 }(Black)

SixRadiotror, BRB-1yajtt.ry
Sockets E & R
5ae ays14

Panel --4 Rotor Stator

Black with
-(Bl`ck) Blue Trac

e
+CÁ"aréen)

-44C (Blackand Green)

_
iteñi=iÌ
C
¡tas
Grid
cr Battery
9 C -t
5.e Page

Intermediate
14
`
Condenser
Stator Crum Cadre(
Flangeen¡t
Volta
Clip
of
Rotor
ISecond Stage.
/J'eleW,one
Jebt M

wxuME
CONTROLI
¡'
-(B(ack)

Condenser

(Red
(Black with
iRsd Tracer

-
a,d Marobn
B Battery P
used as
CBetteryRC-2 First Stage Fiernent Filament
L-22} Celack with See Pega14 SETTING Telephone
Jack M
Switch
lt úiPJ
\Green Tr --S
 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Radiola 26

CeBac9 -A+C
;4,,9 Green (Green froth
Trace., Yellen Traver) +45 8
-A+C -C (Blast -e+A 6 Gel (Maroon) + /to l!
(Gnen weh Weh Green 4 (Yellow freh +90 8 (A,
Yello. Traver, Blue Tracer) Berl Trnce.) (Bei)
SB
Grar an

41>t Y A BaO.,-,., 9-45 Y., 8 BaH erres

3-1% Y. A Balrorier 1-9i'f Y,BBnI.'r,,er
Diagram of Battery Connections for Portable Unit -Diagram of Battery Connections When Using Home Battery Box

_r
-e+/. as (sd
rot/M Inns)
rot/(FK. sr' flue
M Tr..r)
/.r
(F. -.,./poem r,....)

l
+
Ì Ì + U)
1*
(.o../ .n. /....
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn-e1*r^^) (..r...)
»..n.oawrl o) aw
rruuu-U51:14uuUUUr /r-e.a

MI h..rn-.r
[.rn...Cmes_ Nam m rem.
-.+/ ...A
M Tm...)

"'+ --1
(n0 efr«..a rae. e

n.. / Uw...m/ ea
(/.mi u...9 UM
h,m ..
MI sllr 1

r Some Fl
-14r.a 011.._
Mao T.)
¡

(w..n/ W. peed

*11 1
I I

Par

Moss ..se
1..1wrrA.
 BATTERY CONNECTIONS

Radiola 28
Ye/low with Red Tracer
Black and Green
Black with Ye/lout Tracer
Maroon
Green
Maroon and Red Black with Crean Tracer

Termina/ Board
Ye/low with Oreen Tracer
Red with Ye/low Tracer Crewe I

Ye/low and Red Yellow with Red Tracer

Black and Green Red
Blue
Yellow
Blue with Red Tracer
Blue with Ye//low Tracer
7 Radiofron Sockets
(No. 1 to 7) for UX-199
Panel Cable-"
Rotatable Leep Q .Socket No. 8 for
UX-120 Only
Radiotron Socket
Unit
Red with
Yellow Tracer
-Condenaers

Station Selector Drum

Control J

l
Rotor
Blue First Star Stator
Telephone Jack T
Black with Blue Tracer Second StaggeJac TkYelophone

BATTERY Blo k
`J t
Black with Red Trace
SETTING
R
=:.sre
II' Al;r . Maroon and Red
Maroon

Blue with Yellow Trace

....,.. Red
. ..............tA..

YOLUME
.................
Yellow and Red

Blue with Red Tracer-, Blue CONTROL W

Red with Ye/low Tracer--, Yellow
Two Filment
Green Black and Green
Bleak- YeRege docks
S
Black
Yellow with Bed Tracer Yellow with Crean Tracer

-4-1/2 C(t1ack and Breed

-A (Black with Ye/low Tracer) -A (Black) No. 4 -A(Black)No. 5

+C Breen

12 "A" Batterie,
See 9 A

+4 (Ye/low with 22-1/2 C (Black with

Red Tracer)
Green Tracer)

Battery Cable
+A(Black) No. 4 +A01/ack)No. 5, E

"B" Battery "B'' Battery

See. 9 B-1 See 98-2

+22.1/2 (Red)
(1leak)N,.

+22.112 Black Ito.T

1
r 0laak)No.7.

-{$kck)Me. 3
lack)No. 2 (E/o k w,th Red
Tracer)
lack) No. 3

+45(Maroan and Rel +45(Ilareod

WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RADIOLA 28

In this wiring diagram, two or more leads of a like color contained in the same cable may be distinguished by
the numeral following the color designation at each end of a given lead.
 -- f_

_
 RCA
Radiola 16
SERVICE NOTES

1(('A Radiola 16

Third Edition -10M -January. 1929

Radio Corporation of America

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.
Bld. No. 19-168 - 39th. St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEX. ATLANTA, GA.
Santa' Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2 Monroe Bonded Warehouse, Spring and Peters Sts.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized Dealer renders
service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subse-
quent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the
end that RCA Loudspeaker and Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service organizations
having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the design and operation of RCA
Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and RCA Authorized
Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected Distributors.
Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may be undertaken by the RCA
Dealer.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business the RCA
Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing RCA Loudspeakers and
Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers and Distributors'
service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these
Service Notes will establish their value, and it is suggested they be preserved for ready
reference.

In addition to suppl) ing the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division maintains a corps of
engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems. These engi-
neers call upon the trade at frequent intervals to advise and assist RCA Distributors in the
performance of service work.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Con fdentla! and to he used only by its
authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service iv connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1929-Radio Corporation of .4nzerica.

 CONTENTS
A Word or Two About Service Page
-
Introduction -
2
5

PART I-SERVICE DATA

Radiotron Sequence -
Circuit Characteristics - - - 6
Antenna Installation (Outdoor Type) 6
Antenna Installation (Indoor Type) - 7
Ground - -
Antenna System Failures 8
Radiotron Sockets - 8
Radiotron Prongs -
Loose Volume Control .Contact - 9
Adjustment for Slack Drum Cable 9
Tuning Knob Loose - - -
Broken Cable 10
- - - - -
10
Using Radiola 16 With RCA "B" Battery Eliminator or Similar Devices
Not Supplying 67 Volts Plate Voltage - - - - 11
Loudspeaker Polarity - - - - - - - - 12
Uncontrolled Oscillations - - - - - - - - - 12
Audio Howl - - - - - - - _ - - - 13
Distorted Reproduction - - - - - - - - - - 13
Acoustic Howl - - - - - - - - -
Battery Cable - 13
- - - - - - - - - - - 14
Refinishing Marred Surfaces - - - - - - - 14
Continuity Tests - - - - - _ - 14
Continuity Test Chart - - - - - - - - 15
Important Precautions - - - 15
Service Data Chart - - - - - - - - 20

PART II -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing Antenna Coil - - - - 16
Replacing Radio Frequency Coils - - 16
Replacing Gang Sockets - 17
Replacing Main Timing Condensers and Drive 18
Replacing Large By-pass Condensers 18
Replacing Audio Transformers - 19
Replacing Condenser Drive Cable - 19
Replacing Dial Scale - - 19

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Radiola 16 - - - - - - - 1
Top View of Chassis Assembly - - - - - 4
Radiotron Sequence - - - 5
Three-Gang Condenser Cable Adjustment - - - 7
Three -Gang Condenser Cable and Drum Mechanism - - - 9
Schematic Circuit of RCA Radiola 16 - - - - - - - 10-11
Resistance Measurement Circuit - - - - - - - - 13
Filament Polarity - - - - - 14
Removing Chassis from Cabinet - - - - 16
Sub -Chassis Assembly - - - - - - - 17
Audio Frequency Transformer Color Scheme of Connections - - 18
 RCA RADIOLA 16
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by
RCA SERVICE DIVISION

INTRODUCTION
RCA Radiola 16 is a tuned radio frequency receiver employing five Radiotrons
UX-201A and one Radiotron Uri -112A. The tuning range of Radiola 16 extends from
550 to 1400 Kilocycles or 546 to 214 meters approximately. This amply covers the
broadcast band of wavelengths. The utmost in simplified tuning is provided by having
but two controls, one for the selection of stations and one for the adjustment of volume.
Radiola 16 is designed to operate without the use of vernier tuning condensers or adjust-
able rheostats. Excellent quality of reproduction is obtained by the use of properly
designed audio transformers and a power amplifier Radiotron easily capable of handling
the signal delivered to the last audio, amplifier.
Service work in conjunction with RCA Radiola 16 should be small, since all construc-
tion is of a simple character (See Figure 1) and of fool -proof design. However, for the
guidance of those called upon to locate and remedy any trouble that may occur the
following notes are presented.
PART I -SERVICE DATA
(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE
Figure 2 illustrates the sequence of the Radiotrons as applied to the path of the
incoming signal. From right to left when facing the front of the Radiola, the Radiotron
sequence is as follows:
Radiotron No. 1 is an untuned stage of radio frequency amplification. It is coupled
directly to the antenna and ground and is not tuned in any way.

TO ANTENNA

2ND IST gRo Zwo 1sT

DETECTOR
A. F. A.F. R. F. R. F. R.F.

1ADIO FREQUENCY -
TO LOUDSPEAKER.. AUDIO FREQUENCY

Figure 2-Radiotron sequence in RCA Radiola 16

5
 Radiotron No. 2 is a stage of tuned R. F. amplification employing a grid resistance
to prevent oscillation. It is tuned by means of the first of the three -gang condensers. .

Radiotron No. 3 is the second stage of tuned R. F. amplification. It also employs a

grid resistance for the purpose of stabilizing or preventing self oscillation in the circuit.
It is tuned by the second of the main tuning condensers.
Radiotron No. 4 is the tuned detector. This circuit employs a tapped resistance
across the filament leads for the purpose of improving tone quality.
Radiotrons No. 5 and No. 6 are respectively the first and second stages of audio
frequency amplification. The last stage, Radiotron No. 6, employs power amplifier
Radiotron U$. -112A.
(2) CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
The following principles are incorporated in the circuit design of Radiola 16.
1. A three -gang condenser, employed to tune two radio frequency and the detector
circuits, provides one tuning control.
2. An aperiodic antenna circuit, or 1st R. F. circuit, eliminates the necessity for a
separate antenna tuning control or a vernier across the antenna tuning condenser.
3. A plate voltage of 67 volts is used ;on all radio frequency stages without a "C"
battery. This provides simplicity in battery circuits without any loss of sensitivity or
tone quality.
4. The volume control regulates the filament voltage of the three radio frequency
amplifiers. This gives a smooth control of volume with minimum distortion.
5. No neutralizing condensers are employed. Grid resistances in the radio frequency
amplifier circuit effectively prevent any self oscillation that might occur. This is a
simple and effective method of overcoming any oscillating tendency of the radio frequency
amplifiers.
6. A fixed resistor is used in the filament circuit instead of a variable rheostat. This
eliminates an extra control on the panel and safeguards the filaments of the Radiotrons
against excessive voltage.
7. A plate voltage of 135 volts is used on both audio stages in conjunction with a
negative grid bias of 9 volts. This simplifies battery connections and provides a more
uniform drain on the "B" batteries. Also more amplification is obtained in the first audio
frequency stage, which, when used with power amplifier Radiotron UX-112A in the second
stage, results in greater volume with minimum distortion delivered to the loudspeaker.
These various circuit characteristics of Radiola 16 are all of a nature that provides
the utmost in simplicity consistent with good performance and tone quality. The appear-
ance of the set is in line with its internal mechanism.
(3) ANTENNA INSTALLATION (Outdoor Type)
The most efficient antenna system for Radiola 16 is one of 25 to 75 feet in length-
depending upon local conditions-measured from the far end of the antenna to the ground
connection. It should be erected as high as can be conveniently arranged and as far
removed from all obstructions as possible. The lead-in should preferably be a continua-
tion of the antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices which introduce additional resistance
to the antenna system and which may in time corrode sufficiently to seriously affect
reception. If, however, it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the antenna, the
joint must be carefully soldered to insure a good electrical contact. Excess flux should be
cleaned off and the connection carefully covered with rubber tape to protect it from the
oxidation effects of the atmosphere.
6
 The antenna and lead-in should be supported by high grade glass or porcelain in-
sulators. At no point should the antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any part
of the building. The lead-in wire should be brought through the wall or window frame and
insulated therefrom by a porcelain tube.
The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction or
power line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antenna. It is desirable
to keep the lead-in a foot or more from the building where possible. When an outdoor
antenna is used it should be protected by means of an approved lightning arrestor, in
accordance with the requirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.

Figure 3-Turning the cable adjusting screw to take up slack in condenser control cable

(4) ANTENNA INSTALLATION (Indoor Type)

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results
may be had by using an indoor antenna consisting of about 50 feet of insulated wire
strung around the picture molding. The size of the wire is not particularly important,
though No. 18 B. & S. bell wire is suggested. In buildings where metal lathing is employed,
satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of antenna. Under such condi-
tions, various arrangements of the indoor antenna should be tried to secure satisfactory
results. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly installed outdoor antenna.

(5) GROUND
A good ground is quite as important as the antenna. No specific recommendations
can be given in this matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water and steam
pipes usually make good grounds. Gas pipes usually make poor grounds, and as a rule
are to be avoided. If neither water nor steam pipes are available, a pipe or metal rod
may be driven into the ground to a depth of several feet. The success of this type of
ground depends upon the moisture present in the soil. The ground lead should be con-
nected by means of an approved ground clamp to a section of pipe that has been scraped
and thoroughly cleaned. The connection should be inspected from time to time to make
certain that a clean and tight electrical contact exists between the clamp and pipe.
It is recommended that the service man experiment with various grounds, and employ
the one giving the best results. Radiola 16 is capable of receiving over good distances
when connected to an efficient antenna and a low resistance ground. A poor ground
connection may not be apparent on local reception, but it is an important factor in distant
reception and it may also cause oscillation.
If the results of experiments seem to indicate that a good ground connection is not
possible, the use of a counterpoise is suggested if local conditions permit. A counterpoise
is in effect a second antenna. It should be about six feet above ground, well insulated, of
the same dimensions as the antenna and located directly under it. The counterpoise is
connected to the Radiola in place of the ground connection.
(6) ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES
Complaints of swinging signals, or of intermittent reception with probable grating
noises, as distinguished from fading effects, are generally the result of antenna and
ground system failures and to this, therefore, the service man should give his first attention.
A grating noise may be caused by a poor battery connection, a poor lead-in connection
to the antenna, or antenna touching some metallic surface, such as the edge of a tin roof,
drain pipe, etc. By disconnecting the antenna and ground leads from Radiola 16 and
noting whether or not the grating continues, the service man can soon determine whether
or not the cause of complaint is within or external to the receiver and plan his service
work accordingly.
(7) RADIOTRON SOCKETS
The sockets in Radiola 16 are of the standard gang UX type. The three-gang
socket is fer the radio frequency amplifiers; the single socket is a cushioned socket for
the detector and the two -gang socket is for the audio frequency amplifiers. Care must be
exercised when inserting Radiotrons in the sockets. A socket contact may not be in its
correct position and forced insertion of a tube will bend or break it. If care is exercised
and the Radiotron inserted gently, little trouble will be experienced with socket contacts.
A bent one will be noticeable on inspection and may be corrected by inserting a narrow
instrument in the socket hole and pushing the contact into its correct position. A badly
bent or broken socket contact must be replaced.
(8) RADIOTRON PRONGS
Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation. They should be cleaned oc-
casionally with a piece of fine sand paper. The use of emery cloth or steel wool is not
recommended. Before re-inserting Radiotrons in the sockets, wipe the prongs and base
carefully to make certain that all particles of sand are removed.
In placing Radiotrons in the gang sockets care should be exercised to make certain
that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons match the socket holes.
If a Radiotron will not fit into a socket without considerable pressure being applied, the
trouble is probably due to excessive solder on one or more of the prongs. This may be
removed with a file or knife. Never try to force one in. These sockets are so designed
that the prongs of the Radiotrons will fit in snugly without force being applied. If
sufficient force is applied it might be possible to insert the prongs in the wrong holes,
resulting in a filament burnout.
8
 (9) LOOSE VOLUME CONTROL CONTACT
A loose volume control contact may cause noisy or intermittent operation and should
be remedied. If the contact arm is loose, the remedy is to bend it slightly so that it makes
firm contact against the resistance strip. In order to do this it is necessary to remove
the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part II, Sec. 1. The volume control is then
readily accessible. By removing the two screws that hold it to the metal frame it may be
completely removed. After adjusting the contact, replace the mounting screws and return
the chassis to the cabinet. Replace screws and control knobs.

MAXIMUM ADJUSTMENT OF CABLE ADJUSTING SCREW

CABLE ADJUSTING SCREW REMOVED TO ALLOW HALF -TURN
EXTENSION OF CABLE ON DRUM

Ii
w
i

DOTTED LINES INDICATE REVERSAL

NORMAL POSITION''' OF PIN AND HALF -TURN EXTENSION
OF CABLE eF CABLE ON DRUM

Figure 4-Three-gang condenser cable and drum operating mechanism

(10) ADJUSTMENT FOR SLACK DRUM CABLE
The main tuning condensers are controlled by a cable and drum arrangement giving a
smoothly acting vernier movement that has no back lash. See Figure 1.
After considerable wear, or extreme changes of temperature the cable may become
slack. To take up this slack open lid of cabinet and turn the cable. adjusting screw
with clamp until the cable is taut-See Figure 3. In extreme cases as might occur after
considerable use and several adjustments this screw may become seated thus allowing no
further tightening of the cable. When this condition occurs it will be necessary to slip
the cable a half turn on the grooved drum. To make this adjustment it is necessary to
remove the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part II Section 1. Remove the cable
adjusting screw and Clamp-See Figure 4. The cable will then have approximately one
inch slack. By removing the tapered pin holding the front grooved drum to its shaft and re-
placing it on the opposite s_de (180 degrees) the one -inch slack in the cable can be taken
9
up by using the new position of the pin for anchoring the cable. Figure 4 illustrates this
operation. It will be noted that the tapered pin in the new position cannot be inserted as
far as originally. However it can be inserted far enough to lock the grooved drum to the
control shaft and clear the metal housing. If the cable again is stretched to the maximum
adjustment of the cable adjusting screw the tapered pin can be returned to its original
position and a half turn slipped on the drum which will provide for taking up all slack.
Sufficient grooves are provided on the drum for this purpose.

(11) TUNING KNOB LOOSE

the panel control knob becomes loose on the shaft, tighten the small set screw that
If
holds the knob to the shaft or if its threads are defective, replace the knob.

2' R. F. GRID aro R.F. GRID DETECTOR. GRID

CONDENSER;
RESISTANCE') RESISTANCES;
;'
800 OHMS 600 OHMS
. 3

VOLUME
GANG CONDENSERS CONTROL

GROUND TO FRAME
Figure 5-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA Radiola 16

(12) BROKEN CABLE

Should a cable become broken due to considerable use or excessive tightening, the
proper remedy is to replace the cable. The procedure for making this replacement is
described in Part II, Section 7. However if a new cable is not immediately available a
temporary repair may be made in the following manner provided the break in the cable is
not in that section that passes over the small grooved drums.
The two ends should be spliced together and then soldered. Splicing consists of inter-
weaving the strands as with rope and not just twisting the cable ends together as in an
electrical wiring splice. Splicing gives greater strength and results in a smaller body
being formed on the cable. When soldering, use plenty of flux and a small amount of
solder. Heat sufficiently long for the solder to adhere to all the small strands of the
10
 cable. Placing the splice in an alcohol or bunsen flame affords sufficient heat and allows
any excess solder to drip away. It is to be understood that this is but a temporary
repair and should be used only until a new cable can be procured and installed.
(13) USING RADIOLA 16 WITH RCA "B" BATTERY ELYMINA-
TOR OR SIMILAR DEVICES NOT SUPPLYING 67 VOLTS
PLATE VOLTAGE
Radiola 16 uses a.plate voltage of 67 volts for the radio frequency amplifiers and it
isimportant that this voltage is not exceeded. (See Figure 5). A higher voltage may
cause it to oscillate and in all cases seriously affect its tone quality. It is imperative that,
when using "B" battery eliminators having fixed 90 -volt taps, provision be made for
GRID
LEAK

OUTPUT

o 13+135 ..... RED

FILAMENT
RESISTOR;
W YELLOW
A+
BLACK WITH
A-
BY PASS:'
-4_,, O+B-
YELLOW TRACER

}... GREEN WITH

RED AND
CONDENSER SWITCH=' GND
BLUE TRACER
O 8+67MAROON & LED

BY -PASS;' DETECTOR
CONDENSER TAPPED o B+45MAROON
RESISTOR
l c 9 BLACK WITH
GREEN TRACER,
and wiring color scheme for making battery connections

reducing them to 67 volts. Off hand it would seem that a series resistance could be used
to drop the voltage, but when we realize the plate voltage varies in practically all of these
devices except in the case of the RCA "B" Eliminator (Duo-Rectron) and similar devices
a fixed resistor would give a varying voltage depending on the device.
A potentiometer having sufficiently high resistance (at least 18,000 ohms) shunt-
ed across the +45V and +90V taps with the contact arm connected to the 67 -volt lead
from the receiver will give a variable voltage between 45 and 90 volts for this lead. By
taking a high resistance voltmeter and connecting from -B to this arm, it may be ad-
justed for 67 volts. A drop of solder will make a permanent connection between the arm
and resistance element and prevent a possible change in voltage. The General Radio
Potentiometer No. 371 (18,000 ohms) is recommended for this purpose.
11
(14) LOUDSPEAKER POLARITY
In Radiolas employing Radiotron UX-112A in thelast audio amplification stage it
is very important to have the loudspeaker so connected that the magnetic field generated
by the relatively large plate current from the 135 -volt B battery will not oppose the per-
manent magnetic field of the speaker pole pieces. In Radiola loudspeakers of the horn
type the solid brown lead should be connected to the left jack when facing the front of
Radiola 16 and the black lead with brown tracer to the right jack. If speakers, similar
to the UZ-1325, are incorrectly connected they will soon lose their sensitivity through a
weakening of the permanent magnetism of the pole pieces. When the leads are properly
connected, the magnetic field generated by the steady plate current in the speaker coils
intensifies the permanent magnetic field -of the pole pieces and maintains the permanent
magnetism.
If there is doubt of the correct connection, loudspeakers with metallic diaphragms
such as UZ-1325 should be so adjusted that the diaphragm just strikes the actuating
magnets or pole pieces as will be evidenced by a clattering noise when loudest notes are
played. Reversing the loudspeaker leads will either accentuate or lessen the clattering.
That connection which gives greatest clattering is the correct one to use. The speaker
should then be readjusted so that no clattering occurs on the greatest volume desired.
In RCA Loudspeakers Models 100, 100A, 102 and 104 however, the polarity is not
an important factor. They should accordingly be connected in the manner that gives
the most pleasing reproduction.

(15) UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATIONS

-
Should Radiola 16 oscillate or regenerate at any point in the tuning range the
trouble is probably caused by
1. Excessive plate voltage on the R. F. or detector tubes.
2. Excessive filament voltage.
3. Defective grid resistor in 2nd R. F. or 3rd R. F. (Figure 5).
The remedy in the case of No. 1 or No. 2 is to reduce the plate or filament voltages
to their correct value. Excessive voltage on the radio frequency amplifying tubes will
also cause distorted reproduction from the Radiola.
In the case of No. 3 the various grid resistances in Radiola 16 may be checked by
means of a resistance bridge. If a resistance bridge is not available the voltmeter-am-
meter method gives accurate results provided the meters used are calibrated accurately.
This method makes use of. a milliammeter with a scale of 0-25 and a voltmeter of 0-7
volts. A voltage is then applied that will give a substantial reading. A circuit diagram
of this method is shown in Figure 6.
The resistance may then' be calculated by the use of Ohms law.

R =
E
-I(Where R equals ohms, E equals volts and I equals amperes)

Volts
or 1000
Milliamperes
1
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or ampere) it is necessary
1000
to multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
12
 The values of the various resistances are shown in the schematic diagram Figure 5.
In some cases with certain antennas, the Radiola may oscillate even though every-
thing is O. K. The remedy in this case is to interchange the Radiotrons or to reduce the
volume control a slight amount.
(16) AUDIO HOWL
An audio howl is generally caused by some defect in the audio amplifying system.
One of the following defects may be the cause of this howl.
1. Defective Radiotron.
2. Defective "B" battery.
3. Open audio by-pass condensers.
4. Defective grid leak or open grid of any tube in the Radiola.
5. Open R. F. grid resistor.
6. Open by-pass condenser across secondary of first audio transformer.
ACROSS RESISTANCE . R -E OR 1000
VOLTS
TO SE MEASURED I MILLIAMPERES

6 VOLTS

0-7
200 OHMSte

Figure 6-Schematic circuit for resistance measurement

(17) DISTORTED REPRODUCTION
Under normal conditions Radiola 16 will deliver a strong signal of good quality to
the loudspeaker. If the loudspeaker production is poor, test the loudspeaker input from
the receiver. A pair of phones or a loudspeaker of known quality may be used for this
purpose. If the output of the Radiola is of poor quality the distortion may be due to
any of the following causes:
1. Excessive voltage on R. F. amplifiers.
2. Excessive filament voltage.
3. Defective Radiotrons. The Radiola may be operating properly, but a poor tube
in the detector or audio stages will cause distortion.
4. An open audio transformer may cause distortion.
(18) ACOUSTIC HOWL
This is caused by a microphonic Radiotron, or the Loudspeaker being too close to
the Radiola. The sound waves from the loudspeaker striking a Radiotron may cause the
Radiotron elements to vibrate, which in turn, produces an amplified howl in the output of
the loudspeaker.
The remedy lies in interchanging the Radiotrons. Counting from left to right the
third Radiotron is the most susceptible to this microphonic condition. Interchanging it,
with one of the R. F. amplifiers or placing the Loudspeaker at a greater distance from
the receiver will generally remedy this condition, In some cases both may be necessary.
18
(19) BATTERY CABLE
Radiola 16 has one battery cable consisting of six conductors and a, separate cord
for the antenna connection (See Figure 1). The color scheme for the connections is
shown on a small card attached to the cable. This color scheme is as follows:
Antenna Blue (Separate from the main cable)
+A 6V Yellow
-A Black with yellow tracer
-B+C Gnd. Green with red and blue tracers
+B 45V Maroon
+B 67V Maroon and Red
+B 135V Red
-C QV Black with green tracer

%" %%".
15J A.F. ,i DETECTOR 3RD R.F. ' 2ND R.F. I sT R.F.

Figure 7-The correct filament polarity of the various Radiotron sockets in

RCA Radiola 16

(20) REFINISHING MARRED SURFACES

The chassis assembly of Radiola 16 is finished in a dark bronze color that gives it a
pleasing appearance and protection against rust or corrosion. When service work is being
performed this surface is likely to become scratched, making a poor appearing job.
The RCA will supply to dealers and distributors through its service stations, small
bottles or cans of refinishing paint, which together with a camel's hair brush should be a
part of the service man's kit when servicing Radiola 16.
This tlronze paint can also be used on the RCA 100A Loudspeaker.

(21) CONTINUITY TESTS

The following tests will show complete continuity for the circuits of Radiola 16.
The volume control should be adjusted so that half its resistance is in the circuit, the
antenna lead disconnected and the battery cable disconnected from all batteries and placed
so that none of its leads will make contact with any other lead. Close operating switch.
A pair of headphones with at least 4/
volts in series or a voltmeter with sufficient
voltage to give a full scale deflection when connected directly across battery terminals
should be used in making this test. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive
in checking voltage drop in various circuits.
The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals or leads
indicated in the following test table under the column 'marked "Terminals." If the results
are negative the cause of such negative effect will be found in the last column under the
heading "Incorrect Effect Caused By." The second column indicates the correct effect.
14
 The designation "P" and "G" refer to the plate and grid contacts of the socket
indicated by the number following. For example G2 would indicate the grid contact of
the second socket, P6 would indicate the plate contact of the sixth tube socket.
Polarity of the various Radiotron sockets are not alike. Figure 7 illustrates the
correct polarity of the filament terminals for each socket in addition to the location of
the plate and grid terminals.

CONTINUITY TEST CHART

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused By
H-A to +1.1, 2, and 3 Closed Open volume control, filament resistor,
or wiring
+A to +F4, 6 and 6 Closed Open filament resistor or wiring
-A to -F1, 2, 8, 4, 5 Closed Open switch, defective cable or wiring
and 6
-A to -F6 Open or closed ac- Defective switch or connections
(Open and close switch cording to posi-
while making test) tion of switch
-F4 to +F4 Closed Open detector grid resistance
-B to +185B Open Defective 1 mfd. by-pass condenser
-B to +671/2 Open Defective 1/2 mfd. by-pass condenser
-B to frame Closed Open ground connection to chassis
(Switch closed) frame
-B to GI, G2 or G8 Closed Open secondary of radio -frequency
transformers or grid resistances
-B to P4 Open Defective A. F. by-pass condenser
-B to G4 Closed Defective grid leak or detector grid
(very weak) resistance
+F4 to +F3 Closed Open volume control
+F6 to +A Closed Open filament resistor
+671/2 to Pl Closed Open primary 1st R. F. Transformer
+671/2 to P2 Closed Open primary 2nd R. F. Transformer
+671/2 to P3 Closed Open primary 3rd R. F. Transformer
+45 to P4 Closed Open primary 1st A. F. Transformer
+185 to P5 Closed Open primary 2nd A. F. Transformer
+135 to Output Closed Open Connection
P6 to Output Closed Open Connection
-9C to G5 Closed Open secondary of first audio trans.
-9C to G6 Closed Open secondary of second audio trans.
Antenna to frame Closed Open antenna inductance or connections
G1 to frame Closed Open antenna inductance or connections
Stator condenser
No. 1 to G2 Closed Open grid resistance No. 1
Stator condenser
No. 2 to G3 Closed Open grid resistance No. 2
(22) IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS
1. As a fixed resistor is used in the filament circuit, it is important that all the
Radiotrons be in place before turning on the operating switch. This is to protect the
Radiotrons from excessive filament voltage when the total load is not in the circuit.
2. The main tuning condensers are electrically and mechanically aligned at the
factory. Tampering with or handling of any kind that may affect the alignment of these
condensers is to be avoided. The screws on the side of the assembly should not be touched
because any movement, even though slight, may seriously affect the overall efficiency of
the Radiola. This would be especially noticeable on weak signals.
15
 PART II -MAKING REPLACEMENTS
(I) REPLACING ANTENNA COIL
The following procedure should be used when replacing the antenna coil:
(a) Remove five screws holding wooden back panel to cabinet.
(b) Remove knobs on "Station Selector" and "Volume control."
(c) Unscrew threaded round collar from front of battery switch.
(d) Remove four screws holding chassis in place to bottom of cabinet.

Figure 8-Removing chassis assembly from cabinet

The chassis assembly may now be removed by slightly rocking it in the cabinet and
slipping it out of the rear opening. See Figure 8. This brings the complete chassis into
view, allowing an easy examination of all parts.
The antenna coil is located at the left end viewed from the rear of the cabinet-the
end that has the condenser drum and scale. See Figure 9. To remove the coil unsolder
the two leads and remove screw and nut that passes through center of coil. The new
coil is then placed in the position occupied by the old one. The nut and screw are replaced
and the Radiola is reassembled in the reverse of the foregoing order. Before being replaced
in the cabinet it should be given an operating test.

(2) REPLACING RADIO FREQUENCY COILS

The three radio frequency transformers together with a mounting strip and two
pin jacks are stocked as one complete unit.
A step by step procedure for replacing this assembly is as follows:
1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. Unsolder and carefully tag all connections to the three transformers and the
two pin jacks.
16
 3. Remove four screws that hold mounting strip to metal chassis. The entire
assembly can now be released. The new assembly should be placed in the
same position occupied by the one just removed.
4. Replace the four screws that hold mounting strip to metal chassis.
5. Replace and resolder all leads to the three transformers and two pin jacks as
indicated by the tags previously attached to them.

ANTENNA lsr R.F. 2* R. F. 3"D R FILAMENT

COIL TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER RESISTOR

GRID COND.
-GRID LEAK

A.E
CONDENSER

2"°R.FGRID 3"°R.FGRIDBY-PASS A.F VOLUME

RESISTOR RESISTOR CONDENSERS TRANSFORMERS CONTROL

Figure 9-Sub-chassis assembly showing antenna coil, radio frequency coils, by-pass
condensers, resistances and audio frequency transformers

6. Give Radiola an operating test before replacing in cabinet to determine that

replacement has been properly made.
7. Return chassis assembly to cabinet and replace all screws and control knobs.
(3) REPLACING GANG SOCKETS
The sockets of Radiola 16 are of the gang variety, using one detector socket, a two -
gang A. F. socket strip, and one three -gang socket strip for the radio frequency amplifier
tubes.
These sockets are riveted to the metal chassis. To replace these sockets drill out
the old rivets and use screws, nuts and lock washers for securing the new sockets. A step
by step procedure for making replacements of this kind is as follows:
1. Remove chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part II, Sec. 1.
2. Remove and tag all leads to the terminals of the sockets being removed.
3. Drill out rivets holding sockets to metal chassis frame.
4. The socket assembly may now be removed and the new one placed in the position
occupied by the old one.
17
 5. Fasten new socket in place by using small round head machine screws, nuts and
lock washers in place of the rivets previously drilled out.
6. Resolder all connections to terminals of new sockets.
7. Test Radiola and replace in cabinet.

(4) REPLACING MAIN TUNING CONDENSERS AND DRIVE

The main tuning condensers are replaced as one complete unit. A step by step
procedure is as follows:
1. Remove chassis assembly from housing as described in Part II, Sec. 1.
2. Unsolder four connections to condenser.
3. Remove three screws from under side of chassis that holds condenser assembly.
4. The assembly may now be removed and the new assembly placed in position.
5. Replace three screws that hold assembly in place and resolder the four leads.
6. Replace chassis assembly in cabinet.

A. F. CONDENSER 1.001 MFD.

TO PLATE YELLOW -
Is? A.F. TO PLATE
DETECTOR.
(YELLOW
BLACK WITH. -
GREEN TRACER'
--BLUE
CABLE -I TO GRID
ISY A. F.
TO GRID
2"-° A.F.

TO MAROON
TO JACK GREEN ON CABLE
GREEN
of connections
Figure 10-Audio frequency transformers and color scheme

(5) REPLACING LARGE BY-PASS CONDENSERS

frame, are held together
These condensers, located on the under side of the chassis
case fastened to the frame. A step
by means of clamps that form part of the condenser
by step procedure when making replacement is as
follows:
1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Sec. 1.
2. Remove condenser assembly as described in Part
II, Sec. 4.
3. The tabs of the condensers may now be bent up,
by using a screw driver.
4. The -two condensers are released as a unit from
the chassis frame. Separate
them by turning up the tab that holds them together.
5. Unsolder the leads of the condenser that is
to be replaced. Insert the new
the leads to it.
condenser in the place occupied by the old one and resolder
6. Fasten the condensers together as a unit by binding
over the tabs provided for
into their
that purpose. Fasten to frame by inserting the tabs of the condenser the frame.
respective slots and bending the tabs over on the top side
of
in Part II, Section 4, and then replace
7. Replace condenser assembly as described
chassis assembly in cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.

18
 (6) REPLACING AUDIO TRANSFORMERS
The audio transformers of Radiola 16 are built together as a unit. In making a
replacement the following procedure should be used.
1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. The audio transformer case is held by metal tabs, bent over on the upper side of
the chassis. Turn these up to release the transformer assembly.
3. Tag and unsolder all leads.
4. Place the new transformer assembly in position occupied by the old and fasten to
frame by bending over metal tabs that hold it in place.
5. Solder all leads in place as indicated by tags attached. The col or scheme of
these connections is shown in Figure 10.
6. Replace chassis assembly in cabinet.

(7) REPLACING CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE

The condenser drive cable of Radiola 16 is made of phosphor bronze and is very
rugged. If replacement becomes necessary the following procedure should be used.
1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1. Place chassis
on table in normal position with controls to the front.
2. Release the cable adjusting screw and clamp, and remove old cable from large
drum and grooved drums completely.
3. Starting from the rear grooved drum place eye of cable over pin, wind on three
complete turns, and then bring cable up to large drum. I'he pin in the grooved
drum should be nearly horizontal and on the right side of the drum.
4. Now bring cable over the large drum. Turn drum so that cable adjusting
screw is on top. Pass cable over groove until point is reached where there is a
slot in the drum for passing cable to the other side of drum to the other track.
5. Follow on.around other track in same direction until point is reached where
cable is directly above front grooved drum.
6. Starting on the third groove back from the front of the grooved drum wind on
two and a half turns and slip eye over pin.
The cable is now in the correct position, although probably slack.
The cable adjusting screw and clamp that were previously removed to allow the
cable to pass along the groove are replaced. By slipping the clamp over the cable and
gradually turning up on the cable adjusting screw, the cable may be tightened until
there is no last motion in any of the controls. Care should be taken not to take up too
much as the cable may be stretched or possibly broken.

(8) REPLACING DIAL SCALE

After considerable use a dial scale may become dirty or illegible and a new scale
desired. A step by step procedure of making replacement follows:
1. Open lid of cabinet of Radiola.
2. Turn dial so that the two screws that hold the dial in place are on top.
3. Remove screws, washer and nuts that hold dial in place.
4. Replace old dial with new one and replace screws, but do not tighten.
5. Examine new dial from front of Radiola to see that numbers on dial are not
upside down and the maximum and minimum figures are in their correct places.
6. Tighten screws holding dial in place and close lid of cabinet.

19
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals,
poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes.
defective batteries, wrong battery connections and a poor antenna system. If imperfect opera-
tion is not due to the above causes the "Service Data Chart" should be consulted for further
detailed causes.
SEE SERVICE NOTER

Signals-
Indication Cause Remedy
Part 1 Part 11

Defective operating switch . . Replace switch - --

Loose volume control arm .
Defective battery cable . .
Defective antenna coil . .
.

.
Tighten volume
Replace battery
Replace antenna
control arm
cable .
coil .
.
. .
Sec. 9

-
Sec. 19 -
Sec. 1
No Defective R. F. transformer . Replace R. F. transformer as -
o sembly Sec. 2
Defective A. F. transformer
Defective By-pass condenser
.

.
Replace A. F.
sembly
transformer as-
Replace By-pass condenser .
-- Sec. 6
Sec. 5

Defective cable
Defective antenna coil .
Replace cable
Replace antenna coil . .
Sec 19
- -
Sec. 1

Defective R. F. transformer . Replace R. F. transformer as-

sembly - Sec. 2
Weak
Signals
Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer as -
sembly
.

Dirty prongs of Radiotrons . . Clean Radiotron prongs . . Sec. 8

- - -
Sec. 6
Defective By-pass condenser . Replace defective By-pass con-
densers - Sec. 5
Defective main tuning condenser Replace main tuning condenser
assembly - Sec. 4

High plate voltage on R. F

amplifiers
Defective A. F. transformer
Reduce plate voltage to 67 on
R. F. amplifiers . . . .. Sec. 13 -
Poor
Quality
Defective By-pass condenser .
Replace A. F. transformer as-
sembly
Replace defective condenser .
-- Sec.
Sec.
6
5

Noisy or
Intermit-
tent
Dirty Radiotron prongs
Loose volume control arm .
. Clean Radiotron prongs with
fine sand paper . .

Tighten volume control arm .

. .

.
Sec. 8
Sec. 9
--
Reception Socket contacts bent or broken . Repair or replace defective con-
tact Sec. 7 -
High plate voltage on R. F
amplifiers
Open grid resistors . . .
Reduce plate voltage on R. F.
amplifiers to 67 . . .
Check and replace grid resistors
Sec. 13
Sec. 21
--
Howling
Defect in audio system . . Check and repair defect in audio
system
Acoustic howl caused by micro- Interchange Radiotrons or in -
Sec. 16 -
phonic Radiotrons or loud- crease distance of loudspeak-
speaker too close to Radiola . er from Radiola . .
Open grid circuit in any stage . Check circuits and repair defect
Sec. 18
Sec. 21 -
- -

Radiotrons
Operating switch not "On"
Defective operating switch
.
.
. Turn switch "On" . . .
Replace operating switch
-- --
Defective volume control
fail to
light
Defective cable . . .
.

.
Correct defect or replace vol -
ume control, .
Repair or replace cable
. .

.
.
.
. Sec. 9
Sec. 19
---
Play in Loose knob Tighten or replace knob . . Sec. 11 -
station
selector
Slack cable Take up on cable at adjusting
screw Sec. 10 -
 RCA
Radiola 17
SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 17

Third Edition-2M-Jan. 1931

RCA Victor Company, Inc.

RADIOLA DIVISION
Camden, New Jersey
REPRESENTATIVES IN PRINCIPAL CITIES
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed RCA Dealer ren-
ders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation
and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear
and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola owners may be entirely
satisfied.
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and there-
fore Dealers and Distributors who are properly equipped with a knowledge of
the design and operation of Radiolas occupy a favorable position to contract
for this work.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer's business the Service Divi-
sion of the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet
is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in servicing
Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers'
service problems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A care-
ful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Dis-
tributor, and it is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service
Stations, has available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who
are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1927-Radio Corporation of America.

 CONTENTS
A Word or Two About Service 2
Introduction 5
Service Data Chart 32

PART I-SERVICE DATA

Page Page
Radiotron Sequence 6 Loudspeaker Polarity 13
Circuit Characteristics 6 Uncontrolled Oscillation 14
Radiotrons 7 Distorted Reproduction 15
Antenna Installation (Outdoor) 8 Audio Howl 15
Antenna Installation (Indoor) 9 Acoustic Howl 16
Ground 9
Hum _._. _._...._.._ 16

Antenna System Failures 10

Line Control Switch _._._..._._ 18
Radiotron Sockets 10
Wiring Cable 19
Pilot Lamp and Canopy 19
Radiotron Prongs 10 Filter Condensers 20
Loose Volume Control Contact Arm 11 Voltage Readings 20
Adjustment for Slack Drum Control 11 Grid and Plate Voltages 21
Mechanical Hum 12 Heating of Cabinet 22
Broken Condenser Drive Cable.._ 13 Continuity Tests 23

PART II-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Page Page
Replacing Volume Control 24 Replacing Condenser Drive Cable 28
Replacing Radio Frequency Coils 25 Replacing Dial Scales ....... __ 29
Replacing Radiotron Gang Sockets 26 Replacing Power Cable 30
Replacing Main Tuning Condensers and Replacing Filter Condenser Assembly 30
Drive 26 Replacing Either Power Transformer or
Replacing Large By -Pass Condensers 27 Filter Reactor . 31
Replacing Audio Transformers 28 Replacing Terminal Strip 31
Replacing Output Transformer 28 Replacing Miscellaneous Parts in S.P.U. 31

ILLUSTRATIONS
Page Page
RCA Radiola 17 1 View of Pilot Light Socket and Canopy... 17
Top View of Chassis Assembly 4 Wiring Diagram of Sub -Chassis Assem-
Socket Power Unit Showing Parts 5 bly 18
Radiotron Sequence 5 Continuity Wiring Diagram of S.P.U. 19
Schematic Circuit Diagram of Receiver 6 Internal Connections of Filter Con-
Schematic Circuit Diagram of S.P.U. 7 densers 20
Radiotron Socket Contacts 8 Schematic Circuit for Securing Grid
Method of Cleaning Radiotron Prongs 9 Voltages 21
Releasing Volume Control 10 Removing Receiver Assembly from Cab-
Adjusting Contact Arm of Volume Con- inet 22
trol 11 R. F. Transformer Connections 24
Turning Cable Adjusting Screw 12 By -Pass Condenser Connections 25
Condenser Cable and Drum Mechanism... 13 A. F. Transformer Connections 26
Schematic Circuit for Resistance Meas- Output Transformer Connections 26
urement 14 Replacing Dial Scales 27
Adjusting Potentiometer for Minimum Color Scheme of Power Cable Con-
Hum 16 nections 29
e
 RCA RADIOLA 17
SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
RCA Radiola 17 is a six -tube tuned radio frequency receiver (Figure 1),
utilizing RCA Radiotrons i"X-226, UY -227, UX-171A and the Radiotron full wave
rectifier UX-280 in the socket power unit (Figure 2). The use of Radiotrons
UX-226, UY-227, and UX-171A, using raw alternating current for filament sup -

FILTER CONDENSERS FILTER REACTOR POWER TRANSFORMER

OPERATING
SWITCH

TERMINAL
U (-28Q SOCKET
STRIP
LINE SWITCH

Figure 2-Socket Power Unit showing various parts.

ply, and Radiotron UX-280 in a plate and grid supply unit makes Radiola 17 a
complete socket power receiver operating on 105-125 volts, 50 to 60 cycle A. C.
Very little service work should be required on Radiola 17. However, the
following notes are published for the guidance of those
called upon to locate and remedy any trouble that may occur.
TO ANTENNA
6 5 4 3 2 4

2no IST 3RD 2ND IST

DETECTOR
A. F. A.F. R. F. R. F. R.F.

RADIO FREQUENCY
TO LOUDSPEAKER. AUDIO FREQUENCY

Figure 3-Radiotron sequence in RCA Radiola 17

5
 PART I-SERVICE DATA
(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE
Figure 3 illustrates the sequence of the Radiotrons in the receiver proper,
omitting Radiotron UX-280 in the socket power unit. From right to left, when
facing the front of the Radiola, the Radiotron sequence is as follows :
Radiotron No. 1 is an untuned stage of radio frequency amplification. It is
coupled directly to the antenna and ground and is not tuned in any way.
Radiotron No. 2 is a stage of tuned R. F. amplification employing a grid
i esistance to prevent oscillation. It is tuned by the first gang condenser.
Radiotron No. 3 is the second stage of tuned R. F. amplification. It also

1000 n 1000+1

dA
Wí226
TO
LOUDSPEAKER

-9 $11
POWER
X10
$9
GANG CONDENSERS'
$e
9
eC7
PILOT LAMP
T5 MAZDA 6
6 V. 0.I5 AMP UX.171A FILAMENT 5.0 VOLTS

UY.227 NEATER 2.25 VOLTS

$3
$2
?-UX-226 FILAMENTS 1.5 VOLTS

CA/LE LU6S"

Figure 4=Schematic circuit diagram of receiver assembly.

employs a grid resistance for the purpose of stabilizing or preventing self oscil-
lation in the circuit. It is tuned by the second of the main tuning condensers.
Radiotron No. 4 is the detector tuned by the third -gang condenser.
Radiotrons No. 5 and No. 6 are respectively the first and second stages of
audio frequency amplification. The last stage, Radiotron No. 6, employs power
amplifier Radiotron UX-171A.
(2) CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
The following principles are incorporated in the circuit design of Radiola 17
(Figure 4 and 4A.)
1. A three -gang condenser, employed to tune two of the radio frequency cir-
cuits and the detector circuit, provides one tuning control.
2. An aperiodic antenna, or first R. F. circuit, eliminates the necessity for
a separate antenna tuning control.
3. The volume control regulates the input grid voltage to the first R. F.
amplifier stage. This is the most practical method of volume control for use
6
 with A. C. Radiotrons and gives a smooth control of volume without distortion.
4. No neutralizing condensers are employed. Grid resistances in the two
tuned radio frequency stages effectively prevent any tendency to self oscillation.
5. Raw A. C. of the correct voltage is used for filament heating of all Radio-
trons. This eliminates the use of "A" batteries.
6. The three R. F. stages and the first audio stage receive a plate voltage of
135 volts in conjunction with a negative grid bias of 9 volts. The detector re-
ceives 45 volts plate supply without grid bias. The last audio stage receives a
plate supply sufficient to provide ample loudspeaker output. The plate and grid
voltages are supplied by means of a built-in "B" and "C" supply using Radio-
tron UX-280 as the rectifying device.
7. Radiotron UX-171A in the last audio stage provides ample volume with-
out distortion in loudspeaker reproduction.
POWER.
TRANSFORMER

TERMINAL STRIP LINE SWITCH.

1 MFD.."'
120 V.

KICK WITH &REfN TRACER

TAPPED RESISTANCE UNIT 110V
RED

1200R
IMFD. 60^
FILTER REACTOR.

3NFD. I I MFD
REEK WITI RED TRACER

GREEN
UX-171-A RIGHT
GREEN FILAMENT SUPPLY
OPERATING
BLUE SWITCH
UY -227
CENTER.
BLUE
HEATER. SUPPLY i
SLACK WFTA YELLOW TRACES---"".--

BLACK WfTA YELLOW TRACER

Ux-225
FILAMENT SUPPLY
LEFT a
Figure 4A-Schematic circuit diagram of socket power unit.
The various circuit characteristics of Radiola 17 provide for easy installa-
tion and simple operation coupled with quality reproduction delivered to the
loudspeaker.
(3) RADIOTRONS
Radiotrons UX-226 are used in all radio frequency amplifying stages and
in the first audio amplifying stage. It has an oxide coated filament consuming
1.05 amperes at 1.5 volts.
Radiotron UY -227 is used for the detector. It operates on raw A. C. for
filament supply, making use of an indirectly heated cathode. This Radiotron
has five prongs, the extra prong being connected to the oxide coated cathode.
Under normal conditions Radiotron UY -227 should give little trouble. However,
in some cases a slight howl may develop in the detector circuit which will neces-
sitate substituting another UY -227 Radiotron. Although a howl may develop in
a receiver with one UY -227, in another the same tube may prove O. K. On
examining a Radiotron UY-227 in operation, a slight flickering of the heater
7
 element, incased in its insulating material, may be noticed. This condition in no
way affects the normal operation of the Radiotron. The lag in the transfer-
ence of heat from the heater element to the cathode, as evidenced when starting
and stopping the operation of the tube, takes care of any variations indicated by
this flicker, which supposedly might affect the normal operation of Radiotron
UY-227. In Radiola 17 there is a positive potential of 9 volts applied to the
cathode of Radiotron UY -227 with the negative side of this potential connected
to the center connection of the potentiometer across the heater winding for this
Radiotron. This prevents a possibility of the cathode emitting any electrons back
to the heater instead of to the plate. An output transformer protects the loud-
speaker windings from the high plate voltage used in conjunction with Radio-
tron UX-171A.
Radiotron UX-280 is a full wave rectifying Radiotron used to rectify the
alternating current into pulsating direct current, which is smoothed out by
means of a filtering system, and used to provide all plate and biasing voltages.

UX-171 UX-226 UY-227 UX226 UX-226 UX-226

UX 2 8 0

OUTPUT
POWER FILTER.
TRANS-
TRANSFORMER REACTOR.
FORMER.

Figure 5-Radiotron socket contacts.

(4) ANTENNA INSTALLATION (Outdoor Type)

Due to the high sensitivity of Radiola 17 the most efficient antenna system is
one of approximately 25 feet in length-depending upon local conditions-meas-
ured from the far end of the antenna to the ground connection. It should be
erected as high as can be conveniently arranged and as far removed from all
obstructions as possible. The lead-in should preferably be a continuation of the
antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices which introduce additional resistance to
the antenna system and which may in time corrode sufficiently to seriously affect
reception. If, however, it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the
antenna, the joint must be carefully soldered to insure a good electrical contact.
Excess flux should be cleaned off and the connection carefully covered with rubber
tape to protect it from the oxidization effects of the atmosphere.
The antenna and lead-in should be supported by high grade glass or porce-
lain insulators. At no point should the antenna or lead-in wire come in contact
with any part of the building. The lead-in wire should be brought through the
wall or window frame and insulated there from by a porcelain tube.
8
 The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, trac-
tion or power line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antenna.
It is desirable to keep the lead-in a foot or more from the building where pos-
sible. When an outdoor antenna is used it should be protected by means of an
approved lightning arrester, in accordance with the requirements of the National
Fire Underwriters' Code.
(5) ANTENNA INSTALLATION (Indoor Type)
Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory
results may generally be obtained by using an indoor antenna consisting of about
25 feet of insulated wire strung around the picture moulding or placed under a
rug. In buildings where metal lathing is employed satisfactory results are not
always possible with this type of antenna. Under such conditions various
arrangements of the indoor antenna should be tried to secure satisfactory re-
sults. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly installed outdoor
antenna.

Figure 6-Method used to clean Radiotron prongs.

(6) GROUND
A good ground is quite as important as the antenna No specific recommenda-
tions can be given in this matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water
and steam pipes usually make good grounds. Gas pipes usually make pour
grounds and, as a rule, are to be avoided. If neither water nor steam pipes are
available, a pipe or metal rod may be driven into the ground to a depth of several
feet. The success of this type of ground depends upon the moisture present in
the soil. The ground lead should be connected by means of an approved ground
clamp to a section of pipe that has been scraped and thoroughly cleaned. The
connection should be inspected from time to time to make certain that a clean
and tight electrical contact exists between the clamp and pipe.
In some instances the sensitivity of a particular set may be improved by
leaving off the ground connection. The receiver, however, does not operate
entirely without a ground as there is a §mall capacity ground through the A. C.
power supply line. On the other hand, the absence of a ground connection may
9
cause oscillation depending upon the particular set and the antenna system in-
stalled. It is recommended that the service man experiment with grounds, and
employ the arrangement giving the best results.

(7) ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES

Complaints of swinging signals, or of intermittent reception with probable
grating noises, as distinguished from fading effects, are generally the result of
antenna and ground system failures and to this, therefore, the service man
should give his first attention. A grating noise may be caused by a poor lead-
in connection to the antenna, or antenna touching some metallic surface, such
as the edge of tin roof, drain pipe, etc. By disconnecting the antenna and ground
leads from Radiola 17 and rioting whether or not the grating continues, the
service man can soon determine whether or not the cause of complaint is within
or external to the receiver and plan his service work accordingly.

I'inurc 7 Iicicrr,4rry NroNntiuy huldi»r/ rolu»ic control.

(8) RADIOTRON SOCKETS

The socket in Radiola 17 are of the standard gang UX and UY type (Fig-
ure 5). The three -gang socket is for the radio frequency amplifiers; the single
socket-a five -prong detector socket is for Radiotron UY -227 and the two -gang
socket is for the audio frequency amplifiers. Care must be exercised when insert-
ing Radiotrons in the sockets. A socket contact may not be in its correct posi-
tion and forced insertion of a tube will bend or break it. If care is exercised
and the Radiotron inserted gently, little trouble will be experienced with socket
contacts. A bent one will be noticeable on inspection and may be corrected by
inserting a narrow instrument in the socket hole and pushing the contact into its
correct position. A badly bent or broken socket contact must be replaced.

(9) RADIOTRON PRONGS

Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation or change the resistance
of the filament circuit sufficiently to cause a hum in the loudspeaker. They should
therefore be cleaned periodically to insure good contact.
lo
 The potentiometers (Part I, Section 19) should be readjusted for the posi-
tion of minimum hum whenever the Radiotron prongs are cleaned.
The prongs should be cleaned by using a piece of fine sandpaper (Figure 6).
The use of emery cloth or steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting
Radiotrons in their sockets wipe the prongs and base carefully to make certain
that all particles of sand are removed.
In placing Radiotrons in the UX sockets care should be exercised to make
certain that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons match the
socket holes. The UY -227 Radiotron has five prongs all of the same size and
will fit in the socket only one way. If a Radiotron will not fit into a socket with-
out considerable pressure being applied, look for excessive solder on one or more
of the prongs. Excessive solder on prongs may be removed with a file or knife.

Figure 8-Adjusting the contact arm to secure

improved contact with resistor strip.
(10) LOOSE VOLUME CONTROL CONTACT ARM
A loose volume control contact may cause noisy or intermittent operation
and should be remedied. If the contact arm is loose, the remedy is to bend it
slightly so that it makes firm contact against the resistance strip. In order to do
this it is necessary to remove the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part
II, Section 1. The volume control is then readily accessible. By removing the
two screws (Figure 7), that hold it to the metal frame it may be completely re-
moved. The small U-shaped washer is removed from the shaft and the spring
contact arm is pulled out to clear the resistor strip. The spring contact arm may
now be bent sufficiently to make a good contact. Figure 8 illustrates the bending
of this contact arm. After adjusting the spring contact arm, replace the mount-
ing screws and return the chassis to the cabinet and replace screws and control
knobs.
(11) ADJUSTMENT FOR SLACK DRUM CONTROL
The main tuning condensers are controlled by a cable and drum arrangement
giving a smoothly acting vernier movement that has no back lash. (See Figure
10.)
11
 After considerable wear, or extreme changes of temperature the cable may
become slack. To take up this slack open lid of cabinet and turn the cable adjust-
ing screw with clamp until the cable is taut. (See Figure 9.) In extreme cases
as might occur after considerable use and several adjustments this screw may
become seated thus allowing no further tightening of the cable. When this con-
dition occurs it will be necessary to slip the cable a half turn on the grooved
drum. To make this adjustment it is necessary to remove the chassis from the
cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1. Remove the cable adjusting screw and
clamp (see Figure 10). The cable will then have approximately one inch slack.
By removing the tapered pill holding the front grooved drum to its shaft and
replacing it on the opposite side (180 degrees) the one -inch slack in the cable can
be taken up by using the new position of the pin for anchoring the cable. Fig-
ure 10 illustrates this operation. It will be noted that the tapered pin in the

Figure 9-Turning cable adjusting screw to lake up slack in tuning drum cable.
new position cannot be inserted as far as originally. However, it can be inserted
far enough to lock the grooved drum to the control shaft and clear the metal
housing. If the cable again is stretched to the maximum adjustment of the
cable adjusting screw the tapered pin c be returned to its original position
and a half turn slipped on the drum which will provide for taking up all slack.
Sufficient grooves are provided on the drum for this purpose.

(12) MECHANICAL HUM

A mechanical hum caused by vibration of loose laminations in the power
transformer may be corrected by removing the power transformer from the
S. P. U. as described in Part II, Section 12, and heating it in a slow oven. The
open end of the transformer should be kept up and the wax heated sufficiently
to allow it to adhere to the laminations of the transformer. After heating, the
transformer should be allowed to cool for at least 24 hours and then returned
to the S. P. U.
12
(13) BROKEN CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE
Should a cable become broken, due to considerable use or excessive tighten-
ing, the proper remedy is to replace the cable. The procedure for making this
replacement is described in Part II, Section 8. However if a new cable is not
immediately available a temporary repair may be made in the following manner
provided the break in the cable is not in that section that passes over the small
grooved drums.
The two ends should be spliced together and then soldered. Splicing con-
sists of interweaving the strands as with rope and not just ~`wisting the cable

MAXIMUM ADJUSTMENT OF CABLE ADJUSTING SCREW

CABLE ADJUSTING SCREW REMOVED TO ALLOW HALF -TURN
EXTENSION OF CABLE ON DRUM

`. /.
/
//

//' DOTTED LINES INDICATE REVERSAL

NORMAL POSITION OF PIN EXTENSION
OF CABLE OF CABLENONDHDRUM-TURN

Figure 10-Radiola 17 three -gang condenser

cable and drum operating mechanism.
ends together as in an electrical wiring splice. Splicing gives greater strength
and results in a smaller body being formed on the cable. When soldering, use
plenty of flux and a small amount of solder. Heat sufficiently long for the solder
to adhere to all the small strands of the cable. Placing the splice in an alcohol
or bunsen flame affords sufficient heat and allows any excess solder to drip away.
It is to be understood that this is but a temporary repair and should be used only
until a new cable can be procured and installed.
(14) LOUDSPEAKER POLARITY
Due to Radiola 17 using an output transformer, there is no polarity to the
output current of the receiver. Consequently, when connecting any type of loud-
speaker (either horn type or cone type) the speaker should be connected in the
manner that gives the most pleasing reproduction.
13
(15) UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATION
Should Radiola 17 oscillate or regenerate at any point in the tuning range
the trouble is probably caused by:
(1) Defective grid resistor in second or third R. F. stages. The resistors
may be checked by means of a resistance bridge, or the voltmeter
ammeter method described below. Figure 4 shows the correct value
of these resistors.
(2) Excessive filament voltage. Adjust line switch to high position.
(3) Excessive plate voltage. This may be caused by a defective 1200 -ohm
resistor in UX-226 plate supply line.
(4) Antenna lead not in proper position. The correct position is between
the A. F. transformer assembly and the frame.
(5) Open ground connection. Make repair.
(6) High resistance ground. Connect the ground lead to a cold water pipe,
a hot water or steam radiator or bòth. If these are not available con-
nect to several other grounds until a fairly low resistance ground is
obtained.
(7) Open -9 volt bias lead (black with green tracer). Make repair.
(8) Open ground lead in set. Any of the several grounding leads in the
Receiver and S. P. U. Assembly being open may cause oscillation. Test
for open connections and make repair.
(9) Antenna and ground leads reversed, either at their point of connection
to the volume control or outside of the set. Connect properly.
In the case of No. 1 the grid resistance of Radiola 17 may be checked by
means of a resistance bridge. If a resistance bridge is not avaliable the volt-
meter -ammeter method gives accurate results provided the meters used are cali-
brated accurately. This method makes use of a milliammeter with a scale of
0-25 and a voltmeter of 0-7. A voltage is then applied that will give a substantial
reading. A circuit diagram of this method is shown in Figure 12.
A ACROSS RESISTANCE,, E VOLTS
R= OR $000
TO BE MEASURED 1 MILLIAMPERES

6 VOLTS

0-7
200 OHMS
0-25

Figure 12-Schematic circuit for resistance measurement.

The resistance may then be calculated by the use of Ohms law.
(Where R equals ohms ) or 1000 Volts
R Ï
E( E equals volts and I equals amperes Milliamperes
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or lowampere) it is nec-
essary to multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
14
 A detector tube may cause oscillation or a howl, very similar to a microphonic
howl. The remedy in this case is to interchange the detector Radiotron with
another UY -227 Radiotron. A tube may howl in one Radiola 17 and perform nor-
mally in another.
In some cases with certain antennas, the Radiola may oscillate even though
everything is O. K. The remedy is to change the antenna length or interchange
the UX-226 Radiotrons in the R. F. stages.

(16) DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

Under normal conditions Radiola 17 will deliver a strong signal of good
quality to the loudspeaker. If the loudspeaker production is poor test the loud-
speaker output from the receiver. A pair of phones or a loudspeaker of known
quality may be used for this purpose. Poor quality or distortion may be due to
any of the following causes:
1. High or low plate and grid voltages from socket power unit. This may
be due to a defective Radiotron UX-280 or tapped resistance unit. The remedy
is to replace the Radiotron UX-280 with one of known quality or check the vari-
ous resistances of the tapped resistor for a possible short or open.
2. Defective Radiotrons. Though the Radiola may be in operating condi-
tion a defective Radiotron in any stage will cause distortion. This is especially
true of the detector, 1st and 2nd audio stages and the rectifier tube.
3. Potentiometers not properly adjusted. Unless the potentiometers are
correctly adjusted sufficient hum may be present to cause distortion. The cor-
rect adjustment of these potentiometers is described in Part I, Section 19.
Should Radiola 17 become noisy in operation or signals come in and die
out abruptly with periods of hum or no reception, test in the following manner :
(a) Disconnect antenna and ground leads. If the Radiola becomes quiet
and signals from local stations, though weak, are received it would be an indi-
cation that the trouble is either in the antenna system or is caused by nearby
interfering electrical apparatus. The remedy in the first case is to repair the
antenna system and in the second place Radio Frequency chokes on any offend-
ing nearby apparatus. The location of interfering electrical machinery and the
cure will require patience, skill and experimenting.
(b) If disconnecting the antenna and ground system does not eliminate the
noise the trouble is in the Radiola. A defective tube, one having poorly welded
elements would cause a disturbance of this kind and this point should be
checked by interchanging the Radiotrons in the Radiola with others of the
same type. If it is definitely established that the Radiotrons are O. K. then
the contact between the Radiotron prongs and the socket contacts should be
examined for a dirty or poor contact. The three potentiometers in the Socket
Power Unit and the Volume Control should be examined for a dirty or poor
contact between the contact arm and the resistor strip.

(17) AUDIO HOWL

Radiola 17 may have a tendency to howl when first installed. This can usu-
ally be remedied by interchanging the detector Radiotron with another UY-227
Radiotron. If this does not remedy the trouble try the following:
15
 (a) Put the line control switch in the position that gives the least light at
the pilot lamp. This reduces the filament voltage on all the Radiotrons which
may be high, causing oscillation on the part of the R. F. amplifiers.
(b) Place antenna lead between the A. F. transformer and frame.
If the Radiola has been in operation for a considerable time and a howl de-
velops, the following points should be checked for possible defect:
(a) Defective Radiotrons. A Radiotron after considerable use may cause
a howl. Substituting a Radiotron of known condition will isolate the defec-
tive one.
(b) Open audio by-pass condensers.

Figure 13-Using a long screwdriver in adjusting

the potentiometer for minimum hum.
(c) Defective grid leak or open grid connection of any tube in the Radiola
except Radiotron UX-280.
(d) Open R. F. grid resistor.
Any part found defective should be replaced and any open or poor connec-
tion should be repaired.
(18) ACOUSTIC HOWL
Generally speaking, Radiola 17 is much less susceptible to acoustic howling
due to microphonic tubes than receiving sets using other than A. C. tubes. How-
ever, on some occasions acoustic howling may be experienced and the loud-
speaker location must be chosen with care. This howl is somewhat different from
the usual microphonic howl in that it disappears when a station is tuned in, but
still causes some distortion in the received signal. The remedy is to interchange
the UY -227 detector tube with another of a similar type or change the position
of the loudspeaker. In extreme cases both remedies may be necessary.
(19) HUM
Three potentiometers are provided in Radiola 17 for the suppression of any
A. C. hum. These potentiometers are adjusted for the correct electrical center of
16
the filaments of Radiotrons UX-226, UY -227 and UX-171A. The following
procedure should be used in eliminating hum :
(a) Place set in normal operation with loudspeaker connected.
(b) Remove Radiotrons 2 and 3, counting from left to right (first audio
and detector stages facing front of Radiola).
(c) Locate position of three potentiometers in power unit.
(d) Adjust potentiometer, located at extreme right when facing front of
Radiola (Figure 13), for position of minimum hum.
(e) Now replace Radiotron No. 2 (UX-226), .previously removed, and

Figure 14-Detailed view of the pilot light socket and canopy.

adjust the potentiometer located at the extreme left (facing the front of the
Radiola) for position of minimum hum.
(f) Replace Radiotron UY -227 and with the Radiotron in normal operation
adjust the center potentiometer for minimum hum.
Under normal conditions these three adjustments will suppress any notice-
able hum in the loudspeaker.
If the foregoing procedure does not reduce hum, try the following:
(a) In some cases when adjusting the potentiometers there may be no
apparent point of minimum hum. This is due to low line voltage and may be
remedied by throwing the line switch to the position that gives maximum bril-
liancy of the pilot lamp. If this does not remedy the trouble, try changing the
position of the line switch to each location several times. There may be a dirty
contact in this switch, making a high resistance connection which may cause the
filaments to glow below normal brilliancy. When this condition is present, it will
be impossible to adjust the potentiometers for minimum hum until the filament
temperature of all Radiotrons is normal.
(b) When adjusting the UX-226 potentiometer (at the left) it may be noted
that the position of minimum hum is at one extreme of the potentiometer. When
this is encountered the potentiometer should be arbitrarily placed at its center
position and then the UY -227 Radiotron placed in its socket and the center poten-
17
 tiometer adjusted for minimum hum. The left potentiometer may now be re -ad-
justed for a further minimum value, which will not now be located at one of
the extreme positions.
(c) After making any potentiometer adjustment, further reduction of hum
may be attempted by reversing the input plug.
When adjusting the potentiometer at the extreme right with a metallic
screw driver a flash will occur from' the screw driver to any part of the frame
that the screw driver may touch. This is normal and does no harm. If it is de-
sired to avoid this condition, an insulated shaft screw driver or a metallic screw
driver wrapped with insulating tape should be used.
(d) If these various adjustments suppress the A. C. hum correctly, but
after a short time the hum reappers it is a good indication that some of the
SWOON
MAMA ...--6LACNalTN-Flut-TAAC to
AMT[MMA -pLOt FLAC
=1-
FLACK

TO OUTPUT
TRAM SFOTMEt

FLAC,*
SLKIi

NEID COO DONOSA

áis;iöa. i
3

TO 8AN6ÓNO.

6
t°

ALIC
FLAC
StACY TM..CtLLOW:1%Kt4
LAC W TNZVOLLOWTTSACtt

GRAIN

DUICKS KFY

Figure 15-Wiring diagram of receiver assembly showing

color scheme and connections with relative location of parts.
Radiotrons are making poor socket contacts, thus destroying the electrical center
of the filament potentiometers. These prongs should be cleaned as described in
Part I, Section 9.
If at any time the Radiola is changed from one electrical outlet to another
outlet or Radiotrons are interchanged or replaced with others it may be neces-
sary to readjust one or more of the potentiometers.
(20) LINE CONTROL SWITCH
A two-way switch is provided in the S. P. U. for adjustment to line volt-
ages. Unless it is definitely known that the.line is always below 115 volts the
18
 switch should be placed at the 120 -volt position. It is a good plan to leave this
switch at the 120 -volt position on all lines unless unsatisfactory operation is
experienced. If the switch is set at the 110 -volt position on supply lines exceed-
ing 115 volts the Radiotrons in the receiver will be damaged.

(21) WIRING CABLE

On examination of the chassis wiring in some models of Radiola 17 there
will be noticed a green dead end wire, about 6 inches long, connected to the third

CONDENSER LINE SWITCH

CONNECTIONS
TERMINAL
BOARD:

LACED CABLE

UX-2B0

LACED CABLE'
E

,LACED CABLE UX-226

UX'171-A POTENTIOMETER POTENTIOMETER
INPUT
PLUG

UY -227
POTENTIOMETER

OPERATING
SWITCH
LACED CABLE

BLACK WITH YELLOW TRACER

BLUE
GREEN
GREEN WITH RED TRACER
MAROON
MAROON AND RED
1 (y RED

'31111
POWER; BLACK WITH GREEN TRACER
TRANSFORMER BROWN
CONNECTIONS BLACK
A BLACK WITH RED TRACER

FILTER REACTOR
CONNECTIONS
POWER TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS UNr
RESISTANCE
BLACK AND RED
YELLOW

Figure 16-Continuity wiring diagram of socket power

unit and color scheme of wiring.

R. F. coil. This is normal and no attention should be paid to the presence of

this lead.
(22) PILOT LAMP AND CANOPY
Radiola 17 is equipped with a small pilot lamp (Figure 14), operating from
the UX-171A filament winding for illuminating the dial and indicating that the
Radiola is in operation. The latter use is quite important because when start-
ing Radiola 17 approximately 30 seconds are required to bring the detector ÚY-
227 into operating condition. The lamp and canopy are packed separately and
must be installed when the Radiola is first placed in operation. The pilot lamp
19
is a standard T-3 Mazda, miniature base, 6 volt, 0.15 ampere light and is screwed
into its base directly over the tuning dial. The canopy has three projections
which fit three holes directly over this light. Should this lamp be damaged or
burn out a new one can be obtained on the open market.
(23) FILTER CONDENSERS
In general a defective filter condenser will be indicated by the plates of
Radiotron UN -280 heating excessively, with the set giving weak, distorted
or no reproduction and a loud hum. When this condition is experienced, the
condenser bank should be disconnected from the circuit and the condensers tested
with a reasonably high voltage, not over 200 volts. The correct way to test filter
condensers is to charge and discharge them, being careful not to come in con-
tact with the terminals. Figure 17 illustrates filter condenser connections.

Figure 17-Internal connections of filter condensers.

(24) VOLTAGE READINGS
When checking a Radiola 17 for possible defects it is good practice to check
the voltage of the various sources of current. To do this a service man will need
both an A. C. and a D. C. voltmeter, the D. C. meter to be of at least 600 ohms
per volt in resistance. The following voltages should be obtained at the terminal
strip when the set is in operation with full load on the socket power unit (Fig-
ure 4A). The terminal strip numbers are from front to rear, No. 1 being closest
to the front of the Radiola and No. 11 closest to the rear.
Terminals Correct Voltage
1. to 2 1.5 A. C.
3to4 2.25 A. C.
5to6 5.O A. C.
7to8 45 D. C.
7 to 9 135 D. C.
Gnd. to 10 165'D. C. (Approx.)
7 to 11 9 D. C.
11 to adjusting screw of UX-171A potentiometer 30 D. C.
20
 Any serious variation from these voltages indicates a defective resistance
strip or power transformer. An easy method to determine whether the defect is
in the power transformer or the resistance strip follows :
Defective power transformer.
(a) Any A. C. voltages off the correct value.
(b) All D. C. voltages, high or low, their differences remaining constant.
Defective resistance unit.
(a) Any D. C. voltages being either high or low, but not all consistently
high or low with all A. C. voltages correct.
(25) GRID AND PLATE VOLTAGES
In order to intelligently service Radiola 17 it is well to have a good under-
standing of how the various circuits function. The plate supply and filament
A
+PWG.
UV- 227 ux171

C `1
T

ux120.'
Ur217 Ux171
FILAMENT fIIAMINT
WINDING`. WINOINO%
i

-8 J ux221
11

AM 1H T
-"WINDING KW- 10000.L
ti ANNNYNMr -# AW NYV N1r
-K -)OC

TÓ ICI '91430C
Figure 18-Schematic circuit for securing grid biasing voltages.
supply systems present no special features not used in similar circuits. How-
ever, the grid biasing voltages are obtained in a slightly different manner from
that usually employed to obtain "C" bias voltage. Also the -9 volt "C" used
to bias the Radiotron UX-226 is also used to keep the heater element of the detec-
tor Radiotron at a negative potential.
Figure 18 illustrates the grid and plate supply circuit.
(a) The three plate voltages and the -9 volt "C" potential are obtained
from a series resistance unit in the regular manner, using the drop of voltage
through the resistance unit to obtain the desired voltage. The -9 volt "C" sup-
ply is used as a bias voltage for all Radiotrons UX-226 and is also impressed on
the UY -227 heater through the center connection to the UY -227 potentiometer.
The +9 volt "C" is connected to the cathode of this Radiotron. The net result
of such an arrangement is to keep the heater element of the detector tube at a
sufficiently high negative potential to eliminate any tendency of the cathode to
emit electrons back to the heater rather than to the plate of the tube.
(b) Referring to Figure 18 we note that the -9 "C" is also marked -30
"C" and connected to the grid of Radiotron UX-171A. Also a series resistance
is placed in the grid return from this resistance and connected to the center tap of
21
Radiotron UX-171A potentiometer. This connection is marked +30 "C" The
action of this arrangement is somewhat different from the method used for
obtaining the -9 volts "C" for the UX-226 Radiotrons.
In obtaining the -9 volt "C" potential for the Radiotron UX-226, the volt-
age drop across a portion of the resistance strip (see A to C, Figure 18) is used
for this potential. Any point on the strip from any other point is either positive
or negative, depending on whether the other point is toward the positive side "A"
or the negative side "C". For example point "B" would be negative in regards
to point "A" and positive in regards to point "C". Now using this same prin-
ciple, but taking the current flow from "A" to "C" through the plate and fila-
ment of Radiotron UX-171A and the resistance in series with the center connec-
tion to the potentiometer we may find either a positive or negative drop depend-

Figure 19-Removing the receiver assembly from the cabinet.

ing on where the point of connection is made. By connecting point "D" (Fig-
ure 18), as a source of positive potential any point toward "C" will have an
increasingly negative potential. The value of this negative potential will depend
on the resistance connected between "C" and "D". In Radiola 17 this negative
potential is 30 volts and, as shown, gives the proper bias for Radiotron UX-171A.
This parallel circuit across the resistance isolates the "C" potential for
Radiotron-. JX-171A from the plate and "C" voltages for the other Radiotrons.
Doing this keeps fluctuations in the various plate supplies from varying the "C"
potential on this tube. More stable operation and less distortion is the net result.
(26) HEATING OF CABINET
Under normal conditions when the lid of Radiola 17 is closed the interior
parts in the vicinity of Radiotron UX-280 will become quite warm. This is a
normal condition. It keeps all the mechanism dry and maintains maximum op-
erating efficiency even under severe climatic conditions.
22
(27) RADIOLA 17 CONTINUITY TESTS
The following tests will show complete continuity for the Receiver Assem-
bly (Figure 15) and the S. P. U. (Figure 16). Disconnect the antenna and
ground leads, the cable connecting the S. P. U. to the receiver assembly, and the
A. C. supply cord at its outlet. Do not tamper with the main tuning condensers.
A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series or a voltmeter with
sufficient voltage to give a full scale deflection when connected directly across the
battery terminals should be used in making this test.
RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CONTINUITY TESTS
Remove All Radiotrons and Disconnect Cable at Terminal Strip
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
Lug No. 1 to ground Open Shorted by-pass condenser
Lug No. 2 to ground Open Shorted by-pass condenser
Lug No. 1 to Lug No. 2 Open Shorted UX-226 socket
Lug No. 3 to Lug No. 4 Open Shorted UY -227 socket
Lug No. 5 to Lug No. 6 Open Shorted UX-171A socket
Lug No. 1 to one side of filament Closed Open connection
contact of sockets Nos. 1, 2, 3
and 5
Lug No. 2 to other filament contact Closed Open connection
of sockets Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5
Lug No. 3 to one side of heater con- Closed Open connection
tacts of socket No. 4
Lug No. 4 to other side of heater Closed Open connection
contacts of socket No. 4
Lug No. 5 to one side of filament Closed Open connection
contact of socket No. 6
Lug No. 6 to other side of filament Closed Open connection
contact of socket No. 6
Lug No. 7 to cathode contact of Closed Open connection
socket No. 4
Lug No. 8 to plate contact of socket Closed Open primary of first audio trans-
No. 4 former or ccnnection
Lug No. 9 to plate contact of sockets Closed Open primary of 1st, 2nd or 3rd
Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5 R.F. transformers or primary of
2nd A.F. transformer
Lug No. 10 to plate contact of socket Closed Open primary of output transformer
No. 6
Across loudspeaker pin jacks Closed Open secondary of output trans-
former
Antenna lead to ground lead Closed Open volume control

Grid contact of socket No. 1 to Closed Open volume control or poor con-
ground tact of volume control arm
Grid contact of socket No. 2 to Closed Open secondary of 1st R.F. trans-
ground former or grid resistance
Grid contact of socket No. 3 to Closed Open secondary of 2nd R.F. trans-
ground former or grid resistance
Stator of condenser No. 3 (nearest Closed Open secondary of 3rd R.F. trans-
output transformer) to ground former
Grid contact ,of socket No. 5 to Closed Open secondary of 1st A.F. trans-
ground former
Grid contact of socket No. 6 to Closed Open secondary of 2nd A.F. trans-
ground former
23
 SOCKET POWER UNIT CONTINUITY TESTS
Remove Radiotron UX-280 and Disconnect Cable at Terminal Strip
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
Across terminals 1 to 2 Closed Open UX-226 filament winding and
i potentiometer
Across terminals 3 to 4 Closed Open UY -227 filament winding and
potentiometer
Across terminals 5 to 6 Closed Open UX-171A filament winding
and potentiometer
Across filament contacts of UX-280 Closed Open UX-280 filament winding
socket
Grid contact to plate contact of UX- Closed Open high voltage winding of power
280 socket transformer
UX-171A potentiometer adjusting Closed Open resistance strip
screw to terminal No. 10
Terminal No. 11 to plate contact of Closed Open high voltage winding of power
UX-280 socket transformer or filter reactor
Across input plug Closed Open primary of power transformer
or line switch. If open throw
switch to other position and test.
If both open test switch sepa-
rately.

BY- PASS
CONDENSERS

A.F. CONDENSER
TO MAIN TUNING
,GRID CONDENSER GREEN 2R0 R.F. GRID (CONDENSER.
- She R.F GRID RESISTOR, RESISTOR'S

`4k

RE
REO RED

Figure 20-R. F. transformer connections and color scheme of wiring.

PART II
(1) REPLACING VOLUME CONTROL
-
MAKING REPLACEMENTS

The following procedure should be used when replacing the volume control.
1. Remove the seven screws holding the wooden back to the cabinet.
2. Remove knobs on "Station Selector" and "Volume Control."
3. Release the cable connecting the socket power unit to the receiver assem-
bly and the two leads to the pilot lamp. This is done by loosening the screws
holding them to the terminal strip of the socket power unit.
4. Remove four screws holding chassis in place to bottom of cabinet. The
chassis may now be removed by rocking it in the cabinet and slipping it out of
24
 the back opening. See Figure 19. This will allow an examination of the parts
and provide access to those requiring replacement.
5. Remove the two screws that hold the volume control to the metal chassis.
(Figure 7.)
6. Tag and unsolder all leads to the volume control. The volume control
may now be removed and the new one placed in position occupied by the old one.
The connections should be placed on the new volume control as indicated on
the tags attached to the wires or refer to Figure 15.
7. The volume control should now be fastened to the chassis and the Radiola
reassembled in the reverse order of that already given.
(2) REPLACING RADIO FREQUENCY COILS
The three radio frequency transformers together with a mounting strip and
two pin jacks are stocked as one complete unit.
A step by step procedure for replacing this assembly is as follows :
1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. Unsolder and tag all connections to the three transformers and the two
pin jacks.
I FROM POWER. CABLE f-"-GRfee MAROON AND RED -218.i TO POWER CABLE'

IFROM CATHODE OF RADIOTRON N! 4 ---BgCK 4Fo

FROM CONNECTION BLOCK I -..BROWN BLACK WITH BEEN -TRACER

q "-I104 TO POWER CABLE j
IIIU" 9111111. l

FROM R.F. TRANSFORMER Ì- TO FIXED CONDEN-

SER. ACROSS
C FROM CONNECTION BLOCK 1-03..GREEN SECONDARY OF 14T
A. F. TRANSFORMER

(FROM 24.0 R.F. TRANSFORMER f-

GROUND. --
TO FRAME

ACROSS FILAMENT
RADIOTRON Nº 3

Figure 21-Connections and color scheme of wiring to by-pass condensers

3. Remove four screws that hold mounting strip to metal chassis. The entire
assembly is now released and may be removed. The new assembly should be
placed in the same position occupied by the one just removed.
4. Replace the four screws that hold the mounting strip to the metal chassis.
5. Replace and resolder all leads to the three transformers and two pin
jacks as indicated by the tags previously attached to them. The connections to
the transformer are shown in Figure 20 and those to the pin jacks in Figure 15.
These figures should be referred to when making these connections. After
finishing the connections, they should be carefully checked before reassembling
the Radiola.
25
 6. Connect power cable to chassis assembly and give Radiola an operating
test before fastening to the cabinet to determine that replacement has been
properly made.
7. Fasten chassis assembly to cabinet and replace all screws.
(3) REPLACING RADIOTRON GANG SOCKETS
The Radiotron sockets of Radiola 17 are of the gang variety, using one de-
tector socket, a two -gang A.F. socket strip and one three -gang socket strip for
the radio frequency amplifier tubes.
These sockets are riveted to the metal chassis. To replace them drill out
the old rivets and use screws, nuts and lock washers for securing the new
sockets. A step by step procedure follows for making a replacement:
1. Remove chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. Remove and tag all leads to the terminals of the sockets.

OUTPUT/ z
TRANSFORMER.
Ce

UX-171
AUDIO
2"_9
TERMINAL SOCKET
STRIP

Figure 22-Detail of A. F. transformer

connections and color scheme of wiring. Figure 23-Output transformer connections.
3. Drill out rivets holding sockets to metal chassis frame.
4. The socket assembly may now be removed and the new one placed in
the position occupied by the old one.
5. Fasten new socket in place by using small head machine screws, nuts
and lock washers in place of the rivets previously drilled out.
6. Replace connections as indicated on tags attached or refer to Figure 15
for the correct socket connections.
7. Return chassis to cabinet.
(4) REPLACING MAIN TUNING CONDENSERS AND DRIVE
The main tuning condensers and the driving mechanism is replaced as
one complete unit. The step by step procedure follows :
1. Remove chassis assembly from housing. See Part II, Section 1.
26
 2. Unsolder four connections to consdenser.
3. Remove three screws from under side of chassis that holds condenser
assembly.
4. The assembly may now be removed and the new assembly placed in the
position occupied by the old assembly.
5. Replace three screws that hold assembly in place and resolder leads.
6. Replace chassis assembly in cabinet.

(5) REPLACING LARGE BY-PASS CONDENSERS

These condensers, located on the under side of the chassis frame, are held
together by means of clamps that form part of the condenser case fastened to
the frame. To replace proceed as follows :

Figure 24-Method used in replacing dial scales.

1. Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. Remove condenser assembly as described in Part II, Section 4.
3. The tabs holding the condensers to the chassis may now be bent up by
using a screw driver.
4. The three fixed condensers are now released as a unit from the chassis
frame. The defective condenser may be released by bending the tabs that hold
it to the other condensers.
5. Unsolder the leads of the condenser that are to be replaced. Insert the
new condenser in the place occupied by the old one and fasten it to the adja-
cent condenser. The condensers are now fastened together as a unit and are
fastened to the frame by insetting the tabs of the condenser into their respec-
tive slots and bending the tabs on the top side of the frame.
6. Replace condenser assembly as described in Part II, Section 4.
7. Reconnect all wire leads removed from the large fixed condensers. The
correct connections are shown in Figure 21.
27
 8. Connect power cable to Socket Power Unit and test Radiola. If Radiola
is in correct operating condition fasten chassis assembly to cabinet in reverse
order of that used to remove it.
(6) REPLACING AUDIO TRANSFORMERS
The audio transformers of Radiola 17 are built together as a unit. In mak-
ing a replacement the following procedure should be used:
1. Remove receiver chassis from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 1.
2. Remove output transformer from chassis by removing four screws hold-
ing it in place.
3. Unsolder and tag all leads.
4. Remove transformer assembly by turning up tabs holding it to chassis
frame with screw driver.
5. Under the old transformer, between the chassis frame and the trans-
former, is located a piece of insulating paper. This must be replaced to its nor-
mal position, as there is a possibility of grounding the core of the transformers
to the frame of the chassis unless it is in place.
6. Place the new transformer assembly in position occupied by the old and
fasten to frame by bending over metal tabs that hold it in place.
7. Solder all leads in place as indicated by tags attached. The correct con-
nections are shown in Figure 22.
8. Replace receiver chassis assembly in cabinet in the reverse order of
that used to remove it.
(7) REPLACING OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
The output transformer of Radiola 17 is held in place by means of four
tabs which hold the output transformer to the vertical part of the chassis frame.
A step by step procedure for replacing this unit is as follows :
1. Remove receiver chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part II,
Section 1.
2. Unsolder and tag the connecting points to the four leads of the output
transformer.
3. Remove four screws, nuts and lock washers used to fasten bracket to
chassis.
4. The transformer may now be removed and the new one placed in the
position occupied by the old one.
5. Push the four leads from the transformer through the frame. Fasten
bracket to chassis with screws previously removed. Connect leads as indicated
by tags, previously attached to proper connection. These connections are shown
in Figure 23.
6. Return receiver assembly to cabinet in reverse order of that used to
remove it.
(8) REPLACING CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE
The condenser drive cable of Radiola 17 is made of phosphor bronze and is
very rugged. If replacement becomes necessary proceed as follows :
1. Remove receiver chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part II,
Section 1. Place chassis on table in normal position with controls to the front.
2. Release the cable adjusting screw and clamp, and remove old cable from
large drum and grooved drums completely.
28
 3. Starting from the rear grooved drum place eye of cable over pin, which
should be in a horizontal position facing the socket power unit, and wind on
three complete turns, and then bring cable up to large drum.
4. Now bring cable over the large drum. Turn drum so that cable adjust-
ing screw is on top. Pass cable over groove until point is reached where there
is a slot in the drum for passing cable to the track on other side of drum.
5. Follow on around other track in same direction until point is reached
where cable is directly above front grooved drum.
6. Starting on the third groove back from the front of the grooved drum
wind on two and a half turns and slip eye over pin. The cable is now in the
correct position, although probably slack.
TOP CONDENSER:, POWER
® BLACK WITH YELLOW TRACER CABLE`.
© BLUE TERMINAL
BOARD
© GREEN
® GREEN WITH RED TRACER
® MAROON
® MAROON AND RED
0T RED
CONNECTION ® BLACK WITH GREEN TRACER.
BLOCK

DET
2MD A.F l'.7 A.F 34° R.F RF

%50
5 131 4 4E23

CABLE LUGS`'

Figure 25-Color scheme of power cable connections.

The cable adjusting screw and clamp that were previously removed to
7.
allow the cable to pass along the groove are replaced. By slipping the clamp
over the cable and gradually turning up on the cable adjusting screw, the cable
may be tightened until there is no lost motion in any of the controls. Care
should be taken not to take up too much, as the cable may be stretched or pos-
sibly broken.
8. Return receiver assembly to cabinet in the reverse order used to remove
it.
(9) REPLACING DIAL SCALES
After considerable use a dial scale may become dirty or illegible and a new
scale desired. A step by step procedure for making replacement follows:
1. Open lid of cabinet of Radiola.
2. Turn dial so that the two screws that hold the dial in place are on top.
3. Remove screws, washer and nuts that hold dial in place. (Figure 24.)
4. Replace old dial with new one and replace screws, but do not tighten.
5. Examine new dial from front of Radiola to see that numbers on dial are
in the correct position.
6. Tighten screws holding dial in place and close lid of cabinet.
29
(10) REPLACING POWER CABLE
Attached to the receiver assembly is a heavy cable, connecting all A, B and
C voltage supplies for this assembly. If this cable requires replacement the fol-
lowing procedure should be used.
1. Remove receiver chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part II,
Section 1.
2. Turn assembly so that bottom side is exposed and unsolder all the con-
nections to the cable. Attach tags to points of connection.
3. Remove old cable from chassis and replace with new cable. Solder the
connections of the new cable as indicated on tags attached to connection points.
The correct connections for the power cable are shown in Figure 25.
4. After connecting power cable attach it to the Socket Power Unit and
test Radiola. If O. K. fasten receiver chassis assembly to cabinet in reverse
order of that used to remove it.

(11) REPLACING FILTER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

The following procedure should be used when replacing the filter conden-
sers of Radiola 17:
1. Remove the seven screws holding the wooden back to the cabinet.
2. Remove collar on operating switch at front of Radiola.
3. Release the cable connecting the socket power unit to the chassis assem-
bly and the two leads to the pilot lamp. This is done by loosening the screws
holding them to the terminal strip on the socket power unit.
4. Remove four screws at bottom of cabinet holding Socket Power Unit in
place. The Socket Power Unit may now be removed by slipping it out of the
back opening. This will allow an examination of the parts and provide access to
the ones necessary to replace.
5. Unsolder and tag the connections to the seven terminals on the under
side of the condenser bank.
6. Now turn up the six tabs that hold the unit to the S. P. U. base. The
entire assembly may now be removed.
7. The new condenser should be placed in the position occupied by the old,
taking care that the terminal connections are in the same position.
8. Clamp the assembly in place by turning the tabs over the under side of
the base.
9. Solder the connections to the assembly as indicated on the tags attached.
These connections are shown in Figure 16.
The S. P. U. should be tested by connecting the cable on the receiver unit to
the terminal strip and if found O. K. fastened to the cabinet in the reverse order
of that used to remove it.
30
 (12) REPLACING EITHER POWER TRANSFORMER OR
FILTER REACTOR
The power transformer and the filter reactor are each encased in a metal
container. Either unit may be replaced in the following manner:
1. Remove S. P. U. from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 11.
2. Unsolder the leads of the unit being replaced and tag connection points.
3. Bend up tabs that hold unit to base. It may be necessary to remove
the resistance unit in order to bend all the tabs. The particular assembly being
replaced may now be removed and the new assembly placed in the position
occupied by the old one.
4. The tabs on the new assembly should be bent so as to properly fasten
the unit to the S. P. U. base.
5. Connect all leads from the assembly to the points of connection as indi-
cated by tags previously attached. These connections are shown in Figure 16,
which should be followed exactly when any S. P. U. part is replaced.
6. Connect cable from receiver assembly to terminal strip of Socket Power
Unit. If found O. K. fasten unit to cabinet in the reverse order.

(13) REPLACING TERMINAL STRIP

The following procedure should be used in replacing a terminal strip on the
Socket Power Unit.
1. Remove S. P. U. from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 11.
2. Unsolder and tag all leads soldered to terminal strip.
3. Release two screws holding strip to S. P. U. base.
4. The strip may now be removed and replaced by a new one.
5. Fasten new strip in position occupied by old strip by means of two ma-
chine screws, lock washers and nuts previously removed.
6. Solder all leads to terminal strip as indicated on tags attached. The color
scheme and correct connections are shown in Figure 16.
7. Connect cable from receiver assembly and test Radiola. If found operat-
ing properly fasten S. P. U. to cabinet in the reverse order.

(14) REPLACING MISCELLANEOUS PARTS IN S. P. U.

The potentiometers, line switch, UX-280 socket and resistance unit in Radiola
17 may become defective and require replacement. They are all attached to the
base by means of machine screws and nuts and replacement is very simple. The
following general outline will apply to all of these units :
1. Remove S. P. U. from cabinet as described in Part II, Section 11.
2. Unsolder leads from defective unit and tag each lead.
3. Remove defective unit from base and replace with new unit.
4. Solder leads to new unit as indicated on tags or see Figure 16.
5. Connect cable to S. P. U. from receiver assembly. Test and if found O. K.
fasten S. P. U. to cabinet in reverse order of that used to remove it.
31
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals,
poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes,
or a poor antenna system. If imperfect operation is not due to these causes the "Service Data
Chart" should be consulted for further detailed causes.
Indication Cause Remedy
Defective operating switch Repair or replace switch
Loose volume control arm Tighten volume control arm
Defective power cable Replace power cable
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly
No signals Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly
Defective By-pass condenser Replace By-pass condenser
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means
of continuity test and make any
repairs or replacements necessary
Defective power cable Repair or replace cable
Defective line switch Clean contacts or replace line switch
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly
Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly
Dirty Radiotron prongs Clean prongs with fine sandpaper
Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser
Defective main tuning condensers Replace defective tuning condensers
Weak Signals Defective output transf firmer Replace defective transformer
Low voltages from socket power unit Check socket power unit voltages
with high resistance D.C. voltmeter
and A.C. voltmeter
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means
of continuity test and make any
repairs or replacements necessary
Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly
Defective output transformer Replace output transformer
Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser
Poor Quality Dirty contact arm of volume control Clean contact arm on volume control
Potentiometers not property adjusted Adjust potentiometers correctly
Dirty prongs on Radiotrons Clean prongs with fine sandpaper
Open grid resistor Check by means of continuity and
replace any defective grid resistor
Radiotron UY -227 howl Interchange Radiotron UY-227 with
another
Howling Defect in audio system Check and repair any defect
Detector tube oscillating Place antenna lead between A.F.
transformer and chassis frame
Open grid circuit in any stage Check circuits and repair defect
Potentiometers not properly adjusted Adjust potentiometers correctly
Socket plug position Reverse socket plug
Excessive Hum Line voltage low Set line switch for low line voltage
Dirty or defective line switch Clean or replace line switch
Operating switch not "On" Turn operating switch "On"
Defective operating switch Replace operating switch
Radiotrons fail Defective input A.C. cord Repair or replace A.C. input cord
to light Defective power transformer Replace power transformer
No A.C. line voltage Turn A.C. line voltage "On"
Play in Station Loose knob Tighten or replace knob
Selector Slack cable Take up on cable adjusting screw
 RCA
Radiola 18
SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 18

Third Edition-2M-Jan. 1931

RCA Victor Company, Inc.

RADIOLA DIVISION
Camden, New Jersey
REPRESENTATIVES IN PRINCIPAL CITIES
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized Dealer renders
service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subse-
quent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the
end that RCA Loudspeaker and Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service organizations
having a thoroughly trainéd personnel with a knowledge of the design and operation of RCA
Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and RCA Authorized
Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected Distributors.
Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may be undertaken by the RCA
Dealer.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business the RCA
Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing RCA Loudspeakers and
Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers and Distributors'
service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these
Service Notes will establish their value, and it is suggested they be preserved for ready
reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division maintains a corps of
engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems. These engi-
neers call upon the trade at frequent intervals to advise and assist RCA Distributors in the
performance of service work.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors aid dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copvrittlrt 1429 ---Radio Corporation of America.

 CONTENTS
Page
2
A Word or Two About Service.
5
Introduction ..
24
Service Data Chart

PART I -INSTALLATION
Page Page
6 Sub -Chassis Wiring 8
Antenna
6 Howl 8
Ground
7 Radiotron Sequence 8
Radiotrons
Line Switch 7

PART II -SERVICE DATA

Page Page
9 Audio Howl 12
Antenna System Failures .

13
Radiotron Sockets 9 Distorted Reproduction
Pilot Lamp and Canopy 14
Radiotron Prongs 9
and
Filter Condenser and Output Condenser
Loose Volume Control and Low Volume 10
10 Choke 14
Adjustment for Slack Drum Control 15
Hum 10 Voltage Supply System
11 Voltage Readings 15
Broken Condenser Drive Cable _........_......_._...._ 17
Loudspeaker Polarity 11 Radiola 18 Continuity Tests
Compensating Condenser Out of Adjustment 12

PART III-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Page
Page
Cable 22
Volume Control ._ 19 Replacing Power
Replacing
Replacing Radio Frequency Coils.. _. 20 Replacing Filter Condenser, Output Choke and
22
Radiotron Gang Sockets 20 Condenser Assembly
Replacing
Replacing Main Tuning Condensers and Drive 20 Replacing Either Power Transformer or Filter
Reactor 23
By -Pass Condenser 21
Replacing 23
Audio Transformers 21 Replacing Terminal Strip ......_
Replacing Parts in S.P.U. 23
Condenser Drive Cable 21 Replacing Miscellaneous
Replacing
Dial Scales 22
Replacing

ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
Page
13
Fitting Canopy Into Escutcheon Plate._
RCA Radiola 18 1 14
4 Internal Connections of Condensers
Receiver Assembly _ 15
Schematic Circuit of Voltage Supply System.-.
Socket Power Unit 5 16
Wiring Diagram of Receiver
Schematic Circuit ._ 7 18
Wiring Diagram of S.P.U.
Radiotron Sequence 8 19
9 Removing Receiver Assembly from Cabinet
Radiotron Socket Contacts
11
Adjusting Compensating Condenser
Z

W
CZ

Z W ;f:

u.:
cY
 RCA RADIOLA
(105.125 Volta, 50-60 Cycle A.C.)
18
SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
RCA Radiola 18 is a socket powered six-tube, tuned radio frequency receiver
utilizing RCA Radiotrons UX-226, UY -227, UX-171A and the full wave rectifier Radio-
tron UX-280 in the Socket Power Unit. It operates on 105-125 volts, 50 to 60 cycle
A.C. lines. Figure 1 illustrates the various units of the receiver assembly and Figure 2
the main parts of the Socket Power Unit.

OUTPUT CONDENSER FILTER POWER

AND CHOKE REACTOR TRANSFORMER
AND
FILTER CONDENSERS

OPERATING UX-280 LINE VOLTAGE TERMINAL

SWITCH SOCKET ADJUSTMENT SWITCH STRIP

Figure 2-Socket power unit showing various parts.

The following principles are incorporated in the circuit design. (See Fig. 3.)
(1) A single control, three -gang condenser is employed to tune two of the radio
frequency circuits and the detector circuit.
(2) An aperiodic antenna or first R.F. circuit, eliminates the necessity for a sep-
arate antenna tuning control.
(3) The volume control regulates the input grid voltage to the first R.F. amplifier
stage. This is the most practical method of volume control for use with A.C. Radio-
trons and gives a smooth control of volume without distortion.
(4) Raw A.C. of the correct voltage is used for filament heating of all Radiotrons.
This eliminates the use of "A" batteries.
(5) The three R.F. stages and the first audio stage receive a plate voltage of 135
volts in conjunction with a negative grid bias of 9 volts. The detector receives 45 volts
5
plate supply. The last audio stage receives a plate voltage sufficient to provide ample
loudspeaker output. The plate and grid voltages are supplied by means of a built-in
"B" and "C" power supply unit using Radiotron UX-280 as the rectifying device.
(6) A new method of stabilizing the tuned R.F. circuit gives improved sensitivity
and selectivity.
The following notes are published for the guidance of those called upon to locate
and remedy any trouble that may occur. The text is divided into three parts, Part
Installation Part II-Service Data, and Part III-Making Replacements.
;
I-

PART I-INSTALLATION
(1) ANTENNA (Outdoor Type)
Due to the high sensitivity of Radiola 18 the antenna length need only be
approximately 25 feet. It should be erected as high as possible and be removed from
all obstructions. The lead-in should be a continuation of the antenna itself, thus avoid-
ing all splices which might introduce additional resistance and in time corrode suffi-
ciently to seriously affect reception. If it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in
to the antenna the joint must be carefully soldered to insure a good electrical contact.
Clean off all excess flux and tape the connection to protect it from the oxidation effects
of the atmosphere.
High grade glass or porcelain insulator supports are required and at no point
should the antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with.any part of the building. Bring
the lead-in wire through a porcelain tube penetrating the wall or window frame.
The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction or
power line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antennas. An out-
door antenna should be protected by means of an approved lightning arrester, in accord-
ance with the requirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.

(2) ANTENNA (Indoor Type)

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results
may generally be obtained by using an indoor antenna of about 25 feet of insulated
wire strung around the picture moulding or placed under a rug. In buildings where
metal lathing is employed satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of
antenna. Under such conditions various arrangements of the indoor antenna should be
tried to secure satisfactory results. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly
installed outdoor antenna.

(3) GROUND
A good ground is quite as important as the antenna. No specific recommenda-
tions can be given in this matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water and
steam pipes usually make good grounds. Gas pipes usually make poor grounds and,
as a rule, are to be avoided. If neither water nor steam pipes are available, a pipe or
metal rod may be driven into the ground to a depth of several feet. The success of
this type of ground depends upon the moisture present in the soil. The ground lead
should be connected by means of an approved ground clamp to a section of pipe that
has been scraped and thoroughly cleaned. The connection should be inspected from
time to time to make certain that a clean and tight electrical contact exists between
the clamp and pipe. The service man should experiment with various grounds, and
employ the one giving the best results.
6
 (4) RADIOTRONS
Four Radiotrons UX-226, one UY -227, one UX-171A and one UX-280 are used.
The locations of these Radiotrons are plainly designated on each socket. Be careful not
to insert a Radiotron UX-226 in the UX-171A socket, as immediate filament burn -out
will result when the current is turned "ON".
Connect the loudspeaker to the output pin terminals and insert the input plug into
a socket outlet of correct voltage and frequency, namely 105-125 volts, 50-60 cycles
A.C. supply. Turn "ON" the operating switch. After about 30 seconds the Radiotron
UY -227 will glow dimly, indicating that the receiver is in operating condition. If no
signals are heard when tuning to a station known to be broadcasting examine the
3 GANG CONDENSER
^OOUTPUT
5 IA O Dia
UX 226 UX226 UX-226 UX226 UX-171-A

Qd ó oFTp e e
E d oó dó
dó O O 4
0 IMFO WO
LINE
VOLTAGE
á
4. Q
UV -227 ADJUSTMENT

0
0
SWITCH'.

S 0
G 12

CI a
UX-260 oa NOV

G
6D-
UP Es SMFD 5 MFD.1 PILO LAMP
T-3 MAZDA

-IHI- 6V 015 ANA

5.0 V

O PDO TING
SWITCH
2 25 V

ISV ........P.IM
;, SHIELD
GROUND6*

Reif,
'.TERMINAL STRIP

Figure 3-Schematic diagram of receiver and socket power unit.

Radiotrons. Possibly one Radiotron has been damaged in transit. Interchanging with
one or more known to be in operating condition will isolate the damaged one.
If there is an excessive hum present during operation :

(a) Reverse the A.C. input plug at the socket outlet.

(b) Interchange the Radiotrons UX-226 in the R.F. stages with the one in the
first A.F. stage, and use the combination that gives least hum. Then interchange
the three in the R.F. stages for the best results while tuned to a broadcast
station.
(5) LINE SWITCH
A two-way switch is provided in the S.P.U. for adjustment to line voltages. A
shield over the terminal strip holds this switch in the 120 -volt position. Unless it is
definitely known that the line is always below 115 volts the switch should be left in
its original position. It is a good plan to leave this switch at the 120 -volt position on
all lines unless unsatisfactory operation is experienced. If the switch is set at the 110 -
volt position on supply lines exceeding 115 volts the Radiotrons in the receiver will be
damaged.
7
(6) SUB-CHASSIS WIRING
The sub -chassis wiring of Radiola 18 consists of a combination of bus -bar and
flexible braid covered wire utilizing a color scheme of connections. It is placed in a
very definite position in the sub -chassis assembly. When testing and making replace-
ments this wiring is apt to become displaced, which in some instances, may seriously
affect the operation of the Radiola. It is important that any displaced wiring be re-
turned to its original position. The sub -chassis assembly should be examined for this
condition as a preliminary to any test made to check on poor operation.

(7) HOWL
A slight tendency to howl on local stations when the volume control is adjusted to
the extreme "loud" position may be remedied by interchanging the detector tube,
Radiotron UY -227, with another one. In some cases a howl of this kind is caused by
incorrect adjustment of the compensating condenser. The correct method of adjusting
this condenser is described in Part II, Section 10.

TO ANTENNA
6 f

¡ST 3tD 2 to 1ST

2ND
DETECTOR
A.F. A.F. R. F. R.F. R.F.

RADIO FREQUENCY
TO LOUDSPEAKER. AUDIO FREQUENCY

Figure 4-Radiotron sequence in RCA Radiola 18.

(8) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE

Figure 4 illustrates the sequence of the Radiotrons in the receiver, omitting Radio-
tron UX-280 in the socket power unit. From right to left, when facing the front of the
Radiola, the Radiotron sequence is as follows :
Radiotron No. 1 is an untuned stage of radio frequency amplification. It is coupled
directly to the antenna and ground and is not tuned in any way.
Radiotron No. 2 is a stage of tuned radio frequency amplification, and is tuned by
the first of the gang condensers.
Radiotron No. 3 is the second stage of tuned radio frequency amplification. It is
tuned by the second of the gang condensers.
Radiotron No. 4 is the detector and is tuned by the third of the gang con-
densers.
Radiotrons Nos. 5 and 6 are respectively, the first and second stages of audio fre-
quency amplification. The last stage, Radiotron No. 6, employs power amplifier Radio-
tron UX-171A. An output filter protects the loudspeaker windings from excessive
D.C. current.
8
 PART II-SERVICE DATA
(1) ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES
A grating noise may be caused by a poor lead-in connection to the antenna or the
antenna touching some metallic surface, such as the edge of a tin roof, drain pipe, etc.
By disconnecting the antenna and ground leads the service man can soon determine
whether the cause of complaint is within or external to the receiver and plan his
service work accordingly.

(2) RADIOTRON SOCKETS

The sockets in Radiola 18 are the standard gang UX and UY type (See Figure 5).
Care must be exercised when inserting Radiotrons in their sockets. A socket contact
may not be in its correct position and forced insertion of a tube will bend or break it.
If care is exercised and the Radiotron inserted gently, little trouble will be experienced
with socket contacts. A bent one will be noticeable on inspection and may be corrected
by inserting a narrow instrument in the socket hole and pushing the contact into its
correct position. A badly bent or broken socket contact should be replaced.

OUTPUT CONDENSER
AND CHOKE
AND
FILTER
CONDENSERS
UX280

POWER. FILTER.
TRANSFORMER REACTOR

Figure 5-Radiotron socket contacts.

(3) RADIOTRON PRONGS

Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation or change the resistance of the
filament circuit sufficiently to cause a hum in the loudspeaker. They should therefore
be cleaned with fine sandpaper periodically to insure good contact.
The use of emery cloth or steel wool is not recommended. Before reinserting
Radiotrons in their sockets wipe the prongs and base carefully to make certain that
all particles of sand are removed.
Care should be exercised to see that the two large pins and tw-t small pins of the
Radiotrons match the socket holes. The UY -227 Radiotron has five prongs, all of the
same size, and will fit in the socket only one way. If a Radiotron will not fit into a
socket without considerable pressure look for excessive solder on one or more of the
prongs. Excessive solder on the prongs may be removed with a file or knife.
9
(4) LOOSE VOLUME CONTROL AND LOW VOLUME
A loose volume control contact arm may cause noisy or intermittent operation.
It should be bent slightly so that it makes firm contact against the resistance strip.
To do this it is necessary to remove the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part
III, Section 1. The volume control is then accessible. It can be released by removing
the two screws that hold it to the metal frame.
Low volume even on local stations may be due to one of the following causes :
(a) Defective antenna and ground system. A poor antenna and ground system
or one in a shielded locality may cause weak signals. The suggestions given in
Part I, Sections 1, 2 and 3 should be followed if trouble of this kind is experi-
enced.
(b) Compensating condenser out of adjustment. If this condenser is badly out
of adjustment it will have the effect of making the Radiola very insensitive. To
adjust correctly refer to Part II, Section 10.
(c) Defective R.F. transformers. Should the R.F. transformers become dam-
aged so that they do not properly match, weak signals may be the result.
(d) Defective A.F. transformer. An open or short in the A.F. transformers may
cause weak signals and distorted reproduction.

(5) ADJUSTMENT FOR SLACK DRUM CONTROL

The main tuning condensers are controlled by a cable and drum arrangement giv-
ing a smoothly acting vernier movement that has no back lash.
After considerable wear, or extreme changes of temperature the cable may become
slack. To take up this slack open lid of cabinet and turn the cable adjusting screw
with clamp until the cable is taut. This screw may become seated after several adjust-
ments are made thus allowing no further tightening of the cable. When this condi-
tion occurs it will be necessary to slip the cable. a half turn on the grooved drum. To
make this adjustment it is necessary to remove the chassis from the cabinet as de-
scribed in Part III, Section 1. Remove the cable adjusting screw and clamp. The cable
will then have approximately one inch slack. By removing the tapered pin holding the
front grooved drum to its shaft and replacing it on the opposite side (180 degrees) the
one -inch slack in the cable can be taken up by using the new position of the pin for
anchoring the cable. It will be noted that the tapered pin in the new position cannot
be inserted as far as originally. However, it can be inserted far enough to lock the
grooved drum to the control shaft and clear the metal housing. If the cable again is
stretched to the maximum adjustment of the cable adjusting screw the tapered pin can
be returned to its original position and an additional half turn slipped on the drum
which will provide for taking up all slack. Sufficient grooves are provided on the
drum for this purpose.

(6) HUM
Part I, Section 4, describes the method to eliminate ordinary hum in Radiola 18
when making an installation. If a pronounced hum develops during operation check
the following:
(a) Low emission Radiotron UX-280. A low emission rectifying tube will cause
excessive Thum and unsatisfactory operation.
(b) Shorted filament condenser. There are two /mfd. condensers hooked in
series across the UX-226 filaments with the center tap grounded. A short of
either of these condensers will cause loud hum and imperfect operation of the Radiola.
(c) Defective center tapped resistance. A short or open in any of the center
tapped resistances connected across the various filament supplies will cause a
loud hum.
10
 (d) Any open of the several grounding connections in the Radiola or defective
voltage supply resistances may cause a certain amount of hum. These defects
will have a pronounced effect on the general operation of the Radiola which will
be more noticeable than the additional hum. Check by means of the continuity
test given in Part II, Section 16.
A mechanical hum caused by vibration of loose laminations in the power trans-
former may be corrected by removing the power transformer from the S.P.U. as de-
scribed in Part III, Section 11, and heating it in a slow oven. The open end should be
kept up and the compound heated sufficiently to allow it to adhere to the laminations
of the transformer. After heating, the transformer should be allowed to cool -for at
least 24 hours and then returned to the S.P.U.

Figure 6-Adjusting the compensating condenser.

(7) BROKEN CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE

A broken condenser drive cable can be replaced in the manner described in Part
III, Section4. However, if a new cable is not immediately available a temporary re-
pair can be made in the following manner, provided the break in the cable is not in
that section that passes over the small grooved drums.
Splice and solder the two ends together. Splicing consists of interweaving the
strands, as with rope, and not just twisting the cable ends together as in an electrical
wiring splice. Splicing gives greater strength and forms a smaller body on the cable.
When soldering use plenty of flux and a small amount of solder. Heat sufficiently so
the solder adheres to all the strands of the cable. Placing the splice in an alcohol or
bunsen flame affords sufficient heat and allows excess solder to drip away. This is but
a temporary repair to be used only until a new cable can be procured.

(8) LOUDSPEAKER POLARITY

The use of an output filter in Radiola 18 makes unnecessary any adjustment for
polarity of the output current. Any type of loudspeaker (either horn or cone) can be
connected in the manner that gives the most pleasing reproduction.
11
(9) AUDIO HOWL
Audio howl may be caused by :-
(1) incorrect adjustment of compensating condenser. The correct procedure for
adjusting the compensating condenser is given in Part II, Section 10.
(2) Open A.F. condenser connections. An open connection to either of the A.F.
condensers may cause a howl.
(3) Open by-pass condensers. An open by-pass condenser connection may cause
a howl.
(4) Vibrating elements in receiver Radiotrons. A gradually developed howl is
probably due to the loudspeaker causing the receiver Radiotron elements to
vibrate. To overcome this condition, interchange the Radiotrons in the receiver
or change the relative angle between the loudspeaker and the Radiola. In ex-
treme cases it will be necessary to increase the distance between the Radiola and
the loudspeaker.
(5) Poor ground. Install ground system as indicated in Part I, Section 3.
(6) An open connection in any of the several ground leads in the Radiola.
(7) A defect in the R.F. coil system. A short in any of the concentrated primary
coils or the condenser shunted around them may cause a howl.
(8) Poorly soldered or corroded joints. Any high resistance joint throughout
the Radiola may cause howl.
(9) Defective resistance in Socket Power Unit. A short in any section of the
plate and grid resistance unit may cause howl.

(10) COMPENSATING CONDENSER OUT OF ADJUSTMENT

The compensating condenser should not be touched until it is definitely ascertained
that no other defect exists. If the condenser needs adjustment observe the following
procedure Obtain a small non-metallic screw-driver (either bakelite or wood will do)
:

having a shaft less than %" in diameter.

(a) Put Radiola in operation in usual manner and tune in some station preferably
at the lower wavelengths.
(b) To reach the adjusting screw of the compensating condenser, break the
brown paper seal and insert the screw -driver through the hole at the bottom of
the tuning condenser assembly. (See Figure 6.)
(c) With the volume control at maximum intensity, turn this screw to the right
until the Radiola goes into oscillation. Then turn the screw to the left until all
oscillation and any howl is eliminated, with the volume control at maximum. In
some cases it will be necessary to interchange the Radiotrons UX-226 in the R.F.
stages before the proper adjustment is found. This is the correct adjustment to
obtain maximum sensitivity and tone quality in the operation of Radiola 18.
(d) The brown paper seal should be replaced by another seal dated and initialed
to prevent tampering with the adjustment.
12
(11) DISTORTED REPRODUCTION
Under normal conditions Radiola 18 will deliver a strong signal of good quality to
the loudspeaker. The high sensitivity of Radiola 18 makes it undesirable to operate the
set at full volume when receiving from a nearby broadcasting station. The volume con-
trol should be adjusted to secure maximum quality, for the volume will be found ample
for all requirements. If the loudspeaker production is poor test the loudspeaker output
from the receiver. A pair of phones or loudspeaker of known quality may be used for
this purpose. Poor quality or distortion may be due to any of the following causes:
(1) Defective Radiotrons. Though the Radiola may be in operating condition a
defective Radiotron in any stage will cause distortion. This is especially true of
the detector, 1st and 2nd audio stages and the rectifier tube.
(2) High or low plate and grid voltages from the Socket Power Unit. The
cause may be a defective Radiotron UX-280 or resistance unit. Replace the
Radiotron UX-280 with one of known quality and check the various resistances
for a possible short or open.

FRONT VIEW OF ESCUTCHEON REAR VIEW WITH CANOPY

PLATE WITH CANOPY REMOVED HOOKED IN PLACE

Figure 7-Method of fitting canopy into escutcheon plate.

The cause of noisy operation and intermittent signals with periods of hum or no
reception may be traced in the following manner :

(1) Disconnect the antenna and ground leads. If the Radiola becomes quiet and
signals from local stations, though weak, are received the trouble is in the an-
tenna system, or is caused by nearby interfering electrical apparatus. In the
first case repair the antenna system and in the second case place radio frequency
chokes on any offending nearby apparatus. The location of interfering electri-
cal machinery will require patience, skill and experimenting.
(2) If disconnecting the antenna and ground does not eliminate the noise the
trouble is in the Radiola. A defective tube, one having poorly welded elements
will cause a disturbance of this kind, and this point should be checked by inter-
changing the Radiotrons in the Radiola with others of the same type. If it -is
definitely established that the Radiotrons are O. K. the Radiotron prongs and the
socket contacts should be examined for dirt or poor contact. The volume con-
trol should be examined for poor contact between the contact arm and the re-
sistor strip.
13
(12) PILOT LAMP AND CANOPY
Radiola 18 is equipped with a small pilot lamp operating from the Radiotron UX-
171A filament winding. Its purpose is to illuminate the tuning dial and act as a current
supply indicator. The latter use is quite important because the time required for Radio-
tron UY -227 to develop normal operation, which is approximately 30 seconds, can be
checked.

The lamp and canopy are packed separately and must be installed when the
Radiola is first placed in operation. The pilot lamp is a standard T-3 Mazda miniature
base, 6 volt, 0.15 ampere lamp which can be procured on the open market if replace-
ment becomes necessary. It is screwed into its base directly over the tuning dial. The
projections on the canopy fit into the holes in the escutcheon plate directly over the
light. A slight side shift locks it securely in place. (See Figure 7.)

Figure 8-Internal connections

of condensers.

(13) FILTER CONDENSER AND OUTPUT CONDENSER AND

CHOKE

The output choke and condenser and the two filtering condensers are located in
one container in the S.P.U. Figure 8 shows the internal connections. The procedure
for testing this unit is to "click test'' the choke for an open, and charge and discharge
the condensers individually by shorting their terminals with a screw -driver. A con-
denser that will not retain its charge is defective. Approximately 200 volts D.C. should
be used when making this test.

An open output condenser or an open or shorted choke will cause weak and dis-
torted reproduction. A defective filter condenser is indicated by excessively hot plates,
possibly showing color, in Radiotron UX-280.
14
 (14) VOLTAGE SUPPLY SYSTEM
It is well to understand the various voltage supply systems incorporated in Radiola
18 as they differ somewhat from the systems normally used. Generally speaking,
Radiola 18 uses what is known as the series resistance method of obtaining its vari-
ous voltages. This series arrangement makes it possible to use small filter condensers.
Figure 9 shows the connections. The grid bias voltages are obtained by using the drop
across a resistance connected in the plate return lead.
With this arrangement the correct grid or plate voltage is dependent on the Radio-
trons being in good condition. A low emission tube will cause the voltage to rise on all
tubes. It is important to note that when interchanging Radiotrons all tubes should be
in their respective sockets before turning "on" the current supply.

{FILTER REACTORS-{ OUTPUT CHOKE

UX-171-A UX-226
.5 MFD.

1.MFD.
OUTPUT

TT
Figure 9-Schematic circuit illustrating method of obtaining
grid and plate voltages.

(15) VOLTAGE READINGS

When checking a Radiola 18 for possible defects it is good practice to check the
voltage of the various sources of current. To do this a service man will need both an
A.C. and a D.C. voltmeter, the D.C. meter being 600 ohms per volt or higher in resist-
ance. The following voltages at the terminal strip of the S.P.U. are correct with all
tubes in place and a normal load on the S.P.U. The tubes used must be in good con-
dition, otherwise the D.C. voltages may be excessively high. The shield over the ter-
minal strip will have to be removed before any readings can be made. Keep the line
adjustment switch in the normal position for the particular line to which the set is
connected.
The terminal strip numbers are read from front to rear of the Radiola, No. 1 being
toward the front and No. 9 toward the rear.

TERMINALS CORRECT VOLTAGE

1to 2 1.5 A.C.
3 to 4 2.25 A.C.
5 to 6 5.0 A.C.
7 to 9 145 D.C.
8 to 9 165 D.C.

Any serious variations from these voltages, not caused by defective Radiotrons, in-
dicates a defective resistance unit, condenser or power transformer.
15
 (16) RADIOLA 18 CONTINUITY TESTS
The following tests will show complete continuity for the receiver assembly (Fig-
ure 10) and the Socket Power Unit (Figure 11). Disconnect the antenna and ground
leads; the cable connecting the S.P.U. to the receiver assembly, and the A.C. supply
cord at its outlet.
A pair of headphones with at least 4/ volts in series or a voltmeter with sufficient
voltage to give a full scale deflection when connected directly across the battery ter-
minals should be used in making these tests. The receiver sockets, numbers and lugs
used in these tests are shown in Figure 10. The S.P.U. terminals are shown in Fig-
ure 11.

RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CONTINUITY TESTS

Remove All Radiotrons and Disconnect Cable at Terminal Strip

Correct Incorrect Effect Caused by

Circuit Terminals Effect
Antenna lead to Gl Closed Open volume control or loose contact arm
G2 to Lug No. 9 Closed Open secondary of first R.F. transformer
G3 to .Lug No. 9 Closed Open secondary of second R.F. trans-
former
Stator plates of third con- Closed Open secondary of third R.F. transformer
Grid denser to Lug No. 9
G4 to Lug No. 9 Open or If closed, shorted grid condenser or grid
very weak leak
G5 to Lug No. 9 Closed Open secondary of first A.F. transformer
G6 to Lug No. 9 Closed Open secondary of second A.F. trans-
former
Pl to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of first R.F. transformer
P2 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of second R.F. transformer
or concentrated coil
P3 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of third R.F. transformer
Plate or concentrated coil
i

P4 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of first A.F. transformer or

(Weak) detector plate resistance
P5 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of second A.F. transformer
P6 to Lug No. 8 Closed Open connection
One filament contact of sock- Closed Open filament connection
ets Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5 to
Lug No. 1
Other filament contact of Closed Open filament connection
sockets Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5
to Lug No. 2
Lug No. 1 to Lug No. 9 Open Shorted by-pass condenser
Lug No. 2 to Lug No. 9' Open Shorted by-pass condenser
Filament Lug No. 3 to one filament Closed Open filament connection
contact of socket No. 4
Lug No. 4 to other filament Closed Open filament connection
contact of socket No. 4
Lug No. 5 to one filament Closed Open filament connection
contact of socket No. 6
Lug No. 6 to other filament Closed Open filament connection
contact of socket No. 6
17
 POWER TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS',__--.....
TOWER
TRANSFORMER
CONNECTIONS

CENTER TAMP FILTER REACTOR)

RESISTANCE `.
CONNECTIONS
UNITS

GRID AND PLATE

RESISTANCE UNIT
2
(eC, »IN
I - / rnCFR
5

OPERATING
SWITCH;
,TERMINAL STRIP

UR'280 CONTACTS
NAAtDDN
NA o0
NACwnN rx.4EElENN.Ir((ACEa
IIACMFE TIrGREEN+IAACER
GREE11.rtN-q[P+rRACERJ
A0.PÓNAM EP
OUTPUT CON-
DENSER. AND
ElA[IFWIINKREEN-TR ACER CHOKE AND
CA FILTER
CONDENSER.
CONNECTIONS
LACED CABLE''

LINE VOLTAGE R
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH OUTPUT PIN JACKS L---"'" INPUT PLUG ---r MPM

Figure 11-Wiring diagram of socket power unit showing

location of parts and color scheme of connections.

SOCKET POWER UNIT CONTINUITY TESTS

Remove Radiotron UX-280 and Disconnect Cable at Terminal Strip
Correct
Circuit Terminals Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
Terminal No. 9 to terminals Closed Open UX-226 grid bias resistance
Nos. 1 or 2
Terminal No. 9 to terminals Closed Open UX-171A grid bias resistance
Nos. 5 or 6
P to G of UX-280 socket Closed Open high voltage winding of power trans-
former
Across UX-280 filament con- Closed Open UX-280 filament winding
tacts
Across terminals 1 and 2 Closed Open UX-226 filament winding and center
tapped resistance
Across terminals 3 and 4 Closed Open UY -227 filament winding and center
S.P.U. tapped resistance
Across terminals 5 and 6 Closed Open UX-171A filament winding and cen-
ter tapped resistance
Terminal No. 8 to either Closed Open output choke or filter reactor
filament contact UX-280
socket
Terminal No. 7 to terminal Closed Open output choke or resistance unit
No. 8
Terminal No. 8 to terminal Open Shorted filter condensers
No. 9
One output pin jack to ter- Open Shorted output condenser
minal No. 8
Other output pin jack to ter - Closed Open center tapped resistance unit or con-
minal 5 or 6 nection
18
 PART III - MAKING REPLACEMENTS
The various assemblies and parts of Radiola 18 are easy of access and replace-
ments can be made quickly.

(1) REPLACING VOLUME CONTROL

The following procedure should he used when replacing the volume control:
(1) Remove the seven screws that hold the wooden back to the cabinet.
(2) Remove knobs on "Station Selector" and "Volume Control."
(3) Remove the shield located on the terminal strip by loosening the screws at
each end and slipping the screw heads through the larger openings.

Figure 12-Removing receiver chassis assembly from cabinet.

(4) Release the cable connecting the socket power unit to the chassis assembly
and the two leads to the pilot lamp. This is done by loosening the screws hold-
ing them to the terminal strip of the socket power unit.
(5) Remove the four screws holding chassis in place to bottom of cabinet. The
chassis may now be removed by rocking it in the cabinet and slipping it out of
the back opening. (See Figure 12.)
(6) Unsolder and tag the leads to the volume control.
(7) Remove the two screws that hold the volume control to the metal chassis.
The volume control may now be removed and the new one fastened in place. The
-

connections to the new volume control should be made as indicated on the tags
attached to the wires, or refer to Figure 10.
(8) The Radiola is reassembled in the reverse order of that already given.
19
(2) REPLACING RADIO FREQUENCY COILS
The three radio frequency transformers together with small fixed condensers across
the concentrated primary coils are mounted on one strip and must be replaced as a
unit. The following procedure is used :

(1) Remove the chassis assembly from the cabinet as described in Part III,
Section 1.
(2) Unsolder and tag all connections to the three transformers.
(3) Remove the three screws that hold the mounting strip to the metal chassis.
The entire assembly can now be removed. The new assembly is placed in the
position occupied by the old one.
(4) Replace the screws that hold the mounting strip to the metal chassis.
(5) Replace and resolder all leads to the three transformers as indicated on tags
previously attached to them. These connections are shown in Figure 10. When
making this replacement be careful not to disturb the two condensers connected
across the concentrated coils. Placing these condensers closer to the coils than
their normal position will affect the inductance of the coil with a resulting de-
crease of sensitivity.
(6) Return chassis assembly to cabinet and replace all screws and. knobs. Now
adjust the compensating condenser to the correct position as indicated in Part
II, Section 10.

(3) REPLACING RADIOTRON GANG SOCKETS

The Radiotron sockets of Radiola 18 are of the gang variety, using one detector
socket two A.F. socket strips, and one three -gang socket strip for the radio frequency
;

amplifying tubes. There is a small bakelite shield placed over the rivets of the UX-
171A socket which is used to identify the socket. This shield is supplied separately
and does not come with the socket. The sockets are riveted to the metal chassis. To
replace them, drill out the old rivets and use screws, nuts and lock washers for secur-
ing the new sockets. A step by step procedure follows:
(1) Remove chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1.
(2) Remove and tag all leads to the terminals of the sockets.
(3) Drill out the rivets holding the sockets to the metal chassis frame. In some
cases it may be necessary to loosen the R.F. transformer assembly in order to
slip the socket strips out.
(4) The socket assembly is now removed and the new one placed in the posi-
tion occupied by the old one.
(5) Fasten new socket in place by using small head machine screws, nuts and
lock washers in place of the, rivets previously removed.
(6) Replace connections as indicated on tags attached, or refer to Figure 10 for
the correct socket connections.
(7) Return chassis to cabinet.

(4) REPLACING MAIN TUNING CONDENSERS AND DRIVE

The main tuning condensers and the driving mechanism are replaced as one com-
plete unit. The step by step procedure follows :

(1) Remove chassis assembly from housing as described in Part III, Section 1.
(2) Unsolder four connections to condensers.
(3) Remove three screws, nuts and lock washers that hold the assembly to the
frame.
(4) The assembly may now be removed and the new assembly placed in the
position occupied by the old one.
(5) Replace the three screws, nuts and lock washers and resolder the leads.
(6) Replace chassis assembly in cabinet.
20
(5) REPLACING BY-PASS CONDENSER
This condenser, located on the under side of the chassis frame is held in place by
four metal tabs that are a part of the condenser case and are bent over on the upper
side of the metal chassis. A step by step procedure for making this replacement fol-
lows :

(1) Remove chassis from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1.

(2) Remove tuning condenser assembly from chassis as described in Part III,
Section 4.
(3) Unsolder the leads connected to the defective condensers.
(4) The four tabs holding the condenser to the chassis may now be bent up
with a screw -driver and the old condenser replaced by the new one. Insert the
tabs in the holes and bend them over on the upper side of the chassis assembly.
Resolder the leads to their correct terminals. The connections are shown in Fig-
ure 10.
(5) Replace the tuning condenser assembly as described in Part III, Section 4.
(6) Return chassis assembly to cabinet in reverse order of that used to remove it.

(6) REPLACING AUDIO TRANSFORMERS

The audio transformers of Radiola 18 are built together in one unit. In making a
replacement the following procedure should be used:
(1) Remove receiver chassis from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1.
(2) Unsolder and tag all leads to the audio transformers.
(3) Use a screw -driver to turn up the tabs that hold the transformer assembly to
the chassis frame and remove it.
(4) Place the new transformer in the position occupied by the old one, bend
over the tabs and resolder all connections. The correct connections are shown
in Figure 10.
(5) Replace chassis in cabinet in the reverse order of that used to remove it.

(7) REPLACING CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE

The condenser drive cable of Radiola 18 is very rugged and should give good ser-
ice. If replacement becomes necessary proceed as follows:
(1) Remove the receiver assembly from the cabinet as described in Part III,
Section 1. Place chassis on table with controls to the front.
(2) Release the cable adjusting screw and clamp, and remove old cable from
large drum and grooved drums completely.
(3) Starting from the rear grooved drum place eye of cable over pin, which
should be in a horizontal position facing the socket power unit, and wind on
three complete turns, and then bring cable up to large drum.
(4) Now bring cable over the large drum. Turn drum so that cable adjusting
screw is on top. Pass cable over groove until point is reached where there is
a slot in the drum for passing cable to the track on other side of drum.
(5) Follow on around other track in same direction until point is reached where
cable is directly above front grooved drum.
(6) Starting on the third groove back from the front of the grooved drum wind
on two and a half turns and slip eye over pin. The cable is now in the correct
position, although probably slack.
21
 (7) The cable adjusting screw and clamp that were previously removed to allow
the cable to pass along the groove are replaced. By slipping the clamp over the
cable and gradually turning up on the cable adjusting screw, the cable may be
tightened until there is no lost motion in any of the controls. Care should be
taken not to take up too much as the cable may be stretched or possibly broken.
(8) Return receiver assembly to cabinet in the reverse order used to remove it.

(8) REPLACING DIAL SCALES

After considerable use a dial scale may become dirty or illegible and a new scale
desired. A step by step procedure for making replacement follows:
(1) Open lid of cabinet of Radiola.
(2) Turn dial so that the two screws that hold the dial in place are on top.
(3) Remove screws, washer and nuts that hold dial in place.
(4) Replace old dial with new one and replace screws, but do not tighten.
(5) Examine new dial from front of Radiola to see that numbers on dial are in
the correct position.
(6) Tighten screws holding dial in place and close lid of cabinet.

(9) REPLACING POWER CABLE

Attached to the receiver is a heavy cable used to conduct all current supplies from
the S.P.U. Replacement is made as follows:
(1) Remove receiver assembly from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1.
(2) Turn assembly so that bottom side is exposed and unsolder all connections
to the cable. Attach tags to points of connection.
(3) Replace old cable with the new one. Solder the connections of the new
cable as indicated on the attached tags, or as shown in Figure 10.
(4) Return receiver assembly to cabinet in reverse order of that used to remove
it.

(10) REPLACING FILTER CONDENSER, OUTPUT CHOKE AND

CONDENSER ASSEMBLY
The filter condensers, together with the output choke and condenser, are all con-
tained in one metal container and must be replaced as a unit. The replacement pro-
cedure follows:
(1) Remove the seven screws holding the wooden back to the cabinet.
(2) Remove collar on operating switch at front of Radiola.
(3) Release the cable connecting the socket power unit to the receiver assembly
and the two leads to the pilot lamp. This is done by first removing the metal
shield placed over the terminal strip and then loosening the nine screws on the
terminal strip.
(4) Remove four screws at the bottom of the cabinet holding .S.P.U. in plate.
The Socket Power unit may now be removed by slipping it out of the back
opening. This will allow an examination of parts and provide access to the
units it is desired to replace.
(5) Unsolder and tag the connections to the filter condenser unit.
(6) Turn up the tabs that hold this unit to the S.P.U. base with a screw -driver.
The entire assembly may now he removed and the new one placed in the position
occupied by the old one.
22
 (7) Clamp the assembly in place by turning the tabs over on the under side of
the base. Solder the connections as indicated on tags attached, or as shown in
Figure 11.
(8) Return the S.P.U. to the cabinet and reassemble in the reverse order of that
used to remove it.

(11) REPLACING EITHER POWER TRANSFORMER OR FILTER

REACTOR
The power transiormer and the filter reactor are each encased in a metal container.
Either unit may be replaced in the following manner:
(1) Remove S.P.U. from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 10.
(2) Unsolder the leads of the unit being replaced and tag connection points.
(3) Bend up. the tabs holding unit to the base. It may be necessary to remove
the resistance unit in order to bend all the tabs. The particular assembly being
replaced may now be removed and the new assembly placed in the position occu-
pied by the old one.
(4) The tabs on the new assembly should be bent so as to properly fasten the
unit to the S.P.U. base.
(5) Connect all leads from the assembly to the points of connection as indicated
by tags previously attached. These connections are shown in Figure 11, which
should be followed exactly when any S.P.U. parts are replaced.
(6) Return to cabinet in the reverse order, and connect to receiver assembly.

(12) REPLACING TERMINAL STRIP

Should a terminal strip on the socket power unit require replacement use the fol-
lowing procedure:
(1) Remove S.P.U. from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 10.
(2) Unsolder and tag all leads to terminal strip.
(3) Release two screws holding strip to S.P.U. base.
(4) The strip may now be removed and replaced by a new one.
(5) Fasten new strip in position occupied by old strip by means of two machine
screws, lock washers and nuts previously removed.
(6) Solder all leads to terminal strip as indicated on tags attached. The color
scheme and correct connections are shown in Figure 11.
(7) Return S.P.U. to cabinet in the reverse order and connect to receiver
assembly.

(13) REPLACING MISCELLANEOUS PARTS IN S.P.U.

The center tapped resistors, plate and grid supply resistors, line switch and
UX-280 socket in Radiola 18 may become defective and require replacement. They are
all attached to the base by means of machine screws and nuts, and replacement is very
simple. The following general outline will apply to all these units:
(1) Remove S.P.U. from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 10.
(2) Unsolder leads from defective unit and tag each lead.
(3) Remove defective unit from base and replace with new unit.
(4) Solder leads to new unit as indicated on tags or see Figure 11.
(5) Return S.P.U. to cabinet in reverse order of that used to remove it.
23
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak sig-
nals, poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective
tubes, or a poor antenna system. If imperfect operation is not due to these causes the "Service
Data Chart" should be consulted for further detailed causes. Reference to Part No. and Section
No. in the "Service Notes" is also noted for further details.

Indication I Cause Remedy

Defective operating switch Repair or replace switch
Loose volume control arm Tighten volume control arm, P. II, S. 4
Defective power cable Replace power cable, P. III, S. 9
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 2
No Signals Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 6
Defective By-pass condenser Replace By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 5
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary, P. II, S. 16

Compensating condenser out of ad- Adjust compensating condenser correctly, P. II,

justment S. 10
Defective power cable Repair or replace cable, P. III, S. 9
Defective line switch Clean contacts or replace line switch
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 2
Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 6
Dirty prongs of Radiotrons Clean prongs with fine sandpaper, P. II, S. 3
Weak Signals Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 5
Defective main tuning condensers Replace defective tuning condensers, P. III, S. 4
Low voltages from socket power unit Check socket power unit voltages with high re-
sistance D.C. voltmeter and A.C. voltmeter,
P. II, S. 15
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary, P. II, S. 16

Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 6

Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 5
Poor Quality Dirty contact arm of volume control Clean contact arm of volume control, P. II, S. 4
Dirty prongs on Radiotrons Clean prongs with fine sandpaper, P. II, S. 3

Compensating condenser out of ad- Adjust compensating condenser correctly

justment
Radiotron UY-227 howl Interchange Radiotron UY -227 with another.
Howling P. I, S. 7
Defect in audio system Check and repair any defect, P. II, S. 16
Open grid circuit in any stage Check circuit and repair defect

Defective center tapped resistance Replace defective resistance unit, P. III, S. 13

unit
Excessive Hum Socket plug position Reverse socket plug, P. I, S. 4
Line voltage low Set line switch for low line voltage, P. I, S. 5

Operating switch not "On" Turn operating switch "On"

Defective operating switch Replace operating switch
Radiotrons fail Defective input A.C. cord Repair or replace A.C. input cord
to light Defective power transformer Replace power transformer, P. III, S. 11
No A.C. line voltage Turn A.C. line voltage "On"

Play in Station Loose knob Tighten or replace knob

Selector Slack cable Take up on cable adjusting screw, P. II, S. 5
 RCA
Radiolas 18 D.C.
and 51 D.C.
SERVICE NOTES

First Edition 2?/M

[ Copyright, February,1929

Radio Corporation of America

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
Bld. No. 19-168 39th St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
Brooklyn, N. Y. Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
Dallas, Texas Atlanta, Ga.
Santa Fe Bldg. Monroe Bonded Warehouse
Unit No. 2 Spring and Peters Sts.
 PREFACE
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized Dealer
renders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling,
to the end that RCA Loudspeaker and Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service organizations
having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the design and operation of
RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and RCA
Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected
Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may be .

undertaken by the RCA Dealer.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business the RCA
Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing RCA Loudspeakers and
Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers and Distribu-
tors' service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful
reading of these Service Notes will establish their value, and it is suggested they be pre-
served for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division maintains a
corps.of engineers who are qualified to ..render valuable help in solving service problems.
These engineers call upon the trade at frequent intervals to advise and assist RCA Dis-
tributors in the performance of service work.

Property of the Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its
Authorized Distributors and Dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1929-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS Page
Preface 2

Introduction 5
Service Data Chart 16

PART I -GENERAL SERVICE DATA

Circuit Characteristics 5
Antenna 7

Radiotrons 7

Line Switch. 8
"C" Battery 8
Adjustment of R.F. Compensating Condenser 8
Audio Growl or Howl 9
Uncontrolled Oscillation. 9

PART II -ELECTRICAL TESTS

Voltage Readings 10
Receiver Continuity Tests. 10
S. P. U. Continuity Tests 14

ILLUSTRATIONS
Rear Interior View of Radiola 51 D.0 4
Top View of Radiola 51 D.C. Receiver Assembly 6
Schematic Diagram of Radiola 18 D.0 7

D.C.14
Schematic Diagram of Radiola 51 D.0 9

D.C.15
Receiver Wiring Diagram of Radiola 18 D.0 11
Receiver Wiring Diagram of Radiola 51 D.C. 12
S. P. U. Wiring Diagram of Radiola 18
S. P. U. Wiring Diagram of Radiola 51
RECFIVER ASSEMBLY BAFFLE BOARD

SOCKET POWER REPRODUCER

UNIT UNIT

Figure1-Rear interior view of Radiola 31 D.C.

showing arrangement of the various units.
 RADIOLAS 18 D.C. and 51 D.C.
107.5-127.5 Volts Direct Current

SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
RCA Radiola 18 and 51 are manufactured in models designed for direct current lighting
circuit operation. While these models are similar to the A.C. models in appearance and
performance, electrically they are considerably different. For this reason a special Service
Note on these models is issued for the guidance of those called upon to locate and remedy
any trouble that may develop.
RCA Radiola 51 D.C. is a cabinet model combination of the RCA Radiola 18 D.C. and
Loudspeaker 100A. See rear interior view Figure 2 and top view of receiver Figure 3.
Service work in connection with the loudspeaker is covered in the regular RCA Loudspeaker
100A Service Notes. Due to the location of the S.P.U., there is a slight mechanical difference
in the location of wiring and arrangement of the terminal strip, as compared with Radiola
18 D.C. These various changes are shown in the circuit diagrams and also in the continuity
tests. In other respects, both Radiolas are identical.
These notes are divided into two parts, namely: Part I-General Service Data; Part II
-Radiola 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. Electrical Tests, and a Service Data Chart, applicable to both
Radiolas. The general instructions given in the Radiola 18 A.C. Service Notes may be
used when replacement is desired as the general arrangement of parts is the same.

PART 1 --GENERAL SERVICE DATA

(1) CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are incorporated in the design of Radiolas 18 D.C. and
51 D.C.:
(a) Each is a six -tube tuned radio frequency receiver, utilizing five Radiotrons UX-112A
and one Radiotron UX-171A.
(b) A single control, three -gang condenser is employed to tune two of the radio fre-
quency amplifiers and the detector.
(c) The volume control regulates the input grid voltage to the first R.F. amplifier
stage. This is a simple and effective method for controlling volume in this type of
receiver.
(d) A series filament connection is used fQr all tubes. This is a simple and practical
method for a direct current receiver as the input wattage is at a minimum. The
current consumption of these Radiolas is no greater than the same type Radiolas
designed for alternating current.
(e) The D.C. house circuit in addition to supplying filament current for the Radiola
supplies all plate and grid voltages except the grid voltage used on the Radiotron
UX-171A. This is supplied by an external "C" battery of 18 volts which must be
supplied at the time of installation.
(f) Counting from right to left facing the front of the Radiola, the Radiotron sequence
is as follows:
(1) Radiotrons Nos. 1, 2 and 3 are successively the first, second and third stages
of radio frequency amplification.
(2) Radiotron No. 4 is the tuned detector.
(3) Radiotrons Nos. 5 and 6 are the first and second audio stages respectively.
Figure 4 shows the schematic circuit of Radiola 18 D.C. and Figure 5 shows the sche-
matic circuit of Radiola 51 D.C.
5
6
 (2) ANTENNA (Outdoor Type)
Due to the high sensitivity of Radiolas 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. the antenna length need
only be approximately 50 feet long. It should be erected as high as possible and be removed
from all obstructions. The lead-in should be a continuation of the antenna itself, thus
avoiding all splices which might introduce additional resistance and in time corrode suffi-
ciently to seriously affect reception. If it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the
antenna the joint must be carefully soldered to insure a good electrical contact. Clean off
all excess flux and tape the connection to protect it from the oxidation effects of the
atmosphere.
High-grade glass or porcelain insulator supports are required and at no point should
the antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any part of the building. Use a porcelain
tube insulator where the lead-in wire enters the house.
3 MEGS.
..0012 MFD. GANG CONDENSERS` DROWN
r000f6
-C.MFD. ,.00016MED. 7.00016
.C, OUTPUT 107.5 . 127 5
F INPUT R F 00016 MF ISTA.F 2".D A.F VOLTS D.0
JACKS
_JI
.

LIE -112A UX-112-A F US -112-A 7UX-112-A US -112-A 00-171-5

N

U }

.PLATE RESISTOR
0012
MFD FILTER
°G" REACTOR
MEGS.
BROWN
00000
OPERATING
SWITCH

R.F.COMCENSRTING
CONDENSER 2 MFD.
S
MFD.

MFD.

SMF01 1MFD. 20,00011.

. YELLOW

'r
r C" BATTERY
-

¡
`-SOME MODELS NAVE THESE
CONDENSE SIN THE P051T10N
INDICATED BY DOTTED BOA 556 t1
LINES',

FILTER
GROUND FILAMENT REACTOR
/ILOT LIGHT RESISTOR
TO
FRAME

GROUND TO FRIME INE VOLTAGE:

GROUND TO FRAME TERMINAL STRIP-- ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Figure 4-Schematic circuit diagram of Radiola 18 D.C.

The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction or power
line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antennas. An outdoor antenna
should be protected by means of an approved lightning arrester, in accordance with the
requirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.
(3) ANTENNA (Indoor Type)
Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results may
generally be obtained by using an indoor antenna of about 20 to 40 feet of insulated wire
strung around the picture moulding or placed under a rug. In buildings where metal lathing
is employed satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of antenna. Under
such conditions various arrangements of. the indoor antenna should be tried to secure satis-
factory results. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly installed outdoor antenna.
(4) RADIOTRONS
Five Radiotrons UX-112A and one Radiotron UX-171A are used. These should be
placed in their correct sockets as indicated by the lettering at each socket before the current
is turned "on." The current should never he turned "on" unless all Radiotrons are in place.
7
 After placing the Radiola in operation it is well to interchange the Radiotrons- in the
R.F. stages for best performance. The most critical of these stages is the second (Radiotron
No. 2, counting from right to left facing the front of the Radiola) and the Radiotron selected
for this socket should be one giving the loudest signal on a weak station and it should not
go into oscillation. If no tube is found satisfactory for this socket or the Radiola is insen-
sitive, a readjustment of the R.F. compensating condenser may be necessary. The correct
method for making this adjustment is described in Part I, Section 7.

(5) LINE SWITCH

A four -position switch is provided on the S.P.U. for adjusting the Radiola to various
line voltages over a range of 107.5 to 127.5. The line voltage should be measured by an
accurate D. C. voltmeter and the switch placed at the correct position for this voltage.
The different positions of the switch are as follows:
POSITION FOR LINE VOLTAGES OF
1 107.5 to 112.5
2 112.5 to 117.5
3 117.5 to 122.5
4 122.5 to 127.5
The line switch is accessible by removing the terminal strip cover. The operating
switch should always be turned "off" when the terminal cover is removed.

(6) "C" BATTERY

An external "C" battery is used to bias the Radiotron UX-171A power amplifier in
these Radiolas. The use of this battery allows the highest possible plate voltage on the
tube which gives a maximum undistorted output. The black lead is connected to the
negative side of the battery either minus or minus 22% terminal on the battery. The
green lead is connected to the positive side of the battery either -I- 18 or -4%. The
result is that an 18 -volt bias is applied to the grid of the Radiotron UX-171A. This bat-
tery should be replaced about once a year.

(7) ADJUSTMENT OF R. F. COMPENSATING CONDENSER

The R.F. compensating condenser in Radiolas 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. is provided to allow
adjustment of the receiver to compensate for variations of tube characteristics and thereby
allow the receiver to function in its most sensitive condition. Before readjusting this
condenser, the Radiotrons should be interchanged and satisfactory operation secured by
this means if possible. The interchanging of tubes should be made with the idea of getting
a tube in socket No. 2 that will not go into oscillation and gives the loudest signal on a weak
station. If satisfactory sensitivity cannot be secured by this means an adjustment of the
compensating condenser may be made as follows:
(a) In Radiola 18 D.C. remove the rear cover from the cabinet. In Radiola 51 D.C.
open the rear door.
(b) Put receiver in operation in usual manner and tune in a station preferably at the
middle or upper wave lengths.
(c) Locate the position of the compensating condenser adjusting screw at the rear of
the receiver assembly. (See Figure 2.)
(d) With the volume control at the position of maximum intensity, turn the screw
to the right until the set goes into oscillation. Then turn the screw to the left until
all oscillation and howl is eliminated with the volume control at maximum. In some
cases interchanging the tubes in the R. F. stages will facilitate this adjustment.
(e) Tune in stations with maximum volume and note if the receiver goes into oscillation
at any wavelength. If it does, turn the screw still further to the left.
(f) When the receiver does not oscillate at any wavelength the correct adjustment
has been found for best sensitivity and tone quality.
8
 (8) AUDIO GROWL OR HOWL
Either a low or high frequency howl originating in the receiver assembly may be
caused by :

(a) Open by-pass condensers. An open by-pass condenser may cause an audio howl.
(b) Vibrating elements in the receiver Radiotrons. A gradually developed howl is
probably due to the loudspeaker causing the receiver Radiotron elements to vibrate.
To overcome this condition interchange the Radiotrons in the receiver or in the case of
Radiola 18 D.C. change the relative angle between the set and speaker. In Radiola
51 D.C. examine the mounting of the loudspeaker and see that the speaker is entirely
suspended from the baffle board by means of its felt ring.
(c) Defective resistance in S. P. U. A short or open in any section of the plate resistor
may cause inoperation or howl.
3 MEGS.
,.0012 MFD. GANG CONDENSERSM BROW N
'G'

t
0 q.-...----

.DDOC NEO. MFR .00016 FO -I 107.5 -127.5

INPUT DET. .00016 MFD. I?T A F 2"-P A.F
r00006 R F VOLTS D.C.
UX-I12-A uX-112A g `. Uztu^ C'
¡uX-112.A UX-112-A us -171-A
o o
o\
p REPRODUCER

a
4 o 0 UNIT

BROWN
o0 SMFD 0012
A} F D.
.PLATE RESISTOR

FILTER

FD T MEGS
REACTOR

BROWN
IF - `06600
OPERATING
SWITCH

R.F. COMPENSATING
CONDENSER fo 2 MFD
.5 S MFD
MFD.

5 MFD

SLIFD.t t.51.1FD. 20,00011

TELLOW

'SOME MODELS HAVE THESE

LINES-.
IN THESDTION
INDICATED SDY DOT BOIL 556n
L,
d NATO q 0
ItS

r
. AMMe.r.WW 4
______
BOn 556n
M1--
-----t 0000.0 S

FILTER
GROUND FILAMENT REACTOR t5
PILOT LIGHT RESISTOR 110
TO LO+
FRAME

-GROUND TO FRAME IRE VOLTAGE,'

GROUND TO FRAME TERMINAL STRIP AD USTMENT SWITCH

Figure 5-Schematic circuit diagram of Radiola 51 D.C.

(d) In some receivers, especially those connected to lines having the positive side
grounded, an audio howl may be experienced even though everything is O.K. The
remedy in this case is to shift the two condensers to the position indicated in Figure 4
so that a % mfd. condenser will be shunted across the 20,000 ohm resistor in the
detector plate supply. Some receivers have this connection already made and it is
very unlikely this audio howl trouble will be experienced.
(9) UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATION
Uncontrolled oscillations in Radiolas 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. may be caused by:
(a) Incorrect adjustment of the R.F. compensating condenser. Adjust compensating
condenser as described in Part II, Section 7.
(b) An open of the several grounding leads in the receiver. Check all ground con-
nections.
(c) Defective R.F. coil system. A short in the condensers connected across the con-
centrated primary coils may cause the receiver to go into oscillation.
(d) In some cases, even though everything is O.K., oscillation will occur. Should
this condition exist one of the following remedies will prove effective.
9
 (1) Bend the first R.F. coil in the direction of its free end closer to the end of the
chassis. (Away from the other R.F. coils).
(2) Remove the ground lead which comes from the pigtail of the gang variable
condenser from its normal position at the terminal of one of the R.F. coils to a
point on the uninsulated ground bus bar approximately half way between the
second and third R.F. coils.
(3) Addition of a .5 mfd. condenser from the positive terminal of the bias battery
to an external ground connection such as a water pipe or steam radiator. This
will also help reduce undesirable back ground noises that are, present in some
'locations. This is most effective on installations that have the positive side of
the 110.volt D.C. line grounded.

PART II ELECTRICAL TESTS

(1) VOLTAGE READINGS
When checking Radiola 18 D.C. or 51 D.C. for possible defects it is good practice to
check the voltage of the various sources of current. To do this a service man should have a
good D.C. voltmeter, preferably of 600 ohms per volt or higher in resistance. The following
voltages at the S.P.U. terminal strip are correct with the voltage adjustment switch set at
the correct position for the particular line to which the Radiola is connected and all tubes
in operating condition and in their correct positions. The terminal numbers are indicated
in Figures 8 and 9.
TERMINALS VOLTAGE
1 to 3 5 volts
3 to 5 30 volts
4 to 5 18 volts
5 to 7 75 volts
5 to 9 100 volts
7 to 9 25 volts

If it is desired to check the voltages at the individual sockets the following readings
are correct. The readings are taken with a Weston Model 537 Type 2 test set or others
giving similar readings.

Filament to Filament to Plate Current Filament

Tube No. Grid Volts Plate Volts Milliamperes Voltage

1 5 45 4.5 4.7
2 4 50 5.0 4.8
3 4 55 5.5 5.0
4 4 21 1.0 5.1
5 10 90 3.5 5.2
6 22.5 90 .10.0 5.3

(2) CONTINUITY TESTS

The following tabulated continuity tests cover the receiver assembly and S.P.U. of
both Radiolas 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. Before making tests disconnect the Antenna lead, the
D.C. supply cord at the socket outlet, remove the terminal strip shield and all connections
to the terminal strip: The terminal and lug numbers, socket contacts and socket numbers
referred to are shown in the continuity diagrams, Figure 6, 7, 8, and 9.
10
M c In tD Iti °0 n
o r 3 ó

-O

NMON9

le'

6ciz My`.
N '

Ñÿ SNB

-_ è,
=z. Oa p
m i i'- uu
I

MO1l3A'
A)tl19
LLQu --sn9
i Vl aC m ' N33a9
i
=W
OICZ
óó
=6
NMO`JL9

- sn9J
mZ .....2.s.,
--_-.. p=
s'
'

S B rú
a3a-
)tll9
N^,ia7-
301A,se 3n19-
NMOa9

=
s
á i '
o,
u,
p

oe
u
Jlr

0
éè 4
._
=i
>Z
LLo
y

a
u
A)tl18

AOtl19
',mete
e
nIG
°88

NMOtl9
-Sn9
509

N
W
Z-

ti
N33a9

NOY19

11
6

sne
sn9
-M0113A
NMOY9

sne
sne

-ame-
N33ä9-'-'-
M0ll3A
nl9-
Oaä

'`, ..f....

W
im
or
o2
G

rW D
RADIOLA 18 D.C. and 51 D.C. RECEIVER ASSEMBLY
CONTINUITY TESTS

Circuit Terminals Correct Incorrect Effect Caused by

Effect

Antenna to G1 Open Shorted antenna condenser

-Fl to frame Open Shorted grounding condenser or wiring
Stator condenser No. 1 to Closed Shorted secondary 1st R.F. transformer
frame
G2 to +F2 Closed Open grid bias resistance or if loud,
(Very Weak) shorted grid resistance
Stator condenser No. 2 Closed Open secondary of 2d R.F. transformer
to frame
Grid G3 to -F3 Closed Open grid resistance or if loud, shorted
(Very Weak) grid bias resistance
Stator condenser No. 3 Closed Open secondary of 3d R.F. transformer
to frame
G4 to one F4 Closed Open grid leak or if loud, shorted grid
(Very Weak) leak
G5 to Lug No. 5 Closed Open secondary of 1st A.F. transformer
G6 to Lug No. 4 Closed Open secondary of 2d A.F. transformer

Pl to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of 1st R.F. transformer

P2 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary or concentrated coil of 2d
R.F. transformer
P3 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary or concentrated coil of 3d
Plate R.F. transformer
P4 to Lug No. 7 Closed Open primary of 1st A.F. transformer or
detector plate resistor
P5 to Lug No. 9 Closed Open primary of second A.F. transformer
P6 to Lug No. 9 Closed Open primary of output transformer

Lug No. 2 to frame Closed Open connection

Lug No. 3 to +F1 Closed Open connection
Lug No. 6 to Lug No. 8 Closed Open secondary of output transformer
(R 18 D.C. only)
Disconnect cable on
Loudspeaker and test
across leads Closed Open Secondary of output transformer
(R 51 D.C. only)
-F1 to P1 Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
+F4 to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
Misc. Some ` -F2 to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
Models -F2 to Lug
({ Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
No. 7
Some S -F3 to P4 Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
Models 1 P4 to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
+F4 to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser

13
TERMINAL STRIP PLATE RESISTOR ,TO FILTER

GROUND i'iIIII111lII"IInIIINIIMNNNIMMIINIIHINNNINlIIINNtlMqNIIUIIIIilluuNIINMIe
TO FRAME ..,. ,., .......,.,....,..,......a

;1I0INuuhIuIIIIIIIIIIIIIIVII0hq"0IIIIIIgtlIIIIIweN1VIIIIIIIIIIIIIINlIIIIIlfiIII^I)

LINE ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR

TO ''C" GROUND
BATTERY TO FRAME

!IL
ACY TO FILAMENT
C. ---BLUE
RED RESISTORS CONDENSER
BLACK BANK
S(R Ck YEL(Ok,
pED (RCS OPERATING
S(RCk. SWITCH
)2 MFD.
SLACK
((OW
-- 4 MAC?.

I MFD..
é.(
YELLOW
LACK.
RED

I- A ¡ ' D.0 INPUT

PLUG
41o..

LINE VOLTAGE LOUDSPEAKER

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH PIN JACKS
Enqeq

Figure 8-11'iring diagram of Radiola 18 D.C. socket power unit.

RADIOLA 18 D.C.-S. P. U. CONTINUITY TESTS

Remove terminal cover and lugs from all terminals. See Figure 8 for reference num-
bers. Close switch.

Correct
Terminals Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

Across input supply plug Closed Open filter reactor or plate voltage divid-
(switch closed) ing resistor or line adjustment resistor
Terminal No. 3 to one input plug Closed Open line adjusting resistor, filament filter
connection reactor, or filament voltage resistance
Terminal No. 6 to one Loud- Closed Open connection
speaker jack
Terminal No. 8 to other Loud- Closed Open connection
speaker jack

14
 PLATE RESISTOR-, (SOME MODELS ,TO FILTER REACTORS
TERMINAL STRIP YELLOW AND BLACK).1
F

ice\
GROUND ;eIIIdlNuOpIIINIIIIINIIIIIhIIIIIINIINIl11NNIlINIIIIINNIHIIIM11141111NNlhlilE' ®
TO FRAME ,, &u,,.... u.,,,,,:

ío s.i5I GREEN

; 1NNNNmInININIINIIhl1NH1m11w111rÌilUHnlllNNulHlallillipHl
u.,...,uwuu.wwrmnl,,,,,.unwuumwww4.u..
LINE ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR
TO "C" GROUND
i BATTERY TO FRAME

BLACK WITH
TRACER TO FILAMENT
BROWN RESISTORS CONDENSER.
YELLOie BANK
i 0.EO/
(ACKT\\\\\<
e(ACK
Il'.f.2MFD.
RFD (SUCK

OK,!.
"i" 4MFO. .

4 MFD.
..
RED
LACK
ÇJL%
YELLOW

LINE VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
D.C. INPUT PUG

Figure 9-Wiring diagram of Radiola 51 D.C. socket power unit.

RADIOLA 51 D.C. -S. P. U. CONTINUITY TESTS

Remove terminal cover and lugs from all terminals. See Figure 9 for reference num-
bers. Close switch.

Correct
Terminals Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

Across input supply plug Closed Open filter reactor or plate voltage divid-
(switch closed) ing resistor or line adjustment resistor
Terminal No. 3 to one input plug Closed Open line adjusting resistor, filament filter
connection reactor, or filament voltage resistance

15
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals, poor
quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes, or a poor
antenna system. If imperfect operation is not due to these causes, the "Service Data Chart" should
be consulted for further detailed causes. Reference to Part No. and Section No. in the "Service
Notes" is also noted for further details.

Indication Cause Remedy

Defective operating switch Repair or replace switch

Loose volume control arm Tighten volume control arm
Defective power cable Replace power cable
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly
No signals Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly
Defective By-pass condenser Replace By-pass condenser
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary, P. II, S. 2
Socket plug in reversed position Reverse socket plug

Compensating condenser out of Adjust compensating condenser correctly, P. I,

adjustment S. 7
Defective power cable Repair or replace cable
Defective R.F. transformer Replace R.F. transformer assembly
Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly
Weak signals Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective:By-pass condenser
Defective main tuning condensers Replace or align defective tuning condensers
Low voltages from socket power Check socket power unit voltages with high re -
unit sistance D.C. voltmeter, P. II, S. 1
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary, P. II, S. 2

Defective A.F. transformer Replace A.F. transformer assembly

Poor Quality Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser
Defective output transformer Replace output transformer

Compensating condenser out of Adjust compensating condenser correctly, P. I,

adjustment S. 7
Defect in audio system Check and repair any defect
Howling Open grid circuit in any stage Check circuit and repair defect
Receiver in oscillation Check and repair, P. I, S. 9

Operating switch not."ON" Turn operating switch "On"

Radiotrons Defective operating switch Replace operating switch
fail to light Defective input cord Repair or replace input cord
No. D.C. line voltage Turn D.C. line voltage "On"
Defective resistor in SPU Replace defective resistor

Play in Loose knob Tighten or replace knob

Station Slack cable Take up on cable adjusting screw
Selector
 RCA
Radiola 20
SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-5M-June, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, II1. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tearr and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of the
RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing tech-
nical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of the Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distribiitor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America.. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of. America

 RCA RADIOLA 20
SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

INTRODUCTION
Radiola 20 is a tuned radio -frequency receiver with regeneration, employing four
Radiotrons UX-199 and one Radiotron UX-120. It consists of two stages of balanced
tuned radio -frequency, a regenerative detector and two stages of audio frequency ampli-
fication. Many new developments conducive to sensitivity, selectivity, efficiency and
quality has been combined in this Radiola. Large loudspeaker volume without distor-
tion is made possible by use of the new dry battery operated power amplifier, Radiotron
UX-120, in the last audio stage.
To facilitate the tuning and operation of Radiola 20 the three main straight line
frequency tuning condensers have been mechanically coupled together and adjusted in
phase so that they are operated by one control drum. Two auxiliary vernier condensers
have been included to permit very fine tuning adjustments.

0 0 0
+ 4 15 -41 -71i 45V 90V 135
+C C

Figure 1-Schematic circuit of RCA Radiola 20

3
 To have the amount of regeneration under full control at all wave -lengths the inter -
element tube capacities have been compensated for by the small neutralizing condensers
located on the back of the Radiotron shelf.
The operation of Radiola 20 and the function of the various elements may be easily
understood by reference to the schematic diagram shown in Fig. 1.
Unlike Radiola Superheterodynes, there is no catacomb assembly in this Radiola.
All inductance coils, however, have been specially treated and impregnated with wax to
make them moisture proof. Within reasonable limits, therefore, the receiver will not be
affected by weather or climatic conditions.
As all parts are exposed, there may be a tendency on the part of some owners to
experiment with Radiola 20. Dealers, therefore, should caution their customers against
tampering with the parts. This point cannot be emphasized too strongly in the case
of the main tuning condensers and the small neutralizing condensers. THESE NEU-
TRALIZING CONDENSERS HAVE BEEN CAREFULLY ADJUSTED ON EACH
RADIOLA BY MEANS OF SPECIAL APPARATUS AND THE SLIGHTEST
CHANGE IN THEIR SETTING WILL AFFECT THE PERFORMANCE OF
THE RECEIVER. The main tuning condensers should not be touched except for
cleaning out particles of dust or dirt which may have lodged between the condenser
plates, causing noisy operation. This may be accomplished most easily by means of an
ordinary pipe cleaner. Any spreading or bending of the plates of a condenser will put
that particular condenser out of phase with the other two main condensers. A simple
method for lining up the main tuning condensers is described in Section No. 21 of these
Service Notes.

(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE

Referring to Fig. 2, the input is brought into the first Radiotron which is the first
stage of tuned radio frequency amplification. The output of this Radiotron is applied to
the input of Radiotron 2, this being the second stage of tuned R. F.
The output of Radiotron 2 then goes to the detector, Radiotron 3, where the signal
is changed to audio frequency.

15T RI'

RADIO FREQUENCY CURRENT --

AUNO FREQUENCY CURRENT
Figure 2-Radiotron sequence in RCA Radiola 20

4
 The audio frequency output of the detector is applied successively to Radiotrons
4 and 5, these being the first and second stages of audio frequency amplification respec-
tively, and the output applied at the loudspeaker jacks.
This lineup makes Radiotron UX-120, which is the last stage of audio frequency
amplification, and slightly larger than the other Radiotrons, the center of the group
(socket 5). It is imperative that Radiotron U.X'-120 be used only in this socket. Fig.
2 illustrates the proper Radiotron sequence.

(2) ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES

Complaints of swinging signals, as distinguished from fading effects, or of intermit-
tent reception with probable grating noises, are generally the result of antenna and
ground system failures and to this, therefore, the service man should give his first atten-
tion. A grating noise may be caused by a poor battery connection, a poor lead-in
connection to the antenna or the lead-in, or antenna touching some metallic surface, such
as the edge of a tin roof, drain pipe, etc. By disconnecting the antenna and ground leads
from Radiola 20 and noting whether or not the grating continues, the service man can
soon determine whether or not the cause of complaint is within or external to the receiver
and plan his service work accordingly.

(3) ANTENNA INSTALLATION (Outdoor Type)

If the source of complaint has been found to be external to the Radiola the service
man should inspect the antenna and ground installations very carefully.
The most efficient antenna system for Radiola 20 is one of 75 to 150 feet in length,
depending upon local conditions, measured from the far end of antenna to the ground
connection. It should be erected as high as can be conveniently arranged and as far
removed from all obstructions as possible. The lead-in should preferably be a con-
tinuation of the antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices that introduce additional
resistance to the antenna system and which may in time corrode sufficiently to seriously
affect reception. If, however, it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the
antenna, the joint must be carefully soldered to insure a good electrical contact. Excess
flux should be cleaned off and the connection carefully covered with rubber tape to
protect it from the oxidization effects of the atmosphere.
The antenna and lead-in should be supported by high grade glass or porcelain
insulators. At no point should the antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any
part of the building. The lead-in wire should be brought through the wall or window
frame and insulated therefrom by a porcelain tube.
The antenna should be constructed so that it will he at right angles to all electric
light, traction and power lines and other antennae, and if practical should be at least
15 feet from such lines and antennae. It is desirable to keep the lead-in a foot or more
from the building where possible. When an outdoor antenna is used it should be pro-
tected by means of an approved lightning arrester, in accordance with the requirements
of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.

(4) INDOOR TYPE ANTENNA

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results
may be had by using about 50 feet of insulated wire strung around the picture molding.

5
The size of the wire is not particularly important, though No. 18 B. & S. bell wire
is suggested. In buildings where metal lathing is employed, satisfactory results
are
not always possible with this type of antenna. Under such conditions, various arrange-
ments of the indoor antenna should be tried in event of the first one not giving satis-
factory results. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly installed outdoor
antenna.

(5) GROUND
Enough emphasis cannot be laid upon the necessity of a good ground. It is
quite as important as the antenna. No specific recommendations can be given in this
matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water and steam pipes usually make
good grounds. Gas pipes usually make poor grounds, and as a rule are to be avoided.
If neither water nor steam pipes are available, a pipe or metal rod may be driven into
the ground to a depth of several feet. The success of this type of ground depends upon
the moisture present in the soil. The ground lead should be connected by means of an
approved ground clamp to a section of pipe that has been scraped and thoroughly cleaned.
The connection should be inspected from time to time to make certain that a clean and
tight electrical contact exists between the clamp and pipe.
It is recommended that the service man experiment with various grounds, and
employ the one giving the best results. Radiola 20 is capable of good distant reception
when connected to an efficient antenna and a low resistance ground. A poor ground con-
nection may not be apparent on local reception, but it is an important element in distant
reception.
If the results of experiments seem to indicate that a good ground connection is
not possible, the use of a counterpoise is suggested if local conditions permit. A counter-
poise is in effect a second antenna. It should be as well insulated as the antenna, but it
should not be erected more than six or eight feet above the ground. When possible the
counterpoise should be constructed directly under the antenna and should have approxi-
mately the same dimensions. The counterpoise should be connected to the Radiola in place
of the ground connection.
SCREW E (f 5

Figure 3-Typical Outdoor Antenna Installation

(Showing use of counterpoise where good ground is not available)
6
 (6) BATTERY CIRCUIT FAILURES
If trouble is experienced in the battery circuits such as the absence of a voltage
reading at the voltmeter pin jacks, none of the Radiotrons lighting, or the absence of
a "B" battery click when the loudspeaker plug is inserted in the jack with
the fila-
ments lighted, check up all the battery voltages at the terminal board. The
proper
readings are outlined below, the terminal numbers referring to those in Fig. 4 or read-
ing from left to right when facing Radiola. Batteries reading 25 per cent below normal
should be replaced.

TABLE I
From To Voltage
(-) (-i-) Limits
1 2 68 to 90 Volts
1 3 34 to 45 "
4 1 4 to 4.5
5 1 17to221/2 u
1 10 3.5 to 4.5 "
1 11 104 to 135
1 7 3 Gi

NOTE: The reading from 1 to 7 is the filament terminal voltage and should
corre-
spond with the reading obtained at the voltmeter pin jacks on the front panel.
If the terminal voltages are satisfactory, but trouble still exists, even after
replacing the Radiotrons, remove the four screws at the bottom of the cabinet holding
the panel in place and pull out the panel enough to gain access to the terminal board
at the back. Loosen up the screws holding the battery strip to the terminal board and
remove the battery strip. Take the panel out of the cabinet.
Using a 41/2 volt "C" battery connected in series with a pair of phones, run out the
Routine Click Test outlined in Section No. 7. When a discrepancy is noticed, the
Complete Continuity Test should be consulted to determine the trouble.

(7) ROUTINE CLICK TEST

(A) A Click should be heard from-
(1) Short, medium and long antenna taps to ground.
-F
(2) 1 to all and to Frame.
(3) 2 to Pl, P2, P4 and 9.
(4) 3 to P3.
(5) 4 to Gl, G2 and G4 (weak in last case).
(6) 5 to G5 (weak).
(7) 6 to + Fl and 7.
(8) 8 to P5.
(9) 10 to all -{- F (with filament rheostat "on").
(10) 10 to 7 (with filament rheostat "on").
 C -A-8
II
+C +908
Q
+45B
0
-4}C -223C +A +135D

i
z o ó
Ñ
4AMJVJVNM

KU, c,

Ct "0000,

-0
B 'C>

Cs
C,

-fÚJ
UX-199 1 UX-199
m'. m{ UX-120 I UX-199 UX-199
1
'Q Q i
l

1---1Q Q
1 t 5

hW
Wien 14rvIAA

VOLTMETER FILAMENT IYOLUNE RADIO CORP OF AMERICA

PIN JACKS RHEOSTAT CONTROL
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
tja ARO&DWay. N. r. C
CONTINUITY DIAGRAM
RAOIOLA 20
D. No. NS20.2D I Date 4-27.20
Dwn.EV lT ÌCw.6s Cu I
appe El, Tye

Figure 4-Continuity wiring diagram

(B) No click should be heard from-

(1) 1 to 2, P1 or P3.
(2) G1 to P1.
(3) G2 to P2.
(4) 7 to G3 (or very slight thru grid -leak).
(5) Stoll.

The numerical test points referred to in the Routine Click Test and Complete Con-
tinuity Test apply to the terminals on the battery terminal board at the rear of the
panel assembly, and are shown in Fig. 4. The terminals are numbered from left to right
when facing the front of the set. The designation "P" and "G" refer to plate and grid
contacts of the socket indicated by the number following. For example G2 would indicate
the grid contact of the second socket. P5 would indicate the plate contact of the fifth
Radiotron socket. In the same way the indication "F" denotes the filament contact of
the tube socket indicated by the number. The filament contacts are also noted as minus
and plus. The condenser numbers referred to in the right hand column will also be found
in Fig. 4.

8
(8) COMPLETE CONTINUITY TEST

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

1 to all
to Frame
-F Click, closed thru leads
Click, closed thru leads
Open lead
1 Open lead
2 to 9 Click, closed thru primary of Open in primary circuit of 2nd
2nd A. F. Transformer A. F. Transformer
2toP1 Click, closed thru primary of Open in primary circuit of 1st
1st R. F. Transformer R. F. Transformer
2 to P2 Click, closed thru primary of Open in primary circuit of 2nd
2nd R. F. Transformer R. F. Transformer
2 to P4 Click, closed thru primary of Open in primary circuit of 2nd
2nd A. F. Transformer A. F. Transformer
3 to P3 Click, closed thru primary of Open in primary circuit of 1st
1st A. F. Transformer and A. F. Transformer or in
Tickler Coil Tickler Coil
4 to GI Click, closed thru secondary of Open in secondary circuit of
Antenna Coupler Antenna Coupler
4 to G2 Click, closed thru secondary of Open in secondary circuit of
1st R. F. Transformer 1st R. F. Transformer
4 to G4 Weak click, closed thru secon- Open in secondary circuit of
dary of 1st A. F. Trans- 1st A. F. Transformer
former
5 to G5 Weak click, closed thru secon- Open in secondary circuit of
dary of 2nd A. F. Trans- 2nd A. F. Transformer
former
6to+F1 Click, closed thru leads Open leads
6 to 7 Click, closed thru volume con- Open volume control rheostat
trol rheostat
8 to P5 Click, closed thru leads Open leads
10 to + F of sockets Click, closed thru rheostat. No Defective rheostat
2,3,4,5 click, if rheostat is "off"
10 to 7 Click, closed thru filament Open filament rheostat
rheostat. No click, if rheo-
stat is "off"
"Short" to "Ground" Click, closed thru primary of Open primary of Antenna
Antenna Coupler Coupler
"Medium" to "Ground" Click, closed thru primary of Open Antenna Coupler or open
Antenna Coupler tap
"Long" to "Ground" Click, closed thru primary of Open Antenna Coupler or open
Antenna Coupler tap
1 to 2 No Click Click, condenser C8 shorted
1 to PI No Click Click, condenser C6 shorted
1 to P3 No Click Click, condenser C7 shorted
G1 to P1 No Click Click, condenser B1 or tuning
condensers C1 or C2 shorted
G2 to P2 No Click Click, condenser B2 or tuning
condensers C3 or C4 shorted
7 to G3 No Click (or very slight one) Click, shorted grid leak or grid
condenser
8 to 11 No Click Click, shorted 2nd stage jack

9
(9) LOOSE RHEOSTAT CONTACTS
To get at this source of trouble, remove set from cabinet by removing the four
outside screws in the bottom of the cabinet. Apply pressure to back of set until panel
moves forward sufficiently to enable the service man to support it with his fingers. It
may now be gently pulled out, taking care not to permit the metal frame work to mar
the finish by riding on the front base of the cabinet.
The square head set screw holding the rheostat arm to the shaft may now be
loosened and the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent so that it will make
positive contact with the resistance strip. Make certain that the resistance strip is
clean where contact is made. Insert voltmeter leads in the two pin jacks in the lower
right hand corner of the front panel. Set "Volume Control" at "Loud." Adjust the
"Battery Setting" knob to a quarter scale division beyond 3. Holding this in place,
adjust the rheostat contact arm until a reading of 3 volts is obtained on the voltmeter.
Tighten set screw to hold contact arm in this relative position and replace set in
cabinet.

(10) NOISY OR LOOSE JACKS

Considerable noise or intermittent operation may originate at either jack. This
trouble may be caused by loose connections, jack leaves having lost their tension or
by dirty contacts.
To remedy this trouble it will be necessary to remove the panel from the cabinet
as described in the preceding paragraph. After this is done the jacks may be examined
and fecessary adjustments made. As these are both single circuit jacks a general clean-
ing and tightening should be sufficient to remedy the trouble. A loss of tension may
be corrected by applying pressure to the spring leaf and pushing it towards the frame
of the jack. The correct amount may be ascertained by inserting the loudspeaker
plug and noticing if the leaf is making proper contact. If the soldered connections
appear faulty, a hot iron applied to them, heating the solder, will rectify the trouble.

(11) STATION SELECTOR OR AMPLIFICATION CONTROL

WHEEL SCRAPING AGAINST ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF
PANEL
The adjustment of control drums in this condition is attended by noisy reproduction
in the loudspeaker, and may be due to either or both of the following causes:
(1) Warped control wheel: Check by placing a straight edge on the outer flat
surface of the knurled control wheel and noting the flatness of the surface by
slowly rotating the wheel. If the control wheel is badly warped it will be
necessary to replace it.
(2) Condenser improperly aligned: To correct this condition remove the panel and
adjust the mounting screws of the condenser and amplification assembly.
There is sufficient play at the mounting screws to allow this adjustment to
be made on the station selector drum. The amplification drum may be adjusted
by loosening the mounting screws of the large bracket supporting the drum.

10
(12) LOUDSPEAKER POLARITY
In Radiolas employing Radiotron UX-120 in the last audio amplification stage it is
very important that the loudspeaker be so connected that the magnetic field generated by
the relatively large plate current from the 135 -volt B battery will not oppose the perma-
nent magnetic field of the speaker pole pieces. In Radiola UZ -1325 loudspeakers, one of
the leads is brown, the other black with a brown tracer. The solid brown lead should be
connected to the tip of the phone plug and the black lead with brown tracer to the sleeve
of the phone plug. In Radiolas it is standard practice to connect the phone pack in such
a manner that the tip of the phone plug will go to the plate of the audio amplifying
Radiotron and the sleeve to the positive (+) B battery terminal. If electromagnetic
speakers similar to the UZ -1325 are incorrectly connected, they will soon lose their sen-
sitivity through a weakening of the permanent magnetism of the pole pieces. When the
leads are properly connected, the magnetic field generated by the steady plate current
in the speaker coils intensifies the permanent magnetic field of the pole pieces and main-
tains the permanent magnetism.
is doubt of the correct connection, loud speakers with metallic diaphragms
If there
such as UZ -1325 should be so adjusted that the diaphragm just strikes the actuating
magnets or pole pieces as will be evidenced by a clattering noise when loudest notes are
played. Reversing the loudspeaker leads will either accentuate or lessen the clattering.
That connection which gives greatest clattering is the correct one to use. The speaker
should then be readjusted so that no clattering occurs on the greatest volume desired.
In RCA Loudspeakers Models 100, 102 and 104 however, the polarity is not an
important factor. They should accordingly be connected in the manner that gives the
most pleasing reproduction.

(13) AMPLIFICATION CONTROL (Tickler Coil)

The tickler coil is so designed that the regeneration is under complete control
throughout the tuning range of Radiola 20. That is, regeneration may or may not be
used at any particular frequency. There is a point just before oscillation occurs that
gives the greatest amplification and should be used especially on distant reception. The
point varies according to the frequency of the incoming signal, but the general rule of
a greater setting of the amplification dial with a decrease of frequency will be true.

(14) RADIOLA WILL NOT REGENERATE

If oscillations cannot be obtained, or stop at lower frequencies, trouble may be
due to-
(1) Filament voltage low.
(2) "B" battery voltage on detector low.
(3) Radiotron in detector socket has low emission or is otherwise subnormal.

11
 (4) Shorted turns in "'fickler" coil.
(5) "'fickler" coil leads reversed.
(6) Open by-pass condenser ('7 or ('8.
(15) ACOUSTIC HOWL
This is a familiar howl which is set up by the sound waves striking a microphonic
Radiotron and causing the elements to vibrate. The effect of the elements vibrating is
in turn amplified and reproduced by the loudspeaker and, conditions being favorable,
the howl may increase in intensity, drowning out the broadcast signal.
Howling may usually be eliminated by interchanging Radiotrons. A Radiotron
that is quite microphonic in the detector socket will usually operate satisfactorily in
one of the R.F. sockets. Do not place a Radiotron having any microphonic tendencies
in one of the Audio Amplification sockets.

(16) AUDIO HOWL

An audio howl may be due to an open or a high resistance connection in the plate
circuit of an audio stage.
Look for-
(1) Open in plate circuit.
(2) Defective "B" battery.
(3) Very low "B" battery.
(4) Open by-pass condenser C-8.
(5) Defective grid leak.
(17) UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATIONS
If Radiola.20 oscillates at any setting of the Station Selector Drum when the Ampli-
fication Drum is at zero, or at any position giving greater regeneration than normal, the
neutralizing condensers are out of adjustment. (See Section No. 18.) In exceptional
coses a defective Radiotron in the R.F. stages will cause uncontrolled oscillations.
Replacing or interchanging the Radiotron with that in the Detector or audio stages will
generally correct the trouble.
(18) NEUTRALIZING CONDENSERS
Should the neutralizing condensers get out of adjustment through some mishap,
they may be readily readjusted by carefully following the method outlined in Section
No. 19. The condition is usually manifested by uncontrolled oscillations throughout the
tuning range of the receiver regardless of the tickler (amplification) setting. Oscillation
at any point of the Station Selector scale with the amplification setting at zero would
indicate a necessity for readjustment. The apparatus required for this adjustment
consists of a modulated oscillator, an insulated screw driver and a good Radiotron
U_l'-199 specially prepared for the purpose by sawing off one of the filament (large)
prongs close to the base. It is important that the Radiotron be otherwise perfect.
Any oscillator that has an audio frequency output and will oscillate at 1100
K.C. will be satisfactory. If one is not available there is described in Section No.
22 a simple modulated oscillator that will serve the purpose.
The insulated screw driver can be procured from most electrical or hardware
supply houses or may be made from a strip of bakelite.

12
(19) NEUTRALIZING PROCEDURE
A step by step procedure for neutralizing is as follows:
(1) Place Radiola 20 in operation in the usual manner with antenna and ground
attached. Phones instead of loudspeaker are used.
(2) Place modulated oscillator into operation at 1100 K.C. at a point close to the
antenna wire and 20 feet or more from the Radiola.
(3) Tune in Oscillator signal to maximum intensity, carefully adjusting verniers.
(4) Set Amplification dial at zero.
(5) Insert special Radiotron in socket No. 1 in place of regular Radiotron UX-
199. Note if any signal is heard. If not, this particular stage is neutralized,
but if signal is heard even of decreased volume, neutralizing condenser No.
1 (directly behind No. 1 socket) should be adjusted. (See Fig. 5.) This is
done with the insulated screw driver and should be adjusted until minimum or
no signal is obtained. This point will be found to be very critical and is the
correct adjustment for this particular stage.

Figure 5
Illustrating method of adjusting first neutralizing condenser

13
(6) Remove special tube from socket No. 1 and replace Radiotron UX-199.
Place Special Radiotron in socket No. 2 and repeat the process described
above.

(7) Adjust neutralizing condenser No. 2(directly behind socket No. 2) in the same
manner as No. 1 for minimum or no signal. (See Fig. 6.)
(8) Remove special tube and replace Radiotron No. 2. If these adjustments have
been properly carried out, the Radiola will not oscillate at any position of the
Station Selector Drum with the Amplification Control at zero, it being neces-
sary to rotate the Amplification Drum approximately half way around before
oscillation occurs. This is the correct condition and a notable increase in ease
of tuning and sensitiveness will be experienced when Radiola 20 is properly
neutralized.

Figure 6
Adjusting the second neutralizing condenser

14
(20) MAIN TUNING CONDENSERS OUT OF LINE
A large degree of deviation in the line up of the main tuning condensers of Radiola
20 will be readily ascertained by inspection. However, a small degree will be noticed
only by certain definite tuning characteristics. That is, one or both of the vernier
condensers will tune to either extreme at all settings of the Station Selector Drum,
the verniers having no noticeable effect on tuning and general reception results are below
normal. However, if these conditions are present, it will be advisable to make sure that
the trouble is not an open or shorted vernier condenser. If it is found that the verniers
are not shorted and their connections intact, it may be assumed that the main tuning
condensers are out of line. The following method is a simple and reliable means of
lining up these condensers and also has the advantage of employing a minimum of
equipment. The required equipment consists of a modulated oscillator covering the
range of 550 to 1500 K.C.-the same as employed to adjust the neutralizing con-
densers.
This oscillator can be easily made by any dealer, constructional details of which
are shown in Section No. 22.

Figure 7
L,eation of "pick-up" wire with two Radiotron.s remorr(I for first step in lining up
main tuning condensers

15
 Figure 8

Location of "pick-up" wire for second step in lining up of main tuning condensers

(21) LINING UP MAIN TUNING CONDENSERS

Step by step procedure.
(1) Remove panel from cabinet and connect up in usual manner with the exception
that no antenna or ground are used.
(2) Put modulated oscillator in operation at 550 K.C., locating it about 20 feet
from receiver. One end of the pick-up wire is laid about a foot from the
oscillator and the other end wound once around the 2nd R. F. Transformer.
This is the third coupler from the left facing the panel from the front. See
Fig. 7. Remove Radiotrons from sockets 1 and 2.
(3) Set verniers at 5 and tune in signal, using Station Selector Drum only. It
will be necessary to amplify the signal, using the amplification drum and volume
control, in order to hear the signal in the head phones. This maximum signal
point is then noted on the Station Selector Dial with a pencil.
(4) Remove pick-up wire and place it around the 1st R. F. Transformer. This
is the center transformer. See Fig. 8. Replace Radiotron No. 2, leaving No. 1
out.

16
(5) Tune in signal as before without using verniers and note if the point of maxi-
mum signal as marked on the Station Selector Dial, is the same as when the
pick-up was on the 2nd R. F. Transformer. If not, note whether a variation
of more than two degrees plus or minus of the vernier (one to the right) will
cause the point of maximum signal strength to coincide with the first marking.
If more than a two degree vernier adjustment is necessary the center con-
denser should be slipped slightly at the shaft coupling until not more than 2
degrees plus or minus vernier variation will cause the point of maximum signal
strength to coincide with the dial marking.

(6) Remove pick-up wire from 1st R. F. Transformer and place around antenna
coupler in same manner. This is the first transformer from the left when facing
the Radiola from the front. See Fig. 9. Replace Radiotron No. 1, thus
retaining all Radiotrons in their respective sockets.

Figure 9
Location of "pick-up" wire for last step in lining up main tuning condensers
Radiotrons shown in their correct position

17
(7) With the verniers at their center points, adjust Station Selector Drum for
maximum signal. It is assumed that the preceding circuit has been correctly
adjusted and left at its resonance point. Now note whether the maximum
signal point coincides with the original 2nd R. F. point and if not whether a
two degree vernier variation will bring these points together. If not, the 1st
condenser should be slipped at its coupling and adjusted as in paragraph (5).
(8) When these three points are brought together or close enough so that the
allowable variation of the vernier condensers will make the resonance point
identical in all three circuits, set oscillator at 1500 K. C. The foregoing
procedure is then repeated at this frequency, allowing the same vernier
variation as before. Generally when the condensers are checked at one end
of the frequency band they will be found to check O.K. at the other end.
However, this is not always the case and a slight re -adjustment may be
necessary.
In explaining that the allowable limits of the vernier are two degrees plus
or minus, it is not to be understood that in tuning a signal the verniers should
never exceed that amount of variation as this is not true. These limits are
given as the test limits at each end of the scale as it has been found that when
this is true all other resonance points throughout the tuning range will lie
within the extreme limits of the vernier dials. The most common indication
that the condensers are out of line is that one or both of the verniers tune to
either extreme throughout the frequency scale.
00025

UX199

50 TURNS
#2.0 D.S.C.
ON TUBE 45 VOLTS
z'/a. DIA.

30 OHMS
-4 VV VV
A

--=111111I11
4.5 VOLTS

Figure 10

Circuit diagram of Modulated Oscillator used in neutralizing Radiola 20 and

lining up the main tuning condensers

18
(22) CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF MODULATED
OSCILLATOR
This oscillator, which will be found very efficient for neutralizing and balancing
the various circuits of the Radiola 20 may be made in the following manner. The
circuit diagram is shown in Fig. 10.
The coil consists of 50 turns of No. 20 D.S.C. wire wound on a 21/2 -in. tube. A
tap is taken off at the 25th turn which is connected to the negative leg of the filament.
The variable condenser has a capacity of .0005 Mfd. This oscillator will cover the
frequency range of 550 to 1500 kilocycles (200 to 546 meters) very efficiently. The
grid condenser and leak modulate the output, the note being dependent on the value of
the grid leak. A four megohm leak is recommended, but if a lower or higher audio note
is desired it is merely necessary to change grid leaks, a higher resistance leak giving a
lower note and vice versa. Do not use a variable grid leak. The grid condenser is .00025
Mfd., a 45 -volt "B" battery for plate supply is sufficient. A UX-199 Radiotron will
be found to have ample power output. This oscillator will be found very useful in servic-
ing all types of Radio Receivers, including the balancing of the tuned R. F. circuits of
Radiola 28 and Radiola 30 and will amply repay the dealer for the small outlay of
material and labor required.

Iv
eno«a in U.S.A., 1924
 RADIOLA 25 (Reg. U. S. Pat. Ornee)

(BATTERY OPERATED)

SERVICE NOTES
NS-25-2
Second Edition-November, 1926

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Prepared by
NATIONAL, SERVICE DIVISION
233 Broadway, New York City
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 10 South La Salle Street 28 Geary Street
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
3308 Fourteenth Street, N. W.
Washington, D. C.
 A Word or Two About Service
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners.may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the National Service Division
of the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing
technical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

srtkorised distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

 RADIOLA 25 SERVICE NOTES
(Battery Operated)
Prepared by
RCA NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
NS -25-2

INTRODUCTION
Radiola 25 is a radio broadcast receiver of the super -heterodyne type employing
the standard six -tube circuit. As used in Radiola 25 this proven circuit provides ease
of tuning, selectivity, sensitivity and ample loudspeaker volume. Five Radiotrons
UX-199 and one Radiotron UX-120 are used. Provision is made for all batteries to be
placed in the compartment with the tuning apparatus, thus making a complete self-con-
tained receiver.
Seals: The lead seals placed on the catacomb of Radiola 25 are for the protection
of the dealer. Broken seals indicate tampering. The special parts that go to make up
the catacomb are impregnated in a wax compound and it is neither advisable nor prac-
ticable to attempt repairs without proper equipment.
If tests indicate a defective catacomb replace it with a new one, returning the de-
fective one through regular channels to the nearest RCA Service Station. No marks
of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To indicate the defect in the catacomb for
future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note thereon observed defect.

(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE

Facing the panel and counting from right to left the input is brought into the first
Radiotron, which is a stage of tuned radio frequency amplification.
The output of the first Radiotron then goes to the second tube from the right, which
acts as a first detector and oscillator combined. At this stage the beat or intermediate
signal frequency is formed which now is reflexed to Radiotron No. 1. This Radiotron,
while acting as a stage of tuned R.F., also is the 1st intermediate frequency stage.
To Loa:.

2141 A.F. I"A.F 2m Put ZN0 IF 05c, Ma I67DET R.F AND IST I.F

Ram FRCQUCNGY (516Nk) CURRENT

INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY CURRENT
AUDIO FREQUENCY CURRENT

Figure 1-Radiotron Sequence

3
 From Radiotron No. 1 the intermediate frequency signal now goes to Radiotron No.
3, which is the 2nd stage of intermediate amplification.
The signal is now fed into the second detector, or Radiotron No. 4, where it changes
to audio frequency current. Radiotron No. 5 and No. 6 are the first and second stages
of audio frequency amplification, respectively, and the signal is made available at either
stage by connecting the speaker to the proper jack. Fig. 1 illustrates the Radiotron
sequence and the path of the different currents through them.

(2) RADIOTRON SOCKETS

In placing Radiotrons in the gang sockets care should be exercised to make certain
that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons are placed into the two
large and two small holes respectively of the sockets. If a Radiotron will not fit into
a socket without considerable pressure being applied, the trouble is probably due to
excessive solder on one or more of the prongs. This may be removed with a file or
knife. Never try to force one in. These sockets are so designed that the prongs of the
Radiotrons will fit in snugly without force being applied. If sufficient force is applied it
might be possible to insert the prongs in the wrong holes, resulting in a filament burnout.

(3) LOOP SOCKET

Great care should be taken to see that the loop is firmly seated in its socket as under
certain conditions the "A" and "C" batteries may become short circuited by the contact
spring of the loop plug shorting the contact spring of the socket to the metal collar of
the socket if the loop plug is not properly seated.

(4) LOOP NOT VERTICAL WHEN SEATED

The position of the loop may not be exactly vertical although properly seated. To
correct this condition remove loop and open lid. Loosen the four machine screws
that hold the loop socket collar assembly in place on the horizontal platform of the
frame. It will be noted that the construction of the upper and lower portions of the loop
socket assembly is similar. When loosening these four screws, hold the nuts from turning.
Having loosened the screws the entire loop socket assembly may be rotated in an area
sufficient to enable the centering of it directly below the bezel ring in the lid of the cabinet.
With the lid closed insert the loop and force it into a vertical position by applying
pressure to the center spindle. When a vertical position is thus attained, remove loop
from the socket, taking great care not to move the socket assembly from its new position.
The four screws may now be tightened and the loop will remain vertical providing the
new position of the socket assembly was not altered when removing the loop.

(5) LOOP OPEN

When the left hand drum has no apparent effect on tuning, look for an open loop.
In some instances the loop leads perhaps are not properly soldered to the prongs of the
loop terminal, or have jarred off in shipment. Make usual battery test across the two
outside prongs for continuity of loop. It must be recognized, however, that there is a
possibility of the loop circuit being open below the lid (broken pig tail of loop tuning
condenser, etc.), but the place mentioned is the most likely source of trouble.
4
(6) LOOSE RHEOSTAT CONTACTS
To get at this source of trouble, with the loop taken out, remove set from cabinet
by removing the four outside screws in the bottom of the cabinet. Apply pressure to
back of set until panel moves forward sufficiently to enable the service man to support it
with his fingers. It may now be gently pulled out, taking care not to permit the metal
frame work to mar the finish by riding on the front base of the cabinet.
The square head set screw holding the rheostat arm to the shaft may now be
loosened and the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent so that it will make
positive contact with the resistance strip. Make certain that the resistance strip is
clean where contact is made. Test "A" batteries to see that they are up to their proper
rating. Insert voltmeter leads in the two pin jacks in the lower right hand corner of
the front panel. Set "Volume Control" at "Loud." Adjust the "Battery Setting"
knob to a quarter scale division beyond 3. Holding this in place, adjust the rheostat
contact arm until a reading of 3 volts is obtained on the voltmeter. Tighten set
screw to hold contact arm in this relative position and replace set in cabinet.

(7) OUTER EDGE OF DRUM CONTROL WHEEL SCRAPING

AGAINST ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF PANEL
The adjustment of control drums in this condition is attended by noisy reproduc-
tion in the loudspeaker, and may be due to either or both of the following causes:
(1) Warped control wheel. Check by placing a straight edge on the outer flat
surface of the knurled control wheel and noting the flatness of the surface by slowly
rotating the wheel. Replacing with a new wheel or a slight filing of the escutcheon plate
will correct this trouble.
(2) Condenser improperly aligned. To correct this condition remove front panel
and adjust the mounting screws of the condenser. The two mounting screws that hold
the back end plate of the condenser pass through elongated holes in the aluminum frame
thus allowing a degree of play sufficient for adjustment purposes.
(8) SCRAPING DRUMS
Sometimes, due to warping of the control wheels, the metal drums of the Station
Selectors will touch. This will cause a grating noise in the loudspeaker whenever the
drums are adjusted. When this occurs the hex. nuts holding the drums to the condenser
shaft should be loosened and the drums adjusted for clearance. The nuts should then be
tightened. If this will not remedy the trouble, the points touching should be filed with a
small file until ample clearance is provided.

(9) DRUMS FAIL TO HOLD POSITION

Should an adjustment be necessary due to the tuning drums sipping their position
the following procedure should be used:
(a) Remove set from cabinet and readjust tension screw on the inside of the drum.
Some models have only one counterweight, relying on a friction shoe to hold the other
drum from slipping. Other models, however, are equipped with a counterweight on both
condensers, the friction shoe only being used to hold the opposite condenser in relative
position when one is moved. The tension screw referred to controls the pressure of this
shoe against the opposite drum. If one drum turns too hard when the other is held,
the tension screw should be slightly loosened.
5
 (b) When the frequency range is off calibration, ascertain whether or not the drum
control is in proper relation to the condenser plates. When the drum control is set for
minimum frequency (maximum wave length) the rotor plates should be entirely inside the
stator ones. Provision is made on some models to key the drum to the condenser plates,
thus eliminating the possibility of incorrect frequency calibration due to slipping of the
drum control.

(10) D.C. BUS BAR ON REAR OF CATACOMB

The screws holding this bus bar must always be kept tight, otherwise intermittent
reception or complete failure to operate may result. This bus bar is a vital part of the
filament circuit, connecting the filaments in parallel for dry battery operation. Occa-
sionally the screws holding it in place will work loose in shipment.

(11) OSCILLATION
Should Radiola 25 oscillate, causing squeals and howls, it is usually an indication
of excessive filament voltage or a defective catacomb. The battery voltage should never
exceed 3.3. This can best be checked by connecting a voltmeter at the pin jacks on the
panel. The point where the filament voltage is 3.3 should be noted on the "Battery Set-
ting" dial and this point used as a maximum point for operation.
If it is determined that the catacomb is defective it should be replaced. However,
before it is changed, all other circuits should be checked to ascertain their operating
condition.

(12) WEAK SIGNALS DUE TO HIGHLY

SHIELDED LOCATION
There will be found an occasional location so badly shielded that an external pickup
will be necessary. Installations in steel buildings are at times troubled with this shielding
effect and make necessary the erection of a short antenna, not over 25 feet or so in length
outside the building. Insulated wire should be used and may be conveniently hung out
of a window, although it would be better to get it away from the absorbing effect
of the building, if possible. This antenna should be inductively coupled to the loop of
Radiola 25 by winding a few turns of the lead-in (which should be a continuaftion of the
antenna itself) to a diameter of about eight or nine inches and placing this coil standing
up behind the set. It may conveniently be placed against the back of the set.
Enough wire should be left over after forming this coupling coil to serve as a
ground lead, connecting same preferably to a cold water pipe by means of an approved
ground clamp. It will be noted that no connections are made in this length of wire from
the far end of the antenna until connected to ground. Thus installed we have a low re-
sistance antenna conveying the Radio waves to an aperiodic coupling coil, to be picked up
by the loop of Radiola 25 and transmitted to the set in the usual manner. The loop, of
course, loses its directional effect, but the loop tuning condenser calibration remains
unchanged.
6
(13) TEST FOR PROPER BATTERY CONNECTIONS
Disconnect battery connection strip from catacomb terminal board by loosening
the screws holding it in place. Battery readings may then be taken directly across the
various terminals by a high resistance type voltmeter. If the batteries are properly con-
nected and in good condition the following voltmeter indications illustrated should be
obtained with the correct polarity:

CABLE SHEATHING-

Ó
n + -+
as V. - a: V.- -
+ 90V.
135 V.
q}V.
+
22{V.

Figure 2-Radiola 25 Battery Terminal Strip

(14) INSTALLATION OF BATTERIES

Care must be taken to install the two 221/2 -volt batteries and 41/2 -volt battery at the
left of the cabinet so that their terminals face up or forward towards the panel. There
is a possibility of the metal frame shorting the batteries if they are faced in toward the
frame.

(15) LOUDSPEAKER POLARITY

In Radiolas employing Radiotron UX-120 in the last audio amplification stage it is
very important that the loudspeaker be so connected that the magnetic field generated by
the relatively large plate current from the 135 -volt B battery will not oppose the perma-
nent magnetic field of the speaker pole pieces. In Radiola UZ -1325 loudspeakers, one of
the leads is brown, the other black with a brown tracer. The solid brown lead should be
connected to the tip of the phone plug and the black lead with brown tracer to the sleeve
of the phone plug. In Radiolas it is standard practice to connect the phone jack in such
a manner that the tip of the phone plug will go to the plate of the audio amplifying
Radiotron and the sleeve to the positive (+) B battery terminal. If electromagnetic
speakers similar to the UZ-1325 are incorrectly connected, they will soon loose their sen-
sitivity through a weakening of the permanent magnetism of the pole pieces. When the
leads are properly connected, the magnetic field generated by the steady plate current
in the speaker coils intensifies the permanent magnetic field of the pole pieces and main-
tains the permanent magnetism.
7
 If there is doubt of the correct connection, loudspeakers with metallic diaphragms
such as UZ -1325 should be so adjusted that the diaphragm just strikes the actuating
magnets or pole pieces as will be evidenced by a clattering noise when loudest notes are
played. Reversing the loudspeaker leads will either accentuate or lessen the clattering.
That connection which gives greatest clattering is the correct one to use. The speaker
should then be readjusted so that no clattering occurs on the greatest volume desired.
In Radio Loudspeaker Models 100, 102 and 104 however, the polarity is not an
important factor. They should accordingly be connected in the manner that gives the
most pleasing reproduction.

(16) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TESTS

In making the tests for continuity of both external and internal connections of the
catacomb both filament control and volume control rheostats should be adjusted so that
half the resistance is in the circuit, the loop connections opened and the power supply
cable disconnected from the terminal strip at the rear of the catacomb.
A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series (See Figure 3) or a voltmeter
with voltage sufficient to give full scale deflection when connected directly across bat-
tery terminals should be used in making these tests. This arrangement. will be found
to be very sensitive in checking voltage drop in various circuits.

PHONES

Figure 3-Click test circuit

The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals indicated
under the column marked "Terminal" (see page 9) and the results should be as indicated
under the column marked "Correct Effect." If the results are negative the cause of such
negative effect will be found in the last column under the heading "Defect." The first
column indicates the circuit under test.
The numbers of the terminals referred to in these tests apply to the terminals on the
connecting strip at the rear of the catacomb frame assembly. The designation "P" and
"G" refer to plate and grid contacts of the socket indicated by the number following.
For example G2 would indicate the grid contact of the second socket; P6 would indicate
the plate contact of the sixth tube socket. The coil numbers referred to in the right
hand column will be found in Figure 4.
8
 Catacomb Test (Coils and Connections)

Circuits Terminals Correct Effect Defect

Grid G1 to 7 Closed Open 1/2 coil No. 1

G2 to 5 Closed Open coil No. 4
G3 to 7 Closed Open coil No. 6
G4 to 12 Closed through grid leak Open grid leak or coil
No. 8
G5 to 7 Closed Open coil No. 10
G6 to 6 Closed Open coil No. 12

Plate P1 to 14 Closed Open coil No. 3 or No. 5

P2 to 4 Closed Open connections
P3 to 14 Closed Open coil No. 7
P4 to 13 Closed Open coil No. 9
P5 to 15 Closed Open connections
P6 to 18 Closed Open coil No. 11
14 to 3 Closed Open coil No. 2

-Filament -Fl to 9 Closed Open connections

-F2 to 9 Closed Open connections
-F4 to 9 Closed Open connections
-F5 to 9 Closed Open connections
-F6 to 9 Closed Open connections

+Filament +F1 to 12 Closed Open connections

+F2 to 12 Closed Open connections
+F3 to 12 Closed Open connections
+F4 to 12 Closed Open connections
+F5 to 12 Closed Open connections
+F6 to 12 Closed Open connections

Catacomb Test (Condensers)

Circuit Terminals Correct Effect Defect

Grid Gl to 1 Open Shorted condenser No. 1

G1 to P1 Open Shorted condenser No. 7
G4 to 19 Open Shorted condenser No. 5
G5 to P5 Open Shorted condensers Nos.
2 and 3
G5 to G6 Open Shorted condensers Nos.
2 and 4

9
 .f L00P COND. OSC. COND.

1u A.F. VOLTMETER
VP A.F.
-JACKS+ OSC.
TEL JACK COILS
VOLUME
'CONTROL

O
4
3
-O PC- 0^r=-
P G

VOLTAGE READINGS TAKEN AT CATACOMB RADIO CORP. OF AMERICA

TERMINAL STRIP NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
VOLTS + TERMINAL -TERMINAL 233 BROADWAY, N.Y. C.
1358 12
17
RADIOLA 25
90B 14 12
45B 13 12. CONTINUITY DIAGRAM
22$C 2.0 Dwg. No. N5-25-2 Date II -29-26 I

4YtC 20 7
4YiA 12. 10 Own. By g.a. a. I Ckd. By C.S. . I Appel; By =¡tif

Figure 4-Radiolu 25 continuity diagru n

10
 Panel Test
Circuits Terminals .Correct Effect Defect

Loop 1 to 7 Closed Open loop

Grid 2 to 5 Closed Open grid coil of oscillator
Plate 4 to 3 Closed Open plate coil of oscil-
lator
Filaments 9 to 10 Closed Open filament rheostat
8 to 9 Closed Open volume control

Panel Test (Condensers)

(Loop Removed)

Circuit Terminal Correct Effect Defect

Loop 1 to 7 Open Shorted loop tuning con-

denser

FILAMENT POLARITY OF SOCKETS

O
SOCKETS SOCKETS
1-3-5 2-4-6

O
Figure 5

If the catacomb fails to pass any of the above tests it should be removed from the
panel and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals on the
cover plate be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To indi-
cate the defect in the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note
thereon observed defect.

11
 A.C. OPERATION OF
RADIOLAB 25 AND 28
Using A.C. Packages Model UP -971
and Model UP -972

SERVICE NOTES
A C -25.28-1
First Edison-January, 1927

UP -972 Condenser Bank

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Prepared by
SERVICE DIVISION of the PRODUCTION AND
SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 Broadway, New York City

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brennan Street
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
1412 Monrde Street, N. W.
Washington, D. C.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders ser-
vice at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and unkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mis-
handling, to the end that Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Deal-
ers and Distributors who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and
operation of Radiolas occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers business the Service Division of
the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service
problems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of
these Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is sug-
gested they be preserved for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations,
has available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to
render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in'furndshing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1927-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS Page
A Word or Two About Service - 2
Protective Seals and Their Use - 4
Protective Devices - 4
Introduction - - - - - 5

PART I-PROBLEMS ARISING IN A.C. OPERATION OF

RADIOLA 25
Voltage Readings - - - - - 5-7
Catacomb Tests-Coils and Connections - 7
Catacomb Tests-Condensers - - 7
Continuity Test Instructions - 8
Panel Tests - - - 8
Resistance Strip Tests - 9
Installation Change in A.C. Package UP -971 - 10

PART II-PROBLEMS ARISING IN A.C. OPERATION OF

RADIOLA 28
Voltage Readings - - 11
Catacomb Tests-Condensers 13
Catacomb Tests-Coils and Connections 13
Panel Tests - - - - - - 13
Panel Tests-Condensers - 13
Resistance Strip Tests - - - 14
Changes in Factory Built A.C. Radiola 28 - 14

PART III-PROBLEMS COMMON TO A.C. OPERATION OF

RADIOLAS 25 AND 28
A. C. Packages and Cable - - - - - - 15
High, Low or No Voltage Readings at Terminal Strip of Radiola - 17
No -Current Voltmeter - - - - 17
Distortion in the Speaker - 18
Fluttering - - - 19
Blasting - - - - 19
Howling - - - - - - 19
Fading of Signals - - - - - - 19

ILLUSTRATIONS
UP-972 condenser bank - - - - - 1
Radiola 25 A.C. operated continuity circuit diagram - 6
Wiring diagram for resistance measurement - - - 9
Panel wiring change required for installation of UP -971 in some models of
Radiola 25 - - - - - - - - - 10
Radiola 28 A.C. operated continuity circuit diagram - - 12
Installing condenser bank of A.C. Package UP -972 - - - 15
Panel layout, circuit diagram and complete model of No -current Voltmeter 16
 PROTECTIVE SEALS AND THEIR USE
The lead seals placed on various units of Radiola 25 and 28 and RCA Loudspeaker
Model 104 are for the protection of the dealer. Broken seals indicate tampering.
Under no circumstances should a catacomb seal be broken. The special parts that
go to make up the catacomb are impregnated in a wax compound and it is neither advis-
able nor practical to attempt repairs without proper equipment. If tests indicate a
defective catacomb replace it with a new one, returning the defective one through the
regular channels to the nearest RCA Service Station.
A service man may sometimes find it necessary to break a seal in the R. P. A. unit
of the Model 104 Loudspeaker in order to make repairs. In such instances he should
replace those broken by suitable substitute seals when the repair work is finished. Thus
he is aided in determining whether any trouble that may develop later is due to tamper-
ing or ordinary wear and tear of assembled parts. The unit that has been tampered with
will be indicated by a broken seal.

PROTECTIVE DEVICES
In RCA Loudspeaker Model 104 there will be found two protective devices, one a
safety switch and the other an interlocking device. The safety switch is designed to
break the A.C. input current when the rear door is removed and make it impossible to
operate the Loudspeaker unless the door is in place. The interlocking device is a small
sliding door so arranged that it is impossible to open the terminal door of the R.P.A. unit
unless the A.C. input plug is first removed.
It should be understood that the electrical protective devices on RCA Loudspeaker
Model 104 are adjusted at the factory. If for any reason a service man finds it necessary
to remove them to adjust or replace a defective part, great care should be taken in
reassembling to see that they are returned to proper operation. Dealers should caution
their customers not to attempt to render these protective devices inoperative or to ex-
periment with the apparatus inside the metal cabinet or R.P.A. unit.

4
 SERVICE NOTES
A.C. OPERATION of RADIOLAS 25 and 28
Prepared by
RCA SERVICE DIVISION
A C -25-28-1

INTRODUCTION
The problems that arise in A.C. operation of Radiolas 25 and 28 driven by RCA
Loudspeaker Model 104 are somewhat different from the problems encountered in bat-
tery operation of these Radiolas. The present Service Notes deal only with A.C. opera-
tion. For information on service problems encountered with battery operated Radiolas
25 and 28 consult the "Service Notes" issued on those models.
In A.C. operation with RCA Loudspeaker Model 104 A.C. Package UP -971 is used
with Radiola 25 and A.C. Package UP -972 with Radiola 28. These A.C. Packages con-
sist essentially of a special condenser bank, Catacomb resistance strip, "Volume Con-
trol" and "Battery Setting" resistances, connecting cables and other miscellaneous items.
The instructions for installing the various parts are given in the "Instruction Book"
accompanying the particular A.C. package.
The present notes are divided into three parts:
I. Problems Arising in A.C. Operation of Radiola 25.
II. Problems Arising in A.C. Operation of Radiola 28.
III. Problems Common to A.C. Operation of Radiolas 25 and 28.
When isolating trouble each particular section should be consulted as conditions
may warrant.

PART I
Problems Arising in A.C. Operation
of Radiola 25
(1) VOLTAGE READINGS
The following are the correct voltages that should be obtained at the Catacomb
terminal strip across the terminals indicated in the text test table, with the power
turned on at the Loudspeaker. A voltmeter with at least 600 ohms resistance per volt
or the no -current voltmeter described on pages 17 and 18 of these notes should be used
if true readings are to be obtained. The allowable variation is approximately 5 volts in
either direction.
5
 ?;ATE St
Re:

PLAIE FIN
PRIM ST

lo
O
o
F I ST

F I MID

a O
PRIM
FII FIN
fIN

B
uov nus

UV 876

POT MAGNET
a
- e

VOLTMETER BATTERY

¿JACKS
v 8 SWITCH
OSC. COND.

FILAMENT
CONTROL ,'
.0000,
ti I
OSC.!
COILS
VOLUME
CONTROL

m Fi

Io. moro y99 . ..1+I

'moue,
Ó

.
6
o
P
. . .
A.C. PACKAGE CHANGES
2
o-
T

O O+
2

o
G

Figure 1-Radiola 25 A.C. operated continuity circuit diagram

6
 VOLTAGE READINGS OF RADIOLA 25
Taken at Catacomb Terminal Strip-Count Terminals from Right to Left When
Facing the Front of Radiola 25
Terminals Correct Effect
10 to 12 Should measure 31 volts with all Radiotrons lighted and battery
setting near "Off." Positive terminal of voltmeter to be placed
on No. 12.
12 to 13 Should measure 21.5 volts normally. Positive terminal of volt-
meter should be placed on No. 13.
13 to 14 Should measure 41 volts normally. Positive terminal of volt-
meter should be placed on No. 14.

(2) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TESTS

The following tests will show complete continuity for both external and internal
connections of the catacomb. See page 8 for "Continuity Test Instructions."
CATACOMB TESTS (Coils and Connections)
The Radiotrons, Cable and Loop Are to Be Removed
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

15 to P5 Closed Open connection

14 to Pl Closed Open coil No. 3 or No. 5
14 toTerm. 3 Closed Open coil No. 2
14 toP3 Closed Open coil No. 7
14 to Term. 16 Closed Open coil No. 11
13 to P4 Closed Open coil No. 9
11 to G3 Closed Open coil No. 6 or resistance strip
9 to G5 Closed Open coil No. 10
7 to neutralizing cond. Closed Open connection
(Hole between sockets No. 1
and No. 2)
7 to G1 Closed Open IA coil No. 1
6 to G6 Closed Open coil No. 12
5 to G2 Closed Open coil No. 4
4 to P2 Closed Open connection
CATACOMB TESTS (Condensers)
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

15 to Terminal 9 Open Shorted cond. No. 3

11to P4 Open Shorted cond. No. 5
11to G4 Open or weak Shorted grid condenser
9 to G6 Open Shorted cond. No. 4
7 to P1 Open Shorted cond. No. 7
1 to G1 Open Shorted cond. No. 1
7
 CONTINUITY TEST INSTRUCTIONS
Both filament control and volume control rheostats should be adjusted so that half
the resistance is in the circuit, the loop removed and the power supply cable disconnected
from the terminal strip at the rear of the catacomb.
A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts .in series or a voltmeter with voltage
sufficient to give full scale deflection when connected directly across battery terminals
should be used. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive in checking voltage
drop in various circuits.
The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals indicated
in the column titled "Terminal" in the text test table and the results should be as in-
dicated in the column titled "Correct Effect." If the results are negative the cause of
such negative effect will be found in the last column under the heading "Incorrect Effect
Caused by :"
The numbers of the terminals referred to in these tests apply to the terminals
on the connecting strip at the rear of the catacomb frame assembly, counting from
right to left when facing the front of Radiola 25. The designation "P" and "G" refer
to plate and grid contacts of the socket indicated by the number following, counting
from right to left when facing Radiola 25. For example G2 would indicate the grid con-
tact of the second socket; P5 would indicate the plate contact of the fifth tube socket.
The coil numbers referred to in the right hand column will be found in Figure 1.
If the catacomb fails to pass any of the tests it should be removed from the panel
and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals on the cover
plate be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To indicate the
defect in the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note thereon
observed defect.
The various panel parts are comprised in the following tests:
PANEL TESTS
With Radiotrons, Cable and Resistance Strip Removed

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

16 to 15 Closed Defective ist stage jack

(With no telephone plug in
1st stage jack)
11 to 8 Closed Defective volume control
10 to 9 Closed Defective filament control
4 to 3 Closed Defective oscillator coil
5 to 2 Closed Defective oscillator coil
1 to 7 Closed Open loop

PANEL TESTS (Condensers)

Loop Removed

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

7to1 Open Shorted loop tuning condenser

s
ACR059 RE519.
To ßc
V1CA6URCD
R= j OR 000 VOLTS
Mll_LIAMPERC5

1
VOLTS
O-7
C.-500 30 OHM,

Figure 2-Wiring diagram for resistance measurement

(3) RESISTANCE STRIP TESTS

The resistances of the strip mounted directly behind the catacomb can best be
checked by a Resistance Bridge. If this is not available the voltmeter -ammeter method
can be applied. A milliammeter with a scale of 0-500 should be used and a voltage
applied that will give a substantial reading. A circuit diagram of this method is shown
in Figure 2.
The resistance may then be calculated by the use of Ohm's law.
R=
E
j
where R equals ohms, E equals volts -and I equals amperes
volts
or ohms = 1000
milliamperes 1
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or ampere) it is neces-
1000
sary to multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
The allowable values in ohms for the different sections of the resistance strip in
Radiola 25 are tabulated below :

RADIOLA 25 A.C. RESISTANCES

Count Terminals from Right to Left When Facing Radiola 25
Resistance Normal Upper Limit
Lower Limit
Terminals
1-2 218.5 230 241.5
2-3 192 201 208
3-4 Open Open Open
4-5 151.9 155 158.1
. 5-6 143 150 153
6-7 44.75 50 55.25

If the values obtained do not fall within the prescribed limits the strip should be
replaced.
9
(4) INSTALLATION CHANGE IN A.C. PACKAGE UP -971
Some models of Radiola 25 have panel cabling instead of the regular black wire
connections. When installing A.C. Package UP -971 on these models the following in-
structions should be observed. (See Figure 3.)
Remove the panel cable lead (yellow with green tracers) from the left voltmeter
jack and resolder it to the right voltmeter jack.
To one side of the "Volume Control" rheostat are attached two panel cable leads
(each yellow with green tracer.) Disconnect these two leads and determine which one
TERMIINAL STRIP

YELLOW WITH GREEN TRACER

CABLE- FILAMENT
.SwITEM

IJ
.. LEFT RIGHT

OÖ VoLeneTu JxK VOLTMIETER JACK

i.
.
i
'i
Ycuow WITH
VOLUME CONTROL

J
..
iY GREEN TRACER
O L-
.. v-rr. r_.:r.w:::wv:.:.v
..!i..
. v.'r
***.t'
_-"-.- la iMinidi

ORIGINAL CONNECTIONS
------ CONNECTIONS FOR A.G. PACKAGE

Figure 3-Panel wiring change required for installation of UP-971

in some models of Radiola 25

goes to terminal No. 9 on the terminal board. This may be done by means of a pair
of telephones connected in series with a 41/2 volt battery. One of the test points is
placed on terminal No. 9 and the other tried on the two panel leads which were con-
nected to the "Volume Control" rheostat. One of these will give a click when connection
is made to the other test point. This is the one that goes to terminal No. 9.

Solder the lead which goes to terminal No. 9, as determined above, to the long
prong of the filament switch. Resolder the other lead (yellow with green tracer) to
the "Volume Control" rheostat, exactly as it was.
In Instruction Book No. 86997 "A" edition for A.C. Package UP -971, pages 5
and 6, the following two paragraphs are not applicable to this model of Radiola 25:
"It will be noticed that one of the wires from the `Volume
Control' rheostat runs to the right-hand voltmeter clip. Unsolder
it and resolder it to the left-hand clip, as shown in Fig. 4."
"Unsolder either one of the two wires which go to the fila-
ment switch, and solder this wire so that it is on the same switch
blade as the other wire, as shown in Fig. 4."
10
 PART II
Problems Arising in A.C. Operation of Radiola 28
(1) VOLTAGE READINGS
The following are the voltages obtained at the Catacomb terminal strip, when tests
are taken across the terminals indicated in the text test table. A high resistance volt-
meter of at least 600 ohms resistance per volt or the No -Current Voltmeter described in
Section 3, Part III, of these notes should be used. The allowable variation plus or minus
is approximately 5 volts.

VOLTAGE READINGS OF RADIOLA 28

Taken at Catacomb Terminal Strip-Count Terminals from Left to Right When
Facing Radiola 28

Terminals Correct Effect

1 to 21 Should measure 31 volts, normally with all Radiotrons lit and bat-
tery setting near "Off." Positive terminal of voltmeter on No. 1.
1 to 10 Should measure 21.5 volts normally. Positive terminal of volt-
meter to No. 10.
10 to 11 Should measure 41 volts normally.
Positive terminal of voltmeter to No. 11

(2) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TESTS

The following tests will show complete continuity for both external and internal
connections of the catacomb. Terminal numbers refer to terminals on Catacomb terminal
strip, counting from left to right when facing front of Radiola 28. (Figure 4.)
Both filament control and volume control rheostats should be adjusted so that half
the resistance is in the circuit, the loop removed and the cable disconnected from the
terminal strip at the rear of the catacomb.
A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series or a voltmeter with voltage to
give full scale deflection when connected directly across battery terminals should be used
in making this test. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive in checking
voltage drop in various circuits.
Any failure of a circuit to meet the above tests will indicate a defective catacomb
which should be replaced with one of known operating condition.

CATACOMB TESTS (Condensers)

The Radiotrons, Cable and Loop Are to Be Removed
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

P6 to +6 Open Shorted cond. No. 3 or No. 4

9 to P2 Open Shorted catacomb neutralizing
condenser
9 to G6 Open or very faint Shorted grid condenser
14 to 11 Open Shorted cond. No. 1
11
 PLATE ST

PLATE FIN.
PRIM ST

0
o
F

F
I 51

MID
o
0
o
1

F I FI
o
Fil FIN
112H1

FM
F 11 MID

Bo--
110V PLUG

UV 876

QQ90, POT MAGNETO

0000

NPUT
O FIELD 11

FILAMENT

/T. 5
ti LOOP
CONO PLUG
h
VOLTMETER
JACKS
S4 CONTROL

BATTERY
COMP
COND. 14 11
VOLUME Isr
CONTROL LOOP y h
A. F

1 2 3 4 7 6

O-OP 0 VP
I _P II OG ,I,P G OP
2 3 4 Y 7v 8
O-
1 2

+O O- 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O O
A.C. PACKAGE CHANGES
Figure 4 Radiola 28 A.C. operated continuity circuit diagram
12
 CATACOMB TESTS (Coils and Connections)
The Radiotrons, Cable and Loop Are to Be Removed
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

2 to G1 Closed Open connection

6 to G3 Closed Open connection
7 to P3 Closed Open connection
9 to G2 Closed Open 1/2 coil No. 2 or resistance
strip
9 to G4 Closed Open coil No. 4 or resistance strip
10 to Pl Closed Open coil No. 1
10 to P6 Closed Open coil No. 7
11 to P2 Closed Open coil No. 3
11 to P4 Closed Open coil No. 5
11 to Terminal No. 17 Closed Open coil No. 9
12 to G5 Closed Open connection
13 to P5 Closed Open connection
16 to P7 Closed Open connection
18 to P8 Closed Open connection
20 to G8 Closed Open coil No. 10
22 to G7 Closed Open coil No. 8
PANEL TESTS
With Radiotrons, Cable, Loop and Resistance Strip Removed
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

3 to 2 Closed Open R.F. coil

5 to 4 Closed Open volume control
11 to 7 Closed Open R.F. coil
13 to 11 Closed Open oscillator coil
14 to 12 Closed Open oscillator coil
16 to 11 Closed Defective 1st stage jack
(With shorted telephone
plug in 1st stage jack)
17 to 16 Closed Defective 1st stage jack
(With no telephone plug in
1st stage jack)
22 to 21 Closed Open filament control

PANEL TESTS (Condensers)

Loop Removed

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

8 to 6 Open Shorted loop or compensating cond.
8 to 7 Open Shorted neutralizing condenser
13
(3) RESISTANCE STRIP TESTS
listed below:
RADIOLA 28 A.C. RESISTANCES
The method described in Section 3, Part I, of these notes should be used in checking
the value of the various resistances of the resistance strip.
The values in ohms of the various resistances in the Radiola 28 resistance strip are
Count Terminals from Left to Right When Facing Radiola 28
Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit

1-2 185 190 195

*2-3 350 400 450
3-4 158 163 168
4-5 150 155 160
5-6 125 130 135
6-7 116 120 124
7-8 111 115 119
8-9 45 50 55
* On some models secton No. 2 of the resistance strip has been left open. When this is done the
volume control is of 187.5 ohms resistance instead of 375 ohms as used when the strip is not open.
Another series of resistance values with a 250 -ohm Volume
Control found in some models of Radiola 28 is given below:
Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit

1-2 260 271 282

2-3 Open Open Open
3-4 230 236.5 243
4-5 191 197 203
5-6 176 183.5 191
6-7 146 154.5 163
7-8 137 245.5 154
8-9 45 50 55
All resistance strips are interchangeable, provided the volume control has the
correct value for the strip used. This is of utmost importance as the Radiola will not
function properly when the volume control and resistance strip are not correct.
(4) CHANGES IN FACTORY BUILT A.C. RADIOLA 28
The following changes in connections and parts apply to factory built A.C. Radiolas
28 as distinguished from battery operated Radiolas 28 converted to A.C. operation.
Whisker 16 is connected to terminal 19 instead of terminal 17.
The condenser cable has an additional connection.
The output of the Radiola is taken direct from the terminal strip at the rear of
the catacomb and the plug is not used in the first stage jack.
The filament switch voltmeter pin jacks and second audio stage phone jack are
also omitted.
The instruction book accompanying the receiver refers to these changes and should
be consulted when servicing this particular model of Radiola 28.
14
 PART III
Problems Common to A.C. Operation of Radiolas 25 and 28

(1) A.C. PACKAGES AND CABLE

VVhen tests are made, especially voltage readings, at the terminal strip of the cat-
acomb and trouble is found, additional tests to check the preliminary test must be
made. For example, the voltage readings should be taken at the condenser bank terminal
strip and terminal board of the R.P.A. unit. This will prevent a possible defective cable
or condenser bank from indicating trouble elsewhere. If the various tests check and
the readings at the three points are the same it may be well to assume that the trouble
is in the R.P.A. unit.

Figure 5 --Installing condenser bank of A.C. Package UP -972

The small A.C. Package cable connecting the catacomb terminal strip of the Radiola
to the A.C. package condenser bank and the 30 -ft. cable joining the condenser bank to
the H.P.A. unit of the Loudspeaker should be carefully examined to determine if the
leads at the ends of each cable arc worn or the terminals soldered to each lead are corroded
or loose. Worn leads should be repaired or replaced. Corroded or loose terminals Should
be cleaned and resoldered.
15
 o

z
'
"Li 4m
0
a _ w
m
-_
x
z

` B 1} t 6
I
®w
g
W
1- N
y F--

Q
CD
®
r-
ui
¢£

i r
p
:r w

Ce°
W
S
O
>
J
lI
í0
o

o
,
i
Oa

a O
W

CC C.)4
JI f
cro

G.

0
o
_
D

wU
>Z
WN

á
W
-íQ-

Q
H ®
/ B ® B
`
16
(2) HIGH, LOW OR NO VOLTAGE READINGS AT TERMINAL
STRIP OF RADIOLA
This condition may be caused by a defective A.C. package or R.P.A. unit. A check
at the terminal board of the R.P.A. unit will isolate the trouble to the condenser bank
of the A.C. package or cable. If the condenser bank or cable tests O.R. the R.P.A.
unit should be checked for the following indications. It is assumed that the Radiotrons
are of known operating condition and light to normal brilliancy.
No voltage at R.P.A. unit may be due to:
(a) Shorted Resistor UP -591. (Used in place of Radiotron UX-874.)
(b) Open connections at R.P.A. terminal board.
(c) Shorted 7 Mfd. or 4 Mfd. filter condenser. (This will be indicated by ex-
cessively hot plates of Rectrons UX-216-B.
(d) Shorted 2 Mfd. condensers. (Check by means of continuity test.)
Low voltage at R.P.A. Unit may be caused by:
(a) Shorted turns in high voltage winding of power transformer.
(b) Low emission Rectrons UX-216-B.
(c) Leaky 7 Mfd. or 4 Mfd. filter condensers.
(d) Leaky 2 Mfd. condenser (located next to resistance units).
(e) Defective Resistance Units.
High voltage in R.P.A. unit may be caused by:
(a) Defective Pot magnet.
(b) Defective Resistance Units.
(c) Shorted turns in primary of power transformer.
(d) Open Resistance Units R2 or R3.
(3) NO -CURRENT VOLTMETER
When measuring the plate or filament voltages of an A.C. operated Radiola it is
necessary to use a high resistance voltmeter if true values are to be obtained. High
resistance voltmeters are expensive and scarce, consequently need exists for other means
of measuring these various voltages. A method of obtaining correct voltages with any
type of D.C. voltmeter is described below which may be relied on up to the accuracy
of the meter itself and as being more accurate on voltages from an R.P.A. unit than most
high resistance voltmeters.
The various parts and circuit diagram are shown in Figure 6. These parts con-
sist of a 0-7.5 voltmeter with multiplier, D. C. galvanometer, potentiometer, reversing
switch, safety resistance, UX-199 plug and an external voltage in excess of that to
be measured. A compensating resistance of 50 ohms, shunted across the filament prongs
of the "UX Tube Base" is necessary when using the "UX Tube Base" to measure the
filament voltage of any Radiotron UX-199 in an A.C. operated Radiola. This will
compensate for the loss of filament resistance caused by the removal of the Radiotron
UX-199.
17
 The following procedure should be used when measuring any D.C. voltage.
(a) The voltmeter scale covering the voltage to be measured should be used.
(b) If not using UX-plug, disconnect it and 50 -ohm resistance from circuit.
(c) Adjust potentiometer so that voltmeter reads approximately that of the
voltage to be measured.
(d) Connect external voltage to proper "Battery" binding posts.
(e) Connect voltage to be measured to "Flexible Lead" terminals.
(f) Set "Reversing Switch" for correct polarity (determined by experiment).
(g) With "Protective Push Button" open, adjust potentiometer by zero read-
ing of the galvanometer.
(h) After obtaining zero reading close "Protective Push Button" and readjust
potentiometer for zero reading.
(i) Voltage now indicated at voltmeter is correct voltage of circuit under
measurement.
When measuring filament voltage of an A.C. operated catacomb the "UX-Tube
Base," with compensating resistance, is used to connect the source of voltage to be
measured to the test set; otherwise the operations are the same.
The theory of the "No -Current Voltmeter" is based upon the condition that when
an external voltage is applied so as to oppose the voltage of the circuit under measure-
ment, the galvanometer will read zero when the two voltages are exactly the same. The
voltmeter connected across the opposing voltage makes it a simple matter to read what
external voltage is necessary to exactly balance the circuit under measurement.

(4) DISTORTION IN THE SPEAKER

Distortion in the Reproducer unit of the Loudspeaker may be caused by any of
the following:
(a) Poor input from Radiola. (Examine Radiola.)
(b) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser in R.P.A. unit (located next to 7 Mfd. con-
denser).
(c) Shorting of movable coil to pole piece of pot magnet. (Replace cone.)
(d) Defective Radiotron UX-210. (Replace Radiotron.)
(e) Leads from movable coil broken away from cone. (Make these fast with a
little shellac.)
(f) Mis -alignment of Reproducer cone.
The reproducer cone may be readily realigned by removing the front grille and very
carefully adjusting the small round head screw in the center of the cone. In making this
adjustment care must be exercised to prevent damaging the cone, which may be caused
by the screwdriver being pulled out of control by the strong magnetic field about the
pole piece of the pot magnet behind the cone.
18
(5) FLUTTERING
Fluttering sometimes is encountered when an A.C. installation is made. This is a
loud hum having a 60 -cycle base and occurs at the resonant point when manipulating
the tuning drums.
Any means of changing the electrical constants of the audio circuits will correct this
condition. The following remedies are suggested.
(a) Change A.C. Package.
(b) Interchange Radiotrons UX-199 of Catacomb.
(c) Connect 30 to 50 -henry choke across terminals 10 and 15 of catacomb
terminal strip. (Count from left when facing front of Radiola.)
(d) Connect 2 Mfd. condenser in series with 30 -henry choke and then place
combination across terminals 15 and 22 in the Radiola 28. The choke goes
to 15 and condenser to 22.

(6) BLASTING
This condition is present when the volume control is near or at maximum, and
signals are being received from nearby stations. Interchanging the Radiotrons, keeping
those having the least microphonic tendencies in the two detector and first audio sockets
and a change of the UX-210 may help. Also the distance from the Radiola to the Loud-
speaker should be increased. In some cases it may be necessary to insert a choke across
terminals 10 and 16 of Radiola 28 terminal strip. The primary of a Radiola 104 Loud-
speaker input transformer or the complete winding of a Radiola III -A output trans-
former has the correct impedance for this choke. This may be relied upon to clear up the
most obstinate cases of blasting.

(7) HOWLING
Howling may be caused by sound waves from the Loudspeaker setting the elements
of Radiotron UX-199 into vibration. This vibration is amplified and reproduced in the
loudspeaker. Increasing the distance from the Loudspeaker to the Radiola and inter-
changing the Radiotrons will usually eliminate howling. The microphonic Radiotrons
should be kept in the intermediate and R.F. sockets.

(8) FADING OF SIGNALS

Fading of signals beyond the normal slight drop after the speaker has been placed
in operation may be due to any of the following causes:
(a) Defective Radiotron UX-210. This will be accompanied by rough and
unnatural reproduction.
(b) Defective Radiotron UV -876 (or UV -886).
(e) Defective Resistances in R.P.A. Unit. (Indicated by the defective resis-
tance becoming excessively hot. This does not apply to unit R-4, which
becomes very hot during normal operation.)
19
 Circuit Tests

RCA
Radiolas 26, 24, Super -Heterodyne
and Super -VIII
SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-SM-June, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 Hest Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of the
RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing tech-
nical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of the Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorised distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

 Circuit Tests
RCA Radiolas 26, 24, Super -Heterodyne
and Super -VIII
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

These Circuit Tests are divided into two parts, the first part covering Radiola 26
and the second part Radiolas 24, Super -Heterodyne and Super -VIII.

PART I-RADIOLA 26
The catacomb of Radiola 26 is mounted differently than in other Radiolas employ-
ing the standard six -tube catacomb and the connections thereto are reversed. As a
stage change switch is not used, the built-in loudspeaker is at all times connected to the
second audio stage and the phone tip pin jacks to the first stage.

TEST PROCEDURE
(1) See if the filaments of all Radiotrons arc lighted. If none of the Radiotrons
light, look for a possible cause at the filament rheostat or "A" battery connections.
(2) If No. 3 from the left alone does not light, examine the volume control
rheostat. With volume control at 100 Radiotron No. 3 should be of equal brilliancy
with the other Radiotrons.
(3) If Radiotrons light, tap lightly with the finger the fourth Radiotron front
the left. There should be a distinct ringing noise in the loudspeaker. If this noise is
not obtained, one of the three last Radiotrons to the right may be defective.
(4) After substituting new Radiotrons in the three right hand sockets if the ring-
ing noise is not obtained check the battery voltages with a high resistance type of volt-
meter.
The readings should be taken at the terminal block in the battery compartment., or
if the home battery box is used, at terminal block on the back. The plug should be re-
moved and the readings in cabinet from top to bottom and in home battery box from
left. to right should be as follows:
Terminal*Numbers Should Read
1 to 2 4.5 volts. If less than 3.5 replace "A" batteries.
1 to 3 4.5 volts. If less than 4.0 replace "C" batteries.
2 to 4 45 volts. If legs than 34 replace "B" batteries.
2 to 5 90 volts. If less than 68 replace "B" batteries.
If batteries test O. X. and Radiotron No. 2 from left is functioning properly a dis-
tinct click should be heard in the loudspeaker when the finger is placed on the stator
plates of the right hand condenser. Another click should be heard when the finger is
removed.

3
 If none of the above tests give any indication of the failure, the circuit tests on the
panel and catacomb should be made to isolate the trouble. The panel must be removed
from the cabinet in order to get at the terminal strip, and the battery cable disconnected
from the panel, which is accomplished by pulling the connection plug out in the battery
compartment. A pair of head phones with at least 41/2 volts in series should be used in
making this test.

CIRCUIT TESTS
The numbers of the terminals referred to in the following tests apply to the ter-
minals on the connecting strip at the rear of the catacomb. The terminals are numbered
from left to right when facing the front of the set. The designation "P" and "G" refer
to plate and grid contacts of the socket indicated. For example G2 would indicate the
grid contact of the second socket. P6 would indicate the plate contact of the sixth
tube socket. In the same way the indication "F" denotes the filament contact of the
tube socket indicated by the number. The filament contacts are also noted as minus
and plus. The designation of the socket contacts are shown in Fig. 2 (page 7).
Fig. 1(page 6) shows the continuity circuit of the standard six -tube catacomb and
is included to assist in testing catacombs.

PANEL
From To
Should Test
Terminal No. Terminal No.
1 5 Closed
2 7 Closed thru loop
3 4 Closed
5 6 Closed
9 10 Closed

CATACOMB
Terminal No. To Should Test
3 P 1 and P 3 Closed
3 Terminal 13 Closed
3 Whisker 13 Closed
4 P 2 Closed
5 G 2 Closed
7 G 1, 3, 5 and 6 Closed
9 - F 3 Closed
10 -F 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 Closed
11 all -}- F Closed
11 G 4 Closed thru grid leak
11 P 4 Open
12 P 4 Closed
16 P 6 Closed
4
 PART II
Radiolas 24, Super -Heterodyne and Super -VIII
The testing procedure to determine the cause of imperfect operation of Radiolas 24,
Super-Heterodyne or Super-VIII is as follows:
1. See if filaments of all the Radiotrons light. If none of the Radiotrons light look
for a possible cause in the filament switch or "BATTERY SETTING" rheostat.
Put volume control at 100. If third Radiotron from right does not light, look for
cause in the volume control rheostat.
2. If Radiotrons light, tap lightly with the finger, the fourth Radiotron from the
right end of catacomb. With two stages of audio amplification there should be a distinct
ringing noise in the loudspeaker. If this noise is not obtained, one of the three last
Radiotrons may be defective.
3. If after substituting new Radiotrons in the last three sockets and still the ring-
ing noise is not obtained by tapping the fourth Radiotron, check the battery voltages
with a high resistance type voltmeter as follows:
The numbers refer to terminals on the catacomb terminal board starting at the right
at the front of the panel.
when looking

Terminal .1 o.
Remarks
From To
6 9 Should measure 4.5 volts and not less than 4 volts. If less
replace "C" battery. Positive terminal of voltmeter to be
placed on terminal 9.
9 10 Should measure 4.5 volts and not less than 3 volts with all tubes
lighted. If less replace the "A" batteries. Positive ter-
minal of voltmeter to be placed on terminal 10.
10 11 Should measure 45 volts. If less than 34 volts replace "B"
batteries. In Super-Heterodyne, in right hand compart-
ment and in Super -VIII in the middle compartment.
11 12 Should measure 45 volts. If less than 34 volts replace "B"
batteries. In Super -Heterodyne, in left hand compartment
and in the Super-VIII the upper compartment.
8 10 Should measure 3 volts when the volume control rheostat is at
100 and the Battery Setting rheostat is adjusted to the
proper point.

5
 If batteries test O.K. try substituting new Radiotrons for those in the first
4.
three sockets. If the second Radiotron is working properly a distinct click should be
heard in the loudspeaker when the finger is placed on the stator plates of the right hand
variable condenser. Another click should be heard when the finger is removed.
5. If batteries are all O.K. inspect panel wiring, making sure all connections are
tight. Test the jack circuits with a telephone and battery. These circuits are shown
in the instruction book that comes with the set.
6. Test for continuity of loop between terminals 1 and 6.
7. Test for continuity of oscillator coils between terminals 5 and 6 and terminals
3 and 4.

11)

o DEAD ENDS - _ o
m

RADIO CORP OF AMERICA

LEGEND
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
O WHISKERS 233 BROADWAY. N. Y. C.
ME NUMBERS REFER TO NITS ADJACENT CATACOMB/ TEST

Dwg. No. NS CS -100I ate II -16-1925

w,n11. Den. By RE A I CIW. By I AppG. By D^_

Figure 1

Continuity test circuit of standard six-tube catacomb

8. If none of the above tests give any indications of the trouble try the following
series of tests on the catacomb without removing it from the panel. Use head phones
with at. least 4.5 volts in series or voltmeter with voltage sufficient to give full scale
6
deflection when connected directly across the battery terminals. The battery cable should
be disconnected from the panel during this test and the Radiotrons removed.

From
To Should Test
Terminal No.
1 Grid of 1st socket Open
12 Terminal 3 Closed
12 P of 1st socket Closed
12 P of 3rd socket Closed
15 P of 6th socket Closed
12 Terminal 14 Closed
4 P of 2nd socket Closed
5 G of 2nd socket Closed
6 P of 1st socket Open
6 G of 1st socket Closed
6 G of 3rd socket Closed
6 G of 5th socket Closed-weak click in phone,
6 G of 6th socket Closed-weak click in phones
-F of 3rd socket Closed
-F
i

8 of 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, socket Closed
10 P of 4th socket Open
10 Catacomb Can Closed
10 All -{- F Closed
10 G of 4th socket Open
11 P of 4th socket Closed
13 P of 5th socket Closed
15 P of 6th socket Closed
If the catacomb fails to pass any of the tests in part 1 or 2 of these instructions
it should be removed from the panel and replaced by a new one. Under no circum-
stances should the lead seals on the cover plate be broken. No marks of any kind should
be made on the catacomb. Some service men have made a practice of indicating the
defect in the catacomb by markings on the catacomb cover. To indicate the defect in
the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note thereon observed
defect.

F
Figure 2
Radiotron (T-199 Socket Terminals
7
Printed in U.S.A., 1928
 RCA
Radiola 28(Battery Operated)
SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-5M-June, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, III. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hated with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers'. business the Service Division of the
RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing tech-
nical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the 'Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the service of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

 RCA RADIOLA 28
(Battery Operated)
SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
Radiola 28 is a broadcast receiver employing the eight -tube super -heterodyne circuit.
Excellent sensitivity and selectivity characterize this circuit and ample loudspeaker
volume is made possible by use of dry battery power amplifier Radiotron UX-120. A
large battery compartment is provided for all batteries which together with the loop
pick-up, makes the Radiola completely self-contained. For information regarding the
A.C. operated combination Radiola 28 and RCA Loudspeaker 104 consult Service Notes
entitled "A.C. Operation of Radiolas 25 and 28."
Seals: Lead seals are placed on the catacomb of Radiola 28 for protection of the
dealer. Under no circumstances should a catacomb seal be broken. Broken seals indicate
tampering. The special parts that go to make up the catacomb are impregnated in a
wax compound and it is neither advisable nor practicable to attempt repairs without
proper equipment.
If tests indicate a defective catacomb replace it with a new one, returning the
defective one through the regular channels to the nearest RCA Service Station.
(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE
Facing the panel and counting from left to right, the input is brought into the
third Radiotron, which is a stage of tuned Radio Frequency Amplification.
The output of the third Radiotron then goes to the first tube on the left, which is
the frequency combining tube or first detector. The output of the fifth Radiotron, which
is the oscillator, is also fed into the first Radiotron, the resultant combining of fre-
quencies forming an intermediate frequency.
Loop

=- -- --- -__ ----------- -

Radio Frequency
I

(signal) Current
Local Oscillator Frequency
Intermediate Frequency
audio Frequency

Figure 1-Radiola 28 Radiotron sequence

3
 The intermediate frequency signal now passes through tube No. 2 which is the first
stage of I.F. amplification, then skipping tube No. 3, it passes through tube No. 4 which
is the second I.F. stage.
From Radiotron No. 4 the signal is fed into No. 6 which is the second detector.
The audio frequency current is now fed through No. 7 and then into Radiotron UX-120.
Figure 1 illustrates the Radiotron sequence and the path of the different currents
through them.

Figure 2-Testing equipment

(2) OPEN LOOP

The symptoms of an open loop circuit in Radiola 28 are somewhat different from
those manifested by the Radiola Super-Heterodyne, employing the six -tube catacomb.
In the latter type of Radiola an open loop circuit, or broken pig -tail of the loop tuning
condenser causes Station Selector No. 1 to have no apparent effect on tuning. Local
stations may be received, however, when selector No. 2 is in the proper position for a
certain station.
In Radiola 28, however, the loop may be entirely disconnected from the set and
nearby local stations heard when both the left and right hand drum controls are in their
normal position for a given local station. In this case, the windings of the tuned radio
frequency circuit act as a small loop, furnishing the necessary pick-up.
If the center loop connection is open with loop in place hand capacity effect will be
quite noticeable when tuning in stations.
The complete loop circuit may be tested for continuity with a battery in series with
a lamp, voltmeter or headphone (Figure 2). Place one battery lead on terminal 9,
counting left to right on the catacomb terminal strip, and the other first on terminal
No. 6 and then on No. 8. Terminal No. 9 goes to the center tap of the loop and terminals

4
6 and 8 to opposite sides of the compensating condenser connected directly across the
loop. If test from 9 to 8 or 9 to 6 shows open, look for:
(a) Open at point where loop leads connect with loop plug contacts.
(b) Dirty connections between loop plug and loop socket.
(c) Broken leads between loop socket and catacomb terminal board.
(d) Broken loop condenser pig -tail.
The symptoms of a broken loop condenser pig -tail will be the same as those for an
open loop. This pig -tail should therefore be carefully checked.
(3) LOOP NOT VERTICAL WHEN SEATED
To correct this condition remove loop and open lid. Loosen the four machine
screws that hold the loop socket collar assembly in place on the horizontal platform of
the frame. It will be noted that the construction of the upper and lower portions of the
loop socket assembly is similar. When loosening these four screws, keep the nuts from
turning. Having loosened the screws the entire loop socket assembly may be rotated in
an area sufficient to enable the centering of it directly below the bezel ring in the lid
of the cabinet. With the lid closed insert the loop and force it into a vertical position
by applying pressure to the centre spindle. When a vertical position is thus attained,
remove loop from the socket taking care not to move the socket assembly from its new
position. The four screws are then tightened and the loop reinserted. In some models of
Radiola 28 a support is provided to hold the loop in a vertical position when properly
seated in its socket.

Figure 3-Raditron prongs may be cleaned with fine sandpaper

(4) RADIOTRON PRONGS
Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation. They should therefore be care-
fully cleaned occasionally with a piece of fine sandpaper as illustrated in Figure 3. The
use of emery cloth or steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting Radiotrons in
sockets wipe the prongs and base carefully to make certain that all particles of sand are
removed.
5
(5) RADIOTRON SOCKETS
In placing Radiotrons in their respective sockets care should he exercised to make
certain that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons are placed into
the two large holes and two small holes, respectively. If a Radiotron will not fit into
a socket without considerable pressure being applied, the trouble is probably due to ex-
cessive solder on one or more of the prongs. This may be removed with a file or knife.
Never try to force one in, as the design is such that they should fit in snugly without
force. It might be possible by exerting considerable pressure, to force the prongs into
the wrong holes, resulting in a filament burn -out when operated.

(6) LOOSE RHEOSTAT CONTACTS

To get at the rheostat contacts, the panel must be pulled forward. This is done
by removing the four screws which hold the panel. These are located in the top of the
battery compartment. The panel may then be pulled forward sufficiently to get at the
rheostats.
The square head set screw holding the contact arm to the shaft may now be loosened
and the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent so that it will make positive contact
with the resistance strip, making certain that the resistance strip is clean where contact
is made. Tighten set screw and slip panel back into cabinet. Replace the four screws
that were removed.
(7) OUTER EDGE OF DRUM CONTROL SCRAPING AGAINST
ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF PANEL
This condition of the control drums may be due to either or both of the following
causes:
(a) Warped drum control. Check by placing a straight edge on the outer flat
surface of the knurled drum control and noting any irregularity of movement by slowly
rotating the drum. If the drum control is badly warped it will be necessary to replace it.
(b) Drums not properly aligned with escutcheon. In most cases shifting the escutch-
eon plate slightly or slipping the drums on the shafts will remedy this condition.

(8) DRUMS FAIL TO HOLD POSITION

When adjustment is necessary due to the tuning drums slipping their position the
following procedure should be used:
(a) Remove panel from cabinet and re -adjust tension screw on the inside of the
drum. This screw controls the pressure of the friction shoe against the inside of the
opposite drum. If one drum turns too hard when the other is held, the tension screw
may be slightly loosened. Some Radiola 28 models use a drum type clutch. If these drums
slip the screws that hold the inner drum to the condenser shaft or the outer screw used to
adjust the braking action should be tightened.
(b) Should the frequency range be off calibration ascertain whether or not the
drum control is in proper relation to the condenser plates. When the drum control is
set for minimum frequency the rotor plates of the condenser should be entirely inside
the stator ones. In some Radiolas the drums are keyed to the condenser plate shaft,
thus eliminating the possibility of incorrect' frequency calibration due to slipping of the
drum controls of the condenser shaft. Others use a set screw and may require adjustment.
6
(9) LOOP COMPENSATING CONDENSER
This condenser is connected in shunt to the loop circuit to compensate the loop for
increased distributed capacity in the radio frequency windings. It is adjusted at the
factory to properly balance the loop and should, therefore, not be tampered with unless
proper facilities are available for correctly adjusting it. In some Radiolas the adjusting
screw is sealed. This seal will have to be broken should adjustment be found necessary.
The most noticeable need of readjusting the compensating condenser occurs when the
Radiola seems to have lost its ability for distant reception. Having made certain that
the trouble does not lie elsewhere, the following method should be employed to determine
if adjustment of this condenser is required. The necessary equipment consists of a cali -
.00025

SO TURN,
*F20 D.S.C.
ON TUBE
2%i" DIA. 45 VOLTS =
30 OHM5
25" TURN
-1VVVy

--1111i1i11
4.8 VQLTg

Figure 4-Wiling diagram of the modulated oscillator

brated modulated oscillator and a non-metallic screw driver. The circuit diagram of the
modulated oscillator used is shown in Figure 4. The coil consists of 50 turns of No. 20
D.S.C. wire wound on a 21/2 -in. tube with a tap taken off at the 25th turn and connected
to the negative leg of the filament. The variable condenser has a capacity of .0005
Mfd. This oscillator will cover the frequency range of 550 to 1500 B.C. (200 to 546
meters) very efficiently. The grid condenser and leak modulate the output, the note
depending on the value of the grid leak. A four-megohm leak is recommended, but
if a lower or higher audio note is desired it is merely necessary to change grid leaks,
a higher resistance leak giving a lower note and vice versa. Do not use a variable grid
leak. The grid condenser is .00025 Mfd. A 45 -volt "B" battery for plate supply is
sufficient. A UX-199 Radiotron will be found to have ample power output. This oscil-
lator will be found useful in servicing all types of receivers, adjusting compensating con-
denser on Radiola 30 and neutralizing Radiola 20. It will amply repay the dealer for
the small outlay of material and labor required.
7
 To determine if adjustment of the compensating condenser is necessary proceed as
follows:
(a) Start set up in regular manner using headphones instead of
plugged in at second audio jack.
(b) Remove loop.

Figure 5-Adjusting the loop compensating condenser

(c) Pull panel forward and place modulated oscillator in an inductive relation to
the R.F. transformer. This transformer is the first winding on the left of the long
dilecto tube located directly in front of the catacomb when looking at the front of the
Radiola, or, if more convenient, a pick-up wire from the vicinity of the oscillator wound
around the R.F. transformer winding will prove satisfactory. The oscillator is placed
in operation at 1500 K.C.
(d) Tune the Radiola, as in receiving a broadcast signal, until the modulated oscil-
lator signal is heard, carefully adjusting for its point of maximum signal strength.
When this is found it should be noted on the left control drum.
8
 (e) Remove pick-up wire if used and place oscillator approximately 20 feet from
the Radiola. Replace loop and tune in the oscillator signal as before. If the maximum
signal point is different from that previously noted on the drum control the compen-
sating condenser requires adjustment.
(f) Before proceeding with the adjustment set control drum at dial point of maxi-
mum signal when not using the loop, then, with loop inserted, and using the non-metallic
screwdriver (Figure 5), alter the capacity of the compensating condenser either plus or
minus until maximum signal is again obtained. If varying the capacity of this con-
denser does not bring the signal strength back to that first noted, or if the loudest signal
is at either extreme of the condenser setting, it will be necessary to slightly slip the main
tuning condensers at their coupling in order to have the resonant point lie within the
range of the compensating condenser. In only rare cases, however, will this be found
necessary as the resonant point will generally lie within the range of the compensating
condenser.
When maximum signal strength is obtained at a certain setting of the compensating
condenser the loop is correctly balanced. This procedure should be repeated at 550
K.C. and if necessary a slight readjustment made.
For general purposes it has been found that when the circuits are checked at 1500
K.C. and then at 550 R.C. and the resonant points noted on the dial are leithin 1 degree
of each other the Radiola will operate satisfactorily and is properly balanced.
In the foregoing instructions, it may be taken that these resonant points are the true
peaks of these circuits. This is true only of the heterodyne detector circuit as the
resonant point with the loop in use is the average point of the two peaks of these cir-
cuits. This does not affect the adjustment, however, and when the resonant points are
together, the accuracy of the adjustment can be relied on.

(10) WEAK SIGNALS DUE TO HIGHLY SHIELDED

LOCATION
There may be found an occasional location so badly shielded that an external pick-
up will be necessary. Installations in steel buildings are at times troubled with this
shielding effect. Should this condition manifest itself, the installation of antenna
coupler AL -953 is recommended. This coupler should be installed as described in the
instruction book accompanying it. A short antenna of 25 or 30 feet in length made of
insulating wire may be erected outside of the building or if this is not convenient, hung
out of the window. The lead-in should be a continuation of the antenna itself and con-
nected to the antenna post of the coupler. A good ground such as a cold water pipe
or steam radiator should be connected to the ground post of the coupler. Thus installed
we have a low resistance antenna connected to an aperiodic coupling coil. The tuning
condenser calibration remains unchanged.

(11) D.C. BUS BAR ON REAR OF CATACOMB

The screws holding the bus bar on the rear of catacomb must always be kept tight,
otherwise noisy or intermittent reception may result. The bus bar connects the fila-
ments in parallel for battery operation. Occasionally the screws holding it in place may
become loose and for this reason they should be inspected and tightened if necessary.
9
(12) OSCILLATION
A Radiola 28 may at times oscillate, due to the following causes:
(a) Excessive filament voltage.
(b) Defective neutralizing condenser between terminals 7 and 8 of the cata-
comb terminal board.
(c) Defective catacomb.
The remedies are obvious. Reduce filament voltage if excessive. The other units,
if they test defective, must be replaced. Some Radiola 28 models have adjustable loop
neutralizing condensers. Refer to RCA Radiola 30A or 32 Service Notes for detailed
adjustment procedure.

22íV 2ziV 22 V.

0- o- 0 -Osut +°-
+
45v. 45 V.

+0
+

n n n
45 V.

90 V.
135 V. -22i V+
+_
4; V.

Figure 6-Correct voltage readings aeróss battery terminal strip

(13) PROPER BATTERY CONNECTIONS
Disconnect battery terminal strip from the catacomb terminal board by loosening
the screws holding it in place. Battery readings may then be taken directly across the
various battery terminals by a high resistance type voltmeter. Figure 6 shows the
correct readings to be obtained on the battery terminal strip. Approximately a 25%
drop is permissible before renewal is necessary.
(14) LOUD SPEAKER POLARITY
In Radiolas employing Radiotron UX-120 in the last audio amplification stage it is
very important that the loudspeaker be so connected that the magnetic field generated
by the relatively large plate current from the 135 -volt B battery will not oppose the
permanent magnetic field of the speaker pole pieces. In some Radiola UZ -1325
loudspeakers one of the leads is brown, the other black with a brown tracer. The
solid brown lead should be connected to the tip of the phone plug and the black lead
with brown tracer to the sleeve of the phone plug. In Radiolas it is standard prac-
tice to connect the phone jack in such a manner that the tip of the phone plug will
go to the plate of the audio amplifying Radiotron and the sleeve to the positive (+)
10
B battery terminal. If electromagnetic speakers similar to the C Z-1325 are incorrectly
connected, they will soon lose their sensitivity through a weakening of the permanent
magnetism of the pole pieces. When the leads are properly connected, the magnetic
field generated by the steady plate current in the speaker coils intensifies the permanent
magnetic field of the pole pieces and maintains the permanent magnetism.
If there is doubt of the correct connection, loud speakers with metallic diaphragms
such as UZ -1325 should be so adjusted that the diaphragm just strikes the actuating
magnets or pole pieces as will be evidenced by a clattering noise when loudest notes are
played. Reversing the loudspeaker leads will either accentuate or lessen the clattering.
That connection which gives greatest clattering is the correct one to use. The speaker
should then be readjusted so that no clattering occurs on the greatest volume desired.
In Radiola loudspeaker models 100, 102 and 104, however, the polarity is not an
important factor. They should accordingly be connected in the manner that gives the
most pleasing reproduction.

SOCKETS SOCKETS
i-3-5-7 2-4 G-8

e Fig. 7-Filament polarity

of the various catacomb
sockets

(15) FILAMENT POLARITY

When testing the filament circuits of Radiola 28 it will be noted that the polarity
of the filament contacts of each catacomb socket reverses from that on either side, mak-
ing four sockets with one combination and four with another. Figure 7 illustrates the
correct polarity of the various sockets and when testing catacombs this must be kept
in mind.

(16) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TEST

In making the tests for continuity in both the external and internal connections of
the catacomb both filament control and volume control rheostats should be adjusted so
that half the resistance is in the circuit, the loop in place (except for condenser panel
test) and the power supply cable disconnected from the terminal strip at the rear of
the catacomb.
A pair of headphones with at least 4/ volts in series or a voltmeter with voltage
sufficient to give full scale deflection when connected directly across battery terminals
should be used in making this test. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive
in checking voltage drop in various circuits.
II
 r--LOOP COND. VOLTMETER
S 5 S JACKS',+
--COMP. COND.
iST RF OSC.

14 13
Ira
12 I I FILAMENT
COIL CONTROL
SYSTEM
BATTERY
LOOP SWITCH

IST A.F 2ND A.F

VOLUME
CONTROL

-y (t,
O

6
(f

y 4 <
1 b
`'`'`Y``-
1

b: :: :
® 1Lì

<
Ûl

<

H bó
<1
a
..
<
T ;

oa

1 2
.

5
=,_- ó
- l' 4
< <<

5 7
{,
10
o,
9

< <
(1.

.--1-4-1.
p

+
O- _ I;L-___r,
o40
s, rl___ .1- A.
P_

!_1
p G,
CA -..-.-CA
o-8
(_1-

Figure 8 Radiola 28 continuity diagram

12
 The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals indicated
under the colum marked "Terminal" and the results should be as indicated under the
column marked "Correct Effect." If the results are negative the cause of such negative
effect will be found in the last column under the heading "Incorrect Effect Caused By."
The first colum indicates the circuit under test.
The numbers of the terminals referred to in these tests apply to the terminals on
the connecting strip at the rear of the catacomb frame assembly. The designation "P"
and "G" refer to plate and grid contacts of the socket indicated by the number follow-
ing. For example G2 indicates the grid contact of the second socket; P7 indicates
the plate contact of the seventh tube socket. The coil numbers referred to in the right
hand column will be found in Figure 8.
PANEL TEST
The various panel parts are comprised in the following tests:

Circuits Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

Loop 6 to 8 Closed Open loop
6 to 9 Closed Open 1/2 loop
8 to 9 Closed Open 1/2 loop
R. F. Coil 7 to 11 Closed Open R. F. coil
2 to 3 Closed Open R. F. coil
Osc. Coil 12 to 14 Closed Open oscillator coil
11 to 13 Closed Open oscillator coil
Rheostat 21 to 22 Closed Open filament rheostat or
switch
Vol. Control 4 to 5 Closed Open volume control
Jacks 16 to 17 Closed Defective 1st A. F. jack
18 to 19 Open Defective 2nd A. F. jack
PANEL TEST (Condensers)
(Loop Removed)
Circuits Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:
Loop 6 to 8 Open Shorted loop tuning or com-
pensating condenser
7 to 8 Open Shorted loop neutralizing
condenser
CATACOMB TEST (Condensers)
Circuit Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:
Grid G2 to P2 Open Shorted condenser No. 5
G7 to 22 Open Shorted condenser No. 2
Plate P6 to 1 Open Shorted condenser No. 4
P6 to 22 Open Shorted condenser No. 3
13
 CATACOMB TEST (Coils and Connections)
Circuit Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:
Grid G1 to 2 Closed Open connections
G2 to 3 Closed Open coil No. 2
G3 to 6 Closed Open connections
G4 to 9 Closed Open coil No. 4
G5 to 12 Closed Open connection
G6 to +F6 Closed Open grid leak or if loud
through click, shorted grid leak or
grid leak grid condenser
G7 to 14 Closed Open coil No. 8
G8 to 20 Closed Open coil No. 10

Plate Pl to 10 Closed Open coil No. 1

P2 to 11 Closed Open coil No. 3
P3 to 7 Closed Open connections
P4 to 11 Closed Open coil No. 5
P5 to 13 Closed Open connections
P6 to 10 Closed Open coil No. 7
P7 to 16 Closed Open connections
P8 to 18 Closed Open connections
11 to 17 Closed Open coil No. 9

Filaments 1 to +Fl Closed Open + filament lead

1 to +F2 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F3 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F4 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F5 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F6 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F7 Closed Open + filament lead
1 to +F8 Closed Open + filament lead
Battery Switch on
22 to
22 to -F2
-Fl Closed Open -- filament lead

22 to -F3
22 to -F4
Closed
Closed
Open
Open -- filament lead
filament lead

22 to -F5
22 to -F6
Closed
Closed
Open
Open -- filament lead
filament lead

22 to -F7
22 to -F8
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
-- filament lead
filament lead
filament lead

If the catacomb fails to pass any of the above tests it should be removed from the
panel and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals on the
cover plate be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To
indicate the defect in the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and
note thereon observed defect.
14
 Schematic Circuit Diagram
of Radiola 28

RADIO CORP. OF AMERICA

NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
233 BROADWAY, N. Y. C.
RADIOLA 28
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Dwg. No. NS -28-2 Date 10-24-1925
I

Dwn. By /KM I Ckd. By ',A I

Appd. By ti

This circuit diagram is not intended for use in checking continuity tests. Use
the continuity wiring diagram illustrated in Figure 7, page 12, for such tests.

15
Printed in U.S.A., 1928
 RADIOLA 30 Reg. U. S. Pat. Office

SERVICE
NS
NOTES -30-2
Second Edition-November, 1926

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Prepared by
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
233 Broadway, New York City
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 10 South La Salle Street 28 Geary Street
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
3308 Fourteenth Street, N. W.
Washington, D. C.
 A Word or Two About Service
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the National Service Division
of the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing
technical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

RADIOLA 30 SERVICE NOTES
Prepared By

NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION

NS -30-2

INTRODUCTION
Radiola 30 is a complete, self contained, radio broadcast receiver of the super -heterodyne
type operating entirely from an A.C. source of supply. (Figure 1.) The service problems en-
countered will not be materially different from those encountered in Radiola 28 and Radiola
104 Loudspeaker. However, the circuits are not identical and tests are not the same. The
Radiola 100 Loudspeaker unit is used and the Service Notes prepared for it may be found
useful.

Figure 1- -Rae% view of Radiola 30 showing arrangement of parts

The notes are divided into three sections, namely: Panel Assembly and Loop, Loudspeaker
Assembly, and Rectifier -Power -Amplifier Unit. The particular section desired (as conditions
may warrant) should be consulted when service work is performed.
8
PROTECTIVE SEALS AND THEIR USE
The lead seals placed on various units of Radiola 30 by R. C. A. are for the protection
of the dealer. Broken seals indicate tampering.

Under. no circumstances should a catacomb seal be broken. The special parts that go to
make up the catacomb are impregnated in a wax compound and it is neither advisable nor prac-
ticable to attempt repairs without proper equipment. If tests indicate a defective catacomb re-
place it with a new one, returning the defective one through the regular channels to the nearest
R. C. A. Service Station.

With exception of the catacomb seals, a service man many find it necessary to break
those on other units in order to make repairs. In such instances he should replace those broken
by suitable substitute seals when the repair work is finished. Thus he is aided in determining
whether any trouble that may develop later is due to tampering or ordinary wear and tear of
assembled parts. The unit that has been tampered with will be indicated by a broken seal. This
information places the dealer in a preferred position when it is found necessary to render a bill
for service.
 PART I

Panel Assembly and Loop

(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE

Facing the panel and counting from left to right, the input is brought into the third Radio-
tron, which is a stage of tuned Radio Frequency Amplification.

The output of the third Radiotron then goes to the first tube on the left, which is the
frequency combining tube or first detector. The output of the fifth Radiotron, which is the
oscillator, is also fed into the first Radiotron, the resultant combining of frequencies forming an
intermediate frequency.

The intermediate frequency signal now passes through tube No. 2, which is the first stage
of I.F. amplification, then skipping tube No. 3, it passes through tube No. 4 which is the second
I.F. stage.

_
LOOP
7

1>t D[T I1t I.F. --1

r ---T. RF 2~ I.F. r OSC. 1 Z VET
I ; Ì 1 1

I I 1 I I
L

RADIO rcauENCY (SIGNAL) CURRENT

LOCAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY CURRENT
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCv CURRENT
AUDIO FREQUENCY CURRENT

Figure 2-Radiotron sequence and path of the different currents.

From Radiotron No. 4 the signal is fed into No. 6, which is the second detector. The audio
frequency current is now fed through Radiotron No. 7 and Radiotron UX-210 in the R. P. A.
unit. Figure 2 illustrates the Radiotron sequence and the path of the different currents through
them.
5
(2) OPEN LOOP

The symptoms of an open loop circuit in Radiola 30 are somewhat different from those
manifested by the Radiola Super -Heterodyne, employing the six -tube catacomb. In the latter
type of Radiola an open loop circuit, or broken pig -tail of the loop tuning condenser causes
Station Selector No. 1 to have no apparent effect on tuning. Local stations may be received,
however, when selector No. 2 is in the proper position for a certain station.

In Radiola 30, however, the loop may be entirely disconnected from the set and nearby
local stations heard when both the left and right hand drum controls are in their normal position
for a given local station. In this case, the windings of the tuned radio frequency circuit act as a
small loop, furnishing the necessary pick-up.

It will be somewhat difficult, therefore, to tell whether or not the loop circuit is open
without testing it for continuity. In general, if the center terminal of the loop terminal strip
were open very little effect on local stations would be noted. If either leg of the loop were open
signal strength from local stations would be considerably reduced-it is doubtful whether dis-
tant stations would be heard at all.

The complete loop circuit may be tested for continuity with a battery in series with a lamp,
voltmeter or headphone. Place one battery lead on terminal 9, counting left to right on the
catacomb terminal strip, and the other first on terminal No. 6 and then on No. 8. Terminal
No. 9 goes to the center tap of the loop and terminals 6 and 8 to opposite sides of the com-
pensating condenser connected directly across the loop. If test from 9 to 8 or 9 to 6 shows open,
look for:

(a) Open at point where leads are connected on loop terminal strip.
(b) Open in loop cable.
(c) Open in compensating inductance.
(d) Broken loop pig-tail.

The symptoms of a broken loop condenser pig -tail will be the same as those for an open
loop. This pig -tail should therefore be carefully checked.

(3) RADIOTRON SOCKETS

In placing Radiotrons in their respective sockets care should be exercised to make certain
that the two large pins and two small pins of the Iadiotrons are placed into the two large
holes and two small holes, respectively. If a Radiotron will not fit into a socket without
considerable pressure being applied, the trouble is probably due to excessive solder on one or
more of the prongs. This may be removed with a file or knife. Never try to force one in, as
the design is such that they should fit in snugly without force. It might be possible by exert-
ing considerable pressure, to force the prongs into the wrong holes, resulting in a filament
burn -out.
6
 (4) RADIOTRON PRONGS
Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation. They should therefore be carefully
cleaned occasionally with a piece of fine sandpaper as illustrated in Figure 3. The use of emery
cloth or steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting Radiotrons in catacomb wipe the
prongs and base carefully to make certain that all particles of sand are removed.

Figure 3-Radiotron prongs may be cleaned with fine sandpaper

(5) LOOSE RHEOSTAT CONTACTS

To get at the rheostat contacts, the panel must be released from the metal track and pulled
forward. This is done by opening up the back panel of the Radiola and slipping the panel
retaining pins through the small opening in the track. The main panel may then be pulled
forward sufficiently to get at the rheostats.

The square head set screw holding the contact arm to the shaft may now be loosened and
the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent so that it will make positive contact with the
resistance strip, making certain that the resistance strip is clean where contact is made. Tighten
set screw and slip panel back into cabinet. The pins will fall in their respective slots in the
track when the panel is pushed into the cabinet.
7
(6) OUTER EDGE OF DRUM CONTROL SCRAPING AGAINST
ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF PANEL
This condition may be due to two causes :
(a) Warped drum control. Check by placing a straight edge on the outer flat surface of
the knurled drum control and note any irregularity of movement by slowly rotating the drum.
If the drum control is badly warped it will be necessary to replace it.
(b) Condenser improperly aligned. To correct this condition remove front panel as pre-
viously instructed and adjust the mounting screws of the condenser. The two mounting screws
that hold the back end plate of the condenser pass through elongated holes in the metal frame,
thus allowing a degree of play sufficient for adjustment purposes.

(7) NOISY RECEPTION CAUSED BY SCRAPING DIALS

Occasionally noisy reception is encountered which cannot be traced to electrical causes.
A close inspection of the dials will show the cause of this trouble.
The tuning drums may be thrown out of alignment, causing the metal dials to scrape against
each other. This scraping, while not in any way connected with the electrical circuits, affects
the characteristics of the circuits and results in distorted sound production from the loudspeaker.
The remedy consists of adjusting the drum hex huts to provide the necessary clearance so that
scraping*will not take place. If adjusting these hex nuts does not provide the necessary clear-
ance the points touching should be filed until clearance results. Care should be taken to prevent
scratching the dials.

(8) DRUMS FAIL TO HOLD POSITION

The following method should be employed in adjusting the tuning drums to their proper
position.
(a) Remove panel from cabinet and re-adjust tension screw on the inside of the drum.
This screw controls the pressure of the friction shoe against the inside of the opposite drum.
If one drum turns too hard when the other is held, the tension screw may be slightly loosened.
(b) Should the frequency range be off calibration ascertain whether or not the drum control
is in proper relation to the condenser plates. When the drum control is set for minimum
frequency the rotor plates of the condenser should be entirely inside the stator ones. In some
models the drums are keyed to the condenser plates, thus eliminating the possibility of incor-
rect frequency calibration due to slipping of the drum controls on the condenser shaft.

(9) LOOP COMPENSATING CONDENSER

This condenser is connected in shunt to the loop circuit to compensate the loop for increased
distributed capacity in the radio frequency wind ngs. It is adjusted at the factory to properly
balance the loop and should, therefore, not be tampered with unless proper facilities are avail-
able for correctly adjusting it. In some models the adjusting screw is sealed. This seal
will have to be broken should adjustment be fouid necessary.
The most noticeable need for readjusting the compensating condenser occurs when the
Radiola seems to have lost its ability for distant reception. Having made certain that the
trouble does not lie elsewhere, the following method should be employed to determine if
adjustment of this condenser is required. The necessary equipment consists of a calibrated
8
modulated oscillator and a non-metallic screw driver. The circuit diagram of the modulated
oscillator used is shown in Figure 4. The coil consists of 50 turns of No. 20 D.S.C. wire wound
on a 21/2 -in. tube with a tap taken off at the 25th turn and connected to the negative leg of the
filament. The variable condenser has a capacity of .0005 Mfd. This oscillator will cover the
frequency range of 550 to 1500 K.C. (200 to 546 meters) very efficiently. The grid condenser
and leak modulate the output, the note being dependent on the value of the grid leak. A four-
megohm leak is recommended, but if a lower or higher audio note is desired it is merely neces-
sary to change grid leaks, a higher resistance leak giving a lower note and vice versa. Do not
use a variable grid leak. The grid condenser is .00025 Mfd. A 45 -volt "B" battery for plate
supply is sufficient. A UX-199 Radiotron will be found to have ample power output. This
oscillator will be found useful in servicing all types of receivers, adjusting compensating con-
denser on Radiola 28 and neutralizing Radiola 20. It will amply repay the dealer for the
small outlay of material and labor required.
.00025

UXI99
4 ME6
30 TURN5
ßí20 P.G.C.
ON TUBE 45 VOLTS
a/a PIA.
amIP

30 OHMS
25e" TURN

-.12111111111
4.5 VOLTS

Figure 4-Wiring diagram of the modulated oscillator

To determine if adjustment of the compensating condenser is necessary proceed as

follows :-
(a) Start set up in regular manner using headphones instead of loudspeaker, plugged in
at external speaker jack.
(b) Disconnect all three loop connections at loop terminal strip.
(e) Remove back from cabinet and place modulated oscillator in an inductive relation to
the R.F. transformer. This transformer is the first winding on the left of the long dilecto tube
located directly in front of the catacomb when looking at the front of the Radiola. If
more convenient, a pick-up wire from the vicinity of the oscillator wound around the R.F.
transformer winding will prove satisfactory. The oscillator is placed in operation at 1500 K.C.
9
 Figure 5-Adjusting the compensating condenser with a non-metallic screw -driver

(d) Tune the Radiola, as in receiving a broadcast signal, until the modulated oscillator
signal is heard, carefully adjusting for its point of maximum signal strength. When this is
found it should be noted on the left control drum.
(e) Remove pick-up wire if used and place oscillator approximately 20 feet from the
Radiola. Reconnect loop terminals and tune in the oscillator signal as before. If the maximum
signal point is different from that previously noted on the drum control the compensating
condenser requires adjustment.
(f) Before proceeding with the adjustment set control drum at dial point of maximum
signal when not using the loop, then, with loop connected, and using the non-metallic screw-
driver (Figure 5), alter the capacity of the compensating condenser either plus or minus until
maximum signal is again obtained. If varying the capacity of this condenser does not bring the
signal strength back to that first noted, or if the loudest signal is at either extreme of the con-
denser setting, it will be necessary to slightly slip the main tuning condensers at their coupling
in order to have the resonant point lie within the range of the compensating condenser. In
only rare cases, however, will this be found necessary as the resonant point will generally lie
within the range of the compensating condenser.
When maximum signal strength is obtained at a certain setting of the compensating con-
denser the loop is correctly balanced. This procedure should be repeated at 550 K.C. and if
necessary a slight readjustment made.
For general purposes it has been found that when the circuits are checked at 1500 K.C. and
then at 550 K.C. and the resonant points noted on the dial are within 1 degree of each other the
Radiola will operate satisfactorily and is properly balanced.
In the foregoing instructions, it may be taken that these resonant points are the true peaks
of these circuits. This is true only of the heterodyne detector circuit as the resonant point with
the loop in use is the average point of the two peaks of these circuits. This does not affect the
adjustment, however, and when the resonant points are together, the accuracy of the adjustment
can be relied on.
lo
 (10) WEAK SIGNALS DUE TO HIGHLY SHIELDED LOCA-
TION
There may be found an occasional location so badly shielded that an external pick-up will
be necessary. Installations in steel buildings are at times troubled with this shielding effect.
Should this phenomenon manifest itself, a short antenna of insulated wire not over 25 or 30 feet
in length may be erected outside of the building or may be conveniently hung out of a window
although it would, of course, be better to get it away from the absorbing effect of the building,
if possible. This antenna should be inductively coupled to the loop of Radiola 30 by winding a
few turns of the lead-in, which should preferably be a continuation of the antenna itself, to a
diameter of eight or nine inches, placing this coil at rear of the left compartment and in inductive
relation to the loop. (Figure 6.) Enough wire should be left over after forming this coupling
coil to serve as a ground lead, connecting same preferably to a cold water pipe by means of an
approved ground clamp. It will be noted that no connections whatsoever are made in this length
of wire from the far end of the antenna until connected to ground. Thus installed we have a
low resistance antenna conveying the Radio waves to an aperiodic coupling coil, to be picked up
by the loop of Radiola 30 and transmitted to the tuning elements in the usual manner. The loop
loses its directional effect, but the loop tuning condenser calibration remains unchanged.

Figure 6-Proper installation of the coupling coil when using a small outdoor antenna to bring
in signals in a highly shielded location
11
 H311 MS 9N11tl113d0

ti
000Qo!'
.I;
euO
i

àA

N
tti s <

'
J

000

_
ó
©
01
i
N' \
1 ^ á
áh
II
11111

11111 `
-N
i 1© _ 4+

á, \-. "9NI0)Yltl)
sn311sIHM
(11) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TEST

Both filament control and volume control rheostats should be adjusted so that half the
resistance is in the circuit, the loop connections opened and the power supply cable disconnected
from the terminal strip at the rear of the catacomb.

A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series or a voltmeter with voltage sufficient
to give full scale deflection when connected directly across battery terminals should be used in
making this test. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive in checking voltage drop
in various circuits.

The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals on the catacomb
terminal board indicated in the test table below under the column marked "Terminal" and the
results should be as indicated under the column marked "Correct Effect." If the results are
negative the cause of such negative effect will be found in the last column under the heading
"Defect." The first column indicates the circuit under test.
The designation "P" and "G" refer to plate and grid contacts of the socket indicated by
the number following. For example G2 would indicate the grid contact of the second socket;
P7 would indicate the plate contact of the seventh tube socket. The coil numbers referred to
in the right hand column will be found in Figure 7.

If the catacomb fails

to pass any of the above tests it should be removed from the panel
and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals on the cover plate
be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To indicate the defect in
the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note thereon observed defect.
The following tests will show complete continuity for both external and internal connec-
tions of the catacomb.

CATACOMB TEST (Coils and Connections)

(Remove Terminal Strip)

Circuits Terminal Correct Effect Defect

Grid 2 to G 1 Closed Open connection

5 to G 2 Closed Open 1/2 coil No. 2, resistance strip,
or catacomb connection
6 to G 3 Closed Open connection
9 to G 4 Closed Open coil No. 4, or resistance strip
12 to G 5 Closed Open connection
20 to G 8 Closed Open coil No. 10
22 to G 7 Closed Open coil No. 8
13
 CATACOMB TEST (Coils and Connections)-Continued

Circuits Terminal Correct Effect Defect

Plate 7 to P 3 Closed Open connection

10 to P 1 Closed Open coil No. 1
10 to P 6 Closed Open coil No. 7
11 to P 2 Closed Open coil No. 3
11 to P 4 Closed Open coil No. 5
11 to Term. 17 Closed Open coil No. 9
13 to P 5 Closed Open connection
16 to P 7 Closed Open connection
18 to P 8 Closed Open connection

Filament +F 1 to 1 Closed Open connection

-F 1 to + F2 Closed Open connection
F 1 to 4 Closed Open connection
-F 2 to 5 Closed Open connection
+ F 3 to 5 Closed Open connection
-F 3 to 9 Closed Open connection or resistance strip
-F 3 to + F4 Closed Open connection
-F 4 to 9 Closed Open connection
-F 4 to + F5 Closed Open connnofion
-F 5 to 14 Closed Open connection or resistance strip
-F 5 to + F6 Closed Open connection
-F 6 to 14 Closed Open connection
-F 6 to + F7 Closed Open connection
-F 7 to 14 Closed Open connection or resistance strip
-F 7 to + F8 Closed Open connection
-F 8 to 22 Closed Open connection

CATACOMB TEST (Condensers)

Resistance Strip Removed

Circuits Terminal Correct Effect Defect

Grid F6toG6 Open or very weak Shorted grid condenser or grid

leak
G7to-}-F7 Open Shorted condenser No. 2

Plate -F6toP6 Open Shorted condenser No. 8

14
 The various panel parts are comprised in the following tests:-
PANEL TEST
(Terminal Strip Removed)

Terminal Correct Effect Defect

22 to 21 Closed Open filament rheostat

19 or 17 to 16 Closed Defective contact in first stage jack
14 to 12 Closed Open Oscillator coil
13 to 11 Closed Open Oscillator coil
11 to 7 Closed Open primary of R.F. transformer
5 to 4 Closed Open volume control rheostat
3 to 2 Closed Open secondary of R.F. trans-
former
Replace Terminal Strip
9 to 8 Closed Open one-half loop
9 to 6 Closed Open one-half loop

PANEL TEST (Condensers)

Loop Disconnected

Terminal Correct Effect Defect

8 to 6 Open Short in either or both loop tuning or

compensating condenser
8 to 7 Open Shorted neutralizing condenser

(12) RESISTANCE STRIP TEST

The resistances of the strip mounted directly behind the catacomb can best be checked by
a Resistance Bridge. If this is not available the voltmeter ammeter method can be applied. A
milliammeter with a scale of 0-500 should be used and a voltage applied that will give a sub-
stantial reading. A circuit diagram of this method is shown in Figure 8.
The resistance may then be calculated by the use of Ohms law.

R -j E Where R equals ohms, E equals

{volts and I equals amperes
or 1000
Volts
Milliamperes
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or o 0 o ampere) it is necessary to
multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
The resistance strip terminals will be found numbered from left to right in Figure 7.
The values of resistance for the different sections of the strip are tabulated in the follow-
ing table when a 375 -ohm volume control is used.
15
 Resistance Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit

1-2 185 190 195

2-3 350 400 450
3-4 158 163 168
4-5 150 155 160
5-6 125 130 135
6-7 116 120 124
7-8 111 115 119
8-9 45 50 55

To ßc1
AcRO59 ResiS.

OtiC.A6uRtp
I R= E
OR 1000
VOLTS
MILLIAMPEReS

1
O-7 6 VOLTS

O -Soo 3O OMM!

Figure 8-Wiring diagram for resistance measurement

When the volume control is of 250 ohms resistance the following are the correct values:

Resistance Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit

1-2 260 271 282

2-3 Open Open Open
3-4 230 236.5 243
4-5 191 197 203
5-6 176 183.5 191
6-7 146 154.5 163
7-8 137 145.5 154
8-9 45 50 55

16
 PART II

Loudspeaker Assembly
The loudspeaker incorporated in Radiola 30 (Figure 9), is a standard Model 100 unit with
a special mounting for the cone. This speaker is carefully adjusted at the factory and should
be very stable in operation regardless of volume. Should adjustments seem necessary the quality
of output may first be checked by plugging a speaker of known quality into the jack provided for
an external speaker (in left compartment), and the quality of reproduction noted. This will
isolate trouble to the loudspeaker or other units.

Gw.wcv.. Rm

Figure 9-Details of loudspeaker unit

(1) DISTORTION OR RATTLE

If distortion or rattle is isolated to the reproducer unit, look for:
(a) Foreign matter interfering with armature action.
(b) Armature striking pole pieces.
(c) Excessive pressure on stylus.
(d) Bent stylus.
(e) Loose or bent connecting rod.
(f) Defective cone.
17
 On examination it will be seen that the armature vibrates between the pole pieces, this
motion being transmitted through the stylus to the thrust lever. The thrust lever is held rigidly
to one side of the end frame. It is attached to the cone by the connecting rod. Dirt at any of
these points may cause distortion.

If the stylus straighten it. The cone is attached to the connecting rod by means of
is bent,
a small nut. The end of the connecting rod is threaded. Make certain that the nut is drawn up
tight holding the cone rigidly to the connecting rod.

If the foregoing has been checked and found to be O.K. note whether or not the armature
is striking the pole pieces. There should be a space approximately .010 inch clearance between
the armature and the pole pieces. This applies to both ends of the armature. To adjust the

Figure 10-Constructional details of spacer tools

armature correctly it will be first necessary to make a set of spacer tools (Figure 10). These are
made of 1/8" stock phosphor bronze .010" thick and bent to give two surfaces .091" apart. Two of
these tools are necessary. After the two screws are loosened at each end of the armature these
tools are inserted at each end between the armature and pole pieces (Figure 11). The screws
are then tightened with the spacer tools in place. This completes the adjustment.

Excessive pressure on the stylus can be relieved by applying a hot soldering iron at the
soldered connection. When the solder melts the stylus will automatically assume its correct
position. The iron should then be removed and the solder allowed to harden.

A loose or bent connecting rod will be disclosed by inspection and should be tightened or
straightened. If the bend is excessive it may be necessary to install a new rod.

The various points covered by the foregoing should be checked in the order in which they
are listed. The entire reproducer unit may be removed from the cabinet by removing the screws
holding it to the front of the cabinet. The terminal leads must also be disconnected.
18
(2) REPLACING BURNED -OUT FIELD COILS
Should it become necessary to replace the field coils because of burn -out or other causes
the following procedure should be used.
1. Remove back panel from the Radiola.
2. If A.C. Package condenser bank or large filament condensers are in upper (speaker)
compartment they must be removed. The screws holding them should be removed, but
the electrical connections left intact. There is sufficient cable to allow moving to the
lower compartment temporarily.
Remove the nuts that hold the speaker frame to the felt padding. The speaker
is
3.
then lifted clear of the Radiola, first disconnecting the various fastenings holding it.
These fastenings should be tagged to provide for replacing in correct position.
4. Remove the small nut holding the cone to the connecting rod.
unit
5. Remove the nut and lock washer from the two upper screws holding the speaker
to the speaker frame.
6. Unscrew and remove the lower supporting screw. The unit may then be
removed from
the frame. Be careful not to strain the connecting rod or damage the cone when pulling
it out.
7. Remove from the unit the three supporting screws.
off. The
8. Place a piece of iron on the ends of the horseshoe magnet and slide the motor
piece of iron takes the place of the motor and acts as a keeper on the magnet.
9. Remove the screw holding the thrust lever to the motor frame.
10. Unsolder the thrust lever from the stylus.
11. Remove the two armature screws.
12. Disassemble the motor by removing the two countersunk screws. The coils are then
accessible and the armature is still in position in the center of the coils.
13. Slip one coil over the free end of the armature and then slip the second
coil off the
armature and stylus. All parts before re-assembling should be thoroughly cleaned
Use brush to remove for-
and freed from any trace of dust or dirt and metal filings. a
eign matter. Do not use a liquid cleaner as corrosion may result.

The re -assembly should be a reversal of the operation just described.

1. Place the coils in their proper position around the armature. The small length of wire
connecting the two coils in series should be at the outside of each coil when assembled.
2. Place the coils with armature in position on one of the motor side pieces.
Place the
coun-
other motor side pieces in place and screw the assembly together by means of the
tersunk screws.
3. Place the thrust lever in position and screw it in place, but do not
solder the stylus.

4. Replace the armature screws, but do not tighten them.

19
 5. Insert the spacer tools in position as shown in Figure 11 and tighten the armature
screws. It may be necessary to do this several times before the armature is correctly
adjusted.
6. Remove the keeper and place the motor in position on the horseshoe magnet. Line
the motor up horizontally with respect to the sides of the magnet and tighten screws
to magnet.
7. Replace unit on frame. Place the connecting rod through the cone. Replace the
two screws and supporting strap and make the unit fast to the frame. Be careful to
adjust the unit so that the connecting rod is correctly lined up with the cone before
tightening.
8. Lock the cone to the connecting rod by means of the small nut that was removed from
the inside when disassembling.
9. Solder the stylus to the thrust lever.
10. Replace the assembly in the upper compartment and replace the nuts that hold it in
place.
11. Reconnect the leads to the speaker.
12. Replace any condensers removed.
13. Replace back panel of the Radiola cabinet.

(3) REPLACING A DEFECTIVE CONE

To replace a damaged or defective cone the following procedure is necessary.
1. Remove the complete assembly from the cabinet as described in paragraphs 1, 2, 3 of
Section No. 2.
2. Remove the small nut inside the cone holding the connecting rod.
3. Remove the four screws at the four cardinal points of the cone edge.
4. Remove the remaining eight screws.
5. Remove the outer clamping ring.
6. Remove the cone.
7. Put new cone in place. The center of the cone should pass over the connecting rod.
8. Replace the outer clamping ring and replace the last eight screws removed. Do not
tighten down at this point.
9. Carefully center the cone and replace the small nut that fastens the cone to the con-
necting rod.
10. Replace the four screws at the four cardinal points of the cone edge. Take up
gradually on all screws until they are properly seated.
11. Make operating tests and necessary adjustments.
12. Replace the assembly in cabinet. Replace the nuts that hold the speaker to the felt
pad and connect all leads.
13. Replace any condensers removed and replace back panel of cabinet.
20
(4) HOWLING
This is caused by microphonic action -of UX-199 Radiotrons in the catacomb. The sound
waves striking a microphonic Radiotron will cause the elements to vibrate which, in turn, will
be reproduced in the loudspeaker. Conditions being favorable, the howl may increase in intensity
and drown out the broadcast signal.
The remedy lies in interchanging the Radiotrons. Counting from the left, when facing the
front of the Radiola, Radiotrons five and six should be interchanged. If this does not stop the
howl then try interchanging Radiotrons two and three and four and seven. A final change of
Radiotrons one and six should be made if the preceding shifts do not remedy the condition.
Radiotrons six, one and three are respectively, the most sensitive to microphonic action.

Figure 11 --Use of spacer tools hi armature adjustment

(5) BLASTING
Local acoustical conditions may sometimes cause blasting with the volume control adjusted
near to, or at maximum, when receiving signals from nearby stations. When this effect occurs-
(a) Check loudspeaker for proper adjustment.
(b) Interchange Radiotrons-Radiotrons should be matched as described in Section No. 4.

(c) Adjust the small neutralizing condenser between terminals 7 and 8 of the catacomb
terminal strip. Some models have this condenser made so as to allow adjustment.
If it is not properly adjusted the Radiola may be operating too close to the oscillation
point and on a loud signal will break into oscillation. This will give the effect of a
load blast.
(d) Add choke across terminals 10 and 16 of catacomb terminal strip. This choke should
be the primary of a Radiola 30 input transformer or the complete winding of a Radiola
III -A output transformer. This may he relied on to clear up the most obstinate eases
of blasting.
21
 PART III

Rectifier -Power -Amplifier Unit

Servicing the R.P.A. unit of Radiola 30 will be found very similar to that in the R.C.A.
Loudspeaker Model 104. The unit is not the same, however, and tests are individual to it.
The unit makes use of one Radiotron UV-876 (or UV -886) two Rectrons UX-216-B and
one Radiotron UX-210 (Figure 12). It is imperative that these various Radiotrons
and Rec-
trons be in perfect operating condition otherwise the various test indications will be misleading.
The Radiotron UX-210 is a super-power amplifier capable of handling great volume with-
out distortion.
The two Rectrons UX-216-B are rectifying tubes which convert the alternating current
into pulsating direct current, which is smoothed out by the filter system to continuous
direct
current.
Radiotron UV -876 (or UV -886) known as the "Ballast Tube" is connected in the primary
circuit of the power transformer. The resistance of its filament.rises and falls rapidly with an
increase or decrease of current flowing through it, thus maintaining a substantially constant

Figure 12-The Rectifier -Power -Amplifier unit

22
input current. Radiotron UV -876 is used when the frequency of the house lighting current is
between 50 and 75 cycles, and Radiotron UV-886 on 40 to 45 cycles.
A ventilating stack is provided to enclose this Radiotron and the R.P.A. unit should not be
operated unless it is in place.
It should be understood that the electrical protective devices on Radiola 30 are adjusted
at the factory. If for any reason a service man finds it necessary to remove them to adjust or
replace a defective part, great care should be taken in reassembling to see that they are returned
to proper operation. Dealers should caution their customers not to attempt to render these
protective devices inoperative or to experiment with the apparatus inside the metal cabinet or
R.P.A. unit.

(1) FILAMENT ACTION OF R.P.A. RADIOTRONS AND REC-

TRONS
Should Radiola 30 suddenly cease to operate satisfactorily, open the door of the right hand
compartment and note whether or not the tubes are lit. Replace any of the Radiotrons or
Rectrons, whose filaments are not burning. If Radiotron UV-876 is apparently operating cor-
rectly, as indicated by considerable heat dissipation and the other tubes do not glow, trouble may
be due to an open in the filament windings of the power transformer or a defective resistance
unit UP -591.
Should all Radiotrons and Rectrons fail to light or operate as indicated in the preceding
paragraphs, look for:
(a) House Lighting current not on or loose connection at outlet.
(b) Operating switch not functioning properly.
(c) Blown fuse in house lighting circuit.
(d) Loose protective plug.
(e) Input plug not making proper contact.
(f) Burned -out filament of Ballast tube.
(g) Poor contact in Ballast tube socket.
(h) House lighting current not A.C. (Manifested by the filament of the Ballast tube
lighting a bright red.)
If the Ballast tube glows excessively and the other Radiotrons and Rectrons light below
normal brilliancy trouble may be -due to an open in one filament of Radiotron UV -876. (This
Radiotron has two parallel filaments.)

(2) IF RADIOTRONS AND RECTRONS IN R.P.A. UNIT FUNC-

TION PROPERLY, BUT RADIOTRONS UX-199 IN CATA-
COMB DO NOT LIGHT
Look for:
(a) Shorted 20 Mfd. condenser in A.C. package.
(b) Open connections at A.C. package.
(c) Defective catacomb. (Run continuity test.)
(d) Defective connections at R.P.A. terminal board.
(e) Defective resistance strip on catacomb.
(f) Shorted external large filament condenser.
28
(3) IF FILAMENTS OF CATACOMB RADIOTRONS ARE EX-
CESSIVELY BRIGHT
Look for:
(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser in R.P.A. unit. (The one located next to resistances.)
This will be accompanied by a no -voltage reading at the "B" voltage terminals.
(b) Defective UP -591, caused by either extremely low resistance or being shorted.

(4) NO SIGNAL WHEN ALL RADIOTRONS AND RECTRONS

ARE APPARENTLY O. K.
After the receiver has been checked according to previous continuities, and all Radiotrons
and Rectrons appear to be functioning correctly if no signal is heard look for:
(a) Loose connections at loudspeaker.
(b) Open in coils of loudspeaker. (Try external speaker.)
(e) Filament to grid short in Radiotron UX-2 L0.
(d) Filament to plate short in Rectrons UX-216-B.
(e) Dirty contacts in socket of Radiotron UX-210.

(5) IF VOLUME DROPS AFTER RADIOLA HAS BEEN IN

OPERATION FOR SEVERAL MINUTES
This condition is usually caused by a defective Radiotron UV -876 (or UV-886). Such a
Radiotron, after having been in use for considerable time, may develop a tendency to increase its
resistance when heated, sufficiently to cause a drop in signal strength of Radiola 80. The Radio-
tron will not show any other indication of being unsatisfactory. Substituting another UV -876
or stopping the Radiola long enough for the Radiotron to cool and then starting it will be the
only way of isolating this trouble. When making this test an increase of signal strength will
be noted when the Radiotron is cool, gradually falling off as the tube warms up.

(6) EXCESSIVE HUM

This may be due to any of the following causes:
(a) A.C. input plug reversed. (Change position of plug.)
(b) Defective 2 Mfd. condenser.
(c) Loose laminations in power transformer or filter choke. Tighten all clamping screws
in R.P.A. unit.
24
(7) DISTORTION AFTER LOUDSPEAKER HAS BEEN
CHECKED

Distortion may originate in a leaky 2 Mfd. condenser (located next to 7 Mfd. filter con-
denser) or may be due to a low emission Radiotron UX-210. The 2 Mfd. condenser may
be checked by temporarily disconnecting it from circuit and operating the Radiola, noting if
distortion ceases.
A low emission Radiotron UX-210 may cause a "burr" or "fringe" on each musical note
accompanied by unnatural and rough speech. This Radiotron may usually be reactivated by
operating the R.P.A. unit for a period of ten minutes with the two Rectrons UX-216-B
removed. If the process fails it will be necessary to use a new Radiotron UX-210.

(8) FLUTTERING
Fluttering sometimes occurs in Radiola 30 installations. This is a loud hum having a
60 -cycle base and occurs at the resonant point when manipulating the tuning drums. Any
means of changing the electrical constants of the audio circuits will be found helpful. Chang-
ing the condenser bank of the A.C. Package or interchanging the Radiotrons UX-199 will gener-
ally correct the trouble. If, however, the service man experiences difficulty in locating or cor-
recting this trouble, the matter should be immediately reported to the nearest R.C.A. District
Service Station through regular R.C.A. channels, giving catacomb number and serial number of
the Radiola.

(9) IF PLATES OF RADIOTRONS UX-210 AND RECTRONS

UX-216-B HEAT EXCESSIVELY

Plates of Radiotron UX-210 dull red. Check the following:

(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser. (Located next to resistance units.)
(b) Defective resistance UP -591.
Plates of Radiotron UX-210 white hot. Check the following:
(a) Open resistance R-4.
Plates of Rectrons UX-216-B dull red. Check the following:
(a) Shorted 7 Mfd. filter condenser. (Located next to 2 Mfd. condensers.)
Plates of Rectrons UX-216-B white hot. Check the following:
(a) Shorted 7 or 4 Mfd. filter condenser. (Located next to power transformer.)
Should one Rectron UX-216-B become a dull red and the other apparently normal, replace
Rectron UX-216-B that is apparently normal. (This Rectron is defective causing the other
one to heat from overload.)
25
(10) COMPLETE R. P. A. CONTINUITY TEST
The continuity test covers all circuits of the Radiola 30 R.P.A. unit, the letters and
numbers contained therein refer to those of Figure 7. Before running this test remove all con-
nections from the terminal board at the rear of the R.P.A. unit, also the protective plug and
all Radiotrons and Rectrons.
The testing equipment consists of a high resistance type voltmeter with battery voltage
sufficient to give approximately full scale deflection when connected directly across battery ter-
minals, for example a 45 -volt "B" battery unit connected in series with a voltmeter with a zero
to 50 -volt scale. The contact points of the testing equipment should be well insulated from
their handles and care should be taken not to touch any metallic part of the unit. Discharge
filter condensers by short-circuiting their terminals with a screw driver before starting test.

R. P. A. CONTINUITY TEST (Transformers and Choke)

(Remove All Connections From Terminal Board)

Terminals Correct Effect Defect

1 to 2 Closed thru transformer Open primary winding of input

transformer
3 to 4 Closed thru transformer Open secondary winding of out-
put transformer
5toGI Closed thru transformer Secondary of input transformer
open
5 to P2 Closed thru transformer One-half of plate winding open
5toP3 Closed thru transformer One-half of plate winding open.
5 to 6 Closed thru resistance R2 or R3 open
5 to 7 Closed thru resistance R2 or R3 open
7 to -}-F 1 Closed thru transformer One-half of F2 open
7 to -F I Closed thru transformer One-half of F2 open
7 to 8 Closed thru resistance RI open
7 to -F4 Closed direct Broken connection
9 to +F3 or -F3 Closed thru R4 and choke Open choke or R4
PI to +F2 Closed Open choke or primary of output
transformer
B to P4 Closed thru winding Open primary of power trans-
former

The 2 Mfd. and 7 Mfd. filter condensers are by-passed by a resistance. To test them it
will be necessary to observe the voltage drop across the resistance. That is, if the voltmeter
registers full battery voltage (no voltage drop thru resistance), the condenser is short circuited.
26
 R. P. A. CONTINUITY TEST (Condensers)
(Remove All Connections From Terminal Board)

Terminals Correct Effect Defect

5 to G4 Partial deflection 7 Mfd. filter condenser shorted

5 to +F2 Partial deflection 7 Mfd. filter condenser shorted
5to7- Partial deflection 2 Mfd. condenser shorted
7 to center 5th Open 2 Mfd. condenser shorted
socket
7 to 9 Partial deflection 2 Mfd. condenser shorted

op0b6
¡¡

ó L á
CMDAE
C.. C.

OT USED

I"'ÚStD1A+3

VO\0aE C011TAA1 86TTERv

1T T
SETTIAG

II---7
AS

I'll
-

I
UP -S91 CHOKE

INPUT '11PUT A C

OUTPUT

2 LOUD SPEAKER
U
21
,\J '
RADIO CORP. OF AMERICA
NATIONAL. SERVICE DIVISION
233 BROAOwAv, n v. C

SCHEMATIC CIRCUIT
RADIOLA 30
O -g No. NS -3O-2O Date 6 '6 '926

DIM By ... I CEa By I APO By .

Figure 13 ---Schematic circuit diagram of Radiola 30

27
 RCA
Radiola 30A SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 30A

Second Edition-1OM-1anuary, 1929

Radio Corporation of America

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.
Bld. No. 19-168 . 39th St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEX. ATLANTA, GA.
Santa Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2 Monroe Bonded Warehouse, Spring and Peters Sts.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed RCA Dealer renders
service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mis-
handling, to the end that Radiola, owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service organiza-
tions having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the design and opera-
tion of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and RCA
Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected
Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may be
undertaken by the RCA Dealer.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business the
RCA Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is
a part-containing technical information and practical helps in servicing RCA Loud-
speakers and Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealer and Dis-
tributor's service problems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A care-
ful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value, and it is suggested they be
preserved for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division maintains a
corps of engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems.
These engineers call upon the trade at frequent intervals to advise and assist RCA Dis-
tributors in the performance of service work.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright, 1929-Radio Corporation of America.

 CONTENTS PAGE
2
A Word or Two About Service 5
Introduction 31
Service Data Chart

PART I -PANEL ASSEMBLY

PAGE
PAGE
5 Noisy Reception Caused by Scraping Dials 9
Radiotron Sequence Antenna Coupler Compensating Condenser
Antenna Coupler 6 119
6
Oscillation 12
Radiotron Sockets Howling
Radiotron Prongs 7 13
Resistance Strip Tests
Loose Rheostat Contacts 7 15
Catacomb Tests
Outer Edge of Drum Control Scraping Against Panel Tests 16
16
Escutcheon Plate of Panel 8 Voltage Readings
17
Drums Fail to Hold Position 8 Auxiliary Volume Control

PART II-REPRODUCER UNIT

PAGE PAGE
Imperfect Reproduction 18 Cone Not Properly Adjusted 19
Foreign Material Interfering with Armature Action 18 Loose Thrust Lever, Nuts and Screws 20
Armature Striking Pole Pieces 18 Filter Unit and Magnet Coil Tests 20

PART III -RECTIFIER -POWER -AMPLIFIER UNIT

PAGE PAGE

Filament Action of R.P.A. Radiotrons 22 If Volume Drops After Radiola Is in Operation 23

Excessive Hum 23
If Radiotrons in R.P.A. Unit Function Properly, If Plates of Radiotrons UX-171 and UX-281 Heat
But Radiotrons UX-199 Do Not Light 22
Excessively 23
No Signal When All Radiotrons Are Apparently Complete R.P.A. Continuity Test 24
O. K. 23 Condenser Tests 26

PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

PAGE PAGE
Replacing Defective Parts in Panel Assembly 26 Making Replacements on RCA Loudspeaker 100A 28
Replacing Dial Scales 27
Replacing Defective Parts in R.P.A. Assembly 29
Procedure to Remove Reproducer Unit from Cabi-
net 28 Replacing the Power Transformer in. R.P.A. Unit 30

ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE PAGE

RCA Radiola 30A 1 Reproducer Unit in Housing 17

Rear View of RCA Radiola 30A 4 Armature Spacing Tools 18

Panel Assembly 5 Construction Diagram of Reproducer 19

Radiotron Sequence 6
Adjusting Thrust Lever Screw 20
Loudspeaker 100A Filter Unit 21
Adjusting Rheostat 7
R.P.A. Unit 22
Adjusting Drum Assembly 8
Color Scheme of R.P.A. Cable 24
R. F. and A. F. Oscillator Schematic Diagram 9
Continuity Wiring Diagram of R.P.A. Unit 25
Adjusting Neutralizing Condenser 10 Filter Condensers 26
Panel Assembly Supports 11 Replacing Tuning Drum Dials 27
Reproducer Unit Supports 12 Releasing Reproducer from Housing 28
Resistance Measurement Circuit Diagram 13 Removing Reproducer from Cabinet 29
Panel Continuity Wiring Diagram 14 Power Transformer Connections Color Scheme _ 30
 PANEL ASSEMBLY ANTENNA COUPLER

lNl /
;{l1Allnnun...lal<ilA' 71liidi:{Ìi

Figure 1-Rearview of Radiola 30A (doors removed) showing the panel assembly,
antenna coupler, R.P.A. unit and reproducer housing
 RCA RADIOLA 30A
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division
INTRODUCTION
Radiola 30A is a cabinet radio broadcast receiver, utilizing the well-known eight -
tube super -heterodyne circuit, together with RCA 100A Loudspeaker unit as reproducer
(Figure 1). It is designed for socket power operation-either A.C. or D.C. These notes
cover A.C. type only. Very little service work should be required on Radiola 30A. How-
ever, the following information has been prepared for the guidance of those called upon
to locate and remedy any trouble that may occur.
The notes are divided into four parts, namely: Part I, Panel assembly (Figure 2) ;
Part II, Reproducer Unit ; Part III, R.P.A. Unit ; Part IV, Making Replacements. The
particular part referring to the service work at hand should be consulted for any neces-
sary information.
PART I -PANEL ASSEMBLY
(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE
Facing the panel and counting from left to right, the input is brought into the third
Radiotron, which is a stage of tuned radio frequency amplification.
The output of the third Radiotron then goes to the first tube on the left, which is
the frequency combining tube or first detector. The output of the fifth Radiotron, which
is the oscillator, is also fed into the first Radiotron, the resultant combining of frequencies
forming an intermediate frequency.

CATACOMB - R.F. COIL

OSCILLATOR
COOL

MAIN TUNING LOOP COMPENSATING

CONDEN5ER5S CONDENSER

-.NEUTRALIZING
CONDENSER.
AUXILIARY
VOLUME CONTROL

FILAMENT
VOLUME RHEOSTAT
CONTROL RHEOSTAT
PHON

Figure 2 --Rear view of panel assembly

5
 The intermediate frequency signal now passes through tube No. 2, which is the first
stage of I. F. amplification, then skipping tube No. 3, it passes through tube No. 4, which
is the second I. F. stage.
From Radiotron No. 4 the signal is fed into No. 6, which is the second detector. The
audio frequency current is now fed through Radiotron No. 7 and Radiotron UX-171 in
the R.P.A. unit. Figure 3 illustrates the Radiotron sequence and the path of the differ-
ent currents through them.
(2) ANTENNA COUPLER
Radiola 30A is designed for use with an antenna. An antenna coupler is provided for
coupling the antenna inductively to the receiver in an efficient manner.
The antenna system necessary for satisfactory operation of Radiola 30A need not
be elaborate. A small piece of insulated wire, approximately 25 feet long, placed under
a rug or around the picture moulding will give sufficient pick-up for most locations. A
ground to the radiator or cold water pipe will function satisfactorily.
Loo P
To UX-171

RADIO FRCYUCNCY (SIONAI.) C11RRCWT

LOCAL OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY CURRENT
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY CURRENT
AUDIO rREOUENCY CURRENT

Figure 3-Radiola 30A Radiotron sequence and path

of the different currents

In some shielded localities, especially in houses where metal lathing is used, satisfac-
tory results cannot be secured with an indoor antenna. Conditions of this kind will neces-
sitate an outdoor antenna of approximately 75 feet in length, measured from the far end
of the antenna to the ground connection. It should be erected as high as can be conve-
niently arranged and away from any obstruction, if possible. The lead-in should prefer-
ably be a continuation of the antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices, which introduce
additional resistance to the antenna system and may corrode and affect reception. It is
desirable to keep the lead-in a foot or more from the building, where possible. An out-
door antenna should be protected by a lightning arrester designed in accordance with the
requirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.
(3) RADIOTRON SOCKETS
In planing Radiotrons in their respective sockets, care should be exercised to make
certain that the two large and two small pins of the Radiotrons are placed into the two
large holes and two small holes, respectively. If a Radiotron will not fit into a socket
without considerable pressure being applied, examine it for excessive solder on one or more
of the prongs. This may be removed with a file or knife. Never try to force a Radiotron
into its socket, because it is designed to fit in snugly with very little pressure. It might be
possible, by exerting considerable pressure, to force the prongs into the wrong holes, re-
sulting in a filament burn -out when the current is switched on in the set.
6
(4) RADIOTRON PRONGS
Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation. This can be avoided by clean-
ing the prongs occasionally with a piece of fine sandpaper. The use of emery cloth or
steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting the Radiotrons wipe the prongs and
base carefully, to make certain that all particles of sand are removed.

(5) LOOSE RHEOSTAT CONTACTS

To get at the rheostat contacts, release the panel assembly by removing the four
bolts that hold the panel in position, and pull it out of the rear of the cabinet. First, how-
ever, the wire which is threaded through each bolt must be removed by unsoldering it at

Figure 4-Adjusting contact arm on rheostat

its splice. With the bolts removed, the terminal strip cable disconnected and dropped to
prevent interference, the removal of the panel assembly is easily accomplished and exami-
nation of the rheostats made possible.
The square -head set screw holding the contact arm to the shaft of the rheostat may
now be loosened (Figure 4), and the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent, so that
it will make positive contact with the resistance strip, making certain that the resistance
strip is clean where contact is made. When this adjustment has been completed tighten
the set screw and slip panel assembly back into cabinet, taking care to see that the panel
is supported on the rubber strips and does not touch any part of the cabinet, including
the apron hanging from the top of'the cabinet. When viewed from the front, this apron
appears to touch the top front panel, but actually it does not. If it should touch, serious
microphonic trouble may result. After ascertaining that the panel is in its proper posi-
tion, the four bolts, washers and lock wire should be returned to their original position.
(6) OUTER EDGE OF DRUM CONTROL SCRAPING AGAINST
ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF PANEL
The adjustment of control drums touching the escutcheon plate on the panel is
attended by noisy reproduction in the loudspeaker, and may be due to either or both of
the following causes:
(a) Warped drum control. Check by placing a straight -edge on the outer flat sur-
face of the knurled drum control, and note any irregularity of movement by
slowly rotating the drum. If the drum control is badly warped it will be nec-
essary to replace it.
(b) Condenser improperly aligned. To correct a poorly aligned condenser, remove
the panel assembly, as previously instructed, and adjust the mounting screws of

Figure 5-Adjusting friction shaft clutch tension screw inside

of tuning drum assembly
the condenser. The two mounting screws that hold the back end plate of the
condenser pass through elongated holes in the metal frame, thus allowing a de-
gree of play sufficient for adjustment purposes.
(7) DRUMS FAIL TO HOLD POSITION
When adjustment is necessary to correct slipped tuning drums the following pro-
cedure should be used:
(a) Remove panel assembly from cabinet Sand re -adjust the friction shaft clutch
tension screw located inside of the tuning drum assembly (Figure 5). This
screw controls the pressure of the friction clutch against the shaft of the op-
posite condenser. If one drum turns too hard when the other is held, release the
tension screw slightly.
(b) Should the frequency range be off calibration, ascertain whether or not the drum
control is in proper relation to the condenser plates. When the drum control is
set for minimum frequency the rotor plates of the condenser should be entirely
inside the stator plates.
8
(8) NOISY RECEPTION CAUSED BY SCRAPING DIALS
Occasionally noisy reception is encountered which cannot be traced to electrical
causes. A close inspection of the dials will show the cause of this trouble.
The tuning drums may be out of alignment, causing the metal dials to scrape against
each other. This scraping, while not in any way connected with the electrical circuits,
affects the characteristics of the circuits and results in distorted sound reproduction
from the loudspeaker. The remedy consists in adjusting the drum set screws to provide
the necessary clearance between the dials. If adjusting the set screws does not provide
the necessary clearance the points on the dials that touch should be filed until clear. Care
should be taken to prevent scratching the dials.

R. F SWITCH

MILLIAMMETER
`MvVWV"
4 MEG

,-25T" TURN UX-199

45
VOLTS
7.0005
M. 4.5
--
F.

VOLTS
. s 30
-->
50 TURNS
# 20 D.S.C.
ON
TUBE
21/2" DIA.
OHMS

Figure 6-Schematic circuit diagram of the radio frequency

and audio frequency oscillator

(9) ANTENNA COUPLER COMPENSATING CONDENSER

The antenna coupler compensating condenser is connected in shunt to the grid cir-
cuit of the antenna coupler to compensate the coupler for any increased distributed
capacity in the radio frequency windings. It is adjusted at the factory to properly bal-
ance the coupler and should, therefore, not be tampered with unless proper facilities are
available for correctly adjusting it.
The most noticeable need for readjusting the compensating condenser occurs when
the Radiola seems to have lost its ability for distant reception. Having made certain that
the trouble does not lie elsewhere, the following method should be employed to determine
if adjustment of this condenser is necessary. The necessary equipment consists of a cali-
brated R. F. oscillator and a non-metallic screwdriver at least 8 in. long. The circuit
diagram of the oscillator is shown in Figure 6. The coil consists of 50 turns of No. 20
D.S.C. wire wound on a 21/2 in. tube with a tap taken off at the 25th turn and connected
to the negative leg of the filament. The variable condenser has a capacity of .0005. This
oscillator will cover the frequency range of 550 to 1,500 K.C. (200 to 546 meters) very
efficiency. The grid condenser and leak will modulate the output when the oscillator is
9
used, where modulation is necessary The meter is a standard 0-5 milliampere meter. A
4-megohm grid leak and .00025 grid condenser is used. A 45 -volt "B" battery for plate
supply and a UX-199 Radiotron will be found to have ample power output. This oscil-
lator will be found useful in servicing all types of receivers, adjusting compensating con-
densers and neutralizing other Radiolas of this type and neutralizing Radiola 20. It
will amply repay the dealer for the small outlay of material and labor required.
To determine if adjustment of the antenna coupler compensating condenser is nec-
essary proceed as follows :
(a) Remove tubes from Radiola catacomb.
(b) Disconnect the three antenna coupler leads fron terminals 6, 8 and 9 of the cata-
comb terminal strip.
(c) Place oscillator into operation at 1,500 K.C. with the exploring coil in an in-
ductive relation to the tuned R. F. coil of the panel assembly. (Left end of long
coil facing panel from the front.)

Figure 7-Adjusting neutralizing condenser

(d) Now move the left tuning drum, leaving the right one at the extreme low fre-
quency end, until a dip is noted in the meter. Adjust this drum for maximum
deflection.
(e) Now without disturbing the setting of the oscillator, move it to an inductive rela-
tion to the antenna coupling coil. Reconnect the three leads of the antenna
coupler to the terminal strip.
(f) If the circuit is properly compensated, there will be a deflection obtained with
the antenna coupler connected to the terminal strip and the oscillator in its new
position.
(g) If no deflection is obtained under these conditions it will be necessary to adjust
the compensating condenser until a maximum deflection is obtained with the left
tuning control in the position for the maximum deflection previously obtained
with the oscillator at the R. F. coil.
10
 (h) Set oscillator at 550 K.C. and repeat entire procedure. Make any re -adjust-
ment that may be necessary.
The compensating condenser is riow properly adjusted.
This method of adjusting these circuits by use of a milliammeter in the plate circuit
of an R.F. oscillator is much more accurate than any method that uses an audible indica-
tion of resonant points. The reason for this is, that a meter is much more sensitive to
small variations of current than the human ear is to small changes of sound intensity.
(10) OSCILLATION
Radiola 30A may oscillate over portions of the tuning scale or throughout its entire
range. When this trouble is encountered, it may be due to one of the following causes:
(a) Defective neutralizing condenser inside of the catacomb. The remedy in this
case is to replace the entire catacomb. However, before assuming this to be the
trouble all other possible causes should be check.

1Si
CLEARW.E

CLEARANCE

HOLE FOR
RUBBER BUSHING

RUBBER
BUSHING

RUBBER
WASHER

METAL- ----- ____WIRE USED FOR

WASHER LOCKING BOLTS

Figure 8-Panel assembly supports with rubber

insulation to prevent micro phonic action
(b) The antenna coupler neutralizing condenser connected across terminals 7 and 8
of the catacomb terminal strip may be out of adjustment. A procedure for prop-
erly adjusting this condenser follows: The necessary equipment is a modulated
oscillator (described in Part I, Section 9) ; a "dummy" Radiotron; made by re-
moving one filament prong of an otherwise O.K. Radiotron UX-199; a long
non-metallic screwdriver and a 50 -ohm compensating resistance.
1. Place modulated oscillator into operation at 1,000 K.C. about 20 feet from
Radiola.
2. Tune in signal from oscillator in usual manner, adjusting all controls for
loudest signal.
3. Now remove Radiotron No. 3, counting from left to right facing the front
of the Radiola, and replace with the "dummy" Radiotron. Also connect the
11
 50 -ohm compensating resistance across terminals 3 and 4 of the catacomb
resistance strip.
4. With the foregoing changes the oscillator signal should be very weak or
should not be heard at all. If it is heard, even though weak, break the wax
seal of the neutralizing condenser adjusting screw and alter the condenser
capacity (Figure 7) until there is a minimum signal heard in the reproducer
unit. If the volume control is reduced so that the neutralizing adjustment
will cause the signal to just disappear, a proper adjustment has been found,
and the adjusting screw should be again sealed with ordinary sealing com-
pound, to prevent any change.
5. The "dummy" Radiotron and compensating resistance are now removed and
the set is returned to normal operation.

FELT RUSER FELT

Sigli=, WASNER, /STRI

f
WOOS SCREW

YETAI
; 'STRIP

\RACRET SECURE,
TO OX

TO TERMINAL STRIP

BRACKET SECURED
TO 01.
RUSUP. WASHERS
Vom
FELT STRIP' '--FELT STRIP

Figure 8A-Method of insulating reproducer unit

from cabinet to prevent microphonic action

(11) HOWLING
Howling may be caused either by a microphonic Radiotron in the catacomb, or some
part of the panel assembly touching the cabinet.
In the case of a microphonic Radiotron UX-199 in the catacomb, the sound waves
from the reproducer set the Radiotron elements into vibration, which in turn, produces
an amplified howl in the loudspeaker output. Conditions being favorable, the howl will in-
crease in intensity. The remedy is to interchange the Radiotrons, remembering that
Radiotrons 1, 3 and 6 are the most sensitive to microphonic conditions.
If interchanging the Radiotrons does not remedy the condition, an inspection must
be made of the insulating supports of the panel assembly (Figure 8). The panel assem-
bly rests on rubber strips. The bolts holding the frame are provided with large rubber
washers. The panel assembly resting on the rubber strips should be free-floating within
the cabinet. The front panels should be carefully examined to see that they do not touch
either side of the cabinet or the apron hanging from the top of the cabinet. Any contact
of the panel assembly or the loudspeaker assembly with the cabinet will be sufficient to
12
 cause the Radiola to develop a howl. Figure 8A illustrates method of insulating the re-
producer unit from cabinet to prevent microplionic action.
(12) RESISTANCE STRIP TESTS
The resistance of the strip mounted directly behind the catacomb can best be checked
by a Resistance Bridge. If this is not available the voltmeter -ammeter method can be
applied. A milliammeter with a scale of 0-500 should be used and a voltage applied that
will give a substantial reading. A circuit diagram of this method is shown in Figure 9.
The resistance may then be calculated by the ; .e of Ohm's law.

R = -
I
where R equals ohms, E equals volts and I equals amperes

volts
or ohms = 1,000
milliamperes
ACROSS RESISTANCE., ¡Z= E VOLTS
R.= OR 1000 MILLIAMPERES
TO BE MEASURED

6 VOLTS

0-7
30 OHMS
0-500

Figure 9-Schematic circuit diagram for resistance measurement

Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or --1

1,000
ampere) it is necessary

to multiply by 1,000 to get the resistance value in ohms.

The allowable values in ohms for the different sections of the resistance strips in
Radiola 30A are tabulated below:
Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit
1-2 260 271 282
2-3 Open Open Open
3-4 230 236.5 243
4-5 191 197 203
5-6 176 183.5 191
6-7 146 154.5 163
7-8 137 145.5 154
8-9 45 50 55

(13) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TEST

Both filament control and volume rheostats should be adjusted so that half the re-
sistance is in the circuit, the antenna coupler connections removed and the power supply
cable disconnected from the terminal strip at the rear of the catacomb.
13
B/ack with Black Black and Ye//ow_ B/ue -with Blue wi/h Ye//ow with
Green Tracer Green\ and Red Yellow Tracer (Red Tracer (Green Tracer

Red with {
Yellow Tracer
Green

TERMINAL
STRIP fl) o©ooöomm®Z®m®mmmm ®m Er) 23;

CATACOMB_ _____ m
WHISKERS

7 8 (L2, 10

aó
CS
oo 0
0
0 04
3

NEUTRALIZING

I
CONDENSER.

G
LOOP
P1HI-
COMPENSATING 2 3 4
0
G

oeo3 ZoTo
I G P..J
CONDENSER. o 1-:" 8

GROUND TO CATACOMB CASE-

COIL SYSTEM -4
0000t Qo9 ono

Red with
ROTOR Ye//ow Tracer

ROTOR. ROTOR Cable

STATOR y/ STATOR
Black ----- -_-i11 Cç
-B/ack with d//-:
STATION
SELECTOR
1, AUXILIARY
VOLUME
Green Tracer
FILAMENT DRUM CONTROL CONTRO
CONTROL

a PHONE
VOLUME
CONTROL

f -
ANTENNA JACK

a COUPLER.

Green
Yellow with/
Green Tracer

Blue with
Yellow Tracer
J Blue with `Yellow
and Red
\,Black and
Green
Red Tracer

Figure 10-Panel and antenna coupler assembly continuity wiring diagram

14
 A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series, or a voltmeter with voltage
sufficient to give full scale deflection when connected directly across the battery terminals,
should be used in making this test. This arrangement will be found to be very sensitive
in checking voltage drop in various circuits.
The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals on the
catacomb terminal board indicated in the test table below, under the column marked "Ter-
minal," and the results should be as indicated under the column marked "Correct Effect."
If the results are negative, the cause of such negative effect will be found in the last col-
umn, under the heading "Incorrect Effect Caused By." The first column indicates the
circuit under test.
The designation "P" and "G" refer to plate and grid contacts of the socket indi-
cated by the number following. For example, G2 would indicate the grid contact of the
second socket; P7 would indicate the plate contact of the seventh tube socket. The coil
numbers referred to in the right-hand column will be found in Figure 10.
If the catacomb fails to pass any of the above tests it should be removed from the
panel and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals on the
cover plate be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb. To indi-
cate the defect in the catacomb for future reference, attach tag to catacomb and note
thereon observed defect.
The following tests will show complete continuity for both external and internal con-
nections of the catacomb.

CATACOMB TESTS (Coils and Connections)

The Radiotrons, Cable and Antenna Coupler Connections Are to Be Removed

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

2toG1 Closed Open connection

6 to G3 Closed Open connection
7 to P3 Closed Open connection
9 to G2 Closed Open 1/2 coil No. 2 or resistance strip
9 to G4 Closed Open coil No. 4 or resistance strip
10toPI Closed Open coil No. 1

lOtoP6 Closed Open coil No. 7

11 to P2 Closed Open coil No. 3
11to P4 Closed Open coil No. 5
11 to Terminal No. 17 Closed Open coil No. 9
12 to G5 Closed Open connection
13 to P5 Closed Open connection
16 to P7 Closed Open connection
22 to G7 Closed Open coil No. 8

15
 PANEL TESTS
With Radiotrons, Cable, Antenna Coupler Connections and
Resistance Strip Removed

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

3 to 2 Closed Open R. F. coil

5 to 4 Closed Open volume control
11 to 7 Closed Open R. F. coil
13 to 11 Closed Open oscillator coil
14 to 12 Closed Open oscillator coil
16 to 11
(With shorted telephone Closed Defective 1st stage jack
plug in 1st stage jack)
19 to 16
(With no telephone plug Closed Defective 1st stage jack
in 1st stage jack)
22 to 21 Closed Open filament control

PANEL TESTS (Condensers)

Antenna Coupler Disconnected

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

8 to 6 Open Compensating Condenser or the main tun-

ing condenser shorted
8 to 7 Open Shorted neutralizing condenser

(14) VOLTAGE READINGS

The following are the voltages obtained at the catacomb terminal strip, when tests
are taken across the terminals indicated in the table below. A high resistance voltmeter
of at least 600 ohms resistance per volt should be used. The allowable variation plus or
minus is approximately 5 volts.

VOLTAGE READINGS OF RADIOLA 30A

Taken at Catacomb Terminal Strip-Count Terminals from Left to Right
When Facing Front of Radiola 30A

Terminals Correct Effect

I to 21 Should measure 31 volts, normally, with all Radiotrons lit

and battery setting near "Off." Positive terminal of volt-
meter on No. 1.
1 to 10 Should measure 21.5 volts, normally. Positive terminal of
voltmeter to No. 10.
10 to 11 Should measure 41 volts, normally. Positive terminal of
voltmeter to No. 11.

16
(15) AUXILIARY VOLUME CONTROL
On the front panel, several inches to the right of the volume control, is located a
small switch. This is known as the auxiliary volume control and is used when howling oc-
curs on powerful local stations.
This auxiliary volume control switch cuts on or off a 5,000 -ohm resistance shunted
across the primary of the first audio transformer. Normally, it should not be necessary
to use it. In case of trouble with this switch it should be examined for dirt or other inter-
fering substance which may prevent the blades from making contact. Also the resistance
unit should be checked for a possible open.

Figure 11-Reproducer unit in housing

PART II -REPRODUCER UNIT

The reproducer used in Radiola 30A is a standard RCA Loudspeaker, Model 100A,
unit mounted in a special baffle housing (Figure 11) . Excellent reproduction throughout
the entire musical range is secured which, combined with its mechanical construction,
makes an outstanding reproducing device for use with moderately powered receivers.
The simple and rugged design of the loudspeaker makes it practically trouble -proof
and permits easy and simple adjustment or replacement when necessary.
The service problems of the loudspeaker deals with conditions evidenced by weak
reproduction, no reproduction, distortion and rattle. These conditions and their attend-
ing causes are explained in the following text, and remedies noted so that service men may
be provided with helpful information in any service work that is required.
To examine the reproducer unit it is first necessary to remove it from the cabinet
(Figures 22 and 23). For removal procedure see Part IV, Section 3.
17
 (1) IMPERFECT REPRODUCTION
Before inspecting the loudspeaker for imperfect reproduction, check the receiver
output with another loudspeaker, preferably RCA Loudspeaker, Model 100A, and note
any distortion that may be the cause of the imperfect reproduction experienced. This
external speaker is connected across terminals 4 and 5 of the R.P.A. unit after disconnect-
ing the leads already connected to them.
If the test indicates that the output from the receiver and power amplifier is of good
quality, the loudspeaker in Radiola 30A should be examined in order to determine the
cause of the imperfect reproduction obtained.

2.5"

Figure 12-General appearance and cor- Figure 13-Armature bracket adjusting screws
rect dimensions of armature spacing tools A and B

(2) FOREIGN MATERIAL INTERFERING WITH ARMATURE

ACTION
An inspection of the armature will generally disclose any foreign matter interfer-
ing with the armature action resulting in poor reproduction. A small piece of heavy paper
or a piece of copper or brass not over .010 in. thick may be used between the armature
and pole piece to remove dirt, dust or other interfering substance. The spacer tool, de-
scribed in Part II, Section 3, may also be used for this purpose.

(3) ARMATURE STRIKING POLE PIECES

Distortion and rattle may be caused by the armature striking either or both of the
pole pieces. This is generally determined by inspection, though in some cases the contact
may be so slight it may be necessary to adjust the armature to check on this condition.
In any case, an adjustment of the armature is necessary.
To adjust the armature a set of spacer tools are necessary. Figure 12 illustrates the
general appearance and correct dimensions of these spacer tools. The stock-obtainable
on the open market-should be phosphorous bronze strip .010 in. thick and .25 in. wide.
It is bent as illustrated to a .15 in. width at the extremities.
Two of these tools are necessary when adjusting the armature. Place one tool
in the space between the armature and pole piece of the motor mechanism at the end next
18
to the filter unit. This is shown in Figure 13. The other tool is placed at the other end of
the armature, a little to one side, in order to clear the drive pin located at this end of the
armature. By loosening screws A and B, Figure 13, any tension in either direction that
may have been on the armature is released and the spacer tools will provide the correct
clearance or spacing. Now while the spacer tools are in place a hot soldering iron is
applied to the drive pin thrust lever connection, Figure 14, and the solder heated suf-
ficiently to allow the drive pin to find its normal position with regard to the thrust lever.
The iron is now removed. Screws A and B, Figure 13, are tightened and the spacer tool.,
removed. The armature is now correctly aligned and balanced so that no abnormal strain
is being imposed upon it in any direction.

MAGNET COILS- ARMATURE

--SILVER SOLDER

-DRIVE PIN

DRIVING
/ROD

CONE
SEATING
NUT

zi
i
SOFT SOLDER.-'
(MAKE ADJUSTMENTS
WITH SOLDERING IRON)

principle of the reproducer unit

Figure 14-Diagram showing constructional details and operating
(4) CONE NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED
In some cases a cone may become improperly aligned or adjusted, causing a strain
to be placed on the driving rod, due to the cone not centering or seating properly. Poor
reproduction is the result, and inspection of the armature drive pin may indicate a slight
torque or twist. This is most likely to occur when replacing a cone. The new cone should
be carefully seated by placing the cone over the driving rod and adjusting the cone seat-
ing nut, located on driving rod next to thrust lever (See Figure 14). Then attach cone
locknut and washer lightly on inside of cone before fastening the edge of cone. The holes
on the edge of the cone can now be lined up with those of the metal frame and the outside
ring lightly attached with screws and nuts. The cone locknut is then tightened and sealed
in place with ordinary sealing wax, so that the vibration of the cone will not cause it to
loosen. This nut can best be tightened by means of a small socket wrench made to fit a
3;16 in. hex. nut (Stevens' "Spintite" No. 3 can be used). The six screws at the outside
edge are then seated properly. In doing this, take up on each screw a little at a time,
causing a gradual seating of the screws.
19
 (5) LOOSE THRUST LEVER, NUTS AND SCREWS
Rattle and noisy reception are sometimes caused by a loose thrust lever. To correct
this condition tighten the thrust lever mounting screw (Figure 15). Sometimes when this
is done a readjustment of the armature, as described in Part IV,,may be necessary. Any
loose screw or nut in the motor mechanism may cause an audible rattle while the speaker
is in operation. If any trouble is experienced along this line, all the screws and nuts in
the motor mechanism should be gone over and loose ones tightened.

(6) FILTER UNIT AND MAGNET COIL TESTS

A defective filter unit or a filter unit not properly connected in the circuit will cause
distortion. Defective magnet coils will also cause imperfect reproduction. The circuit

Figure 15-Adjusting the thrust lever screw

and correct connections are shown in Figure 16. The reference letters in the circuit dia-
gram refer to the filter terminals shown in the small halftone illustration (Figure 16).
These should correspond electrically, otherwise distorted or no reception will result. A
click test will indicate an electrical defect, either in the coils or filter unit.
A pair of headphones and a 41/2 -volt battery connected together in series, or a volt-
meter and sufficient battery to give a full scale deflection should be used.

FILTER UNIT CONTINUITY TEST (See Figure 16)

Disconnect Magnet Coils and Loudspeaker Cord

Test Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

L to M Closed Open filter coil
L to N Open Shorted filter condenser
M to N Open Shorted filter condenser
20
 CONTINUITY TEST FOR MAGNET COILS AND
LOUDSPEAKER CORD (See Figure 16)
Connect Magnet Coils and Loudspeaker Cord
Magnet coils may be tested as indicated below. A click test from one lead to the
other while they are completely disconnected from the re -it of the circuit is also a simple
and effective method of testing.

Teat Correct Effect Incorrect Effect caused by:

One cord terminal to L or N Closed Open cord
Other cord terminal to L or N Closed Open cord
M to N Closed Open magnet coils or coil leads

To LOUDSPEAKER
CORD COLS
TIPS

Figure 16-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA Loudspeaker Model 100A and

photo of the filter unit

PART III -RECTIFIER-POWER -AMPLIFIER UNIT

The rectifier-power -amplifier unit (Figure 17), incorporated in Radiola 30A uses two
Radiotrons UX-281 in a full wave rectifying circuit and one Radiotron UX-171 as a
power amplifier.
The use of two Radiotrons UX-281 in a full wave rectifying circuit provides an out-
put of rectified current in excess of the maximum requirements for this Radiola. Being
operated at less than half their maximum output, excellent life and operating character-
istics are obtained from these Radiotrons.
Radiotron UX-171, used as a power amplifier, provides all amplification necessary
for use with Loudspeaker Model 100-A. Its maximum undistorted output gives sufficient
volume for all requirements.
Radiotron UV -876, known as the "Ballast Tube," is connected in the primary cir-
cuit of the power transformer. The resistance of its filament rises and falls rapidly
with an increase or decrease of current flowing through it, thus maintaining a substan-
tially constant input current. Radiotron UV -876' is used when the frequency of the house
lighting current is between 50 and 60 cycles.
A ventilating stack is provided to enclose this Radiotron, and Radiola 30A should
not be operated unless it is in place.
21
 (1) FILAMENT ACTION OF R.P.A. RADIOTRONS
Should Radiola 30A suddenly cease to operate satisfactorily, open the rear door and
note whether or not the Radiotrons in the R.P.A. unit are lit. The filaments of Radio-
trons UX-281 glow very dimly, and Radiotron UX-171 slightly brighter. Radiotron
UV-876 glows very slightly or not at all, and its operating condition must be ascertained
by its normal heat dissipation.
Should all Radiotrons fail to light or operate as indicated, look for:
(a) House current disconnected, or loose connection at outlet.
(b) Blown fuse in house lighting circuit.
(c) Operating switch not functioning properly.
(d) Input plug not making proper contact.
(e) Burned out filament in ballast tube.
(f) Poor contact in ballast tube socket.

ESISTANCL UNITS POWER FILTER FILTER INPUT OUTPUT POTEN-

TRANSFORMER REACTOR CONDENSERS TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER TIOMETE

Figure 17-View of R.P.J. unit with cover removed

(g) House lighting current not A.C. (manifest by filament or Ballast tube light-
ing a bright red) .

If the Ballast tube glows excessively and the other Radiotrons light below normal
brilliancy trouble may be due to an open in one filament of Radiotron UV -876. (This
Radiotron has two parallel filaments.)

(2) IF RADIOTRONS IN R.P.A. UNIT FUNCTION PROPERLY.

BUT RADIOTRONS UX-199 DO NOT LIGHT
If the R.P.A. Radiotrons function properly, and the UX-199 Radiotrons located in
catacomb d6 not light, any of the following causes may account for the trouble.
(a) Defective condenser in R.P.A. unit.
(b) Open connections in R. P. A. unit.
In both (a) and (b) the continuity test should be used to isolate the defect.
22
 (c) Defective catacomb. (Run catacomb continuity test.)
(d) Defective connections at R.P.A. terminal board.
(e) Defective resistance strip on back of catacomb. (Use resistance strip test.)

(3) NO SIGNAL WHEN ALL RADIOTRONS ARE APPAR-

ENTLY O.K.
After the receiver has been checked according to previous continuities and all Radio-
trons appear to be functioning correctly, if no signal is heard look for:
(a) Loose connections at loudspeaker.
(b) Open in coils of loudspeaker. (Try external speaker.)
(c) Filament to grid short in Radiotron UX-171.
(d) Filament to plate short in Radiotron UX-281.
(e) Dirty contacts in any Radiotron socket.

(4) IF ALL RADIOTRONS LIGHT EXCESSIVELY

BRIGHT
Should all Radiotrons both in the panel assembly and R.P.A. unit light excessively
bright it would be an indication that one or both resistance units R1 or R2 are open.
When this occurs, it is important to immediately shut off the Radiola until the defective
resistance unit is replaced, to prevent damaging the Radiotrons due to excessive filament
voltage.

(5) IF VOLUME DROPS AFTER RADIOLA HAS BEEN IN

OPERATION FOR SEVERAL MINUTES
This may be caused either by a Radiotron UV -876 or Radiotron UX-171. There
will be a slight drop in signal strength when starting the Radiola, due to the heating of
Radiotron UV -876 to its normal condition. Should there be an abnormal drop substi-
tute a new Radiotron UV -876 or Radiotron UX-171 for those in use. This will gen-
erally indicate the cause of the trouble.

(6) EXCESSIVE HUM

Excessive hum in the reproducer unit may be due to any of the following causes.
(a) Potentiometer not properly adjusted.
(b) A.C. plug reversed.
(c) Defective condenser in R.P.A. unit.
(d) Loose laminations in power transformer or filter choke. Tighten all clamp-
ing screws in R.P.A. unit.

(7) IF PLATES OF RADIOTRONS UX-171 AND UX-281 HEAT

EXCESSIVELY
Plates of Radiotron UX-171 hot. Check the following:
(a) Defective (open) resistor unit Rl.
Plates of Radiotron UX-281 hot. Check the following:
(a) Shorted 12 Mfd. filter condenser.
(h) Defective transformer.
23
 12 MED. ,IS MFD. INPUT TRANSFORMER

TOP
O fA O
TOWER TERMINAL FILTER.
TRANSFORMER
REACTOR. r
UV876
Tel
Ux28i

,ZO
ID

Uxd61

NPUT
PLUG

'.OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER '..POTENTIOMETER

,TERMINAL STRIP

8CKSLA

BLUE WITH RED TRACER

1RED WITH WHITE TRACER
1 ELATE WITH RED TRACER
S GREEN WITH RED TRACER
YELLOW WITH RED TRACER
O BLACK WITH RED TRACER
n GREEN
o YELLOW LOUDSP!AK R.

RED MODEL 100A

m SLUR WITH WHIT! TRACER
6 BLUE
r ELATE 21 22 2f 20 If 15 14 15 11 11 10 f 6 7 6 5 4 0 1 1
CATACOMB
TERMINAL STRIP

Figure 18-Pictorial view of R.P.A. unit and color scheme of R.P.A. cables

Should one Radiotron UX-281 become slightly red and the other Radiotron UX-281
be apparently normal, replace the Radiotron that is apparently O.K. This Radiotron
is defective, causing the other to heat from overload.

(8) CHANGES OF SIGNAL STRENGTH WHILE RADIOLA 30A

IS IN OPERATION
Should Radiola 30A change in intensity of signal strength, either greater or lower,
while in operation, resistance unit R1 should be examined. The connections to this tapped
resistor may have become corroded or dirty, causing a changing value of the resistance in
the circuit which would cause a corresponding change in signal strength. The remedy is
to heat all the connections to this resistor until a new joint is formed by the solder.

(9) COMPLETE R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST

The continuity test covers all circuits of the Radiola 30A R.P.A. unit and the termi-
nal numbers contained therein refer to those of Figure 19. Before running this test re-
move all connections from the terminal board at the rear of the R.P.A. unit (Figure 18),
and also the input plug and the Radiotrons.
The testing equipment consists of a high resistance type voltmeter with battery
voltage sufficient to give approximately full scale deflection when connected directly
across battery terminals-for example, a 45 -volt "B" battery unit connected in series with
a voltmeter having a zero to 50 -volt scale. The contact points of the testing equipment
should be well insulated from their handles, and care should be taken not to touch any me-
tallic part of the R.P.A. unit. Discharge the filter condensers by short-circuiting their
terminals with a screwdriver before starting test.
24
 INPUT
POWER F'LT ER CARLE TRANSFORMER.
,12 MFD 15 FD
UV.676 TRANSFORMER REACTOR

dg P 1:=1.
00.171 Ull.lel

c=. 4

o
O
TRANSFORMER

L-
. 3'VUVUUl4
INPUT
PLUG

CABLE POTE NTIOUROER.

'CABLE

Rs I Ri
LOUDSPEAKER.
MODEL 100-A

,TERMINAL STRIP

Figure 19-Continuity wiring diagram of the R.Y.A. unit

R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST

(Remove All Connections from Terminal Strip)

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

to 2
I Open Shorted 1 mfd condenser
to 7
3 Open Shorted 1 mfd condenser
4 to 5 Closed Open secondary of output transformer
6 to 7 Closed Open primary of input transforrer
7 to 10 Closed Open resistance unit RI
lO to 3 Open Open 1 mfd condenser
10 to both sides of input plug Open Open 1 mfd condenser
10 to I Open Shorted 1 mfd condenser
lO to 2 Open Shorted mfd condenser
1

GI to ground Closed Open secondary input transformer

P1 to either F2 Closed Open primary of output transformer
P2 to P3 Closed Open high voltage winding of power trans-
former
Across filament contacts of socket Closed Open UX-171 filament winding of power
No. 1 transformer and potentiometer
Across filament contacts of sockets Closed Open UX-281 filament winding of power
No. 2 or No. 3 transformer
Shell of UV -876 socket to one side of Closed Open primary of power transformer and
input plug (determined by experi- resistance units R2 and R3
ment)
Ground to P2 or P3 Closed Open filter reactor or 1/, high voltage sec-
ondary of power transformer
Either filament contact of socket 2 or Closed Open UX-281 filament winding, filter re-
3 to terminal 7 actor and resistance unit R1
25
 (10) CONDENSER TESTS
The filter condensers in Radiola 30A are best tested by means of a D. C. voltage
used to charge these condensers and then noting their ability to hold the charge. The
correct manner to do this is to disconnect the condensers from any other part of the cir-
cuit and then charge each condenser individually and discharge it by means of a well -
insulated screwdriver. These condensers should be charged with approximately 200 volts
D. C., obtainable from a set of "B" batteries or a "B" eliminator. Figure 20 shows the
connections of the filter condensers inside of the metal containers.
Any condenser not holding its charge is defective, and the entire assembly must be
replaced. This is accomplished by releasing all leads, removing the strap that holds the
two condenser blocks together, and replacing the block that contains the defective con-
denser. Figure 18 shows the correct connections to be used when replacing the defective
assembly.

12 MFD CONDENSER 15 LIFO. CONDENSER

Figure 20-Internal connections of filter

condensers

PART IV-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

(1) REPLACING DEFECTIVE PARTS IN PANEL ASSEMBLY
The panel assembly of Radiola 30A is held in place by means of four bolts, these
bolts being locked by a wire connecting all the bolts together. A step by step procedure
for removing the panel assembly follows :

(a) Place Radiola 30A in position so that the rear door can be opened wide.
(b) Remove antenna coupler connections and power cable terminal strip from rear
terminal strip of panel assembly.
(c) Cut and remove the wire connecting the heads of the four bolts holding the panel
assembly to the cabinet.
(d) Remove four bolts holding panel assembly to cabinet. When removing these
bolts the rubber washers should be taken off with each bolt.
(e) The panel assembly may now be lifted clear of its compartment and removed to
a place convenient for making repairs or replacements.
Any defective unit may be readily replaced, wiring of all units being very accessible.
When removing a unit it is good practice to first tag all wires disconnected, so that when
26
the unit is replaced the wires may be easily connected to their original terminals. The
color scheme of the panel assembly may be referred to in Figure 10.
After the repair or replacement is completed, the panel assembly should be returned
to the cabinet in the reverse of the foregoing order. A piece of bare copper or brass wire,
about No. 18 B. & S., should be used to lock the bolts. Special care should be taken to
see that the rubber supports and rubber washers are returned to their original location.
The panel should also clear the front apron and each side of the cabinet. This is very
important, for unless the entire panel assembly is full -floating within the cabinet and
resting upon its rubber supports, serious microphonic trouble may result.

Figure 21-Replacing tuning drum dials

(2) REPLACING DIAL SCALES

The dial scales on Radiola 30A are of the renewable type, and frequently it is desir-
able to replace them with clean scales. This operation is very simple, and takes but a few
minutes (Figure 21) . A step by step procedure is as follows:
(a) Open front doors and remove escutcheon plate from control drums.
(b) Turn drums to either extreme and loosen the four screws that hold the scales.
Merely loosen these screws and do not remove them. The ends of the scales may
now be pulled clear of the clamping plate.
(c) Now turn tuning drums to other extreme and loosen the four screws that hold
the scales in place at this end. The dial scales may now be completely removed.
(d) Place the new scales in the position occupied by the old ones, line up the scales
and tighten the clamping plates.
(e) Replace the escutcheon plate.
 (3) PROCEDURE TO REMOVE REPRODUCER UNIT FROM
CABINET
The following procedure should be used when removing reproducer unit from the
cabinet:

(a) Remove screen assembly from bottom of cabinet by removing its six retaining
screws. This screen is located directly under the loudspeaker and covers the
hole through which it must be removed.

(b) Remove front grille.

(c) Remove the four small nails that lock the four screws holding the assembly in
place.

Figure 22-Releasing reproducer from housing

(d) Remove the four screws holding the speaker unit to the baf$eboard (Figure 22).
Before the last screw is released the speaker unit should be held from the open-
ing at the bottom of the cabinet, so that it will not fall through.
(e) The loudspeaker unit may now be removed through the bottom of the cabinet
(Figure 23). The cord should be released from its terminal posts on the filter
unit and the speaker removed to a convenient place for inspection and repair.

(4) MAKING REPLACEMENTS ON RCA LOUDSPEAKER 100A

The necessary procedure for making replacement in the RCA 100A Loudspeaker
unit used in Radiola 30A is fully covered in "RCA Loudspeaker 100A Service Notes."
A reference to this booklet when making any replacement will be found helpful.
28
 (5) REPLACING DEFECTIVE PARTS IN R.P.A. ASSEMBLY
In order to make any replacement in the R.P.A. unit it will be necessary to remove
the unit from the cabinet and then remove its metal covers. A step by step procedure is as
follows:
(a) Place Radiola 30A in a position so that its rear door can be opened wide.
(b) Cut and remove the lock wire connecting the heads of the four bolts holding the
R.P.A. assembly to the cabinet. Now remove these bolts.
(c) Remove the input plug located on the left side, when facing the R.P.A. unit
from the rear. Also remove the cover from the terminal strip and disconnect all
the terminals from the terminal strip.
(d) The entire R.P.A. assembly may now be removed and placed in a position con-
venient for inspection and repair.

Figure 23-Removing the reproducer from the cabinet

(e) Remove the small screws and break the seals that are located around the edge of
the covers. The three sections of the cover may now be removed.
Any repair or replacement may easily be made, using the color scheme of connec-
tions contained in Figure 18, which covers all parts with the exception of the power trans-
former. Figure 24 illustrates the color scheme of the power transformer connections.
When the repair or replacement is effected, the three cover sections should be re-
placed and substitute seals placed in the position of those broken. These seals will enable
the dealer, at a future date, to tell whether service work is caused by ordinary wear and
tear or by tampering.
The entire assembly may now be returned to the cabinet, the cable replaced, the input
plug returned to its position and the bolts locked in position with a piece of No. 18
B. & S. brass or copper bare wire.
29
(6) REPLACING THE POWER TRANSFORMER IN R.P.A.
UNIT
In replacing a power transformer the following procedure should be used:
(a) Remove H.P.A. unit from cabinet and release cover from R.P.A. unit as de-
scribed in Part IV, Section 5.
(b) Cut the secondary cable about 3 inches from transformer housing.
(c) Push back the outer braid of the cable about 1 inch. Skin the ends of the seven
wires, clean and tin.
(d) Disconnect the primary cable from the resistance units and the UV -876 socket.

BLUE WITH ___

WHITE TRACER.

BLACK

BLACK-
:0.10 Willi
-WHITE TRACER
CABLE
RED

Figure 24 --Power transformer cable

connections, showing color scheme

(e) Release the screws holding the power transformer to the metal base of the R.P.A.
unit and remove the power transformer.
(f) The new transformer is supplied with the primary cable complete and secondary
leads having the same color scheme as in the secondary cable (Figure 24) . Match
up the secondary leads with the cable, and solder connections. Tape joints
neatly, using only enough tape to properly insulate.
(g) Slip cable braid back toward connections. This work, if properly done, will
present a neat appearance.

10
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals,
poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes
or a poor antenna system. If imperfeçt operation is not due to these causes, the "Service Data
Chart" should be consulted for further detailed causes. Reference to Part No. and Section No.
in the "Service Notes" is also noted for further details.

Indication Canse Remedy

House current not "On" Turn house current "On," PI1I-SI

Defective operating switch . Repair or replace operating switch, PIII-S1
Defective input plug to R.P.A. unit Repair or replace input plug, PIII-Sl
No Defective panel assembly Check by continuity and repair or replace,
Signals PI -S13
Defective R.P.A. unit Check by continuity and repair or replace,
PIII-S9
Defective reproducer unit Check and repair Reproducer unit, PII -56

Defective antenna coil or antenna coil con- Repair or replace antenna coupler or con-
nections nections, l'1 -S2
Radiola in shielded locality Use short outdoor antenna, l'I-S2
Weak Main tuning condensers out of alignment, or Line up main tuning condensers and adjust
Signals compensating condenser not adjusted . . compensating condenser, PI -59
Defective R.P.A. assembly Check R.Y.A. continuity and repair or re-
place defect, 1'1íI -S8
Defective panel assembly Check panel continuity and repair or replace
defect, PI -S13

Defective catacomb Check catacomb continuity and replace if

Poor defective, PI -S13
Quality Defective condensers in R.P.A. unit Check and replace, PIII-S9
Improperly adjusted Reproducer Adjust Reproducer unit correctly, l'II-d3

Dirty Radiotron prongs Clean Radiotron prongs, I'1-54

Noisy or Loose filament or volume control rheostat Tighten filament or volume control arm and
Intermittent clean contact point, PI -S5
Reception Sprung socket contacts Bend socket contacts, PI -S3
Defective or loose antenna connections . Repair or tighten antenna connections, PI -S2
Defective resistor connections Repair connections, PIII-S8

Microphonic Radiotruns UX-199 . Interchange itadiotruns 11X-199, PI -S11

Panel assembly not positioned properly . Position panel correctly, PI-Sll
Howling Reproducer assembly not properly insulated See that reproducer assembly is properly in-
from cabinet sulated from cabinet, PI -SII
Open resistor on auxiliary volume control Replace resistor found defective, l'I-S15

Operating switch not "On" Pull operating switch "On," P111 -Si
All Radio-
trons fail Defective operating switch Repair or replace, Pll1-S1
to light Defective R.P.A. unit Check R.P.A. unit and make repair or re-
placement, PIII-S9

Defective R.P.A. unit Check R.P.A. unit, and make repair or re-
Radiotrons placement, PIII-S9
UX-199 fail Defective cables
to light Check and repair or replace
Defective catacomb l'est and replace, PI -S13

a]
Printe In U. S. A.
 R.C.A.

( RADIOLA 30A
(
D. C.---(RADIOLA 32
(
(LOUDSPEAKER 104

SERVICE NOTES

Second Edition 100__December 1928

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

SERVICE DIVISION OF TEE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT

233 Broadway, New York City

 CONTENTS

Page
A Word or Two About Service 14

Introduction - -

PART I

General Service Data - - 5

Weak Signals 7
Distorted Reproduction 7
Noisy Reproduction 7
Gradually Developed Distorted Reproduction 8
Radiotrons UX-171A Light, But Radiotrons UX-199
in Receiver Do Not Light 9

PART II

D.C. Socket Powered Radiola 30A 9

Fuse Block 9
Line Switch 10
Condenser Bank 10
Voltage Readings 10
Continuity Tests 11

PART III

D.C. Socket Powered Radiola 32 1

114
Fuse Block
Line Stitch 14
Condenser Bank 114

Voltage Readings 15
Continuity Tests 15

PART IV

RCA D.C. Socket Powered Loudspeaker 101 17

Line Switch 18
Conde user Tests 18
Voltage Readings 18
Using RCA D.C. Socket Powered Loudspeaker
With Radiola 25 or 28 for Complete Socket
Porter Operation 19
Continuity Circuit Tests 20

ILLUSTRATIONS

S.P.U. Schematic Circuit of Radiola 30A D.C. - -- - - - 12

S.P.U. Radiotron Sockets in D.C. Radiola 38A 11
S.P.U. Schematic Circuit of Radiola 32 D.C. 16
S.P.U. Schematic Circuit of RCA Loudspeaker 104 D.C. - - 20
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well in-

formed RCA Dealer renders service at time of sale in af-
fording information as to proper installation and upkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason
of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point

of contact and therefore Dealers and Distributors who are
properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and opera-
tion of Radiolas occupy a favorable position to contract
for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers'

business the Service Division of the RCA has prepared a
series of Service Notes - of which this booklet is a part
- containing technical information and practical helps
in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience

with RCA Dealers' service problems, and presents the best
practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these
Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and
Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved for
ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA,

through its Service Stations, has available to Dealer and
Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to
render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and

to be used only by its authorized distributors and dealers
in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1927 - Radio Corporation of America.

 RADIOLAS 30A D.C., 32 D.C. AND LOUDSPEAKER 104 D.C.
(SOCKET POWER OPERATED)

SERVICE NOTES

PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

S.P.-D.C.-1

INTRODUCTION

Radiolas 30A and 32 together with RCA Loudspeaker

Model 104 are supplied in models designed for direct cur-
rent socket operation.

These models using direct current as a source of

power differ from those using alternating current only in
the construction of the power unit. For service informa-
tion on the receiver or loudspeaker assemblies the regular
Service Notes on these models should be consulted.

The service problems that may be encountered in the

power units of these D.C. models are somewhat different
from those of A.C. driven machines. Therefore the follow-
ing notes are published for the guidance of those called
upon to locate and remedy any trouble that may occur.

This booklet is divided into four sections, namely;

Part I - General Service Data

Part II - Radiola 30A D.C.
Part III - Radiola 32 D.C.
Part IV - RCA Loudspeaker 104 D.C.

PART I - GENERAL SERVICE DATA

The power stage in all D.C. modela consista of four

Radiotrons UX-171A connected in a push-pull amplifying
circuit using the 110 -volt D.C. line as plate and fila-
ment supply and an external battery for grid voltage sup-
ply. Due to the greater filament current consumption,
the old Radiotrons UX-171 are not interchangeable with
the Radiotrons UX-171A used in the D.C. Radiolas. The
output of this push-pull amplifier is equal to that of
similar A.C. models.

A series parallel filament connection is used, one

tube on each side of the amplifier being connected in
series and the two series circuits paralleled together.
In this circuit arrangement if a filament of one tube
burns out the other tube connected in series with it

5
will also go out, thus throwing the load on the other two
tubes of the parallel circuit. In some Radiolas 30A and
32 the result will be a louder signal caused by the in-
creased filament voltage of the two remaining tubes. How-
ever, their useful life will be rapidly destroyed under
such conditions. In the R.C.A. 104 Loudspeaker and later
models of Radiola 30A and 32, due to t different arrange-
ment of the resistance units, the remaining tubes will
not receive excessive filament voltage. Filament burn-
out in one 171A Radiotron will affect the loudspeaker re-
production only slightly, though the tone quality is not
so good. While damage to the two tubes will not be ap-
parent at once, the set should not be operated until the
defective Radiotron is replaced. When any D.C. installa-
tion is made the customer should be made fully aware of
these conditions so as to prevent unnecessary damage to the
Radiotrons.

All socket power D.C. model Radiolas and Loudspeakers

are provided with a switch for compensating various line
voltages. The range over which satisfactory operation is
secured is tram 105 to 125 volta. There are four positions
of the switch, i.e. 105-110, 110-115, 115-120 and 120-125.
On making an installation, the voltage of the line should
be measured with an accurate voltmeter and the switch set
at the correct position for that particular line. On con-
necting a D.C. Radiola or Loudspeaker to the D.C. lines
it will be noticed that at one position of the input plug
the set operates correctly and at the other position com-
plete silence results. The correct position must be found
by experiment.

An external "C" battery ie used to supply the cor-

rect negative grid potential to the Radiotrons UX-171A.
This is - 16 1/2 or - 18 volts on the tubes already
receiving a five -volt bias through the adjacent tube fila-
ments and - 22 1/2 volta for the other two tubes. The
correct connections are noted in the schematic circuits
on the following pages. It is very important when install-
ing a socket power D.C. Radiola or Loudspeaker to connect
these two biasing voltages correctly. Incorrectly con-
nected they will operate apparently O.K. until two of the
tubes lose their emission and then the reproduction becomes
very poor. As this does not occur immediately the man
installing the Radiola should give attention to these con-
nections and make certain they are correct.

The following symptona and remedies apply generally

to socket power D.C. Radiolas and Loudspeaker 104.
 (1) WEAK SIGNALS

Should the loudspeaker output be weak even at maxi-

mum volume, the receiver must first be examined to determine
that its output to the power amplifier is normal and then
the following pointa should be examined:

(a)Line regulating switch not adjusted properly.

(b)Defective Radiotron. Try substituting a com-
plete new set of Radiotron.
(c) Open center tap connection on input transformer.
This is accompanied by rough and unnatural re-
production.
(d) Open center connection to grid resistors.
(e) Defective grid resistor.

Any adjustments or repairs found necessary should

be made.

(2) DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

If the reproduction obtained at the loudspeaker is

not of good quality, and the output of the receiver to
the Socket Power Unit (S.P.U.) is of good quality the
trouble may be due to:

(a) Defective Radiotrons in S.P.U.

(b) "C" battery incorrectly connected.
(c) Defective "C" batteries. Under normal con-
ditions the "C" battery should be replaced
once every six months.
(d) Grid resistors defective or not in their clips.
(e) Defective input or output transformer. Under
certain conditions a signal may be obtained
through an open transformer winding, the quality
being very poor. Teat for continuity of winding.

Any replacement or repair found necessary should be

made.

(3) NOISY REPRODUCTION

Sometimes noisy reception may be experienced on

these instruments. The proper procedure is first to dis-
connect the loop or antenna and note whether or not the
trouble is due to pick-up or is internal to the instru-
ment itself. In most cases the trouble is due to pick-up
caused by interfering electrical machinery connected to

7
the same D.C. line. All commutators on D.C. motors used
in connection with electrical appliances may arc or spark
sufficiently to cause noisy reception in a nearby receiv-
ing set. The remedy in cases of this kind is to provide
filters and chokes for the interfering apparatus or to
select another antenna location that is not as susceptible
to pick-up of this character. In apartments and hotels or
other city locations, often an outdoor antenna substituted
for an indoor antenna will eliminate the objectionable pick-
up.

On Radiolas 30A and 32 there is provided a link by

which the lines may be grounded through two condensera.
Experimenting with the two positions of this link will de-
termine which position gives the better results with least
pick-up noise.

If the trouble is found to be internal to the Radiola

the following pointa should be checked;

(a) Defective Radiotrons. Try replacing all Radio-

trons and then isolate the defective one or the
pair by interchanging with the ones formerly
used.
(b) Defective grid resistors. Replace with new ones
of good quality and the same rating. Only grid
resistors of good construction should be used as
those absorbing moisture or otherwise having
changes of resistance will give noisy or distorted
reproduction.
(c) Dirty line switch contacta. A dirty or high
resistance contact of the line switch may cause
noisy reception.
(d) Dirty or poorly soldered connections. Examine
all connections in the Socket Power Unit and
heat any dirty or poor connection until a new
joint is formed.

(4) GRADUALLY DEVELOPED DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

Should the Radiola or Loudspeaker output became poor

with distorted reproduction check the following:

(a) Incorrectly connected "C" battery. Connect ~C"

battery correctly and replace damaged Radiotrons.
(b) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser. A shorted 2 Mfd. con-
denser will cause the wrong "C" bias to be applied
to one tube with possible damage to the Radiotron.
Replace the condenser and replace the Radiotron if
it has became damaged.

8
 (a) Defective or open grid resistor. This would
cause one of the Radiotrons to became defective
through receiving an improper grid bias in the
case of a defective grid resistor or no bias in
the case of an open grid resistor.

(5) RADIOTRONS UI -1710 LIGHT BUT RADIOTRONS UX-199

IN RECEIVER DO NOT LIGHT

If the Radiotrons UX-171A in the socket power unit

light, and the Radiotrons UX-199 in the receiver do not
light the trouble is due to a shorted filter condenser.
in the socket power unit. This would be the 7 MFD. con-
denser in the RCA 104 Loudspeaker or the 6 Mfd. condenser
in the Radiola 30A and 32. The defective condenser must
be replaced.

PART II - D.C. SOCKET POWERED RADIOLA 30A

D.C. socket powered Radiola 30A is identical to

-the A.C. Model in all respects with the exception of
the Socket Power Unit consisting of four Radiotrons
UI-171A connected in a push-pull amplifying circuit.
The output transformer is designed for use with RCA
Loudspeaker 100A.

The serviceman is referred to the regular RCA

Radiola Service Notes for information about the re-
ceiver assembly. The present Service Notes deal only
with the socket power unit used in the D.C. Radiola 30A.

(1) FUSE BLO

The fuse block is placed in the circuit to pre-
vent a possible short in the S.P.U. from blowing the
house fuses and also to prevent damage to the Radiola
from such a short circuit. This fuse block contains
two 3 -ampere fuses and larger fuses should never be
inserted in this block.

Should a fuse blow on being inserted in its

socket or when the input plug is connected, disconnect
the Radiola inmiediately from the lighting circuit and
look for:

(a) Shorted input plug. Examine input plug

9
 mounted on Socket Power Unit for a possible
short.

(b) Shorted or grounded wiring. The negative side

of the line is not grounded and therefore all
wires should be examined for a possible short
or ground. Special attention should be given
to the various connections.

(c) Shorted 2 Mfd. grounding condensers. Should

both of these condensers become shorted they
would constitute a dead short across the line.
Such defective condensers must be replaced.

(2) LINE SWITCH

The line switch on D.C. socket powered Radiola 30A

has four positions, the correct voltage for each position
being stamped on the cover adjacent to each contact. Fac-
ing the rear of the Radiola from left to right the posi-
tions are 120-125, 115-120, 110-115, 105-110. When mak-
ing an installation it is very important to measure the
line voltage with a D.C. voltmeter and set the switch at
the correct position for that particular voltage. If a
voltmeter is not obtainable, the power company can fur-
nish the correct rating.

(3) CONDENSER BANK

Two condenser banks are incorporated in D.C. socket

powered Radiola 30A, one 10 Mfd. and one 12 Mfd. The 12
Mfd. condenser block consists of one 6 Mfd. filter con-
denser and two 2 Mfd. grid blocking condensers and two 1
Mfd. grounding condensers. The 10 Mfd. condenser block
contains the extra filter condensers normally in the A.C.
package used with the eight -tube catacomb. The internal
connections of each condenser bank re shown on a diagram
mounted on the aide of each unit. To properly test any
condenser eharge it with the 110 -volt line current and
after waiting 30 seconds discharge it with a screw driver.
A defective condenser will be identified by its inability
to hold a charge.

(4) VOLTAGE READINGS

The following voltage readings should be obtained

at the terminal strip located at the rear of the Socket
Power Unit. The terminal numbers are shown in Figure 2
and are numbered consecutively from left to right, fac-
ing the rear of the Radiola.

10
 VOLTAGE READINGS

Terminals Correct Effect

1 to 8 31 volts with all Radiotrone lit

and battery setting near "Soft"
2to3 21.5 volts normally
3 to 4 41 volts normally
11 to 12 16 1/2 or 18 volts with new "C"
battery
11 to 13 22 1/2 volta with new RC" battery.
If this voltage is below 20, the
"C" battery should be replaced

Figure 1 -- Reference numbers used in continuity teat

table showing location of tube sockets in S.P.U. hen
viewed from the rear of the Radiola.

(5) CONTINUITY TESTS FOR SOCKET POWER UNIT

The following continuity test table covers all

circuits of the D.C. socket powered Radiola 30A S.P.U.
The terminai numbers in the first column refer to
terminal connections in the S.P.U. viewed from
the
rear counting from left to right. (See Figure 2.)

11
 Tube socket contacts (G1, P4, F2, etc.) noted in col-
umn one refer to Figure 1. Before running this teat remove
all connections from the terminal board at the rear of the
S.P.U. and also the input plug and the Radiotrons. Ascer-
tain that fuses are screwed tight into their respective
"lockets.

2MFD,

OUTPUT
TRANS.
S
n1E 111A
5
ME UX-111A

INPUT ux.
TRANS. 111A

1ï'tWï
TERM.
2 +453 .4 67 RF 9 O I 11 12 13 C4-11.
I
STRIP
-A
1
49%
0 --,r'
OUTPUT
O8
D :C
05Ç
BY-PASS CONDENSERS
-16)i-234
OR -18
Cop, TO
FRAME

Figure 2 -- Radiola 30A D.C. Socket Power Unit

schematic circuit with terminal connections,
plate, grid and filament voltages.

The testing equipment conciata of a voltmeter with

battery voltage sufficient to give approximately fill scale
deflection when connected directly across battery terminals
- for example, a 45 -volt »B~ battery unit connected in
aeries with a voltmeter having a zero to 50 -volt scale.
A pair of hee}dphonea connected in series with a 4 1/2 volt
"C~ battery may also be used. Discharge the filter con -
dansera by short-circuiting their terminals with a screw
driver before starting test.

12
 CONTINUITY IESTS FOR SOCKET POPPER UNIT

Terminals : Correct : Incorrect Effect Caused by

: Effect .

Outside contacts : closed : Open line resistance unit

of line switch
One side of input closed : Open resistance unit
plug to I. F1
One side of input closed : Open resistance unit
plug to 4 F2
4 to 5 closed : Open primary of input
transformer
6 to 7 : closed : Open secondary of input
. transformer
4 to 8 open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser
i to 9 open : Shorted 1 Mid. condenser
1 to 10 open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser
9 to 10 open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser
12 to G1 closed : Open 1/2 sec. input trans.
12 to G2 closed : Open 1/2 sec. input trans.
G1 to G3 open : Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser
G2 to G4 open : Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser
13 to G3 cloned : Open grid resistor
(weak)
13 to G4 closed : Open grid resistor
(weak)
P1 to P2 closed : Open primary of output
transformer
P3 to p4 closed : Open primary of output
transformer
14 to Frame closed : Open ground connection
Frame to one side . open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser
of input plug .

Frame to other aide: open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser

of input plug

PART III - D.C. SOCKET POWERED RADIOLA 32

D.C. Socket powered Radiola 32 is identical to

the regular A.C. model with the exception of the socket
power unit. In the D.C. Model the power amplifier con-
sists of four Radiotrons UX-171A connected in a parallel
push-pull circuit, giving en output equal to the Radio -

13
tron UX-210 used in the A.C. Models. Parts other than
the S.P.U. are identical in both models and any service
information needed will be found in the regular "Radiola
32 Service Notes."

The present Service Notes deal only with the Socket

Power Unit used in the D.C. Radiola 32.

(1) FUSE BLOCK

The tuse block in the D.C. socket powered Radiola

32, as in the D.C. socket powered Radiola 30A already
noted, is placed in the circuit to prevent a possible short
in the S.P.U. tram blowing the house fuses and also to
prevent damage to the Radiola from such a short circuit.
Two 3 -ampere fuses are used and larger tuses should never
be inserted in this block.

Should a fuse blow on being inserted in its socket

or when the input is connected disconnect the Radiola
immediately from the lighting circuit and look for:

(a) Shorted input plug. hxamine input plug mounted

on Socket Power Unit for a possible short.
(b) Shorted or grounded wiring. The negative side
of the line is not grounded and therefore, all
wire ahould.be examined for a possible short
or ground. Special attention should be given
to the various connections.
(c) Shorted 2 Mfd. grounding condensers. Should
both of these condensers become shorted, they
would constitute a dead short across the line.
Such defective condensers must be replaced.

(2) LINE SWITCH

The line switch on D.C. socket powered Radiola 32

has four positions, the correct voltage for each position
being stamped on the cover adjacent to each contact. 1'ac-
.ing the rear of the Radiola and reading from left to right
the positions are 120-125, 115-120, 110-115, 105-110. When
making an installation it is very important to measure the
line voltage with a D.C. voltmeter and set the switch at
the correct position for that particular voltage. If a
voltmeter is not obtainable the power company can furnish
the correct rating.

(3) CONDENSER BANK

The condenser bank of D.C. socket powered Radiola 32

14
 consista of a 6 Mfd. filter condenser, two 2Mfd. grid
blocking condensers and two 1 Mfd. line condensers all
contained in one metal container. The internal con-
nections of this condenser bank are shown on a diagram
attached to the side of the container. To test these
condensers the 110 -volt D.C. line is used to charge each
condenser and, after westing 30 seconds, the condenser
is discharged by short circuiting the terminals with a
metal screw driver. A condenser that will not hold its
charge is defective and should be replaced.

(4) VOLTAGE READINGS

Referring to Figure 3, the following voltages

should be obtained at the terminal strip of the Socket
Power Unit. The terminals noted in the first column
of the tabulated text refer to the terminals viewed
from the rear of the S.P.U. counting from left to right
and omitting the first four terminals which are for the
input and output of the S.F.U.

Terminals Correct Voltage

1 to 3 31.0 volts, normally with all Radio-

trona lit and battery setting near
"Soft"
3 to 4 21.5 volts normally
4 to 5 41 volta normally

The "C" battery terminals are located on the fuse

block. A check of the voltages should be made as in-
dicated at the terminals. If the 22 1/2 volt terminal
reads leas than 20 volts the battery should be replaced.

(5) CONTINUITY TATS FOR SOCKET POWER UNIT

The following continuity test table covers all cir-

cuits of the D.C. Radiola 32 S.P.U. The terminal numbers
in the first column refer to terminal connections in the
S.P.U. viewed from the rear counting from left to right
and omitting the first four terminals which are the input
and output terminals. (See Figure 3.) Tube socket con-
tacts (Fl, G3, P4, etc.) noted in column one refer to
location of tube sockets in S.P.U. counting from left to
right when viewed from rear of Radiola. Before running
this test remove all connections from the terminal.

15
 board at the rear of the S.P.U. and also the input plug and
Radiotrona. See that fuses are screwed tight into their
respective sockets.

The testing equipment coneiet8 of a D.C. voltmeter

with battery voltage sufficient to give approximate full

OUTPUT
TRANS,
11,
1

za

a
0-22 2
-16'/2 OR
-18
o+C
-ci
4
(oMFD. 1 MFD.

1MFD 9
14b. 14" 14

ó1
-A+C
2clr 3
eiD. +A-B
.
+45
4 .

±9Ó
5 üIELD
G 7
TERM. STRIP.

Figure 3 -- Radiola 32 D.C. socket power unit schematic

circuit with terminal connections and voltages.

scale deflection when connected directly across battery

terminals - for example, a 45 volt "B" battery unit con-
nected in series with a voltmeter having a zero to 50 -volt
scale. A pair of headphones connected in series with a
4 1/2 volt "C" battery may also be used. Discharge the
filter condensers by short - circuiting their terminals
with a screw driver before starting teat.

16
 CONTINUITY TESTS FOR SOCKET PO?TKR UNIT

Terminals : Correct : Incorrect Effect Caused by

: Effect .

Across input : Closed : Open primary of input

terminals . transformer
Across output : Closed : Open secondary of output
terminals transformer
3 to 5 Closed
: : Open tapped resistance unit
One aide of input: Open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser
plug to ground :

Other side of : Open : Shorted 1 Mfd. condenser

plug to ground :

5 to 4 of input : Closed : Open filter reactor or

plug tapped resistance unit
4 of input plug : Closed : Open 1/2 primary of output
to P1 or P3 transformer
4 of input plug : Closed : Open 1/2 primary of output
to P2 or P4 transformer
- 16 1/2 to G1 Closed : Open 1/2 of secondary of
or G3 input transformer
- 15 1/2 to G2 : Closed : Open 1/2 of secondary of
or G3 . input transformer
G1 to G3 : Open : Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser
G2 to G4 : Open : Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser
- 22 1/2 to G3 : Closed : Open grid resistor or if loud
: (Weak) : click, shorted grid resistor
- 22 1/2 to G4 : Closed : Open grid resistor or if loud
: (Weak) click, shorted grid resistor
} F1 to F of : Closed Open filament resistance or
input plug line resistance
F2 to e of : Closed : Open filament resistance or
input plug line resistance

PART IV - RCA D.C. SOCKET POWERED LOUDSPEAKER 104

RCA D.C. Socket Powered Loudspeaker 104 is identical

to the regular A.C. model with the exception that the
Socket Power Unit is designed to operate from the regular
110 -volt D.C. lines. This loudspeaker contains a power
amplifier consisting of four Radiotrons UX-171A connected
in a push-pull circuit and furnishes a ^B" voltage supply

17
 to any receiver and complete plate grid and filament
voltages for Radiolas 25 or 28 when used in conjunction
with the proper A.C. Package.

The reproduction obtained and the general appearance

is the same as that of the A.C. Models.

While the present Service Notes cover problems that

may occur it will be found that very little service work
will be required on this loudspeaker because of its excel-
lent design and good construction.

(1) LINE SWITCH

A line switch is provided for adjusting the Loud-

speaker to various line voltages - satisfactory operation
being secured over the range of 105-125 volts. The knob
of this switch is located on top of the Socket Power Unit
and the various positions are numbered from 1 to 4. The
correct voltages for these various positions are as follows:
1. 120-125
2. 115-120
3. 110-115
4. 105-110
When an installation is made the voltage of the line
should be measured and the switch set at the correct posi-
tion for the particular line in use. If a voltmeter is not
obtainable the correct oltage may be secured from the power
company. If neither can be readily obtained the switch
should be set at the lowest point at which satisfactory
operation may be secured.

(2) CONDENSER TESTS

The 7 Mfd. filter condenser and the two 2 Mfd. grid

blocking condensers can be tested by disconnecting them
tram the circuit and charging them with the 110 -volt D.C.
line. After charging wait 30 seconds and discharge them
by short circuiting their terminals by means of a screw
driver. A condenser that will not hold its charge is
defective and should be replaced.

(3) VOLTAGE READINGS

The following voltages should be obtained at the ter-

minal strip located at the rear of the Socket Power Unit.
The terminal strip numbers shown in Figure 4 are located
consecutively from left to right when facing the Loudspeaker
tram the rear, omitting the first four terminals which are
for the input and output of the loudspeaker. With the
loudspeaker and receiver in normal operation the following
readings should be obtained on a D.C. voltmeter.

18
 VOLTAGES FOR LOUDSPEAKER SUPPLYING "B"
CURRENT ONLY. LINK BETWEEN TERMINALS
1 AND 2

Terminala erect Voltage

1 to 4 45
1 to 5 90
lto6 161/2or18
l to 7 22 1/2

VOLTAGES FOR LOUDSPEAKER SUPPLYING

"A", "B" AND "C" POWER TO RADIOLAS
25 or 28. LINK BETWEEN TERMINALS 2 AND 3

Terminals Correct Voltage

1 to 3 31
3 to 4 21.5
4 to 5 41
1 to 6 16 1/2 or 18
1 to 7 22 1/2

Should the readings on the "C" battery terminals

1 to 7, show less than 20 volta replace the "C" battery.

(4) USING RCA D.C. SOCKET POWERED LOUDSPEAKER 104

WITH RADIOLA 25 OR 28 FOR COMPLETE SOCKET
POWER OPERATION

RCA D.C. Socket Powered Loudspeaker 104 may be

used in conjunction with Radiolax 25 and 28 by using
the regular A.C. Package furnished for this purpose.
However, when making an installation of this kind the
following deViations from the procedure outlined in A.C.
Package Instruction Book should be observed:

1. Resistor Unit UP-591 is not used.

2. Instead of opening the link as on an A.C. mach-
ine, the position of the link is changed to ter-
minals 2 and 3 (Figure 4).

19
 (5) CONTINUITY CIRCUIT TESTS

The tabulated continuity teats cover all circuits

of the Socket Power Unit. The terminal numbers in column
one refer to the terminals in the S.P.U. viewed from the
rear counting from left to right and omitting the first
four terminals which are the input and output terminals,
(See /figure 4). Tube socket contacts (G1, F2, etc.) noted
in column one refer to location of tube sockets counting

01 02 03 04 05 (o OT 8 d9 TERM. STRIP.
+C -A UNK -8+A +45 +90 -1(0 /2 4272 FIELD
OR 18
Figure 4 -- RCA Loudspeaker 104 D.C.- socket power unit
schematic circuit with terminal connections and
"A", "B" and "C" Voltages.

from left to right when viewed from rear of Loudspeaker.

Before running this test remove all connections from the
terminal board at the rear of the S.P.U. and also the
input plug, Radiotrons and link. A pair of headphones
with at least 4 1/2 volts in series, or a voltmeter with
voltage sufficient to give full scale deflection when
connected directly across the terminals, should be used
in making this teat. Discharge the filter condenser by
short-circuiting its terminals with a screw driver before
starting test.

20
 CONTINUITY T'TS FOR SOCKET POWER UNIT

Terminals :Correct : Incorrect Effect Caused by

:Effect

Across input : Closed : Open primary of input

terminals transformer

Across output : Closed : Open secondary of output

terminals transformer

G1 to G4 : Closed : Open secondary of input

transformer
G
G1 to G2 : Open : shorted 2 Mfd. condenser

G3 to G4 : Open : Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser

P1 to P4 : Closed Open primary of output

transformer

1 to - 22 1/2 : Closed : Open 1/2 secondary of

input transformer

G4 to 7 : Closed : Open 1/2 secondary of input

transformer or grid resin-
: tance unit

G2 to 6 : Closed : Open or defective grid resistor

: (Weak) If loud, shorted grid resistor

G3 to 6 Closed : Open or defective grid resistor

(Weak) If loud, shorted grid resistor

F2 to 4 of : Closed : Open filament resistor or tapped

input plug resistor

73 to of Closed : Open filament resistor or tapped

input plug resistor

5 to input : Closed : Open filter reactor or tapped

plug resistance unit

2 to 5 : Closed : Open resistance unit

21
e
 RCA
Radiola 3 2
SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 32

First Edition Oct. 1927

R32-1

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION ANI) SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 1412 Monroe St.. N.W. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Washington, D. C. Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed RCA Dealer renders
service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mis-
handling, to the end that Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Deal-
ers and Distributors who arc properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and
operation of Radiolas occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers business the Service Division of
the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers' service
problems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of
these Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is sug-
gested they be preserved for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations,
has available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to
render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to he used only by its

authorised distributors and dealers in furnishing servire in connection with its apparatus.

Cnpyrrighl, 1927-Radio Corporation of Ames ua.

 CONTENTS PAGE
A Word or Two About Service 2
Introduction 5
Service Data Chart 28

PART I -PANEL ASSEMBLY AND LOOP

PAGE P\or.
Radiotron Sequence 5 Oscillation 11
Radiotron Sockets 6 Howling 12
Radiotron Prongs 6 Loop Assembly 12
Loose Rheostat Contacts 6 Broken Loop Drive Cable 13
Drums Failing to Hold Position 6 Catacomb and Panel Continuity Test 14
Outer Edge of Drum Control Scraping .... 7 Catacomb Tests (Coils and Connections) 14
Open Loop 8 Panel Tests 16
Loop Compensating Condenser 9 Resistance Strip Tests 16
Weak Signals Due to Shielded Location.. 10
. Voltage Readings 17

PART II --R. P. A. ASSEMBLY AND REPRODUCER UNIT

PAGE
Filament Action of R. P. A. Radiotrons 18 Plates of Radiotrons Heat Excessively 20
Radiotrons UX-199 Do Not Light 19 Distortion in Reproducer Unit 20
Volume Drop 19 Filter Condenser Tests 21
Excessive Hum 20 No "B" Voltage 22
Distortion 20 Complete R. P. A Continuity Tests 22

PART III -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

P AGE PAGE
Replacing Defective Parts in Panel Assembly 24 Replacing Dial Scales 27
Replacing Defective Parts in R.P.A. Assembly 25 Replacing Loop Drive Cable 27
Replacing Loudspeaker Cones 25

ILLUSTRATIONS
PAGE P.\GE
R. C. A. Radiola 32 1 Panel and Loop Continuity Wiring Diagram 15
Rear View of R. C. A. Radiola 32 4 Schematic Resistance Measurement Circuit. 17
Radiotron Sequence 5 R. P. A. Unit 19
Panel Assembly 7 R. P. A. and Reproducer Continuity Wiring
Circuit of R. F. and A. F. Oscillator 8 Diagram 23
Complete Model of R F. and A. F. Oscillator ..9 Panel and R. P. A. Connecting Cable. 24
Adjusting Loop Compensating Condenser.. 10 Adjusting Cone 25
Connecting Antenna and Ground Leads... 11 Replacing Dial Scales 26
Panel Assembly and Reproducer Insulation. 13 Loop Cable Arrangement 27
8
REPRODUCER PANEL ASSEMBLY

Figure 1-Rear view (doors removed) of RG:1 Radiola a2

showing the reproducer, panel assembly, rectifier power
amplifier and look assembly
 RCA RADIOLA 32
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared By
RCA SERVICE DIVISION
R32-1

INTRODUCTION
RCA Radiola 32 is a complete, self contained socket power radio broadcast receiver
of the super-heterodyne type. Essentially it consists of the well known RCA Radiola
28 and RCA Loudspeaker Model 104 combined in a de luxe cabinet with all the re-
finements necessary to ensure the utmost in sensitivity and selectivity together with
tone quality of the reproduced signal. (See Figure L)
Many service problems common to receivers of this type have been eliminated
in the inherent design of the Radiola.
The service notes are divided into three parts, namely, Part I, Panel Assembly and
Loop; Part II, R.P.A. Assembly and Reproducer Unit; and Part III, Making Re-
placements.
PART I -PANEL ASSEMBLY AND LOOP
(1) RADIOTRON SEQUENCE
Radiola 32 is designed to operate with seven UX-199 Radiotrons in the receiver
assembly. Facing the panel and counting from left to right, the input is brought into
the third Radiotron, which is a stage of tuned radio frequency amplification.
The output of the third Radiotron then goes to the first tube on the left, which
is the frequency combining tube or first detector. The output of the fifth Radiotron,
which is the oscillator, is also fed into the first Radiotron, the resultant combining of f re-
quencies forming an intermediate frequency.
The intermediate frequency signal now passes through tube No. 2, which is the
first stage of intermediate frequency amplification, then skipping tube No. 3, it passes
through tube No. 4, which is the second intermediate frequency stage.
From Radiotron No. 4 the signal is fed into No. 6, which is the second detector.
The audio frequency current is then fed through Radiotron No. 7 and into Radiotron

To UY, -21O
In DLT In I,F OSC. 1 2oDET IsT A.F.

f- L

__-_ -------
J

RADIO FREQUENCY (SIGNAL') CURRENT

LOCAL OSCILLATORFREQUENCY CURRENT
INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY CURRENT
AUOIO VREOUENCY CURRENT

Figure 2-Radiotron sequence and path of the differeslt currents

5
UX-210 of the R.P.A. unit. Figure 2 illustrates the Radiotron sequence and the path
of the different currents through them.

(2) RADIOTRON SOCKETS

In placing Radiotrons in their respective sockets care should be exercised to make
certain that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons are placed into
the two large holes- and two small holes, respectively. If a Radiotron will not fit into
a socket without considerable pressure being applied, the trouble is probably due
to excessive solder on one or more of the prongs. This may be removed with a file or
knife. Never try to force a Radiotron into its socket. The design is such that they
should fit in snugly without force. It might be possible by exerting considerable
pressure, to force the prongs into the wrong holes, resulting in a filament burn -out.

(3) RADIOTRON PRONGS

Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation. They should therefore be
carefully cleaned occasionally with a piece o f fine sandpaper. The use of emery cloth
or steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting Radiotrons in the socket
shelf, wipe the prongs and base carefully to make certain that all particles of sand
are removed.

(4) LOOSE. RHEOSTAT CONTACTS

To get at the rheostat contacts the panel must be released and pulled out of the
rear of the cabinet. This is done by removing the four bolts that hold the panel in
position. First, however, the wire which is threaded through each bolt must be re-
moved by unsoldering it at its splice. With the bolts removed, the cable connected
to the terminal strip at the rear must be disconnected and dropped so as not to inter-
fere with the removal of the panel. The panel may then be removed and the rheostats
examined. (See Figure 3.)
The square head set screw holding the contact arm to the shaft may now be
loosened and the contact arm readjusted or removed and bent so that it will make
positive contact with the resistance strip, making certain that the resistance strip is
clean where contact is made. Tighten set screw and slip panel assembly back into cabinet.
When doing this it is very important to see that the panel is supported on the rubber
strips it formerly rested upon and that it does not touch any part of the cabinet, includ-
ing the apron hanging from the top of the cabinet. When viewed from the front
this apron appears to touch the top front panel, but actually it does not. If it does
touch, serious microphonic trouble will result. After ascertaining that the panel is
in its proper position the four bolts, washers and locking wire should be returned to
their original .positions.

(5) DRUMS FAILING TO HOLD POSITION

When adjustment is necessary due to the tuning drums slipping their position,
the following procedure should be used:
(a) Remove panel from cabinet and re -adjust tension screw on the inside of the
drum. This screw controls the pressure of the friction shoe against the shaft of the
opposite condenser. If one drum turns too hard when the other is held, the tension
screw may be slightly loosened.
e
 (b) Should the frequency range be off calibration, ascertain whether or not the
drum control is in proper relation to the condenser plates. When the drum control is
set for minimum frequency the rotor plates of the condenser should be entirely inside
the stator ones.

(6) OUTER EDGE OF DRUM CONTROL SCRAPING AGAINST

ESCUTCHEON PLATE OF PANEL
The adjustment of control drums in this condition is attended by noisy reproduction
in the loudspeaker, and may be due to either or both of the following causes :
(a) Warped drum control. Check by placing a straight edge on the outer flat

CATACOMB - , - y . ,, ; . ;
R.F. COIL

OSCILLATOR
COIL

MAIN TUNING
LOOP COMPENSATING
CONDEN5ERS-
CONDENSER

NEUTRALIZING
AUXILIARY CONDENSER.
VOLUME CONTROL

FILAMENT
VOLUME
RHEOSTAT
CONTROL RHEOSTAT

Figure 3-Rear view of panel aaxemóly

surface of the knurled drum control and note any irregularity of movement by slowly
rotating the drum. If the drum control is badly warped it will be necessary to re-
place it.
(b) Condenser improperly aligned. To correct this condition remove front panel
as described in Part I, Sec. 4 and adjust the mounting screws of the condenser. The
two mounting screws that hold the back end plate of the condenser pass through elon-
gated holes in the metal frame, thus allowing a degree of play sufficient for adjust-
ment purposes.

(7) NOISY RECEPTION CAUSED BY SCRAPING DIALS

Occasionally noisy reception is encountered which cannot be traced to electrical
causes. A close inspection of the dials will show the cause of this trouble.
The tuning drums may be thrown out of alignment, causing the metal dials to
scrape against each other. This scraping, while not in any way connected with
the electrical circuits, affects the characteristics of the circuits and results in distorted
sound reproduction from the loudspeaker The remedy consists of adjusting the drum
7
set screws to provide the necessary clearance so that scraping will not take place.
If adjusting these hex nuts or set screws does not provide the necessary clearance, the
points touching should be filed until the metal dials clear each other. Care should be
taken when filing to prevent scratching the dials.

(8) OPEN LOOP

In the Radiola.32, the loop may be entirely disconnected from the set and nearby
local stations heard when both the left and right-hand drum controls are in their nor-
mal position for a given local station. In this case, the windings of the tuned radio
frequency circuit act as a small loop, furnishing the necessary pick-up.

R. F. SWITCH

'-,00023
MILLIAMMETER
MnM/w
4 MEG.

7.0005
,-25T" TURN UX-199
45
VOLTS -
M. F. 4.5
VOLTS T-
+ 30 OHMS
50 TURNS
# 20 D.S.C.
ON 21/i DIA
TUBE

Figure 4-Schematic circuit diagram of the radio frequency and audio

frequency oscillator

It will be somewhat difficult, therefore, to tell whether or not the loop circuit is open
without testing it for continuity. In general, if the center terminal of the loop were
open, very little effect on local stations would be noted. If either leg of the loop were
open, signal strength from local stations would be considerably reduced. It is doubt-
ful whether distant stations would be heard at all.
The complete loop circuit may be tested for continuity with a battery in series
with a lamp, voltmeter or headphone. Place one battery lead on terminal No. 9 count-
ing left to right on the catacomb terminal strip, and the other first on terminal No. 6
and then on No. 8. Terminal No. 9 goes to the center tap of the loop and terminals 6
and 8 go to the opposite sides of the compensating condenser directly across the loop.
If test from 9 to 8 or 9 to 6 shows open, look for:
(a) Open at point where leads are connected to catacomb terminal strip.
(b) Broken loop connection.
The symptoms of a broken loop condenser pig -tail will be similar to those for an
open loop. This pig -tail should therefore be carefully checked.
8
(9) LOOP COMPENSATING CONDENSER
The loop compensating- condenser is connected in shunt to the loop circuit to com-
pensate the loop for increased distributed capacity in the radio frequency windings. It
is adjusted at the factory to properly balance the loop and should, therefore,
not be
tampered with unless proper facilities are available for correctly adjusting it.
The most noticeable need for readjusting the compensating condenser occurs when
the Radiola seems to have lost its ability for distant reception. The necessary adjust-
ing equipment consists of a calibrated R.F. oscillator and a non-metallic screw driver
at least 8 inches long. The circuit diagram and general appearance of the oscillator

Figure 5-Complete model of R.F. and A.F. oscillator

is shown in Figures 4 and 5. The coil consists of 50 turns of No. 20 D.S.C. wire
wound on a 2Y2 -inch tube with a tap taken off at the 25th turn and connected to
the negative leg of the filament. The variable condenser has a capacity of .0005. This
oscillator will cover the frequency range of 550 to 1500 R.C. (200 to 546 meters)
very efficiently. The grid condenser and leak will modulate the output when the oscil-
lator is used as an A.F. oscillator. The meter is a standard 0-5 milliampere meter. A
4-megohm grid leak and .00025 grid condenser is used. A 45 -volt "B" battery for
plate supply and a UX-199 Radiotron will be found to have ample power output.
This oscillator will be useful in servicing all types of receivers, adjusting compensating
condensers on other Radiolas of this type and neutralizing Radiola 20. It will amply
repay the dealer for the small outlay of material and labor required.
Having made certain that the trouble does not lie elsewhere, the following method
should be employed to determine if adjustment of this condenser is necessary:
(a) Remove tubes from Radiola catacomb.
9
 (b) Disconnect the three loop leads from terminals 6, 8 and 9 of the catacomb
terminal strip.
(c) Place oscillator into operation at 1500 K.C. with the exploring coil in an
inductive relation to the tuned R.F. coil of the panel assembly-Left end of long coil
facing panel from the front. This can be conveniently done outside of cabinet.
(d) Now move the left tuning drum, leaving the right one in the position of
the extreme low frequency end, until a dip is noted in the meter. Adjust this drum for
maximum deflection.
(e) Now without disturbing the setting of the oscillator, move it to the bottom
of the loop compartment in an inductive relation to the loop. Reconnect the three loop
leads to the terminal strip.
(f) If the circuit is properly compensated, there will be a deflection obtained
when the loop is connected with the oscillator in its new position.

1'igure G-:Idjuxting the loop conipematting co Jul euxcr

If no deflection is obtained under these conditions, the loop compensating con-

denser should be adjusted until a maximum deflection is obtained with the left tuning
control in the position for the maximum deflection previously obtained with the oscil-
lator at the R.F. coil. (See Figure 6.)
Repeat operation at 550 R.C. and make readjustment if necessary. Generally
when the compensating condenser is adjusted at one frequency it will be found to be
correct at all other frequencies.
This method of adjusting these circuits by use of a milliammeter in the plate cir-
cuit of an R.F. oscillator is much more accurate than any method that uses an audible
indication of resonant points. The reason for this is that a meter is much more sensi-
tive to small variations of current than the human ear is to small changes of sound
intensity.

(10) WEAK SIGNALS DUE TO HIGHLY SHIELDED LOCATION

There may be found an occasional location so badly shielded that an external pick-
up will be necessary. Installations in steel buildings are at times troubled with this
shielding effect. Should this phenomenon manifest itself, a short antenna of insulated
wire not over 25 or 30 feet in length may be erected outside of the building or may be
10
conveniently hung out of a window, although it would, of course, be better to get it
away from the absorbing effect of the building, if possible. This antenna should be
connected to the antenna coupling coil terminal strip at the terminal designated "A".
To the other terminal designated "G", a wire should be attached and connected to a
good ground. (See Figure 7.) This should preferably be a cold water pipe or radia-
tor and should be connected by means of an approved ground clamp.
Thus installed the loop will lose its directional effect, one position giving maxi-
mum signal strength on all signals. All other tuning adjustments will remain the same
as when using only the loop as a pick-up device.

Figure 7-Connecting antenna and ground leads to the antenna

coupler terminals

(11) OSCILLATION
Radiola 32 may oscillate over portions of the tuning scale or throughout its entire
range. When this trouble is encountered, it may be due to one of the following causes:
(a) Defective neutralizing condenser inside of the catacomb. The remedy in this
case is to replace the entire catacomb. However, before assuming this is the trouble all
other possible causes should be checked.
(b) Loop neutralizing condenser connected across terminals 7 and 8 of the cata-
comb terminal strip out of adjustment.
A procedure for properly adjusting the loop neutralizing condenser follows. The
necessary equipment is a modulated oscillator, described in Part I, Section 9, a
"dummy" Radiotron (made by removing one filament prong of an otherwise O.B. Ra-
diotron UX-199), a non-metallic screw driver and a 50 -ohm compensating resistance.
1. Place the modulated oscillator into operation at 1000 B.C. about 20 feet
from Radiola.
11
 2. Tune in signal from oscillator in usual manner, adjusting all controls for loud-
est signal.
3. Now remove Radiotron No. 3, counting from left to right facing the front of
the Radiola, and replace with the "dummy" Radiotron. Also connect the 50 -
ohm compensating resistance across terminals 3 and 4 of the catacomb resis-
tance strip.
4. With the foregoing changes the oscillator signal should be very weak or not
heard at all. If it is heard, even though weak, break .the wax seal of the neu-
tralizing condenser adjusting screw and alter the condenser capacity until
there is a minimum signal heard in the reproducer unit. If the volume control
is reduced so that the neutralizing adjustment will cause the signal to just dis -

FELT FELT METAL

CLEARANCE
BUSHING-7', WASHER WASHER

,FELT STRIPS

'16 CLEARANCE

FELT
INSULATING --1,^
PAD 07
METAL
STRIP"
i

RUBBER
BAFFLE BOARD . BUSHING

RER e
WUBBASHER
i
FELT `FELT INSULATING PAD ".WIRE USED FOR
METAL___" RING LOCKING BOLTS
WASHER YR LOCKING SULTS

Figure 8 --Panel assembly and reproducer supports with

felt and rubber insulation to prevent microphonic action

appear, a proper adjustment has been found, and the adjusting screw should
be again sealed with ordinary sealing compound to prevent any change.
5. The "dummy" Radiotron and the compensating resistance is now removed and
the set is returned to normal operation.

(12) HOWLING
Howling may be caused either by a microphonic Radiotron in the catacomb, or by
some part of the panel assembly or reproducer unit not being properly insulated
from the cabinet.
In the case of a microphonic Radiotron UX-199 in the catacomb, the sound
waves set its elements into vibration which in turn is reproduced in the loudspeaker.
Conditions being favorable, the howl will increase in intensity. If a microphonic adapter
is used with the detector tube, it should be placed so that no part of it will touch
any part of the panel assembly except at the catacomb. A microphonic adapter touch-
ing the panel assembly may cause howling. After ascertaining that this is not the
12
trouble, the Radiotrons should be interchanged, remembering that Radiotrons 1, 3
and 6 are the most sensitive to microphonic conditions.
If interchanging the Radiotrons dies not remedy the howling condition, an inspec-
tion must be made of the cushion supports of the panel assembly and reproducer unit.
(See Figure 8.) The panel assembly rests on rubber strips. The bolts holding this
frame are provided with large rubber washers. The panel assembly resting on the
rubber strips should not touch any part of the cabinet. The front panels should be
carefully examined to see that they do not touch either side of the cabinet or the
apron hanging from the top of the cabinet. If the panel assembly proves to be in the
right position, the reproducer unit must be examined for possible microphonic action.
The reproducer unit is suspended by four bolts, these bolts having heavy felt cush-
ions for the unit to rest upon. Also on the front, a felt ring is provided on the
baffle plate. The baffle plate is also cushioned to the cabinet by means of large felt
washers. The baffle plate should be examined to make sure it does not touch any of
the cabinet, and the reproducer should not touch the baffle plate except at the felt ring
provided for that purpose.
This series of rubber and felt cushions is what makes it possible to house the power-
ful 104 Loudspeaker and Radiola 28 in one cabinet and it is imperative that they
function properly, otherwise the result will be very bad microphonic trouble. When look-
ing for trouble of this nature the service man should carefully check the foregoing
points.

(13) LOOP ASSEMBLY

The loop of Radiola 32 is driven from a control dial on the front of the Radiola
by means of a cable and drum arrangement. This cable may become slack after
considerable use, or replacement may be required.
A turnbuckle is provided to take up any slack that may develop in this cable from
time to time. This turnbuckle is very accessible, being located beneath the panel as-
sembly in the loop compartment. It is merely necessary to open the rear doors in order
to make an adjustment. If the cable should be broken and require replacement, the
new cable should be installed as described in Part III, Section 5.

(14) BROKEN LOOP DRIVE CABLE

Should a loop drive cable become broken due to considerable use or excessive tight-
ening, the proper remedy is to replace the cable. The procedure for making this replace-
ment is described in Part III, Section 5. If a new cable is not immediately available
a temporary repair may be made provided the break is not in the section that passes
over the cable guide, or threads through the control and drive drums.
The two ends should be spliced together and then soldered. Splicing consists of
interweaving the strands as with rope and not just twisting the ends together as
in an electrical wiring splice. Splicing gives greater strength and results in a smaller
body being formed on the cable. When soldering, use plenty of flux and a small amount
of solder. Heat sufficiently long for all the strands of the cable to adhere to the
solder. Placing the splice in an alcohol or bunsen flame affords sufficient heat and
allows any excess solder to drip away. After the splice is finished the cable should
be returned to its proper position and the slack taken up by means of the turnbuckle.
Do not tighten the cable more than necessary to take up any slack, for otherwise it
may break again.
18
 It is to be understood that this is but a temporary repair and should be used only
until a new cable can be procured and installed.

(15) CATACOMB AND PANEL CONTINUITY TEST

In making catacomb and panel continùity tests both filament control and volume
rheostats are adjusted so that half the resistance is in the circuit; the loop connec-
tions are removed and the power supply cable is disconnected from the terminal strip
at the rear of the catacomb.
A pair of headphones with at least 4/ volts in series or a voltmeter with volt-
age sufficient to give full scale deflection when connected directly across the battery ter-
minals are used in making the tests. This arrangement will be found to be very sen-
sitive in checking voltage drop in various circuits.
The contacts of the test equipment are placed across the terminals on the cata-
comb terminal board indicated in the test table below under the column marked "Ter-
minal," and the results should be as indicated under the column marked "Correct Ef-
fect." If the results are negative the cause of such negative effect will be found in the
last column under the heading "Incorrect Effect Caused By." The first column indi-
cates the circuit under test.
The designations "P" and "G" refer to plate and grid contacts of the socket indi-
cated by the number following. For example, G2 would indicate the grid contact
of the second socket; P7 would indicate the plate contact of the seventh tube socket.
The coil numbers referred to in the right-hand column will be found in Figure 9.
If the catacomb fails to pass any of the above tests it should be removed from
the panel and replaced by a new one. Under no circumstances should the lead seals
on the cover plate be broken. No marks of any kind should be made on the catacomb.
To indicate the defect in the catacomb for future' reference, attach a tag to the cata-
comb and note thereon the observed defect.
The following tests will show complete continuity for both external and inter-
nal connections of the catacomb:

CATACOMB TESTS (Coils and Connections)

The Radiotrons, Power Supply Cable and Loop Connections Removed
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

2 to G 1 Closed Open connection

6 to G 3 Closed Open connection
7 to P 3
9 to G 2.
9 to G 4
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
/
connection
coil No. 2 or resistance strip
coil No. 4 or resistance strip
10 to P 1 Closed Open coil No. 1
10 to P 6 Closed Open coil No. 7
11 to P 2 Closed Open coil No. 3
11 to P 4 Closed Open coil No. 5
11 to Terminal No. 17 Closed Open coil No. 9
12 to G 5 Closed Open connection
13 to P 5 Closed Open connection
16 to P 7 Closed Open connection
22 to G 7 Closed Open coil No. 8

14
Black with Blue and
Black Ye//ow Blue with Blue with Yellow with
Blue Tracer Green, and Redue Ye//ow Tracer [-Red Tracer Green Tracer

Green

TERMINAL
STRIP -- ©®©©O®Om ID 00
CATACOMB
WHISKERS

NEUTRALIZING
CONDENSER

LOOP
COMPENSATING
CONDENSER

GROUND TO CATACOMB CASE--= J

COIL SYSTEM

Red with
ROTOR. Ye/low Tracer
ROTOR Cab/e
STATOR STATOR
ROTATABLE ANTENNA
LOOP COUPLER-)

FILAMENT
CONTROL

VOLUME
CONTROL
PHONE
JACK -

Green r
Yellow wilh/
Green Tracer
ANT GND

B/aCk with Blue with J Blue with Yellow \B/ackand

B/ue-7 Blue Tracer Ye//ow Tracer Red Tracer 2nd Red Green

Figure 9-Panel and loop assembly continuity wiring diagram

15
 PANEL TESTS
With Radiotrons, Power Supply Cable, Resistance Strip Removed and
Loop Disconnected

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

3 to 2 Closed Open R.F. coil

5 to 4 Closed Open volume control
11 to 7 Closed Open R.F. coil
13 to 11 Closed Open oscillator coil
14 to 12 Closed Open oscillator coil
16 to 11 (With shorted tele- Closed Defective 1st stage jack
phone plug in 1st stage jack)
19 to 16 (With no telephone Closed Defective 1st stage jack
plug in 1st stage jack)
22 to 21 Closed Open filament control

PANEL TESTS (Condensers)

Loop Disconnected

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by:

8 to 6 Open Shorted loop or compensating

condenser
8 to 7 Open Shorted neutralizing condenser

(16) RESISTANCE STRIP TESTS

The resistances of the strip mounted directly behind the catacomb can best be
checked by a Resistance Bridge. If this is not available the voltmeter -ammeter
method can be applied. A milliammeter with a scale of 0-500 should be used and a
voltage applied that will give a substantial reading. A circuit diagram of this method
is shown in Figure 10.
The resistance may then be calculated by the use of Ohm's law.
E
R = (where R equals ohms, E equals volts and I equals amperes)
I
Volts
or ohms = 1000
Milliamperes
1
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or ampere) it is necessary to
multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms. 1000
16
 The allowable values in ohms for the different sections of the resistance strip in
Radiola 32 are tabulated below:

Terminals Lower Limit Normal Upper Limit

1-2 260 271 282

2-3 Open Open Open
3-4 230 236.5 243
4-5 191 197 203
5-6 176 183.5 191
6-7 146 154.5 163
7-8 137 145.5 154
8-9 45 50 55

A ACROSS RESISTANCE A VOLTS

TO BE MEASURED
R- E I
OR 1000
MILLIAMPERES

0111
6 VOLTS

0-7
30 OHMStie
0-500

Figure 10-Schematic circuit diagram for resistance measurement

(17) VOLTAGE READINGS

The following are the voltages obtained at the catacomb terminal strip, when
tests are taken across the terminals indicated in the table. A high resistance volt-
meter of at least 600 ohms resistance per volt should be used. The allowable variation
plus or minus is approximately 5 volts.

VOLTAGE READINGS OF RADIOLA 32

Taken at Catacomb Terminal Strip-Count Terminals from Left to Right When
Facing Front of Radiola 32

Terminals Correct Effect

1 to 21 Should measure 31 volts normally with all
Radiotrons lit and battery setting near
"Off." Positive terminal of voltmeter on
No. 1.
1 to 10 Should measure 21.5 volts normally. Posi-
tive terminal of voltmeter on No. 10.
10 to 11 Should measure 41 volts normally. Posi-
tive terminal of voltmeter on No. 11.
17
 PART II-R.P.A. ASSEMBLY AND REPRODUCER UNIT
The R.P.A. Unit used in Radiola 32 (See Figure 11) is known by the designation
AP -832-A. Service work in conjunction with it will be along the same lines as those
followed in the case of Radiola 30 R.P.A. unit and RCA Loudspeaker 104. This unit is
of particularly good design and will require very little service work.
The reproducer unit in Radiola 32 is the standard RCA Loudspeaker Model 104
Pot Magnet and cone assembly. This reproducer provides the utmost in quality of re-
production, together with any desired volume without distortion.
The unit makes use of one Radiotron UV-886, two Radiotrons UX-281 and one Ra-
diotron UX-210. Radiotron UV -886, known as the "Ballast tube," is connected in
the primary circuit of the power transformer. The resistance of the filament of Radio-
tron UV -886 rises and falls rapidly with an increase or decrease of current flowing
through it, thus maintaining a substantially constant input current. Radiotron ÚV-
886 when used in Radiola 32 is to be used when the house lighting current is 60
cycles only. A ventilating stack is provided to enclose this Radiotron, and the R.P.A.
unit should not be operated unless it is in place.
It should be understood that the electrical protective devices on Radiola 32 are
adjusted at the factory. If for any reason a service man finds it necessary to re-
move them to adjust or replace a defective part, great care should be taken to see
that they are returned to proper operation. Dealers should caution their customers
not to attempt to render these protective devices inoperative or to experiment with the
apparatus inside the metal cabinet or R.P.A. Unit.

(1) FILAMENT ACTION OF R.P.A. RADIOTRONS

Should Radiola 32 suddenly cease to operate satisfactorily, open the rear door and
note whether or not the tubes in the R.P.A. unitt are lit. Replace any of the Radio-
trons whose filaments are not burning. If Radiotron UV -886 is apparently operat-
ing correctly (indicated by considerable heat dissipation), and the other tubes do not
glow, the trouble may be due to an open in the filament windings of the power trans-
former or defective filament connections.
Should all Radiotrons fail to light or operate as indicated in the preceding para-
graph, look for :
(a) House lighting current not on or loose connection at outlet.
(b) Operating switch not functioning properly.
(c) Blown fuse in house lighting circuit.
(d) Loose protective plug.
(e) Input plug not making proper contact.
(f) Burned -out filament of Ballast tube.
(g) Poor contact in Ballast tube socket.
(h) House lighting current not A.C. (Manifested by the filament of the Bal-
last tube lighting a bright red.)
If the Ballast tube glows excessively and the other Radiotrons light below normal
brilliancy the trouble may be due to an open in one filament of Radiotron UV-886.
(This Radiotron has two parallel filaments.)
18
(2) IF RADIOTRONS IN R.P.A. UNIT FUNCTION PROPERLY,
BUT RADIOTRONS UX-199 IN CATACOMB DO NOT LIGHT
Look for:
(a) Shortened 20 Mfd. condenser in A.C. package.
(b) Open connections at A.C. package.
(c) Defective catacomb. (Run continuity test.)
(d) Defective connections at R.P.A. terminal board.
(e) Defective resistance strip on catacomb.

FLIER CONDENSER5111111111.11..® POTENTIOMETER

RESIST- POWER TRAN5FORMER

ANCES

OUTPUT
TRANS

FILAMENT RE5!5TOR
INPUT
TRANSFOR-
FILTER REACTOR
MER

Figure 11-R.P.A. unit showing location of filter condensers, resistances, potentiometer, power
transformer, input transformer, filament resistor and filter reactor

(3) NO SIGNAL WHEN RADIOTRONS ARE APPARENTLY O.K.

After the receiver has been checked according to previous continuities, and all Ra-
diotrons and Rectrons appear to be functioning correctly, if no signal is heard, look for:
(a) Loose cone coil connections.
(b) Open in cone coil winding.
(c) Filament to grid short in Radiotron UX-210.
(d) Filament to plate short in Radiotrons UX-281.
(e) Dirty contacts in socket of Radiotron UX-210.

(4) IF VOLUME DROPS AFTER RADIOLA HAS BEEN IN OPE-

RATION FOR SEVERAL MINUTES
This condition is usually caused by a defective Radiotron UV -886. Such a Radio-
tron after having been in use for considerable time may develop a tendency to increase
its resistance sufficiently, when heated, to cause a drop in signal strength of Radiola 32
19
greater than the normal drop due to the tube heating. The Radiotron will not show
any other indication of being unsatisfactory. Substituting another UV -886 or stop-
ping the Radiola long enough for the Radiotron to cool and then starting it will be the
only way of locating this trouble. When making this test an increase of signal
strength will be noted when the Radiotron is cool, gradually falling off as the tube
warms up.
If a drop of volume is obtained with the signal becoming distorted, the trouble is
a defective Radiotron UX-210. The remedy is to replace the tube.

(5) EXCESSIVE HUM

Excessive hum may be due to any of the following causes:
(a) A. C. input plug reversed. (Change position of plug).
(b) Defective 2 Mfd. condenser (Located next to 4 Mfd. condensers).
(c) Loose laminations in power transformer or filter choke. Tighten all clamp-
ing screws in R.P.A. unit.
(d) Poteñtiometer not properly adjusted. Adjust potentiometer on top of
R.P.A. unit for position of minimum hum.
(e) Power line interference. This can be checked by disconnecting loop from
terminal strip and noticing if hum disappears.

(6) DISTORTION AFTER LOUDSPEAKER HAS BEEN CHECKED

Distortion may originate in a leaky 2 Mfd. condenser (located next to 4 Mfd. fil-
ter condenser), or it may be due to a low emission Radiotrou UX-210. The 2 Mfd.
condenser may be checked by temporarily disconnecting it from the circuit while oper-
ating the Radiola and noting if distortion ceases.
A low emission Radiotron UX-210 may cause a "burr" or "fringe" on each musi-
cal note accompanied by unnatural and rough speech. This Radiotron may usually
be reactivated by operating the R.P.A. unit for a period of ten minutes with the two
Radiotrons UX-281 removed. If this process fails it will be necessary to use a new
Radiotron UX-210.

(7) IF PLATES OF RADIOTRONS UX-210 AND UX-281 HEAT

EXCESSIVELY
If plate of Radiotron UX-210 is dull red-check the following:
(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser. (Located next to resistance units.)
If plate of Radiotron UX-210 is white hot. Check the following:
(a) Open resistance R-1.
If plates of Radiotrons I"X-281 are dull red-check the following :

(a) Shorted 4 Mfd. filter condenser. (Either of the two top condensers or the
one located next to 2 Mfd. condenser.)
If plates of Radiotrons UX-281 are white hot-check the following:
(a) Shorted 4 Mfd. filter condenser.(Located next to filter reactor.)
Should one Radiotron UX-281 become a dull red while the other is apparently
normal, replace the Radiotron UX-281 that is apparently normal. The apparently nor-
mal Radiotron UX-281 is defective, causing the other to heat from overload.

(8) DISTORTION IN REPRODUCER UNIT

Distortion in the Reproducer unit may be caused by any of the following:
20
 (a) Poor input from Receiver. Examine output of receiver at input connections
of R.P.A. unit.
(b) Leads from movable coil broken away from sides of cone. (Make these fast
with a little shellac.)
(c) Shorting of movable coil to pole piece of pot magnet.
(d) Mis -alignment of reproducer cone.
In the case of "c" and "d" the remedy is to re -align or center the cone properly.
When centered properly the cone coil is free to move in the air gap of the pot magnet
without touching either side of the pole piece. The proper procedure for making this
adjustment is as follows:
(a) Remove grille from front of reproducer unit.
(b) Loosen screw centering cone to pole piece.
(c) Insert three small strips of cardboard about 1/4" x 11/2" and the thickness of
a visiting card, in the space between the inside of the cone coil and the pole piece of
the pot magnet. These pieces of card should be placed in the center of the small slots
in the webbing of the centerpiece of the cone. They just hold the cone so that it is
evenly spaced on all sides. Figure 14 illustrates this operation in adjusting the cone.
(d) Now tighten screw in center of pole piece and then remove the strips of card.
The cone is now properly centered, and if any further distortion is experienced it
is due to other causes.

(9) FILTER CONDENSER TESTS

The filter condensers in Radiola 32 are best tested by means of a high D.C. voltage
used to charge these condensers and then noting their ability to hold the charge. As a
high D.C. voltage is rarely obtainable either in the dealer's shop or the customer's
home it will be necessary to use the high voltage source incorporated in the R.P.A. unit.
The following procedure should be used to test these condensers:
(a) Take out the R.P.A. assembly from cabinet and remove the metal cover.
Replace R.P.A. assembly in cabinet without cover and connect input plug to unit. Re-
move all other connecting cables. Short terminals No. 10 and No. 11 which go to th2
reproducer unit and remove Radiotron UX-210. Have operating switch "Off."
(b) With a hot soldering iron release the leads connecting the 2 Mfd. condenser
at the extreme left, looking at the R.P.A. unit from the rear of the Radiola, and the
double filter reactor. This connection is at the terminal nearest the front of Radiola 32.
(c) Standing so as not to be in contact with any part of the R.P.A. unit throw the
operating switch to the "On" position for about 30 seconds and then turn it "Off."
Then using a well insulated screw driver or one having a wooden handle bring the lead
released back to its original position. At the point of contact there will be a large flash.
When doing this do not come in contact with either of these leads as a severe shock may
result. The flash obtained will be an indication that all the filter condensers are in good
operating condition, because any defective condenser would immediately discharge all the
others and no spark could be obtained.
(d) If no spark is obtained each condenser should be released from the circuit by
unsoldering one of its leads one at a time and the test applied to those remaining.
When the defective condenser is released a good discharge will be obtained from the re-
maining condensers.
This test subjects these condensers to a voltage in excess of the maximum oper-
ating voltage normally received. When subjected to this test a defective condenser that
might pass a click or low voltage test will immediately be identified.
21
(i0) NO "B" VOLTAGE
A no -voltage reading obtained at the 45 or 90 -volt terminals will indicate one of
the following defects:
(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser-located next to resistance units.
(b) Defective Radiotron UX-281.
(c) Open or shorted "B" voltage connections.

(11) COMPLETE R.P.A. CONTINUITY TESTS

The tabulated continuity tests given in the text cover all circuits of the Radiola
32 R.P.A. unit. Before running these tests remove all connections from the terminal
board at the rear of the R.P.A. unit, also the Radiotrons. The reference letters and
numbers used in the table will be found in Figure 12.
The testing equipment consists of a high resistance voltmeter with battery voltage
sufficient to give approximately full scale deflection when connected directly across bat-
tery terminals-for example, a 45 -volt "B" battery connected in series with a volt-
meter having a 0-50 volt scale. The contact points of the testing equipment should not
touch any metallic part of the unit except the terminals specified. Discharge the 4 Mfd.
filter condensers by short-circuiting their terminals with a screwdriver before starting
test.
R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

1 to 2 Closed Open primary of input transformer

3 to 4 Closed Open secondary of output transformer
4 to 7 Closed Open connection
4 to 8 Closed Open connection or resistor unit R-1
4 to 9 Closed Open connection or resistor unit R-1
5 to ground Closed Open connection
5 to 10 Closed Open connection
11 to P2 or P3 Closed Open connection or high voltage winding
of power transformer
G1 to top of R3 (Remove Closed Open primary of output transformer
cover)
Across filament contacts Closed Open UX-210 filament winding or re-
of socket No. 1 sistance
Across filament contacts Closed Open UX-281 filament winding or re-
of socket 2 or 3 sistance
+ or -F3
to terminal Closed Open connection, filter reactor or re-
No. 9 sistor unit R-2 or R-3
P2 to P3 Closed Open high voltage winding of power
Center of socket 4 to one transformer
side of input plug (de- Closed Open primary power transformer
termined by experi-
ment)
Ground to center of Open Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser located next
socket 4 to 4 Mfd. condenser
22
 :E.//,
, Black with
Ye//ow
Tracer
Yenow
with Red
Tracer
a
LOUD SPEAKER
MODEL 104
REPRODUCER UNIT II/ Maroon

©7I+m (Maroon B Red

I %!I/
I INPUT

Brown
Black W/1/7
Brown Tracer

DOUBLE CHpKE
4 MFD.

TOP OF -- R3 4MFD:
RESISTOR_
UNIT

-- -R2
-I
RI-- -et _ó

Cab/e

te -2R1
Q
a-
FIL.
RESISTOR

P. G ..

U X210: : U.X281 UX-,281 UX-281

FIL. POTES-)
F: F RESISTO
TIOIETER

110 V.
60A+
A.C.

OPERATING
2 3 4
,Q000 1

304.0 SWITCH

Nal 3 2 1111 I
NOT USED

e ;/"© ; Al©:
O;/¡ /i PLUG TO)
HOUSE CIRCUIT

Brown -- INPUT OUTPUT -A FILAMENT +A

-B
+45 +90 (FIELD

Black wilh
Brown
Tracer
Black w//h
Yellow Tracer Yellow with I Maroon
Red Tracer Maroon and Red

Figure 12-Rectifier power dmpleer and reproducer unit continuity wiring diagram
28
 PART III -MAKING REPLACEMENTS
(1) REPLACING DEFECTIVE PARTS IN PANEL ASSEMBLY
The panel assembly of Radiola 32 is held in place by means of four bolts, these
bolts being locked by a wire connecting all the bolts together. A step by step procedure
for removing the panel assembly is as follows:
(a) Place Radiola 32 in position so that both rear doors can be opened wide.
(b) Remove loop connections and power cable 'terminal strip from rear terminal
strip of panel assembly.
(c) Cut and remove the wire connecting the heads of the four bolts holding the
panel assembly to the cabinet.

fet FFI

e 0.4. 01
;m 9 m ® ®

w
a, ;m, 7ft 1r, ;® _ ® ® m

} iá

rB/ack
1 2
la ìäá
3 4 5

A-Yellow
lf.3 1w 1117LAJ
6 7 8 9 10

wi/h Red Tracer

I
ui( Lrtl tP
12 13 14
1rU
IS
ww
16 17
Ue7
18
w trtil EA iiJ tñl°"`
19 20 21

CATACOMB,/
TERMINAL STRIP
22 13 'I

re -Black with Blue Tracer

K -Maroon

"-Maroon B Red
Black with
p'Red Tracer
rBrown

Black with)
Ye//ow Tracer

INPUT +90':::;+45 -B+A -A

TERMINAL BOARD ON A. C. PACKAGE CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

Figure 13-Panel and R.P.A. connecting cable with color scheme

(d) Remove four bolts holding panel assembly to cabinet. When removing these
bolts the rubber washers should be taken off with each bolt.
(e) The panel assembly may now be lifted clear of its compartment and removed
to a place convenient for repair or replacing.
Any defective unit may be readily replaced, wiring of all units being very acces-
sible. When removing a unit it is good practice to first tag all wires disconnected so
that when the unit is replaced the wires may be easily connected to their original ter-
minals. The color scheme of the panel assembly may be referred to in Figure 9.
After the repair or replacement is completed the panel assembly should be re-
turned to the cabinet in the reverse of the foregoing order. A piece of bare copper or
brass wire about No. 18 B.&S. should be used to lock the bolts so that the vibration of
the loudspeaker will not cause them to loosen. Special care should be taken to see
that the rubber supports and rubber washers are returned to their original location.
The panel should also clear the front apron and each side of the cabinet. This is very
important for unless the entire panel assembly is free from contact with the cabinet and
resting upon its rubber supports, serious microphonic trouble will result.
24
(2) REPLACING DEFECTIVE PARTS IN R.P.A. ASSEMBLY
In order to make any replacements in the R.P.A. unit it will be necessary to re-
move the unit from the cabinet and then remove its metal cover. A step by step
procedure is as follows :
(a) Place Radiola 32 in a position so that both rear doors can be opened wide.
(b) Cut and remove the wire connecting the heads of the four bolts holding the
R.P.A. assembly to the cabinet.
(c) Remove the four bolts holding R.P.A. assembly to cabinet.
(d) Disconnect input plug and close sliding safety door. Now open cover of ter-
minal strip and remove all connections to the terminals.
(e) The R.P.A. unit may now be lifted clear of the cabinet.

Figi,re 1-t-il ethorl of nrljnxting the cone. Sole the three /rieeex of rury/hrrnrrl rrxerl in
centering the cone

(f) At each end of the R.P.A. unit is located a seal. Each of these seals may
be released with a screw driver. The small screws around the lower edge of the cover
should then be removed.
(g) Now remove the small pin protruding at the safety door.
(h) The cover may now be removed allowing access to any part.
When the repair or replacement is effected the cover should be replaced and sub-
stitute seals placed in the position occupied by those broken. These seals will enable
the dealer at a future date to tell whether service work is caused by ordinary wear and
tear or by tampering.
The entire assembly may now be returned to the cabinet, the cables replaced and
the bolts locked in position with wire in the reverse order of that used to remove it.

(3) REPLACING LOUDSPEAKER CONE

The cone assembly of Radiola 32 is a standard RCA 104 pot magnet and cone
assembly suspended by means of a special felt cushion arrangement. In order to replace
a cone the entire assembly must be removed from the cabinet. A step by step procedure
is as follows:
25
 (a) Place cabinet in position so that left door (facing Radiola 32 from the rear)
may be opened.
(b) Cut and remove the wire locking the four bolts that hold the pot magnet to
the cabinet.
(c) Release the field and output wires from the terminal strip of the R.P.A. unit
and also from the sides to provide clearance when the pot magnet is removed.
(d) Holding the pot magnet in one hand, release the four bolts that hold it.
Be careful not to 'drop the pot magnet as it is very heavy and would damage the
R.P.A. unit should it fall. The felt strips should be removed and the pot magnet
placed in a position convenient for removing the cone.
(e) Release the two leads connecting the cone coil to the terminals.
(f) Remove the six screws on the ring holding the cone and the screw centering the
cone to pole piece. Remove ring and slip cone clear of pot magnet.

Figure 15 --The correct method of replacing dial scalea

(g) Place the new cone in the position occupied by the old cone. Replace the
cone ring and the six screws that hold it, but do not draw them up tight. Put centering
screw in place, but do not tighten it.
(h) Now insert three small strips of cardboard about 11/2" x 1/4" and the thick-
ness of a visiting card-through the center web of the cone into the space between the
pole piece and cone. This will cause the cone coil to have the same clearance on all
sides of the pole piece. Figure 14 shows this operation, but with the pot magnet in its
position in the cabinet. Refer to Part II Section 3.
(i) Tighten center screw of cone and then the six small screws holding the cone
ring in, position. Remove the three pieces of card.
(j) Connect the two cone coil leads to their binding posts.
(k) The pot magnet may now be replaced in the cabinet in the reverse of the pro-
cedure used to remove it. Special care should be taken to see that the assembly is sus-
pended by the felt strips provided for that purpose. The entire reproducer unit should
be insulated from the baffle board and from the cabinet by the felt ring and strips.
26
(4) REPLACING DIAL SCALES
The dial scales on Radiola 32 are of the renewable type, permitting the replace-
ment of clean scales for soiled ones when desirable. This operation is very simple. A
step by step procedure is as follows. (See Figure 15.)
(a) Open front drop and remove escutcheon plate from control drums.
(b) Turn drums to either extreme and loosen the four screws that hold the scales.
The ends of the scales may now be pulled clear.
(c) Now turn tuning drums to other extreme and loosen the four screws that hold
the scales in place at this end. The scales may now be completely removed.
(d) Place the new scales in the position occupied by the old ones, line up the scales
and tighten the clamping plates.
(e) Replace the escutcheon plate.

LOOP CONTROL DRUM

QN SET SCREW
TO LOCK
CABLE
IN DRUM

Figure 16-Loop cable arrangement

(5) REPLACING THE LOOP DRIVE CABLE

The rotation of the loop in Radiola 32 is controlled from a drum protruding on
the front of the cabinet. The motion of the control drum is transmitted to the loop
by means of a stranded drive cable. This cable gives a positive control with no lost
motion. After considerable use or abuse it may become broken or for other reasons
require replacement. The following procedure should be followed when this is necessary.
(a) Open rear doors of cabinet and release old cable from control drum on panel
and drive drum at top of loop.
(b) As replacement cables are stocked complete with turnbuckles, it will be neces-
sary to first remove one end of the cable from the turnbuckle so that the cable may be
threaded through the holes on the drums. The position for placing the new cable is
shown in Figure 16 which must be followed closely. Special attention should be given
the position of the turnbuckle to clear the drums and guides.
(e) After placing the cable in position, the turnbuckle end is soldered to the cable
end and then threaded into the turnbuckle. The turnbuckle should be adjusted to take
up all slack in the cable, but not tight enough to cause friction at the control drum.
27
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak sig-
nals, poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective
tubes. If imperfect operation is not due to defective tubes the "Service Data Chart" should be
consulted for further detailed causes.
SEE SERVICE NOTES
Indication Cause Remedy Part I Part II
House current not "On"
Defective operating switch
. . Turn house current "On" - Sec. 1
. . Repair or replace operating
switch - -
Defective input plug to R.Y.A.
unit Repair or replace input plug - Sec. 1

No signals
Defective panel assembly . . Check by continuity and repair
or replace Sec. 15 -
Defective R.I.A. Unit
Defective A.C. Package con-
. . . Check by continuity and repair
or replace - Sec. I
denser bank
Check and replace defective
condenser -
Defective pot magnet or open
cone coil
Defective cables connecting va-
Check for continuity and replace - -

rions assemblies . . . .
Check and repair or replace
defective cables . . . . - - -

Defective loop or loop connec-

tions .
Radiola in shielded locality .
Repair loop or loop connections
Use short outdoor antenna .
Sec. 8
Sec. 10 -
Main tuning condensers out of Line up main tuning condensers
Weak
Signals
alignment or loop compensat
ing condenser not adjusted.
and adjust loop compensating
condenser Sec. 9 -
Defective R.P.A. Assembly . Check R.P.A. continuity and re-
pair or replace defect . . . Sec. 17 Sec. 11

Defective panel assembly . . Check panel continuity and re-

pair or replace defect. Sec. 15 -
Defective catacomb Check catacomb continuity and
Defective condensers in R.Y.A.
. . . .

replace if defective . . . Sec. 15 -

Poor
Quality unit
Cone of Reproducer unit not
Check and replace . - Sec. 9

centered properly . .
Wires loose on side of cone .
.
Center cone of Reproducer
replace cone
Fasten wires with shellac .
of
-- Sec.
Sec.
8
8
Dirty Radiotron prongs
1 oose filament or volume con
. Clean Radiotron prongs . .
Tighten filament or volume con -
Sec. 3 -
Noisy or trol rheostat trol arm and clean contact
Intermit- point Sec 4 -

tent
Reception Sprung socket contacts . . Bend socket contacts . . . Sec. 2 --
Defective or loose loop connec- Repair or tighten loop connec-
tions tions Sec 8 --
Microphonic Radiotrons UX-199 Interchange Radiotrons UX-199 Sec. 12 --
Panel assembly not positioned
properly Position panel correctly . . Sec. 12 _
Reproducer not properly in- See that reproducer is properly
Howling sulated from cabinet . insulated from cabinet . . Sec. 12 --
Baffle board not properly in-
sulated Check baffle board insulation . Sec. 12 --
Open resistor
volume control
on auxiliary
Replace resistor found defective - -
All Radio-
trons fail
Operating switch not "On"
Defective operating switch
.

.
.

.
Pull operating switch "On" .
Repair or replace
-- Sec.
Sec.
1
1

to light Defective R.P.A. unit .

Defective R.P.A. unit

. . Check R.P.A. unit and make
repair or replacement . . . - Sec. 11

Radiotrons
U X-199 fail
Defective cables
. . Check H.Y.A. unit, and make
repair or replacement
Check and repair or replace
. .

.
--- -1
Sec.

U light
8
Defective A.C. package
denser bank
con- Test and replace defective con -
denser - -
Defective catacomb . . . 1'est and replace Sec 15 -
 RCA
Radiola 41 SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 41

Regular Edition -25M

Copyright December. 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION O1 THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO ILL. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.
I ldg. No. 19 -168 -39th St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEXAS ATLANTA GA.
Santa Fe Bldg. Monroe Bonded Warehouse
Unit No. 2 Spring and Peters Sts.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized
Dealer renders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper
installation and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by rea-
son of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker and
Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service
organizations having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the
design and operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and
RCA Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to
their selected Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical
adjustments may be undertaken by the RCA Dealer.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's busi-
ness the RCA Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which
this booklet is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in
servicing RCA. Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers
and Distributors' service problems and presents the best practice in dealing
with them. A careful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value,
and it is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division
maintains a corps of engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solv-
ing service problems. These engineers call upon the trade at frequent intervals
to advise and assist RCA Distributors in the performance of service work.

Property of the Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its
Authorized Distributors and Dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1928-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS
Page
A Word or Two About Service 2
Introduction -
5
Service Data Chart 27

PART I-INSTALLATION
Page Ground 8
Antenna (Outdoor Type) 7 Radiotrons... 8
Antenna (Indoor Type) 7 Location of Radiola in Room_......_.__ 9

PART II -SERVICE DATA

Antenna System Failures 9 Distorted Reproduction 14
Radiotron Sockets_._ 9 Uncontrolled Oscillation__ 15
Radiotron Prongs . 9 Acoustic Howl 16
Loose Volume Control Contact Arm _ 9 Testing Filter and By -Pass Condensers.. 16
Adjustment of Slack Drum Control -_ 10 Testing Disc Rectifier.__ 17
Broken Condenser Drive Cable .._._ 10 Reproducer Unit 17
Hum____.. 12 Centering Cone of Reproducer Unit........._._..._.._ _ 17
Distortion in Reproducer Unit 12 Obtaining Access to S. P. U. Terminal Boards _._ 17
Low Volume and Weak Signals 13 Radiola 41 Continuity Tests. 17
Audio Howl 13 Voltage Reading& 22

PART III -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing Parts in Receiver Assembly. 24 Replacing Parts in Sterling S. P. U. ._.. _...._.. 25
Replacing Parts in Loudspeaker Assembly. _._ -. 25 Replacing Parts in Receptor S. P U ....................... 26

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Radiola 41 1 Terminal Board of Receptor S. P. U....._....... ........ 15
Rear Interior and Sterling S. P. U. Cabinet View 4 Terminal Board of Sterling S. P. U 15
Sub -chassis of Receiver__ ___.. 5 Internal Connections of A. F. Transformers.....__ - 16
Radiotron Sequence_.____ .............. .. _ 6 Wiring Diagram of Receiver 18
Radiotron Socket Contacts 7
Wiring Diagram of Receptor S. P. U. ......... 20
Tightening Condenser Drive Cable._. 8
Wiring Diagram of Sterling S. P. U. 21
Schematic of Receiver 10
Sterling S. P. U. 22
Schematic of Sterling S. P. U. . _. 11
Receptor S. P. U..__.___ 23
Schematic of Receptor S. P. U. 11
Schematic of Resistance Measurement Method._.. 12
Removing Receiver from Cabinet-----. 24
Wiring Diagram of Reproducer .- 13 Reproducer Assembly 25
Centering Cone 14 Removing Receptor S. P. U. from Cabinet 26
3
R,FPRJDUCER RECEIVER
UNIT ASSEMBLY

SOCKET POWER UNIT

Figure 1-Zieur interior cabinet new of

M Rudiulu 41 sltotaing part.. and
Sterling S. Y. U.
 RCA RADIOLA 41
(105-125 Volts. 50-60 Cycle A. C.)

SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division

RCA Radiola 41 is a six-tube tuned radio'frequency receiver employing four Radiotrons

UX-226, one Radiotron UY -227, one Radiotron UX-210 and one Radiotron rectifier UX-280
in the socket power unit. Combined with the receiver in the console cabinet is a new
dynamic speaker, giving exceptional tone quality to the output from the receiver assembly

VOLUME AUDIO GRID BY-PASS

CONTROL TRANSFORMERS LEAK CONDENSERS

BY-PASS
A. F. GRID GRID R.F.COIL
CONDENSER CONDENSER RESISTORS ASSEMBLY
Figure 2-Sub-chassis view of receiver assembly showing parts

A disc type rectifier furnishes direct current of the proper voltage for field supply to the
reproducer unit. Figure 1 is a rear interior view.
This combination of a tuned R. F. receiver (Figure 2) with a Radiotron UY -210 power
amplifier and the new dynamic reproducer unit results in a radio receiver of excellent sensi-
tivity, selectivity, volume and tone quality.
Radiola 41 is designed to operate on alternating current of 105 to 125 volts, 50 to 60
cycles, such as is used for house lighting. Connection to D. C. lines or to A. C. lines of differ-
ent rating may damage the Radiola or the Radiotrons.
Radiola 41 is also made in models designed for 105-125 volts, 25-40 cycles A. C. opera-
tion. In this model the power transformer is different from that used in the 50-60 cycle
models. All other parts are identical in both models and the Service Notes apply to each
equally well.
5
 The following design characteristics are incorporated in Radiola 41:
(a) The circuit consists of one untuned coupling stage, two tuned radio frequency
stages, a tuned detector and two audio stages-the last stage using Radiotron
UX-210 as a power amplifier.
(b) The volume control regulates the input grid voltage to the coupling stage. This
gives a smooth control of volume without distortion.
(c) Grid resistances in the two tuned radio frequency stages effectively prevent any
tendency to self oscillation in these circuits.
(d) A new type dynamic reproducer unit similar to that in Loudspeaker 106 is used.
(e) Field current for the dynamic speaker is supplied by a full wave disc rectifier,
mounted directly on the reproducer unit. There is also mounted on the reproducer
unit a suitable output transformer for coupling the output from Radiotron UX-210
to the low impedance cone coil on the reproducer unit. Two .1 mfd. condensers

TO ANTENNA

212 IST gas 2 ^o

DETECTOR
A.F. A.F. R. F. R. F

RADIO FREQUENCY
TO LOUDSPEAKER AUDIO FREQUENCY

Figure 3-Radiotron sequence

connected together in series with their mid -point grounded are provided to prevent
any possible R. F. current, set up in the rectifier, from affecting the receiver.
Figure 3 illustrates the electrical sequence of the Radiotrons used in the receiver
assembly.
Radiotron No. 1 is an untuned stage of radio frequency amplification. It is coupled
directly to the antenna and ground by the volume control.
Radiotron No. 2 is a stage of tuned R. F. amplification employing a grid resistance to
prevent oscillation. It is tuned by the first gang condenser.
Radiotron No. 3 is the second stage of tuned R. F. amplification. It also employs a
grid resistance for the purpose of stabilizing or preventing self oscillation in the circuit. It is
tuned by the second of the main tuning condensers.
Radiotron No. 4 is the detector, tuned by the third gang condenser.
Radiotrons No. 5 and No. 6 are respectively the first and second stages of audio fre-
quency amplification. The last stage, Radiotron No. 6. employs power amplifier Radiotron
UX-210.
6
 PART I-INSTALLATION
[1] ANTENNA (Outdoor Type)
Due to the sensitivity of Radiola 41 the antenna length need only be 25 to 50 feet.
It should be erected as high as possible and be removed from all obstructions. The lead-in
should be a continuation of the antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices which might intro-
duce additional resistance and, in time, corrode sufficiently to seriously affect reception.
If it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the antenna the joint must be carefully
soldered to insure a good electrical contact. Clean off all excess flux and tape the connection,
to protect it from the oxidation effects of the atmosphere.
High-grade glass or porcelain insulator supports are required, and at no point should the
antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any part of the building. Bring the lead-in wire
from the outside through a porcelain -tube insulator to the inside of the house for connection
to the receiver.

Figure .4-Radiotron socket contacts

The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction, or power
line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antennas. An outdoor antenna
should be protected by means of an approved lightning arrester, in accordance with the re-
quirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.

[2] ANTENNA (Indoor Type)

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results may
generally be obtained by using an indoor antenna of about 25 to 40 feet of insulated wire
strung around the picture moulding or placed under a rug. In buildings where metal lath-
ing is employed, satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of antenna. How-
ever, due to its sensitivity, Radiola 41 will generally give entirely satisfactory reception with
an indoor antenna.
7
[3] GROUND
A good ground is quite as important as a good antenna. Nc specific recommendations
can be given in this matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water and steam pipes
usually make good grounds. Gas pipes usually make poor grounds and, as a rule, are to be
avoided. If neither water nor steam pipes are available, a pipe or metal rod may be driven
into the ground to a depth of several feet. The success of this type of ground depends upon
the moisture present in the soil. The ground lead should be connected by means of an
approved ground clamp to a section of pipe that has been scraped and thoroughly cleaned.
The connection should be inspected from time to time to make certain that a clean and tight
electrical contact exists between the clamp and pipe. The service man should experiment
with various grounds, and employ the one giving the best results.
A spark will occur if the power supply is "on" when making the ground connection.
This action is normal, being caused by the discharge of one of the .1 mfd. condensers con-

Figure 5-Tightening condenser drive cable

netted across the power input to the disc rectifier. No current is consumed as no load is
being drawn through the condènser.

[4] RADIOTRONS
Radiotrons UX-226 are used in all radio frequency amplifying stages and in the first
audio amplifying stage. It has an oxide coated filament consuming 1.05 amperes at 1.5 volts.
Radiotron UY-227 is used for the detector. It operates on raw A. C. for filament sup-
ply, making use of an indirectly heated cathode. This Radiotron has five prongs, the extra
prong being connected to the oxide coated cathode.
Radiotron UX-210 is used in the last audio stage and provides ample power without
distortion. Be careful not to insert any Radiotrons UX-226 in the UX-210 socket as imme-
diate filament burnout will result.
Radiotron UX-280 (in the Socket Power Unit) is a full wave rectifying Radiotron used
to rectify the alternating current into pulsating direct current, which is smoothed out by
means of a filtering system, and used to provide all plate and biasing voltages.
8
[5] LOCATION OF RADIOLA IN ROOM
As with other musical instruments, the location of Radiola 41 in the room should be
chosen with care. Various positions should be tried until the most desirable reproduction is
obtained. If this position is outside the radius of the connection cord to the A. C. outlet, an
extension cord can be used.

PART II-SERVICE DATA

[1] ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES
A &rating noise may be caused by a poor lead-in connection to the antenna; or the
antenna touching some metallic surface, such as the edge of a tin roof, drain pipe, etc. By
disconnecting the antenna and ground leads the service man can soon determine whether the
cause of complaint is within or external to the receiver and plan his service work accordingly

[2] RADIOTRON SOCKETS

The sockets in Radiola 41 are of the standard gang UX and UY type (Figure 4). The
three-gang socket is for the radio frequency amplifiers; the single socket-a five -prong
detector socket is for Radiotron UY -227 and the two -gang socket is for the audio frequency
amplifiers. Care must be exercised when inserting Radiotrons in the sockets. A socket
contact may not be in its correct position and forced insertion of a tube will bend or break it.
If care is exercised and the Radiotron inserted gently, little trouble will be experienced with
socket contacts. A bent one will be noticeable on inspection and may be corrected by insert-
ing a narrow instrument in the socket hole and pushing the contact into its correct position.
A badly bent or broken socket contact must be replaced.

[3] RADIOTRON PRONGS

Dirty Radiotron prongs may cause noisy operation or change the resistance of the fila-
ment circuit sufficiently to cause a hum in the loudspeaker. They should therefore be
cleaned periodically to insure good contact.
The prongs should be cleaned by using a piece of fine sandpaper. The use of emery
cloth or steel wool is not recommended. Before re-inserting Radiotrons in their sockets wipe
the prongs and base carefully to make certain that all particles of sand are removed.
In placing Radiotrons in the UX sockets care should be exercised to make. certain that
the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons match the socket holes. The UY -227
Radiotron has five prongs all of the same size and will fit in the socket only one way. If a
Radiotron will not fit into a socket without considerable pressure being applied, look for
excessive solder on one or more of the prongs. Excessive solder on prongs may be removed
with a file or knife.

[4] LOOSE VOLUME CONTROL CONTACT ARM

A loose volume control contact may cause noisy or intermittent operation and should
be remedied. If the contact arm is loose, the remedy is to bend it slightly so that it makes
firm contact against the resistance strip. In order to do this it is necessary to remove the
chassis from the cabinet as described in Part IV, Section 1. The volume control is then read-
ily accessible. By removing the two screws that hold it to the metal frame it may be com-
pletely removed. The small U-shaped washer is removed from the shaft and the spring
contact arm is pulled out to clear the resistor strip. The spring contact arm may now be
bent sufficiently to make a good contact. After adjusting the spring contact arm, replace
the mounting screws and return the chassis to the cabinet and replace screws and control
knobs.
9
 GANG CONDENSER -TL

INPUT 600w OP. 15TT,R.F 2Y0T.RF 1LrA.F. PWR. A F

U%-226 1000w lJX-226 IOOOw,, ;'UR -226 U%-226 XX- 210

i
1 ooll-I
0 ,o T -T
LóúD; PEAK ER

co oy o
UY227
i i
2 3
o 4+DET
1 RED

ROD AOND
2 M

MFD
- CONTROL
VOLUME T DET ;C
i3 MAROON

4 YELLOW
E...-1
,< Is YELLOW

210 ,

IC
6 YELLOW

I< 7 OREEN

227
8 GREEN

9 RED
226 ;

I
0 10 RED

11 YELLOWIWTTH

SWITCH
`O E2
FLACK WITH
GREER TRACE'
CABLE -----

Figure 6-Schematic circuit diagram of the receiver assembly

in Radiola 11

[5] ADJUSTMENT FOR SLACK DRUM CONTROL

The main tuning condensers are controlled by a cable and drum arrangement giving a
smoothly acting vernier movement that has no back lash.
After considerable wear or extreme changes of temperature the cable may become slack.
To take up this slack remove the back of the cabinet and turn the cable adjusting screw
with clamp until the cable is taut (Figure 5). This screw may become seated after several
adjustments are made, thus allowing no further tightening of the cable. When this condition
occurs it will be necessary to slip the cable a half turn on the grooved drum. To make
this adjustment it is necessary to remove the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part
III, Section 1. Remove the cable adjusting screw and clamp. The cable will then have
approximately one inch slack. By removing the tapered pin holding the front grooved drum
to its shaft and replacing it on the opposite side (180 degrees) the one inch slack in the cable
can be taken up by using the new position of the pin for anchoring the cable. It will be
noted that the tapered pin in the new position cannot be inserted as far as originally. How-
ever, it can be inserted far enough to lock the grooved drum to the control shaft and clear
the metal housing. If the cable again is stretched to the maximum adjustment of the cable
adjusting serew the tapered pin can be returned to its original position and an additional
half turn slipped on the drum which will provide for taking up all slack. A sufficient number
of grooves are provided on the drum for this purpose.

[6] BROKEN CONDENSER DRIVE CABLE

A broken condenser drive cable can be replaced. See other RCA Service Notes for
making this replacement. However, if a new cable is not immediately available a temporary
repair can be made in the following manner, provided the break in the cable is not in that
section that passes over the small grooved drums.
lo
 REPRODUCER DISC
RECTIFIER
OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
i -I-.I MFD.
.1 MFD.
L. S.
POWER
TRANSFORMER.,,,

2
r-
ori

i
p+ rwR.
8+ AMP.4MNI
W AK
' VOLTAGE
DIVIDING
RESISTANCE
FILTER REACTOR
Ì
105-125
VOLTS
2 MPG. 2 MFG. 50-60
I7,400w 1 MFD.
a á 1
8+ßET.
20w t
CYCLES
A.C.
3,660 W
B-
4

S o
I,620 W - - MPG.

6 o. 210

7 o

ee
227
8
9 0
10

Il
0
OI
226

SWITCH
12L
1210
Jf-_ TERMINAL BOARD FILAMENT TRANSFORMER'

Figure 7-Schematic circuit diagram of Sterling S. P. U.

Splice and solder the two ends together. Splicing consists of interweaving the strands,
as with rope, and not just twisting the cable ends together as in an electrical wiring splice
Splicing gives greater strength and forms a smaller body on the cable. When soldering use
plenty of flux and a small amount of solder. Heat sufficiently so that the solder adheres to
all the strands of the cable. Placing the splice in an alcohol or bunsen flame affords sufficient
heat and allows excess solder to drip away. This is but a temporary repair to be used only
until a new cable can be procured.
REPRODUCER 'ete, DISC
UNIT _____ RECTIFIER

OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
..L .1 MFD.

.1 MFD.
LS

POWER
TRANSFORMER,
r-- ,VOLTAGE
1 B+ PWR.
DIVIDING FILTER REACTOR
12,300w
f
2
0'B+R.F.

o! B+DET. UM»
I MOD
RESISTANCE

2 MFD. 2
1
MFD.T
3

4 o' B
5,000w 0
C=3 105-125
5 O 1,600 w, VOLTS
, 210 UX210 BIAS 50-60
6 CYCLES
RESISTOR---
- I MFD. A.C.
7 o'
227
8

9 o'

226 UX-226 BIAS

10 RESISTOR'"'" }
1 MFD.

11 o 700w%
SWITCH
12 O,
--,-.--TERMINAL BOARD

Figure 8-Schematic circuit diagram of Receptor S. P. U.

11
[7] HUM
Refer to the schematic circuits, Figures 6, 7 and 8, in connection with the following
service data. If a pronounced hum develops look for:
(a) Low emission Radiotron UX-280. A low emission rectifying tube will cause exces-
sive hum and faulty operation.
(b) Filament center taps not correctly placed. Should a center tap connection to one
of the filament windings of the power transformer be off center, excessive hum will
result. In this case the power transformer must be replaced or a center tapped resis-
tance must be connected across the faulty winding and the center connection made
to the resistance center.
(c) Antenna and ground leads reversed. This may occur either at their point of con-
nection or at the volume control.
(d) Any of the several grounding leads in the Radiola not connected.

ACROSS RESISTANCE VOLTS

TO BE MEASURED
R- EOR 1000
I MILLIAMPERES

6 VOLTS

0-7

Figure 9-Schematic diagram of resistance

measurement method

(e) Defective disc rectifier. This may be checked by removing Radiotron UX-210 and
noting if the hum disappears. If it does not the trouble is in the disc rectifier and
it must be replaced.
(f) Sometimes reversing the S. P. U. 180 degrees from its original position will reduce
low frequency hum. This applies only to Receptor Units.
(g) A mechanical hum caused by loose laminations of the power transformer or filter
reactor (Receptor only) may be eliminated by removing the S. P. U. from its con-
tainer as described in Part III, Section 4, and tightening the clamps that hold the
loose laminations until the hum disappears.
(h) Radiotron UY-227 shield not in place. Some models of Radiola 41 use a shield to
entirely enclose the detector tube. Should this shield not be in place a high fre-
quency hum may develop. In models not equipped with this shield that have
excessive hum, the use of the shield may remedy this condition. A small can, such
as a cocoa can, that will fit snugly over the tube shields already in place, and
make connection to ground, may be used to check on this condition.

[8] DISTORTION IN REPRODUCER UNIT

Distortion in the reproducer unit may be due to any of the following causes.
(a) Cone out of alignment. Refer to Part II, Section 17.
(b) Leads from cone coil broken away from side of cone. Make these leads fast with
a little shellac.
(c) Loose escutcheons, baffle board or rear cover. Any loose part in the cabinet will
cause a rattle. Tighten all loose parts.
12
191 LOW VOLUME AND WEAK SIGNALS
Low volume or weak signals may be caused by:
(a) Defective antenna system. A poor antenna and ground or one in a shielded locality
may cause weak signals. The suggestions given in Part I, Sections 1, 2 and 3,
should be followed if trouble of this kind is experiénced.
(b) Defective Radiotrons. A defective Radiotron in any stage may cause weak signals.
Before checking other causes it is a good plan to check all Radiotrons by inter-
changing them with ones of a similar type known to be in good operating condition.
(e) Defective A. F. transformers or output transformer. A defect in any of these parts
will cause weak signals and abnormal operation. Check by means of the continuity
test and make any replacement that is necessary.
FROM CONE COIL,

DISC, -
,,DISC
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER

OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

Figure 10-Wiring diagram of reproducer assembly

(d) Low voltage from S. P. U. Check S. P. U. voltages at terminal

strip with readings
Low voltages may be caused by a low emission recti-
given in Part II, Section 18.
by means of continuity
fying tube or defective resistances in the S. P. U. Check
test. by means of continuity
(e) Open or short of various connections in receiver. Check
tests and make any repair or replacement that is necessary.
(f) Defective loudspeaker field supply.
(g) Open loudspeaker field or connections.
(h) Grounded loudspeaker input terminals.

f10] AUDIO HOWL

Audio howl may be caused by: of either of the A. F. by-pass con-
(a) Open A. F. condenser connections. An open
densers may cause a howl. of the connections to the large
(b) Open large by-pass condenser connections. An open
by-pass condensers may cause a howl.
13
 (c) Defective volume control resistance. Should there be an open or short in the volume
control or in its adjacent resistances an audio howl may develop.
(d) Vibrating elements in receiver Radiotrons. A gradually developed howl may be due
to the loudspeaker causing the receiver Radiotron elements to vibrate. To over-
come this condition, interchange the Radiotrons in the receiver, especially the
detector.
(e) Poor ground. Install ground system as suggested in Part I, Section 3.
f) Poorly soldered or corroded joints. Any high resistance joint throughout the Radi-
ola may cause a howl.
(g) Defective resistance in S: P. U. or the receiver assembly. An open resistance unit
may cause howl. Under such conditions it is advisable to turn the set "off" until
the trouble is found, otherwise excessive voltage rise may cause further damage.
(h) Open of any of the several ground leads in the Radiola. This may cause some of
the circuits to go into oscillation and result in a howl when a station is tuned "in."

Figure 11-Centering reproducer cone

Generally a loud hum will also be present. The several grounding leads in the
Receiver Assembly and in the Socket Power Unit should be checked and any open
or poorly soldered joint should be repaired.
(i) Defective grid leak or open grid connection in the Radiola, except Radiotron
UX-280.

[11] DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

Under normal conditions Radiola 41 will deliver a strong signal of good quality to the
loudspeaker. If the loudspeaker reproduction is poor test the output from the receiver. A
pair of phones may be used for this purpose. Poor quality or distortion may be due to any
of the following causes:
(a) High or low plate and grid voltages from socket power unit. This may be due
to a defective Radiotron UX-280 or tapped resistance unit. The remedy is to
replace the Radiotron UX-280 with one of known quality or check the various
resistances of the tapped resistor for a possible short or open.
14
 (b) Defective Radiotrons. Though the Radiola may be in operating condition a
defective Radiotron in any stage will cause distortion. This is especially true of
the detector,. 1st and 2nd audio stages and the rectifier tube.
(c) Defective A. F. transformer. Check by means of continuity tests and replace if
necessary.
Should Radiola 41 become noisy in operation or signals come in and die out abruptly
with periods of hum or no reception, test in the following manner:
(a) Disconnect antenna and ground leads. If the Radiola becomes quiet and signals
from local stations are received, though weak, the trouble is either in the antenna
system or is caused by nearby interfering electrical apparatus. The remedy in
the first case is to repair the antenna system and in the second connect Radio
Frequency chokes on any offending nearby apparatus.
(b) If disconnecting the antenna and ground system does not eliminate the noise the
trouble is in the Radiola. A defective tube, one having poorly welded elements
would cause a disturbance of this kind and this point should be checked by inter-
changing the Radiotrons in the Radiola with others of the same type. If it is
definitely established that the Radiotrons are O. K. then the contact between the
Radiotron prongs and the socket contacts should be examined for a dirty or poor
contact.

BLACK WITH
GREEN TRACER

'-BLACK WITH
YELLOW TRACER

Figure 12-Receptor S. P. U. Figure 13-Sterling S. P. U. terminal board showing

terminal board and color of color scheme of connections
connections

[12] UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATION

Should Radiola 41 oscillate or regenerate at any point in the tuning range the trouble
isprobably caused by:
(a) Defective grid resistor in second or third R. F. stages. The resistors may be
checked by means of a resistance bridge, or the voltmeter ammeter method described
below. Figure 6 shows the correct value of these resistors.
(b) Open ground connection. Make repair.
(c) High resistance ground. Connect the ground lead to a cold water pipe, a hot water
or steam radiator or both. If these are not available connect to several other
grounds until a fairly low resistance ground is obtained.
(d) Open UX-226 bias lead. Make any repair necessary.
(e) Open ground lead in set. Any of the several grounding leads in the Receiver and
S. P. U. Assembly being open may cause oscillation. Test for open connections
and make repair.
(f) Antenna and ground leads reversed, either at their point of connection to the
volume control or outside of the set. Connect properly.
In the case of (a) the grid resistance of Radiola 41 may be checked by means of a resist-
ance bridge. If a resistance bridge is not available the voltmeter -ammeter method gives
accurate results provided the meters used are calibrated accurately. This method makes
15
 use of a milliammeter with a scale of 0-25 and a voltmeter of 0-7. A voltage is then applied
that will give a substantial reading. A circuit diagram of this method is shown in Figure 9.
The resistance may then be calculated by the use of Ohms law.
E Where R equals ohms Volts
R I E equals volts and I equals amperes, or 1000 Milliamperes
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or 10 ampere) it is necessary to
multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
Where everything tests O. K. and the Radiola still oscillates, the following remedy
should be applied:
Connect an 800 -ohm fixed resistance in series with the plate supply to all Radiotrons

/
UX-226. This will reduce the plate voltage to these tubes and should prevent any oscilla-
tion. If, however, the oscillation continues, do not put the resistor in the plate supply to
the UX-226 Radiotrons, but connect it across the primary of the second R. F. transformer
This will effectively prevent any case of oscillation.

/////' //// /'.

_2"_o A.F.
'--TRANSFORMER

"//y//,
YELLOW'
BLUE
RED,

GREEN

YELLOW
BLUE
RED

GREEN
1S? A.F.-'
TRANSFORMER

Figure 14-Internal connections of A. F. transformers

1 13 J ACOUSTIC HOWL
Microphonic or acoustic howling may be corrected by interchanging the tubes in the
receiver assembly. This can be done with Radiotrons UX-226. If this does not eliminate
the howl try changing the detector Radiotron UY-227 with another of the same type A
tube that is unsatisfactory in one set may be O. K. in another.

[14] TESTING FILTER AND BY-PASS CONDENSERS

The filter a,nd by-pass condensers in Radiola 41 can he checked by noting the voltage
readings given in Part II, Section 20. A no-voltage reading at any position will indicate
a shorted condenser or an open resistance unit. The resistance unit can be checked by the
continuity tests given in Part II, Section 19. After determining that the resistance units
are not a fault, the individual condensers should be tested by removing all connections and
charging them and then noting their ability to retain the charge. Figures 16 and 17 show the
interior connections of the condenser banks. The condensers should be discharged by short-
ing their terminals with a screwdriver. A defective condenser will not hold its charge. If it
is completely short-circuited a flash at the condenser terminals will occur when an attempt is
made to charge it.
16
[15] TESTING DISC RECTIFIER
The disc rectifier may be checked by measuring the output voltage that is delivered to
the field of the reproducer unit. This should be approximately 80 volts with the field con-
nected. With the field disconnected it should rise slightly to about 95 volts.
Precaution-The operation of the disc rectifier depends on the pressure to which the
discs are held. Do not loosen the bolts that hold them together as it is highly improbable
they can be returned to normal operation without special instruments. Should replacement
become.necessary, remove the bracket and unit together. The replacement part is supplied
with brackets so that replacement is comparatively easy.

[16] REPRODUCER UNIT

Radiola 41 uses a new type eight -inch dynamic reproducer, similar to that used in
Loudspeaker 106. The cone is an eight -inch corrugated type, giving a smooth response to
all frequencies and having a treatment to make it weatherproof and free from rattle.
A check on the continuity of the cone coil or field can be made by disconnecting them
from all other terminals and click testing for continuity. An open of either coil will indicate
a defect which must be remedied by replacing the entire cone or the field coil. Also check
either of the coils or their connections for shorts. The color scheme of connections of the
reproducer and rectifier assembly is shown in Figure 10.

[17] CENTERING CONE OF REPRODUCER UNIT

To properly center a new cone or one out of center (Figure 11) use the following pro-
cedure:
(a) Remove reproducer assembly from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 2.
(b) Loosen center screw of cone, but do not remove it.
(c) Insert three cardboard strips about the thickness of a visiting card, 1 % inches by
1/4 inch in size, through the center web of the cone into the space between the pole
piece and the cone. This will give the cone coil the same clearance on all sides of
the pole piece.
(d) Tighten the center screw holding the web of the cone and remove the three strips
The cone is now properly. centered. Replace the reproducer assembly in the cabinet
in the reverse manner of that used to remove it.

[18] OBTAINING ACCESS TO S. P. U. TERMINAL BOARDS

In order to make voltage readings or click tests at the S. P. U. terminal boards it is first
necessary to uncover them. The Receptor S. P. U. terminal board (Figure 12) is uncovered
by removing the guard held in place by two machine screws. In the Sterling S. P. U. (Figure
13), however, the procedure is more involved. A step-by-step procedure follows:
(a) Remove the rear cabinet panel, which is fastened by two wood screws.
(b) Remove the four screws on the sides of the S. P. U. near the top.
(c) The S. P. U. cover can now be removed by pushing the two sides together so that
the small catches are released and lifting the cover. The terminal board is now
accessible and any tests necessary may be made.
(d) To return the cover, just place top on S. P. U. and push down. It will Snap in place
easily. The four screws should then be replaced and the rear cabinet panel returned
to its normal position.

[19] RADIOLA 41 CONTINUITY TESTS

The following tests will show complete continuity for the receiver assembly and socket
power unit of Radiola 41. Access may be gained to the S. P. U. terminal boards as described
in Part II, Section 18.
17
18
 RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CONTINUITY TESTS
Remove all Radiotrons and the cables connected to the S. P. U. terminal board. See
Figure 6 for lug numbers, and Figure 15 for socket numbers.

Correct
Circuit Terminrzlx Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

Ant. to ground Closed Open volume control

GI to ground Closed Open volume control or contact arm
Grid G2 to ground Closed Open secondary of 1st R. F. transformer
or grid resistor
G3 to ground Closed Open secondary of 2nd R. F. transformer
or grid resistor
Stator Condenser No. 3 to Closed Open secondary of 3rd R. F. transformer
ground
G5 to ground Closed Open secondary of 1st A. F. transformer
G6 to ground Closed Open secondary of 2nd A. F. transformer
P1 to Lug No. 2 Closed Open primary of 1st R. F. transformer
Plate P2 to Lug No. 2 Closed Open primary of 2nd R. F. transformer
P3 to Lug No. 2 Closed Open primary of 3rd R. F. transformer
P4 to Lug No. 3 Closed Open primary of 1st A. F. transformer
P5 to Lug No. 2 Closed Open primary of 2nd A. F. transformer
P6 to Lug No. 1 Closed Open primary of output transformer
(Loudspeaker connected)
One filament contact of Closed Open connection
sockets Nos. 1, 2, 3 and
5 to Lug No. 9
Filament Other filament contact of Closed Open connection
sockets Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 5
to Lug No. 10
One filament contact of Closed Open connection
socket No. 4 to Lug No. 8
Other filament contact of Closed Open connection
socket No. 4 to Lug No. 7
One filament contact of Closed Open connection
socket No. 6 to Lug No. 5
Other filament contact of Closed Open connection
socket No. 6 to Lug No. 6
Lug No. 10 to Lug No. 11 Closed Throw operating switch to each position.
Misc. or Open Circuit should test "closed" when
switch is "on" and "open" when
switch is "off"
Across Loudspeaker cone Closed Open secondary of output transformer
coil connections (Cone
coil disconnected)
P4 to ground Open Shorted detector by-pass condenser
Lug No. 2 to ground Open Shorted 2 mfd. by-pass condensers
Lug No. 4 to ground Closed Open connection

19
 RESISTANCE UNIT\

Xis
---FILTER REACTOR

CONDENSER
BANK Nj

,GROUND

UX-226
iu! - BIAS
RESISTOR

UX-210
BIAS --
RESISTOR

.POWER TRANSFORMER.

TO REPRODUCER.
UNIT

105-125V.
50-60ti A.C.

Co>

-----TERMINAL BOARD
Figure 16-Wiring diagram of the Receptor S. P. U.

S. P. U. CONTINUITY TESTS-Receptor--Figure 16-See Figure 8 for terminal numbers

Terminals Correct Effec( Incorrect Effect Caused by

Across UX-280 filament contacts Closed Open UX-280 filament winding
G to P of UX-250 socket Clo.e,I Open high voltage winding of power transformer
1 to either filament contact of UX-280 Closed Open filter reactor
contact
1 to ¢ CG,se,I Open voltage dividing resistance
5 or 6 to 4 Clu-ed Open UX-210 grid bias resistor
5 to 6 Closed Open UX-210 filament winding
7 to 8 Closed Open UY-227 filament winding
9 or 10 to 4 Closed Open UX-226 grid bias resistor
9 to 10 Closed Open UX-226 grid filament winding
11 to 12 Open Shorted wirine
20
 105-125V. TO
50-60", REPRODUCER UNIT
A. C.

POWER
C. TRANSFORMER

FILTER
S`.
--- AND
BY-PASS
CONDENSERS

FD NFD YFD T NFD:' MFO ÑFD.' TOP

5.
I 3 4tE á -s'
TERMINAL
"BOARD TOP

RESISTANCE RESISTANCE -

UNIT -----

FILTER
REACTOR

Figure 17-Wiring diagram of Sterling S. P. U.

S. P. U. CONTINUITY TESTS-Sterling-Figure 17-See Figure 7 for terminal numbers

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

Across UX-280 filament contacts Closed Open UX-280 filament winding

G to P of UX-280 socket Closed Open high voltage winding of power transformer
1 to either filament contact of UX-280 Closed Open filter reactor
contact
1 to 3 Closed Open Resistor Rl (3 Terminals)
3 to 5 or 6 Closed Open Resistor R2 (4 Terminals)
5 to 6 Closed Open UX-210 filament winding
7 to 8 Closed Open UY -227 filament winding
9 to 10 Closed Open UX-226 filament winding
11 to 12 Open Shorted wiring
21
[20] VOLTAGE READINGS
When checking Radiola 41 for possible defects it is good practice to check the voltage
of the various sources of current. To do this a service man will need both an A. C. and D. C.
voltmeter, the D. C. meter being 600 ohms per volt or higher in resistance. The following
voltages at the terminal strip of the S. P. U. are correct with all tubes in place and the
Radiola connected to a 115 -volt A. C. line. The tubes must be in good condition, otherwise
the D. C voltages will be high.
VOLTAGE READINGS AT S. P. U. TERMINAL STRIP
The S. P. U. cover must be removed to expose the terminal strip

Sterling-Figure 13

Terminals Volts

-B to B+ Det. 25 D. C.
-B to B+ Amp. 135 D. C.
-B toB+PWR. 320 D. C.
UX-210 Filament 7.5 A. C.
UY -227 Filament 2.5 A. C.
UX-226 Filament 1.5 A. C.

TERMINAL BOARD

VOLTAGE
DIVIDING
RESISTORS

UX-280 SOCKET

POWER
TRANSFORMER CONDENSER BANK FILTER REACTOR
Figure 18-Sterling socket power unit showing parts

Receptor-Figure 12

Terminals Volts

-B to B+ Det. 33 D. C.
-B to B+ R. F. 100 D. C.
-B to B+ PWR. 335 D. C.
UX-210 Filament 7.5 A. C.
UY-227 Filament 2.5 A. C.
UX-226 Filament 1.5 A. C.

22
 VOLTAGE READINGS AT RADIOTRON SOCKETS
Taken with Weston Model 537 Type 2 test set or others giving similar readings,
115 -volt A. C. line and volume control at zero-No station tuned in. For tube numbers
-
refer to Figure 4.

Sterling
Tube Filament to Cathode or Filament Plate Current Filament or
No. Grid Volts to Plate Volts Millamps Heater Voltage

1 10 125 3.5 1.5

2 10 125 3.5 1.5
3
4
5
-
10

10
125
25
125
3.5
2.0
3.5
1.5
2.5
1.5
6 20 300 16.0 7.5

CONDENSER BANK UX-210 BLAS RESISTOR

UX-226 BIAS
RESISTOR\

VOLtAG E POWER
FILTER REACTOR DIVIDING RESISTOR TRANSFORMER
Figure 19-Receptor socket power unit showing parts

Receptor
Tube Filament to Cathode or Filament Plate Current Filament or
No. Grid Volts to Plate Volts Millamps Heater Voltage
1 7 93 2.5 1.5
2 7 93 2.5 1.5
3
4
5
- 7

7
93
33
93
2.5
2.0
2.5
1.5
2.5
1.5
6 22 310 16.0 7.5

23
 PART III --MAKING REPLACEMENTS
The various assemblies and parts of Radiola 41 are readily accessible and replacements
can be easily made. Figure 2 illustrates the parts in the receiver assembly, Figure 19 the
Receptor S. P. U. and Figure 18 the Sterling S. P. U. The following procedure outlines the
simplest method to be used when making replacements.

!1.] REPLACING PARTS IN RECEIVER ASSEMBLY

Should it he necessary to replace any part in the receiver assembly proceed as follows:
(a) Remove terminal board covers as described in Part II, Section 18.
(b) Release the two receiver assembly cables from their terminal board and pull them
clear of the S. P. U. container.

Figure 20-Removing receiver assembly from cabinet

(e) Release the antenna and ground leads from the clamps that hold them in place.
(d) Release the ground lead to the reproducer unit frame.
(e) Release the output leads from the receiver assembly to the output transformer on
the loudspeaker frame. These leads must also be released from the clamps that
hold them to the sides of the cabinet.
(f) Remove the collar that holds the operating switch in place. Pull it clear from the
escutcheon.
(g) Remove the two knobs on the front panel-the station selector and volume control.
(h) Remove the four screws that hold the receiver assembly on its shelf. It may now
be lifted clear and placed in a position convenient for work (Figure 20). The
parts are readily accessible and any repair or replacement may be easily made.
The correct connections to all parts are shown in Figure 15.
(i) After all work is completed the receiver assembly should be returned to the cabinet
in the reverse manner of that used to remove it.
24
 2] REPLACING PARTS IN LOUDSPEAKER ASSEMBLY
To replace a part in the loudspeaker assembly (Figure 21) proceed as follows:
(a) Disconnect the A. C. input connections to the disc rectifiers.
(b) Disconnect the receiver output leads to the terminal on the reproducer frame.
(c) Remove the four bolts.that hold the reproducer assembly to the baffle board. It
may be lifted clear and placed in a position convenient for work. After the necessary
repairs or replacements are made it should be return ed in the reverse manner
of that used to remove it. When attaching the reproducer assembly to the baffle
board be sure to have the ground lead from the receiver assembly fastened under
one of the bolts holding the reproducer in place.

FIELD
MAGNET

DISC DISC
RECTIFIER RECTIFIER

OUTPUT TRANSFORMER
AND LINE CONDENSERS

Figure 21-Reproducer assembly showing parts

[3] REPLACING PARTS IN STERLING S. P. U.

To replace any parts in the Sterling S. P. U. (Figure 18) proceed as follows:
(a) Gain access to the S. P. U. terminal board as described in Part II, Section 18
(b) Release the cables connected to the S. P. U. terminal board. Also release the two
A. C. input leads fron the S. P. U. to the disc rectifier at its connection to the
rectifier.
(c) Release the machine screws and brackets that hold the S. P. U. to the cabinet.
It may now be lifted clear and placed in a position for work.
25
 (d) Release the four machine screws that hold the terminal board in place.
(e) Release the four machine screws that hold the bottom of the container to its sides.
(f) Push the terminal board a small distance toward the UX-280 socket. Now push
the side of the container together so that it releases from the bottom. The side
may now be pulled back on the input A. C. cord so that all the parts of the S. P. U.
are exposed for any necessary repair or replacement.
(g) After all work is finished the S. P. U. can be reassembled and replaced in the
cabinet in the reverse manner of that used to remove it.

Figure 22-Removing Receptor S. P. U. from cabinet

(4] REPLACING PARTS IN RECEPTOR S. P. U.

To make replacements in the Receptor S. P. U. (Figure 22), proceed as follows:
(a) Remove terminal hoard cover as described in Part II, Section 18.
(b) Remove the two cables attached to the S. P. U. terminal board.
(c) Release the A. C. cord from the S. P. U. to the disc rectifier on the reproducer.
Take the plug from the A. C. input cord so that it may be pulled clear.
(d) Remove the four machine screws that hold the top of the S. P. U. to the container.
(e) The top of the S. P. U. to which all apparatu3 is attached may be pulled clear and
placed in a position convenient for work.
After all repairs or replacements are completed it should be returned to the container
and reconnected in the reverse manner of that used to remove it.
26
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals, poor quality,
noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes, or a poor antenna system.
If imperfect operation is not due to these causes the "Service Data Chart" should be consulted for further
detailed causes. Reference to Part No. and Section No. in the "Service Notes" is also noted for further details.

Indication Cause Remedy

Defective operating switch Repair or replace switch

Loose volume control arm Tighten volume control arm, P. II, S. 4
Defective power cable Replace power cable, P. III, S. 1
Defective R. F. transformer Replace R. F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 1
Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly P. III, S. 1
No Signals Defective By-pass condenser Replace By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 1
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity test
and make any repairs or replacements necessary,
P. II, S. 19
Open grid resistor Replace grid resistor, P. III, S. 1
Open cone coil of reproducer unit Check cone coil-if open replace cone, P. II, S. 16
Grounded input terminals to loud- Check for grounds, P. II, S. 9
speaker

Defective power cable Repair or replace cable, P. III, S. 1

Defective line switch Clean contacts or replace line switch
Defective R. F. transformer Replace R. F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 1
Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 1
Dirty Radiotron prongs Clean prongs with fine sandpaper, P. II, S. 3
Weak Signals Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 1
Defective main tuning condensers Replace defective tuning condensers, P. III, S. 1
Defective output transformer Replace defective transformer, P. III, S. 2
Low voltages from socket power unit Check socket power unit voltages with high resistance
D. C. voltmeter and A. C. voltmeter, P. II, S. 20
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity test
and make any repairs or replacements necessary,
P. II, S. 19
Defective rectifier unit Replace defective unit, P. III, S. 2

Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly, P. III, S. 1

Defective output transformer Replace output transformer, P. III, S. 2
Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser, P. III, S. 1
Poor Quality Dirty contact arm of volume control Clean contact arm on volume control, P. II, S. 4
Dirty prongs on Radiotrons Clean prongs with fine sandpaper, P. II, S. 3

Defect in audio system Check and repair any defect, P. II, S. 10

Howling Open grid circuit in any stage Check circuits and repair defect, P. II, S. 19
Microphonic Radiotrons Interchange Radiotrons, P. II, S. 10

Socket plug position Reverse socket plug

Dirty or defective line switch Clean or replace line switch
Excessive Hum Antenna and ground leads reversed Connect antenna and ground leads correctly, P. II, S. 7
Defective disc rectifier Replace defective unit, P. III, S. 2

Operating switch not "On" Turn operating switch "On"

Defective operating switch Replace operating switch
Radiotrons fail Defective input A. C. cord Repair or replace A. C. input cord
to light Defective power transformer Replace power transformer, P. III, S. 3-4
No A. C. line voltage Turn A. C. line voltage "On"

27
 RCA
Radiola 41 (D. c.) SERVICE NOTES

RCA Radiola 41 (D. C.)

First Edition -212M

Copyright March, 1929

Radio Corporation of America

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL. SAN FRANCISCO. CAL.
Bldg. No. 19-168 - 39th St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEXAS ATLANTA, GA.
Santa Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2 150 Peters St.
 PREFACE
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized
Dealer renders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper
installation and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by rea-
son of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker and
Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service
organizations having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the
design and operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and
RCA Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to
their selected Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical
adjustments may be undertaken by the RCA Dealer.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business
the RCA Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which
this booklet is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in
servicing RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers
and Distributors' service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with
them. A careful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value, and it
is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division main-
tains a corps of engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solving
service problems. These engineers call upon the trade at frequent intervals to
advise and assist RCA Distributors in the performance of service work.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

Authorized Distributors and Dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1929-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS
Page
Preface 2
Introduction 5

PART I -INSTALLATION
Antenna (Outdoor Type) 6
Antenna (Indoor Type) 6
Ground 6
Location of Radiola in Room 6
"C" Battery 7
Radiotrons 7
Acoustic Howl 8

PART II-SERVICE DATA

Weak Signals 8
Uncontrolled Oscillations 8
Distorted Reproduction 9
Gradually Developed Distorted Reproduction 9

PART III-ELECTRICAL TESTS

Voltage Readings 11
Receiver Continuity Tests 13
S.P.U. Continuity Tests 15

PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing the Main Units 15

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Radiola 41 (D.C.) 1

Rear Interior Cabinet View 4

Sub -Chassis of Receiver 5
Socket Power Unit 7
Schematic of Receiver 8
Schematic of S.P.U. . 9
Connections of Reproducer, Receiver and S.P.0 10
Wiring Diagram of Receiver 12
Wiring Diagram of S.P U 14
REPRODUCER; RECEIVER

UNIT :_ _. -ASSEMBLY

Fi!/,tre2-Rear interior view of cabinet, show-

ing torNl(rJrr of reproducer unit, receiver
'r.ssr-rrrGlry and .,oneí power unit
 RCA RADIOLA 41 (D. c.)
(107.5-127.5 Volts Direct Current)
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division
INTRODUCTION
RCA Radiola 41 D.C. is a direct current socket powered radio receiver having excellent
sensitivity, selectivity, and tone quality. A special audio system using two push-pull audio
stages, gives fine quality and ample power to the output. The new dynamic loudspeaker
used responds favorably to the excellent features built into the audio system.
VOLUME ANTENNA BY- PASS
CONTROL CONDENSER A.F. TRANSFORMERS CONDENSERS

FILAMENT R. F. COIL GRID GRID .1 MFD.

RESISTOR ASSEMBLY LEAK RESISTORS BLOCKING CONDENSER

Figure 3-Sub-chassis view of receiver, showing parts

Figure 2 illustrates the rear interior view of the cabinet showing the location of the
reproducer, receiver and socket power unit.
The receiver uses a tuned radio frequency circuit employing six Radiotrons 1.1X-112A
and four Radiotrons UX-171A. Figure 3 illustrates a sub -chassis view of the receiver and
Figure 4 the S.P.U.
RCA Radiola 41 D.C. is designed to operate on direct current of 107.5-127.5 volts as
used for house lighting. Connection to direct current lines of other rating or to A.C. hues
may damage the Radiola or the Radiotrons. When installing Radiola 41 (D.C.) the position
of the input D.C. plug must be tried for operation. Connected one way the Radiola will
operate. Reversed, silence will result.
The following design characteristics are incorporated in Radiola 41 D.C.:
(a) The circuit consists of one untuned coupling stage, two tuned radio frequency stages,
5
 tuned detector, a push-pull first audio stage employing two Radiotrons UX-112A
a
and a parallel push-pull second audio stage employing four Radiotrons UX-171A.
(b) The volume control regulates the input grid voltages to the coupling stage. This
gives smooth control of volume without distortion.
(c) Grid resistors in the two tuned radio frequency stages effectively prevent any tend-
ency to self oscillation in these circuits.
(d) The reproducer is a regular RCA 106 dynamic speaker minus the disc rectifiers
which are not necessary in D.C. socket power operation.
The electrical sequence of the Radiotrons used in the receiver assembly is shown in the
schematic diagram Figure 5.

PAR T I-INSTALLATION
[1] ANTENNA (Outdoor Type)
Due to the sensitivity of Radiola 41 D.C. the antenna length need only be 25 to 50 feet.
It should be erected as high as possible and removed from all obstructions. The lead-in
should be a continuation of the antenna itself, thus avoiding all splices which might intro-
duce additional resistance and, in time, corrode sufficiently to seriously affect reception. If
it is absolutely necessary to splice the lead-in to the antenna the joint must be carefully
soldered to insure a good electrical contact. Clean off all excess flux and tape the connec-
tion to protect it from the oxidation effects of the atmosphere.
High-grade glass or porcelain insulator supports are required, and at no point should the
antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any part of the building. Bring the lead-in
wire from the outside through a porcelain tube insulator to the inside of the house for con-
nection to the receiver.

[2] ANTENNA (Indoor Type)

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results may
generally be obtained by using an indoor antenna of about 25 to 40 feet of insulated wire
strung aroung the picture moulding or placed under a rug. In buildings where metal lath-
ing is employed, satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of antenna. How-
ever, due to its sensitivity, Radiola 41 D.C. will generally give satisfactory reception with an
indoor antenna.
The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction, or power
line and should be at right angles to these lines and other antennas. An outdoor antenna
should be protected by means of an approved lightning arrester, in accordance with the
requirements of the National Fire Underwriters' Code.

[3] GROUND
A ground lead is provided in Radiola 41 D.C. which may or may not be used. The use
of the ground lead is entirely dependent on local conditions. As practically all D.C. lines
have one side grounded, and no transformers are used, a direct ground connection occurs
through the input D.C. line. The ground lead should be experimentally tried and if improved
results are obtained it should be used. The ground should be connected to a steam radiator
or water pipe if available. This ground will generally reduce the noise background, some-
times encountered in D.C. locations, and in most instances will make the receiver more stable.

[4] LOCATION OF RADIOLA IN ROOM

As with other musical instruments, the location of Radiola 41 D.C. in the room should
be chosen with care. Various positions should be tried until the most desirable reproduction
is obtained. If this position is outside the radius of the connection cord to the D.C. outlet,
an extension cord can be used.
6
[5] "C" BATTERY
An external "C" battery is used to bias the power amplifier Radiotrons UX-171A. The
use of this battery makes possible the use of the highest possible plate voltage on these tubes
which gives maximum undistorted output. The battery should be 221/2 volts, tapped at
162 volts. Eveready battery No. 768 or Burgess No. 5156, or others having equivalent
voltages may be used. The battery should be held under the clamp at one side of the receiver
assembly. Connection should be made as follows :
Green C-221/2 volts
Brown C-161/2 volts
Black C+
This battery should be replaced about on ce a year.

UX-171-A FILAMENT GRID RESISTOR FILAMENT

RESISTOR., FILTER AND ASSEMBLY PLATE REACTOR PLATE SUPPLY
BY-PASS CONDENSERS REACTOR RESISTOR

FIELD 2 MFD. OUTPUT RECEIVER TERMINAL

RESISTOR CONDENSER CHOKE FILAMENT RESISTOR. BOARD
INTERSTAGE 2 MFD.
TRANSFORMER.. CONDENSER
Figure 4-Socket power unit, showing parts

[6] RADIOTRONS
The Radiotrons UX-112A should be placed in the receiver assembly and the UX-171A's
in the Socket Power Unit. Interchanging the tubes in the R.F. stages may give improved
operation. Also in cases where oscillation occurs, interchanging the Radiotrons may clear up
the condition. Always turn "off" the current before removing any tube and do not turn the
current "on" unless all tubes are in place.
If any Radiotron UX-112A burns out the filament supply to all the Radiotrons in- the
receiver assembly will be cut off and the receiver will become inoperative. A burn-out of one
of the UX-171A Radiotrons in the S.P.U. will cut off the filament supply to one other
UX-171A, but the receiver will not become inoperative, although the quality of reproduction
will be affected. The defective tube should be replaced.
7
 While in most Radiolas, or other receiving sets using Radiotrons UX-112A and UX-171A,
the older type Radiotrons UX-112 and UX-171 are interchangeable with the A tubes, this
is not the case in Radiola 41 D.C. The greater filament current consumption makes the
UX-112 and UX-17,1 unsuitable for use in the Radiola 41 D. C.

[7] ACOUSTIC HOWL

Radiola 41 D.C. may be more susceptible to microphonic howl than the A.C. model.
Trouble of this kind while rare, may be corrected by interchanging the Radiotrons in the
receiver assembly. The tube selected for the detector socket should have a minimum howl
characteristic when touched or thumped, with the Radiola in operation.

AUDIO INPUT TRANSFORMERS

V.002 MFD THREE- GANG CONDENSER
menr 1000" 1000"
r-
o
WC-112-A á UX-112-A UX-112-A UX I12 -A OUTPUT

o
o

.5MFD.

o
o
o

A+
CARLE

Figure 5-Schematic circuit diagram of receiver

PART II -SERVICE DATA

[1] WEAK SIGNALS
Should the loudspeaker output be weak at maximum volume, check the following points:
(a) Defective Radiotrons. Take one of each type known to be in good operating con-
dition and interchange successively with those in the receiver and S.P.U.
(b) Open secondary center tap connection of interstage push-pull transformer or second-
ary of either A.F. transformer in receiver assembly.
(c) Open center connection to grid resistors in S.P.U. This will also give distorted
reproduction.
(d) Defective receiver assembly or S.P.U. Check by means of the continuity tests given
in Part III, Section 2, and make any repair or replacement necessary.

[2] UNCONTROLLED OSCILLATION

Should Radiola 41 D.C. oscillate or regenerate at any point in the tuning range the
trouble is probably caused by:
(a) Defective grid resistor in second or third R.F. stages. The resistors may be checked
by means of a resistance bridge, or the voltmeter ammeter method described in the
regular Radiola 41 Service Notes. Figure 5 shows the correct value of these resistors.
(b) Open ground connection. Make repair.
8
 (c) Ground not connected. Connect the ground lead to a cold water pipe, a hot water
or steam radiator or both.
(d) Open 17X-112A bias lead. Make any repair necessary.
(e) Open ground lead in set. Any of the several grounding leads in the receiver and
S.P.U. assembly being open may cause oscillation. Test for open connections and
make repair.
(f) Antenna and ground leads reversed, either at their point of connection to the volume
control or outside of the set. Connect properly.
Where everything tests O.K. and the Radiola still oscillates, connect an 800 -ohm fixed
resistance across the primary of the second R.F. transformer. This will effectively prevent any
case of oscillation.

2 MFD. LV -IT I -A
UX-171-A
INTERSTAGE
TRANSFORMER
r
O' 425''
INPUT
O
.5 MEG.
0 a b
d ,o CONE COIL

.5 MEG.
O gO FIELD_,
425 COIL
REPRODUCER

C+ o s \ OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
.1 MFD.
UNIT

C-
I6ioR 160 2 MFD. OPERATING
`OUTPUT CHOKE
SWITCH
C -21ío
UX:-171-A UX-171-A
A-' O
1 MF0. 20,000
B+ DET. O' J(AA'1 107.5-1275 VOLTS
B+AMP. O
N gÓ0 FILTER 200 DIRECT CURRENT,
''REACTORS
ALOj
4, TÌ
MFD. 1
T 1MMA
350j`
"
a_
'TERMINAL BOARD

Figure 5A-Schematic circuit diagram of socket power unit

[3] DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

If the reproduction obtained at the loudspeaker is not of good quality, the trouble may
be due to :
(a) Defective Radiotrons. A burned -out Radiotron in the S.P.U. cuts off the filament
supply of another Radiotron, unbalancing the amplifier and causing distortion.
(b) "C" battery incorrectly connected. If the Radiola has been operated for a period
of time with a wrongly connected "C" battery, the Radiotrons in the S.P.U. will
probably be damaged. This will necessitate replacement of the tubes.
(c) Defective "C" battery. The "C" battery should be replaced at least once a year.
(d) Defective audio transformers in receiver, S.P.U., or on reproducer unit. Check
all A.F. transformers by means of continuity test:
Any replacement or repair found necessary should be made.

[4] GRADUALLY DEVELOPED DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

Should the output gradually become poor after several hours of use, check the following:
(a) Incorrectly connected "C" battery. Connect "C" battery correctly and replace
damaged 17X -171A Radiotrons.
9
 RED WITH
GREEN TRACER`

/ RED WITH
"GREEN TRACER

TWISTED
PAIR

SOCKET POWER UNIT

D.C. INPUT
PLUG

Figure 6-Complete layout and connections of reproducer, receiver and socket power unit
10
 (b) Shorted 2 mfd. condenser. A shorted 2 mfd. condenser will cause the wrong "C"
bias to be applied to one tube and may damage the tube if operated very long.
Replace the condenser and replace the Radiotron if it has been damaged.
(c) Defective or open grid resistor in S.P.U. This will damage one of the Radiotron9
because of improper grid bias and result in distorted output.

PART III -ELECTRICAL TESTS

[1] VOLTAGE READINGS
When checking Radiola 41 D.C. for possible defects, it is good practice to check the
voltage of the various sources of current. To do this a service man should use a good D.C.
voltmeter, preferably of the high resistance type. The following voltages at the S.P.U. ter-
minal strip are correct for the particular line voltage noted (120 volts) with all Radiotrons
in operating condition and in their correct positions. The terminals are indicated in Fig-
ures 5 and 8.

TERMINAL VOLTAGES
120-Volt D. C. Line

Terminals Voltage

A- to A+ 35
A+ to B+ Det. 5
A+ to B+ Amp. 21

If it is desired to check the voltages at the individual sockets the following readings are
correct. The readings are taken with a Weston Model 537, Type 2, test set or others giving
similar readings.

RADIOTRON SOCKET VOLTAGES

120 -Volt D. C. Line

Tube No. +Filament to Grid Filament to Plate Plate Current Filament

Volts Volts Milliamperes Voltage
1 4.2 j 22 1.5 4.3
2 4.2 26 2.0 4.4
3 4.2 31 2.4 4.5
4 4.0 15 1.0 4.6
5 10.0 95 6.0 4.8
6 10.0 100 7.0 5.0
9 27.0 100 6.5 4.8
10 4.0 95 6.5 5.0
7 27.0 100 7.0 5.0
8 4.0 95 6.5 5.0

The grid voltages given are not those under which the tubes operate, due to the necessity
of reading them from one side of the filament. Also those taken on the two tubes, Nos. 8
and 10, that are biased through .5 megohm resistors are low, due to the drop across the
resistor caused by the load of the meter. Actually these tubes receive the same bias as the
others in the S.P.U.
11
 J
Oz
V w
9 LL Ñ
d

1+JV18
)11e/19

Lae

A01I18
rW19

N33n9-
N33103
03a-
3f118
3f11%
M0113A
NOOntlYB

M0113Á '---
.00nvYMON4-03

o
jW W
o Q

12
[2] RADIOLA 41 D. C. CONTINUITY TESTS
The following tests will show complete continuity for the receiver assembly and the socket
power unit of Radiola 41 D.C. See Figures 7 and 8 for wiring diagrams. All Radiotrons
should be removed, the S.P.U. released from the bottom of the cabinet, and the receiver
cable released from the S.P.U. Also release all other cables from the S.P.U. and receiver
assembly and the antenna and ground leads from their respective connections. See Figure 6
for socket numbers and terminal board and cable designations.

RECEIVER ASSEMBLY CONTINUITY TESTS

Correct
Circuit Terminals Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
G1 to antenna lead Open Shorted antenna condenser
G1 to ground lead Open Shorted .2 mfd. condenser
Gl to -Fl Closed Open volume control
G2 to -F2 Closed Open grid resistor or secondary of 1st
R.F. transformer
-F2 to frame Open Shorted .1 mfd. condenser
G3 to -F3 Closed Open grid resistance or secondary of
Grid 2nd R.F. transformer
-F3 to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
Stator condenser No. 3 to Closed Open secondary of 3rd R.F. trans -
+F4 former
-F4 to frame Open Shorted 5 mfd. condenser
G5 to -F6 Closed Open secondary of 1st A.F. input
transformer
G6 to -A(Black with Closed Open secondary of 2nd A.F. input
yellow tracer) transformer
P1 to B+ Amp. (Maroon
and red) Closed Open primary of 1st R.F. transformer
P2 to B+ Amp. (Maroon
and red) Closed Open primary of 2nd R.F. transformer
P3 to B+ Amp. (Maroon
and red) Closed Open primary of 3rd R.F. transformer
Plate P4 to B+ Det. (Maroon) Closed Open primary of 1st and 2nd A.F. in-
put transformers
P5 to one output terminal
(Red) Closed Open connection
P6 to other output terminal
(Black with green
tracer) Closed Open connection
A+ (Black with yellow
tracer) to +Fl Closed Open connection
-Fl to +F2 Closed Open connection
-F2 to +F3 Closed Open connection
Filament -F3 to +F4 Closed Open connection
-F4 to +F5 Closed Open connection
-F5 to +F6 Closed Open connection
I
-F6 to -A (Yellow) Closed Open filament resistor
B+ Amp. (Maroon and
red) to frame Open Shorted .5 mfd. condenser
Miscel-
laneous +F4 to B+ Det. Open Shorted 1 mfd. condenser
P4 to -F4 Open Shorted .0012 mfd. condenser
G5 to +F4 Open Shorted .00016 mfd. condenser
13
L.S. FIELD
RESISTOR
200"
--
UX-171-A
FILAMENT
RESISTOR
425
- UX- I7I
FILAMENT
RESISTOR
425"
-A

BROWN
BROW TWISTED CORD
TO L. S. FIELD.

TO TRANSFORMER
ON LOUDSPEAKER

2 MFD.
COND.

TO C.
BATTERY

ALL CONDENSER
UNI15 ARE 1MFD.
EACH
OUTPUT
CHOKE / LACK

RECEIVER
FILAMENT
RESISTOR

o '-!II III o
INTERSTAGE
TRANSFORMER
2MFD.
CONDENSER

MEN -

_ PLATE SUPPLY
RESISTOR 20,8001`

- - INPUT
TERMINAL
BOARD
+v
1075-127.5
VOLTS D.C.

Figure 8-Wiring diagram of socket power unit

14
 S. P. U. CONTINUITY TESTS

Circuit Terminals Correct Incorrect Effect Caused by

Effect
Across input terminals Closed Open primary of interstage trans-
former
G7 to G9 Closed Open secondary of interstage trans-
former
G7 to G8 Open Shorted 2 mfd. condenser
G9 to G10 Open Shorted 2 mfd. condenser
C-221/2 (Green) to G8 Closed Open .5 meg. resistor
(Weak)
C-221/2 (Green) to G10 Closed Open .5 meg. resistor
(Weak)
P8 to P10 Closed Open primary of output transformer
and output choke
s.P.U. Disconnect connections. to Closed Open cone coil
cone coil on L.S. and
test across cone coil
Test across leads connected Closed Open secondary of output transformer
to cone coil terminals
Test across two terminals Closed Open field coil
or bakelite strip
Test across D.C. input plug Closed Open field coil or field resistance in
S.P.U.
+ of D.C. input plug to Closed Open plate reactor or plate resistor
B+ Det. (Disconnect
field)
+ of D.C. input plug to Closed Open filament reactor or filament re-
A+ (Disconnect field) sistor

The condensers may be tested by click testing or charging and noting their ability to
retain the charge. This can be done by removing the S.P.U. cover and disconnecting one
lead to the condenser to be tested. The internal connections of the condensers are shown in
Figure 8.

MAKING REPLACEMENTS
The various assemblies and parts of Radiola 41 (D.C.) are readily accessible and replace-
ments are easily made.

The reproducer unit, receiver assembly and socket power unit are removable
individually
after the cable connections to the other units are disconnected and the cabinet
mounting
screws are released.

A suitable place should be provided in advance for working

on the unit to be removed
so that the cabinet will not become marred nor any further damage occur to the apparatus
when making a replacement.

15
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals,
poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for defective tubes, or
a poor antenna system. If imperfect operation is not due t0 these causes the "Service Data Chart"
should be consulted for further detailed causes. For further detailed information refer to the
text of "Service Notes."

Indication Cause Remedy

Defective operating switch Repair or replace switch

Loose volume control arm Tighten volume control arm
Defective power cable Replace power cable,
Defective R. F. transformer Replace R. F. transformer assembly
Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly
Defective By-pass condenser Replace By-pass condenser
No Signals Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary
Open grid resistor Replace grid resistor
Open cone coil of reproducer unit Check cone coil-if open replace cone
Grounded input terminals to Check for grounds
loudspeaker
Socket plug position Reverse socket plug

Defective power cable Repair or replace cable

Defective R. F. transformer Replace R. F. transformer assembly
Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly
Dirty Radlotron prongs Clean prongs with fine sandpaper
Weak Signals Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser
Defective main tuning condensers Replace defective tuning condensers
Defective output transformer Replace defective transformer
Defective socket power unit Check socket power unit by means of continuity
test and make any repairs or replacements
necessary

Defective A. F. transformer Replace A. F. transformer assembly

Defective output transformer Replace output transformer
Defective By-pass condenser Replace defective By-pass condenser
Poor Quality Dirty contact arm of volume Clean contact arm on volume control
control
Dirty prongs on Radiotrons Clean prongs with fine sandpaper

Defect in audio system Check and repair any defect

Howling Open grid circuit in any stage Check circuits and repair defect
Microphonic Radiotrons Interchange Radiotrons

Operating switch not "On" Turn operating switch "On"

Radiotrons Defective operating switch Replace operating switch
fail to light Defective input D. C. cord Repair or replace D. C. input cord
No. D. C. line voltage Turn D. C. line voltage "On"
 RCA LOUDSPEAKER
MODEL 10 0 Reg. U. S. Pat. Office

SERVICE NOTES
NS -100-2
Second Edition-November, 1926

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Prepared by

NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION

233 Broadway, New York City

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 10 South La Salle Street 28 Geary Street
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
3308 Fourteenth Street, N. W.
Washington. D. C.
 A Word or Two About Service
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore, Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the National Service Division
of the RCA has prepared a series eef Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing
technical information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

 RCA Loudspeaker Model 100 Service Notes
Non.-Cone assembly of RCA Loudspeaker Model 102 is
identical to Model .100 less the filter unit
Prepared by
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
Instructions NS -100.2

PART I
RCA Loudspeaker Model 100 is of the free floating cone type. It is suspended at
the outer edge'by means of a strip of soft kid which holds the cone in a central position
but does not impede its movement to any great degree. The cone is attached rigidly to
the speaker mechanism at the center.
In servicing Model 100 Loudspeaker always make certain that the output of the
Radio Receiver used in conjunction with it, is of good quality. If distortion is present in
the Radio Receiver, RCA Model 100 Loudspeaker will reproduce that distortion as
faithfully as it does the tone variations of the program.
Rattling sounds, or the so-called "paper rattles," are generally caused by a distor-
tion in the lower tone registers of the amplifying system of the Radio Receiver. It is
therefore quite important to first check the Receiver for quality of signal. This may
be done by substituting another loudspeaker of known quality or else by replacing the
loudspeaker with a pair of headphones. If distortion is present either in the second
loudspeaker or the headphones it is a positive indication that the trouble is originat-
ing in the Radio Receiver.
Similarly, if the Radiotrons in the Receiver are overloaded by an abnormally strong
signal being forced through the amplifiers, distortion will follow.
If it is definitely established, however, that the distortion or rattle complained of is
not due to a defect or improper adjustment of the Radio Receiver, but is apparently
caused by the Loudspeaker itself, it may be the result of one of the following conditions:
(A) Foreign material interfering with armature vibration.
(B) Armature striking the pole piece.
(C) Cone misaligned.
(D) Excessive pressure on the stylus.
(E) Bent stylus.
(F) Loose or bent connecting rod.
Figure 1 shows a rough sketch of the complete armature assembly and its relation
to the cone. The armature vibrates between the pole pieces (not shown), this motion
being transmitted through the stylus to the thrust lever. The thrust lever is held rigidly
to one of the motor side pieces. It is attached rigidly to the cone by the connecting rod.
Dirt at any of these points may cause distortion.
On inspecting the RCA Model 100 Loudspeaker, note whether or not the stylus is
bent, if so straighten it. The cone is attached to the connecting rod by means of a small
nut "B", Figure 1. The end of the connecting rod is threaded. Make certain that the
cone is drawn up tight to the connecting rod.
If the two foregoing points have been checked and found to be O.K., note whether or
not the armature is striking the pole pieces. Figure la and Figure 2 show the relation
of the armature to the pole pieces. There should be a space approximately .010 inch
Between the armature and the pole pieces, Figure la. This is true at both ends of the
armature.
3
Fig. 1-Moving part of motor

Fig. la-End view of motor

Method of adjusting armature clearance

 If either end of the armature strikes the pole piece a very disagreeable rattle will
result. To correct a misalignment of the armature a pair of spacer tools, shown in
Figure 3, and a screwdriver will be necessary. These spacer tools should be made
of .010 phosphor bronze stock aborit 1/8 inch wide. The distance between the open
ends of the tool should he .091 inches. See Figure 3a.
Any loose screws, nuts or parts in the speaker may cause rattles and for that reason
in making adjustments all screws should be seated properly, which means that all screws
and nuts should be drawn up firmly enough to prevent their loosening when the speaker is
placed in operation. Care should be taken to prevent stripping of the threads on the
screws and nuts as well as to prevent torsion of the elements held in place by such
screws and nuts.
To readjust the armature it will be first necessary to free it. Figures 4 and 5 show
the method of doing this. The screws shown as "C" should be backed off about two
turns. Do not remove them entirely.
When the two screws are loosened it is a simple matter to insert one of the spacer
tools between each of the two armature ends and the pole pieces as shown in Figures 6
and 7.
When the spacing tools are inserted the clearance between the armature and the
pole pieces must necessarily be the required ten thousandths as this is the thickness
of the blades of the two spacers.
After the spacer tools have been inserted, one at each end, the two screws "C" that
were loosened (Figures 4 and 5) should be tightened firmly. Figure 8 shows the method
of tightening the upper screw with the spacers in place.
After the two screws have been tightened the spacer tools should be removed
and the Loudspeaker tested. If the rattle has been eliminated no further adjustment will
be necessary. If, however, the rattle is still present it may be due to the fact that the cone
is out of centre with respect to the connecting rod.
To correct this, again refer to Figure 2. The screw "d" holds the thrust lever.
When this screw is loosened the cone will automatically assume the proper position and
the screw "d" should then be tightened down. Care should be taken that the sides of the
thrust lever, visible in Figure 2, be held at right angles to the pole pieces as shown when
tightening "d".
The Loudspeaker should again be tested. If the rattle still persists it is probably due
to an excessive pressure on the connecting rod which may be corrected as shown in Figure
9. A soldering iron should be applied to the point where the inner end of the stylus is
soldered to the thrust lever. The solder at that point should be softened sufficiently to
allow free movement of the stylus. Here again the adjustment is automatic and it is only
necessary to keep the solder soft until this readjustment takes place.

PART II
Should it become necessary to replace the field coils due to burn-out or other causes,
it will be necessary to remove the entire reproducer unit.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Remove the flexible leads of the coils from the binding posts. Tag the leads
as they are removed so that when the unit is reassembled they may be connected to the
proper binding posts. THIS IS IMPORTANT.
2. Remove the small nut holding the cone to the connecting rod shown in Figure 1.

5
 3. Remove the nuts F, Figure 10, from the upper supporting screws "H". A
small open end wrench will be necessary for this operation as it is necessary to remove
these nuts by inserting the wrench between the cone and the frame.
4. Unscrew the lower supporting screw G, Figure 9, and remove the strap "N".
5. Remove the unit by pulling out. Do not strain the cone or the connecting rod
when removing the unit. Make certain that the connecting rod slides out freely as the
unit is removed.
6. Remove the two screws "H", Figure 10, holding the motor in place. These
screws thread into the spacer bushings "E".
7. Place a piece of iron on the ends of the horseshoe magnet and slide the motor
off. The piece of iron takes the place of the motor and acts as a keeper on the magnet.
8. Remove the screw holding the thrust lever to the motor frame "D", Figure 2.
9. Unsolder the thrust lever from the stylus and remove Point "E", Figure 1.
10. Remove the two armature screws "C", Figures 4 and 5.
11. Dissemble the motor by removing the two countersunk screws. One of these
screws "K" is shown in Figure 2. The coils are then accessible, but the armature is still
in position in the center of the coils. Figure 11.

.091.

.010
0.125« {-

Fig. 3-Spacer tools Fig. 3a-Spacer tool dimensions

Freeing the armature

6
 12. Slip one coil over the free end of the armature and then slip the second coil
off the armature and stylus. All parts before re -assembling should be thoroughly
cleaned and freed from all traces of dust or dirt and metal filings, etc. Use a brush to
remove foreign matter from the parts. Avoid the use of liquid cleaners as they often
induce corrosion.
The re -assembly should be a reversal of the operation just described.
1. Place the coils "P" -"P", Figure 11, in proper position around the armature.
The small length of wire connecting the two coils in series should be at the outside of
each coil when assembled, "L", Figure 11.
2. Place the coils with armature in position onone of the motor side pieces, Figure
12. Place the other motor side pieces in place and screw the assembly together by means
of the screw. In making this assembly make certain that the small pins "M", Figure 12,
projecting from the inner side of the motor side piece, separate the two field coils as shown
in "B", Figure 12.
3. Place the thrust lever in position and screw it in place "d", Figure 2, but, do
not solder to the stylus at this time.
4. Replace the armature screws "C", Figures 4 and 5, but do not seat them firmly.
5. Insert the spacer tools (Figure 3) in position at the top and bottom of the
armature and tighten down the armature screws as described for adjusting the armature
in Part I of these instructions.
6. It will sometimes happen that in tightening the armature screws the armature
may be strained slightly and when the spacer tools are removed the strain causes the
armature to spring out of the central position. Remove the spacer tools and note care-
fully whether or not the armature is centered between the pole pieces. If not repeat
operation No. 5.
7. Remove the keeper and place the motor in position on the horseshoe magnet.
Before seating the screws "H", Figure 10, that hold the motor to the magnet push both
sides of the motor down toward the curved part of the magnet. The motor should be
horizontal with respect to the sides of the magnet.
8. Replace these assembled units on the Loudspeaker frames. Place the connecting
rod through the cone. Place the lower supporting strap "N", Figure 9, in place and
tighten screw "G" until the unit is held in position, but not firmly.
9. Adjust the position of the unit until the connecting rod in passing through the
center of the cone does not exert a vertical or horizontal pressure on the cone.
10. Seat the screw "G" holding the lower strap "N", Figure 9, and then fasten
the upper portion of the unit to the frame by means of the nuts "FF", Figure 10, on the
upper screws "HH". When tightening these last two mentioned nuts be careful not to
disturb the central position of the unit as established in 9.
11. Lock the cone to the connecting rod by the nut provided for that purpose.
The thread on this nut has a pitch of 80 threads to the inch and it may be stripped
very easily if too great a pressure is applied to it.
12. Solder the stylus to the thrust lever (Figure 1).
13. Reconnect the leads to the binding post.
14. Test the loudspeaker and if further adjustments are necessary follow the pro-
cedure outlined in Part I of these instructions.

7
 Fig. 6-Spacer tool in place. upper armature end Fig. 7-Spacer tool in place, lower armature end

Tightening upper armature holding screw Soldering the stylus to the thrust lever

PART III
'l'o replace a defective cone:
1. Remove the small nut that holds the cone to the connecting rod.
2. Remove the four screws "a", "b", "c and "d" shown in Figure 13. When these
screws are removed the entire aluminum frame may be removed from the casing. If
desirable, the leads may be disconnected, but this is not necessary.
3. Remove the remaining eight screws shown in Figure 13 as
J "k" and "1".
4. Remove the outer clamping ring.
5. Remove the cone.

8
 6. Put new cone in place. Make certain that the connecting rod passes through
the center hole in the aluminum cone cap.
7. Place. the cone and outside clamping ring so that all screw holes correspond
with the screw holes in the casing.
8. Replace the screws, "e", "f", "g", "h", "i", "j", "k" and "1" (Figure 13). These
screws should be tightened down uniformly. Do not seat one screw at a time, but tighten
each little by little until all are seated properly.
9. Provide supports and lay the casing on them in a horizontal position.
10. Allow the aluminum frame to rest on the four cleats "O", Figure 13, on the
front edge of the casing.
11. Center the frame in the center of the casing and replace the four screws "a",
"b", "c", "d", Figure 13.
12. Test the speaker and make final adjustments.
While making these adjustments the loudspeaker should be kept in a clean place
free from dirt or filings. Small particles of metal are easily attracted to the mechanism
in the loudspeaker due to its magnetic qualities.

Coils in place around armature

Motor and connection to cone

Motor side piece showing separator pins Frame, front view

9
 Fig. 14
Cylindrical filter type

Fig. 15
Square filter type

lo
 CONTINUITY DIAGRAM

Telephone Coils of
Tips Reproducer Unit

MODEL 100 LOUD SPEAKER

FIG. 16

PART IV
Continuity and Filter Tests
There are two types of filters appearing in the Model 100 Loudspeaker, one con-
tained in a cylinder and the other in a square box. Both of these filters are electrically
identical, the only difference being in the type of container employed.
In the model employing the cylindrical type of filter (Fig. 14) the input leads
(phone tips) are connected to the two binding posts at A and B on the frame. In the
square filter type (Fig. 15), however, one of the phone tips is soldered to point A and
taped, the other being connected to the binding post at B.
The only equipment required to test the electrical circuit of Model 100 Loudspeaker
is a pair of head phones connected in series with a 41/2 -volt C battery. The test points
are shown in capital letters in the circuit diagram and illustrations, Figs. 14, 15 and 16.
Before starting the "click" test, disconnect terminal D from the binding post at B.
This free terminal D will then become a separate test point. In case terminal A is
a taped connection, as it is in the sqúare box filter type of Model 100 Loudspeaker, the
tape will have to be temporarily removed to expose the metallic surface for the "click"
test.
Remove loudspeaker plug from radio receiver jack before proceeding with test.

CONTACT POINTS CORRECT EFFECT DE.EECT

A to D Click, closed thru filter coil and reproducer coi ls. Open in circuit.
AtoC Click, closed thru filter coil. Open filter coil.
C to D Click, closed thru reproducer coils. Open reproducer coil.
C to B No click, open thru filter condenser. Filter condenser or tele-
phone plug shorted.
A to B No click, open thru filter coil and condenser. Filter condenser or tele-
phone plug shorted.
NOTE.-Care should be taken to replace terminal D on binding post at B after completion
of "click" test.
 RCA LOUDSPEAKER
MODEL 100A
SERVICE NOTES
100A-1
Firnt Edition-June, 1927

RCA Loudspeaker Model 100A

RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Prepared by

Service Division of the Production and Service Department

233 Broadway, New York City
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 1412 Monroe Street, N. W. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan Street
New York City Washington, D. C. Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed RCA Dealer renders serv-
ice at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep.
Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mis-
handling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker or Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Deal-
ers and Distributors who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and
operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas occupy a favorable position to contract
for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers business the Service Division of
the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-
containing technical information and practical helps in servicing RCA Loudspeakers
and Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers' service
problems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of
these Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is sug-
gested they be preserved for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations,
has available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to
render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1927-Radio Corporation of America.

 CONTENTS
Page
A Word or Two About Service - 2
Introduction - 5

PART I-SERVICE DATA

Receiver Output - 6
Procedure to Remove Housing - 6
Foreign Material Interfering with Armature Action - 7
Armature Striking Pole Pieces 7
Cone Not Properly Adjusted - 8
Loose Thrust Lever, Nuts and Screws 9
Filter Unit and Magnet Coil Tests - 9
Filter Unit Continuity Test - - - - 9
Continuity Test for Magnet Coils and Loudspeaker Cord 10
Testing Loudspeaker Cord and Loudspeaker Connections 10
Service Data Chart - - - - - 15

PART II-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing Magnet Coils - - - - - 11
Replacing Armature and Drive Pin - - - 12
Replacing Thrust Lever and Driving Rod to Cone - - - 13
Replacing Motor Assembly Complete 13
Replacing Cones - - - 13
Replacing Filter Units - 14
Replacing Front or Rear Grille - 14
Refitting Grille Cloth - - 14

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Loudspeaker 100A 1
Plan View - - 4
Output Transformer 5
Removal of Mechanism Assembly from Housing 6
Armature Spacer Tools - 7
Armature Adjustment - 8
Adjusting the Drive Pin Thrust Lever Connection 9
Removing Cone - 10
Schematic Circuit 11
Units Dismounted 12
Motor Mechanism Partly Exploded 13
 RCA LOUDSPEAKER MODEL 100A

MAGNET COILS SILVER SOLDER

DRIVE PIN

DRIVING ROD

THRUST LEVER
CONE
SEATING
NUT

SOFT SOLDER
(MAKE ADJUSTMENTS
WITH SOLDERING IRON) CONE

Figure 1 Diagram showing constructional details and operating principle of RC.

-1

Loudspeaker 100A
 SERVICE NOTES

RCA LOUDSPEAKER MODEL 100A

Prepared by
RCA SERVICE DIVISION
100A-1

INTRODUCTION
RCA Loudspeaker, Model 100A is a new type of loudspeaker operating on the cone
principle and especially designed for use with Radiolas and standard receivers. An
inspection of the interior mechanism reveals a compact unit of rugged construction and
simplicity of design. The loudspeaker consists essentially of a cast metal housing with
an ornamental grille at the front and back, a cone, frame, magnet, motor mechanism
and filter unit. The four screws on the front of the housing support the grille and
mechanism assembly on the inside. This method of mounting provides easy access to
the different parts.

When Loudspeaker Model 100A is used in conjunction with receivers using plate
voltages passing current in excess of 10 milliamperes some method of coupling the out-
put of the receiver to the Loudspeaker should be employed. A choke and condenser
arrangement or an output transformer of proper design will function satisfactorily
for this purpose. Figure 2 illustrates the correct connections for employing either of
these methods.

The service data contained in the present text deals with the problems of imper-
fect loudspeaker reproduction generally and the cause and cure specifically as it applies
to RCA Loudspeaker 100A, The simple and rugged design of RCA Loudspeaker
100A makes it practically trouble proof and permits easy and simple adjustment or
replacement when necessary.

4To S MFDS
PLATE PLATE

30 -HEURT[
OR MORE- 11111 To To
NOT OVER 11111 e LOUD- LOUD-
i000-ows IIIII i SPEAKER SPEAKER
DC.RE5i5T- 111111¡
ANGE

b
-ßo
Figure 2-Typical output circuits
 PART I -SERVICE DATA
The service problems of loudspeakers deal with conditions evidenced by weak repro-
duction, no reproduction, distortion, noise and rattle. These conditions and their at-
tending causes, while not common to Loudspeaker 100A, are explained in the following
text, and remedies noted so that service men may be provided with helpful information
in any service work that may be required on Loudspeaker 100A.

Figure 3-Removing mechanism assembly from housing

(1) RECEIVER OUTPUT
Before inspecting the loudspeaker for imperfect reproduction check the receiver
output with headphones. Any distortion in the receiver will be faithfully reproduced
in the loudspeaker. If a signal of good quality and volume is being delivered by the
receiver the loudspeaker will have to be examined for the cause of any imperfect repro-
duction that may occur.
(2) PROCEDURE TO REMOVE HOUSING
To examine Loudspeaker 100A the mechanism assembly must be removed from
the housing. This is accomplished by removing the four screws and the fibre sheet at
the bottom of the housing. Then supporting the mechanism assembly inside of the
housing with one hand loosen the four screws that hold the front grille in place. These
screws also fasten the mechanism assembly. After removing the screws the unit can be
lifted clear of the housing, Figure 3. The cord should be pulled inside of the housing
sufficiently to allow enough slack for this operation. The cone and motor mechanism
is now readily accessible for any inspection or adjustment that may be necessary.
6
(3) FOREIGN MATERIAL INTERFERING WITH ARMATURE
ACTION
An inspection of the armature will generally disclose any foreign matter interfer-
ing with the armature action resulting in poor reproduction. A small piece of heavy
paper or a piece of copper or brass not over .010" thick may be used between the arma-
ture and pole piece to remove dirt, dust or other interfering substance. The spacer
tool, described in Section 4, may also be used for this purpose.

Figure 4-General appearance and correct dimensions of armature spacing

tools

(4) ARMATURE STRIKING POLE PIECES

Distortion and rattle may be caused by the armature striking either or both of
the pole pieces. This is generally determined by inspection, though in some cases the
contact may be so slight it may be necessary to adjust the armature to check on this
condition. In any case an adjustment of the armature is necessary.
To adjust the armature a set of spacer tools are necessary. Figure 4 illustrates
the general appearance and correct dimensions of these spacer tools. The stock-
obtainable on the open market-should be phosphorous bronze strip .010" thick and
.25" wide. It is bent as illustrated and soldered to hold the opening fairly rigid. The
two ends are tapered as illustrated to a .15" width at their extremities.
Two of these tools are necessary when adjusting the armature. Place one tool in
the space between the armature and pole piece of the motor mechanism at the end next
to the filter unit. This is shown in Figure 5. The other tool is placed at the other end
of the armature a little to one side in order to clear the drive pin located at this end of
the armature. By loosening screws A and B, Figure 5, any tension in either direction
7
that may have been on the armature is released and the spacer tools will provide the
correct clearance or spacing. Now while the spacer tools are in place a hot soldering
iron is applied to the drive pin thrust lever connection point C, Figure 6, and the solder
heated sufficiently to allow the drive pin to find its normal position with regard to the
thrust lever. The iron is now removed. Screws A and B, Figure 5, are tightened and
the spacer tools removed. The armature is now correctly aligned and balanced so that
no abnormal strain is being imposed upon it in any direction.

Figure 5-Armature bracket adjusting screws A and B

(5) CONE NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED

In some cases a cone may become improperly aligned or adjusjed, causing a strain
to be placed on the driving rod, due to the cone not centering or seating properly.
Poor reproduction is the result and inspection of the armature drive -pin may indicate
a slight torque or twist. This is most likely to occur when replacing a cone. The new
cone should be carefully seated by placing the cone over the driving rod and adjusting
the cone seating nut located on driving rod next to thrust lever (See Figure 1, page 4).
Then attach cone lock nut and washer lightly on inside of cone before fastening the
edge of cone. The holes on the edge of the cone can now be lined up with those of the
metal frame and the outside ring lightly attached with screws and nuts. The cone lock
nut is then tightened and sealed in place with ordinary sealing wax so that the vibration
of the cone will not cause it to loosen. This nut can best be tightened by means of a
small socket wrench made to fit a 3/16" hex. nut (Stevens "Spintite" No. 3 can be
used). The six screws at the outside edge are then seated properly. In doing this
take up on each screw a little at a time causing a gradual seating of the screws.
8
(6) LOOSE THRUST LEVER, NUTS AND SCREWS
Rattle and noisy reception are. sometimes caused by a loose thrust lever. To cor-
rect this condition tighten the thrust lever mounting screw G, Figure 9. Sometimes
when this is done a readjustment of the armature, as described in Section 4, may be
necessary. Any. loose screw or nut in the motor mechanism may cause an audible rattle
while the speaker is in operation. If any trouble is experienced along this line all the
screws and nuts in the motor mechanism should be gone over and loose ones tightened.

Figure 6-The drive-pin thrust -lever connecting point (C) which is soldered

(7) FILTER UNIT AND MAGNET COIL TESTS

A defective filter unit or a filter unit not properly connected in the circuit will
cause distortion. Defective magnet coils will also cause imperfect reproduction. The
circuit and correct connections are shown in Figure 8. The reference letters in the
circuit diagram refer to the filter terminals shown in the small halftone illustration
Figure 8. These should correspond electrically, otherwise distorted or no reception will
result. A click test will indicate whether or not the unit is electrically O. K. The fol-
lowing continuity test will indicate an electrical defect either in the coils or filter unit.
A pair of headphones and a 41/0 -volt battery connected together in series or a volt-
meter and sufficient battery to give a full scale deflection should be used.

FILTER UNIT CONTINUITY TEST (See Figure 8)

Disconnect Magnet Coils and Loudspeaker Cord

Test Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

L to M Closed Open filter coil

L to N Open Shorted filter condenser
M to N Open Shorted filter condenser
9
 CONTINUITY TEST FOR MAGNET COILS AND
LOUDSPEAKER CORD (See Figure 8)
Connect Magnet Coils and Loudspeaker Cord
Magnet coils may be tested as indicated below. A click test from one lead to the
other while they are completely disconnected from the rest of the circuit is also a
simple and effective method of testing.

Test Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by

Jack tip to L or N Closed Open cord
Jack sleeve to L or N Closed Open cord
M to N Closed Open magnet coils or coil leads

Figure 7-Cone, showing six mounting screws around edge and lock nut (Y)
and motor mechanism mounting screw nuts D, E, F

(8) TESTING LOUDSPEAKER CORD AND LOUDSPEAKER

CONNECTIONS
A defective connection, either in the loudspeaker cord or coil connections may cause
distorted, noisy or no reproduction. As there is not much wear and tear on the coil
connections, the most likely place to find trouble of this nature is in the connecting cord.
The point where the cord enters the loudspeaker housing and the end on which the con-
necting plug is located may become frayed and worn causing a possible short or open
circuit. Also the connecting lugs inside of the plug may become broken or loose after
long use. If these points prove O. K. and there are no indications of any defects exter-
nal to the speaker housing, the bottom fibre piece should be removed and the lugs of
the cord connected to the filter unit examined. If there is no apparent defect the cord
should be disconnected and tested by means of a battery and pair of phones. It should
be click tested for the continuity of the leads and also for a short between the leads.
Shake the cord a bit while conducting the continuity test to disclose any breaks which
will be indicated by interrupted clicks.
10
 PART II-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

(1) REPLACING MAGNET COILS

The following procedure should be used when replacing magnet coils.

(a) Remove mechanism assembly from housing as described in Part I, Sec. 2.

(b) Remove the cone by breaking the wax seal and releasing the cone lock nut
(Y, Figure 7) and the six retaining screws with nuts and washers around
the edge of cone. Then release nuts D, E, F, Figure 7, from the three
magnet supporting screws.

To LOUDSPEAKER
CORD COILS
TIPS

Figure 8-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA Loudspeaker Model 100A and

photo of the filter unit

(c) Disconnect magnet coil leads at filter terminals M and N, Figure 8. The
magnet and motor mechanism with supporting screws S, T, V and bush-
ings X, Z, Figure 9, may now be removed from the supporting frame and
separated by releasing the bushings X, Z, and removing the supporting
screws S, T, V, Figure 9. Place a large nail or soft iron bar across the
poles of the permanent magnet to act as a keeper (See Figure 10).

(d) Remove the thrust lever supporting screw G, Figure 9, and apply a hot
soldering iron to thrust lever armature drive pin connection point C, Fig-
ure 6. The thrust lever and driving rod may now be removed.

(e) Disassemble the motor mechanism by removing screw O, Figure 10, and
the corresponding screw P, on the other side of the mechanism. Also re-
move screws A and B, Figure 10. The magnet coils may now be removed
by slipping them separately off the ends of the armature, one end of
which has the drive pin fastened to it.
11
 The reassembling is a reversal of the preceding operation.
(f) Insert the armature into the new coils in the same position occupied in
old coils.
(g) Reassemble motor mechanism and replace thrust lever. Do not solder
thrust lever to armature pin at this time.
(h) Replace motor mechanism on magnet with supporting screws and bush-
ings; remove keeper and mount the assembly on supporting frame.

Figure 9-Loudspeaker disassembled, showing the frame, filter and motor

mechanism with their respective mounting screws

Replace cone and center carefully. Replace, but do not seat screws, nuts
and lock washers around edge. Tighten cone lock nut and seal with seal-
ing wax. Seat screws around edge.
Place spacer tools in position to adjust the armature as indicated in Fig-
ure 5 and tighten screws A and B.
Resolder drive pin to thrust lever and allow it to fall in its normal posi-
tion. Remove spacer tools.
Connect coil leads to filter terminals M and N, Figure 8. At this point
it is good practice to test the unit on a receiver of good quality and
make any further adjustments that may be necessary.
Replace mechanism assembly in housing and replace bottom fibre sheet.
(2) REPLACING ARMATURE AND DRIVE PIN
The procedure for replacing the armature and drive pin is identical with that of
replacing magnet coils (Part II, Sec. 1), with the exception of the new part substituted.
The new armature should be clean and free from any dust or dirt.
12
(3) REPLACING THRUST LEVER AND DRIVING ROD
Ordinarily the driving rod and thrust lever are not likely to become damaged or
require replacement. However, should it be necessary remove the mechanism assembly
from housing as described in Part I, Sec. 2. Then remove the cone, the magnet and
motor mechanism and the thrust lever as described in Part II, Sec. 1.
The thrust lever and driving rod are supplied in assembled form. Attach the new
thrust lever to the pole piece by means of the supporting screw G, Figure 9, and reas-
semble the loudspeaker as described in Part II, Sec. 1.

Figure 10-Motor mechanism partly exploded

Note the nail in position as keeper-it is important to place the keeper on the magnet before re-
moving the motor mechanism and retaining it until the motor mechanism is replaced

(4) REPLACING MOTOR ASSEMBLY COMPLETE

When replacement of the complete motor mechanism is necessary remove mechan-
ism assembly from housing as described in Part I, Sec. 2. Then remove the cone, the
magnet and motor as described in Part II, Sec. 1.
The reassembly will be a reversal of the above procedure.
(5) REPLACING CONES
When replacing a cone remove the old cone as already described in Part II, Sec. 1.
The replacement of the new cone is a reversal of the foregoing procedure.
(a) Place cone over the driving rod in center.
(b) Adjust cone seating nut (See Figure 1, page 4), so as to properly seat
cone and provide clearance for thrust lever from pole piece.
(c) Replace retaining rim over cone and replace six screws, lock washers and
nuts but do not seat the screws at this time.
(d) Replace washer and cone lock nut Y, Figure 7, on driving rod. Tighten
and seal with ordinary sealing wax. Gradually seat the six retaining
screws around edge of cone.
18
 (e) For final adjustment apply a hot soldering iron at the thrust lever arma-
ture drive pin connection point C, Figure 6, until the armature drive pin
has found its new position with regard to the tension produced by the
new cone.

(6) REPLACING FILTER UNITS

The following procedure is used when replacing filter units:
(a) Remove mechanism assembly from housing as described in Part L Sec. 2.
(b) Disconnect all leads to filter terminals L, M and N, Figure 8, and tag
each lead. This is important so that the proper connections may be made
when replacing these connections on the new unit.
(c) Remove filter mounting nuts H and K, Figure 9. The unit may now be
removed and replaced with a new one.
(d) Replace filter mounting nuts H and K, Figure 9 on the filter.
(e) Reconnect leads to filter terminals L, M and N, Figure 8, as indicated on
tags attached to same.
(f) Place mechanism assembly in housing and replace fibre sheet on base.
(7) REPLACING FRONT OR REAR GRILLE
Grilles are furnished complete with the frame. The following procedure in replac-
ing a grille is to be used:
Front Grille
(a) Remove the mechanism assembly from housing as described in Part I,
Sec. 2 and lift grille from mechanism assembly.
(b) The new grille may now be placed in position occripied by the old one.
Preserve the diagonal position of the cloth pattern as originally installed.
The reassembly is a reversal of the foregoing procedure.
Rear Grille
To replace the rear grille the mechanism assembly and front grille is first removed
from the housing as already described. Then remove the eight screws, lock washers and
nuts used to fasten the rear grille to the housing.
The rear grille may now be replaced and the speaker reassembled in the reverse order.
(8) REFITTING GRILLE CLOTH
The grille cloth on the front and rear of the loudspeaker may become wrinkled and
loose after considerable use or due to extreme climatic changes. A wrinkled grille pre-
sents a poor appearance and should be refitted so that it will be tight and smooth.
This is a simple procedure.
(a) Remove grille from housing, either front or rear, as described in Part II,
Section 7.
(b) Carefully hold the edges of the grille frame and press the inside clamping
ring from the cloth side until the grille assembly comes apart.
(c) Place the inside clamping ring with its rounded edge up on a table. Lay
the grille cloth over this ring completely covering the edge.
(d) Now place the protruding edge of the grille frame over the inner clamp-
ing ring resting on the table, and gently press grille frame over the cloth
and ring. The grille will now be assembled with the cloth tight and smooth
over its entire surface.
(e) The entire grille assembly may now be returned to the loudspeaker hous-
ing in the usual manner.
14
 SERVICE DATA CHART
The following table of information provides a handy reference when servicing Loud-
speaker Model 100A, and a working knowledge of it will enable service men to handle
service problems readily and efficiently. Column 1 headed "Indication" contains the
symptom of the trouble experienced. Column 2 gives the cause. Column 3 states the
remedy in brief form, and column 4 refers to detailed instructions in the Service Notes.
SEE SERVICE NOTES
Indication Cause Remedy
Part I Part II
No output from receiver Examine receiver . Sec. 1

Defective coils Replace coils Sec 7 Sec. 1

No Defective filter Replace filter Sec 7 Sec. 6

Reproduc-
tion Defective cord Repair or replace cord Sec. 7-8
Loose or broken connections Repair connections Sec. 8
Drive pin not soldered . . Solder drive pin . Sec. 4 Sec. 1

Weak receiver output . . Examine receiver . . . . Sec. 1

Dirt interfering with arma- Remove foreign matter from

ture action mechanism Sec. 3
Weak Loose thrust lever mounting Tighten screw and resolder
Reproduc- screw drive pin Sec 6 Sec. 3
tion
Improperly aligned cone Align cone correctly . Sec. 5
Drive pin poorly soldered Solder drive pin Sec. 1

Weak magnet Remagnetize .

Distorted output from re-

ceiver Examine receiver . . . Sec. 1
Improperly adjusted cone . Adjust cone correctly . Sec. 5 Sec. 5
Filter incorrectly connected Connect filter correctly . Sec. 7 Sec. 6
Distorted
or noisy
Filter defective Replace filter Sec 7 Sec. 6
Reproduc- Loose screws or nuts in as- Tighten all loose screws or
tion sembly nuts Sec 6
(Rattle) Armature striking pole piece Adjust armature correctly . Sec. 4 Sec. 1

Excessive pressure on drive Resolder drive pin to thrust

pin lever Sec. 4 Sec. 1

Filter unit not connected . Connect filter unit . Sec. 7 Sec. 6

RCA LOUDSPEAKER 100A REPLACEMENT PARTS

No. Description
1964 Motor mechanism complete (less magnet)
1965 Armature with mounting bracket and drive pir.
1966 Magnet coils with leads
1968 Thrust lever with driving rod to cone
1969 Filter unit complete
9190 Cone
5634 Screen assembly
15
Printe in L. S. A. 1927
 RCA
Loudspeaker 103
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared Especially for
RCA Distributors

Second Edition -5M

Copyright October, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.
Bld. No. 19-168 - 39th St. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEX.-Santa Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Authorized Dealer renders
service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent
service and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that
RCA Loudspeaker and Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service organizations hav-
ing a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the design and operation of RCA Loud-
speakers and Radiolas.

Such service organizations have been established by the RCA Distributors, and the RCA
Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected
Distributors.

Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may be undertaken by the
of
RCA Dealer. To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer's business the Service Division
the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes containing technical information and practical
helps in servicing RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers' service problems
and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service Notes
will establish their value, and it is suggested they be preserved for ready reference by the RCA
Authorized Dealer.

The Distributors edition of the RCA Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-contains
full information on the service problems that may be encountered on a particular model.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA Service Division maintains a corps of
engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems. These engineers
call upon the trade at frequent intervals to advise and assist RCA Distributors in the performance
of service work.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1923-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS
Page
A Word or Two About Service - 2
Introduction - - - -
5

PART I-SERVICE DATA

Receiver Output - - 6
Procedure for Removing Mechanism Cover 6
Foreign Material Interfering with Armature Action 7
Armature Striking Pole Pieces - 7
Cone Improperly Seated - -
8
Loose Thrust Lever, Nuts and Screws 8
Filter Unit and Magnet Coil Tests - 9
Filter Unit Continuity Tests - - 9
Loudspeaker Cord and Connections - 10
Remagnetizing Loudspeaker Magnets - - - 10
Checking Output of Repaired Loudspeakers - - 11
Service Data Chart - - - - - - 15

PART II-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing Magnet Coils - - - - 11
Replacing Armature and Drive Pin - - 13
Replacing the Thrust Lever and Driving Rod - 13
Replacing the Motor Assembly Complete - - 14
Replacing Cone - - 14
Replacing Filter Unit - 15
Replacing Grille Cloth 15

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Loudspeaker 103 - - 1
Rear View - - - 4
Output Transformer - - 5
Rear View Showing Silk Cover - 6
Removing Fibre Canopy - - 7
Armature Spacer Tools - 8
Armature Adjustment - 9
Drive Pin Thrust Lever Connection - 10
Motor Mechanism Partly Exploded - - 11
Schematic Circuit - - - - - - 11
Removing Reproducer Assembly from Baffle - 12
Removing the Baffle Board - - 13
Units Dismounted - - 13
Tacking Grille Tapestry to Baffle Board - 14
 "
RCA 103

"
.
MOULDED FRAME ^. .
BAFFLE
METAL MOUNTING
FRAME _ ' ' METAL MOTOR
nr art SUPPORT

..a
THRUST
LEVER
íï 4
' ' ; WITH
DRIVING
MAGNET ; ROD
.
ARMATURE
WITH
... ,

]".
4
DRIVE
PIN
..

' \ :
t';'"
,
'
MOTOR
MECHANISM

FILTER

iKtri}:
... . ..
'. .ftrkR
INPUT CORD

.n .. ..
ra4 Y:..- .'-...1`

Figure 1- Rearview showing principal parts

 RCA LOUDSPEAKER 103
SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division
INTRODUCTION

RCA Loudspeaker 103 is an improved design of the extensively used RCA Loudspeaker
100A-the improvements resulting in better reproducing qualities and an artistic appearance
which entirely removes it from any semblance to a mechanical device. It is especially designed
for use with RCA Radiolas and standard receivers. The loudspeaker consists essentially of a
moulded frame with a tapestry grille, a baffle board, cone support, cone, motor mechanism and
filter unit. (See Figure 1.)

Figure 2-RCA output transformer

A fibre frame is provided to cover the entire mechanism, and a silk cover is tied over this
frame to give an artistic finish and provide easy access to the mechanism when necessary.
Some method of coupling the output of the receiver to the loudspeaker should be employed
when Loudspeaker 103 is used in conjunction with receivers using plate voltages passing current
in excess of 10 milliamperes through the loudspeaker windings. The RCA output transformer
(Figure 2) is especially designed for this purpose and should be used wherever it is found
necessary. A choke and condenser arrangement will also give satisfactory results for this pur-
pose when properly connected. Figure 3 shows the correct values and connections of either a
transformer, or choke and condenser to the loudspeaker.

4Th SMrDS
PLATE PLATE
30-H[rtK
oR Matt- IIÌIH j To
NOT OVER 111111
LOUD-
1000 -on III IS
SPEAKER
ßCRt5i5T- 111111¡
ANc[ I

+g
-BO Figure 3-Typical output circuits
5
 PART I-SERVICE DATA
The service problems of loudspeakers deal with conditions evidenced by weak reproduction,
no reproduction, distortion, noise and rattle. These conditions and their attending causes, while
not common to Loudspeaker 103, are explained in these notes and corrections noted so that ser-
vice men may be provided with helpful information in any service work that may be required on
Loudspeaker 103.

[1] RECEIVER OUTPUT

Before inspecting the loudspeaker for imperfect reproduction check the receiver output with
headphones. Any distortion in the receiver will be faithfully reproduced in the loudspeaker. If
a signal of good quality and volume is being delivered by the receiver, the loudspeaker must be
examined for the cause of any imperfect reproduction that may occur.

INNER EDGE
DRAW STRING

OUTER EDGE
DRAW STRING

Figure 4-Location of draw strings used to fasten silk cover

over canopy

[2] PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING MECHANISM COVER

To examine the mechanism it is first necessary to remove the cover that protects the mechanism
from dust and dirt. Proceed as follows (See Figure 4) :
(a) Untie the' draw cord in the center of the silk cover and loosen the cord around the entire
inside edge of the cover.
(b) Untie the cord on the outer edge of the cover. This cord is accessible only after un-
tying the inner cord. The entire silk cover may now be removed.
(c) Gripping the fibre cover with the right hand at its point of contraction (See Figure 5)
press the cover together until its edges are free from the metal edge that holds it in place.
The entire mechanism is now exposed to view and any necessary adjustment or repair may
be easily made.

6
[3] FOREIGN MATERIAL INTERFERING WITH ARMATURE ACTION
An inspection of the armature will generally disclose any foreign matter interfering with
the armature action, resulting in poor reproduction. A small piece of heavy paper or a piece of
copper or brass not over .010" thick may be used between the armature and pole pieces to re-
move dirt, dust or other interfering substances. The spacer tool, described in Section 4 may also
be used for this purpose.

[4]- ARMATURE STRIKING POLE PIECES

Distortion and rattle may be caused by the armature striking either or both of the pole
pieces. This is generally determined by inspection, though in some cases the contact may be
so slight it may be necessary to adjust the armature to check on this condition. In any case an
adjustment of the armature is necessary.

Figure 5-Removing fibre canopy

To adjust the armature use a set of spacer tools. Figure 6 illustrates the general appear-
ance and correct dimensions of these tools for the information of those who desire to construct
them. However, they may be purchased from the RCA Service Division (Stock No. 2321). The
material-obtainable on the open market-should be phosphor bronze strip .010" thick and .25"
wide. It is bent as illustrated and soldered to hold the ends fairly rigid. The two ends are tapered as
illustrated to a .15" width at their extremities.
Two of these tools are necessary when adjusting the armature. Place one tool in the space
between the armature and pole pieces of the motor mechanism at the end next to the filter unit.
This is shown in Figure 7. The other tool is placed at the other end of the armature a little to one
side in order to clear the drive pin located at this end of the armature. By loosening the two screws
A and B, Figure 7, any tension in either direction, that may have been on the armature is released,
and the spacer tools will provide the correct clearance or spacing. Now while the spacer tools are
in place apply a hot soldering iron to the drive pin thrust lever connection point F, Figure 8,
and heat the solder sufficiently to allow the drive pin to find its normal position with regard
to the thrust lever. The iron is then removed, screws A and B are tightened and the spacer
tools removed. This adjustment correctly aligns and balances the armature so that no abnormal
strain is imposed upon it in any direction.

7
 [5] CONE IMPROPERLY SEATED
In order to inspect the cone it i3 necessary to remove the mechanism assembly from the
baffle board in the following manner:
(a) Remove mechanism cover as described in Part I, Section 2.
(b) Remove the six machine screws holding the metal mounting frame to the baffle board.
Be careful to support the assembly so that it will not fall and become damaged.
(c) Remove the six bolts and nuts holding the motor metal mounting support and cone to
the mounting frame.
In some cases a cone may be off center or improperly seated. Poor reproduction is the re-
sult and inspection of the armature drive -pin may indicate a slight torque or twist.
This trouble is most likely to occur when replacing a cone. The new cone should be care-
fully seated by placing the cone over the driving rod and adjusting the cone seating nut located
on the driving rod next to the thrust lever. Then attach the cone lock nut and washer lightly on
the inside of the cone before fastening the edge of the cone. The holes on the edge of the cone

m
o o
=

rer-
I ó

.23"

Figure 6-General appearance and correct dimensions

of armature spacing tools

can now be lined up with those of the metal frame, and the outside frame lightly attached with
screws and nuts. The cone lock nut is then tightened and sealed in place with ordinary sealing
wax so that the vibration of the cone will not cause it to loosen. This nut can best be tightened
by means of a small socket wrench made to fit a 3/16" hex nut (Stevens "Spintite No. 3 can be
used). The six screws at the outside edge are then seated properly. In doing this take up on each
screw a little at a time, causing a gradual seating of the screws.

[6] LOOSE THRUST LEVER, NUTS AND SCREWS

Rattle and noisy reception are sometimes caused by a loose thrust lever. To correct this con-
dition tighten the thrust lever mounting clamps by means of screw G, Figure 9. Sometimes when
this is done a readjustment of the armature as described in Part I, Section 4 may be necessary.
Any loose screw or nut in the motor mechanism may cause an audible rattle when the speaker is
in operation. If any trouble is experienced along this line all the screws and nuts in the motor
mechanism should be gone over and the loose ones tightened.

8
[7] FILTER UNIT AND MAGNET COIL TESTS
A defective filter unit or a filter unit not properly connected in the circuit will cause distor-
tion. Defective magnet coils will also cause imperfect reproduction. The circuit diagram and
correct connections are shown in Figure 10. The reference letters in the circuit diagram refer to
the filter terminals shown in the small halftone illustration in Figure 10. These should correspond
electrically, otherwise distorted or no reception will occur. A click test will indicate whether or
not the unit is electrically O. K. The following continuity will indicate an electrical defect either
in the coils or in the filter unit.
A pair of headphones and a 41/2 -volt battery connected together in series or a voltmeter and
sufficient battery to give a full scale deflection should be used.

ARMATURE
SPACING
TOOLS

Figure 7-The use of the spacing tools in adjusting the armature

FILTER UNIT CONTINUITY TESTS

Remove all connections and refer to Figure 10

Test Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused By

N to M Open Shorted Condenser
N to L Closed Open Coil

A short of the condenser across the coil can be determined by checking the resistance of the
coil with a resistance bridge or the method indicated in R-17 Service Notes. The correct resistance
for this coil is 230 ohms.
The magnet coils may now be checked for an open by testing from one lead to the other. An
open indicates a defective coil which must be replaced.

9
[8] LOUDSPEAKER CORD AND CONNECTIONS
A defective connection, either in the loudspeaker cord or coil connections may cause dis-
torted, noisy or no reproduction. As there is not much wear and tear on the coil connections, the
most likely place to find trouble of this nature is in the connecting cord. The point where the
cord enters the loudspeaker housing and the ends on which the pin terminals are located may
become frayed and worn, causing a possible short or open circuit. If these points prove O. K.
and there are no indications of any defects external to the speaker housing, the cover should be
removed and the lugs of the cord soldered to the filter unit examined. If there is no apparent
defect the cord should be disconnected and tested by means of a battery and pair of phones. It
should be click tested for the continuity of the leads and also for a short between the leads. Shake
the cord while conducting the continuity test to disclose any breaks which will be indicated by
interrupted clicks.

Figure 8-Drive-pin thrust -lever soldered connection (F)

[9] REMAGNETIZING LOUDSPEAKER MAGNETS

At times there may be occasion to remagnetize the large permanent magnet used in Loud-
speaker 103. In order to do this a powerful electro -magnet is necessary. The construction of such
a magnet is quite difficult and requires direct current of. considerable amperage. It is suggested
that this work be turned over to automobile or ignition shops' specializing in the repair of magnets.
Distributors maintaining contact with shops of this character are in a position to obtain immediate
service on remagnetizing jobs.

[10] CHECKING OUTPUT OF REPAIRED LOUDSPEAKERS

After a repair job has been completed it is always desirable to have a definite means of check-
ing the output of the speaker against a speaker known to be in good condition. Two general methods

10
can be used to accomplish this-one by alternately connecting each speaker to a radio receiver tuned
to a nearby broadcasting station, the other by alternately connecting each speaker, to the output of a
power amplifier being driven from a phonograph pick-up. The latter method is preferable as a
standard record may be used that has a much wider frequency range than would be obtained by
random tuning with a broadcast receiver. When checking a speaker under these conditions a volume
control should be used and the speaker checked at both the soft and loud positions. At the minimum
position the speaker under test can be compared with the standard for sensitivity and at the loud
position a check can be made on its ability to handle volume without distortion or rattle. These
checks should be made at both high and low frequencies. The sections of the record containing
these frequencies can be indicated to run such a test.
A test of this kind is quite conclusive for quality and volume of reproduction and will indicate
if further repair work or adjustments are necessary.

Figure 9-Motor mechanism partly exploded

PART II-MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Due to the simple design of Loudspeaker 103 replacement of any particular part is easily
and quickly accomplished. The following detailed procedure should be used when performing
work of this kind.

[1] REPLACING MAGNET COILS

To replace the magnet coils:-
(a) Remove mechanism cover as described in Part I, Section 2.
(b) Remove mechanism from baffle by removing the six machine screws that hold it to the
the baffle board (See Figure 11) .
(c) Remove the cone by removing six bolts and nuts around the edge and the cone center
nut located at Y, Figure 12.
(d) The motor mechanism may now be removed by removing nuts F, G, H, Figure 12. The
magnet coil leads must be unsoldered before the motor can be cleared of the frame.
Place a large nail or soft iron bar across the poles of the permanent magnet to act as a
keeper (See Figure 9).

11
(e) Remove the thrust lever supporting screw G, Figure 9, and apply a hot soldering iron
to the thrust lever armature drive pin connection point F, Figure 8. The thrust lever and
driving rod may now be removed.

(f) Disassemble the motor mechanism by removing screw 0, Figure 9, and the correspond-
ing screw on the other side of the mechanism. Also remove screws A and B, Figure 9.
The magnet coils may now be removed by slipping one off the armature and the other
off the armature and drive pin.

The reassembling is a reversal of the preceding operation.

(a) Place the new coils over the armature in the same position occupied by the old ones.

11111 11111
'LOUDSPEAKER COILS}

Figure 10-Schematic circuit of Loudspeaker 103 coils and filter and

photo of filter unit

(b) Reassemble the motor mechanism and replace the thrust lever. Do not solder the thrust
lever to the drive pin at this time.

(c) Remove keeper and replace motor mechanism on magnet with supporting screws and
bushings. Mount the reassembled unit in its correct position on the frame.

(d) Replace cone and center carefully. Replace, but do not seat the screws, nuts and lock
washers around the edge. Tighten the cone lock nut and seal with sealing wax. Seat
screws around edge.

(e) Place spacer tools in position to adjust the armature and tighten screws A and B,
Figure 7.

(f) Resolder drive pin to thrust lever and allow it to find its normal position. Remove
spacer tools.

12
 (g) Solder coil leads to filter unit as indicated in Figure 10. At this point it is good prac-
tice to test the mechanism on a receiver of good quality and make any further adjust-
ments that may be necessary.

(h) Replace the fibre cover and silk cloth as described in Part I, Section 2.

[2] REPLACING ARMATURE AND DRIVE PIN

The procedure for replacing the armature and drive pin is identical with that of replacing
the magnet coils with the exception of the new part substituted. The new armature should be
clean and free from any dust or dirt.

Figure 11-Removing reproducer assembly from baffle

[3] REPLACING THE THRUST LEVER AND DRIVING ROD

Ordinarily the driving rod and thrust lever are not likely to become damaged or require
replacement. However, should it be necessary, remove the cover from the mechanism as described
in Part I. Section 2. Then disassemble the mechanism as described in Part II, Section 1 until the
thrust lever and driving rod are removed.
The new one should be placed in the position occupied by the old one, making sure the clamp
holds it tightly in place. Reassemble in the reverse order of that used to disassemble it. The
armature should be checked for adjustment as described in Part I, Section 4. The cover should
now be replaced and the speaker returned to normal operation.

13
 (1)
(2)
(3)
Figure 12-(1) Mounting frame; (2) cone; (3) metal support for motor

[4] REPLACING THE MOTOR ASSEMBLY COMPLETE

When replacement of the complete motor mechanism is necessary remove the cover from the
mechanism as described in Part I, Section 2. Then remove the cone, the motor and magnet and
install the new motor.
The reassembly will be a reversal of the foregoing procedure.

[5] REPLACING CONE

When replacing a cone re-
move the old one as described
in Part II, Section 1. The in-
stallation of the new cone is a
reversal of the removal pro-
cedure.
(a) Place cone over driv-
ing rod in center.
(b) Adjust the cone seat-
ing nut so as to prop-
erly seat the cone and
provide clearance for
the thrust lever from
the pole piece.

Figure 13-Removing the baffle board

14
[6] REPLACING FILTER UNIT
The following procedure should be used when replacing the filter unit.
(a) Remove cover from mechanism as described in Part I, Section 2.
(b) Unsolder all leads to the filter terminals.
(c) Remove the filter unit mounting nuts and washers C and D, Figure 7. The unit may
now be removed and replaced by a new one.
(d) Replace the mounting nuts and washers previously removed. Then resolder the leads
that were removed from the filter terminals.
(e) Replace mechanism cover previously removed and return loudspeaker to normal opera-
tion.

Figure 14-Tacking the grille tapestry in place on the baffle board

[ 7] REPLACING GRILLE CLOTH

RCA Loudspeaker 103 uses a tapestry grille that is tacked in place and used to cover the
front opening of the speaker. To replace this tapestry proceed in the following manner:
(a) Remove the mechanism by removing the six machine screws that hold it to the baffle
board and remove the baffle board by removing the eight wood screws that hold it to the
:aoulded frame (See Figure 13).
(b) This releases the mechanism and the frame and permits access to the baffle board on
which the tapestry is tacked.
(c) Remove all the tacks that hold the tapestry to the baffle board.
(d) The tapestry may now be removed and the new one placed in position. If the material
used is different from the original tapestry its porosity should be checked to see that
it is approximately the same. This may be tested by blowing through the cloth and notic-
ing any difference in the opposition of one compared with the other.
(e) Tack the new tapestry tightly in position (See Figure 14).
(f) Replace entire assembly in the moulded frame and return the eight screws to their
original position.
The speaker may now be returned to normal operation.
15
 SERVICE DATA CHART
The following table of information provides a handy reference when servicing
Loudspeaker Model 103, and a working knowledge of it will enable service men to
handle service problems readily and efficiently. Reference to Part No. and Section No.
in the ` Service Notes" is noted for detailed information.

Indication Cause Remedy

No output from receiver Examine receiver, Part I, Sec. 1

Defective coils Replace coils, Part I, Sec. 7; Part II, Sec. 1

No Defective filter Replace filter, Part I, Sec. 7; Part II, Sec. 6
Reproduc-
tion Defective cord Repair or replace cord, Part I, Sec. 8
Loose or broken connections Repair connections, Part I, Sec. 8
Drive pin not soldered Solder drive pin, Part I, Sec. 4

Weak receiver output Examine receiver, Part I, Sec. 1

Dirt interfering with arma- Remove foreign matter from mechanism, Part I,
ture action Sec. 3
Weak Loose thrust lever mounting Tighten screw and resolder drive pin, Part I,
Reproduc- screw Sec. 6; Part II, Sec. 3
tion
Improperly aligned cone Align cone correctly, Part I, Sec. 5
Drive pin poorly soldered Solder drive pin, Part I, Sec. 4
Weak magnet Remagnetize

Distorted output from re-

ceiver Examine receiver, Part I, Sec. 1

Improperly adjusted cone Adjust cone correctly, Part I, Sec. 5; Part II, Sec. 5
Filter incorrectly connected Connect filter correctly, Part I, Sec. 7; Part II,
Distorted Sec. 6
or noisy Filter defective Replace filter, Part I, Sec. 7; Part II, Sec. 6
Reproduc-
Loose screws or nuts in as- Tighten all loose screws or nuts, Part I, Sec. 6
tion
sembly
(Rattle)
Armature striking pole piece Adjust armature correctly, Part I, Sec. 4; Part
II, Sec. 1
Excessive pressure on drive Resolder drive pin to thrust lever, Part I, Sec. 4;
pin Part II, Sec. 1
Filter unit not connected Connect filter unit, Part I, Sec. 7; Part II, Sec. 6

.111 ,1 Iii t'. S. .\.

 RCA
Loudspeaker 104
SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-531-June. 19.23

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA
Loudspeaker or Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of the
RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing tech-
nical information and practical helps in servicing R. C. A. Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America

 RCA LOUDSPEAKER 104
SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

INTRODUCTION
These "Service Notes" cover problems encountered when using RCA Loudspeaker
Model 104 as a Power Speaker and B -Battery Eliminator. For information concern-
ing combination with Radiola 25 and 28 A. C. operated consult Service Notes entitled
"A. C. Operation of Radiolas 25 and 28."
RCA Loudspeaker, Model 104, consists essentially of two main parts, the Repro-
ducer unit and the Rectifier -Power -Amplifier unit. It is designed to operate from an alter-
nating current supply of 105 to 125 volts, 40 to 45 cycles (using Ballast tube, Radiotron
UT-886) and 50 to 75 cycles (using Ballast tube, Radiotron 1JV-876), such as is available
for lighting and general household uses in the majority of American homes. Should there
be any doubt in the mind of a dealer concerning the rating of the local electric power
supply of a prospective purchaser, the company supplying electric lighting service in the
customer's locality will furnish the correct information.
The Reproducer is a power unit operating on the electro -dynamic principle of
sound reproduction. A movable coil, rigidly fastened to the cone moves in the strong
magnetic field of the pot magnet in accordance with the modulation of the received signal.
This in turn actuates the cone, which results in sound production. The output of the
RCA Loudspeaker, Model 104, is a truly faithful recreation or reproduction of the orig-
inal sound production as transmitted.
A Rectifier Power Amplifier containing suitable rectifying and amplifying devices
provides for amplification beyond the first audio stage of any receiver. It can also be
used to supply the necessary plate voltage for most receivers. If used. with Radiola 25
or 28 and the proper AC package, complete AC operation may be secured-thus elim-
inating all batteries. Figure 1 illustrates the socket layout of the R.P.A. unit.

Figure 1-R.P.A. socket layout

3
 .2,0 t1X2161B UX216B"UX-874; VegT6-`
TERM INALt
Or-": s z
, .
DOOR LOCK

PROTECTIVE PLUG RECEPTACL

INPUT TERMINAL BOARD

POWER SUPPLY PLUG

TELEPHONE PLUG

Figure 2-Rear view R.C.A. Loudspeaker, Model 104, sho,cing location of

Radiotrons, Rectrons, and parts
 SERVICE DATA
The R.P.A. unit makes use of one Radiotron UV -876 (or UV -886), two Rectrons
EX -216B, one Radiotron EX -874 and one Radiotron EX-210. It is imperative that
these various Radiotrons and Rectrons be in perfect operating condition, otherwise the
various test indications will be misleading. The purpose of these Radiotrons and Rec-
trons are as follows:
The Radiotron EX -210 is a super -power amplifier capable of handling great
volume without distortion.
The two Rectrons UX-216B are rectifying tubes used to convert the alternating
current into pulsating direct current, which is smoothed out by the filter system to con-
tinuous direct current. (Note-The Rectrons UX-216B are interchangeable with the new
Radiotron half -wave rectifiers EX -281. The EX -281 gives the same operation with im-
proved life.)
Radiotron EX -874 is a Voltage Regulator tube and functions to keep a constant
voltage on the plates of the receiving Radiotrons at all times. When Radiola Loud-
speaker Model 104 is used in conjunction with Radiola 25 or 28 for complete A.C. oper-
ation Radiotron UX-874 is replaced by resistor unit UP -591.
Radiotron UV -876 (or U%-886) is a Current Regulator tube known as the "Ballast
Tube." It is connected in the primary circuit of the power transformer. The resistance
of its filament rises and falls rapidly with an increase or decrease of current flowing
through it, thus maintaining a substantially constant input current. Radiotron ÚV-
876 is used when the frequency of the house lighting current is between 50 and 75 cycles,
and Radiotron UV -886 on 40 to 45 cycles. A ventilating stack is provided to enclose
this Radiotron, as it is very hot during normal operation. The R.P.A. unit should not
be operated unless the ventilating stack is in place.
Figure 2 illustrates the internal mechanism and the placing of the different parts
of Loudspeaker Model 104.

(1) FILAMENT ACTION OF RADIOTRONS AND RECTRONS

Should RCA Loudspeaker Model 104 suddenly cease to operate satisfactorily, look
through the cane side of the cabinet and note whether or not the filaments of the first
three tubes-counting from the left when facing the back of the cabinet-are burning.
Replace the tubes that do not light.
The Voltage Regulator tube, Radiotron EX-874 (fourth from the left) should
show a pink or violet glow. Should this Radiotron fail to show any glow when the three
tubes to its left light, replace it with a new one. If this one also fails to glow the house
lighting line voltage may be below 105 volts or the Ballast tube, Radiotron UV -876 (or
UV -886) may be defective or a 2 Mfd. condenser (next to resistance units) shorted,
Test R.P.A. unit as indicated in Section 14 (see Figure 3). Check line voltage with an
A.C. voltmeter. If it reads between 105 and 125 volts replace Radiotron UV -876 (or
UV -886) and, as a last resort, test condensers as outlined in Section 14.
If Radiotron EX -874 flashes intermittently while the branch telephone cord is dis-
connected from the receiver, it should be replaced. Loud signals or strong static dis-
charges will, however, cause it to flicker somewhat when the telephone cord is connected
to the receiver. A prolonged loud signal will decrease the brilliancy of the glow.
5
 Figure 3-Tests Conducted at the Terminal Board of the R.P.A. Unit

There is little or no visual filament indication when Radiotron UV -876 or LTV -886,
the Ballast Tube (large one enclosed in ventilating stack) is functioning properly. This
Radiotron, however, dissipates a considerable amount of heat in operation.

Should all Radiotrons and Rectrons fail to light or operate as described in the pre-
ceding paragraphs, look for:

(a) House lighting current switched off or loose connection at convenience outlet.
(b) Operating switch in Loudspeaker 104 not functioning properly.
(c) Bloicn fuse in house lighting circuit.
(d) Loose protective plug.
(e) Burned out filament in Radiotron CV -876 (or CV -886).
(f) Poor contact in Radiotron UV -876 (or UV -886) socket.
(g) Defective Voltage Regulator tube or poor socket contact.
(h) House lighting current not A.C. This condition is manifested by the filament
of the Radiotron CV -876 (or UV -886) lighting a bright red.
6
(2) NO SIGNALS WHEN RADIOTRONS AND RECTRONS ARE
O. K.
If all the Radiotrons and Rectrons appear to be functioning properly with no sig-
nals heard from the Loudspeaker, test the radio receiver for operation by using a pair
of headphones. If the receiver is O. K. and the Loudspeaker plug is in place check the
following:
(a) Loose connections in telephone plug.
(b) Loose connections at "Input" on R.P.A. terminal board.
(c) Defective 30 -foot cable.
(d) Filament to grid short in Radiotron UX-210.
(e) Dirty grid or plate contacts in any socket.
(f) Open movable coil on cone.
(g) Defective R.P.A. unit. (Check all circuits by means of continuity test.)
(3) OPEN FIELD IN REPRODUCER UNIT
An open field of the Pot Magnet in the Reproducer Unit will be indicated by Radio-
tron UX-210 and Rectrons UX-216B lighting up very brightly and Radiotron UX-874
not lighting. The connections of the field to the terminal board of the R.P.A. unit should
be checked. They may be loose, thus giving the effect of an open field. However, if the
connections are tight and the field coil tests defective it should be replaced. Before mak-
ing these tests short the two field connections on the terminal strip after turning the
Loudspeaker "off." This will discharge the filter condenser and prevent any high voltage
contacts.
(4) EXCESSIVE HUM
Excessive hum in the reproducer unit may he due to any of the following causes:
(a) Low emission UX-216B, or UX-281 if used.
(h) Input plug from A.C. line reversed.
(c) 2 Mfd. condenser shorted (Located next. to 7 31fd. condenser).
(d) Loose laminations in transformer or loose screws.
(e) Power line interference. This can be checked by removing loop or antenna from
receiver and noticing if hum disappears.
(f) Potentiometer not properly adjusted. Some models of Loudspeaker 104 have a
potentiometer for the suppression of hum. This potentiometer must be ad-
justed for the position of minimum hum.
The remedies for (a), (b) and (c) are obvious. In cases of power line interference
notify the power company.
(5) RADIOTRON UX-210 PLATE EXCESSIVELY HOT
Should the plate of Radiotron UX-210 become excessively hot, disconnect time
power supply immediately and check the following units:
(a) Open Resistance Unit R-4 (Plate will be white hot).
(b) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser (Located between the two 2 mfd. condensers).
If any unit is found defective replace it.
7
 Figure 4-Readjusting cone

(6) RECTRONS UX-216B PLATES EXCESSIVELY HOT

Should the plates of the Rectrons UX-216B (or Radiotrons UX-281 if used) heat
excessively, disconnect the power supply immediately and check the following:
(a) Shorted 7 Mfd. (or 4 Mfd.) condenser. (Located low side or next to 2 Mfd.
condenser.)
(b) Shorted 7 Mfd. (or 4 Mfd.) condenser. (Located high side or next to power
transformer.)
(r) Internal short in power transformer.
Replace any part found defective.

(7) ONE RECTRON UX-216B RED HOT AND ONE APPAR-

ENTLY NORMAL-(No reproduction from Loudspeaker)
One Rectron UX-216B excessively hot and one apparently normal will indicate a
defective Rectron. The one that is apparently normal has lost its emission and will throw
the entire load on the other, thereby causing it to heat excessively. Replace the Rec-
tron that is not excessively hot. If Radiotrons UX-281 are used it is doubtful if the
O. K. tube will show color. The one dissipating the least amount of heat should be replaced.

8
 Figure 5-Testing 2 111fd. condensers for leakage

(8) DISTORTION IN REPRODUCER UNIT

Distortion in the Reproducer unit may be caused by any of the following:
(a) Poor input from Receiver. (Examine receiver.)
(b) Shorted 2 Mfd. condenser. (Located next to 7 Mfd. condenser.) (Replace
condenser.)
(e) Shorting of movable coil to pole piece of pot magnet. (Replace cone.)
(d) Defective Radiotron UX-210. (Replace Radiotron.)
(e) Leads from movable coil broken away from cone. (Make these fast with a little
shellac.)
(f) Misalignment of reproducer cone.
The reproducer cone may be readily realigned by removing the front grille and
vey carefully adjusting the small round head screw in the center of the cone (see
Figure 4). In making this adjustment care should be used to see that the cone is not
damaged by the screwdriver being pulled out of control due to the strong magnetic field
about the pole piece of the pot magnet behind the cone.
A leakage in any one of the small 2 Mfd. condensers may cause distortion in the cone.
To locate the defective condenser it will be necessary to remove the metal case of the
9
R.P.A. unit and reconnect it. Disconnect one of the 2 Mfd. condensers (Figure 5), oper-
ate loudspeaker and note the result. If the distortion is not eliminated, turn off input cur-
rent, replace the connection and try the next one, repeating this process until all the 2 Mfd.
condensers have been tested. If the distortion ceases after a certain condenser has been
disconnected, that condenser must be replaced.
This condenser test should only be employed as a last resort, after all other methods
have been tried to eliminate distortion.

(9) NO GLOW FROM RADIOTRON UX-874

No glow from Radiotron UX-874 with the power supply "on" indicates the tube is
not receiving the proper voltage supply, which may be caused by:
(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. Condenser. (Located next to resistance unit.)
(b) Open Pot Magnet or Connection. (Short circuit terminals before testing.)
(c) Open or shorted 90 -volt connections.
(d) Defective Rectron UX-216B.
(e) Defective Radiotron UX-874.
Replace unit found defective in (a), (b), (d), (e) and in (e) repair connections.

(10) NO "B" VOLTAGE

A no -voltage reading obtained at the 45 or 90 -volt terminals will indicate one of the
following defects:
(a) Shorted 2 Mfd. Condenser (Located next to resistance units.)
(b) Defective Radiotron UX-874.
(c) Defective Radiotron UX-874 socket.
(cl) Defective Rectron UX-216B.
(e) Open or shorted "B" voltage connections.

(11) FADING OF SIGNALS

Fading of signals beyond the normal slight drop after the speaker lias been placed
in operation may be due to any of the following causes :

(a) Defective Radiotron UX-210. This will be accompanied by rough and unnat-
ural reproduction.
(b) Defective Radiotron UV -876 (or UV -886).
(c) Defective Resistance in R.P.A. unit or poor joint in connection to resistance
unit. Replace if defective.

(12) BLASTING
Blasting may occur in the Loudspeaker when operating with any type of receiver.
Increasing the distance between the receiver and loudspeaker or changing their relative
position will usually stop blasting. In some cases interchanging the Radiotrons in the
receiver will eliminate the trouble.
io
 Figure 6-Removal of X.P.A. connections, Radiotrons and Rectrons preparatory
running continuity tests

(13) FLUTTERING
When RCA Loudspeaker Model 104 is used with Radiola 28 for complete A.C.
operation fluttering sometimes occurs. Look for the trouble in Radiola 28-not in
Loudspeaker 104. The following remedies are suggested, any of which may eliminate the
flutter.
(a) Change A.C. Package.
(b) Interchange Radiotrons UX-199 of catacomb.
(c) Connect 30-50 henry choke across terminals 10 and 15 of catacomb terminal
strip. (Count from the left when facing front of Radiola.)
(d) Connect 2 Mfd. condenser in series with 30 -henry choke and then place combi-
nation across terminals 15 and 22 in the Radiola 28. The choke goes to
terminal No. 15 and condenser to terminal No. 22.
11
a PtAiE

YLA?E
PRIM

FI

F I MID
MF IMF
2 MF 2MF 25F On FI
i RV

d
; AID

I. F.1

UV 876

A. C. Circuits

Connections for model

with potentiometer
®e QQ o u
Connections for model
OUTPUT FILAMENT + +45 .90 FIELD without potentiometer
_g

Figure 7-Continuity circuit of R.P.A. Unit

(14) COMPLETE R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST

The tabulated continuity tests given in the text cover all circuits of the RCA
Loudspeaker Model 104 R.P.A. unit. Before running these tests remove all connections
from the terminal board at the rear of the R.P.A. unit, also the Radiotrons and Rectrons.
(See Figure 6.) The reference letters and numbers used in the table will be found in
Figure 7.

The testing equipment consists of a high resistance voltmeter with battery voltage
sufficient to give approximately full scale deflection when connected directly across bat-
tery terminals-for example, a 45 -volt "B" battery connected in series with a voltmeter
having a 0-50 volt scale. ( See Figure 3, page 6.) The contact points of the testing equip-
ment should not touch any metallic part of the unit except the terminals specified. Dis-
charge the 4 or 7 Mfd. filter condensers by short-circuiting their terminals with a screw-
driver before starting test.
12
 000©o®o
iNDUT OUTPUT - FILAMENT + 45V 90V EIELD r

R.P.A. terminal board

R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST

(For Loudspeaker 104 Without Potentiometer)
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused By:

1 to 2 Closed Open primary of input transformer

3 to 4 Closed Open secondary of output transformer
3 to metal frame Closed Open ground connection
5toGl Closed Open secondary input transformer
5toP2 Closed Open 1/2 plate winding of power trans-
former
5 to P3 Closed Open 1/2 plate winding of power trans-
former
5 to 6 Link open Closed R2 and R3 open
.5 to 7 Closed R2 and R3 open
7 to +Fl Closed Open 1/2 UX-210 filament winding of
power transformer
7 to -Fl Closed Open 1/2 UX-210 filament winding of
power transformer
7 to 8 Closed R1 open
7 to -F4 Closed Open connection
8 to 9 Closed R1 open
9 to G4 Closed Open connection
9to10 Closed R4 open
10 to Pl Closed Open primary output transformer
11 to +F2 Closed Open 1/2 UX-216B filament winding of
power transformer
11 to -F2 Closed Open 1/2 UX-216B filament winding of
power transformer
B to P4 Closed Open primary of power transformer
Metal shell of fifth
socket to +F4 Closed Open connection
C to T Closed Open connection

13
 R.P.A. CONTINUITY TEST
(For Loudspeakers Employing Potentiometers)

Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused By:

1 to 2 Closed Open primary of input transformer

3 to 4 Closed Open secondary of output transformer
3 to metal
f rame Closed Open ground connection
5 to G1 Closed Open secondary input transformer
11 to P2 Closed Open 1/2 plate winding of power trans-
former
11 to P3 Closed Open 1/2 plate winding of power trans-
former
5 to 6 Link open Closed R2 and R3 open
5 to 7 Closed R2 and R3 open
7 to +F1 Closed Open 1/2 UX-210 filament winding of
power transformer and potentiometer
7 to -F1 Closed Open 2 UX-210 filament winding of
power transformer and potentiometer
7to 8 Closed R1 open
7 to -F4 Closed Open connection
8 to 9 Closed Rl open
9 to G4 Closed Open connection
9 to + or-F2 or F3 Closed R4 open
Pl to + or-F2 or F3 Closed Open primary of output transformer
+F2 to -F2 Closed Open UX-216B filament winding of
power transformer or connections
+F3 to -F3 Closed Open UX-216B filament winding of
power transformer or connections
B to P4 Closed Open primary of power transformer
Metal shell of fifth
socket to +F4 Closed Open connection
C to T Closed Open connection

14
(15) FILTER CONDENSER TESTS
Excessive heating of the rectifier tubes is usually an indication of a shorted fil-
ter condenser.

If the condenseron the high side (located next to the power transformer) is shorted
the plates of both rectifiers will become white hot, provided the tubes are in good condi-
tion. Should the condenser on the low side of the pot magnet become shorted the loud-
speaker will become inoperative and the plates of Rectrons UX-216B will become a dull
red. If Radiotrons UX-281 are used it is doubtful if their plates will show color, but
they will dissipate considerably more than normal heat.

A further test of the condition of the filter condensers may be made by means of a
high voltage charge. Since a high D.C. voltage is rarely obtainable either in the dealer's
shop or the customer's home, it will be necessary to use the high voltage source incorpo-
rated in the R.P.A. unit.

The following procedure is used:

(a) Remove the R.P.A. assembly from the cabinet and remove the metal cover.
Short circuit terminals No. 10 and 11 (connections to the reproducer unit),
and remove all other connections to the terminal strip.

(b) Release the connection at the top of the No. 4 resistor-leading to the 4 or 7
Mfd. condenser, located next to the 2 Mfd. condensers.

(c) With all tubes in place and the ventilating stack over Radiotron UV -876 con-
nect the A.C. power supply line to the input plug. Switch "on" the current
for a moment in order to charge the filter condensers and then switch "off"
the current.

(d) Now, standing clear and using a small stick or insulated screwdriver, push the
lead, released, back to its original position. A flash should occur at the
point of contact. Do not come in contact with either of the leads as a
severe shock may result. The flash obtained will be an indication that both
filter condensers hold the charge and are in good operating condition.

(e) If no flash is obtained it will be an indication that one or both condensers are
inoperative. Disconnect each alternately from the circuit and apply the
test to the other to determine their condition. This test subjects these con-
densers to a voltage in excess of the maximum operating voltage normally
received and a defective condenser that might pass a click or low voltage
test will be identified immediately.
15
Printea in U.S.A., 1923
 RCA
Loudspeaker 105
SERVICE NOTES

RCA Loudspeaker 105

First Edition -20M

Copyright March, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 1412 Monroe St., N.W. 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Washington, D. C. Chicago, Ill. Sao Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed RCA Dealer ren-
ders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation
and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear
and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker or Radiola owners
may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and there-
fore Dealers and Distributors who are properly equipped with a knowledge of
the design and operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas occupy a favor-
able position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Divi-
sion of the RCA has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet
is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in servicing
RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers'
service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A care-
ful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Dis-
tributor, and it is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service
Stations, has available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who
are qualified to render valuable help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1928-Radio Corporation of America.

 CONTENTS
Page
A Word or Two About Service 2
Introduction 5
Service Data Chart 19

PART I-OPERATION
Page Page
Line Switch ..._ 7 Radiotrons 8
Potentiometer 7 Connecting Loudspeaker 105 to Re -
Output Voltages 7 ceivers 8

PART II-INOPERATION
Page Page
Radiotrons Fail to Light 10 Fading Signals 12
Plates of Radiotrons Hot 10 Acoustic Howl 12
No Signals 10 Condenser Tests 12
Excessive Hum 10 Resistance Units 13
Distortion 11 Continuity Tests 14
No "B" or "C" Voltage 12

PART III -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Page Page
Power Transformer, Input Transformer, Output Transformer 16
Filter Reactor 15 Cone 17
Filter Condensers 15 Grille 18

ILLUSTRATIONS
Page Page
RCA Loudspeaker 105 1 Condenser Connections 13
Rear Inside Cabinet View 4 Schematic Circuit for Resistance
Chassis Assembly 5 Measurement 13
Continuity Wiring Diagram 6 Radiotron Socket Contacts and S.P.U.
Schematic Circuit 8 Terminal Strip 15
Power Cable and Receiver Terminal Removing Chassis from Cabinet 16
Strip 9 Removing Output Transformer 17
Centering Cone 11
 Power Reproducer Filter
Transformer Unit Condenser
Assembly
sssr

Receiver Power
Cable

Figure 1-Rear inside view of cabinet, showing

various parts.

4
 RCA LOUDSPEAKER 105
105-125 Volts-50-60 Cycle A.C. Operation

SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
RCA Loudspeaker 105 is a new power reproducer operating on the electro -dynamic
principle of sound reproduction (see Figure 1). It gives faithful reproduction of voice
or music throughout the audible frequency range. Combined with the loudspeaker is a
socket power unit containing a stage of power amplification for the reproducer. "B"
and "C" voltage supply is also provided for the receiver used to drive the loudspeaker.
One UX-250 Radiotron in the power amplifying stage, and two UX-281 Radiotrons, con-
nected in a full wave rectifying circuit, are used.
An RCA Radiola, or a receiver of good quality, used in conjunction with RCA Loud-
speaker 105 will give best results. Under such conditions the quality of the output from
the broadcasting station is the deciding factor in the exactness of the reproduction.
RCA Loudspeaker 105 is designed for operation on alternating current supply of
50-60 cycles, 105-125 volts. Connection to D.C. lines or power supply of different rating
will damage the instrument. The quality of construction used in this loudspeaker ensures
unfailing operation under normal conditions and the simplicity of design makes adjust-
ment or replacement of damaged parts an easy and quick procedure. The present text,
divided into three parts, offers information to those called upon to locate and remedy any
trouble that may occur. Part I deals with proper operation ; Part II-Inoperation, and
Part III details the procedure used in replacing the main units of the instrument.

FILTER

FILTER
CONDENSER
BANK

POWER
TRANSFORMER

POWER
SUPPLY
PLUG

Figure 2-Top view of chassis assembly.

5
 O W
= .rnr iX i n n..l.Innlnll...11r1,nr111.r1...111'Il,l'1,n1,mnr 1,11'.X11,rn1 11 I mml I 111 .11,1'Ir1,1.NnrX1,," '

Ooe
Yi]VYl Oil M11M 'Dill uiimIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIVIIflIINIIIIdIINIIVIIIIIIIUIIIIN%Illllllllllllulllil NIIINIIIIIIIIIIINIIViilllllllll hlm

Of
)lJrle
//Jule
xMOYe
3nle
:Ár
!
lii dmdiUiqumllplUIIIIUUupulid iIUUIII IIpgIIIII1pIgIIII111IdlI811q IIIIIIIIUIgp!lil

M)r1e 39NVY0 P

NMOYi IIINHNNIIiIW iii11111101111ili1111111111100ill6ililnIsid

3n1e
03e- n iiImm'mtnnnXXnXl.pmen"'mw.punnnnlg, nX.11Xr,^'nlnm1,eXl11,nrX'Xn1,1n1111n 'nXlnvrr

0
a NOOtlrW
+

W
7- f,Oá
ñío..v
jJ
ó0
z I-J7W KV
O<Z. a,o
all w
ÑV AC1.
O u.
7-.
50)1

al LIN Y)t1e

W
40
a al

iJril MOl1iA

1 NiiYe
Yi7uY1 M0117A NIIM 11711e
 PART I-OPERATION
[1] LINE SWITCH
A two-way switch is provided for adjustment to power line voltages ranging from 105
to 125 volts. See Figure 2. If it is definitely known that the line voltage is always 115
volts or less the switch may be set at the 110 -volt position. If the line voltage is over 115
volts the switch should be set at the 120 -volt position.
When making an installation it is advisable to measure the power supply with a 0-150
A.C. voltmeter in order to determine the correct setting of the line switch. Disregard of
this precaution may result in damaged Radiotrons or other units, caused by excess voltage.

[2] POTENTIOMETER
A potentiometer is provided for the suppression of A.C. hum. This potentiometer
should be adjusted to the correct electrical center of the filament of Radiotron UX-250
when installing the speaker. After the receiver is connected put the loudspeaker and
receiver into operation and without tuning in a signal adjust the potentiometer to the
position producing minimum hum. If the loudspeaker is changed from one electrical
outlet to another, or the Radiotron UX-250 is replaced, a slight readjustment may be
necessary.

[3] OUTPUT VOLTAGES

RCA Loudspeaker 105 provides plate and grid voltages for practically all receivers
employed to drive it. See Figure 3. A 30 -foot cable (see Figure 1) connected to the
terminal strip of the loudspeaker conducts this voltage supply to the receiver and con-
ducts the output of the receiver to the loudspeaker. The voltages obtained at the loud-
speaker terminal strip are as follows :
-- 3 " C" (to be connected to receivers using 3 to 41/2 volts grid bias)
9 " C" (to be connected to receivers using 9 volts grid bias)
+45 "B" (for detector plate supply)
+67 "B" (for R.F. plate supply)
+90 "B" (for R.F. or A.F. plate supply)
A link is provided between +67 and +90, which provides voltage regulation for
various types and number of tubes.
The following voltages at different current loads are obtained at the 90 -volt tap de-
pending on the position of the link.
Link closed: +90 volts at 10 milliamperes.
Link open : +90 volts at 20 milliamperes or 135 volts at 3 milliamperes.
At the place of connection to the receiver the color scheme of the cable must be used
to identify the voltage of the particular lead. The color scheme is printed on a tag at-
tached to the cable and is as follows :
Brown
(Input (Plate)
(B+) Black with brown tracer
(B+) Amp. (90 -volt) Red
(B+) Amp. (67 -volt) Maroon and Red
(B+) Detector (45 -volt) Maroon
(B-) Black with red tracer
(C-) Amp. (3 -volt) Black and green
(C-) Amp. (9 -volt) Black with green tracer
Correct plate and grid connections must be made to the receiver to secure proper loud-
speaker reproduction.
7
 f4JJ RADIOTRONS
Radiotron UX-250 is used in a stage of transformer coupled amplification and pro-
vides a reserve of power that makes for realistic reproduction at low as well as high vol-
ume up to the maximum requirements of the loudspeaker. The operating condition of this
Radiotron should be compared periodically with one of known quality to ensure proper
loudspeaker reproduction.
Radiotrons UX-281 are connected in a full wave rectifying circuit. The rectified or
pulsating direct current from these tubes is smoothed out by means of the filtering system
into approximately pure D.C. which is used for the plate and grid supply to Radiotron
UX-250 and the Radiotrons used in the receiver. (See Figure 4.)
The loudspeaker Radiotrons are operated well below their maximum output which
ensures stable operation and long life.
OUTPUT
INPUT TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER

UX-281, z
2 MFD

- r-
Q+ 90
4 -LINK
®+ 67 Ux-º5D
+45
4 MFD. I 2 MFD
o 4 MFD.
2 MFD
® 3
120V. UX281
0 9
2 MFD

SHÌELD'

CONE COIL.,
FIELD COIL---
1

GROUND
} .Ytiuti:
TO FRAME

REPRODUCER UNIT -

Figure 4-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA Loudspeaker 105.

[5J CONNECTING LOUDSPEAKER 105 TO RADIOLAS OR
OTHER RECEIVERS
In order to obtain satisfactory operation from Loudspeaker 105 it is important that
the receiver used in connection with it be correctly connected. (See Figure 5.) The cor-
rect placing of the link on the terminal board of the loudspeaker will be determined by
the number of Radiotrons and the plate voltage used in the receiver. It is assumed that
either UX-199, UX-201A, WD -11 or WX-12 Radiotrons are used in the R.F., detector
and A.F. stages. For sets of four tubes or less using only 45 and 90 volts plate supplies,
the link should be closed. For sets using a greater number of tubes or those requiring
67 volts, the link must be left open.
After correctly placing the link the small terminal strip at the end of the 30 -foot
cable is attached to a convenient place either in or on the receiver. Two holes are pro-
vided for two small wood screws to properly hold the strip in place.
8
 If the set is equipped with a first stage jack the input plug at the end of the 30 -foot
cord should be inserted. If no jack or stage change switch is provided an internal con-
nection is made to the first audio stage in the receiver. The following procedure should
be used in making this connection.
(a) Disconnect all connections to the plate contact of the first audio Radiotron socket
and to this contact solder a wire lead long enough to reach the input cord. Remove the
plug from the input cord and connect the brown lead to the plate lead just made. This
connection should be soldered and carefully taped.
(b) Connect the other side of the input cord (black with brown tracer) to the +B
supply for this stage. If the plate supply is taken from the loudspeaker, the connection
is made at the terminal strip on the 30 -foot cable by connecting the +B supply and the
input cord under one screw on the receiver terminal strip. The leads are sufficiently long
for this purpose.

30 FOOT POWER CABLE FROM SOCKET POWER UNIT TO RECEIVER TERMINAL STRIP

BROWN TRACER

;'LINK CLOSED 90 VOLTS AT 10 MILLIAMPERES.

RED 5+ AMP. K LINK OPEN 90 VOLTS AT 20 MILLIAMPERES,
',OR 135 VOLTS AT 3 MILLIAMPERES.
MAROON AND RED
5+ AMP. 67 V. (LINK OPEN)

MAROON B+DET. 45 V.

BLACK AND GREEN

INPUT CAD/
BLACK WITH
GREEN TRACER

CABLE RECEIVER RADIO PLUG' CONNECT TO

DENTIFICATION TAG TERMINAL STRIP OUTPUT OF FIRST AUDIO STAGE

Figure 5-Thirty-foot power cable and receiver terminal strip.

Some receivers (such as Radiola 16) use 135 volts on the plate of the first audio stage.
However, 90 volts with the correct "C" voltage will give sufficient amplification for use
with Loudspeaker 105.
After connecting the input correctly the other connections should be made to the
receiver terminal strip according to the tag attached to the 30 -foot cable. If in doubt
about any voltage, or should the tag be lost, identification may always be made by noting
the color of the lead at the loudspeaker terminal strip. The voltages are engraved on the
terminal strip and the color scheme of connection can be traced through the cable to the
receiver terminal strip.
As the second audio stage in the receiver is not used the tube in this stage is removed,
and the receiver operated with less filament current, which in turn extends the operat-
ing life of the "A" batteries.
After making all connections they should be checked. To put the set in operation turn
on the receiver filament supply first and then pull out the operating switch of the loud-
speaker. Figure 5 shows the receiver terminal strip and the correct connections to be
made to it.
9
 PART II-INOPERATION
f[i]1 RADIOTRONS FAIL TO LIGHT WHEN OPERATING SWITCH
IS "ON"
Should all Radiotrons fail to light when the operating switch is "ON", look for :-
(a) House current switched off, or loose connection at convenience outlet.
(b) Operating switch in loudspeaker not functioning properly.
(c) Line switch not functioning properly.
(d) Damaged power transformer in S.P.U.
(e) Burned -out filaments in Radiotrons.
The remedy for (a) (b) and (c) is apparent. Any external cause (such as D.C. sup-
ply etc.) of (d) and (e) should be located and eliminated before making any replace-
ments.

1121 PLATES OF RADIOTRONS EXCESSIVELY HOT

Should the plates of Radiotrons UX-281 become excessively hot, check the following :
(a) Shorted 4 mfd. filter condenser on high side.
(b) Internal short in power transformer. Test for grounds to shield or to core, or
short from one winding to another.
Should one Radiotron UX-281 become slightly overheated, but not show color and the
other remain apparently normal, replace the one that appears normal. This tube is defec-
tive causing the other one to heat from overload.

11311 NO SIGNAL-RADIOTRONS O.K.

If the Radiotrons appear to be functioning properly and no signals are heard from
the loudspeaker test the radio receiver for operation by using a pair of headphones. If
the receiver is delivering a normal output of good quality, and the loudspeaker is properly
connected, check the following :
(a) Inoperative Radiotrons in loudspeaker. Defects other than filament failures
are not apparent until the tubes are tested. Inoperative Radiotrons UX-281 may
cause low voltages at the terminal strip. Low voltage supply to the receiver will
affect its operation and the input to the loudspeaker will not be normal.
(b) Loose connections in output plug of receiver if used.
(c) Loose connections at output of receiver if plug is not used.
(d) Defective 30 -foot cable.
(e) Open movable coil on cone.
(f) Defective S.P.U. Check by means of continuity test.
(g) Open field coil in reproducer unit. This is indicated by the filaments of the
Radiotrons burning at excess brilliancy.
1141 EXCESSIVE HUM
Excessive hum in the reproducer may be due to any of the following causes :
(a) Potentiometer not properly adjusted. The potentiometer at the back of the
S.P.U. should be adjusted for the point of minimum hum when an installation is
made, or when the loudspeaker is changed from one electrical outlet to another.
Further reduction of hum may sometimes be obtained by reversing the plug con-
tacts at the socket outlet.
(b) Loose laminations in transformer or loose screws in S.P.U. Loose lamina-
tions in the power transformer may be remedied by removing it from the S.P.U.
frame as described in Part III, Section 1, and heating it in a slow oven to soften the
sealing compound sufficiently to seal all laminations in the transformer. The
transformer should be allowed to cool about 24 hours before returning it to the loud -
10
 speaker. Loose screws in the S.P.U. may cause a hum. It is a good plan, when-
ever trouble of this kind is encountered, to tighten all bolts and screws in the
S.P.U.
(c) Power line interference. This can be checked by removing the antenna or
loop and first R.F. Radiotron from the receiver used to drive the loudspeaker. If
the hum disappears it is an indication that the trouble is external to the receiver
and loudspeaker. In this case locate the cause of the trouble and have it corrected
according to local conditions.
(d) Shorted 4 mfd. condenser across bias resistance. This causes distorted repro-
duction and loud hum.
(e) Decreasing emission in Radiotron UX-281 causes a gradual increase of hum.
(f) In some localities an external ground will be found effective in reducing hum.
A ground terminal is provided on the terminal strip of the S.P.U. for this purpose.

Figure 6-Centering cune.

JJ51 DISTORTION IN REPRODUCER UNIT

Distortion in the reproducer unit may be due to any of the following causes :

(a) Poor input to loudspeaker from receiver: Examine the receiver for quality
of output. If output is poor and receiver is using "B" and "C" supply from the
loudspeaker, check for correct voltages. Wrong voltage supply may cause receiver
distortion.
(b) Damaged Radiotron UX-250. Try one known to be in good operating condi-
tion.
(e) Cone out of alignment. Remove grille as explained in Part III, Section 5. and
relocate cone coil by loosening center adjusting screw and shifting position of cone
(Figure 6). The correct position must be found by experiment.
(d) Leads from cone coil broken away from side of cone. Make these fast with a
little shellac.
(e) Defective S.P.U. Test by means of continuity test, Part II. Section 11.
(f) Loose grille, name plate or baffle board. Any loose part in the cabinet will
cause a rattle. Tighten all loose parts.
11
Q6p NO "B" OR "C" VOLTAGE AT TERMINAL STRIP
A zero voltage reading obtained at any of the "B" and "C" supply terminals will
indicate one of the following conditions :
(a) Damaged tapped resistance unit. Determine by continuity test and replace.
(b) Damaged condenser. Across all output voltages there are connected 2 mfd.
condensers. Should one of these be shorted the particular terminals across which
it is connected will give a zero voltage reading. In this case replace the entire con-
denser bank as described in Part III, Section 2.
(c) Open or shorted connections. Determine by continuity test.
(d) A low output voltage reading may be caused by low emission Radiotrons UX-281.

[7J FADING SIGNALS

Fading signals not caused by transmission variations may be caused by :

(a) Damaged Radiotrons-either in the receiver or in the loudspeaker.

(b) Damaged resistance unit. Determine by continuity test and replace. If the
resistance eventually opens normal operation of the receiver and loudspeaker will
be interrupted.

[81 ACOUSTIC HOWL

Acoustic howl is caused by vibration of the elements in the receiver Radiotrons. This
is amplified in the loudspeaker. 'Conditions being favorable the howl may increase in
intensity and drown out the broadcast signal.
Howling may usually be eliminated by interchanging the Radiotrons (especially the
detector) in the receiver or changing the angle of position of the loudspeaker to the re-
ceiver. In extreme cases it may be necessary to increase the distance from the receiver to
the loudspeaker.

11911 FILTER CONDENSER TESTS

The filter condensers in Loudspeaker 105 can be tested by placing a high D.C. voltage
charge on them and noting the retention of the charge. As a high D.C. voltage is rarely
obtainable either in the dealer's shop or in the customer's home the high voltage source in-
corporated in the S.P.U. can be used to make the test as follows :
(a) Remove Radiotron UX-250; disconnect receiver power cable and then remove
S.P.U. from cabinet. Up -end the unit to make the sub -base accessible.
(b) With a hot soldering iron release the black wire from the second lug of re-
sistance unit Rl.
(c) Standing so as not to be in contact with any part of the S.P.U., connect an A.C.
line to the input plug and switch "ON" the current long enough to charge the
condenser. Then turn the current "OFF". Using a well insulated screw-
driver or one having a wooden handle move the black wire lead into contact
with the resistance lug from which it was removed. At the point of contact
there will be a flash. To guard against shock do not come in contact with any of the
condenser leads when making this test. The flash obtained will be an indication
that :all the filter condensers are in good condition, because a defective condenser
prevents charging of any condenser.
(d) If no spark is obtained one of the two 4 mfd. condensers should be released
separately from the circuit (see Figure 7) and the test applied to the one remain-
ing. When the damaged condenser is released a good discharge will be obtained
from the remaining condenser.
This test subjects the condenser to a voltage in excess of the maximum operating volt-
age normally received and a damaged condenser that might pass a click or low voltage
test will be immediately identified.
12
 The 2 mfd. condensers can be tested by measuring the voltage across the resistance
sections across which the condensers are connected with the Radiola in operation. A zero
voltage reading will generally indicate á defective condenser.

1I10J} CHECKING VALUES OF DIFFERENT RESISTANCE UNITS

The following values are correct for the different resistance units used in Loudspeaker
105.
R1-2,976 ohms (Taps at 1,325, 67, 134 and 1,450)
R2-3,675 ohms (Taps at 1,260, 1,415 and 1,000)
R3-4,000 ohms
R4-4,000 ohms

POINTED
....TOWARD
TERMINAL STRIP

ACROSS RESISTANCE
TO BE MEASURED
R=
Ì OR 4000 MILVOLTS
LIAMPERES

'1111F-
6 VOLTS

0-7

0-5

Figure 8-Schematic circuit for resistance

measurement.
SLOT IN
CHASSIS
Figure 7-Filter
condenser
connections.

These resistances should be close to their rated values in order to supply correct plate
and grid voltages to Radiotron UX-250 for best operation.
The following method can be used to check the resistance units in case a resistance
bridge is not available. A milliammeter with a scale of 0-5 and a voltmeter of 0-7 is used
with an applied voltage of approximately 6 volts. Figure 8 shows the hookup. The
readings obtained are sufficiently accurate for checking purposes.
The resistance is calculated by Ohms law.
E (Where R equals ohms, E equals volts 1 or 1,000 Volts
R- Ì and I equals amperes J Milliamperes
Since the current reading is taken in milliamperes (or 10100 ampere) it is neces-
sary to multiply by 1000 to get the resistance value in ohms.
This arrangement with a 0-5 milliammeter must be used for measuring the total re-
sistance of the various units and not for the individual sections. In the latter ease some
of the readings would be beyond the range of the milliammeter. If it is desired to mea-
sure the resistance of the sections between taps a 0-100 milliammeter must be used.
13
 [111 CONTINUITY TESTS
The following tabulated tests cover the wiring continuity of the Socket Power Unit
(see Figure 3). Disconnect the cable from the current supply outlet and all connections
at the terminal strip of the S.P.U. Remove all Radiotrons.
A pair of headphones with at least 41/2 volts in series or a voltmeter with sufficient
voltage to give full scale deflection when connected directly across the battery terminals
should be used in making these tests.

LOUDSPEAKER 105 CONTINUITY TEST

Remove all Radiotrons and connections to terminal strip. Radiotron socket reference numbers
used are counted from left to right facing rear of loudspeaker. Reference letter P refers to plate and G to
grid. See Figure 9.

Circuit Terminals Correct Incorrect Effect Caused by

Effect

P 1 to P 2 Closed Open high voltage winding of power trans-

former or connections
Across filament socket No. 1 Closed Open UX-281 filament winding or connections
Power trans- Across filament socket No. 2 Closed Open UX-281 filament winding or connections
former Across filament socket No. 3 Closed Open UX-250 filament winding
Across A. C. input plug Closed Open primary of power transformer. Try at
both positions of power line adjusting
switch. If open at either position check
transformer without switch in circuit
Input trans- G3 to -9 Closed Open secondary of input transformer
former Across input terminals Closed Open primary of input transformer
P3 to +90 Closed Open primary of output transformer; open
reactor, or resistance units R2, R3 or R4
Output trans- Disconnect cone coil leads and Closed Open secondary of output transformer
former test across terminals
Across cone coil leads Closed Open cone coil
Cone coil One side of cone coil terminal Closed Open ground connection
to ground
Resistance -9 to +90 Closed Open resistance units Rl and R2
units
P1 or P2 to -9 Closed Open % high voltage winding of power trans-
form'er or pot magnet field winding
Miscella- Pl or P2 to either filament Closed Open % high voltage winding of power trans-
neous socket No. 3 former, open pot magnet field winding or
open resistance unit Rl
G3 to either filament socket Closed Open secondary of input transformer, tapped
No. 3 resistance unit or potentiometer

14
 POTENTIOMETER
KNOB ' .A.C.POWER LINE
NOV.CONNECTION'

Figure 9-Location of Radiotron socket contacts and socket power unit

binding posts.

PART III -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

The work involved in replacing any unit in RCA Loudspeaker 105 is rather simple
because all parts are fastened by screws and nuts. When replacing any of the units fast-
ened to the chassis it is first necessary to remove the chassis assembly from the cabinet
(see Figure 10). As a precaution against possible shock by contact with leads from the
high voltage condensers in case a charge has been stored up due to an open resistance
unit, filter reactor or reproducer field coil, it is advisable to make certain that the con-
densers are discharged by connecting a short lead of insulated wire from terminal -9 (on
the S.P.U. terminal strip) successively to the plate contacts of all three Radiotrons, first
removing all tubes. The chassis is quite heavy and care must be exercised in handling it.
Provide a bench or table in advance to hold the unit when removed from cabinet.

{[1] REPLACING POWER TRANSFORMER, INPUT TRANS-

FORMER AND FILTER REACTOR
The power transformer, input transformer and filter reactor are each held in place by
four machine screws, lock washers and nuts. Replacements are made in the following
manner :

(a) Remove the bolts underneath cabinet that hold the loudspeaker assembly and
disconnect cable at S.P.U. terminal strip.
(b) Carefully remove assembly to a place convenient for working.
(c) Unsolder the wires in the sub -chassis assembly connecting the unit it is de-
sired to replace.
(d) ,,Remove the four screws and nuts that hold the unit to the metal base. Loosen
the nuts first, with a pair of pliers or socket wrench. It may now be removed and
the new one placed in the position occupied by the old one. Fasten the new unit
to the metal base with the old screws and nuts.
(e) Solder the proper wire connections to the new unit. The color scheme is shown
in Figure 3.
(f) Replace loudspeaker assembly in cabinet in reverse order of that used to re-
move it.

{[2] REPLACING FILTER CONDENSER ASSEMBLY

The filter condenser assembly consists of a number of condensers all contained in a
metal ease. A defect in any of the condensers will necessitate a replacement of the entire
condenser assembly. When making a replacement proceed as follows :
(a) Remove loudspeaker assembly from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1,
(b) Unsolder and remove all connections to the condenser lugs. These are located
between the resistance units on the sub -chassis.
(e) Remove the six machine screws, nuts and lock washers which hold the con -
15
 denser assembly to the metal base. The condenser unit may now be removed and
the new one placed in the position occupied by the old one. The correct position
of the unit is easily determined by pointing terminal No. 1 toward the S.P.U.
terminal strip. The condenser terminals are numbered from 1 to 9.
(d) Fasten the new unit to the base with the screws, nuts and lock washers re-
moved from the old unit.
(e) Resolder the wire connections to the lugs on the new bank. The diagram
shown in Figure 3 illustrates the correct color scheme of these connections.
(f) Replace loudspeaker assembly in cabinet in the reverse order of that used to
remove it.

Figure 10-Removing chassis assembly from cabinet.

in REPLACING OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

The output transformer is located directly under the reproducer unit. If replace-
ment becomes necessary proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the loudspeaker assembly from the cabinet as described in Part III,
Section 1.
(b) Turn chassis up on end and unsolder the two field coil leads of the reproducer
unit. Tag the connections so that later they may be returned to their correct posi-
tion.
(e) Disconnect the two leads to the cone coil terminals.
(d) Now remove the four hex head machine screws that hold the reproducer unit
in place. The reproducer may now be lifted clear and the output transformer
exposed to view. (See Figure 11.)
(e) Unsolder the four wires connected to the output transformer terminals in the sub -
chassis. Tag these wires correctly for re -connection.
(f) Remove the four screws, nuts and lock washers that hold the output trans-
former to the chassis (see Figure 11) . The transformer may now be removed and
the new one placed in the position occupied by the old one.
16
 (g) Replace parts in the reverse order of that used to remove them. The terminals
and leads should be connected and soldered as indicated on the tags, or as shown in
the continuity wiring diagram Figure 3.
(h) Return the entire loudspeaker assembly to the cabinet and fasten securely.

(411 REPLACING CONE

To replace a cone on the reproducer unit proceed as follows:
(a) Remove chassis assembly from cabinet as described in Part III, Section 1.
(b) Release the two cone coil connections from their terminals so that they hang
free.

Figure 11-Removing output transformer.

(e) Remove the felt ring glued to the metal clamping ring holding the cone. This
must be done carefully to prevent tearing the felt.
(d) Remove the screw used to center the cone on the pole piece.
(e) Remove the six machine screws holding the clamping ring. On release of this
ring the cone may be removed. The new cone should be placed in the position oc-
cupied by the old one and the cone coil centered in the air gap of the pot magnet.
The ring holding the edge of the cone in place should be returned to its original
position and the six machine screws replaced. Glue the felt ring on the metal ring
and return chassis to cabinet.
(f) Remove grille (see Part III, Section 5), loosen center cone screw and adjust
the position of the cone coil until there is no rattle or distortion with the loud-
speaker operating at maximum volume. After this adjustment the center cone screw
is tightened and the grille replaced.

1[51 REPLACING GRILLE

To replace a grille proceed as follows :
(a) Open rear door and remove the two wood screws that hold the front grille.
These screws are located in the top section of the baffle board inside the cabinet.
(b) Remove the grille by pulling it from the top and then lifting it clear of the
cabinet.
(c) The new grille is placed in the position occupied by the old one and the two
wood screws replaced.
17
$611 REPLACING RESISTANCE UNIT
Should it be necessary to replace a resistance unit proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the chassis assembly from the cabinet as described in Part III, Sec-
tion 1.
(b) Turn chassis on end and unsolder the connections to the resistance unit it is
desired to replace.
(e) Remove the nuts that hold the brackets at each end of the resistance unit
and remove the resistance unit with brackets attached.
(d) With a pair of pliers, hold the flat end of the rod running through the center
of the resistance unit, and with another pair of pliers remove the nut at the other
end of the rod.
(e) Remove the rod from the resistance unit. Replace the old resistance unit with a
new one and return the rod and brackets to their original positions in the reverse
order of that used to remove them.
(f) Tighten all screws and solder the wire connections to the resistance unit in their
correct positions as indicated in Figure 3.
(g) Return the chassis assembly to the cabinet in the reverse order of that used to
remove it.

18
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak signals,
poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for damaged tubes. If
imperfect operation is not due to damaged tubes the "Service Data Chart" should be consulted for
further detailed causes.

SEE SERVICE NOTES

Indication Cause Remedy
Part Section

House current not "On" Turn house current "On" . . II 1

Defective operating switch Repair or replace operating . .

No signals
Defective
Defective
cord to S. P. U. .
receiver .
switch
Repair or replace cord
Check and repair if necessary
. .
.

.
. . . -IIII -1

3
Defective S P U Check by continuity and repair
or replace II 11
Defective pot magnet or open Check for continuity and repair
cone coil or replace II 3
Defective cable to receiver . . Check and repair or replace de-
fective cable . . . . . II 3

Weak sig-
Receiver in shielded locality
Defective S. P. U. assembly
.

.
Use outdoor antenna
Check S. P. U. continuity and
- -
nals repair or replace defect . . II 11
Defective receiver . . . . Check receiver and repair or
replace defect . . . . . - -
Poor input from receiver . Check receiver . . . II 5
Poor Cone of Reproducer unit not Center cone of Reproducer or
Quality centered properly . replace cone . . . . . . II 5
Wires loose on side of cone Fasten wires with shellac . . . . II 5

Noisy or Dirty Radiotron prongs . . Clean Radiotron prongs . . . -- --

Intermit-
tent
Reception
Loose connections in receiver
Sprung socket contacts . .
.

.
Check receiver .

Bend socket contacts correctly.

. . . .

- -
Microphonic Radiotrons (espe-
Howling cially detector) in receiver. Interchange Radiotrons . . II 8
Receiver too close to loud- Increase distance from receiver
speaker to loudspeaker . . . . II 8

Potentiometer not properly ad- Adjust potentiometer for mini-

justed mum hum . . . . . . II 4
Loose laminations in power Heat transformer in slow oven
transformer or loose screws or tighten any loose screws . . . II 4
Power line interference . Check receiver with antenna
. .

disconnected and if outside in-

terference remedy trouble at
source . . . . . . . II 4
Hum Shorted 4 mfd. condenser across
bias resistor Check and replace . . . . II 4
Low emission Radiotrons UX-
281 Test and replace . . . II 4
Ground connection not made on Connect ground terminal of
loudspeaker . . loudspeaker to cold water
. . .

pipe or other good ground . II 4

Printed in U. S. A. 1928
 RCA
Loudspeaker 106
SERVICE NOTES

RCA LOUDSPEAKER 106

Regular Edition -30M

Copyright January, 1929

Radio Corporation of America

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.
Bldg. No. 19-168 -88th St. 2001 WestPershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEXAS ATLANTA, GA.
Santa Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2 Monroe Bonded Warehouse, Spring and Peters Ste.
 PREFACE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Author-
ized Dealer renders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper
installation and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by
reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker
and Radiola owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service
organizations having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the
design and operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and
RCA Authorized Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement
to their selected Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and elec-
trical adjustments may be undertaken by the RCA Dealer.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business
the RCA Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which
this booklet is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in
servicing RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers
and Distributors' service problems and presents the best practice in dealing
with them. A careful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value,
and it is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes, the RCA Service Division
maintains a corps of engineers who are qualified to render valuable help in solv-
ing service problems. These engineers call upon the trade at frequent intervals
to advise and assist RCA Distributors in the performance of service work.

Property of the Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its
Authorized Distributors and Dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1929-Radio Corporation of America

 CONTENTS
Page
A Word or Two About Service 2
Introduction . 5
Service Data Chart 12

PART I-INSTALLATION
Assembly 5

PART II -SERVICE DATA

Receiver Output 6
No Output 7

Weak Signals 7

Distorted or Noisy Signals 7

Hum . 8
Centering Cone 8

PART III-ELECTRICAL TESTS

Testing Rectifier 9
Testing Output Transformer º
Testing Cone and Field Coil 10

Testing Line Condensers 10

PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Replacing Parts in Reproducer .. 11

Replacing Grille Cloth 11

RCA Loudspeaker 106 Replacement Parts 11

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Loudspeaker 106 1

Rear Interior View 4

Schematic Diagram 6
Wiring Diagram 7

Centering Cone 8
Removing Baffle º
Baffle Plate Partly Removed 10

8
 REPRODUCER UNIT DISC RECTIFIER

FIELD OUTPUT
MAGNET TRANSFORMER

RECEIVER OUTPUT CORD-' '-A.C. INPUT CORD

Figure 1-Rear i-ntrrior view of Loudspeaker 106
 RCA LOUDSPEAKER 106
(105-125 Volts. 25-60 Cycle A. C.)

SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division

INTRODUCTION
RCA Loudspeaker 106 is a reproducing device operating on the electro-dynamic
principle and is designed for use with any radio receiver having a power output tube or
using an external power amplifier. The entire mechanism is mounted in an artistic cabinet
having a large baffle area and an open back. Both of these features contribute materially
to the quality of reproduction that is an inherent characteristic of Loudspeaker 106.
The dynamic speaker mechanism consists of an eight -inch corrugated cone, similar to
that used in Radiolas 62 and 64, a new type field magnet, a full wave disc rectifier, an
output transformer, and two .1 mfd. line condensers. A receptacle is also provided at the
rear of the cabinet for connecting the A. C. input current to the receiver used with the
Loudspeaker, or any accessories requiring A. C. current for their operation in conjunction
with the Loudspeaker. Thus the Loudspeaker operating switch provides complete control
over the entire radio installation-a very useful and convenient feature.
Loudspeaker 106 is also made in a model adapted to D. C. operation. This model is
similar to the A. C. model except that a higher resistance field is used and no rectifiers
nor .1 mfd. line condensers are used. Because of this slight difference the present Service
Notes apply equally well to the D. C. models.

PART I-INSTALLATION
The following instructions should be observed when installing Loudspeaker 106.
Damage to the speaker will result if improperly installed when operation is attempted.

[1] ASSEMBLY
(a) Remove the cabinet from the shipping container and place it front down on a rug
or other soft material. Remove the two screws that hold the back cover in place
and remove the back cover.
(b) Place the mechanism assembly in position on the front baffle board as indicated
in Figure 1 (output transformer toward the legs). Place the four mounting
screws in place and screw down tightly.
(c) Connect the receiver output leads, the cord that has phone tips, to the two
terminals located on the lower side of the reproducer unit. See Figure 1.
(d) Connect the leads from the top of the cabinet (A.C. input leads) to the two
center connections of the disc rectifiers taking care not to allow the wires already
connected to these terminals to become disconnected. Do not connect these leads
to the two terminals at the top of the frame because it will cause inimediate burn-
out of the cone coil and output transformer and may possibly cause other damage
when the current is switched "on."
(e) Return the back to the cabinet, allo wing the input leads and power cord to fall
through the opening in the bottom of the cabinet.
(f) Connect the A. C. input cord of the receiver, or other device, to be operated
simultaneously with the Loudspeaker to the auxiliary receptacle at the back of
the Loudspeaker cabinet. If more than one outlet is necessary a two-way plug
may be used.
6
 (g) Connect the two phone tips of the speaker cord to the output from the receiver.
Never put the phone tips into the auxiliary receptacle openings.
The operating switches on the receiver and power devices in the installation are left
permanently "on" and the installation is controlled by the operating switch in the
Loudspeaker.
Should the receiver use a battery for filament supply the receiver filament switch will
also have to be operated in addition to the Loudspeaker operating switch.
A trickle charger and storage battery should not be connected to the auxiliary
receptacle, but should be connected to a separate supply outlet and operated according
to instructions accompanying the device.
If the receiver is entirely battery operated the auxiliary receptacle is not used.

105-125 V
GROUND TO
FRAME
T .1 MFD.

25-60^A.C.
-`-
T 1 MFD.

OPERATING DISC RECTIFIER-'

SWITCH

1 FIELD COIL -
TO AUXILIARY
RECEPTACLE
¡JXtiti
h

CONE,
COIL'

c,D
TO OUTPUT
OF RECEIVER
OUTPUT
TRANSFORMER
-----0\ /Cb 1 GROUND TO
FRAME

Figure 2-Schematic wiring diagram of Loudspeaker 106

PART II -SERVICE DATA

The service problems of Loudspeaker 106 deal with conditions evidenced by no repro-
duction, weak reproduction and distorted or noisy reproduction. These conditions and
their attending causes, while not common to Loudspeaker 106, are explained and remedies
noted so that service men may be provided with helpful information in any service work
that may be required. Figure 2 illustrates the schematic circuit diagram which will be
found useful in connection with service work.

[ 1 ] RECEIVER OUTPUT
Before inspecting the Loudspeaker for the cause of any imperfect operation first check
the receiver output with a pair of head phones or another loudspeaker known to be in
good operating condition. Any distortion in the receiver will be faithfully reproduced in
the loudspeaker and corrective remedies must be applied to the receiver. However, if a
signal of good quality and volume is being delivered by the receiver, the Loudspeaker must
be examined for the trouble experienced.
6
[2] NO OUTPUT
If the receiver output is O.K. and no reproduction is delivered by the Loudspeaker
look for :
(a) Open winding of output transformer.
(b) Shorted connections to output transformer.
(e) Open cone coil.
(d) Shorted or grounded cone coil.
(e) Defective input cord or faulty connections, either at receiver or loudspeaker.
FROM CONE COIL',

CONNECT OTHER
CONNECT ONE 110 VOLT A. C.
110 VOLT A.C. LEAD TO THIS
LEAD TO THIS POINT
POINT'-.,

-_,DISC
DISC --- RECTIFIER
RECTIFIER

TO OUTPUT
OF RECEIVER
OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

Figure 3-Wiring diagram of reproducer unit

[3] WEAK SIGNALS
Should weak signals be experienced check the following:
(a) Open or shorted field coil. A short my be experienced at the point where the
leads enter the field magnet housing.
(b) Defective disc rectifier. A defective rectifier-not supplying field current-will
cause weak reproduction. This will generally be accompanied by a loud hum.
Sometimes the fuses in the A. C. line will blow.
(c) Defective connections to rectifier or to field, or a defective operating switch.
Check all connections carefully against the wiring diagram Figure 3.

[4] DISTORTED OR NOISY REPRODUCTION

Distortion or noise may be caused by any of the following conditions:
(a) Cone out of alignment. Remove reproducer unit as explained in Part IV, Sec-
tion 1. Then center the cone as described in Part II, Section 6.
(b) Leads from cone coil broken away from side of cone. Remove reproducer assembly
as described in Part IV, Section 1, and fasten the leads to the side of the cone with
a little shellac.
7
 (c) Loose name plate, rear panel or any cabinet parts will cause a rattle at certain
frequencies. Tighten all loose parts.
(d) Open or shorted line condensers. Defective line condensers may allow the re-
ceiver to be affected by R. F. noise originating in the disc rectifiers. If both line
condensers should become shorted, the fuses in the A. C. line will probably blow.

[5] HUM
Excess hum and faulty operation may be caused by defective disc rectifiers. This
may be checked by measuring the voltage across the terminals of the field leads. With
the field connected it should be about 80 volts and with the field disconnected about 95

Figure 4-Centering cone

volts. The receiver should also be checked for excessive hum. A receiver that will operate
satisfactorily with a magnetic type of Loudspeaker may have an excessive amount of hum
when operated with a dynamic speaker. This is due to the greater low frequency response
of the dynamic speaker compared with the magnetic. When this condition exists the
remedy must be applied to the receiver, not the Loudspeaker.
[6] CENTERING REPRODUCER CONE
To properly center a new cone or one out of center use the following procedure :
(a) Remove the reproducer assembly from the cabinet as described in Part IV,
Section 1.
(b) Loosen center screw of cone, but do not remove it.
(c) Insert three cardboard strips, about the thickness of a visiting card, 11/2 inches by
1/4 inch in size, through the center spider of the cone into the space between the

pole piece and cone coil. This will give the cone coil the same clearance on all
sides of the pole piece.
(d) Tighten the center screw (Figure 4) holding the spider of the cone and remove
the three strips. The cone is now properly centered. Replace the reproducer
assembly in the cabinet in the reverse manner of that used to remove it.
8
 PART III -ELECTRICAL TESTS
The following tests give complete check on the circuits of Loudspeaker 106 and should
be referred to whenever the functioning of the speaker is faulty in order to locate the
cause.

[1] TESTING THE DISC RECTIFIER

The disc rectifier may be checked by measuring the output voltage that is delivered
to the field of the reproducer unit. This should be approximately SO volts with the field
connected; with the field disconnected it should rise slightly to about 95 volts.

Figure 5-Removing baffle plate

Precaution-The operation of the disc rectifier depends on the pressure with
which the discs areheld. Do not loosen the bolts that hold them together as it
is highly improbable they can be returned to normal operation without special
instruments. Should replacement become necessary, remove the bracket and the
unit together. The replacement part is supplied with brackets so that replace-
ment is comparatively easy.

[2] TESTING OUTPUT TRANSFORMER

The primary of the output transformer should be tested for continuity by click testing
from the phone tips that connect to the receiver output terminals. While testing shake
the cord so that any intermittent opens may be disclosed. If this tests O.K. remove the cord
9
from the two terminals and then test the cord for a short by shaking. After testing the
cord test from terminal to terminal at the cord connections on the reproducer frame. This
should test closed. Then test from each terminal to ground. The primary should not be
grounded. The secondary winding of the transformer should then be tested by removing
the two leads from the cone coil and testing from terminal to terminal. This should test
closed. Then test from each terminal to ground. One side of the secondary is grounded
so a click will be obtained when either of the terminals are tested to ground.
Disconnect the transformer leads from their terminals and check to determine that only
one terminal is grounded. If both are grounded to frame one should be re -insulated with
new insulating washers.

Figure 6 --Baffle plate partly removed

[3] TESTING CONE AND FIELD COIL

Disconnect the two cone coil leads from their terminals on the reproducer frame and
test from terminal to terminal. It should test closed. Then test to ground. It should not
be grounded.
The two field coil leads should be disconnected from the rectifier and a test made from
lead to lead. It should test closed. The field coil is not grounded.

[4] TESTING LINE CONDENSERS

The two line condensers may be tested by releasing their two outside leads (Figure 3)
and testing from each lead to frame. They should test open. A shorted condenser will
necessitate a replacement of the whole unit including the output transformer.
After all testing is completed and the necessary repairs are made, all wiring should be
returned to its proper place as indicated in Figure 3.
10
 PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS
The reproducer assembly and cabinet parts in Loudspeaker 106 are easily accessible
and replacements can be made readily. The following procedure outlines the methods to
be used when making replacements.

[1] REPLACING PARTS IN REPRODUCER ASSEMBLY

To replace a part in the reproducer assembly proceed as follows :
(a) Remove rear panel by unscrewing the two wood screws that hold it in place and
lift the panel clear.
(b) Disconnect the A. C. input connections to the disc rectifier, having previously
removed the A. C. input plug from the supply outlet.
(c) Disconnect the receiver output leads at their terminals on the reproducer frame.
(d) Remove the four bolts that hold the reproducer assembly to the baffle board. It
may now be lifted clear and placed in a position convenient for work. After the
necessary repairs or replacements are made, it should be returned in the reverse
manner of that used to remove it.

[2] REPLACING GRILLE CLOTH

The grille cloth used in Loudspeaker 106 is supplied in one piece consisting of the front
and two sides stitched together. Should replacement become necessary proceed as follows :
(a) Remove rear cover by removing two wood screws and lifting clear.
(b) Remove all connections to reproducer assembly and release the A. C. input cable
from the sides of the cabinet. Then release the operating switch and the auxiliary
receptacle and pull cable, switch and receptacle through opening in bottom of
cabinet.
(e) Remove the eighteen wood screws (Figure 5) that hold the baffle and side pieces
to the cabinet frame. The frame may now be pulled through the rear opening
(Figure 6). The grille cloth is held in place by means of tacks. Remove the tacks
and grille cloth and stretch the new cloth in place. Replace the tacks.
(d) The cabinet is then reassembled in the reverse manner of that used to disassemble
it and the Loudspeaker is returned to normal operation.

[3] RCA LOUDSPEAKER 106 REPLACEMENT PARTS

No. Description No. Description
5895 Tapestry-Grille Cloth-Comprising front 9248 Magnet complete-Comprising field coil,
and side pieces stitched together. core, coil case, two end plates, cone sup-
port, paper washers, four machine bolts
2361 Output Cable--From receiver to loudspeaker. with nuts and one cap screw.
5 896 Power Cable-From socket outlet to operat- 5980 Field Coil (D. C. Model).
ing switch, power receptacle and disc 5981 Transformer-Output Transformer (D. C.
rectifier.
2015 Switch-Line operating switch.
5898 Rectifier Stack.
Model).
5982 Terminal Strip Assembly - Comprising
metal bracket with insulating bushings
5899 -
Transformer Comprising output trans-
former and two capacitors mounted in
inserted, dilecto strips top and bottom,
terminal screws with nuts and washers-
completely assembled (D. C. Model).
metal container. 9276 Magnet completo with Cone Support-Com-
8375 Cone -8" Corrugated paper cone. prising two end plates, coil caning, core,
field roil, damping washer, come support,
8376 Ring-Metal clamping ring for holding cone. paper washers, four machine belts with
8390 Ring-Cardboard seal ring-Package of 10. lock washers and nuts and one cap screw
for holding core -completely assembled
8391 Coil-Field Coil. (D. C. Model).
11
 SERVICE DATA CHART
The following table of information provides a handy reference when servic-
ing Loudspeaker 106 and a working knowledge of it will enable service men to
handle service problems readily and efficiently. Reference to Part No. and Sec-
tion No. in the "Service Notes" is noted for detailed information.

Indication Cause Remedy

No output from receiver Examine receiver, Part II, Sec. 1

Defective cone coil Replace cone

No
Reproduc-
Defective output trans-
Replace output transformer
former
tion
Defective cord Repair or replace cord, Part III, Sec. 2
Loose or broken connections Repair connections, Part III, Sec. 2

Weak receiver output Examine receiver, Part II, Sec. 1

Improperly centered cone Center cone correctly, Part II, Sec. 6
Weak
Reproduc- Open field coil Replace field coil, Part III, Sec. 3
tion Defective rectifier Replace rectifier, Part III, Sec. 1

Faulty connections Repair connections, Part II, Sec. 3

Distorted output from re- Examine receiver, Part II, Sec. 1

ceiver
Distorted Improperly centered cone Adjust cone correctly, Part II, Sec. 6
or noisy Cone leads broken from Fasten loose leads with shellac, Part II, See. 4
Reproduc- side of cone
tion Open or shorted line con- Replace defective condensers, Part II, Sec. 4
(Rattle) densers
Loose parts in cabinet as- Tighten all loose parts or nuts, Part II, See. 4
sembly

Faulty receiver output Check receiver output for hum and make re -
Hum pairs necessary, Part II, Sec. 5
Defective disc rectifier Replace defective rectifier, Part III, Sec. 1

Printed in U. S. A.
 RCA
Power Amplifier
(UNI-RECTRON-MODEL AP -935)

SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-SM-June, 1928

RCA UniRerlron-Model AP -93.5

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed itadiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of the RCA
has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing technical
information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.
This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America.

 RCA POWER AMPLIFIER
(UNI-RECTRON-MODEL AP -935)

SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION
INTRODUCTION
RCA Uni-Rectron, Model AP -935, is a power amplifier unit containing suitable
rectifying devices for operation from an alternating current house lighting circuit rated
at 110-120 volts, 50 to 60 cycles. No attempt should be made to operate it from a
direct current circuit or from an alternating current source of voltage or frequency
other than specified. Such misuse may result in serious damage to the Uni-Rectron.
There is one Radiotron UX-210 and one Rectron UX-216B employed in the Uni-
Rectron. The Rectron UX-216B converts or rectifies the alternating current supply
to pulsating direct current which is smoothed out by the filter system and used as plate
current by the power amplifier, Radiotron UX-210. The new RCA Radiotron UX-281
is interchangeable with Rectron UX-216B in the RCA Power Amplifier, and has the
advantage of increased operating life.
PROTECTIVE SEALS AND THEIR USE
The lead seals placed on Uni-Rectrons by the RCA hre for the protection of the
dealer. Broken seals indicate tampering.
A service man may find it necessary to break the seals in order to make repairs.
In such instances he should replace those broken by suitable substitute seals when the
repair work is finished. Thus he is aided in determining whether any trouble that may
develop later is due to tampering or ordinary wear and tear of assembled parts. The
unit that has been tampered with will be indicated by a broken seal. This informa-
tion places the dealer in a preferred position when it is found necessary to render a bill
for service.
SERVICE DATA
Place Rectron UX-216B and Radiotron UX-210 in their respective sockets and see
that they are firmly seated. Having ascertained that the lighting circuit is of alternating
current of the proper voltage and frequency, insert plug in socket and pull Uni-Rectron
switch to "on" position. Both tubes should light.
(1) IF NEITHER TUBE LIGHTS
Look for:
(a) Blown fuse in lighting circuit (check voltage of outlet socket used with a test
lamp) .
(b) Loose plug in lighting socket.
(c) Operating switch on Uni-Rectron not making proper contact.
(d) Open in power supply cord.
(e) Defective Radiotron or Rectron.
(f) Open in transformer. (Run continuity test.)
The remedies for the above conditions are obvious, but in the event that trouble still
exists check the voltage and frequency of the house lighting current. If these are correct
run the complete continuity test shown on pages 7 and 8 to isolate the trouble.
3
(2) IF ONE TUBE LIGHTS AND OTHER DOES NOT
Look for:
(a) Open in filament winding of power transformer.
(b) Open in connections at filament contacts of socket.
(c) Defective Rectron or Radiotron.
(3) EXCESSIVE HUM IN OPERATION
May be due to:
(a) Defective Rectron UX-216B.
(b) Ground terminal not connected.
(c) Ground connections in Uni-Rectron open. (Check diagram and continuity for
grounds.)
(d) Connections in plug to A.C. line reversed. (Try reversing, plug.)
(e) Loose laminations in power transformer or choke. (This is generally accom-
panied by a. physical vibration.)
Any loose items such as clamps, nuts, screws, bolts and transformer laminations may
cause a serious hum in operation. These should all be gone over carefully and tightened
where necessary, paying particular attention to the nuts, bolts and clamps holding the
transformer and choke coils.
(4) DECREASED LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME
May be caused by:
(a) Defective loudspeaker. Check speaker on radio receiver known to be operat-
ing satisfactorily.

FILTER CMOKE OUTPUT TRANSFORMER FILTER (CONDENSERS

POWER TRANSFORMER
rl

RESISTANCE UNITS INPUT TRFWSroaMER

Figure 1

Rear view of Uni-Rectron with cover removed showing location of various parts
4
 (b) Weak signals from radio receiver. Check output with pair of phones.
(c) Defective Radiotron UX-210 or Rectron UX-216B. (Defective Rectron
UX-216B may cause low plate voltage which in turn would cause decrease
of loudspeaker output.)
(d) Defective input or output transformer. (Check continuity, including grounds
to core.)
(e) Low plate voltage. Measure with high resistance type of voltmeter.
(f) Defective transformer windings. High voltage secondary having shorted turns.
(5) MAGNETIC PULL TESTS FOR ISOLATING TROUBLE
These tests are made by holding a steel screw driver in proximity to the iron core
of the choke coil and noting the degree of magnetic pull together with the condition of
the plate of the Rectron UX-216B. (See Figure 3.)
Magnetic Pull Color of Plate Defect
(a) Excessive Dull red 31/, Mfd. condenser No. 2
shorted.
(b) None White hot 31/2 Mfd. condenser No. 1
shorted.
(c) None Normal Defective power transformer
or open choke.
(d) Excessive Normal Shorted elements in Radio-
tron UX-210.

Figure 2
ni-Rectron-Front view with cover removed
5
 Figure 3
Location of screw driver for Magnetic Pull Test

(6) IF FILAMENTS OF RECTRON UX-216B AND RADIOTRON

UX-210 LIGHT EXCESSIVELY BRIGHT
Look for:
(a) Shorted turns in primary of power transformer.
(b) Alternating current supply of excessive voltage.
(c) Open plate winding of power transformer.

(7) PLATE OF RECTRON UX-216B TURNS RED

Look for:
(a) Shorted 31 Mfd. condenser. This condition would be indicated by an exces-
sive pull on the choke. To further isolate this trouble, run Magnetic Pull
Test given in Section 5.
(b) Short in power transformer secondary windings.
(c) Shorted Radiotron UX-210. Tube will become hot, but will not necessarily
show color.
6
(8) COMPLETE CONTINUITY TEST
(Use Phones in series with a 41'2 volt "C" battery.)
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
1 to 2 Click through primary of Open primary input trans-
input transformer former
4 to 5 Click through secondary Open secondary output trans-
of output transformer former
4 to 3 Click through connections Open lead
4 to ground Click through connections Open lead
Use Voltmeter with Battery voltage sufficient to give full scale
deflection when connected directly across battery terminals.
Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
Pl to P2 Small scale deflection Open high voltage winding of
transformer. Open resistance
unit or primary of output
transformer

UR 21sB U%¡210

110 VOLT
PLUG

,00000

INPUT ® OUTPUT C-.

SWITCH

RADIO CORP. OF AMERICA

NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION
233 BROADWAY, N. Y. C.
CONTINUITY DIAGRAM
AP -935
DwII. No. NS -UR -ID I Dato S15=25
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
AP -93S Own By Jo. I CkO.By APPa. By aj.a.

Figure 4
Continuity diagram RCA Uni-Rectran
 Terminals Correct Effect Incorrect Effect Caused by
-11 to -i-F1 Full scale deflection Open filament winding of power
transformer
P1 to G2 Small deflection Open (high voltage winding of
transformer) (secondary of
input transformer)
P2 to -F2 or +F2 Half deflection Open (primary output trans-
former) (resistance unit)
(filament winding)
Pl to -F1 or -}-F1 Small deflection Open (choke) (filament wind-
ing) (resistance unit) (plate
winding)
Ground to -F2 No deflection Shorted condenser No. 4

The test points referred to are shown in the Continuity Diagram, Figure 4. The
designations "P" and "G" refer to the plate and grid socket contacts. The number
immediately following refers to the first or second socket. For example G2 indicates the
grid contact of the second socket. Pl indicates the plate contact of the first socket. In
the same manner the letter "F" denotes the filament contact of the tube socket indicated
by the number.

(9) RESISTANCE UNIT TESTS

The tests given in Sections 5 and 8 cover every circuit and winding of the Uni-
Rectron and will, in practically all cases, isolate trouble to a certain unit or condenser
without removing cover or breaking seals. However, it will be necessary to remove the
cover in order to replace a defective part. With the cover removed the following tests
may also be made:
After the Uni-Rectron has been in operation for some time the normal temperature
of the resistance units should be as follows:
No. 1-Warm.
No. 2-Warm.
No. 3-Quite hot.
If No. 1 or No. 2 run excessively hot it is a positive indication of trouble, likewise
a lack of heat will indicate an open in the adjacent circuits. The continuity tests
should be made to isolate the trouble provided it is not apparent at sight. If trouble
has previously been isolated to these resistances they may be clicked for opens at their
respective terminal lugs. It will be noted in the case of No. 3 that only a small part of
the resistance is in use.
The condensers may also be individually tested for shorts by using the voltmeter
and battery. A full scale deflection in any case will be an indication of a shorted con-
denser. A partial deflection will be an indication of normal operation of condenser No.
1 and No. 2 as these are shunted by resistances. Condenser No. 2 will cause a greater
deflection than No. 1. Before testing the condensers discharge any voltage by short
circuiting them with a steel screw driver.
8

Printed in U.S.A.-1928.
 RCA
"B" Battery Eliminator
(DUO-RECTRON--MODEL AP -937)

SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-5M-June, 1928

RCA Duo-Rectron-Model AP -937

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service at
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent service
and repair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers and
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation of
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of the RCA
has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing technical
information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading of these Service
Notes will establish their value to Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
for ready reference.

In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations, has
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be used only by its

authorized distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection :frith its apparatus.

Copyright 1926-Radio Corporation of America.

 RCA "B" BATTERY ELIMINATOR
(DUO-RECTRON-MODEL AP -937)

SERVICE NOTES
PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

INTRODUCTION
The RCA Duo-Rectron or "B" Battery Eliminator is a rectifier unit which will
operate from an alternating current house lighting circuit rated at 110-125 volts, 50
to 60 cycles. No attempt should be made to operate it from a direct current circuit
or from an alternating current source of a voltage or frequency different from that
specified above. Such misuse may result in serious damage to the Duo-Rectron.
RCA Duo-Rectron is furnished with one Rectron UX-213 and one Radiotron
UX-874. Rectron UXL213 is a full wave rectifier having two parallel filaments and two
plates, thus utilizing both halves of the alternating current wave. The RCA Radiotron
UX-280 is interchangeable with Rectron UX-213 and has the advantage of increased
operating life. Radiotron UX-874, the "glow tube," is connected across from the -B
to the +90 terminal and serves to maintain a constant voltage across these two points
under varying load conditions. It has in its base a strap, connecting two of its contacts,
which closes the primary circuit of the power transformer. There is, therefore, no volt-
age impressed on the power transformer until the "glow-tube" is in place.
The Duo-Rectron will supply "B" plate voltages of 22/, 45, 90 and 135 volts
to a Radiola or other radio receiver. Under normal conditions, it is rated to furnish
2 milliamperes (0.002 ampere) at the 45 -volt post, 20 milliamperes (0.020 ampere) at
the 90 -volt post, and 10 milliamperes (0.010 ampere) at the 135 -volt post. If the radio
receiver in use does not require 135 volts on the plate of any Radiotron, a larger plate
current output may be obtained by connecting the +90 -volt post to the +135 -volt post
by a short jumper. Under these conditions the Duo-Rectron will furnish its maximum
output of 50 milliamperes (0.050 ampere) at 90 volts.
If the Duo-Rectron is over -loaded beyond its rated capacity, the operation of the
"glow-tube" and of the rectifier unit is likely to be erratic. Also, if the current drain
of the radio receiver is heavy the "glow -tube" may fail to function if the Duo-Rectron
is started with the load on. It is, therefore, desirable not to light the filaments of the
radio receiver until the Duo-Rectron is in operation.

PROTECTIVE SEALS AND THEIR USE

The lead seals placed on Duo-Rectrons by the RCA are for the protection of the
dealer. Broken seals indicate tampering.
A service man may find it necessary to break the seals in order to make repairs.
In such instances he should replace those broken by suitable substitute seals when the
tear of assembled parts. This information by the condition of the seal in determining
repair work is finished. Thus he is aided is due to tampering or ordinary wear and
whether any trouble that, may develop later places the dealer in a preferred position
when it is found necessary to render a bill for service.
3
 PART I-SERVICE DATA
Place Rectron UX-213 and Radiotron UX-874 in their proper sockets and see
that they are firmly seated. Having made certain that the power supply is alter-
nating current of the proper voltage and frequency, plug in the unit and turn "on" the
switch. Pull up Duo-Rectron operating switch to the "on" position.
Both tubes should light up, Radiotron UX-874 showing a purple or pink glow.
(1) IF NEITHER TUBE LIGHTS
Trouble may be due to:
(a) Blown fuse in lighting circuit (may be checked by means of a test lamp).
(b) Loose plug in lighting socket.
(c) Operating switch on Duo-Rectron not making proper contact.
(d) Open in power supply cord.
(e) Radiotron UX-874 not making proper contact.
(f) Strap in base of Radiotron UX-874 open. (Try another 'glow tube".)
(g) Open in transformer. (Run continuity test.)

(2) UX-213 LIGHTS, BUT UX-874 DOES NOT

(a) Low line voltage. (Check with A.C. voltmeter.)
(b) Duo-Rectron started under load.
(c) Short in B battery leads in radio receiver. ("Click" radio receiver with
leads disconnected from Duo-Rectron.)
(d) Rectron has low emission. (Try another Rectron UX-213.)
(e) Radiotron UX-874 defective. (Try another Radiotron UX-874.)
(f) Open resistor. (Run continuity test.)
(g) Open in chokes or connections. (Run continuity test.)
(h) Shorted condenser.
(i) Open plate coil in transformer secondary. (Run continuity test.)
(3) "DUO" -TUBES LIGHT, BUT "GLOW TUBE" DIES WHEN
RECEIVER RADIOTRONS ARE LIGHTED
(a) Excessive load on Duo-Rectron.
(b) Possible short in radio receiver.
(c) Defective Radiotron UX-874.
(d) Low emission Rectron UX-213.
(4) EXCESSIVE HUM IN OPERATION
(a) Open or defective filter condenser.
(b) Rectron UX-213 not properly seated on base.
(c) Defective Rectron UX-213.
(d) Loose transformer laminations or poorly soldered joints.
(e) Low emission rectifying tube.

(5) "GLOW TUBE" HOWL

This is usually a high-pitched intermittent or continuous howl heard in the Loud-
speaker, which sets in after the Duo-Rectron has been in operation for some time. The
howl may sometimes be temporarily stopped by jarring the "glow -tube." The trouble
is due to a defective "glow -tube" and may be eliminated by replacing it with a new one.
4
 PART II -SERVICE PROCEDURE
(1) TEST INDICATIONS
The following indications, in conjunction with the "click" tests given on page 6,
will isolate any trouble that may appear. (See Table 1, page 7).
(A) Condition of the plate of Rectron UX-213:
When overloaded, as in the case of a short across the tube, the plates will become a
dull red in color when the Duo-Rectron is in operation.
(B) Magnetic pull of choke A.
This pull, which may be tested by means of a steel screw driver placed in the space
between the two chokes as shown in Figure 1, will show whether there is any current
flowing through the coil of the choke. The arrows in Figure 2 indicate where the mag-
netic pull may be tested.
(C) Magnetic pull of choke B
This pull, tested as in the case of choke A, will indicate whether there is any cur-
rent flowing through the coil of choke B.
(D) Voltage reading from -B to +45
(E) Voltage reading from -B to +90
(F) Voltage reading from -B to +135

Figure 1-Screw driver used to test magnetic pull of chokes A and B.

5
 In testing for the magnetic pull of chokes A and B, care should be taken not to allow
the screw driver to touch any other part of the Duo-Rectron except the cores of the two
chokes under test. The resistor element, located on the other side of the tube sockets,
is wound with very fine resistance wire and may easily be damaged.
(2) ISOLATING TROUBLE
With the radio receiver cable or wires entirely disconnected from the Duo-Rectron,
turn "on" the operating switch. If Rectron UX-213 lights with normal brilliancy, but
Radiotron UX-874 fails to function.
(a) Try another Radiotron UX-874.
(b) Try another Rectron UX-213.
If these changes do not eliminate the trouble, shut "off" operating switch, remove
AC plug, take out tubes and make the following continuity tests with a 4/
volt C
battery in series with a pair of phones.
TERMINALS CORRECT EFFECT INCORRECT EFFECT CAUSED BY
-F1 and +F1 to +135 Click closed thru chokes and fila- Open choke or open transfor-
ment coil of transformer. mer mid -tap.
+135 to -B Click, closed thru resistor. Open resistor.
-B to G1 and PI Click, closed thru plate coil of Open transformer or mid -tap.
transformer.
If all the above circuits "click" as indicated replace the tubes in the proper position,
replace AC plug and turn "on" the Duo-Rectron. Take the .six test indications outlined
in Sec. 1, Part II (page 5) and refer to Table I (page 7), to isolate the trouble.

RCA -551

Figure 2-Top view of "B" Battery Eliminator with cover removed and showing arrows where
magnetic pull of chokes may be tested.
6
 TABLE I
Trouble Indicating Table
Conditions under which this chart is applicable:
(1) Rectron UX-213 lights, but Radiotron UX-874 does not function.
(2) Closed circuit from -Fl
and +Fl to +135 to -B to G1 and Pl.

VOLTAGE
PLATES OF PULL ON PULL ON
UX-213 CHOKE A CHOKE B -B -B -B TROUBLE

TO +45 TO +90 TO +135

Dull Red No No No No No Condenser C shorted

Apparently Strong No No No No Condenser D shorted

normal
Normal Normal Normal No No No Condenser E shorted

Normal Normal Normal No No About 70 Condenser F shorted

Nearly nor -
Normal Normal Normal No mal, glow tube Normal Condenser G shorted
may light

> pppp
"'"""', 3 S

2I
F
C D E

UK- 87_4 , T T
\
(

eb,

_B +224 +45 +90 +135

RADO Coven! or A.mMICA
133 NATIONAL SE. vICE DIVISION
A
CONTINUITY DIAGRAM 233 BROAOWAr NYC
90
RCA Duo- RECTRON
1-3 4S
2tf
-a
MODEL
Dwg N5 -DR -1D
AP-937
DATE 4-9-26
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Dwn by JM 1Ckd byt.R.0 (Appal by eel

Figure 3-Continuity wiring diagram of RCA "B" Battery Eliminator.

 A COMPLETE DUO-RECTRON CONTINUITY TEST
INCORRECT EFFECT
TERMINALS CORRECT EFFECT CAUSED BY

(At plug) one side of

AC line to +F2 Closed thru transformer Open transformer primary
(At plug) other side of
AC line to P2 (with
switch "on"). Closed thru AC switch Open in switch or leads
GI to Pl Closed thru transformer plate coil Open secondary coil
G1 or PI to -B Closed thru mid-tap and transformer Open mid-tap
secondary
+F 1 to -FI Closed thru transformer filament coil Open secondary coil
+F1 or -F1 to +135 Closed thru mid-tap, transformer Open mid-tap or open choke
secondary coil and two chokes
-B to +2272 Closed thru resistor Open resistor
+ 22Y2 to +45 Closed thru resistor Open resistor
+45 to +90 Closed thru resistor Open resistor
+90 to +185 Closed thru resistor Open resistor
-F2 to G2 Closed thru resistor from -B to +90 Open in section of resistor
or leads to glow tube

Above tests may be made without breaking seals or remov-

ing cover. If cover is removed further tests may be made to
isolate trouble.

3 to 4 Closed thru choke A Open in choke A

4 to 5 Closed thru choke B Open in choke B

The test points referred to are shown in the Continuity Diagram, Figure 3 (page
7). The designations. "P" and "G" refer to what would normally be the plate and grid
socket contacts if three -element tubes were used. The number immediately following re-
fers to the first or second socket. For example G2 would indicate the grid contact of the
second socket. Pl would indicate the plate contact of the first socket. In the same man-
ner the indication "F" denotes the filament contact of the tube socket indicated by the
number.

Printed in U.S.A.-1938
Use of RCA "B" Battery
Eliminator with Radiolas
Super -Heterodyne
and Super VIII
DUO-RECTRON SERVICE NOTES
Third Edition-5M-June, 1928

RCA DuoRectron-Model AP -937

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY

DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS

326 Broadway 2001 WestPershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, I11. San Francisco, Cal.
 A WORD OR TWO ABOUT SERVICE

at
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well informed Radiola Dealer renders service
service
time of sale in affording information as to proper installation and upkeep. Subsequent
and reair may be required by reason of wear and tear and mishandling, to the end that
Radiola
owners may be entirely satisfied.

and
Obviously this service can best be rendered at point of contact and therefore Dealers
of
Distributors, who are properly equipped with a knowledge of the design and operation
Radiolas, occupy a favorable position to contract for this work.
the RCA
To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealers' business the Service Division of
has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which this booklet is a part-containing
technical
information and practical helps in servicing Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with Radiola Dealers' service prob-
lems, and presents the best practice in dealing with them. A careful reading
of these Service
Dealer and Distributor, and it is suggested they be preserved
Notes will establish their value to
for ready reference.
has
In addition to supplying the Service Notes the RCA, through its Service Stations,
available to Dealer and Distributor the services of engineers who are qualified to
render valu-
able help in solving service problems.

only by its
Property of Radio Corporation of America. Confidential and to be usedits apparatus.
authorised distributors and dealers in furnishing service in connection with

Copyright 1927-Radio Corporation of America.

 Use of RCA "B" Battery Eliminator with
Radiolas Super -Heterodyne and Super VIII
(DUO-RECTRON-MODEL AP -937)

PREPARED BY RCA SERVICE DIVISION

INTRODUCTION
These instructions cover the operation of RCA "B" Battery Eliminator
(Duo-
Rectron Model AP -937) in use with Radiolas Super-Heterodyne and
Super VIII
employing Radiotron UX-120 in the second stage of audio frequency
amplification.
There are two ways in which the Duo-Rectron may be used to supply
plate
voltages to the Radiotrons of these two Radiolas. One method involves
the use of
an external "B" battery to supply. the additional 45 volts required
to make up the
necessary 135 volts for the plate of Radiotron UX-120. This
method is the most
convenient one as it requires no changes in the panel wiring.
A second method takes
advantage of the 135 -volt tap of the Duo-Rectron by making certain
alterations in
the panel wiring of the Radiolas, thus eliminating all "B" batteries.
As the first method is fully described in the Instruction Book supplied
with the
Duo-Rectron, the following instructions will be confined to the second
method.

PART 1

RADIOLA SUPER-HETERODYNE-SECOND HARMONIC

(Semi -Portable Model)
Figure 1 shows the alterations necessary in the Radiola Super-Heterodyne
panel
to take advantage of the 135 -volt tap of the Duo-Rectron to supply
the required plate
voltage for Radiotron UX-120. A step by step procedure
to effect the necessary
changes is suggested as follows:
(1) Tilt panel forward and release catch at right hand side permitting panel to
be removed from cabinet.
(2) Loosen screws on battery terminal strip allowing the latter to be removed.
(3) Connect a short piece of wire between the +45 terminal and the -45 ter-
minal of the UR-556 adapter.
(4) Connect a 221/_ -volt "B" battery to the +221 and -221/2 "C" battery ter-
minals of the UR -556 adapter. (This battery may be placed in one
of the
battery compartments.)
3
 (5) Remove switch plug. To do this, the small retaining split washer will first
have to be removed with a small pair of pliers. The plug may then be readily
pulled out.
(6) Make the one wiring change shown by dotted line in Figure 1.

(7) Solder an insulated wire to the switch frame (as indicated in Figure 1)
and connect free end to the +135 terminal of Duo-Rectron.
(8) Make other connections to the -B, +45 and +90 terminals of the Duo-
Rectron in the usual manner as indicated in the Duo-Rectron Instruction
Book No. 86996, Edition "C".
WHEN THE ABOVE ALTERATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE, THE STAGE
CHANGE SWITCH WILL BECOME THE SECOND STAGE JACK AND THE
PHONE JACK WILL BECOME THE FIRST STAGE JACK.
These changes apply to Radiola Super -Heterodyne only.

erlDYO,[G! SUPE/CHETETODYNE

CHANGES /N 1=59NEL wi y'ING 7b NABI »uo9rEcrreon, TO

F ew-TH /34" tents to PLATE of PbWEJe 71/3E /N LAST STAGE

Ì
t ve wire otite
Move
.Board
/ookiv from the trar
of 'one/
and so/der
/ as shown
So/der switch frame

7remore switch p/9

1st See ¡ ¡ Znd Stare

Ten-tore of/ pairs shown dotteve

Ihr
Figure 1
4
 PART 2
RADIOLA SUPER -VIII
Figure 2 shows the normal wiring connections from the terminal board to the jacks
in Radiola Super -VIII. This diagram is included for purposes of comparison with,
and to facilitate making the new connections shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 clearly shows the revised panel wiring necessary to take advantage of the

AD/01/9 &.SUPF7zi JZZI

00000000001
S779NDAeD CONNECT/oNS Te SWIMS, AN.1? 19+IoNE .9c/r

e0000000 Q 14 I

1sr.oNv 2ND Srsse Sw/TCH Acif

lelONE AcAf W/ TH Pi. (As

RCA -550

Figure 2
5
 135 -volt terminal of the Duo-Rectron to supply the proper plate voltage for Radiotron
l'X-120, used in connection with the UR -556 adapter.
1'he catacomb terminal board and catacomb "whiskers" (short, flexible leads from
catacomb) are indicated ,just as they would appear looking at the panel from the rear.
From this position the whiskers and terminals are numbered from left to right. (The
second whisker hole on catacomb is blank, but counted.)

A step by step procedure for effecting the necessary changes is outlined as follows:
(1) Remove panel and detach battery terminal aril, as outlined in Part 1 of these
instructions.
(2) Connect a short piece of wire between the -1-45 and -45 terminals of UR -556
adapter.
(3)Connect a 221 -volt "B" battery to the +221:, "C" and -221!_ "C" ter-
minals of the adapter. This battery supplies the proper negative bias for
the grid of Radiotron UX-120. It may be conveniently placed in the loca-
tion vacated by the old "B" batteries.

RADIOLA SUPER VIII

Changes in panel wiring to enable Duo Rectron to furnish

135 volts to plate of Radiotron UX-I20 in the last stage
5 6 7 p 9 10 I 12 13 14
Catacomb whiskers O O O O O O O J
Terminal board 00®080008
Solder to frame
To t 90
Note:Amplifier switch plug removed
and switch used as Ist Stage Jack

2nd Stage Ist Stage

RCA -548

Figure 3
6
 (4) Remove amplifier switch plug as instructed in Part 1.

(5) Referring to Figure 2, unsolder and remove wire running from terminal 15 to
switch jack. Referring to Figure 3, make all other changes indicated in this
diagram. Special attention is called to catacomb whisker number 11 (fourth
from the right) which should be unsoldered from catacomb terminal number
12 and resoldered to the frame of the amplifier switch jack (1st stage). An
extra length of insulated wire will be necessary to make this connection, solder-
ing same to the whisker lead and carefully taping to avoid the possibility of
it short-circuiting to any other terminal.
(6) Solder an insulated wire to the frame of the amplifier switch jack (1st stage)
and connect other end to the +90 terminal of Duo-Rectron.

(7) Connect:
-B lead in Super -VIII (lower battery tier) to -Bof Duo-Rect ron.
+B (lower battery tier) to +45 of Duo-Rectron.
-B (upper battery tier) to be taped up (not used).
+B (upper battery tier) to +135 of Duo-Rectron.
Thus connected Duo-Rectron will supply the pro,per plate voltages for all the
Radiotrons, including Radiotron UX-120. The PHONE JACK (Figure 2) becomes the
SECOND STAGE JACK (Figure 3) and the AMPLIFIER SWITCH JACK (Figure
2) the FIRST STAGE JACK (Figure 3).
The output of Radiotron UX-120 goes through the built-in loudspeaker of Radiola
Super -VIII and is also connected to the second stage jack so that an external loud-
speaker can be employed if desired.
If RCA Loudspeaker Model 102 is installed at a later date, it will not be neces-
sary to replace the original connections. Merely remove Radiotron UX-120 and adapter
from the catacomb and insert the loudspeaker plug in the first stage jack (Figure 3).

7
Printed in U.S.A.-1928
J
RCA
B - Eliminator
SERVICE NOTES

First Edition-IM
April, 1928

Radio Corporation of America

SERVICE DIVISION OF THE PRODUCTION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT
233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
326 Broadway 2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
New York City Chicago, Ill. San Francisco, Cal.
 OPERATING
SWITCH
120V.
,"
POWER
TRANRMER Oi FILTER REACTORS-,

+135

110V.

LINE VOLTAGE
0+90
ADJUSTMENT
SWITCH

0+ 67
R f
'4 MFD.'
s 0+45
2MFD.

Q- g
k
\TO 105-125 VOLT 50 60 RECTIFYING
CYCLE A.C. LINE ONLY __ UNIT

Figure 1-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA B -Eliminator

TERMINAL STRIP OF RCA B- ELIMINATO R.-

\ OFF

`120

OPERATING
LINE SWITCH
VOLTAGE COMBINED
ADJUSTMENT LOAD NOT TO
SWITCH EXCEED IS
MILLIAMPERES 15 MILLIAMPERES
2 MILLIAMPERES
MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
ONLY ONE
CONNECTION
IS USED
ON MOST
RECEIVERS

B+DET. B+AMP. 8+ AMP. B+PWR.

45 V. 67 V 90V. 135V.
B TERMINALS OF RECEIVER

Figure 2-Connections from RCA B -Eliminator to a receiver

 RCA B--ELI'AINATOR (°JODEL AP -1080)

SERVICE NOTES

Prepared by RCA Service Division

INTRODUCTION

The RCA B -Eliminator is e device for converting

alternating current into direct current, suitable for
use as plate supply to radio receiving sets. It is
compact and operates consistently without any particular
attention. The dry disc type of rectifier employed,
makes unnecessary the use of tubes or liquid containing
devices. The output is of sufficient capacity to operate
any radio receiver using up to eight tubes or requiring
a plate voltage up to 135 volts. Figure 1 illustrates
the schematic circuit diagram. The following notes are
presented for the information of those called upon to
install or service the set.
The text is divided into two parts: Fart I -
Installation; and Part II - Service Data,
FART I - INSTALLATION

(1) LOCATION

The RCA B -Eliminator should be located in a place

that is accessible for ready operation; has a free cir-
culation of air; and is convenient for making connections
to the receiver.
(2) COIN ECTIONS TO RECEIVER

The leads from the receiver that ordinarily go

to the "B" batteries are connected to the B -Eliminator.
Figure 2 showsthe correct connections to be made for
practically receiver. The maximum milliampere load
any
of the B -Eliminator is 2 milliamperes for the detector
or 45 -volt tap; 15 milliamperes for the combined drain
of the 67 and 90 -volt tap; and 15 millianperes for the
135 -volt tap, These ratings are ample for practically
all receivers and should never be exceeded.
 The 135 -volt plate supply for receivers using Radiotron
UX-171A in the last audio stage is ample for good reproduction
in conjunction with a 27 -volt grid bias is used. Under such
conditions the output will be of ample volume for all practical
requirements and the tube life will be increased over that
obtained when using the maximum of 180 volts.

(3) LINE VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

A two-way switch is provided for adjustment to power

line voltages ranging from 105 to 125 volts, 50 to 60 cycles.
The switch should be kept at the 120 -volt position unless it
is definitely known that the line is always below 115 volts,
in which case it may be set at the 110 -volt position. It
is a good plan to leave the switch at the 120 -volt position
provided the output voltages are high enough to give satis-
factory operation of the receiver.

(4) POWER SUPPLY

After connecting the RCA B -Eliminator to a receiver,

and adjusting the line switch to its correct position, the
input plug should be connected to a lamp socket of 105-125
volt 50-60 cycle alternating current. Connection to D.C.
supply or A.C. supply of different rating will result in
damage to the B -Eliminator.

PART II - SERVICE DATA

(1) PRECAUTIONS

At the time of installing an RCA B -Eliminator the cus-

tomer should be made fully aware of its operation and the
procedure to take in ease of inoperation. He should be ad-
vised to turn the power supply "off" immediately any trouble
develops and not to operate the device until the cause of
the failure is corrected. The failure of one unit may
damage the other units if operation of the device is maintained.
As an example of possible developments in case this precau-
tion is not observed, consider the effects of operating the
B -Eliminator with a shorted filter condenser. Such a short
would increase the load on the rectifier and damage it. The
damaged rectifier in turn w eul d increase the load on the
transformer and possibly cause a burn -out.

4
(2) VOLTAGE RF:A nI NGS

Under normal load, the voltages obtained at the

terminal strip should be those indicated at the binding
posts. If the voltages are slightly high the load is
probably light or the line switch is at the wrong posi-
tion for the particular line voltage used. Various
types of failure and the corresponding indication are
listed below: -

High voltages at terminals -

(a) High voltages at all terminals may be caused

by open resistance section -B to 45V.
(b) High voltages at one or more terminals and no
voltages at the remaining terminals may be
caused by open section between terminals where
high and no readings are obtained.

No voltage at any terminal may be caused by-

(a) Open winding in transformer.

(b) Defective rectifier unit.
(c) Shorted 4 mfd. filter condenser.
(d) Open winding in filter reactor.

No voltage between some terminals and low at other

terminals may be caused by -

(a) Shorted 2 mfd. filter condenser.

(b) Loose connections to binding posts.

(.3) FILTER CONDENSERS (2 Nn.)

A defective filter condenser will cut out the

section of the resistance strip across which it is con-
nected and no voltage readings will be obtained across the
output terminals at that point. To locate a defective
condenser connect a voltmeter across the output binding
posts and disconnect the condensers one at a time with
the current turned "on The release of the defective
condenser will restore the normal output voltage readings
across the terminals. If the ground or common connection
is disconnected all the condensers will be released
sufficiently to make this test across the 135 -volt ter-
minals. This will indicate whether or not any of the
filter condensers are causing the trouble that may exist.
If the trouble is in the condensers they should be tested
individually, as already described, to locate the defec-
tive one.

5
(4) FILTER REACTOR

The filter reactor may be tested by releasing the

connections to its terminals and making a "click test"
from point to point. An open will give a "no click"
indication.

(5) RECTIFIER UNIT

The rectifier unit may be tested by disconnecting

all circuits from it, except the power transformer, and
measuring the D.C. voltage of its output. This should be
approximately 230 volts.

( 6 ) PO +VrR TR ',NSFORiv'ER

A "click test" across each winding with all other

connections removed will indicate the condition of the
power transformer. An open of either winding will give
a "no click'' indication.

(7) MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Should it be necessary to replace any unit, except

the terminal strip and resistance unit, use the following
procedure: -

(a) Drill out the six rivets that hold the bottom
metal sheet of the B -Eliminator in place. Turn
the unit upside down and remove this bottom piece.
The connections and fastenings of all the units
are now accessible.
(b) Bend the tabs, holding the particular unit to
be replaced, so they will slip out of their
respective slots. Unsolder and release the con-
nections to the defective unit. The unit may
now be pulled clear of the base and the new
unit placed in the position occupied by the old
one.
(c) Bend the tabs to secure the new unit to the base.
(d) Besolder the connections that were removed.
These are shown in Figure 3.
(e) Replace the bottom metal sheet with small machine
screws and nuts. Make sure the ground connection
is connected under one of the screws.
 n 73
rn
On
Z
rn-Tc
n
O
Z
NZ
/%
"' '%
GREEN TRACER
RED WITH
GREEN TRACER
`moi
r/ii
/,
. 70
BZ ACK.IyI
:-"i

-
CER
m C,
A 70
o
s m
m O
Z Z Z
rn
n n --1
rn
-4070
07°
z

//..///
RED
T
nr.
0.4
z
Z 70
rn
l RED

YELLOW

n--I Ó GREEN WITH

GREEN.
Oz RED TRACER
Z
u+ Z E0%
rn
A

rt
oFFy
elGFl
9
c<`
A $ l99 ti
re ÿ P `9.

C //,"- immnittitQ n1nm11nnPlplllgglIlluIllRnnnllnl@alPnmleill InPInIIAIIIIIIIIIIIIII!111111111111nIP1111

1I!I;gi
iIÌ,
tzei 9
W
i,. i ./ +

BLACK
+
:%/r,,, r/
A. i
1

,/
P
Printed in U. K. A. 1928
 RCA
Short Wave Receiver
( Model AR -1145)

SERVICE NOTES

RCA Short Wave Receiver

(Model AR -1145)

First Edition -1M 11

Copyright June, 1929

RADIO -VICTOR CORPORATION OF AMERICA

233 BROADWAY, NEW YORK CITY
DISTRICT SERVICE STATIONS
BROOKLYN, N. Y. CHICAGO, ILL.
Bldg. No.619-188 - 39th St. SAN FRANCISCO. CAL.
2001 West Pershing Road 274 Brannan St.
DALLAS, TEXAS ATLANTA, GA.
Santa Fe Bldg., Unit No. 2 150 Peters St.
 PREFACE
Service goes hand in hand with sales. The well-informed RCA Dealer ren-
ders service at time of sale in affording information as to proper installation
and upkeep. Subsequent service and repair may be required by reason of wear
and tear and mishandling, to the end that RCA Loudspeaker and Radiola own-
ers may be entirely satisfied.
Obviously, this service can best be rendered by properly equipped service
organizations having a thoroughly trained personnel with a knowledge of the
design and operation of RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.
Such service organizations have been established by RCA Distributors, and
RCA Dealers are advised to refer any major work or replacement to their selected
Distributors. Minor replacements and mechanical and electrical adjustments may
be undertaken by the RCA Dealer.

To assist in promoting this phase of the Dealer and Distributor's business

the RCA Service Division has prepared a series of Service Notes-of which
this booklet is a part-containing technical information and practical helps in
servicing RCA Loudspeakers and Radiolas.

This information has been compiled from experience with RCA Dealers
and Distributors' service problems and presents the best practice in dealing with
them. A careful reading of these Service Notes will establish their value, and it
is suggested they be preserved for ready reference.

be used only
Property of Radio -Victor Corporation of America. Confidential and to its
by its Distributors and Dealers furnishing service in connection with apparatus.

Copyright 1929-Radio-Victor Corporation of America

 CONTENTS
Page
Preface
2
Introduction
S
Service Data Chart
20

PART I -INSTALLATION
Antenna Loudspeaker or Headphone Connections
Antenna (Indoor Type) 6
5
Ground Plug -In Coils 7
6
Battery Connections 6 Use of Coils Covering Broadcast Band 7

PART II SERVICE DATA

Antenna System Failures 9 Noisy or Loose Jacks 11
Radiotrons 9 "Fringe" Howl, or Audio Howl 11
Radiotron Sockets 10 Failure to Regenerate 12
Loose or Dirty Intensity Control Arm 10 Distorted Reproduction 12
Loose Station Selector or Intensity Control Acoustic Howl 13
Knobs 11 Loudspeakers 13

PART III ELECTRICAL TESTS

Measuring Resistance Values 13 RCA Short Wave Receiver Continuity Tests.. 15
Audio Transformer Continuity Tests and Test-
ing of Large By-pass Condensers 14 Voltage Readings at Radiotron Sockets 15

PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS

Removing Chassis from Cabinet 18 Replacing Audio Stage Jacks 19
Replacing Audio Transformer Assembly and
By-pass Condensers 18 Replacing Tuning Condenser, Intensity Con -
Replacing the Detector Plate Condenser 19 trol, etc. 19
Replacing Coil Socket, Audio Socket Gang
Assembly, or Battery Terminal Board 19 Replacing Battery Cable 19

ILLUSTRATIONS
RCA Short Wave Receiver-Type AR -1145 1 Wave Trap Schematic, Data and Connections
Top View of Receiver Chassis Assembly (Fig. 8) 12
Showing Principal Parts (Fig. 1) 4
Radiotron Sequence (Fig. 2) 6
Internal Connections of Audio Transformers
Schematic Diagram of Receiver (Fig. 3) (Fig. 9) 14
7
Sub -Chassis Assembly Showing Principal Parts Socket Lay-out and Battery Cable Connections
(Fig. 4) 8 (Fig. 10) 14
RCA Short Wave Set of Coils, 15-75M (Fig. 5) 9
Sub -Chassis Receiver Wiring Diagram (Fig
RCA Broadcast Wave Set of Coils, 200-550M 11) 16
(Fig. 6) 10
Bottom View of Coil Showing Connections of Bottom Interior View with Bottom Removed
Windings to Coil Plugs (Fig. 7) 11 and Cable in Place (Fig. 12) 18
3
 d Z
WO
3
p °C
F-
CD
cx_

NpaYW
a%....C
+ :- J
i 0c2(.>
XQWO
c em
z h-
NQ V)
(!1 j

;
(-----'.
.

,r':'
F-0
N
Z
iii
-O
I

ZU
F-

t _

(eJ

CL
 RCA SHORT WAVE RECEIVER
Model AR -1145)
(

SERVICE NOTES
Prepared by RCA Service Division

INTRODUCTION
RCA Short Wave Receiver, Model AR -1115 is a regenerative battery type short wave
radio receiver employing one Radiotron UX-222, two Radiotrons UX-201A and power ampli-
fier Radiotron UX-112A. Figure 1 illustrates a top view of the receiver chassis, Figure 2
the Radiotron sequence and Figure 3 the schematic circuit diagram. Figure 4 is a sub -chassis
view showing the principal parts. Connected to an efficient antenna good sensitivity and tone
quality are obtained with this receiver.
A single station selector with a high ratio frictional vernier control and three inter-
changeable coils provide efficient and easy tuning over the range of 20 to 4 megacycles or 15
to 75 meters. Two additional coils may be procured as optional equipment which cover the
broadcast range of frequencies, i. e., 1500 to 550 Kilocycles.
Filament current for this, receiver is obtained from a 6 -volt storage battery. Plate and
grid voltages may be obtained from dry cell batteries, or from suitable socket power devices
having correct rating and electrical characteristics.

PART I-INSTALLATION
[11 ANTENNA
The first requirement of a good installation is an efficient antenna system. The antenna
should be enameled or bare copper wire, single strand, B. & S. No. 14, from 25 to 100 feet in
length, erected as high as possible and removed from all obstructions. Enameled wire resists
corrosion, and offers no hindrance to radio reception when properly used. The lead-in should
preferably be a continuation of the antenna itself. However, before entering the receiver it
should be spliced to an insulating wire, as the antenna wire will short circuit to the metal
receiver housing if it is led directly into the receiver. All splices should be carefully soldered
to insure a good electrical connection and increase the mechanical strength of the joint. Use
a good hot iron and plenty of solder making sure to remove the enamel if enameled wire is
used, and see that the ends of the wires are scraped clean, and that a good mechanical joint
is made. Clean off all excess flux on completion of the soldering and tape the connection.
High grade glass or porcelain insulator supports are required, and at no point should the
antenna or lead-in wire come in contact with any part of the building. Bring the lead-in wire
through a porcelain tube insulator to the inside of the house for connection to the receiver.
The antenna should not cross either over or under any electric light, traction or power line
and should be at right angles to these lines and other antennas. An outdoor antenna should
be protected by means of an approved lightning arrester.

[2] ANTENNA ( Indoor Type)

Where the installation of an outdoor antenna is not practical, satisfactory results may gen-
erally be obtained by using an indoor antenna of about 25 to 100 feet of insulated wire strung
around the picture moulding or placed under a rug. In buildings where metal lathing is em-
ployed, satisfactory results are not always possible with this type of antenna. Under such
conditions various arrangements of the indoor antenna should be tried to secure satisfactory
results. An indoor antenna is not as efficient as a properly installed outdoor antenna.
5
[3 ] GROUND
A good ground is quite as important as the antenna. No specific recommendations can be
given in this matter as conditions vary in different locations. Water and steam pipes usually
make good grounds. Gas pipes usually make poor grounds and, as a rule are to be avoided.
If neither water nor steam pipes are available, a pipe or metal rod may be driven into the
ground to a depth of several feet. The success of this type of ground depends upon the mois-
ture present in the soil. The ground lead should be short and connected by means of an
approved ground clamp to a section of pipe that has been scraped and thoroughly cleaned. The
connection should be inspected from time to time to make certain that a clean and tight elec-
trical contact exists between the clamp and pipe. The service man should experiment with
various grounds, and employ the one giving the best results.

FROM ANTENNA

is? R.F. DETECT00. SST AUDIO 2N0 AUDIO

RADIO FREQUENCY
TO LOUDSPEAKER
AUDIO FREQUENCY OR PHONES

Figure 2-Radiotron sequence

[4] BATTERY CONNECTIONS

After the antenna and ground system has been properly installed the receiver should be
unpacked and placed in the location it is to occupy, which must be in range of the antenna
and ground connections. The battery cord should be pulled through the hole in the rear. of
the cabinet and connections made as shown in Figure 10. A fuse block equipped with a 5
or 10 -ampere fuse should be placed in series with the positive "A" battery lead. This may be
done by cutting the yellow lead and connecting the block to each of the ends made by the
cut. All other connections should be accurately made, as otherwise correct operation will
not be secured and damage in some cases will result.
The color scheme of the leads is shown on the tag tied to the battery cable and in
Figure 10.

[5] LOUDSPEAKER OR HEADPHONE CONNECTIONS

A loudspeaker such as RCA Loudspeaker 100A, 100B, 103 or 106 should be provided
with a standard plug on the end of the input cord for insertion in the bottom jack of the
receiver when it is used. On many occasions sufficient signal strength will not be obtained for
loudspeaker operation and a pair of headphones is necessary. These should be equipped with a
similar plug and inserted in either the upper or lower jack, depending on the strength of the
signal.
6
[6] PLUG-IN COILS
Three coils are provided with the RCA Short Wave Receiver which cover the range of
15 to 75 meters illustrated in Figure 5. Two additional coils may be obtained as optional
equipment which cover the broadcast range of 200 to 545 meters, illustrated in Figure 6.
Bottom plug connections to windings are shown in Figure 7.

STATION SELECTOR 00015 MFO.

UX-201-A
!R.

VV
40,0001E
F. CHOKE

00016 MFD. UX-201-A

. ,11
POWER
OUTPUT

50,0001E O O
+2 IO 3
3 MEG.
O
O 0005
1SJ A.F.
OUTPUT
MFD.
MPS.

iMMM1AN -9 C
1 251E %INTENSITY
CONTROL
-3 C

+ 135 B

+67:8

+6A

I I \a.
1MFD

Figure 3-Schematic circuit diagram of RCA Short

Wave Receiver (Some sets have a choice coil connected
in the antenna circuit instead of the 2000 -ohm resistor
shown)

The ratings of the different coils are as follows:

Frequency Range Wavelength Range

Coil No.
Megacycles Kilocycles Meters

1 20-12 20,000-12,000 15- 25

2 12-7.2 12,000- 7,200 25- 42
3 7.2-4 7,200- 4,000 42- 75
6 1,500- 940 200-320
7 940- 550 320-545

The correct coil for the band of frequencies to be covered must be inserted in the coil
socket on the left side of the receiver chassis.

[7] USE OF COILS COVERING BROADCAST BAND

The use of coils Nos. 6 and 7 gives the receiver a tuning range that covers the broadcast
band of frequencies. Operation at these frequencies is somewhat different from that encoun-
tered at the lower wavelengths to be noted as follows :
Station Interference-In districts where stations are operating on frequencies close to
each other, interference or cross talk from one station to the other may be experienced.
7
 cez
O
1---
sZt
J
Ce Ce

:,
z WZ 1-
rn

w W
t7 U
Z W
ce

%
--le
?i
, , ,
i

, 9 NX.. .
I...
)411,41',, ,. ,rJ' / r
1111--1------e

}
CL.
.. ,r..,,""""
Vê1a3. i """ \{j
N. e.
. z`
'*_..^rt
.
\
,`\ ,
e

li

ce
o
f-
U
w
w
o

Z
F- U
W3
V)
o CZ
c; w
Z W
CI
Z
O
v
 Shortening the antenna to 25 feet or less may remedy this condition. If this size antenna
does not provide sufficient signal strength at other frequencies, two antennas may be desir-
able. A double -throw single -pole switch may be used for changing from one antenna to the
other.
If only one station is causing interference a wave trap may be used to reduce its signal
input to the receiver and thereby prevent interference. The constants and correct connec-
tions are shown in Figure 8. The trap is tuned by the condenser until the signal strength of
the interfering signal is reduced. If this cannot easily be determined the receiver should
be slightly detuned and the trap adjusted until a reduction of signal is noticed.
-Volume Control-When receiving stations of considerable strength sufficient reduction of
volume may not be obtainable by use of the intensity control. In such cases detuning the
receiver by means of the station selector may give the desired signal reduction without
affecting the tone quality. If detuning causes interference with other stations in addition to
reducing the volume, an external variable resistor may be inserted in series with the antenna
lead to the receiver and the volume reduced by increasing the resistance in the antenna cir-
cuit. This variable resistor should be approximately of 2000 ohms in value, such aá is used
in Radiola 18, RCA Part No. 5901.

Figure 5 --Short wave coils-15 to 75 meters

PART II -SERVICE DATA

[1] ANTENNA SYSTEM FAILURES
Complaints of swinging signals, or of intermittent reception with probable grating noises
as distinguished from fading effects are generally the result of antenna and ground system
failures, and to this therefore the service man should give his first attention. A grating noise
may be caused by a poor battery connection, a poor lead-in connection to the antenna, or the
antenna touching some metallic surface such as the edge of a tin roof, drain pipe, etc. By
disconnecting the antenna and ground leads from the receiver and noting whether or not the
grating noise continues, the service man can soon determine whether or not the cause of com-
plaint is within or external to the receiver and plan his service work accordingly.

[2] RADIOTRONS
RCA Short Wave Receiver uses the screen grid Radiotron UX-222 as an R.F. coupling
tube, two Radiotrons UX-201A as a regenerative detector and first audio frequency stage and
one UX-112A as the power amplifier. The Radiotron sequence is shown in Figure 2. Care
should be taken to place each Radiotron in its correct socket as designated at the rear of the
9
individual sockets. While putting the UX-201A or UX-112A tubes in wrong sockets will
only cause poor operation, placing the UX-222 in any socket other than the correct one will
result in filament damage.
Sometimes dirty Radiotron prongs will cause noisy operation. At frequent intervals they
should therefore be cleaned with fine sand -paper. The use of emery cloth or steel wool is
not recommended. Before reinserting the Radiotrons in the sockets, wipe the prongs and
base carefully to make certain that all particles of sand are removed.
In placing Radiotrons in the gang sockets care should be exercised to make certain
that the two large pins and two small pins of the Radiotrons match the socket holes. If a
Radiotron will not fit into a socket without considerable pressure being applied, the trouble
is probably due to excessive solder on one or more of the prongs. This may be removed with

Figure 6-Broadcast frequency band coils-200 to

545 meters

a file or knife. Never try to force one in. These sockets are so designed that the prongs of
the Radiotrons will fit in snugly without force being applied. If sufficient force is applied it
might be possible to insert the prongs in the wrong holes, resulting in a filament burnout.
Caution-Do not remove or replace Radiotrons without first turning off the operating
switch.

[3] RADIOTRON SOCKETS

The Radiotron sockets in the RCA Short Wave Receiver are of the standard UX two -
gang type. The cushioned sockets are for the UX-222 coupling tube and the UX-201A de-
tector. The solidly mounted sockets are for the first and power audio stages. Care must be
exercised when inserting Radiotrons in their sockets. A socket contact may not be in its
correct position and the forced insertion of a tube will bend or break it. If care is exer-
cised and the .Radiotrons inserted gently little trouble will be experienced with socket con-
tacts. A bent one will be noticeable on inspection and may be corrected by inserting a nar-
row instrument in the socket hole and pushing the contact into its correct position. A badly
bent or broken socket contact must be replaced. The Radiotron socket layout, with socket
contact designations for use in the continuity tests outlined in Part III, Sec. 3 along with
battery cable markings are shown in Figure 10.

[4] LOOSE OR DIRTY INTENSITY CONTROL ARM

Should a grating noise be obtained when the intensity control is moved it may be due to
the arm being loose, or dirt or corrosion lodged between the contact wire and the arm.
10
Should the latter cause he the trouble, turning the knob back and forth several times to each
extreme will probably rectify the trouble. If this procedure does not clean the resistor the
bottom should be removed from the cabinet as described in Part IV, Section 1, and the re-
sistance section cleaned with alcohol applied with a pipe cleaner.
If the arm is loose, removal of the chassis from the cabinet as described in Part IV, Sec-
tion 1, is necessary to gain access to the intensity control so that the arm can be tightened.

[5] LOOSE STATION SELECTOR OR INTENSITY CONTROL KNOBS

If the station selector or intensity control knob becomes loose on its shaft, tighten the
small set screw that holds it in place. If the threads are defective the knob must be
replaced.

TICKLER COIL

PLATE COIL GRID COIL

Figure 7-Schematic diagram of
coil connections

[6] NOISY OR LOOSE JACKS

Noisy or intermittent operation may originate at either jack. This may be caused by
loose connections, jacks having lost their tension, or by dirty contacts.
To remedy this trouble remove the bottom from the cabinet as described in Part IV, Sec-
tion 1. The jacks can then be examined and necessary adjustments made. A loss of tension
may be remedied by applying pressure to the spring leaf and pushing it toward the frame of
the jack. The correct tension may be determined by inserting the loudspeaker or phone plug
and noticing if the leaf is making proper contact. If the soldered connections appear faulty,
a hot iron applied to them will generally remedy the trouble. Dirty contacts should be cleaned
by the use of a small piece of fine sand -paper properly applied between the contacts of the
jack spring leaves.

[7] "FRINGE" HOWL AND AUDIO HOWL

A howl occurring just as the intensity control reaches the point where oscillation occurs
is sometimes called "fringe" howl. If it occurs one of the following conditions may be its
cause:
(a) Poor detector tube, or microphonic detector tube (see Part II, Sec. 10).
(b) Wrong type of detector tube. Use of a UX-112A instead of a UX-201A will cause
a howl.
(c) Resistance across primary of 1st A.F. transformer open.
11'
 (d) Condenser across secondary of 1st A.F. transformer open.
(e) Open grid connection or grid of any Radiotron.
(f) Defective wiring in audio system. Figure 9 illustrates the internal connections of
the audio transformers.

[8] FAILURE TO REGENERATE

Advancing the intensity control clockwise to its maximum position without the receiver
going into oscillation by regeneration to secure continuous wave signal reception at any point
in the tuning range may be lue to :
(a) Shorted R.F. choke in detector plate circuit. This will cause oscillations to be
obtainable only at portions of the tuning range and not through the entire range.

..-ANTENNA LEAD-IN

AVERAGE R. F. SECONDARY
COIL FOR BROADCAST RANGE
VARIABLE TUNING
CONDENSER
OR
105 TURNS Nº 28 8.8.8. .0005 MFD.
ENAMELED WIRE, WOUND MAXIMUM CAPACITY
CLOSELY ON 11/4'' DIA. BY
2' LONG INSULATING TUBE

TO ANTENNA POST ON RECEIVER

Figure 8-Schematic diagram of wave trap

(h) Defective Radiotron in detector stage. A Radiotron that may be suitable for other
stages may not be suitable for use as a regenerative detector. Try interchanging
the detector Radiotron with the 1st A.F. stage Radiotron.
(c) Open detector plate condenser. If this condenser is open, sufficient coupling from the
plate through the tickler coil to the grid of the detector will not be obtained to cause
oscillation.
(d) Low "B" batteries. If the 67/ -volt connection drops below 50 volts at the battery
terminals the battery should be replaced. The low voltage keeps the detector from
oscillating due to low plate voltage.

[9] DISTORTED REPRODUCTION

Distorted reproduction may be due to any of the following causes:
(a) Defective Radiotrons. Check Radiotrons and replace any found defective.
(b) Defective batteries. Replace run down batteries.
(c) Wrong battery connections causing wrong plate and grid voltages. Check battery
connections according to Figure 10.
(d) Defective audio transformer. A defective audio transformer will cause distortion.
(e) Defective grid condenser or grid leak.
12
[10] ACOUSTIC HOWL
This is caused by a microphonic Radiotron, or the loudspeaker being too cÌase to the
receiver. The sound waves from the loudspeaker striking a Radiotron may cause the Radiotron
elements to vibrate, which in turn, produces an amplified howl in the output of the loud-
speaker.

The remedy lies in interchanging the Radiotrons. Counting from left to right the second
Radiotron UX-201A (see Figure 10) is the most susceptible to this microphonic condition.
Interchanging it, with the UX-201A of the A.F. amplifier or placing the loudspeaker at a
greater distance from the receiver will generally remedy this condition. In some cases both
remedies may be necessary.

[111 LOUDSPEAKERS
Instead of head telephones connection can be made to magnetic or dynamic loudspeakers
for reproduction. Among the various types of magnetic speakers RCA Loudspeaker Models
100A, 100B and 103 may be used with excellent results. Of the dynamic speakers RCA
Models 104, 105 and 106 will give high class performance when used with the RCA Short
Wave Receiver. The various RCA Service Notes issued on these speakers should be referred
to when any service information is desired.

The polarity on these speakers is not an important factor when connection is made to
a receiver. They should accordingly be connected in the manner that gives the most pleasing
reproduction.

PART III-ELECTRICAL TESTS

[1] CHECKING RESISTANCE VALUES

The values of the various resistance units of RCA Short Wave Receiver, Type AR-1145,
are shown in the schematic diagram, Figure 3. When testing a receiver for defects the
various values of resistance should be checked. This may be done by a resistance bridge ;
the voltmeter -ammeter method shown in previous RCA Service Notes; or by the following
method, the results depending upon the care exercised in using the prescribed method.

For resistances of low value, 5000 ohms or less, use a voltmeter not greater than 100 ohms
per volt. The rating of 100 ohms per volt means that a meter with 50 volts maximum scale
reading, has a total resistance of 50 times 100, or 5000 ohms, when the 50 -volt scale is
used. For high values of resistance use a meter of 1000 ohms or more per volt. The Weston
Meters, Type 301 or 280, each have a resistance of 62 ohms per volt and are satisfactory for
low values. For very low resistances below 100 ohms, it is best to use one dry cell
volts-with the 3 -volt scale of a Weston, Model 280. For higher resistances up to 5000 and
-1/
above use sufficient battery to give a good deflection on the meter, for example, a 45 -volt `B"
for a 0-50 voltmeter. Then take two readings, one of the battery alone, and one of the
battery with the unknown resistance in series.
13
 Then apply the following formula :
Reading obtained of battery alone Resistance of Unknown
Reading obtained with resistance in series meter in ohms ) resistance in ohms
Example-Using a Weston, Type 301, 30-volt scale, 22% -volt "B" battery. Resistance
of meter equals 30x62 or 1860 ohms.
22.5
8.45 1860 = 3091 or unknown resistance in ohms approx.

y
d
CONTROL GRID (CG)
CONNECTION u rW
FOR UX-222 tz
YW
3at3 Ñd
p:
BATTERY CABLE Y2 YÓ 8
á,« J.W
CONNECTING LUGS ON
TERMINAL BOARD",...,yÿ
4
A
:.
> :41 ç
n e 01,
n
UX-222 U%201A UX-201-A UX-112-A

P 5G
Ff F
P' F+
F
,
PLUG-IN COIL.

A. F.
TRANSFORMER.

CONDENSER INTENSITY
DIAL CONTROL .'d11NIIE
G Up., IPfl +135 V."B"
RFD
+6792V.13"
2e" ---RE
R4f MAROON
-3V. .C' BIACI(-AND-G0.EEN
-9V."C" BLACK-WITN-OREE
+6V. "A" 2t3------YELLO
+-c- -6V. "A'BLACK-WITN,fELLO
GREEN
RED TRACE,0.

Figure 9-Internal connections

of audio transformers Figure 10-Socket layout and battery cable connections

[2] AUDIO TRANSFORMER CONTINUITY TESTS AND TESTING

OF LARGE BY-PASS CONDENSERS
The audio transformers may be tested for continuity when not connected in circuit by
using the method described in Part III, Sec. 3, and by referring to Figure 9, which illus-
trates the internal connections of the audio transformers.
Proper testing of the 1 mfd. by-pass condenser is accomplished by charging them with
a handy D.C. voltage, as from "B" batteries connected to give 90 to 157% volts. If sparking
occurs as the charge is applied the condenser is shorted. After a few seconds wait a strong
spark should appear when the condenser is discharged by shorting the terminals with a screw
driver. If no spark appears the condenser is probably open. If -a slight spark occurs the con-
denser is probably leaky.
All the 1 mfd. condensers have one side grounded (see Figure 3). In the tests given,
with the condensers wired in the chassis, if the opposite terminal is defectively grounded a
short will be indicated. It is therefore advisable when checking for grounds in the component
parts of the receiver to remove all indicated ground connections, so that a defective ground
will be truly indicated by a closed continuity test between the frame (ground) and a terminal
of the suspected unit.
14
[3] VOLTAGE READINGS AT RADIOTRON SOCKETS
The following voltages taken at each Radiotron Socket with the receiver in operating con-
dition should prove of value when checking is done with test sets such as the Weston, Model
537, Type 2, or others giving similar readings. The plate currents shown are not necessarily
accurate for each tube, as the cable in the test set will cause some circuits to oscillate, due to
its added capacity. Small variations of voltages will be caused by different tubes and battery
voltages. Therefore the following values must be taken as approximately those that will be
found under varying conditions. Radiotron positions are shown in Figure 10.

VOLTAGE READINGS AT RADIOTRON SOCKETS

Intensity Control Near Zero. Operating Switch "On." All Batteries Connected. (See
Figure 10,) Radiotrons in Sockets, or Test Set. Loudspeaker Plugged in Second Audio
Stage Jack.

Radiotron Fil. Volt. Grid Volt. Plate Volt. Plate Current

Coupling UX- 3.2 *Control grid 130.0 Plate

222 1.5 3.5 mil. amp.
*Screen g_ i1 *Screen
67.5 0.5 mil. amp.

Detector 5.0 .. 30-60

(Depending on po-
0.65 to 1.5 mil.
sition of intensity amp.
control)

1st Audio Amp. 5.0 3.0 65 1.1 mil. amp.

UX-201A

2d Audio Amp. 5.0 9.0 130.0 4.0 mil. amp.

(Power)
17X -112A

* These readings cannot be measured by ordinary methods as with the

Weston Model 537 test set.

[4] RCA SHORT WAVE RECEIVER CONTINUITY TESTS

.The following tests will check the continuity of all circuits in the RCA Short Wave
Receiver.
All Radiotrons should be removed and batteries disconnected. A plug-in coil should be
inserted in the coil socket. The Radiotron socket numbers and designation of socket contacts
are shown in Figure 10.
A pair of headphones with at least 4/ volts in series or preferably a voltmeter with
sufficient voltage to give a full scale deflection when connected directly across battery ter-
minals should be used in making these tests. Flexible insulated leads with partially insulated
testing tips should be used to prevent false tests due to the hands.
The contacts of the test equipment should be placed across the terminals or leads indi-
cated in the following test table under the column marked "Terminals." If the results are
negative the cause of such negative effect will be found in the last column under the heading,
"Incorrect Effect Caused By." The second column indicates the correct effect.
The designation P, CG, SG and G refer to the plate, control grid, screen grid and grid
contacts of the various sockets. For example, G2 would indicate the grid contact of the sec-
ond socket (see Figure 10).
The filament contacts are preceded by their polarity. For example, + Fl would indicate
the positive filament contact of the first socket.
15
 b3Jrb1 03
N11M N33ë9

,e4
á
bel

z
Ó O

-
ev
d
e2 Jd
d
< .
0

sno g i `S7
Z

u > J
iN
á
140 rtr. > >
0 el
+
.o .
+
en
1
I
N
+
 RCA SHORT WAVE RECEIVER CONTINUITY TESTS
Remove all Radiotrons and disconnect batteries. Insert a plug-in coil
in coil socket. Refer to Figure 10 for Radiotron socket numbers aíìd
designation of socket contacts. Intensity control near zero. Keep
hands free from chassis frame.

Circuits Terminals Correct Incorrect Effect Caused by

Effect

Antenna to ground Closed Open 2000 -ohm resistor or UX-222 fila-

ment resistor
Antenna to CG1 Closed Open connection
SG1 to +67/ battery lead Closed Open connection
G2 to -F2 Closed Open grid leak
(Weak)
Grid Stator of tuning condenser to Closed Open grid coil of plug-in coil
-F2 (Remove grid leak)
Closed Open secondary of 1st A.F. transformer
G3 to -3 battery lead Closed Shorted secondary condenser
(Strong)
G4 to -9battery lead Closed Open secondary of 2nd A.F. transformer
G2 to stator of tuning con-
denser (Remove grid leak) Open Shorted grid condenser

Pl to 4-136 battery lead Closed Open primary coil of plug-in coil

P2 to +67/ battery lead Closed Open R.F. choke coil, primary of 1st
A.F. transformer and 40,000 -ohm re-
sistor, or intensity control
Across plate winding of plug-Closed Plate winding open
Plate in coil (see Fig. 8)
P2 to ground Open Shorted detector -plate condenser or
shorted 1 mfd. condenser
P3 to +67/ battery lead (no Closed Open primary of 2nd A.F. transformer
plug-in jack) or defective jack
P4 to +136 battery lead Open Shorted jack

-Fl to ground Closed Open 20 -ohm UX-222 filament resistor

+Fl to +A battery lead Closed Open connection
-Fl to -A battery lead (op- Closed Open connection
erating switch closed)
-F2 to ground Closed Open connection
Filament +F2 to +A battery lead Closed Open 1.25 -ohm filament resistor or con-
nection
-F3 to ground Closed Open connection
+F3 to +A battery lead Closed Open 1.25 -ohm filament resistor or con-
nection
-F4 to ground Closed Open connection
+F4 to +A battery lead Closed Open 1.25 -ohm resistor or connection

+67/ battery lead to ground Open Shorted 1 mfd. condenser Steady

Misc. +135 battery lead to ground Open Shorted 1 mfd. condenser condition
-A to ground (switch closed) Closed Open wiring or defective switch
-A to ground (switch open) Open Shorted switch or wiring

17
 PART IV -MAKING REPLACEMENTS
[1] REMOVING CHASSIS FROM CABINET
Should replacement of any parts become necessary in the RCA Short Wave Receiver the
following procedure may be used in gaining access to the different parts:
(a) Disconnect antenna and ground leads and all battery connections.
(b) Place the receiver in an upside down position on a blanket or cloth to protect the
cabinet finish and to make the mechanism accessible.
(c) Remove the four machine screws that are in the center of the felt feet and then re-
move the bottom from the cabinet. Some parts such as grid leaks, fixed condensers,
etc., may be replaced without further dismantling (see Figure 12).
(d) To remove the mechanism entirely from the cabinet the battery cable must be pulled
through the hole in the cabinet, the station selector and intensity control knobs re-
moved, the operating switch released, and the chassis lifted clear of the cabinet. It
may be removed to a place convenient for work.
(e) After all work is completed the receiver should he reassembled in the reverse man-
ner of that used to dismantle it.

Figure 12-Lulluni iu4ereur view with Indium removed and cable in place

121 REPLACING AUDIO TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY AND

BY-PASS CONDENSERS
Should it be necessary to remove the audio transformers or the large by-pass condensers,
the chassis should be removed from the cabinet as outlined in Section 1 above. When only one
audio transformer is found defective it will be necessary, of course, to remove the complete
assembly or container (see Figure 4). This container as well as the by-pass condenser con-
tainer can be removed in the following manner :
(a) Unsolder connections to defective unit. Never cut them off.
(b) By carefully unbending the tabs holding the container in place, the part may be
removed. In removing the i mfd. by-pass condenser adjacent to the output jacks,
it will be found necessary to remove at least the second audio stage jack (Part IV,
Sec. 5) before the condenser can be freed from the chassis.
(e) Replacements should carefully be made in the reverse order. It will be necessary
to support the part replaced by holding it, or temporarily clamping it tightly to the
chassis in order to bend the tabs to hold securely. Refer to Figure 11 for correct
wiring.
I8
[3] REPLACING THE DETECTOR -PLATE CONDENSER
To remove the detector plate condenser it will be necessary to remove the chassis from
the cabinet as outlined in Part IV, Section 1.
Then proceed in the following manner after locating the detector-plate condenser (see
Figures 4 and 11).
(a) Unsolder and remove the 1.25 -ohm filament resistor by simply unscrewing the two
end machine screws from their nuts.
(b) Unsolder the detector -plate condenser connections and remove the condenser by un-
screwing the machine screws holding it in place.
(e) Replacement is made in the reverse order. Refer to Figure 11 for correct wiring.

[4] REPLACING COIL SOCKET, AUDIO SOCKET GANG

ASSEMBLY, OR BATTERY TERMINAL BOARD
Remove chassis from cabinet as outlined in Part IV, Section 1.
(a) Unsolder connections from the part to be removed.
(b) Carefully drill out the rivets holding the part to the frame (see Figures 1 and 4)
using a suitable size drill.
(c) Replace the part removed and secure in place by use of small machine screws with
nuts and lock washers. Refer to Figure 11 for correct wiring.

[5] REPLACING AUDIO STAGE JACKS

Removal of jacks may be necessary for replacement or cleaning of contacts. For loca-
tion see Figure 4.
Remove chassis from cabinet as outlined in Part IV, Section 1.
(a) Unsolder connections to the jack to be removed.
(b) By means of a key to fit the hexagonal hole, or careful use of a screw driver to fit,
the insulating bushing used to support the jack may be unscrewed and removed.
(c) Replacement is made in reverse order. Refer to Figure 11 for correct wiring.

[6] REPLACING TUNING CONDENSER, INTENSITY CONTROL, ETC.

Remove chassis from cabinet as outlined in Part IV, Section 1.

(a) By unsoldering connections carefully, and simple removal of supporting machine

screws when necessary, it will be evident how all remaining parts, such as the tun-
ing condenser, intensity control, eta., can be easily removed without further
explanation. See Figures 4 and 11 for location and connection of parts.
(b) Replace and connect properly by referring to Figure 11.

[7] REPLACING BATTERY CABLE

Remove chassis from cabinet as outlined in Part IV, Section 1.
(a) Unsolder the old battery cable from the terminal board.
(b) Replace and resolder new battery cable by referring to Figure 10 for correct color
code of connections.
19
 SERVICE DATA CHART
Before using the following Service Data Chart, when experiencing no signals, weak
signals, poor quality, noisy or intermittent reception, howling and fading, first look for
Defective Tubes, Defective Batteries, Wrong Battery Connections. a Poor Antenna System
and Defective Loudspeaker or Phones. If imperfect operation is not due to the above
causes the "Service Data Chart" should be consulted for further detailed causes.

Indication Possible Cause Remedy Service Notes

Defective operating switch Check and replace switch Part IV, Sec. 6
Open antenna resistor Check and replace antenna resistor Part IV, Sec. 6
Defective battery cable Check and replace battery cable Part IV, Sec. 7
Defective plug -In coil Check and replace coil Part I, Sec. 8
Defective tuning condenser Check and replace condenser Part IV, Sec. 6
No Signals Defective A.F. transformer Check
(Part
and replace A.F. transformer Part III, Sec.
IV, Sec. '2
Defective by-pass condenser Check and replace by-pass con- Part III, Sec. 2
Defective grid condenser
densera Part IV, Sec. 2
Sec.
Open R.F. choke Checks and ireplaceechci e Part IV, c. 8

Failure to regenerate Check continuity of coils, etc. Part II, Sec. 8

Defective battery eatilb
{Part III, Sec. 3
Check and replace cable Part IV, Sec. 7
Defective antenna resistor Check and replace antenna resistor Part IV, Sec. 6
Defective plug-in coil Check and replace plug-in coil Part I. Sec. 6
Defective A.F. transformer Check and replace A.F. transformer Part III, Sec. 2
Weak Signals Part IV, Sec. 2
Dirty prongs of Radiotrons Clean Radiotron prongs Part II, Sec. 2
Defective by-pass condenser Check and replace by-pass con- (Part III, Sec. 2
Loose intensity control arm
denser Part IV, Sec. 2
Incorrect grid and plate voltages
Tighten intensity control .arm Part II, Sec. 4 ,

on Radiotrons
g Check voltage supply at battery (Part I Sec. 4
terminals or Radiotron sockets i.Part III, Sec. 4

Incorrect plate and grid voltage Check voltage supply at battery Part I, Sec. 4
on Radiotrons terminals or Radiotron sockets ' Part III, Sec. 4
Defective A.F. transformer Check and replace A.F. transformer
Part III, Sec. 2
Poor Quality ' Part IV, Sec. 2
Defective by-pass condenser Check and replace by-pass con- Part III, Sec. 2
denser ' Part IV, Sec. 2,
Defectivegrid leak Check and replace grid leak Part III, Sec. 1
Part IV, Sec. 6

Dirty Radiotron prongs Clean Radlotron prongs Part II, Sec. 2

Loose intensity control arm Tighten intensity control Part II, Sec. 9
Part III, Sec. 6
Noisy or inter- Dirty jack contacte Part II, Sec. 5
mittent recep- ('lean j ask contacts Part IV; Sec. 5
tion Socket contacts bent or broken Readjust socket contact or replace Part II Sec. 3
gang socket if broken Part I1, Sec. 4
Loose connection In receiver Check continuity for steady con-
dition. Examine all connections Part III, Sec. 3

plate voltage on Radiotrons

Highgngrid Check voltage supply at battery (Part I Sec. 4
terminals or Radiotron sockets Part III, Sec. 4
connectionsage Check continuity Part III, Sec. 3
Defect in audio system f Part HI, Sec. 2
Hom ling Check A.F. transformera, etc. l Part III, Sec. 3
Acoustic howl caused by micro- Interchange Radiotrons or in- Part II, Sec. 10
phonic Radiotrons or loud- crease distance of loudspeaker
speaker too close to Radiola from Radiola
Defective detector by-pass con-
denser Replace by-pass condenser Part IV, Sec. 6

Operating switch not 'ON" Turn switch "ON"

Part III, Sec. 3
Radiotrons fail Defective operating switch Check and replace operating switch Part IV, Sec. 6
to light Defective cable ('heck and replace cable Part III, Sec. 3
Part IV, Sec. 7
No filament voltage at Radlotron Check for open connections by Part III, Sec. 3
sockets continuity tests

Play in station Loose knob Tighten or replace knob Part II, Sec. 5
selector Loose dial Tighten set screws

20

www.americanradiohistory.com
 Victor Model 7-1 (Alhambra I)

J 4 ? d 6 .. J I J'/

OJT/VT
TRANSFORMER.

7/YO J7;46Ed OF TUNEO RALVO

FREQLLNCY [/S/NB REOENERAT/LLY ts
W/TN T/CNLER CONTROL.
o 0,
-414 A-O+C lDOY +4SY Y !/J.T Y P°1JTAáf J.KT

Wiring Diagram Alhambra I (7-1)

If there is evidence of the radio receiver being 3. If signal is heard, even though weakly-proceed
improperly neutralized, steps should be taken to as follows:
make the necessary adjustments to bring the equip-
a. With insulated screwdriver, shown in Fig. 2,
ment to its normal operating efficiency. adjust the neutralizing condenser located directly
behind first tube (Fig. 3) until signal disappears-
1. Prepare the following material: or is reduced to a minimum.
a. A "modulated oscillator," b. Remove the special tube and re-insert the original
the circuit and requirements
of which are shown in Fig. I. Radiotron.
(A 4-megohm grid leak is recommended: do NOT use
a variable grid leak in the construction of the oscil-
lator.) 4. Repeat the procedure as outlined above, on
next radio frequency stage (second tube in Fig. 2 of
PART 18460 Service Bulletin 5-A) adjusting the other neutralizing
condenser (Fig. 3).
a. Remove the special tube from the second socket
Fig. 2 and re-insert the original.

b. A screw driver, of bakeiite construction (with metallic

blade) similar to that shown in Fig. 2. If now properly adjusted, the receiver should
NOT oscillate at any position of the Tuning Control,
c. A UX-199 Radiotron, from which one of the filament
(LARGE) prongs has been sawed close to the base. with "Amplification" at zero. It should oscillate
only after amplification dial has been turned to
Note:-DO NOT use a tube with burnt out, broken.
or shorted filament. approximately 6 or 7. The setting of the amplification
dial necessary to produce oscillation in the detector
d. A pair of headphones.
circuit will depend upon
a. The setting of the Station Selector.
2. Proceed as follows; being sure that the (black b. The condition of the detector tube.
or red enameled) shipping strip has been removed. c. The detector B voltage.

a. Place oscillator in operation, near the antenna lead in

wire at a point approximately 15 to 20 feet from the
receiver. Adjust the oscillator to a frequency of
approximately 1100 kilocycles, so that its note is
picked up by the radio receiver when the Station
Selector is set at 60.
b. Set the panel voltmeter at 3 volts and place the ampli-
fication dial at "0." Tune in the oscillator to lull
volume on the receiver, adjusting the vernier con-
densers for maximum volume.
c. Plug head phones in first stage jack on panel.
d. Remove Radiotron No. 1 )Fig.2 in Service Bulletin 5-A)

and substitute the special tube.

If this change causes signal to disappear, it is an
indication that the first radio frequency stage is
properly neutralized.
 Ourrur
%RRMtFOJrMER. 2'3n1K
{IRCI{.

u o a
IIIIf 'Tr Ì °

ARrtRRR Orwnu
w Jam.

LOUD SrEMMER
UM1T.

ZNaRF
N.HR
x-,

SrRTNN
SE4.aCrOR

VERNIER CONDENsrns
V
ZbiTTLRr SrTTINa.
i64.1_. CONTROL

Panel Assembly Diagram for Alhambra I (7-1)

IF THE TROUBLE HAS NOT BEEN FOUND TO LIE IN THE 2. Using a high scale meter with negative lead inserted
BATTERIES OR TUBES, THE FOLLOWING TESTS TO LOCAL- in any socket contact, insert positive lead in each P contact
IZE THE TROUBLE IN THE SET ITSELF SHOULD BE MADE as shown in Fig. 2. The following are results that should be
WITH TUBES REMOVED AND BATTERIES CONNECTED. obtained:
any -
1. Using a low scale of meter with positive lead inserted in
socket contact, insert negative lead in each "G" con-
tact as shown in Fig. 2. The following table illustrates the
Normal
P-1-90
Faulty
0
Fault
Open Coil or broken wire.
results that should be obtained. P-2-90 0 Open Coil or broken wire.
Normal Faulty Fault P-3-110 0 Open output transformer or broken
wire.
G-1-4/ o Open coil or broken wire. P-4-85 0 Open audio transformer or broken
G-2-455 0 Open coil or broken wire. wire.
G-3-135 o Open AF transformer or broken wire. P-5-35 to 40 0 Open audio transformer or open
G-4-- .3 0 Open AF transformer or broken wire. tickler coil, or open tickler lead or
G-5-0 Reversed Short circuited grid condenser. broken wire.
45 Short circuited by-pass condenser.
 Victor Model 7-2 (Alhambra II)
Victor Model 9-1 (Florenza)
RADIO PANEL TEST FOR ALIÎAMBRA H (7-2) 9. If reading is obtained only In large contacts
and FLORENZA (9-1) of No. 3 socket.
(a) Check external wiring of connection between battery
The six tube Radiola used in these instruments setting control and volume control.
utilizes the well known superheterodyne principle. 10. If reading is obtained in all sockets except
In case of failure to operate or poor operation: No. 3.
(a) Check external wiring of volume control rheostat.
1. Eliminate the possibility of defective tubes by
replacing each tube with a tested Radiotron. When 11. Failure to obtain filament reading in any of
the defective tube is located the set will resume the other sockets would indicate an open circuit in
normal operation. the catacomb. If all external connections have
been checked, the catacomb should be replaced.
2. Check the batteries (or battery eliminator if
one is used) to determine that proper voltages are 12. Next test grid circuit (indicated as G in
being delivered. Note:-A noisy B battery can be Fig. 1) still using low scale of meter.
located by a constant fluctuation of the pointer on (a) Insert positive meter test lead in any negative (-)
the meter. filament contact.
(b) Insert negative meter test lead in all contacts marked
3. Insert a pair of ear phones in the first stage "G" In Fig. 1. The readings will indicate as follows:
jack. If reception comes through, there is no trouble O. K. Defective
at this point. G 1 4 0
4. Insert phones in output jack. If there is no G 2 4.5 0 Difficulty may be due to an open
reception: oscillator coil external to the
catacomb.
(a) UX-120 may be defective. G 3 3.3 0
(b) Output transformer may be open.
G 4 0 Any deflection of meter, the cata-
5. If reception is obtained at this point but
comb is defective.
there is no sound through the speaker unit: G5 .3 0
G6 1.7 0
(a) The speaker unit may be defective.
(b) The phone jack may not be making proper contact. If the readings show up a defect, the catacomb
should be replaced.
6. Check Radio-Victrola valve to see that it is
opening and closing the full amount. This can be 13. Test plate circuits (indicated as P Fig. 1) now
determined by a sharp click at both ends of the using the high scale of the meter.
arc. (a) Insert the negative meter teat lead in any (+) fila-
ment contact.
7. If there is no reception when phones are (b) Insert the positive meter teat lead in all contacts
plugged in first stage jack, remove all tubes and marked "P in Fig. 1. The readings will indicate
make the following tests: a. follows:
Using preferably a double scale voltmeter 0-7.5 P1
O. K.
90
Defective
0-150 volts (a Weston Type 301 meter was used in 0
these tests and the readings will vary if any other P2 90 0 Before assuming that the cata-
type meter is used). comb is defective on a 0 reading in
this socket, check the external
(a) Place battery switch in radio position. wiring through the oscillator coil.
(b) Turn battery setting rheostat to 5. P3 90 0
(c) Turn volume control rheostat to 10. P4 10to20 0
(d) With the test leads attached to the lower scale, the P5 82 Check external wiring connections
0
reading between the large holes of each socket should
be 434 volts with new A batteries. of first stage Jack before assuming
that open circuit is in the cata-
comb.
8. If there is no reading: P6 130 0 A 0 reading might indicate an
(a) Check between contacts -A+C and +A-B) on the open circuit in the wiring to the
terminal strip. If there is a 435 volt reading at this output transformer or in the
point transformer itself. This trans-
(b) Check contacts In filament switch.
(c) Check contacts on battery setting rheostat.
former is the one to which the
(d) Remove two bolts securing catacomb to spring
loud speaker leads are connected.
cushions. 14. If all the above tests check O. K and the
(e) Drop catacomb out of place and tighten all screw difficulty still remains:
connection..
(f) Test all soldered connections. (a) Remove outside loop lead when testing a Florenza
or the outside antenna coil lead when testing an
(g) Replace catacomb. Alhambra II. Connect the meter for lower scale
(h) Reading should now be 434 volts at the large con- reading. Place the meter in series with this lead and
tacts in the tube sockets. A+ connection on terminal strip. The reading should
be 454. If 0, either the coil or loop is open, depending
NOTE-If filament polarity of No. 4 socket Is reversed from that on which instrument is being tested. if O. K. con-
shown in Fig .1, the A battery leads should be reversed at the tinue the test.
terminal comb. Poor tone quality will otherwise result if A (b) Disconnect the terminal strip.
supply is incorrectly connected. The positive side of the volt- (c) Remove set from cabinet.
meter pin jacks should be on the right looking down on the top (d) Connect a 4;4 volt "C" battery in series with one of
of the panel. the meter test leads.
 (e) Teat betweeh rotor and stationary plates of left
hand condenser when facing under side of panel. If e m
no meter deflection, look for a broken wire or loose 'G P GP GP GP GO's\
connection between condenser and oscillator coil
terminals.
00 00 0 o O O
G P
000 O O
m
O
z0 O
0
O O O
0/ O
(f) Test from stationary plates of right hand condenser
and No. I contact of the terminal strip. If no read-
ing, check for a broken wire or loose connections
between these points.
(g) Test from rotor plates of right hand condenser and
No. 7 contact of the terminal strip. If no reading,
check for a broken wire or loose connections between
U®
r o

these points.
(h) Test between connections 1 and 7. If a reading is
obtained, the plates of the right hand condenser are
Figure 1

short circuited. This may be caused by foreign

material between the plates or from mechanical
alignment. If the difficulty is not overcome after
these exhaustive tests, it becomes a problem for Standing at the front of the instrument looking
your Distributor. down in the tube compartment, the top of the
"Note-Terminals No. i and No. 7 referred to can be located catacomb will appear as above.
counting on the terminal strip closest to the panel from the
end opposite the filament switch.

CATACOMB TERMINALS

Figure 2

CATACOMB TERM/MALS..

Radiola 25 Catacomb Continuity Diagram for Alhambra II (7-2) and Florenza (9-1) Instruments

www.americanradiohistory.com
 Loop
Ovi Par TRgN1FORMER

P ñ

{/òfVe
B
I

11

O
6
J
Loba SreRreW Vo

. J.9'
Jwc, Veer -urns ENTTHRY
S( 1T/Na
Coot r+rOL F

n ln

V
Ser.scmR
Pleuras.

Wiring Diagram for Alhambra II and Florenza

 Victor Model 7-3
Victor Model 7-30

Ovrevr
T RnvroR,wrw

Ve,urea
Ce,rwoL

Pe

w
LeD Uw,r
Faw«r r. OvrRrJarY
3 4 S L 7 8 R lO Il II 13.

/1 .ai/ i
¡B 4

di
I
C BarrERY
No COLOR

2. RED
3 YE LOW
+ 7 . B. 4 bRo NW,r,W,rETRRCER
5 BL/KYWir,GReENTaCER.
-1411dlldddiUUÌd- glddlUldiUUlÌiÍÿ
.q '13 -BATTERY GRoVR op
L BL ACY AND GRrr,
7 Maese
8 MRRoo, RND RED.
9 GREEN Mro VELLOWEND RED TRacE
_ HH /0 T
231-4C I( WIT/4 BIrOwN Aflw.
IHHI-' :3
EArTERv GRouR

Wiring Diagram for Models 7-3, 7-30, and R-20

IF THE TROUBLE HAS NOT BEEN FOUND TO LIE IN THE 2. Using a high scale meter with negative lead inserted
BATTERIES OR TUBES. THE FOLLOWING TESTS TO LOCAL-in any socket contact, insert positive lead in each P contact
IZE THE TROUBLE IN THE SET ITSELF SHOULD BE MADE. as shown in Fig. 2. The following are results that should be
WITH TUBES REMOVED AND BATTERIES CONNECTED. obtained:

any -
I. Using a low scale of meter with positive lead Inserted in
socket contact, insert negative lead in each "G" con-
tact as shown In Fig. 2. The following table illustrates the
Normal
P-1-90
Faulty
0
Fault
Open Coil or broken wire.
results that should be obtained. P-2-90 0 Open Coil or broken wire.
Normal Faulty Fault P-3-110 0 Open output transformer or broken
wire.
G-1-4!-, 0 Open coil or broken wire. P-4-85 Open audio transformer or broken
G-2--4!4 0 Open coil or broken wire. wire.
G-3-1); 0 Open AF transformer or broken wire. P-5-35 to 40 0 Open audio transformer or open
G-4- .3 0 Open AF transformer or broken wire. tickler coil, or open tickler lead or
broken wire.
G-5-0 Reversed Short circuited grid condenser. 45 Short circuited by-pass condenser.

NEUTRALIZING PROCEDURE SAME AS SHOWN UNDER VICTOR MODEL 7-1

 Victor Model 7-10

/ RNrFNN.
[wooe.fw.f+
U-..
X. SO / 20.-q ox 2ei-q

13SB

co.,..o.

Fb.vcw..*_
rR -liy..q.

f 1511
a}_
Yea
FRAME -.0 .S. p
t,. No
s.,,
Ce.a
.,-
B»,
2

5
Ye.
N

M...wa
q-2
n
a:.in«e
G+e w.., Ree.ó..
Bor. N..w Gat w 7 «ew
Ree -cB.TTc./q
n... .

-MMMMMN MM+1114MMUb-MYMbMhi
'D"B Cweee.
Rc
B.ac Re.T...ew

Wiring Diagram for Victor Radiola 16

(Used in Model 7-10)

VICTOR RADIOLA 16
(AS USED IN MODEL 7-10)

The Radiola used in combination with the Ortho-

phonie Victrola in the model 7-10 is a six -tube battery
operated tuned radio frequency receiver of the in-
side or outside antenna type, employing three stages
of radio frequency amplification, a detector, and two
stages of audio amplification. The UX-112-A power
tube is used in the last stage of audio amplification.
The Radiotrons UX-201-A are used in all the other
stages and in the detector.
Most of the common causes of trouble can be
located and corrected by the tests given below. In
making the tests the use of a Weston Radio Seta Fig I

Tester is recommended. If this is not available, a. Remove Radiotrone from all sockets except the one to the
high resistance voltmeter of reliable manufacture, extreme right. Filament regulation in this socket can
having two scales (0-7.5 and 0-150 volts), should be be obtained by means of the Volume Control.
used. The meter should be equipped with flexible b. Place the two leads connected to the low scale of the volt-
insulated leads. meter in the two filament socket contacts of Radiotron
Socket No. 2 marked "+" and `-"
as shown in Fig. 1;
regulate the voltage to 5 volts.
1. Test "A," "B" and "C" batteries or battery
c. Remove the +67VB lead from the battery terminal, and
eliminator if used. connect this lead to the 7.5 terminal of the meter; con-
nect from the + terminal of the meter to the +673 B on
2. Test all cable connections to the batteries. the "B" battery.
d. Note the deflection of the meter when the latter is con-
3. Test loudspeaker unit. nected as described above, and compare this deflection
with that given by a tube which is known to be good.
The amount of deflection depends on (1) the meter used,
4. Test tubes. (2) the condition of the "B" batteries, and (3) the condi-
tion of the tube under test. (1) and (2) remaining un-
If the Weston Radio Set Tester is used, the tube changed, a comparative indication of the condition of the
various tubes can be obtained; in general a high deflection
tests can be made in the regular manner by placing indicates a good tube, and a low deflection indicates a
the plug in socket No. 1, Fig. 1. If the set tester poor tube.
is not available, the low scale of the voltmeter can e. All Radiotrons may be tested in the same manner. The
be used, the procedure being as follows: UX-112-A will ordinarily give a higher reading than the
UX-201-A.
 METER READING
5. The various Radiotrons, shown in Fig. 1,
Normal Faulty Fault
function as follows: C. 6.5 0 Oren first A.F. transformer secondary
1. First Radio Frequency Amplifier (UX-201-A). or broken wire.
2. Second Radio Frequency Amplifier (UX-201-A). Ge 6.5 0 Open second A. F. transformer second-
ary or broken wire.
3. Third Radio Frequency Amplifier (UX-201-A).
4. Detector (UX-201-A). c. FLATE TESTS-Using the "B" scale of the set tester or
5. First Stage Audio Frequency Amplifier (UX-201-A).
the high scale of the voltmeter, test the plate voltages
in the various sockets. If the voltmeter is used, the lead
6. Second Stage Audio Frequency Amplifier (UX-112-A). from the high voltage terminal should be placed in the
-A socket contact and the lead from the 4-downward
terminal in
Changing the Radiotrons UX-201-Ain the various the plate contact. With the power switch to
sockets will often improve reception. the "on" position, the fcllowing are the approximate
results which should be obtained.

6. If the receiver oscillates: METER READING

a. Various Radiotrons should be tried in sockets Nos. 2 and 3, Normal Faulty Fault
Fig. 1, until two have been found which cause a minimum Pt 63 0 Open R. F. coil or broken lead.
amount of oscillation. Px 67 0 Open R. F. coil or broken lead.
b If the set still continues to oscillate, the four leads under Pa 63 0 Open R. F. coil or broken lead.
the center radio frequency transformer should be exam- P, Open A. F. transformer primary or
ined and pushed as far away from this coil as possible. 36 0
broken wire.
Lengthening the antenna will also help to stop oscillation
as the eat has a tendency to oscillate more on a short an- Pb 122 0 Open A. F. transformer primary or
tenna than on a long antenna. In no case, however, broken wire.
should this length exceed 150 feet, including the lead-in. P. 118 0 Poor contact or broken wire on loud-
speaker unit.
7. If the trouble has not been located in the 8. If the trouble has not yet been located, connect
batteries or tubes, make the following tests to local- a 412 volt "C" battery and voltmeter as described in
ize the trouble in the set itself : (a) above, and proceed as follows:
a. FILAMENT TESTS-Observe if all the filaments light. a. Disconnect all batteries from the cable.
Any trouble in the filament circuit may be traced to: b. Test between the stator (stationary) plates and rotor
(1)Broken wire in cable. (rotating) plates of each tuning condenser. No deflection
(2) Broken contact on fixed resistor, 22, Fig. 2, in +A line. of the meter will indicate that there is a broken or loose
connection between the condensers and their respective
(3)Broken filament leads from resistor to sockets. coils or open circuits in the coils themselves.
(4)Poor socket contacts. c. Check all condensers to see that the rotor plates do not
(5)Leads to volume control, 10, Fig. 1, broken or loose. touch the stator plates as the Station Selector is being
(6)Contact arm on volume control not making proper con- turned.
tact. d. Reconnect the batteries.
(7) Open fuse (if need) in +A lead.
(8) Poor contact at battery terminals.
These tests can be made with a 412 volt "C"
battery connected in series with the low voltage GENERAL
scale of the voltmeter binding posts of a Weston
Radio Set Tester, or with a voltmeter described in 1. Adjustment of condenser drive cable.
Any slack in the condenser drive cable can be taken up
the beginning of this bulletin and connected as by tightening the adjusting screw shown in Fig. 1.
shown in Service Bulletin No. 5-A. All "B" and "C"
batteries should be disconnected when making fila- 2. Loose volume control contact.
ment tests. A loose volume control contact is often a cause of noisy
b. GRID TESTS-Reconnect the batteries; remove all tubes reception. If such a condition is found, the contact arm
from the sockets; and turn the Switch knob of the Weston should be bent until it makes a firm contact against the
Radio Set Tester to the "C" position, or using the low resistance strip.
scale of the 0-7.5 and 0-150 voltmeter, test the "C" 3. Operation with "B" battery eliminator not
battery voltage in sockets Nos. 5 and 6. No "C" battery supplying 6734 volts plate voltage.
reading will be obtainable from sockets 1, 2, 3 and 4. If
the voltmeter is used, place the lead connected to the + The Radiola requires 67;4 volts for the radio frequency
terminal of the meter in a "-A" contact, and the lead amplifiers and 45 volts for the detector. A higher amplifier
connected to the 7.5 terminal of the meter in the "G" plate voltage may cause the set to oscillate and will seriously
contact shown in Fig. 1. With the power switch pushed affect the tone quality. A lower detector plate voltage will
down to the "on" position, the following are the approxi- reduce the efficiency of the receiver. On battery eliminators
mate results which should be obtained. not equipped to supply 6734 volts, the use of a potentiometer
in excess of 18,000 ohms resistance is recommended. The
Note-All readings listed below were made with a Weston General Radio Potentiometer No. 371 (18,000 ohms) is
Radio Set Tester Type 519. Readings will vary slightly, suggested for this purpose. Connection should be made
depending upon the meter used and the condition of the across the +45 and the +90 (+Det. and +Amps.) taps of the
batteries. eliminator, with the contact arm connected to the 67% volt
lead of the cable. Using a high resistance voltmeter of the
proper scale reading and connected across the -B and the
contact arm, adjust the voltage to 6734 volts.
The Philco units AB -6562B (60 cycle) and A13-65228 (25
cycle) are equipped to supply 6734 volts on the +Amps. tap
and 45 volts on the +Det. tap. When using any other Philco
unit, the small cartridge resistance should be replaced with
a similar cartridge resistance of 50,000 ohms.
Battery cable colors.
A+6V Yellow.
A- Black with yellow tracer.
B-
C+ }Green with red and blue tracers.
Ground
B+Det. 45V Maroon.
B+Amp. 67V Maroon and red.
B+Pwr. 135V Red.
Fig. 2 C-Pwr. 9V Black with green tracer.
Tp RNTENNR.

J {

-Eh. 'Ks WITH REDTR

U
RRD/o[q
J
o
-
$wTTERY C431.E

BLACK.

MAROON.

LOUDSPEAKER
UHIr
-J
2- 45Y. B Bqr.
HEqvY Dory
136
+45 - +45

MREOON 0
+22} 1223
t
+2O2í
RED.
Tm i

+-4

.c2-4h1!
_
8NT Fust

O10
YELLOW.
% G7buND
tl.c,..,iu.<...... ...... iir-rr
Battery Cable Diagram
 Victor Model 7-11

Victor Model 7-26

VICTOR RADIOLA 18 GENERAL TESTS
(Used in Models 7-11 and 7-26) In making the Radiotron tests and the radio set
tests described below, the use of a Weston Radio Set
The Victor Radiola 18, used in combination with Tester Type 537 or 519 is recommended. The radio
the Models 7-11 and 7-26, is a six tube power opera- set tests can be made with a high resistance volt-
ted, tuned radio frequency receiver of the antenna meter of reliable manufacture such as the Weston
type, similar in design to the Radiola 17 used in the Model 489, if the Radio Set Tester is not available.
Model 7-25. Three stages of radio frequency ampli- All voltage readings listed in this bulletin were
fication are used with the Radiotrons UX-226, a made with the Weston Radio Set Tester Type 519,
detector with the UY-227, and two stages of audio having a 0-8, 0-200 volt scale (high resistance type) ;
amplification with the UX-226 in the first stage and with a line voltage of 110 volts; with the voltage
the UX-171-A in the second. The Radiola is de- switch of the socket power unit in the 110 volt po-
signed for operation on 105 to 125 volts, 50 to 60 sition; and with all tubes in place. Readings will
cycles, alternating current, and consumes approxi- vary according to the meter used, the line voltage,
mately 40 watts. It is also available with a special and the condition of the tubes.
power unit for operation on 105 to 125 volts, 25 to
40 cycles. In making these tests, a period of approximately
The Radiola used in the 7-26 differs slightly from 45 seconds must elapse each time the power is turned
that of the 7-11 in that it has a terminal strip of on. This interval is required for the UY -227 to heat
three connectors at the left end of the set when properly.
facing the front. Two of these are connected to the
primary of the first audio frequency transformer, 1. RADIOTRON TESTS-The tests for the Radio-
one to the tapped portion and the other to the end. trons should be made in accordance with the in-
The third terminal is connected to the UY -227 plate structions furnished with the Radio Set Tester. Do
resistor. not attempt to make a filament voltage reading un-
The socket power unit used in the 7-11 is the SPU less the Type 537 tester is used. A special adaptor is
30, and differs from that of the 7-26, which uses the
available from the Weston Electrical Instrument Co.
SPU 34, only in its greater length of A. C. power for use in testing the UY -227 Radiotrons. Any
supply cable. Radiotrons which have been found to be defective
in these tests should be replaced.
CONTROLS
If the Weston Radio Set Tester is not available,
1. POWER SWITCH-This switch mounted on each Radiotron should be replaced successively with
the radio panel controls the alternating current a new one of the proper type, so that the poor ones
power input to the socket power unit. Should it be can be located and permanently replaced.
necessary to remove the switch from the Radiola
panel or the socket power unit from the base panel, 2. RADIOLA SOCKET TESTS-Make the grid
the power plug should first be disconnected from and plate tests according to the instructions fur-
the instrument. Remove the screws in the base of nished with the radio set tester. Any open circuits
the SPU; remove the switch from the Radiola panel or defects in the various voltage supplies can be
by taking off the knob and escutcheon and unscrew- found by these tests. Before looking for such de-
ing the nut which holds the switch to the panel. fects in the wiring of the radio set, (I) examine the
2. STATION SELECTOR-The three tuning con- cable terminals at the socket power unit terminal
densers are controlled from the station selector knob strip and note that all terminals are making proper
which operates the drive mechanism. Any slack in contact and are properly spaced; and (2) make the
the condenser drive cable can be taken up by tight- socket power unit teats described in subject No. 3.
ening the adjusting screw shown in Fig. 2. The socket power unit must not be operated at
3. VOLUME CONTROL-The volume control any time with the cable disconnected, nor with all
is connected in the antenna circuit. The control the Radiotrons removed from their sockets.
knob operates the volume control contact arm. A
loose contact at this point may often be a cause of
noisy reception or no reception. If such a condition
is found, the control arm should be bent until it
makes a firm contact against the resistance strip.
4. VOLTAGE SWITCH-This two position switch
s own in Fig. 5 is connected in the primary circuit
of the power transformer in the socket power unit,
and serves to compensate for high and low voltage
in the power supply. The proper setting of the
switch at the time of installation is important and
will effect the operation of the Radiola as well as the
life of the Radiotrons.
The switch is locked in position for operation on
120 volts when the instrument leaves the factory.
The power line voltage should be measured with an
A. C. voltmeter of the proper scale reading. If the
voltage is above 115 volts, this position need not be
changed. If the voltage is 115 volts or lower, loosen
the two screws at each end of the terminal strip
shield, and lift the shield clear of the switch. Place Fig. 3 Bottom View of Radiola
the switch in the 110 volt position. and replace the
shield.
 A. FILAMENT TESTS-Trouble in the filament SOCKET FAULT
circuit of the radio set can be traced to: 1 Open primary first R. F. transformer or broken wire.
2 Open primary second R. F. transformer, open concen-
a. Broken wire in cable. trated coil ,mounted inside R. F. transformer) or
b. Poor or shorted contact on terminal strip. broken wire.
c. Poor socket contacts. 3 Open primary third R. F. transformer, open concen-
d. Defective power unit. trated coil or broken wire.
4 Open primary first audio transformer, open resistor 19,
B. GRID TESTS-Using the "C" position of the shorted condenser 18, Fig. 3, or broken wire. In 7-26-
break in wiring to transfer switch, poor contact in
Weston Radio Set Tester, or the high scale of the
separate voltmeter, test the "C" voltage in all
sockets except the detector.
The "C" voltage readings listed below were made
at a line voltage of 110 volts, with the voltage switch
of the socket power unit in the 110 volt position and
with all tubes in place. These readings will vary
with different tubes, different meters, and different
line voltages. In addition to the faults listed below,
a defective power unit may cause a variation from
the normal readings. /NM
f///
Normal Faulty Fault
G1 9 volts 0 Open volume control, poor contact, or
broken wire.
G2 9 " 0 Open 1st R. F. transformer secondary, or
broken wire.
G3 9 " 0 Open 2nd R. F. transformer secondary, or
broken wire.
G5 9 " O Open 1st audio transformer secondary, or
broken wire.
G6 29 " 0 Open 2nd audio transformer secondary, or Fig. 2 --Ton View of Radiola
broken wire.
transfer switch, or poor contact at terminal strip of
C. PLATE TESTS- three connectors.
a. USING WESTON RADIO SET TESTER-Using the "B" 5 Open primary second audio transformer or broken wire.
scale, test the plate voltages in the various sockets with 6 Broken wire.
the tubes in place. These readings will also vary with
different tubes, and different line voltages. A defective 3. POWER UNIT TESTS --Remove the terminal
power unit may cause variations from these readilngs. strip shield from the socket power unit, and make
NOTE: In the 7-26 the transfer switch must be placed in the following voltage tests before looking for trouble
the "Radio" position before the readings can be taken. in the radio set.
Normal Faulty Fault A. FILAMENT SUPPLY-Test the filament volt-
PI 136 volts 0 Open primary of first R. F. transformer or age across each of the three pairs of filament binding
broken wire.
P2 136 " 0 Open primary of second R. F. transformer posts shown in Fig. 4, using either the Weston Type
open concentrated coil (mounted inside of 537 Tester or a separate A. C. voltmeter of the proper
R. F. transformer) or broken wire. scale reading. The following are the correct meter
P3 135 " 0 Open primary of third R. F. transformer, readings which should be obtained:
open concentrated coil or broken wire.
P4 48 " 0 Open primary of first audio transformer, UX-226
UY -227
1.5 Volts A. C.
2.25 Volts A. C
open resistor 19, shorted condenser 18, Fig.
3, or broken wire. In 7 -26--break in wiring UX-171-A 5.0 Volts A. C
to transfer switch, poor contact in transfer
switch, or poor contact at terminal strip
of three connectors.
P5 130 " 0 Open primary of second audio transformer
or broken wire. SOCKET POWER UNIT
P6 144 " 0 Broken wire.
110 VOLTS, A. C.

CREEN

UX-171-A UX-226 ÚV_227 UX-226 UX-226 UX-226

H H
0 0
030 o20 I 01
RED AND MAROON
RED
°5° ó C
BLUE
BLACK WITH
rep_ PG. PG J PG P0
G ) BLACK WITH

2ND AUD. IST AUD DET. 3RD-R:F. ND R.F. 15T R:F. GREEN TRACER YELLOW TRACER
POWER

Fig. I -Top Front View of Radio Tube Sockets SWITCH

b. USING SEPARATE VOLTMETER-Connect the low volt-

Fig. 4-Socket Power Unit Terminals
age scale of the meter in series with a 4!,5 volt "C" battery
and make the continuity tests as outlined below.
(1) Turn the power switch to the left to the off position.
(2) Test between either filament contact of socket No.
1 and the plate "P" contact. (See Fig. ). Y A lack of filament voltage at the terminals may
(3) Make the same tests for all the other amplifier be caused by:
sockets.
(4) When testing the detector socket, place the leads a. Poor socket contact at A. C. outlet or in A. C. power
in the "C" and the "P" contacts. supply line.
b. Broken wires or connection in A. C. power supply or in
An open circuit in the "B" supply of the power unit power unit wiring.
in addition to the points listed below will be indicated c. Defective power transformer No. 24, Fig. 5.
in this test by a zero reading of the meter.
 B. PLATE SUPPLY --Using the high range volt-
meter binding posts of the set tester or the high
range scale of the separate D. C. voltmeter, test be-
tween one of the A-UX-226 terminals and the
+135B terminal (see Fig. 4), and between one of the
A-UX-171-A terminals and the P-UX-171-A. The
following are the approximate readings which
should be obtained.
+135-B 136 Volts
P-UX-171-A 160 Volts
A lack of voltage at either of these points may be
caused by:
a. Burnt out or low emission UX-280.
b. Poor socket contact in power supply line.
c. Broken wires or connections in power supply or in power
unit wiring.
d. Open resistor unit No.33, Fig.6, or No.34 for "+ 135 B" only
e. Shorted condenser unit No. 25, Fig. 5.
f. Open choke No. 23, Fig. 5.
Fig. 5-Top of Socket Power Unit
If the trouble has not been located in the cable
in the socket power unit, refer back to the list or of
possible faults in subject No. 2, and isolate the de-
fect in the wiring or connections of the radio set.
4. SPECIAL TESTS-
A. EXCESSIVE HUM-Excessive hum may be
caused by:
a. Reversed polarity of power plug. Remove plug and reverse
the position of the prongs.
b. Low emission Radiotron UX-280.
c. Shorted Condenser 18, Fig. 3.
d. Open ground connection to frame of Radiola.
e. Defective resistor unit 33, Fig. 6.

B. AUDIO HOWL-This condition can often be

eliminated by:
a. Replacing the detector Radiotron UY -227 with a new one.
b. Interchanging the UX-226 Radiotrons.
c. Adjusting compensating condenser, as shown in Fig. 7,
Fig. 6-Bottom of Socket Power Unit
by means of the neutralizing screw driver shown in Fig. 2
of Supplement to Victor Service Bulletin No. 5-A. The
following procedure should be used:
1) Break the paper seal over the opening in the bottom
i

of the tuning condenser assembly.

(2) Tune the Radiola to a broadcasting station on the
lower wave lengths.
(3) Turn the volume control all the way to the right.
(4) Turn the condenser screw in a clockwise direction
until the receiver goes into oscillation.
(5) Turn the screw slightly in a counter -clockwise
direction until the oscillation stops and the howl
is eliminated.
6) Replace the paper seal to prevent tampering with
the adjustment.
C. CONDENSER TESTS-If the trouble has not
yet been located, connect a 414 volt "C" battery in
series with the low voltage binding posts of the radio
set tester or the separate voltmeter, and proceed as
follows:
a. Turn the power switch to the lef t-(off).
b. Test between the stator (stationary) plates and rotor
(rotating) plates of each tuning condenser. No deflection
of the meter will indicate that there is a broken or loose
connection between the condensers and their respective
coils, or open circuits in the coils.
c. Turn the station selector knob, observing if any of the
plates touch while they are being rotated. A short circuit 7-Method of Adjusting
Fig.
in these condensers will cause a lack of reception. Compensating Condenser
 .... ,-
- ilr ..

PINJACNS
T7 REPRODUCER
C (A
emj,c1._,1: Iú
pN!U3IIIÔF:Ì

X
1r'X.n, 1
'IIA':'iA..XXXAI.11
piunln,ºiuniºi./.I
aXmX.,X'-'-.mmv- _.,-.

KIM
E

f
.

-POWER TRANS-
FORMER CON-
NECTIONS.
COLOR CODE WIRING OF SPU 30 AND 34
1. Black with green tracer.
2. Red.
3. Red and maroon.
4. Green.

OUTPUT CONDEN-
C
- _ . ta
sf
5. Blue.
6. Black with yellow tracer.
SER AND ONLINE, l 7. Black.
AND FILTER CON- 8. Yellow.
DENSERCoNNEcT-
IONS. I,a 9. Maroon.
FILTER
REACTOR
10. Black with red tracer.
CONNECTIONS. 11. Red and black.
12. Brown.
13. Red with green tracer.
14. Green with red tracer.
TOHOE
A.C.

\ SPU-30. I o
70 PaaER
l
JWI70W.

Fig. 8-Bottom of Socket Power Unit Showing

Wiring Between Terminals

BLUE
1I
BLACK WITN BLUE TRACER BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER BROWN
® 110 VOLTS, A. C.

VOLTAGE SWITCH
RADIOLA #18 L

U% -171-A UX126 UY -227 UX-226 UX-226 0426

#1 -C BLACK WITH
GREEN TRACER

El3 #2 PLATE 171A RED

#3 +135B RED AND MAROON

#4 FII: IJX171A GREEN

f
#5 Fii.UY227 BLUE

BLACK WTRA
ITH
OPERATING LIGHT
#6 Fil.UX226
YELLOW CER
GREEN

ROTARY POWER SWITCH

BROWN

BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER

REPRODUCING UNIT -Radiola Cable Wiring Diagram of 7-11

 RNTENNR.
LAW
.s RRD,OLR %D(LTAMDRROf.
2AL.T ,'rRL,. rEN.

RIDioVOLaNEEveTRN.
UX-120. ux-L 4.0M22T uX-ººL.

r.

L _

CF/LRWNT ONTREo.

222.
IIPGROUND.
[OLEO
ur-ttf ÿ\
FLRNENT
BL /KR W/TN GREEN TRRCER 7..4\ SEW.
2 RED.
3 RED END MRROON. -0-.MT,NG
4 GREEN.

9
D

7
BLUE.
.w..yXWIT/ere-40w 77NICER
15441.2112
GROWN
IA« TRACER
Saco WiTND'ERR TAKER ,00-qCOVf
T T
a--' i

RHO f/LTLR:

Wiring Diagram Victor Radiola 18

(Used in 7-11)

RDTENNR.
CONRENTyT dM,lC1Y.
RRDNOLR 4M(FORELECTRöE Die r
r 12N1NO RRLLWELbNTRLN.

LLKlºL. UX-tN OVE 27 DX -2,24 . UX-/7/41.

NC JP,
!/. -C. Al AAA.
8
,R2. RRTELw-n/AI
RAU

I
AKIN
AR4.T,LRN(NTDX-/NE¡ .L

CADI
L.TNRNENT I

TTRANEJ
h.
_____ _
ß. rLENENT
VEER,VEER,DRU- t*
4. LKNT.
M1AOT

y
CROWD.
Rt. R4ó0.
R4 RB TRMR4

RECORD M. RO.
IDI,aNE COLOR
CONTROL NORA WIN GREEN TRACER
RED
\N. RED END MEROON
GREEN
Scut
N4
TRLVXRER
L WIN rEL LOW TRACER
R L RER
DLRCRMTN OLLC TRACER
R2 3MTCM DROWN g 1''
Q IRECDRD Ob.R,T,ENJ

ro
WNW WIR 01041
DL xR
RACER. ,oae CONE AND RATER.

Wiring Diagram Electrola Radiola 7-26

 COMPARTMENT LICHT
REO

YELLOW
Q
7GREEN
PICKUP ILOW
MOTOR
SWITCH

BROWN

COMPARTMENT
LIGHT SWITCH

"-INDUCTION DISC MOTOR

ROD

BROWN

RECORD

VOLUME
CONTROL
IROMN

TRANSFER SWITCH

GREEN
BLACK

BROWN BROWN
BLUE REO

Y BLACK WITH BLUE TRACER BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER

VOLTAS SWITCH 110 VOLTS, A. C.

o. na U, 226 A.
BUCK WITH
AI -C GREEN TRACER

#2 PUTE 17IA REO

#3 *1751 REO AND MAROON

1 FL -11%.171A GREEN

FLUA -ni BLUE

FB: U%.22B
IUCR WITH
YELLOW TRACER

CREEN

BLACK
ROTARY POWER SWITCH

BROWN

BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER

REPRODUCING UNIT

-Cable Wiring Diagram Electrola Radiola No. 7-26

7.-.wrrnNw UNr M ravir

CoMq(Nlwr !N/ar*
r
r4 4Mao vtt/w+e CONrroL .Woo/o<w N ïZ
err-zze ur-rzi ur-res ur.err u.rex ro

o
e

¡iii_ItE
ti
3

, 11" E

IB MAW,/
YMM
oOrPr r
-

ti
PXPMENr1/eEr 4 4 L
F4.6941er tor-/rIw ###/..74
b
o.-#4SE -J e 9

0 rfNMlFOAhIEN 411-PN'aO4CwYi MAIT L/iÑT

44p;W0 4 rPO rol'
.42119
kanw
Co,,,-'

A=.
rANNJF6q 4
!N/TLN
/r2090 P191/rA?MI hNfN.I e.I PYL TEN

L2CMOP2rA/C
Pi w9M4,xFx/44[r90.00PTo

Wiring Diagram Electrola Radiola 7-26 Above Serial No. 12000

 Victor Model 7-25
The tests for the Amplifier Radiotrons should
VICTOR RADIOLA 17 be made in accordance with the instructions furn-
(As Used in Model 7-25) ished with the Radio Set Tester. Do not attempt to
'Ehe Radiola used in combination with the Ortho- make a filament voltage setting. A special adaptor
phonic Victrola in the Model 7-25 is a six tube tuned will be made available by the Weston Electrical In-
radio frequency receiver of the antenna type, em- strument Co. for use in connection with the Weston
ploying three stages of radio frequency amplification, Radio Set Tester for testing the UY -227 Radiotrons.
a detector, and two stages of audio frequency ampli- Any Radiotrons which have been found to be defec-
fication. The UX-171-A power tube isUX-226 used in the tive in these tests, should be replaced.
last stage of audio amplification; the the UY -227 tubes
in
in all the other amplifier stages; and If the Weston Radio Set Tester is not available,
the detector. each Radiotron should be replaced successively with
input power a new one of the proper type, so that the poor ones
A snap switch controlling the 110 volt can be located and permanently replaced.
to the socket power unit is mounted on the the front
of the Radiola panel. \%'hen removing radio 2. INTERCHANGING RADIOTRONS-C hang-
set from the cabinet, it is first necessary to remove
with a ing the Radiotrons UX-226 in their respective sockets
this switch which is held to the escutcheon will often improve reception. Never place the
small ring. The switch can be readily removed by UX-171-A Radiotron in any socket but the one to
unscrewing the ring. the extreme left. Never place a UX-226 Radiotron
A two position switch in the primary circuit
of in the UX-171-A socket as the higher filament volt-
the power transformer in the socket power unit age would burn out the UX-226 Radiotron.
serves to compensate for high and lowbevoltage in
the power supply. The switch shouldline voltage placed in
is
the 120 volt position when the power position when
above 115 volts and in the 110 volt
the voltage is 115 or lower. UX-226 UX-226 UX-226 UX-226
When servicing the installation, make the pre-
UX-171
H
ÚY_227

liminary tests described in subjects 1, 2, 3, and 4, l

di
P4GC 3 I

below before assuming that the trouble lies in the

(
G l PG
S PG IPG
e2 PG
set. In making these tests a period theof approximately 20. AUD.
I

Ier.AUD \D ET. 3 er.-R:F 2a.-R:F. I er.-R:F.

45 seconds must elapse each time power switch

TOP FRONT VIEW OF RADIO TUBE SOCKETS.
is turned on. This interval is required for the
FIG. 2.

Radiotron UY -227 to heat properly.

1. RADIOTRON TESTS-In making the
Radio-
tron tests, and the radio set tests described later, tht
3. CABLE TESTS-Examine the cable terminals
at the socket power unit terminal strip and on the
radio set. Be sure that all of these terminals are
10 110 VOLTS A. C.
making proper contact and are properly spaced.

GREEN WITH RED IRACER

-
SOCRAI PONER UNIT

r -

GREEN
4. TESTING SOCKET POWER UNIT-Using
the high range voltmeter binding posts of the Set
Tester or the high range scale of the separate volt-
meter.
MAROON a. Test between the -B+C terminal and B+ Det. and B+
Ampi. terminals (See Fig. 1).
b. Test between either of the A UX-171-A terminals and B+
RED AND MAROON

Pwr. for the UX-171-A plate voltage. The following are

RIO
CLUE

CIRCA WITH GREEN TRACER

CLACK WITH TELION RACER the approximate readings which should be obtained:
B+ Det. 50 Volts
B+ Ampl. 153 "
11+ Pwr. 160 "
c. A lack of voltage at any of these points may be caused
by:
(Il Broken wires or connections.
(2) Open resistor unit, No. 34, Fig. 6.
Fig. 1
(3) Shorted condenser unit, No. 26, Fig. 5.

Open choke, No. 25, Fig. 5..

(4)
(51 Burnt out UX-280 filament.
above,
d. If the readings vary radically from those given
use of a Weston Radio Set 'l'ester Type 519 is recom- the Radiotron UX-280 should be replaced.
mended. The radio set tests, however, can be made refer to Fig. 1
e. If the filaments in the radio set fail to light, of the socket
with a high resistance voltmeter of reliable manu- volt- and check the various filament terminals
facture such as the Weston Model No. 489. Allwith a
power unit in the following manner:
age readings listed in this bulletin were made (1) Remove the pilot lamp from its socket.
Weston Radio Set Tester, Type 519, having a 0-8, 0-200 (2) Make s to e two terminals
volt scale (high resistance type) with a line voltage p
of the lamp with two wiresrary about haboutone foot long.
of 110 volts; with the voltage switch of the socket (3) Test the filament power supply by touching the
of filament
power unit in the 110 volt position, and with all tubes pair of wires across each separate pairstrip;
terminals on the power unit terminal that is.
in place. Readings will vary according to the meter across the two UX-171-A terminals, the two UX-226
the tubes.
used, the line voltage, and the conditionbeof lower terminals, and the two UY -227 terminals.
Readings with the 0-150 volt meter will than
NOTE:-The UX-226 and UY -227 will not illuminate the lamp
those listed because of the lower meter resistance. as brightly as the UX-171-A.
 c. PLATE TESTS WITH WESTON RADIO SET TESTER-
5. TESTING RADIOLA PANEL-If the trouble Using the "B" scale of the Set Tester, teat the plate
has not been located in the socket power unit or voltages in the various sockets with the tubes in place.
in the tubes, make the following tests to localize These readings will also vary with different tubes, and
different line voltages.
the trouble in the set itself.
Normal Faulty Fault
a. FILAMENT TESTS-Assuming that filament voltage is Pl 155 volts 0 Open primary of 1st R. F. transformer or
present at the socket power unit terminal strip, trouble broken wire.
in the filament circuit of the radio set can be traced to:
(1) Broken wire in cable.
l'2 155 " 0 Open primary of 2nd R. F. transformer or
broken wire.
(2) Poor or shorted contact on radio terminal strip. l'3 155 " 0 Open primary of 3rd R. F. transformer or
(3) Broken filament leads from radio terminal strip broken wire.
to socket contacts. P4 17:0 " 0 Open primary of let audio transformer or
(4) Poor socket contacts. broken wire.
b. GRID TESTS.-Snap the power switch to the "on"
Pe 150 " 0 Open primary of 2nd audio transformer or
position. Using the "C" position of the Weston Radio broken wire.
Set Tester, or the high scale of the separate voltmeter, Pe 145 " 0 Open primary of output transformer or
test the "C" voltage in all sockets except the detector. broken wire.

The following "C" voltage readings were made at

a line voltage of 110 volts, with the voltage switch
of the socket power unit in the 110 volt position and
with all tubes in place. These readings will vary
with different tubes, different meters, and different
Une voltages.

Fig. 5
PLATE TESTS WITH SEPARATE VOLTMETER-
When using the separate voltmeter for the plate
tests, the low voltage scale of the meter should be
Fig. 3 connected in serles with a 4;2 volt "C" battery.
(1) Snap the power switch to the "off" position.
Normal Faulty Fault (2) Test between either filament contact of socket
GI 10 volts 0 Open volume control, poor contact, or No. 1 and the plate "P" contact. (See Fig. 2).
broken wire. (3) Make the same tests for all the other amplifier
grid resistorOpen
R. F. transformer secondary, or bbroken
G2 10 " 0 sockets.
wire. (4) When testing the detector socket, place the leads
in the "C" and the "P" contacts.
63 10 0 en Fig.
b
ROp F. transformer secondary, or broken (5) Assuming that voltage was present at the radio
terminal strip, a lack of voltage in the sockets can
wire.
0 Open let audio transformer secondary, or be traced to:
G6 10 "
broken wire. Socket Fault
G6 28 " 0 Open 2nd audio transformer secondary, 1 Open primary ist R. F. transformer or broken wire.
or broken wire. 2 Open primary 2nd R. F. transformer or broken wire.
3 Open primary 3rd R. F. transformer or broken wire.
4 Open primary ist A. F. transformer or broken wire.
5 Open primary 2nd A. F. transformer or broken wire.
6 Open primary output transformer or broken wire.
NOTE:-A shorted condenser, either 19 or 20, Fig. 4, will cause
a lack of plate voltage.

Fig. 4
Fig. 6
 6. CONDENSER TESTS-If the trouble has
yet been located, connect a 4% volt "C" batterynotin
series with the low voltage binding posts of the
Radio Set Tester or the separate voltmeter, and pro-
ceed as follows:
a. Disconnect the cable from the socket power unit terminal
strip.
b. Test between the stator (stationary) platee and rotor
(rotating) plates of each tuning condenser. No deflection
of the meter will indicate that there is a broken or loose
connection between the condensers and their respective
coils or open circuits in the coils themselves.
c. Check all condensers to see that the rotor plates do not
touch the stator plates as the Station Selector is being
turned.
d. Re -connect the cable to the socket power unit.

GENERAL
1. ADJUSTMENT OF CONDENSER DRIVE
CABLE-Any slack in the condenser drive cable can
be taken up by tightening the adjusting screw shown
Fig. 3.
2. LOOSE VOLUME CONTROL CONTACT-A
loose volume control contact may often be a cause
of noisy reception or no reception. If such a con-
dition is found, the contact arm should be bent un-
til it makes a firm contact against the resistance
strip.

tre. L.n. s de.S,....,

Nett: -
Far -131-C Or Ur, 71 Use C.r..ee
Acwnt.T T.n.Nrr.Ma.ee» A-UK -171.
aeccN Awew 3.,.ren

Nor'

Rwt.o Tory r<rver

TEwnarre. Jraea.

To Grov
IL

ALL.. The...
DcwewWrN
v Rare7awerw
Garen
/10 AC

Grce.e Lr,rrvRea T rcer

ROCKET
-
Pew'a ()err
G.r e Werw
Rea Terra

R»
BLACK Wow
Gwetn 7i.e'w

'r»ga»Ma..w-
Loa»
Un,.
SNwata

MrwooN Getan
Re n Av» Mero.n
Rea Meseea.
bocce 4,rn Geecn Tr.c,R Bwc
.D1.1.eaW,. e..ow n.. ce.

Nor.
 \ /RNTENNR.

LOUDS PE *KEPI UNIT

00
VO.YMC Cold TROL
UX226 -22r UY -224 ux-177
x3 --+
UX-2 26 (/X-226 u+%
o
o QVrpUr

T
*2

PILOT L IGNT

Glee UND Cal

d//
/0

df 1

7
r- n._

~ PbWER SWITCII

i 1
A oors
q C
oi n
Cot_ oR. . a

E
2 C t_a B..4 Tho
3
P,
/±3t_9 ot_r.óE
I

V.a LINe
4 n if.rN RED Tee, E,
w W r, 4Rern r1.cr. eor EnSwT/Nr
L RED SWITCH
7 Per 0.F1,40 MRRoeN
8 Myqe
9 Ç,»»»8 w,rw RED -fleece, 4/O
/O 'PEEN
I/ 23,4C»W/rHEt_..oWT.c., L- J
SPU 18

Wiring Diagram for Victor Radioaa 17

(As Used in Model 7-25)
 Victor Model VE -8-60

rwu

euCrw,r n«.n
1

Àí177

Wiring Diagram for Electrola 8-60

eiIY,r
7Mxcew

v.,
zroc.,23 Po., s« »DI,.
m.,r .....
c,.
Ousoc Sumac.
Ours,,, Po,non,

BROWN.
Loon,n. loon LC" 5,or or CAIAreN.

8-60 Input Transformer Wiring

itr
A

411
44.4 Fa w :0 .11

Parts and Wiring of Power -Amplifier Unit AP 997 (RPA 5 Special)

(Used in 8-60)
 SERVICING
Below is a summary of the most common points on the 4. If motor runs and pilot lamp lights in turntable com-
Power Unit which will require service from time to time. CAU- partment but the Tomcat tubes do not light:
TION should be observed while working on this Unit to have
the alternating current supply cut off. (a) Check voltage in Tomcat female socket.
(b) If no voltage at this point, trouble lies in broken or
DO NOT IMMEDIATELY CONCLUDE THAT THE TROUBLE loose connections or in the cable itself between this
IS IN THE TOMCAT UNTIL BOTH THE TUBES IN THE TOM-
point and the toggle switch on the motor board.
CAT AND THE RADIO SET HAVE BEEN THOROUGHLY
TESTED AS A DEFECTIVE TUBE AT ANY POINT WILL Cc) If voltage is O. K. at this point and ballast lamp
EFFECT ALL VOLTAGE READINGS. does not light the trouble may be:
1. Either one of the 216B rectifier tubes may be defective. Firstly-A defective ballast lamp.
This will be noticed by low voltage in tube sockets, low volume, Secondly-A defective UP591 resistor.
failure of Set to operate or a difference in plate temperature of
tubes. Thirdly-If both of the above are O. K. the trouble is in
the Tomcat in which case same should be removed and
2. One of filaments in ballast tube may be burnt out in a new one installed in its stead.
which case Victrola or Set will not operate. This defect can be
very easily detected because the remaining half of the filament Fourthly-The above test will also hold good on the
burns very bright. The 216B and the UX210 filaments will 216B and the UX210, namely, if these tubes do not
burn correspondingly low. light, even after spares have been tried in the various
sockets, the trouble is in the Tomcat.
3. The UX210 may be burnt out or of low emission in which
case the voltage at the tube sockets will be O. K., but the out-
5. It might be well to mention here that the UP591 resistor
put will be low or no production whatever.
serves a double purpose:
4. It is well in all cases to remove the AC Plug from the
Tomcat, open the safety switch and check to see that all con- (a) To close the AC circuit through the ballast tube
nections are tightened properly. (b) To shunt a resistance in the direct current circuit
to maintain a constant B Battery voltage.
If the above does not correct the trouble, the following is
a more comprehensive test and if followed, should permit of While it is possible or the resistor to be functioning properly
locating and correcting any and all faults which may show up in the AC circuit allowing the ballast tube to light, it still may
in this equipment. be open or short circuited as far as the DC resistance le con-
cerned, in which case the following will be noted in the results
both on Victrola and Radio:
(a) If the resistance is short circuited, there will be no
We will assume that none of the tubes light in the Radio
B Battery voltage.
Set or Power Unit. To locate this trouble, the steps are:
(b) If the resistance is open, the B Battery voltage will
1. Check monitor lamp In turntable compartment. If be higher than it should be.
monitor lamp does not light also is an indication of an open
in the alternating current line. Note:-On the Hyperion, the
6. Assuming that all tubes light in the Tomcat, and Radio
toggle switch controls this lamp, while on the Borgia II, the
toggle switch controls only the supply to the Tomcat, the Set is equipped with tested tubes and the volume on either
lamp being controlled automatically by raising and lowering record or Radio is low:
the lid. (a) Check tube voltage on Set.
(b) If voltages are low, it will be found that one of the
2. Next check to see if motor will run. 216B rectifying tubes need replacing. If this does not
(a) If motor runs, disconnect alternating current plug rectify trouble, remove AC plug from Tomcat, open
from alternating current supply socket. safety lock, lift hinged cover and check all connections
b) Short circuit toggle control switch on motor board. to see that they are properly tightened in Tomcat.
It might be well to mention here that if the plates of the
(c) Replace AC plug in socket. If this rectifies trouble,
replace or repair toggle switch. rectifying tubes become red hot, one or both of the filter con-
densers has become short-circuited, in which event it will be
(d) If this does not complete the AC supplly, remove necessary to replace the Tomcat. In this case, there will be no
the short on the switch and proceed. output voltage to the pick-up or to the Radio Set.
(e) Check for broken or loose connections or a defective
(c) If the voltages check O. K., the UX210 power am-
cable between where the AC feed for the Power Unit taps plifying tube should be replaced.
on to the main feed and the female plug at the Tomcat.
(d) If volume still is low, place set switch on Radio,
If all the previous tests have been made correctly, the trouble
will be found in making the last test.
tune in station and check with earphones or external
loud speaker in last stage jack.
3. If motor does not run nor the tubes light. e) If volume is greater than received through the horn
on the Set, the loud speaking unit is defective and should
(a) Check AC supply socket either with a motor or a be replaced with a new one or adjusted.
test lamp.
(b) If this checks O. K. examine AC plug on end of (f) If volume still is low, repeat the test only using the
cord for broken or loose connections. first stage jack. If the broadcast comes in as strong or
(c) If this checks O. K.. test between motor plug and
stronger than on the second stage Jack, the trouble is in
plug at current supply for broken or loose connections the Tomcat.
or an open cable. (g) If the volume is very low at this point, it would be
well to check the receiving set. (The test for this will be
If previous tests were carried out properly trouble will be
ocated at this point. taken up under separate cover.)
 When these pulsations have passed through the
7. Another cause for non -operation of Victrola and Radio. amplifying tubes they are then carried to the speaker
even though all the Tomcat tubes light, will be found in the unit where they set in motion its diaphragm thus
ballast tube. This tube has two filaments in parallel and will generating sound waves in the air.
still light even though one of the filaments is burnt out The These sound waves may be generated in large
une filament will pass enough current to light the tubes, but volume by use of a large diaphragm such as the
the capacity will be so low that it will not operate the Set. This cone or, if a small diaphragm is used, may be ampli-
condition of the ballast tube is readily discernable as the one fied by use of a horn.
remaining filament will light much brighter and the other Another advantage of this method of reproduc-
tubes in the Tomcat will have less brilliancy. tion is the ease with which volume of sound may be
8. If the change -over switch on the front of the Radio
varied by the volume control which varies the
panel is in the Radio position and the Set operates properly, amount of amplification of the electrical pulsations
but when it is thrown to record or electric pick-up fails to before delivery to the amplifying tubes.
operate, the trouble is in: The following data covers the servicing of the
pick-up unit
(a) The volume control.
(b) Connections leading from the volume control. 1st. Place the pick-up on the tone arm of
(c) The resistance mounted on the frame of the Radio the machine, turn on the tubes and
Set which takes care of the filament voltage drop when have the machine in readiness to play
using the electric pick-up. a record.
(d) The connections leading from this point (1st audio) 2nd. Tap the needle lightly with your finger,
can be checked: if open, tube will not light, or tube first on one side and then on the other.
may be shorted or burnt out. Each time you touch the needle there
(e) Pick-up may not be making contact. should be a loud click through the
(f) Pick-up may be defective.
speaker.
All tests mentioned herein Include continuity tests of cables (A) If the click is louder when striking the
between the various points. The tubes operate in series and needle on one side than it is on the
are shunted by resistance, so if any tube is removed,' it changes other, the electric pick-up is out of
not only the voltage in that socket, but the voltage on all re- adjustment. To determine this, remove
maining tubes and sockets, although no injury can hhppen to the metal case from the pick-up and
the tubes. note whether the vibrating armature
which is operated by the needle is
directly in the center between the two
pole pieces of the magnet. If the vibrat-
ELECTRIC PICK-UP ing armature is off center remove the
holding clamp from the magnet allow-
The electric pick-up Is the introduction of an ing further accessibility to the working
electrical method of sound reproduction.
parts. You will then see two knurled
The pick-up is mainly composed of three major nuts locked in place by ordinary nuts.
By loosening the lock nuts you can
parts: adjust the knurled nuts until the
1st. The permanent magnet. vibrating armature is again in the
2nd. A small generating. coil. center of the pole pieces.
3rd. The vibrating armature on the end of
which is the needle holder. (B) If there Is no click at all in the loud
The generating coil, both ends of which run to speaker, put a record on the turntable
the volume control, is placed in the center of the start the motor, put the electric pick-
permanent magnet which causes a constant flow of up in place and let the record play.
magnetic lines of force through the coil. In order (a) Take a pair of ear phones, place
to generate current in the coil it is necessary to the tips across the two connections of
vary the magnetic field, so, in order to accomplish the volume control to which the leads
this, the vibrating armature is placed in the center run from the pick-up. You should hear
of the coil with a needle inserted in the needle holder. the record playing with very low volume.
As the needle vibrates back and forth along the
grooves in the record the density of the magnetic (b) If there isn't sound at this
field is changed correspondingly generating pulsat- point, remove the pick-up wires from
ing electric current which corresponds to sound the volume control and check for open
waves of music. The advantage of this method of circuit from this point through the
reproduction is that these electrical pulsations can pick-up. (NOTE:-Occasionally the
be amplified many times by means of radio ampli- contacts in the tone arm are not spring-
fying tubes. ing into position properly.)
 Victor Model 9-2 (Borgia II)

Leon

dhasr+.w.
>.w».

Wiring Diagram for Borgia n

c.rr,fcQMe rEP.Mi,y.oc.s

Fig. 6-Internal Wiring Diagram of Catacomb

PICKUP AND AMPLIFIER SAME AS MODEL 8-60
 VICTOR RADIOLA 28
(AC Operated)
The Radiola used in combination with the m
Electrola in models Borgia II (9-2), Hyperion (15-1), e se

o
x

9-40, 9-25 and 9-55, is an eight tube superheterodyne o 000

000 o o
P
óó ó'o o ó ó ó
receiver, employing a loop antenna for signal pickup 0 ó0 +- 000
O00
+- 0 00
+ -
000
+ -
and obtaining its D. C. operating current from an e
A. C. source through a rectifier -power -amplifier de-
vice. Fig. 2-Top of Catacomb
Figure 1 shows in diagramatic form the sequence
of tubes in the circuit, and the paths followed by
the various currents which are denoted as follows: low resistance type of 519 tester. In the cases of the
plate circuit and grid circuit tests, sections 11, 12, 17
Incoming Frequency and 18, the readings obtained may be slightly higher
Oscillator Frequency than those given if the high resistance tester is used.
._._._._._ Intermediate Frequency
Audio Frequency 7. With the transfer switch in the record posi-

hr.Drr nr
+

\
Flre.sLoo.

tws.Ir, oa.
To

Der Mr
VX-210.

Nf, N.r Va«.

tion, plug the tester in which a good Radiotron has
been inserted, into No. 7 socket and check A, B and
C voltages, noting the following:
8. "A" voltage less than 2.9 with battery setting
at 10 will indicate:
i..i
-J a. Shorted 20 Mfd. condenser unit.
b. Poor contacts in transfer switch.
Fig. 1-Radiotron Sequence c. Loose connection at power -amplifier unit terminal
(Borgia II reversed end for end) board or radio panel terminal strip.
If the difficulty encountered does not render the d. Open in section 8 of resistance strip. (See Fig. 3.)
radio entirely inoperative the cause of the trouble e. Defective Rectron or ballast tube.
and its remedy will be found under Sections 24 to f. Resistance strip not properly tightened to catacomb.
32 of this bulletin. Otherwise the following pro- g. Open filter choke in power -amplifier unit or broken
cedure should serve to isolate the cause of the connections to speaker field if moving coil type speaker
trouble. or six inch cone are used.
1. Remove back panel and note whether or not h. Open 220 ohm filament resistor (located on frame
the tubes in the power -amplifier unit are lit, and of radio panel).
that the ballast tube is operating correctly as in- 9. "A" voltage in excess of 3.3 with battery
dicated by considerable heat dissipation.
setting at 0 will indicate:'
2. Should all Radiotrons and Rectrons fail to a. Open in section 7 of resistance strip. (See Fig. 3.)
operate, look for: b. If high A voltage is accompanied by no B voltage
a. House lighting current not on or loose connection at reading the trouble may be caused by a shorted 2 Mfd.
outlet. condenser in the power -amplifier unit, shorted unit in
condenser bank or a shorted resistor in UP -591.
b. Defective UP -591 resistor. Ample time should be allowed for the ballast tube to
heat properly before concluding that filament voltage
c. Burnt out filaments of ballast tube or poor contact is excessive.
in socket.
d. Operating switch not making contact. 10. No "B" voltage will indicate:
3. If the ballast tube glows excessively but other a. Refer to section 9 (b).
Radiotrons and Rectrons light below normal bril- b. Loose connection at power -amplifier unit terminal
liancy, trouble may be due to an open filament in board or radio panel terminal strip.
the ballast tube which has two parallel filaments. c. Poor contacts in first stage jack.
d. Open primary of input transformer in the power -
4. If the plates of both Rectrons heat exces- amplifier unit.
sively, trouble may be caused by a shorted 4 or 7 Mfd.
filter condenser in the power-amplifier unit, but if 11. High "B" voltage (normal approximately 85)
the plate of only one Rectron turns red hot, this will indicate:
Rectron is carrying part of the load of the other Rec- a. Open resistor in UP -591. Refer to section 23 and Fig. 5.
tron which is defective.
12. No "C" voltage (normal approximately 2.5)
5. Should the plate of the UX-210 turn white will indicate:'
hot look for an open resistor or shorted 2 Mfd. con- a. Resistance strip not tightened to catacomb.
denser in the power -amplifier unit. b. Open transformer secondary or shorted condenser in
catacomb.
6. In making the following tests of circuits, Be sure tube in test box has no grid to filament short.
tubes and voltages, a Weston Radio Set Tester, Type
519 or equivalent is essential. It should be noted 13. After making the above tests, check all
that when the tester is plugged into any of the cata- Radiotrons in accordance with instructions accom-
comb sockets with the transfer switch in the radio panying tester, and replace any tubes found defective.
position it is necessary to have a tube in each of the 14. Insert plug connected to a pair of phones into
other six sockets and one in the tester in order to first stage jack. If normal operation of Electrola or
obtain correct readings. It might be well also to Radiola is noted at this point refer to section 20.
mention here that these tests were made using the Otherwise proceed as follows:
 15. With transfer switch in radio position, and Test from plate of UX-210 socket to filament of
volume control at 10, check A, B and C voltages in either Rectron socket. No deflection on the meter
all sockets, referring to Sec. 6 and to the following will indicate an open primary in the output trans-
suggestions and tablea. former or in the event that a moving coil speaker
or a six inch cone is used-an open choke in the fuzz
16. If filament voltage is 0 in all sockets the filter. Test from grid to filament of UX-210 socket.
transfer switch will probably be found to be making If no deflection is noted the trouble may be caused
poor contact. Low filament voltage in one socket by an open secondary of the input transformer or a
accompanied by abnormally high voltage in the loose contact between the moving arm and the re-
others indicates a shorted or partially shorted sistor of the hum control potentiometer.
section of the resistance strip. High filament voltage
in one socket accompanied by insufficient voltage Remove cable comb from the power -amplifier
in the others indicates an open section in the resist- unit and test between the two terminals on the unit
ance strip. If the defect is noted in No. 2 socket the marked "output." No reading here will indicate an
open secondary in the output transformer. Test
trouble may be in the volume control, which should between the two terminals on the cable comb which
be carefully examined for possible short circuit or
open circuit. It may be found that the arm does connect to the output terminals. If no reading is
not travel to the end of the resistor when the pointer obtained look for open winding in loudspeaker unit
is advanced to 10 in which case full voltage cannot or poor contacts in output Jack.
be obtained in No. 2 socket.
21. Resistance Strip Values-Fig. 3, illustrates
17. Plate Circuit Tests. the two types of filament resistance strips mounted
Socket Approx. on the catacombs of the A. C. operated models. On
No. Value Fault recent production section No. 2 of this strip has
1 24 Open transformer primary in catacomb.
2 66 Open transformer primary in catacomb.
3 70 Open in primary of R. F. coil or broken
connection.
4 72 Open transformer primary in catacomb.
5 74 Open in Osdilator Coil or broken connection.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Open transformer primary in catacomb,

`
6 32
shorted condenser in catacomb, or shorted
7
condenser in condenser bank.
Refer to section 10. N Gÿ

Grid Circuit Tests.

18. Fig. 3-A. C. Strip
The following is a list of faults indicated by 0
readings. been left open. This has been compensated for by
Socket Approx lowering the resistance of the volume control
No. Value Fault (See note (a) rheostat which is shunted across section No. 2 of the
1 3 Open in secondary of R. F. coil. resistance strip. When replacing volume control
2 3 Open transformer secondary In catacomb. resistors in models Borgia II and Hyperion it is ad-
loop or broken connection.
visable to use the new type resistors. It is then nec-
3 3 Open essary to cut the No. 2 winding in order to provide
4 3 Open transformer secondary in catacomb. correct filament voltage regulation in socket No. 2.
5 3 Open in grid coil of oscillator coil or broken
connection.
Borgia II and Hyperion _ 9-40,9-25 and 9-55 _
6 0 See note (b).
Sec. Lower Limit Upper Limit Lower Limit Upper Limit
7 Refer to section 12. 1 18.5 195 260 282
Note (a) A zero grid reading may also be caused by the 2 360 420 Open (See note)
resistance strip not being properly tightened 3 159 167 230 243
to catacomb, or a shorted section in the A. C. 4
strip. 151 159 191 203
5 126 134 173 191
Note (b) A slit reaaing will be obtained through the 117 123
grid leak if the high resistance type of test box 143 163
is used. A reversed deflection of the meter will 7 112 118 137 154
indicate a shorted grid condenser. 8 45 55 45 55
Using the voltmeter of the tester in series
19. Note:-In the early 9-40 model which has the 20.000 ohm
with a battery of suitable voltage and a pair of test volume control this section has a resistance of 240 to 260 ohms.
leads, test across each tuning condenser. If no read-
ing is obtained in thus testing any one tuning cir- 22.Resistance Strip Test.
cuit, examine condenser pig tails for possible broken
connection and all connections between condenser If a resistance bridge is not available, the values
and coil or between condenser and loop, if the loop of the various sections of the resistance strip can he
circuit is the one at fault. checked by the voltmeter-ammeter method, a cir-
cuit diagram of which is shown in Fig. 4. The
20. If, after making the foregoing tests, the resistance may be calculated using Ohm's law
instrument is still inoperative but normal, opera- by dividing the voltage by the current reading. If
tion is obtained in a pair of phones plugged into the the current is taken in milliamperes it is necessary
first audio Jack, the following tests should be made, to multiply the result by 1,000 to get the resistance
with the same equipment as specified in section 19, value in ohms.
making certain first that the power supply plug has
been disconnected.
 To resistance being measured the power -amplifier unit. This condenser may be
checked by temporarily disconnecting it and opera-
ting the Radiola noting if distortion ceases. Under
no condition should this condenser be left out
O-7
6 VOLTS permanently.
30-V( 29. Fluttering.
vvw
Fluttering is a loud hum having a 60 cycle base
Fig. 4-Wiring Diagram for Resistance Measurement and occurs at the resonant point when manipulat-
ing the dial drums. An audio choke which has been
23. UP -591Test. added to the circuit to prevent this may have be-
The same method of resistance measurement come open or disconnected. To test this choke for
shown in Fig. 4 can also be used to check the resist- continuity it is necessary to first disconnect it from
ance of the UP -591 resistor except that a 45 volt the circuit.
battery and suitable voltmeter will be required. The This choke is located inside the radio panel in
resistance of the UP -591 resistor should be approxi- the Hyperion, beneath the radio panel in the Borgia
mately 1,500 ohms. II either in the power -amplifier unit or in the back
of the cabinet in model 9-40.
30. If volume drops after Radiola has been in
operation for several minutes.
This condition is usually caused by a defective
Radiotron UV -876 or UV -886. This Radiotron after
having been in use for considerable time, may
develop a tendency to increase its resistance when
heated sufficiently to cause a drop in signal strength
Fig. 5-Bottom View of UP -591 Base Showing of the Radiola.
Internal Connections Diminishing of volume of this nature, which will
24. Excessive Hum. occur on any signals received, should not be con-
fused with "fading" of certain distant stations,
In models 9-40, 9-25 and 9-55 provisions have which is due to atmospheric conditions, and trans-
been made to minimize the hum audible from the mission characteristics.
loud speaker by means of a potentiometer, the knob
of which is located on the top of the power -amplifier 31. Lack of Sensitivity.
unit. This knob should be turned in either direction
until the hum is at a minimum. If the Radiola seems to have lost its ability for
distant reception, the cause of which could not be
25. Loose Rheostat or Volume Control Contacts. ascribed to unfavorable weather conditions, etc.,
The resistance cartridges in the Battery Setting the loop compensating condenser may be out of
and Volume Control rheostats will sometimes adjustment. A description of the necessary appa-
become dirty or oxidized, which will cause a grating ratus and the procedure for checking and correct-
noise in the loud speaker whenever these controls ing this adjustment will be found in Service Bulletin
No 18.
are turned. The resistance wire on the cartridges
should be brightened with a fine grade of sand paper 32. Oscillation.
to provide better contact with the contact arm. It is important not to confuse with oscillation
In some cases it may be necessary to loosen the -"Heterodyning," which occurs only when tuning
in certain stations and which sometimes can be
set screw holding the contact arm to the shaft and eliminated by tuning to the "lower peak" with the
to adjust the arm to obtain greater pressure on the right hand dial drum. Oscillation can sometimes
resistor, after which the set screw may be retight- be eliminated by interchanging the Radiotron in
ened. No. 3 socket with the other Radiotrons in the cata-
26. Acoustic Howl.
comb. In some cases it may be found that the R.
F. neutralizing condenser is disconnected, defective
This is caused by the microphonic action of the or out of adjustment. In models 9-2 and 15-1 this
UX-199 Radiotrons in the catacomb. The second is a fixed condenser mounted on the terminal strip
detector (No. 6) and the first audio (No. 7) tubes, of the catacomb, and if defective must be replaced.
are the most critical to this condition and should In the later models, however, it is a small condenser
be replaced or interchanged with the other Radio- mounted beneath the panel and its capacity may
trons having less microphonic tendencies. be varied by means of an insulated screw driver.
In few cases will it be necessary to make any adjust-
27. Blasting. ment of this condenser.
In some cases a type of oscillation commonly
Blasting is usually caused by an improperly called "parasitics" will be present, and cannot be
adjusted speaker or a low emission Radiotron eliminated by adjusting the neutralizing condenser
UX-210. or by replacing the catacomb. It can
eliminated, however, by placing a smallusually be
cartridge
28. Distortion. type neutralizing condenser or other small capacity
A low emission UX-210 may cause distortion. across catacomb terminals 7 and 10 (see Fig. 6).
This Radiotron can sometimes be reactivated by Oscillation may also be due to the neutralizing
operating the power -amplifier unit for a period of condenser in the catacomb being out of adjust-
ten minutes with the two Rectrons removed ment, in which case it will be necessary to replace
the catacomb.
Distortion may originate in a leaky 2 Mfd. con-
denser which is connected between the primary of
the power transformer and the +A -B terminal in
 Victor Model 9-3 (Borgia I)

LOOP

u
s Our Pur
7k ,aroanrw

OuTYT
Jwcrt.
4 3 4
.4.
7
ç
C
o
_.
º t^o-
4 l/ /t
A
IS 18

4.
n d

LouDf[wA'[R
V.., *
/on ,a, voit B
3

Hwrriwr
O /a* 9rw.r Jwcx

i SlT7/NB
I

O!CILxrax. Loot ñxDlO

Cavairvsew wvsanasx. Fx(Lty,fNOT.
cavDtMllw

,__.-\7
.SkCEcrox
PxuMS
Panel Assembly Diagram for Borgia I
 L J

brinmdm.Wiwuw. 0
Twe C.rwtaw

o
, -- o --.o . -o

Radiola 28 Catacomb Continuity Diagram for Model 9-3

RPceiverTieiwa/Strp

Aforaw Bloch with Red Tracer

o
JecaidJtere Jack Condenser
Maroon ano Red Leo
Output 000 -Terminals
Red
Brown
ach with
d Traced
Trons[p
grown Via
or Brown 0 0
Bloch Red éllowJ(Moraon and Red
Red with Red Troce, ellowwdhRedTrocerJ

LoudS,aker Bl BalferyGioup- Bio

Unit
"CZ"Bolfery
Bloch wRh Grtra min
zr 4s

Yellow
+A
GrtenTraer Y//arTraer
got** Block
Ú
N Tiocer Dark R

o
Block \Red
-A ark +41C

(Green Cwn4f 6rtaiw,Vh

A "gallery Group. Yet% en wi/kr) + 8knXern BZ " Rolfery
C-['Dcffey
Battery Connection Diagram
 ictur Model 9-15
L....... RF..n L! Cone

r l..,rt.
u J+...
(ñ. N.rm.rr.) Nº ca-w.
/ ga,c.r
C cMNA
3. jjro,
1. reRro`n.+<rt
'iwc. Nrrn Fkuow
5

7 ,('Iñ.NON.
wsw nMctR

O. Ow Mn daur Macaw
e9
11j
wsw WW1
Arne., i.4.4. W...r. Th..,
ww7M.rw

QM+wopv.I..ORA
Ij gRw lrn >be pplac,..
H )34.440,414,44i d4 .v 7MRUR

Wiring Diagram for 9-15

/.rrwv+. ww« aF
to.y.rRn,v.
LeV

R, Q+.ur .c..
.'
w 13-13A ..... swo..

r
4 -rr4 444s. 444444
,VDRrriwr
ig011- Lo.. 6510.411.
1els r />

7a-
a44-..r
r
r; r1 rl r; ri
ri ri (;

Hr
;úl1lIJ
,
I

r
iri
ÿl i1 4Ì Ìe r1
II
1

¡º}! LI w r¡
L. úllill;uJ r'
,,.ärl,s
MI 1^ I Ñ,

Ne+ -Ni,.. er.......u..D.....L.... S,..A.T...

,. Fw awr.

.c.214Lf .0 .4 41. 1.11111,44.10 .

64.....444444..44414444.4.

BL.e. 1,r. B.e.. 1..... N.. .O.u. ----------------

O.e.eer....wt.
..rf
_-_Qi. O
O.r..e.[.

St `

Y..w....hew....-hl .44444.4441.444e.

64.

...ºa.
earr.e. B -Z

y
..r,e.... .
e.
i

.... ..... d...

tl,.r...e Q41414* /4

-Battery Connection Diagram

 Victor Model 9-16

/WM
II

ar
¡MII ;MIR nlltll iMlx t. (tee

ae
3 e ói! -'
YxaM

-
` _/
e-
mommin mi= IiHNI
Mr MINI
(MAI)

tMp

MINIM txl'-.®.
or J -MIR'
filiali It
MMrMIx
11l lYll
RI(
1110 Iflix
MI
I Ma lnlllr
IIMü-IIST AA
-i e flint
V WM MilM Il
Mix M IMAM
it111 DAM --II
Mow rrtx rinl 1ML0-furt n m
11C-t Nipw.
A.1rÌ rllx uMEN HAM
iiNttrim
I t
tut. nn jit IRCIx--I
MC

tYlx fxYtÚ IlLplYu1 pA

MI - wIr

M! x11Y plxx lIMt1

nYR IlM1
InuIroMMMnIM
rMx nn Mpxx INMI MIwi--
MOM MINI -MINIMI

w litlll
WMn inlM KIM
Ohm MAIM

V1`iring Diagram Electrola Radiola 9-16

Color Code
1. Brown
2. Blue
3. Yellow
4. Black with Red
Tracer
5. Red and Maroon
6. Red
7. Black with Yellow
Tracer
8. Green
9. Black
10. Light Brown
11. Red and Black
12. Maroon

-Bottom of Power Amplifier Unit AP -736-B, showing wiring between

terminals
 VICTOR RADIOLA 18 t
Used in Model 9-16
FIL

FIL.
+ ITS B
UX
22
I26
RED
U BLUE
LACA -YELLOW TRACER argiln
-8
The Victor Radiola 18 used in the model 9-16 is 9C
BLACK -RED TRACER
BLACK -GREEN TRACER :;IN
similar to that used in the 7-11 and the 7-26, but is PLATE UY 227 BROWN -WHITE TRACER
3111999T
modified for power -amplifier operation. Three .Ar#edrir Via:
UM CONTROL -, RADIOLA .I8 SPECIAL

stages of tuned radio frequency amplification are

used with the Radiotrons UX-226, and a detector
with the UY -227. The two stages of audio ampli-
fication are used in the power -amplifier unit,
AP -736-B.
The Radiola is designed for operation on 105 to
125 volts, 50 to 60 cycles alternating current. Special
equipment is available for operation on 105 to 125 RADIO PILOT 116111

volts, 25 to 40 cycles. Fig. 1-Radiola Sockets and Terminal Strip

GENERAL TESTS
In making the Radiotron tests and the radio set A. FILAMENT TESTS-Trouble in the filament
tests described below, the use of a Weston Radio Set circuit of the radio set can be traced to:
Tester Type 537 or 519 is recommended. The radio a. Broken wire in cable.
h. Poor or shorted contact on terminal strip.
set tests can be made with a high resistance volt- c. Poor socket contacts.
meter of reliable manufacture such as the Weston
Model 489, if the Radio Set Tester is not available. B. GRID TESTS --Using the "C" position of the
All voltage readings listed in this bulletin were Weston Radio Set Tesler, or the high scale of the
made with the Weston Radio Set Tester Type 519, separate voltmeter, test the "C" voltage in all
having a 0-8, 0-200 volt scale (high resistance type) sockets except the detector. When using the sepa-
with a line voltage of 110 volts; with the voltage rate voltmeter, place the negative lead in the "G"
switch of the socket power unit in the 110 volt po- socket contact as shown in Fig. 1, and the positive
sition; and with all tubes in place. Readings will
vary according to the meter used, the line voltage,
and the condition of the tubes.

1. RADIOTRON TESTS-The tests for the Radio-

trons should be made in accordance with the in-

,t
structions furnished with the Radio Set Tester. Do
not attempt to make a filament voltage reading un- /////
less the Type 537 Tester is used. A special adaptor is !l! Il
1/ l I 11

available from the Weston Electrical Instrument Co.

for use in testing the UY -227 Radiotrons. Any I¡JNIl ' l!{l!'' '
Radiotrons which have been found to be defective '^''!+1
in these tests should be replaced.
If the Weston Radio Set Tester is not available,
each Radiotron should be replaced successively with
a new one of the proper type, so that the poor ones
can be located and permanently replaced.
A period of approximately 45 seconds must Fig. 2-Top View of Radiola
elapse each time the power switch is turned on; this
interval is required for the UY -227 to heat properly.
2. RADIOLA SOCKET TESTS-Place the transfer lead in either filament (F) contact. When testing the
switch in the "Radio" position and make the grid UY-227, place the positive lead in the "C" contact.
and plate tests according to the instructions fur- The "C" voltage readings listed below were made
nished with the Radio Set Tester. It is important at a line voltage of 110 volts, with the voltage switch
that the tests be made with all Radiotrons in po- of the socket power unit in the 110 volt position and
sition. Any open circuits or defects in the various with all tubes in place. These readings will vary
voltage supplies can be found by these tests. with different tubes, different meters, and different
IMPORTANT-Before assuming that the trouble line voltages.
lies in the radio set, (1) examine the cable terminals. Normal Faulty Fault
noting whether they are making proper contact and C1 9 volts 0 Open volume control, poor contact, shorted,
are properly spaced: and (2) make the terminal or broken wire.
G2 9 volts 0 Open 1st R. F. transformer secondary,
strip voltage tests described in Subject No. 3 below shorted, or broken wire.
to determine whether the power -amplifier unit is G3 9 volts O Open 2nd R. F. transformer secondary,
shorted, or broken wire.
delivering the proper voltages.
 B. PLATE SUPPLY-Using the high range volt-
meter binding posts of the Set Tester or the high
range scale of the separate D. C. voltmeter, test
between the -B and the +135B terminal (See Fig.
I) and between the -B and Plate UY -227 terminal.
The following are the approximate readings which
should be obtained:
Between -B and +135B 135 volts
Between -B and P-UY -227 45 volts
A lack of voltage at either of these points may be
caused by:
a. Burnt out or low emission UX-281 In power -amplifier.
b. Poor socket contact in A. C. power supply line.
c. Poor contact at power -amplifier terminal strip, or
broken wire in cable.
d. Open, or short circuit ln wiring or internal parts or
power -amplifier unit. (See Supplement to Service
of Radiola Bulletin No. 1, dated July 15, 1928.)
Fig. 3-Bottom View
C. PLATE TESTS-Using the "B" scale of the 4. SPECIAL TESTS-
Weston Radio Set Tester or the high voltage scale A. E."C'-s.... :BUM-Excessive hum may be
of the separate voltmeter, test the plate voltages in caused by:
the various sockets with the tubes in place. When a. Reversed polarity of power plug. Remove plug and
reverse the position of the prongs.
using the separate voltmeter, all tubes should be b. Low emission Radiotron UX-28i.
in place except the one under test. The positive c. Hum control potentiometers out of adjustment.
lead of the meter should be placed in the "P" con- See card, attached to inside of Electrola back panel,
tact and the negative lead in either filament con- or instruction book for proper method of adjustment.
tact. d. Open ground connection to frame of Radiola.
Normal Faulty Fault B. AUDIO HOWL-This condition should be
P1 123 volts 0 Open primary of first R. F. transformer, eliminated by one or more of the following:
broken, or shorted wire.
a. Replacing the detector Radiotron UY -227 with a new
P2 122 volts 0 Open primary of second R. F. transformer, one.
open concentrated coil (mounted inside of
R. F. transformer), broken, or shorted b. Interchanging the UX-226 Radiotrons.
wire. c. Adjusting compensating condenser, as shown in Fig.
P3 122 volts O Open primary of third R. F. transformer. 4, by means of the neutralizing screw driver shown
P4 45 volts 0 Open, or short circuit in wiring or con- in Fig. 2 of Supplement to Service Bulletin No. 5-A.
nections between P terminal of UY -227 The following procedure should be used:
socket and Plate UY -227 on terminal 1. Break the paper seal over the opening in the
strip) open circuit in wiring to transfer bottom of the tuning condenser assembly.
switch.
2. Tune the Radiola to a broadcasting station
on the lower wave lengths.
3. TERMINAL STRIP TESTS-If the voltage 3. Turn the volume control all the way to the
readings observed in the previous tests are not cor- right.
rect, make the following tests at the terminal strip 4. Turn the condenser screw in a clockwise direc-
tion until the receiver goes into oscillation.
before assuming that the fault lies in the radio set:

A. FILAMENT TESTS-Test the filament voltage 45 OC 115

across each of the two pairs of filament terminals

shown in Fig. I, using either the Weston Type 537
Tester or a separate A. C. voltmeter of the proper
scale reading. The following are the correct read-
ings which should be obtained: PLATE
P.U.
SLACK WITH BROWN TRACER
BROWN
-SC SLACK WITH CREEN TRACER
UX-226 1.5 volts A. C. -1 SLACK WITH REO TRACER
U Y-227 2.25 volts A. C. LINK MAROON
.1391 RED AND MAROON

lack of filament voltage at these terminals may 00221 SLACK

FILAMENT
A WITH YELLOW TRACER

be caused by: FILAMENT UTt2T SLUE

a. Poor socket contact at A. C. outlet or in A. C. power

supply line.
b. Broken wires or connection in A. C. power supply or
in power-amplifier unit wiring. -Terminal Strip of Power Amplifier Unit
c. Defective power transformer in power-amplifier unit.
AP-736-B-showing proper voltages across
various terminals.
d. Broken wire in cable.
 5 Turn the screw slightly in a counter -clockwise
direction until the oscillation stops and the
howl le eliminated.
6. Replace the paper seal to prevent tampering
with the adjustment.,

C. CONDENSER TESTS-If the trouble has not

yet been located, connect a 4y1 volt "C" battery in
series with the low voltage binding posts of the
Radio Set Tester or the separate voltmeter, and
proceed as follows:
a. Turn the power switch to the off position.
b. Test between the stator (stationary) plates and rotor
(rotating) platee of each tuning condenser. No deflec-
tion of the meter will indicate that there is a broken
or loose connection between the condensers and their
respective coils, or open circuits in the coils.
c. Turn the station selector knob, observing if any of the
plates touch while they are being rotated. A short
circuit in these condensers will cause a lack of recep-
tion.

4-Method of Adjusting
Fig.
Compensating Condenser
 Victor Model 9-18

C7.'.PAFr.k:.:i1 :UP
r--BAOWM
MOTOR
SWITCH
IIIMe111
GREEN
GREEN

l
BLUE ELECTRIC
PICKUP

INPUT CAEN
TRANSFORMER

CONDENSER

MOTOR
---- GREEN

BED AND MAROON

u
RECORSLAWA
BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER
VOLUME
CONTROL VOICE COIL SNORTING
A:-ic ATTACHNE T

SWÌTCdR POWER
STRITCI

!UM!!A
BLUE
BROWN
ROO AND MAROON
WITH BROWN TRACER
COMPARTMENT
BLACK
LACK
LUMP SWITCH
REO

-r
GREEN

N DETECTOR[ CATHODE BROWN

1MPL6NR RATS RED AND M;A00N

GRIO-BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER
RESISTOR BLACK

RADIOLA RADIO PILOT LIGHT

12}.,62

GREEN
+ CLJE
TO ANTENNA

1 0 GROUND
L BLACK WITH BLUE TRACER
-- BROWN
AEO
GRIEN
TUNING METER
CUELA

YELLOW BAOKN

IOS CO VOLTS
CREEN PILOT LIGHT AC.
REPRODUCING UNIT

BUCA
-YELLOW
FIELO

911yiiI+tu
N.-CROWN

FILAMENT VOLUME CONTROL GREEN

INPUT -BROWN
FILAMENT DETECTORS BLUE
OSCILLATOR PUTE MAROON FILAMINT AMPLIFIERS BLACK WITH YELLOW TRACER
Y. C. -BUCA WITS GREEN TRACER PILOT GREEN
OUTPUT BLUE AMPLIFIER CATHODE BLACK AND GREEN
OUTPUT- BLACK AMPLIFIER PLATE RED ANA MAROON
MAS BLACK
DETECTOR CATHODE BLACK WITH RED TRACER

Cable Wiring Diagram Electrola Radiola No. 9-18

 o
o
o
o
-0
o

NNV Zy

AAA, JAA,
00ió00040

00o 'or> ú
r--AAAA"-- Ñ
A

o
00900
00000II

i:
+e 00900
F,00000

N^r
l

e
e

" m

..0009.9

0000. 1
00000

R{{7AQ7A144/1/rN7J`
á
 Color Code
of Wiring
1. Black
2. Green
3. Blue
4. Red
5. Brown
6. Maroon
7. Yellow

Bottom of Power -Amplifier Unit, showing wiring between terminals

VICTOR RADIOLA 64 CONTROLS

(Used In Models 9-18, 9-54 Etnd 9-56) 1. STATION SELECTOR-The three tuning con-
The Victor Radiola 64 is a power operated super- densers are controlled from the station selector knob
heterodyne receiver, using eight Radiotrons UY -227, which operates the drive mechanism. A switch on
and is operated in conjunction with the power ampli- the control, operated by pushing the knob, short
fier unit AP -777-C, using a power stage of amplifica- circuits the voice coil of the reproducing unit while
tion with the UX-250, and two rectifiers UX-281. The tuning the instrument. Should it become necessary
circuit utilizes an untuned coupling stage of ampli- at any time to remove this knob, the set -screw can
fication, one stage of tuned radio frequency, a first be loosened by inserting a screw driver up through
detector, an oscillator, two stages of intermediate the hole in the radio panel. Any slack in the con-
frequency, a second detector, and an automatic denser drive cable can be taken up by tightening
volume control. the adjusting screw shown in Fig. 2. The tuning
switch mechanism is simple, and should not ordi-
DETECTAS UINODE-BROWN
narily require any adjustment.
METEI -NEO
WKMIn PLATE-NED ENO MAROON
EKED -TUCA MEIN MOIE TRACER
RESISTOR- RACE

PILOT LAMP

CREN

RR
ENTERRA

TO AROUND

RACE SITE RUM TRACER

IRONS
RIO

TO TANNIC METER

Fig. 1-Top Front View of Radiola

The second (power) detector operates at a high
plate voltage, producing sufficient power output to
operate the UX-250 Radiotron direct, thus elimina-
ting any distortion which might be present if an
intermediate audio stage were used.
The Radiola is designed for operation on 105 to
125 volts, 50 to 60 cycles, alternating current. Special
equipment is available for operation on 105 to 125
volts, 25 to 40 cycles. Fig. 2-Top of Radiola
 2. TUNING METER-The tuning meter is con- If the Radio Set Tester is not available, each
nected in the plate circuit of the radio frequency Radiotron should be replaced, successively, with a
and intermediate frequency amplifiers. The meter new one which is known to be in gGod operating
is so constructed that the needle remains at 10 on condition.
the scale while the instrument is turned off.
3. SENSITIVITY CONTROL-The sensitivity Any Radiotrons which have been found to be
control is a potentiometer connected in the antenna defective in these tests should be replaced.
circuit. A loose contact between the sensitivity
control contact arm and the resistance strip will be 2 RE -ARRANGING RADIOTRONS-Socket No.
a cause of noisy reception or no reception. If such 2, Fig. 1, the tuned radio frequency stage, is the
a condition is found, the control arm should be bent most critical for the selection of Radiotrons, and
until it makes a firm contact against the resistance socket No. 7, the second detector, is next in im-
strip. portance. In socket No. 2 place the Radiotron which
gives loudest reproduction on distant stations and
4. VOLUME CONTROL-The volume control is a which does not go into oscillation throughout the
potentiometer controlling the grid bias of the vol- entire tuning range of the instrument. Place in
ume control tube, which tube in turn controls the socket No. 7 the Radiotron which will best handle
grid bias of the radio frequency and intermediate large volume without distortion.
frequency tubes. The same adjustment for loose
contact arm as described in the sensitivity control
applies to the volume control. 3. RADIOLA SOCKET TESTS-If the trouble
GENERAL TESTS FOR FAULTY OPERATION
has not yet been located, make the grid and plate
In making the tests described below, the fol- voltage tests according to the instructions furnished
lowing equipment is suggested: with the Radio Set Tester.
Weston Radio Set Tester Model 537, type 1 or 2, If this test box is not available, the high resistance
equipped with adapter for testing amplifier Radio-
trons UY -227 or D. C. voltmeter described above can be substituted.
Weston Radio Set Tester Model 519, high resistance Great care should be observed when making the
type, with UY -227 adapter especially supplied for this tests with this meter that the terminals do not
model tester or come into contact with any part of the metal con-
High resistance D. C. voltmeter with double range struction of the set, since a high difference of po-
scale of 0-50, 0-250 volts, equipped with well insulated
leads and test plugs
tential exists between certain of the socket terminals
and and the frame.
A. C. voltmeter with a 0-4 volt scale (if Model 537 test
box is not available).

n n L7

s - - -

-_
TO RADIOLA 64 ,
TO REPRODUCING UNIT

Fig. 4-Power Amplifier Unit Terminals

Readings will vary with different line voltages,
different settings of the volume control, and differ- Fig. 5-Adjusting Compensating Condenser
ent tubes. It is important that the power switch
be turned off each time a tube is removed and the
adapter inserted. A period of approximately 45 Any open circuits or defects in the various volt-
seconds must elapse each time the power switch is age supplies can be detected by these tests. Before
turned on to allow the tubes to heat properly. looking for such defects in the wiring of the radio
set, (1) examine the cable terminals at the power
amplifier unit terminal strip, and note that all
1. RADIOTRON TESTS-The tests for the Radio- terminals are making proper contact and are proper-
trons should be made in accordance with the in- ly spaced; and (2) make the power amplifier ter-
structions furnished with the Radio Set Tester. A minal tests described in subject No. 4. Should it be
filament voltage reading when using the 519 test desired to remove the radio set from the cabinet for
box can be made by connecting a pair of wires to an testing, the three center terminals of the terminal
A. C. voltmeter with a 0-4 volt scale, and plugging strip of five connections cart be connected together,
these leads into the pin jacks on the side of the a- thus giving the same effect as placing the transfer
dapter. switch in the "Radio" position.
 A. FILAMENT TESTS-The filament voltages in the
various sockets will vary between 2.25 volts and 2.5 TERMINAL STRIP VOLTAGE READINGS
volts. Trouble in the filament circuit of the radio
set can be traced to: Test Between Voltage
a. Poor socket contacts. Det. Cath. and Bias 10 Volts D.
b. Poor or shorted contact on terminal strip. Ampl. Pl. and Ampl. Cath. C.
c. Broken wire in cable. Ampl. Cath. and Fil. Ampl. 185 Volts D. C.
d. Defective power unit. Det. Cath. and Fil. Det. 15 Volts D. C.
16 Volts D. C.
B. GRID TESTS-Using the "C" position of the Radio
Set Tester, or touching the C and G socket contacts
with the test leads of the separate voltmeter, test the Use 0-4 A. C. Voltmeter
"C" voltage in all sockets except the oscillator, No. Ampl. Fil. 2.75 Volts A. C.
6, Fig. 1. In addition to the faults listed below a de- Vol. Con. Fil.
fective power unit will cause variation from the nor- Det. F11. 2.8 Volts A. C.
2.8 Volts A. C.
mal readings.
A lack of voltage at any of the above points will
GRID VOLTAGE READINGS be a cause for faulty operation or no operation.
All Readings with Volume Control
in Maximum Position
Normal Faulty Fault
Cl 3 Volts 0 Open sensitivity control, poor contact,
shorted condenser 28, Fig. 3 broken wire.
Normal Faulty Fault
G2 3 Volts 0 Open first R. F. transformer secondary,
shorted condenser 28. Fig. 3 broken wire.
G3 10 Volts 0 Open second R. F. transformer secondary,
shorted by-pass condenser, or broken wire.
G4 15 Volts 0 Open secondary first I. F. transformer,
shorted condenser 28, Fig. 3 or broken wire.
G5 11 Volts 0 Open secondary second I. F. transformer,
shorted condenser 28, Fig. 3 or broken wire.
G7 22 Volts 0 Open secondary third I. F. transformer,
poor contact in transfer switch, or broken
wire.
G8 2 Volts 0 Open volume control, poor contact, open
1 Meg. resistor, shown at 26, Fig. 3, open
resistor 29, Fig. 3 poor contact in transfer
switch, or broken wire.
C. PLATE TESTS-Using the "B" scale of the Radio
Set Tester, or the high scale of the separate voltmeter,
test the plate voltages in the various sockets with the
tubes in place. A defective power unit may cause a
variation from these readings in addition to the
possible defects listed below.

PLATE VOLTAGE READINGS

All Readings with Volume Control
in Maximum Position COMPENSATING CONDENSER SHIELD
Normal Faulty Fault
P1 125 Volts 0 Transfer switch or tuning meter defective, Fig. 6-Back of Cabinet Removed Showing Location
shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2, open
primary of first radio frequency trans- of Compensating Condenser.
former, or broken Wire.
i'2 130 Volts 0 Transfer switch or tuning meter defective,
shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2, open
primary of second R. F. transformer, or
broken wire. ELECTROLA TESTS
P3 80 Volts 0 Shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2, open
primary of first I. F. transformer, or Trouble in the radio set when operating in the
broken wire.
l'4 150 Volts O Transfer switch or tuning meter defective. "Record" position can be traced to:
shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2, open
primary of second I. F. transformer, or 1. Open in either 5000 ohm resistor 26, Fig. 2.
broken wire. 2. Poor contact at terminal strip of five connectors.
15 150 Volts 0 Transfer switch or tuning meter defective.
shorted by-pass condenser 8. Fig. 2, open 3. Broken wire or cable.
primary of third I. F. transformer, or
broken wire.
P6 80 Volts 0 Shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2. open SPECIAL TESTS
primary of first I. F. transformer, or
broken wire.
P7 185 Volts 0 Shorted by-pass condenser 8, Fig. 2, open 1. EXCESSIVE HUM-Excessive hum may be
5000 ohm resistor 26, Fig. 3, or broken wire. caused by:
P8 75 Volte 0 Open 80000 ohm resistor 26, Fig. 3 open
resistor 29, or broken wire. A. Reversed polarity of power plug. Remove plug and
reverse position of the prongs.
4. POWER AMPLIFIER TERMINAL TESTS- B. Low emission Radiotron UX-28I.
With the Radiola in operation and with all terminals C. Hum control potentiometer out of adjustment. Ad-
connected to the terminal strip, make the following just with a screw driver until hum is a minimum.
voltage tests at the power amplifier terminal strip D. Open ground connection to frame of Radiola.
with the volume control at maximum. The high E. Lack of voltage across Ampl. Cath. and Amp. Fil.
or across Det. Cath. and Det. Fil.
voltage scale of the voltmeter should be used for F. Open center tap resistor 27, Fig. 3.
these tests.
 2. AUDIO HOWL-This condition may be caused 3. WEAK RECEPTION-This condition can be
by: caused by one or more of the following:
A. Incorrect operation of volume and sensitivity control A. Arrangement of tubes in Radiola. (For correct ar-
B. Arrangement of Radiotrons in the detector and am- rangement of tubes see subject 2 under General
plifier sockets. Tests for Faulty Operation.)
C. Open audio by-pass condenser. B. Compensating condenser out of adjustment. (See
D. Open ground connection to frame of Radiola. sub topic E under subject 2 above.)
E. Compensating condenser out of adjustment. Ad- C. Open or shorted resistor in Radiola.
justment can be made as shown in Figs. 5 and 6 by D. Low voltage from power amplifier unit. This point
means of the neutralizing screw driver part 18460. can be checked as described in subject 4 under Gen-
The following procedure should be used. eral Tests for Faulty Operation.
(1) Pull the radio panel forward as far as possible
(2) Loosen the four screws in the shield at the back 4. DISTORTION FROM POWERFUL STATIONS
of the chassis, and lift the shield away from the
chassis. -Distortion on powerful local stations will be noted
(3) Tune the Radiola to a broadcasting station on if the volume control is advanced too far. The con-
the lower wave lengths.
(4) Turn the volume control to the point of maxi-
trol should be set at the point where local stations
mum intensity and the sensitivity control all will be clearly received without distortion.
the way to the right.
(5) Insert the neutralizing screw driver in the con- Because of the high degree of sensitivity of the
denser adjustment screw, and turn the screw Radiola, it may be necessary in some cases,where
until the receiver goes into oscillation. an outside antenna is used, to obtain a further re-
(6) Turn the screw in the opposite direction until the duction in volume on powerful local stations than
oscillation Just stops.
(7) Check this adjustment for a station at approxi- that afforded by a minimum setting of the volume
mately the middle of the scale and for one near and sensitivity controls. A single pole switch can
the top of the scale, making certain that the be connected between the antenna lead-in and the
R. F. stage does not oscillate at any of these binding post on the back of the cabinet so that the
points.
(8) Replace the shield. antenna can be conveniently disconnected when de-
sired, and only the metal plate antenna used. The
switch should be closed for all other stations except
the powerful local.

Fig. 3-Bottom of Radiola

 Victor Model 9-25

k( g:9179i

---J Sa

ta
0 ì11°

ú
vu
Y

.112
e h

eoo

N
z
A`_/-
X
3
.
i

=ïJ
r:3_]eAA

L-17.7.737_

=3-

fj
 TOR MiTYN

l.eer.e. D..c Mer.w.

P... .e.

farcrw.r
Lo.o iIr w.r. (.4 r.

P r.I were, PAT, I./Hz'''.

R.oe.. »PRqC
7F.

D...r.r J.; eel

-711d
R.r.n.r.c NNNNAAAIIA'IIAAIII A1111 II 11..sw Wore Pro Ta
Swot.. Omit»
r wr.
®..r, rr we..e .w n

B
rPrn
.w...v - 9..
Da.e..
lettr..13Ave

'!LII?
Rrn

O( .c

E+,m....
a D.vr
P.v.

O.+s.

out N.r.O.v.T..
Pe.o+Lw.,I.

Powr.-N.rn./rec.. Ceta

Rea_

n
/sew.

n /
.erel G.....
O.wr,v Mn. Men
Rca
Rwr. Were/í...w
rt..... I., r.. Reza 7l1

`I.wesR.

-Wiring Diagram of Electrola Radiola No. 9-25

`la

Parts and Wiring of Power -Amplifier Units

SERVICE DATA ON PICKUP, RADIO RECEIVER AND AMPLIFIER SAME AS 9-2

 Victor Model 9-40 (Borgia)
L... c... .I C.,+n

o.
,i.s........s._.n.__

Wiring Diagram for Electrola 9-40

SERVICE DATA ON PICKUP,

RADIO RECEIVER AND AMPLIFIER
SAME AS MODEL 9-2

TlRM/NA[S OTR/P

9-40 Input Transformer Wiring

 Victor Model 9-54
AND

VICTOR MODEL 9-56

Le- eel areer
e,e
reÿr m.a,.
rro
Sriferfrir
CMrAUt

LIME
CJni[nif)Mf
Jewry.,

jerFn'r1;;YE re,.
ILL! raeGeer
.3- Pa

31.00
soe
Aleereir Mao«, N
9
-4-fawn -Má=
tt ato+n
rAowr -

n=i(rñiweroewo
IfIIM1iMFIrw -.Fr.wral - uwu
,sMar 4NAn

r
naAefnr
Mel Z..
=ix,irr(
Ieadefdeee Ann.
nueer
w/O.:11Wrt.KYr--- tzccr.nc tcrv
e.r.,
..X
lernrC
Mel
e..%C1v

"ctw wec 3_
: a.r..
vr re zt+.
O1I
Fw
rwrow, rw.-...nn..-NltaMf
-iwwwppp
MiAlt
wttGfiAq,Ir=YY/
rimer- ewr nwcn/te Tme
wrlqqvtclK znar

ANNE
rwwrAwwnu

a
nrr.ac

cR
QUIET nee; SWITCH reuon
I

J Amcor
axwenr
.nry___
Schematic Wiring Diagram Electrola Radiola 9-54

SERVICE DATA SAME AS MODEL 9-18

 Victor Model 9-55

À
f
3{1{
t --`19z?-

e
ï

<4 d

25C:
Z1=3 -1-

lA
Io

o
 If -_:

Parts and \ iring of Power -Amplifier Units

SERVICE DATA ON PICKUP, RADIO RECEIVER

AND AMPLIFIER SAME AS MODEL 9-2
 ictor Model 1.0-51

Nora: -A P-997 HAS I.1 OUTPUT

TRANSFORMER. A P-952 HAS 25:1.

FIELD OF CONE SPEAKER /N AP -952

REPLACED BY CHOKE COIL IN A P-997

UO VOLTS AC. 4C

l Jl (o

UX-2/69
L 4MF.
IfMF
14

2
r-12g2291.
/OlLotis J
UX-2/6B. 5
/724aOkCMx!
UV -d76 r117-2Pni

cameRen. Lem

vo.,... Ca.a.e. Ca .........

.e.. >mu
a..,

aQ
11
v.a.7..na
14.4ry4w144 latn

oe

W . Coen
Coen 4ecn2
*v.w

ai...a.t4 Me. O+a.a.ew.a[

1.4.47.4404.,
.,...m......... a

edefe ...xM's
_ _.
Avv....ueku 4410.4011.
Raum, 5c.nc. Guam.,

I}

9? 00000r.;
a.....,.....e.. CORD

le+n
_....]u
E..n bn. R..a
R iring Diagram for Automatic Orthophonic Electrola
No. 10-51
Showing connections between terminals of the various units. The
110 -volt wiring is shown by extra heavy lines.
 :
NI- JL(dI(/ey.
r- L

r-
44!
__J
e...u.
farrR.

4 t

O.si
L---__-
I

n.r..1RR.A.w1A ,g _ __9" 4L--- i1u

Iru
s..r..l.
ar,rer
itrMDYC{r1

Proem.
arRr..r s,.Rr.
Rrae
IwIUI B/B+.v

Yt COI

Wiring Diagram 10-51 above serial No. 800

00111018111111111 -f 1

001fAA111.. 110 3111101

\
71
rB.userz.., w
101AY1 [011101

2 no 11110,

IAB.1

11101WM
II11411P11A

Ari

O O
o O F3 tilo {
04 11

illo, .:I1 r1Ì ir11tr

HO I.O MArael, IPL 4voter ton

111 ..ÌIO4[1 IA.

010 1,10 00111100011 iAl[1
11111 F,I+ BA7F I1.1r1,
t fP10 1011101110011 A1áB1YtlAt 19
un
11111 FiIF frrr. irlrl,
175
nnB urm nn

Wiring Diagram for Automatic Orthophonic

Electrola
10-51 above serial No. 800,
 Victor Model 10-69

KIP PL
PIK
ECCENTRIC trI1R KDU MATEO
IWrtcM WITCO

Cl/MIKE tar

CYACITn

...MUM UM- tr1o+ M1111 - MAI

ISM IIIr1--i KACK nTe MAW TAND

ID'

ph
rear TUUI +- MK
KACK

AUK
ID--.. NAP -y ro KWIC
LPN ITALY Prig
1
YfIYTR

L
MIIII l
6r
Krrr 1IT1 WWII iU CD
WPIKA
KR
-KR
tnr srrtn
UmI-}
NM MI TKLr TYCO
I INN
MOM KUAR TII
ITKT MCP

J
A. C. Power Wiring Diagram Automatic Electrola No. 10-69 Below Serial No. 3501

AP- TES /EPE -tM/

!M
.af-A!OYTC/7 AC -C- AT- !es M! -ESE

2 á Mr -IMF - '-'4#3j3"
Cj3 OVrPDr
J
r/crEo
COR /MPlIfVKE
P/CRVP

I,l.. "r- },
4f 0,01, I

riOwrCRC
PCRV/ rlRM/NK AtOCMEï_ 11ÉwÁw 3

_-
I

va VAIE cAa!
yT
cO1TROL
MECP
SRORTi1L SR/TCR

GREEN
46fVRM
31
'I
L- `,.
p
- 1 7
I

-KACM %,

Vs
TRANSITER J1,/TCN
!RECORD AJJ/T/ONl
E 1
PANI /NPVT .MCM ._2H. P.--1
Lew)
/wArRltl rt(i; I L -.TIF'PAqOYKfR LIKEN

-Pep -OCACR N/TN RES TRACER GREEN

OLACA' pc/r ORCNR TRACER
A--ORDN/ w/TA, MN/TE TRACER REP AMP MAROON
BROWN

Schematic Wiring Diagram Automatic Electrola 10-69 above serial No. 2600
 Af'C4,1
KYUM CONTNOL

coMyrwrov
773IN3/CR3wnCM

C1tLC
CDMPLCi1M'.
.kW7CM

iY734E0 3W/7CN

122v6
CLNKNJeP

212L733:3-Dm46C 02H7CYkACCR

IAV24
AR -7J6

0 0 00
J
aaavv wctirAu

r-i
cd-iao
WIrS-K

CDMi1PTKNr LAMP C0444.0734[327 LAMO 3i.77CR

Gble Wiring Diagram Automatic Electrola 10-69, above Serial No. S001
 Victor Model 10-70

Leso No COLOR.
})A_gf. K
PROW,'
J. Rca. [.rcrR,c
4 FLECK W rR Ron TROCER /wrvr RCK
5 Bir_. Wiro YELLOW T.vc,R R>..,r v.,,e.. o, Fee RRnro.

r n.....w mR,R. ,
a MRROON 7-7..";;;" 4.r.
r
e
aRn Ren
RR R -i e 4S sR rcrR
r WITH BRO. RTRRclR.
..131. se<

T
r
9 BRewR WITH WRITE PEER
991 eR 4I I.

VOLUME
C
`9
S RRn oPnyr,..r~
r'4

L;
;Re, re
_
ti .., 4

I Vo, cc Co,L.
I

Irr. 1 48
6 -Cove.
T 1

s CK.,e
RP- 119Y OR AP- 152-Y J

Wiring Diagram-Electrola 10-70

14914
RC ñ
4Mr 4Me
4114

1nR =M,

44
-
CRe..

Gee

-Se35---=L-4:1.0----_e^e1
P,cKUP Svy.r.ys Sv,rcR

rNx,iMr CR... r..eL.

J -

n
R.1.YRL STIMM
MP+or++.71rxM
4Ric.s>tis,r..R
e _
Rsa
' Rrrenrret+.

J LM'r, K8v/CI AVRVI Rt'R.

Wiring Diagram No. 10-70 above serial No. 2600

 HICK WITH WHIE
swot BLACK WITH BROWN TRACER

RED BLACK WITH ROD TRACER

RED

REJECT IUITON REPRODUCER

BUCK WITH BROWN TRACER

PIMP SNORTING SWITCH REJECT COIL
PU UME

BUCK WIIN YELLOW TRACER CONTROL 'MOWN

TRANSFER

IROWN SWITCH

BLOCK

SWITCHES
MIOR SNIIICI

BUCK 111111111011 TYCn

BLACK

INDUCTION MSC MOTOR

FICAUP TERMINAL STRIP

BROW
BUCK VIM EHION TR IR CROWN
REO IRO MAROON
RUCK WITH WRITE AUGER
IRONH 1 RAO BUCK WITH CROWN TRACER

MUCK WITH RED TRACER

RADIO INPUT
BUCK WITH BROWN IRACEB
JACK
PILOT LAMP !LEON
UTILISE CORD

-Wiring Diagram for Automatic Electrola No. 10-70

Showing connections between terminals of the various units.
 Victor Model 1.2-1 (Cromwell)

CROMWELL ELECTROLA
(c) If there is sound at this point, repeat the
on the two output connections operation
The Cromwell is an electrical instrument, from the motor of the volume control.
If there isn't sound at this point, check the control
which runs the turntable to the electrical pick-up method of the volume control to insure proper arm
sound reproduction which through the rectifier power ampli- of contact. If this
is O. K. and still there is an open circuit, replace
fier unit and the cone type loud speaker produces sound per- volume control. the
fect in every detail. The volume of sound supply to the ampli- (d) If sound comes through the above points,
fier unit is varied by means of the volume control without same check on the input terminals of the tomcatuse the
sacrifice in quality. power unit). If open here, look for broken cable between (metal
The Cromwell is also a power amplifier and loud speaker this point and volume control.
for use on any radio receiver. This is accomplished by connect- (e) If sound is coming
ing wires from the 1st stage audio jack of the receiver to the put connections on the through
tomcat.
to the above, check out-
input jack of the Cromwell located in the rear on the base
the machine. It is not recommended that the Cromwell be of speaker volume at this point. If noThere should be loud
sound, check phone
plugged into the second stage jack of the radio receiver as this plug in back of cabinet for proper contact of all connec-
will cause overloading of volume with a sacrifice of tone quality
tions. If there le still no sound try:
and a possibility that a howl will develop in the 1. A new 216B.
When the radio set is plugged into the instrument. 2. A new UX-191.
cally disconnects the Electrola from the Cromwell it automati-
speaker unit. 3. A new UX210.
This instrument, due to its
rigorous tests through which its rugged construction and the
mechanical parte are put will
If there le still no sound, the trouble is in the tomcat.
Same should be removed and returned to your distributor
require very little service. for replacement.
In the event of damage to the instrument
or other causes, below is the proper method offrom shipment
procedure for
(f) If sound is coming
but no response from loudthrough to output connections
servicing: leads from the tomcat and sneaker, remove loud speaker
Assuming that you have placed the tubes in their proper check
connections between this point and the for broken or loose
sockets, placed the electric pick-up (reproducer) loud speaker.
arm, turned the toggle switch to the on position, on the tone 2. Lack of volume can be traced to:
control to number five and that everything lightsthe volume
including
(A) Defective 216B.
the monitor lamp in turntable compartment, ready for (B) Defective UX199.
tion. opera- (C) Defective UX210.
(D) Defective cone loud speaker. This can be determined
1. Tap the needle lightly with your finger, first on one side by disconnecting the cone loud speaker
and then on the other. Each time you touch the needle there comparison with external loud speaker. and making volume
should be a loud click through the speaker. (E) Defective electric pick-up. (Out of adjustment.
(A) If the click is louder when striking the paragraph I sub. "A.") See
side than it le on the other, the electric pick-up is needle on one
out of adjust- (F) If there 4 a maximum volume on number three
ment. To determine this, remove the metal case tact of volume control with diminishing con-
pick-up and note whether the vibrating armature from which is
the
toward number five, the trouble can be traced volume when turned
operated by the needle is directly in the center between pick-up or grounded electric pick-up to a grounded
two pole pieces of the magnet. If the vibrating armaturethe is
leads.
grounded usually the case is touching some ofIfthe pick-up Le
off center remove the holding clamp from the magnet allow- live parts. An indication of this grounded condition is internal
ing further accessibility to the working parts. You will then instrument will squeal when touching the hand to the that the
see two knurled nute locked in place by ordinary nuts. By arm or any of the metal parts in the turntable compartment. tone
loosening the lock nuts you can adjust the knurled nuts until
the vibrating armature is again in the center of the pole pieces. (G) If after trying the above there is still lack of volume,
(B) If there is no click at all in the loud speaker, put
return the tomcat to the distributor for replacement.
record on the turntable, start the motor, 3. Failure of monitor lamp to light, motor to
put the electric pick- cat tubes to light. run, or tom-
up In place and let the record play.
(A) Check socket in which
(a) Take a pair of earphones, place the tips across the meter or a test lamp. If there cable Ls plugged with either a
current at this point check
two connections of the volume control to which the leads
run from the pick-up. You should the various alternating currentle supply cables for an open
hear the record play- circuit.
ing with very low volume. 4. Excessive AC hum can often be reduced
(b If there isn't sound at this point, remove the pick- by to minimum
turning the AC supply plug 1800 from the position
up wires from the volume control and check it originally was tried out. in which
circuit from this point through the pick-up. for(NOM: oppemn
The above points if followed
Occasionally the contacts in the tone arm are not spring- intelligently render service on the should enable the dealer to
Cromwell Blectrola.
ing into position properly.)

CHOKE. ELECTRIC 73c11 -(Ir

IOLVML CO T1roL,y
SCRq7rH rR.
.

C O
0 á óINPurJrcK. (1,
.o
o. 0
bp
MF.

i lo0"-
,

IH
e-
Pur.
ti See-,
CONE Ssaq,rlR.
0
b OurPor JeeK.
43»
Our Pur.
Wiring Diagram for Electrola Cromwell
Victor Model 12-2 (Tuscany)

/04Lo4D 3YEq.VEN Fiez .P.

I-

A04SYkoßA'nu

ELtorRtc
Acton*.

a.>ARrk'N ÌN.TL>
tfcaw Cn+ww..
v CRU.
Wiring Diagram for Electrola Tuscany

Power
Switch Compartment and
Pilot Lamp
n
O (l

To Electric } Vo/unse
Pickup Control

Recti!er -Po wer-Amplifier

m Ho
a
Con. L.S. CZ. + °j ftéld

Bock
(1

Blue and Black Brown

SPA Input
Plug

110 Volt Connecter

at Bottom of Cabinet
To useElectrola as ayo wer aniphher and
loud speaker for a radio receiver, plug
output of first audio stage into this jack.

Schematic Wiring Diagram of Electrola Tuscany

Showing connections between terminals of the various units.
The 110 -volt wiring is shown by extra heavy lines.
 Victor Model 12-15

Tert+r,wat Do.ea. w<,

r
-
1

e 7kM.v
-rJ
a Jwi rev
R<wsrMHc. (recae»
I IIPF{4,¡:tra

R.o. IwI.r
I/ecw.

le- UX-199.

Hsp
tow L41.
N
e
: -X1 Ce

1` Con[.
R..,.r.wc. War. .rN J

Wett. Oraur.j
01
¡'2.
ot u«< Cow reo..
}

- ---
)NPT. l.
.I
Ì
$

LEMA No Cotoe RP- 997- C.

$IMCM. lwPr
2 BeowN. re/MT/011M. R.
Pen.
4 ReD94o MMenoN
EL g cM W rN $Moww 7AMKe. Wiring Diagram Electrola 12-15
7
Bd.
pe.wN
c. 13/4 ree
W re W.rE
Ron Twec.M
7 cei

_ fP-7fG(J/U-T4)

am 441.

En

418

Cm,

V Ce-M
_---
r
16..u..e C.nre.t

-I
7> Nero,
(R.--
9N
aJ RePeODMcee
Remo
berms- decor
Q Lome
hen
imPozbeeel
.

Wiring Diagram 12-15 above serial No. 2600

 Victor Model 12-25

//016,3 a 7 Aran

OTPT
O
II

O--4--
PIC n
i
.P
DÚPqq,Y(.

ScwgrrnF ru.

rdi
Nrwer Co,. +e,.

/N4ur .-.

L_ _ - -2_] /rr
Wiring Diagram for Electrola 12-25

SLACKwnoYELLOW TR. POWER SWITCH

VOLUME MOTOR.
CONTROL. RED SWITCH
DROWN
OWN
BROWN COMPARTMENT
BLACK YÉLLOW LAMP

B
LLOW I

BLACK
BLACK wog,. YELLO
BLACK w,T,. BROWN
BROWN BROWN
111
DROWN
SCRr.TCH
CLININATOR
YELLOW
DROWN
14
I flTaj
REO

DROWN
BLACK wm. GREEN TR.

SLACK w ro BROWN TR.

'7ROWN
INDUCTION MOTOR

BLACK W.rN BROWN TR.

----L./cm TtRrn.NAL
rLOUD SPEAKER

1k BROWN BROWN
BLACK w. rN BR
IOWN YELLOW
PILOT
LAMP..
INPUT
TRANSFORM ER
OWER AMMLSFICR UNIT

0000
BLACK w.rN BROWN
J CONNECTION
PLUG
BROWH MOWN 'BLACK w.rN
BROWN T

YELLOW GROWN
III
RED YELLOW

INPUT JACK CORD

-Schematic Wiring Diagram of Electrola 12-25

Showing connections between terminals of the various units.
 Victor Model 15-1 (Hyperion)

J
i#
14...er
e...v« Manx

-l

tleea.m+ Lear
Parevr.n

Wiring Diagram for Electron Hyperion tree ar«ru..

Sour yea
gene*.

Te Electric Receiver Terminal Strip

Pickup va ro
va Z

3
5 1 6
1

Yo/ume
Control

Rectifier -Po wer -Amplifier

Terminal Strip
\ I
Loud Speaker
Unit LEAd
1
1
Black
COLOR

Slack with Yellow Tracer

3 Red
t - y O 4 Black with Brown Tracer
Input Output -A eee 5 Breen
Second 6 Yellow with Red Tracer
Stage 7 Noreen
Jack 9 Brown
-------- 9 Blue
6 10 Black with Blue Tracer

e RP4 Input
Plug
c, 1110 geh tonnetter
ti-.^ of Bottom o/Goldnot

-Schematic Wiring Diagram

Showing connections between the terminals of the various
units. The 110 -volt wiring is shown by extra heavy lines.

SERVICE DATA ON PICKUP, RADIO RECEIVER

AND AMPLIFIER SAME AS MODEL 9-2

www.americanradiohistory.com
 MODEL 10-35

COMPARTMENT
LAMP START &
REJECT JM'nrN NEEDLE
(OUTSIDE) OPERATED
Sw/TCN

O MOTOR CAPAC/Tdl9
REO MAROON
RED YELLOW
BLUE BLACK W/TN
! YELLOW TRACER

BROWN- --MAROON

!MAGI/

/Rf-/E0
VOLTS A.0 I111: .....»........... _............... ECCENTRIC
6AIOOVE
BROWN
Sw/TCN
BROWN BLUE MAROON
SLACK
d71IWN-- BLVE CREEN - GREEN +-MAROON
BL ACH term YELLOwTM1CR
MAROON

BLACK N/TN
BROWN YELLOW CREE CLOW IMKER.

STOP
START V/CTROLA Sw/TCN
COMPARTMENT MAGNETIC REJECT REJECT AUTOMATIC
LAMP JW/TCN COIL SW/7rrf'NJ/5EI CO/L JW/TGH

-Power Cable Wiring Diagram Automatic Orthophonic tiictrola No. 10-35

 MODEL E-35

NOW JTM17311.11.71.33

edo
,foWw
J
wisF
J rra3ow
N RFD *La ow- nrwCnr
RFO 6.r!!., nrACM

Cable Wiring Electrola E-35

AMPLIFIER SERVICE DATA SAME AS MODEL R-32

33I0A 8R1315VW
->r!'
M